Service Manual: D0CA/D0C9/ D0C8/D0CB

D0CA/D0C9/
D0C8/D0CB
SERVICE MANUAL
Rev. 08/26/2021
It is the reader's responsibility when discussing the information contained
within this document to maintain a level of confidentiality that is in the best
interest of Ricoh USA, Inc. and its member companies.
NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY

FASHION AND DISTRIBUTED WITHOUT THE PRIOR
PERMISSION OF RICOH USA, Inc.
All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including

desktop images, used in this document are trademarks, registered
trademarks or the property of their respective companies.
They are used throughout this book in an informational or editorial fashion
only and for the benefit of such companies. No such use, or the use of
any trade name, or web site is intended to convey endorsement or other
affiliation with Ricoh products.
 2021 RICOH USA, Inc. All rights reserved.

WARNING
The Service Manual contains information
regarding service techniques, procedures,
processes and spare parts of office equipment
distributed by Ricoh USA, Inc. Users of this
manual should be either service trained or
certified by successfully completing a Ricoh
Technical Training Program.
Untrained and uncertified users utilizing
information contained in this service manual to
repair or modify Ricoh equipment risk personal
injury, damage to property or loss of warranty
protection.
Ricoh USA, Inc.

LEGEND
PRODUCT COMPANY
CODE LANIER RICOH SAVIN
D0AC IM C300 IM C300 IM C300
D0C9 IM C300F IM C300F IM C300F
D0C8 IM C400F IM C400F IM C400F
D0CB IM C300SRF IM C300SRF IM C300SRF
DOCUMENTATION HISTORY
REV. NO. DATE COMMENTS
* 01/2020 Original Printing
D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB i SM
D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. PRODUCT INFORMATION ......................................................... 1-1

1.1 DIFFERENCES BETWEEN IM C300/C400 AND MP C307/C407 ................................ 1-1
1.2 MACHINE CODES AND PERIPHERALS CONFIGURATION ...................................... 1-3
1.2.1 MAIN MACHINE .................................................................................................. 1-3
1.2.2 MACHINE CONFIGURATION ............................................................................. 1-3
1.2.3 OPTIONS ............................................................................................................ 1-5
1.3 SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................................................................... 1-7
2. INSTALLATION ........................................................................... 2-1

2.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................ 2-1
2.1.1 ENVIRONMENT .................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL ................................................................................................ 2-1
2.1.3 MACHINE SPACE REQUIREMENTS................................................................. 2-2
2.1.4 MACHINE DIMENSIONS .................................................................................... 2-3
Main unit only .......................................................................................................... 2-3
When the operation panel is upright: 825 x 561 mm .............................................. 2-4
2.1.5 POWER REQUIREMENTS ................................................................................. 2-6
2.2 MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION: IMPORTANT NOTICE ON SECURITY ISSUES .... 2-7
2.2.1 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................................... 2-7
2.2.2 PASSWORD SETTING PROCEDURE ............................................................... 2-8
2.3 MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION: ACCESSORY CHECK .......................................... 2-10
2.3.1 FOR IM C300/C300F ........................................................................................ 2-10
2.3.2 FOR IM C400F/C400SRF ................................................................................. 2-11
2.4 MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION: INSTALLATION PROCEDURES .......................... 2-12
2.4.1 INSTALLATION FLOWCHART ......................................................................... 2-12
2.4.2 PACKAGING TAPES, RETAINERS AND TONER BOTTLES .......................... 2-13
IM C300 series/IM C400F ..................................................................................... 2-14
IM C400SRF .......................................................................................................... 2-14
2.4.3 CLEANING CLOTH HOLDER ........................................................................... 2-19
2.4.4 INSTALLING THE FINISHER EXTENSION TRAY (IM C400SRF ONLY) ........ 2-20
2.4.5 BRAND PLATE, DECALS ................................................................................. 2-20
Store unused decals in the designated location as follows (Step 1 and 2, apply to
ONLY IMC300 series): .......................................................................................... 2-21
2.4.6 TELEPHONE CORD (FAX STANDARD MODEL) ............................................ 2-22
Notes for Connecting the Telephone Line ............................................................. 2-22
D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB i SM
Connecting the Telephone Cord (Fax Standard Model) ....................................... 2-22
2.4.7 LOADING PAPER, IMAGE QUALITY TEST ..................................................... 2-22
Loading Paper ....................................................................................................... 2-22
Paper Registration................................................................................................. 2-23
Automatic Color Calibration (ACC) ....................................................................... 2-23
Color Registration (Color Skew Adjustment)......................................................... 2-24
Remove the paper exit tray [A].............................................................................. 2-25
Open the front cover. ............................................................................................. 2-26
Checking the Copy Image with Test Chart ............................................................ 2-28
2.4.8 AUTO REMOTE FIRMWARE UPDATE (ARFU) SETTINGS ........................... 2-28
ARFU enable setting ............................................................................................. 2-28
Set SP5-886-111 (Auto Update Setting) to "1 (ON)". ............................................ 2-28
Enter the SP mode. ............................................................................................... 2-29
Ask the customer for the prohibited times and days of the week for ARFU execution
and set the following as needed. The default prohibited time is from 9 a.m. to 5 p.m.
and there is no prohibited day. .............................................................................. 2-29
If error code 71: [Network connection error] appears when you click [Firmware
update] > [Update] > [Execute update] in SP mode, check the following............. 2-30
Specifying the Time and Day of the Week to Prohibit Updating via Web Image
Monitor................................................................................................................... 2-32
2.4.9 SETTINGS RELEVANT TO THE SERVICE CONTRACT ................................ 2-33
2.4.10 SETTINGS FOR @REMOTE SERVICE ........................................................... 2-34
2.5 MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION: WHEN MOVING THE MACHINE ......................... 2-38
2.6 NETWORK SETTINGS................................................................................................ 2-40
2.6.1 SPECIFYING NETWORK SETTINGS ACCORDING TO CUSTOMER'S
ENVIRONMENT........................................................................................................... 2-40
Check the customer’s network environment and specify network settings according
to the functions to be used (such as a scanner, printer, and Document Server
setting). .................................................................................................................. 2-40
Check whether a network connection between the machine and the client computer
has been established. ........................................................................................... 2-40
2.6.2 SETTINGS ON DISPLAYING AN ALERT WHEN THE ETHERNET CABLE IS
BROKEN OR DISCONNECTED ................................................................................. 2-41
2.7 SECURITY SETTINGS ................................................................................................ 2-42
2.7.1 SECURITY FUNCTION INSTALLATION .......................................................... 2-42
2.7.2 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY ....................................................................... 2-43
Before You Begin the Procedure ........................................................................... 2-43
Using "Auto Erase Memory".................................................................................. 2-43
2.7.3 HDD ENCRYPTION .......................................................................................... 2-46
SM ii D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB
Before You Begin the Procedure ........................................................................... 2-46
Enable Encryption Setting ..................................................................................... 2-46
Backing Up the Encryption Key............................................................................. 2-48
Encryption Key Restoration................................................................................... 2-49
2.8 "WEB HELP SUPPORT" SETTINGS .......................................................................... 2-51
2.8.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................... 2-51
2.8.2 HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE WEB HELP SUPPORT ...................................... 2-52
2.9 "REMOTECONNECT SUPPORT" SETTINGS............................................................ 2-54
2.9.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................... 2-54
2.9.2 HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE REMOTECONNECT SUPPORT ....................... 2-54
2.9.3 UNINSTALLING REMOTECONNECT SUPPORT ........................................... 2-57
2.10 "REMOTE PANEL OPERATION" SETTINGS....................................................... 2-58
2.10.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................... 2-58
2.10.2 HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE REMOTE PANEL OPERATION/MONITORING 2-59
2.11PAPER FEED UNIT PB1170(D3GQ-17) ..................................................................... 2-60
2.11.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ...................................................................................... 2-60
2.11.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ......................................................................... 2-61
2.12 CASTER TABLE TYPE M41 (D3GW03) ............................................................... 2-63
2.12.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ...................................................................................... 2-63
2.12.2 INSTALLATION CONDITIONS.......................................................................... 2-63
Remove the handle [A] attached to the back of the caster table. ......................... 2-64
2.13 1-BIN TRAY BN1040 (D574-59)............................................................................ 2-74
2.13.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ...................................................................................... 2-74
Remove the left upper cover [A] ........................................................................... 2-75
Remove the Packaging tapes on the 1-bin tray unit. ............................................ 2-79
2.14 PAGE KEEPER TYPE M28 (D3DQ-17) ................................................................ 2-86
2.14.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ...................................................................................... 2-86
Open the ADF top cover [A]. ................................................................................. 2-87
Open the ADF top cover [A]. ................................................................................. 2-88
Slide the shaft [A] of the original feed unit toward the rear to remove it. .............. 2-89
Disconnect the harness [A] of the ADF top cover [B] from ADF relay board
(PCB13) (CN5), and release the clamp. ............................................................... 2-91
Connect the harness to the connector of the double-feed sensor (MFTB) [A] and
ADF relay board (PCB13) [B] (CN3), and then route it. ........................................ 2-94
D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB iii SM
Connect the power cord and turn ON the main power. ........................................ 2-95
2.15 OPTIONAL COUNTER INTERFACE UNIT TYPE M12 (B870-21) ....................... 2-96
2.15.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ...................................................................................... 2-96
2.16 NFC CARD READER TYPE M13 (D3AC-21) ..................................................... 2-100
2.16.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ....................................................................................2-100
2.16.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE ....................................................................... 2-101
2.17 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER ....................................................................... 2-105
2.17.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ....................................................................................2-105
2.18 DEHUMIDIFICATION HEATER (MAIN UNIT) .................................................... 2-112
2.18.1 ACCESSORY CHECK FOR IM C300 SERIES .............................................. 2-112
2.18.2 ACCESSORY CHECK FOR IM C400 SERIES .............................................. 2-113
2.18.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR IM C300 SERIES ................................. 2-113
2.18.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR IM C400 SERIES ................................. 2-120
2.19 DEHUMIDIFICATION HEATER (PFU) ................................................................ 2-123
2.19.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ....................................................................................2-123
For Installing the Tray Heater on the 1st Paper Feed Unit ................................. 2-124
For Installing the Tray Heater on the 2nd Optional Paper Feed Unit ................. 2-130
For Joining the Mainframe with the Optional Paper Feed Unit ........................... 2-131
Joining Two Optional Paper Feed Units.............................................................. 2-134
2.20 CONTROLLER OPTIONS ..................................................................................2-137
2.20.1 OVERVIEW .....................................................................................................2-137
2.20.2 IEEE 1284 INTERFACE BOARD TYPE M19 (D3C0-17) ............................... 2-138
Component Check...............................................................................................2-138
Installation Procedure..........................................................................................2-138
2.20.3 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER TYPE M19 (D3BR-04) .................................... 2-139
Component Check...............................................................................................2-139
2.20.4 IEEE 802.11A/G/N INTERFACE UNIT TYPE M19 (D3BR-01) ....................... 2-141
Component Check...............................................................................................2-141
User Tool Settings for Wireless LAN ................................................................... 2-144
SP Mode and UP Mode Settings for IEEE 802.11a/g/n ...................................... 2-145
2.20.5 DEVICE SERVER OPTION TYPE M37 (D3GF-10, -11) ................................ 2-145
Component Check...............................................................................................2-145
What Do the LED Indications Mean? .................................................................. 2-148
SM iv D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB
IP Address Setting ...............................................................................................2-149
2.20.6 ENHANCED SECURITY HDD OPTION TYPE M10 (D792-09) ..................... 2-150
Accessory Check.................................................................................................2-150
After Installing the HDD .......................................................................................2-153
2.21 SD CARD OPTIONS ...........................................................................................2-155
2.21.1 SD CARD APPLI MOVE..................................................................................2-155
Overview..............................................................................................................2-155
Move Exec ...........................................................................................................2-157
Undo Exec ...........................................................................................................2-158
2.21.2 OCR UNIT TYPE M13 (D3AC-23, -24, -25) .................................................... 2-159
Component Check...............................................................................................2-159
Searchable PDF Function Outline ...................................................................... 2-159
Recovery Procedure............................................................................................2-161
When only the HDD is replaced, reinstall using the original SD card................. 2-161
Order and reinstall a new SD card (service part)................................................ 2-162
2.21.3 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT TYPE M19 (D3BS-03) ....................... 2-162
Overview..............................................................................................................2-162
Component Check...............................................................................................2-162
Before You Begin the Procedure ......................................................................... 2-162
Seal Check and Removal ....................................................................................2-163
Configuring "Auto Erase Memory" (Performed by the Customer) ...................... 2-165
2.21.4 CAMERA DIRECT PRINT CARD TYPE M37 (D3GF-30) ............................... 2-165
Component Check...............................................................................................2-165
2.21.5 POSTSCRIPT3 UNIT TYPE M41 (D0CJ-26, -27, -28) ................................... 2-166
Overview..............................................................................................................2-166
Component Check...............................................................................................2-167
Installation Procedure (Adobe PS)...................................................................... 2-167
Initial Settings for the Printer Driver .................................................................... 2-168
Switching back to Clone PS from Adobe PS ...................................................... 2-169
2.21.6 XPS DIRECT PRINT OPTION TYPE M41 (D0CJ-02, -20)............................. 2-170
Component Check...............................................................................................2-170
2.21.7 VM CARD TYPE M37......................................................................................2-171
Component Check...............................................................................................2-171
D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB v SM
2.22 CHECK ALL CONNECTIONS ............................................................................. 2-173
2.23 INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE CUSTOMERS ........................................................ 2-174
3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ................................................... 3-1

3.1 MAINTENANCE TABLES .............................................................................................. 3-1
3.2 PM/YIELD PARTS SETTINGS ...................................................................................... 3-2
3.2.1 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE OF THE PM/YIELD PARTS ............................ 3-2
Method 1: By SP3-701 (New Unit Detection) ......................................................... 3-2
Method 2: By [PM Counter / New Unit Set] Menu .................................................. 3-4
3.2.2 AFTER INSTALLING THE NEW PM PARTS ...................................................... 3-6
3.2.3 PREPARATION BEFORE OPERATION CHECK ............................................... 3-8
3.2.4 OPERATION CHECK .......................................................................................... 3-8
4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................ 4-1

4.1 NOTES ON THE MAIN POWER SWITCH (SW1)......................................................... 4-1
4.1.1 PUSH SWITCH ................................................................................................... 4-1
Characteristics of the Push Switch (Main Power Switch (SW1)) ............................ 4-1
The push switch in this machine uses DC (direct current). Therefore, if the AC
power cord is connected to an electrical outlet, power is supplied to the controller
board (PCB24), the operation unit and other modules even when the main power is
turned OFF. When replacing the controller board (PCB24) and the operation unit in
this state, not only these boards, but other electrical components will be damaged.4-1
When you disconnect the power cord from the AC wall outlet, there is still residual
charge inside the machine for a while. Therefore, if you remove boards in this state,
it can cause a blown fuse or memory failure. ......................................................... 4-1
In order to remove the residual charge, push the main power switch (SW1) after you
disconnect the AC power cord. At that time, the power ON flag inside the machine is
set. Therefore, after you finish work on the machine and reconnect the power cord
to the AC, even if you do not press the main power switch (SW1), the machine will
start automatically and the moving parts will begin to move. When working on
moving parts, be careful that fingers or clothes do not get caught. ........................ 4-1
Shutdown Method ................................................................................................... 4-2
Forced Shutdown .................................................................................................... 4-2
4.2 BEFOREHAND .............................................................................................................. 4-4
4.3 SPECIAL TOOLS ........................................................................................................... 4-5
4.3.1 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS ................................................................ 4-5
4.3.2 WHERE TO APPLY NOISE-REDUCTION GREASE .......................................... 4-6
Drive: Fusing Drive Unit .......................................................................................... 4-6
Drive Unit Fusing Drive Gear .................................................................................. 4-6
Drive: Transport Drive Unit: IM C300 series ........................................................... 4-7
SM vi D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB
Transport Drive Bracket .......................................................................................... 4-7
Drive: Transport Drive Unit: IM C400 series ......................................................... 4-13
Transport Drive Bracket ........................................................................................ 4-13
Scanner: Scanner Motor: Gear ............................................................................. 4-19
Timing Belt Gear [A] .............................................................................................. 4-19
Tonner: Toner Supply Motor: Gear ........................................................................ 4-21
Idler Gear [A] ......................................................................................................... 4-21
Paper Exit: Paper Exit Drive Unit .......................................................................... 4-22
Studs ..................................................................................................................... 4-22
1Bin: Drive Unit: Gear ........................................................................................... 4-29
1Bin Drive Unit Bracket [A].................................................................................... 4-29
4.4 EXTERIOR COVERS .................................................................................................. 4-31
4.4.1 FRONT COVER ................................................................................................ 4-31
IM C300 series/IM C400F ..................................................................................... 4-31
IM C400SRF .......................................................................................................... 4-32
4.4.2 UPPER LEFT COVER ...................................................................................... 4-33
4.4.3 LEFT COVER .................................................................................................... 4-34
4.4.4 REAR COVER ................................................................................................... 4-35
4.4.5 RIGHT REAR COVER ...................................................................................... 4-35
4.4.6 PAPER EXIT TRAY ........................................................................................... 4-37
Paper Exit Tray for IM C300 series/IM C400F ...................................................... 4-37
Paper Exit Front Cover/Paper Exit Upper Cover/Paper Exit Tray for IM C400SRF4-37
4.4.7 SCANNER INNER COVER ............................................................................... 4-38
IM C300 series/IM C400F ..................................................................................... 4-38
IM C400SRF .......................................................................................................... 4-40
4.4.8 OZONE FILTER................................................................................................. 4-43
4.4.9 REAR BOTTOM COVER .................................................................................. 4-44
4.4.10 RIGHT BOTTOM COVER ................................................................................. 4-44
4.5 OPERATION PANEL.................................................................................................... 4-45
4.5.1 OPERATION PANEL ......................................................................................... 4-45
Check before Installing the New Operation Panel ................................................ 4-47
4.5.2 INTERNAL PARTS ............................................................................................ 4-49
4.6 ADF ..............................................................................................................................4-50
4.6.1 ADF UNIT .......................................................................................................... 4-50
When Installing the ADF ........................................................................................ 4-52
Adjustment after ADF Unit Replacement .............................................................. 4-53
4.6.2 ADF REAR COVER .......................................................................................... 4-53
4.6.3 ADF FRONT COVER ........................................................................................ 4-55
4.6.4 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT ..................................................................................... 4-56
D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB vii SM
4.6.5 PICKUP ROLLER, FEED ROLLER .................................................................. 4-56
Before replacing the pickup roller and feed roller, reset the PM counter.............. 4-56
Remove the original feed unit. (Original Feed Unit).............................................. 4-56
4.6.6 ADF FRICTION PAD ......................................................................................... 4-58
Before replacing the friction pad, reset the PM counter........................................ 4-58
4.6.7 ADF RELAY BOARD (PCB13) .......................................................................... 4-59
4.6.8 ADF TOP COVER SET SENSOR (S23), ORIGINAL SET SENSOR (S22) ..... 4-59
4.6.9 ADF MOTOR (M8)............................................................................................. 4-60
4.6.10 ORIGINAL FEED CLUTCH (CL4) ..................................................................... 4-60
4.6.11 ADF REGISTRATION SENSOR (S24) ............................................................. 4-61
4.6.12 ORIGINAL FEED SENSOR (S25)..................................................................... 4-62
4.6.13 CIS UNIT (S21) ................................................................................................. 4-64
Adjustment after CIS Unit Replacement ............................................................... 4-67
4.7 SCANNER .................................................................................................................... 4-70
4.7.1 SCANNER UNIT................................................................................................ 4-70
4.7.2 SCANNER UNIT WITH THE ADF ..................................................................... 4-72
4.7.3 SCANNER FRONT COVER.............................................................................. 4-77
4.7.4 ADF POSITION SENSOR (S19) ....................................................................... 4-78
4.7.5 SCANNER HP SENSOR (S20) ......................................................................... 4-79
4.7.6 SCANNER MOTOR (M7) .................................................................................. 4-80
4.7.7 SCANNER CARRIAGE ..................................................................................... 4-81
Reinstalling the Scanner Carriage ........................................................................ 4-83
4.8 INTERNAL FINISHER (IM C400SRF ONLY) .............................................................. 4-85
4.8.1 REMOVING THE INTERNAL FINISHER .......................................................... 4-85
4.8.2 STAPLER UNIT ................................................................................................. 4-87
4.8.3 GATHERING ROLLER MOTOR (M18) ............................................................. 4-88
4.8.4 PAPER EXIT MOTOR (M17) ............................................................................. 4-88
4.8.5 SHIFT ROLLER MOTOR (M19) ........................................................................ 4-89
4.8.6 TRANSPORT MOTOR (M16)............................................................................ 4-89
4.8.7 TRAY LIFT MOTOR (M22) ................................................................................ 4-90
4.8.8 JOGGER MOTOR (M20) .................................................................................. 4-92
4.8.9 EXIT GUIDE PLATE MOTOR (M21) ................................................................. 4-94
4.8.10 SHIFT ROLLER HP SENSOR (S37) ................................................................ 4-95
4.8.11 GATHERING ROLLER HP SENSOR (S38)...................................................... 4-95
4.8.12 JOGGER FENCE HP SENSOR (S41) .............................................................. 4-96
4.8.13 ENTRANCE SENSOR (S45)............................................................................. 4-97
4.8.14 PAPER EXIT SENSOR (S43) ........................................................................... 4-99
SM viii D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB
4.8.15 REMAINING PAPER SENSOR (S40) ............................................................. 4-100
4.8.16 STAPLE TRAY PAPER SENSOR (S42) ......................................................... 4-101
4.8.17 TRAY LOWER LIMIT SENSOR (S39)............................................................. 4-102
4.8.18 INTERLOCK SWITCH (SW3) ......................................................................... 4-103
4.8.19 STOPPER SOLENOID (SOL3) ....................................................................... 4-105
4.8.20 MAIN BOARD (PCB25) ...................................................................................4-106
When Reinstalling the Main Board ...................................................................... 4-107
4.9 LASER OPTICS .........................................................................................................4-108
4.9.1 WARNING DECAL LOCATION ....................................................................... 4-108
4.9.2 LASER UNITS .................................................................................................4-108
Adjustment after Laser Unit Replacement .......................................................... 4-110
Plug in and turn ON the main power switch (SW1) of the machine. .................. 4-110
Do the skew adjustment manually....................................................................... 4-110
4.9.3 LD UNIT COOLING FAN (FAN2) .................................................................... 4-110
IM C300 series/IM C400F ................................................................................... 4-110
IM C400SRF ........................................................................................................ 4-111
4.10 PCDU, TONER SUPPLY ..................................................................................... 4-113
4.10.1 PCDU (PHOTO CONDUCTOR AND DEVELOPMENT UNIT) ....................... 4-113
4.10.2 TONER BOTTLE SENSOR BOARD (PCB7).................................................. 4-115
4.10.3 TONER SUPPLY MOTORS (M1-M4) ............................................................. 4-115
4.10.4 TONER TRANSPORT SECTION .................................................................... 4-117
Before replacing the toner transport section (the toner sub-hopper), reset the PM
counter and execute the forced toner supply. ..................................................... 4-117
Remove the following parts. ................................................................................ 4-117
4.11WASTE TONER .........................................................................................................4-120
4.11.1 WASTE TONER BOTTLE ............................................................................... 4-120
When you replace the waste toner bottle AFTER a waste toner full or near-full
message appears on the operation panel, the PM counters are automatically
cleared after turning the main power ON. ........................................................... 4-120
Pull out the paper tray.(This procedure is for IM C300 series/IM C400F) .......... 4-120
4.11.2 WASTE TONER FULL SENSOR (S36) .......................................................... 4-121
4.11.3 WASTE TONER BOTTLE SET SENSOR (S26) ............................................. 4-122
4.12 IMAGE/PAPER TRANSFER ............................................................................... 4-123
4.12.1 ITB (IMAGE TRANSFER BELT) UNIT ............................................................ 4-123
Before replacing the ITB unit, reset the PM counter. .......................................... 4-123
After Replacing the Image Transfer Belt Unit ..................................................... 4-125
4.12.2 ITB LIFT MOTOR (M14) ..................................................................................4-126
4.12.3 ITB LIFT HP SENSOR (S33) .......................................................................... 4-127
D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB ix SM
4.12.4 ID SENSOR (M27-M29) ..................................................................................4-129
Before Installing a New ID Sensor Board ........................................................... 4-130
4.12.5 ID SENSOR SHUTTER SOLENOID (SOL2) .................................................. 4-131
4.12.6 PAPER TRANSFER ROLLER UNIT ............................................................... 4-132
Before replacing the paper transfer roller unit, reset the PM counter. ................ 4-132
Open the right door..............................................................................................4-132
4.13 DRIVE ..................................................................................................................4-133
4.13.1 OVERVIEW .....................................................................................................4-133
4.13.2 DEVELOPMENT MOTOR (CMY) (M9) ........................................................... 4-136
4.13.3 DRUM MOTOR (CMY) (M10) ......................................................................... 4-137
4.13.4 DRUM MOTOR (M11) .....................................................................................4-138
4.13.5 DEVELOPMENT CLUTCH (K) (CL5).............................................................. 4-139
4.13.6 DRIVE UNIT ....................................................................................................4-140
4.13.7 TRAY LIFT MOTOR (M15) .............................................................................. 4-142
4.13.8 FUSING MOTOR (M13) ..................................................................................4-144
4.13.9 PAPER TRANSPORT MOTOR (M12) ............................................................ 4-145
4.13.10 DUPLEX CLUTCH (CL6), BYPASS FEED CLUTCH (CL7), REGISTRATION
CLUTCH (CL8), PAPER FEED CLUTCH (CL9), VERTICAL TRANSPORT CLUTCH
(CL10) 4-148
4.14 FUSING ...............................................................................................................4-152
4.14.1 FUSING UNIT..................................................................................................4-152
4.14.2 FUSING UPPER COVER................................................................................ 4-153
4.14.3 FUSING LOWER COVER ............................................................................... 4-153
4.14.4 FUSING ENTRANCE GUIDE PLATE ............................................................. 4-153
4.14.5 FUSING THERMOSTAT (TH6) ....................................................................... 4-154
4.14.6 FUSING THERMISTOR (NON-CONTACT SENSOR) (S10) .......................... 4-154
4.14.7 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMISTORS (TH2-TH4) ....................................... 4-155
4.14.8 PRESSURE ROLLER .....................................................................................4-157
Before replacing the pressure roller, reset the PM counter. ............................... 4-157
Remove the fusing sleeve belt assembly. (Fusing Sleeve Belt Assembly) ........ 4-157
4.14.9 FUSING SLEEVE BELT ASSEMBLY .............................................................. 4-157
Before replacing the fusing sleeve belt assembly, reset the PM counter. .......... 4-157
4.14.10 FUSING ENTRANCE SENSOR (S3) ....................................................... 4-162
4.14.11 FUSING EXIT SENSOR (S8) ................................................................... 4-163
SM x D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB
4.14.12 FUSING THERMOPILE (TH1).................................................................. 4-164
4.14.13 NEW FUSING UNIT DETECTION FUSE (S9) ......................................... 4-165
4.14.14 ACTIONS WHEN SC554-00 OCCURS .................................................... 4-165
4.15 PAPER FEED ......................................................................................................4-167
4.15.1 IM C300 SERIES .............................................................................................4-167
Paper Feed Roller, Friction Pad .......................................................................... 4-167
Before replacing the paper feed roller and friction pad, reset the PM counter. .. 4-167
Pull out the paper tray. ........................................................................................4-167
Registration Sensor (S32), Paper Feed Sensor (S31) ....................................... 4-168
Tray Paper End Sensor (main unit) (S30)........................................................... 4-170
Tray Lift Sensor (S35) .........................................................................................4-170
Draw-in Unit .........................................................................................................4-171
4.15.2 IM C400 SERIES .............................................................................................4-172
Pick-up roller/Paper feed roller/Friction roller...................................................... 4-172
Before replacing the Pick-up roller,Paper feed roller and Friction roller, reset the PM
counter. ................................................................................................................4-172
Pull out the paper feed tray. ................................................................................4-172
Paper Feed Unit ..................................................................................................4-173
Paper Feed Sensor (S31) ...................................................................................4-174
Tray Paper End Sensor (main unit) (S30)........................................................... 4-175
Tray Lift Sensor (S35) .........................................................................................4-175
Registration Sensor (S32) ...................................................................................4-176
Tray Set Sensor (S34).........................................................................................4-177
Draw-in Unit .........................................................................................................4-178
4.16 BYPASS ..............................................................................................................4-179
4.16.1 BYPASS TRAY ................................................................................................4-179
4.16.2 BYPASS FEED UNIT ......................................................................................4-180
4.16.3 PAPER END SENSOR (BYPASS) (S6) .......................................................... 4-181
4.16.4 BYPASS PAPER WIDTH SENSOR (S5) ........................................................ 4-182
4.16.5 BYPASS FEED ROLLER ................................................................................ 4-183
Before replacing the bypass feed roller, reset the PM counter. .......................... 4-183
Remove the duplex unit.(Duplex Unit) ................................................................ 4-183
4.16.6 BYPASS TRAY LIFT SENSOR (S4) ............................................................... 4-186
4.16.7 BYPASS TRAY LIFT CLUTCH (CL1) .............................................................. 4-187
4.17 PAPER EXIT........................................................................................................4-188
4.17.1 IM C300 SERIES/IM C400F ............................................................................ 4-188
Paper Exit Unit ....................................................................................................4-188
Paper Exit Sensor (S7)........................................................................................4-189
Junction Gate Solenoid (SOL1) .......................................................................... 4-190
D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB xi SM
Paper Exit Clutch (CL3), Reverse Clutch (CL2) ................................................. 4-191
4.17.2 IM C400SRF ....................................................................................................4-193
Paper Exit Unit ....................................................................................................4-193
Paper Exit Sensor (S7)........................................................................................4-194
Junction Gate Solenoid (SOL1) .......................................................................... 4-195
Paper Exit Clutch (CL3), Reverse Clutch (CL2) ................................................. 4-196
4.18 DUPLEX ..............................................................................................................4-198
4.18.1 DUPLEX UNIT .................................................................................................4-198
4.18.2 DUPLEX ENTRANCE SENSOR (S1) ............................................................. 4-203
4.18.3 DUPLEX EXIT SENSOR (S2) ......................................................................... 4-205
4.18.4 RIGHT COVER SENSOR (SW2) .................................................................... 4-207
4.19 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ........................................................................... 4-209
4.19.1 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS OVERVIEW ................................................... 4-209
4.19.2 HDD .................................................................................................................4-210
Adjustment after Replacement ............................................................................ 4-211
4.19.3 CONTROLLER BOARD (PCB24) ................................................................... 4-211
NVRAM on the controller board .......................................................................... 4-213
4.19.4 BICU (PCB1) ...................................................................................................4-217
Replacing the SMB on the BiCU ......................................................................... 4-220
4.19.5 CONTROLLER BOX .......................................................................................4-222
4.19.6 PSU (AC) (PCB17), PSU (DC) (PCB16) ......................................................... 4-228
Follow common procedures above. .................................................................... 4-230
4.19.7 AC DETECTION BOARD (PCB18) ................................................................. 4-232
4.19.8 HIGH-VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY (DEVELOPMENT) (PCB22) .................. 4-233
4.19.9 HIGH-VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY (TRANSFER) (PCB23) .......................... 4-235
High-Voltage Power Supply (Transfer) (PCB23) Alone ...................................... 4-235
4.19.10 PSU EXHAUST FAN (FAN4) .................................................................... 4-236
4.19.11 PCDU COOLING FAN (FAN3).................................................................. 4-238
4.19.12 FUSING UNIT COOLING FAN (FAN1)..................................................... 4-239
4.19.13 TEMPERATURE/HUMIDITY SENSOR (S18)/MAIN POWER SWITCH (SW1)4-239
4.19.14 IMAGING TEMPERATURE SENSOR (TH5)............................................ 4-240
4.19.15 INTERLOCK SWITCHES ......................................................................... 4-241
4.19.16 PAPER EXIT EXHAUST FAN (FAN5) ...................................................... 4-243
4.20 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT ........................................................................................4-246
4.20.1 HOW TO USE THE COLOR CHARTS ........................................................... 4-246
4.20.2 SCANNING......................................................................................................4-251
SM xii D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB
Scanner Sub-Scan Magnification ........................................................................ 4-252
Scanner Leading Edge and Side-to-Side Registration ....................................... 4-252
4.20.3 ADF ADJUSTMENT ........................................................................................4-253
ADF Side-to-Side and Leading Edge Registration ............................................. 4-253
ADF Trailing Edge Erase Width .......................................................................... 4-253
ADF Sub-scan Magnification............................................................................... 4-254
4.20.4 REGISTRATION ..............................................................................................4-254
Adjustment Standard ...........................................................................................4-254
Leading edge (sub-scan direction):..................................................................... 4-254
Registration Standard..........................................................................................4-255
Adjusts the side-to-side registration for each paper feed station. Use SP mode
(SP1-002) to adjust the side-to-side registration for the optional paper feed unit and
duplex unit. ..........................................................................................................4-255
Adjusts the leading edge registration for each paper type and process line speed.
Use SP mode (SP1-001) to adjust the leading edge registration. ...................... 4-255
Adjustment Procedure .........................................................................................4-256
4.20.5 ERASE MARGIN ADJUSTMENT.................................................................... 4-256
4.20.6 COLOR REGISTRATION ................................................................................ 4-257
Line Position Adjustment .....................................................................................4-257
4.20.7 PRINTER GAMMA CORRECTION ................................................................. 4-258
Copy Mode ..........................................................................................................4-258
Printer Mode ........................................................................................................4-261
4.20.8 COLOR SKEW ADJUSTMENT ....................................................................... 4-262
Remove the paper exit tray [A]............................................................................ 4-263
Open the front cover. ...........................................................................................4-265
5. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE ........................................................... 5-1

5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE ........................................................................................ 5-1
5.1.1 SP TABLES ......................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 OVERVIEW OF FIRMWARE UPDATE.......................................................................... 5-2
5.2.1 DIFFERENCE FROM PREVIOUS MACHINE .................................................... 5-2
5.2.2 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................................... 5-2
5.2.3 FIRMWARE TYPES ............................................................................................ 5-3
5.3 FIRMWARE UPDATE (REMOVABLE MEDIA) .............................................................. 5-5
5.3.1 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................................... 5-5
5.3.2 MEDIA SLOT TO USE WHEN UPDATING ......................................................... 5-5
Using the SD card ................................................................................................... 5-5
To use the SD card slot [A], remove the SD card slot cover [C] in the figure below.5-5
Using the USB Flash Drive ..................................................................................... 5-6
5.3.3 UPDATE PROCEDURE ...................................................................................... 5-6
D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB xiii SM
Preparation .............................................................................................................. 5-6
Note for Update ....................................................................................................... 5-6
Using the Slot on the Back of the Machine ............................................................. 5-7
Using the Slot on the Operation Panel (Immediate Update) .................................. 5-8
Using the Slot on the Operation Panel (Reserve)................................................. 5-10
5.4 FIRMWARE UPDATE (SMART FIRMWARE UPDATE) .............................................. 5-13
5.4.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................... 5-13
5.4.2 IMMEDIATE UPDATE ....................................................................................... 5-13
5.4.3 UPDATE AT THE NEXT VISIT (RESERVE) ..................................................... 5-16
How to Set the Machine to Download Firmware Later (Reserve) ........................ 5-16
In the two diagrams below, the firmware is set to be downloaded by the day before
the next scheduled visit. In the first diagram, the download is successful on the first
try. In the second diagram, the download fails three times and is successful on the
fourth try. ................................................................................................................ 5-18
How to Check if the Firmware Downloaded with Reserve.................................... 5-19
How to Install Firmware Downloaded with Reserve ............................................. 5-20
5.5 FIRMWARE UPDATE (REMOTE FIRMWARE UPDATE) ........................................... 5-23
5.5.1 RFU PERFORMABLE CONDITION ................................................................. 5-23
5.6 FIRMWARE UPDATE (AUTO REMOTE FIRMWARE UPDATE) ................................ 5-24
5.6.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................... 5-24
5.6.2 DOWNLOADING AND UPDATING PROCESS ................................................ 5-25
Downloads the Latest Package............................................................................. 5-25
ARFU Update Determination ................................................................................ 5-25
Update Process ..................................................................................................... 5-28
5.6.3 RELATED SP .................................................................................................... 5-30
5.7 FIRMWARE UPDATE (ERROR SCREENS DURING UPDATING) ............................ 5-34
5.8 UPDATING JAVAVM .................................................................................................... 5-40
5.8.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................... 5-40
SD memory card reader/writer .............................................................................. 5-40
Deactivate the SDK applications........................................................................... 5-40
5.8.2 DEACTIVATING SDK APPLICATIONS AND REMOVING THE VM CARD ..... 5-40
Operation from Operation Panel ........................................................................... 5-40
Operation from Web Image Monitor ...................................................................... 5-41
5.8.3 UPDATING JAVAVM AND INSERTING THE VM CARD .................................. 5-42
5.8.4 ACTIVATING SDK APPLICATIONS .................................................................. 5-43
5.9 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD ........................................................................ 5-44
5.9.1 UPLOADING CONTENT OF NVRAM TO AN SD CARD ................................. 5-44
5.9.2 DOWNLOADING AN SD CARD TO NVRAM.................................................... 5-45
5.10 ADDRESS BOOK UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD ........................................................... 5-46
SM xiv D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB
5.10.1 INFORMATION LIST ......................................................................................... 5-46
5.10.2 DOWNLOAD ..................................................................................................... 5-46
5.10.3 UPLOAD ............................................................................................................ 5-47
5.11SMC LIST CARD SAVE FUNCTION ........................................................................... 5-48
5.11.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................... 5-48
5.11.2 PROCEDURE.................................................................................................... 5-48
5.11.3 FILE NAMES OF THE SAVED SMC LISTS...................................................... 5-50
5.11.4 ERROR MESSAGES ........................................................................................ 5-51
5.12 CAPTURING THE DEVICE LOGS ....................................................................... 5-52
5.12.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................... 5-52
Security of the Operation Log ............................................................................... 5-53
5.12.2 RETRIEVING THE DEVICE LOGS VIA OPERATION PANEL ......................... 5-54
Procedure for Retrieving the Device Log with SD Card ....................................... 5-54
5.12.3 RETRIEVING THE DEVICE LOGS VIA WEB IMAGE MONITOR .................... 5-57
5.13 UP/SP DATA IMPORT/EXPORT ........................................................................... 5-60
5.13.1 UP DATA IMPORT/EXPORT ............................................................................. 5-60
Data that can be Imported and Exported .............................................................. 5-60
Data that cannot be Imported or Exported ............................................................ 5-60
Exporting Device Information ................................................................................ 5-61
Importing Device Information ................................................................................ 5-62
5.13.2 SP DATA IMPORT/EXPORT ............................................................................. 5-63
Data that can be imported and exported............................................................... 5-63
Exporting Device Information ................................................................................ 5-63
Importing Device Information ................................................................................ 5-64
5.13.3 POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS FOR IMPORT/EXPORT PROBLEMS ...................... 5-65
5.14 TEST PATTERN PRINTING.................................................................................. 5-67
5.15 CARD SAVE FUNCTION ...................................................................................... 5-69
5.15.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................... 5-69
5.15.2 PROCEDURE.................................................................................................... 5-69
5.15.3 ERROR MESSAGES ........................................................................................ 5-72
6. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................ 6-1

6.1 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE........................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS ........................................................................... 6-1
6.1.2 SC LOGGING ...................................................................................................... 6-2
6.1.3 SC AUTOMATIC REBOOT ................................................................................. 6-3
Status display on the current screen....................................................................... 6-3
Timing of SC reboot................................................................................................. 6-3
6.1.4 SC MANUAL REBOOT ....................................................................................... 6-5
6.2 SC1XX: SCANNING ...................................................................................................... 6-6
D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB xv SM
6.3 SC2XX: EXPOSURE ................................................................................................... 6-15
6.3.1 WHEN SC285-00 (MUSIC ERROR) IS DISPLAYED ....................................... 6-20
An abnormal value may be contained in the SP where the MUSIC corrected result is
saved. .................................................................................................................... 6-21
Execute MUSIC and check the result. .................................................................. 6-21
Execute SP2-112-001 (TM/ID Sensor Check: Execute). ...................................... 6-21
Follow the next step if executing SP2-111-004 (Forced Line Position: Adj. Mode d)
and SP2-194-007 (MUSIC Execution Result: Execution Result) fails. ................. 6-22
Check if there is no problem concerning the mechanism (interference or
deformation). ......................................................................................................... 6-22
6.4 SC3XX: IMAGE PROCESSING .................................................................................. 6-23
6.5 SC4XX: IMAGE PROCESSING .................................................................................. 6-31
6.6 SC5XX: PAPER FEED AND FUSING ......................................................................... 6-34
6.7 SC6XX: COMMUNICATION ........................................................................................ 6-51
6.8 SC7XX: PERIPHERALS .............................................................................................. 6-72
6.9 SC8XX: OVERALL SYSTEM ....................................................................................... 6-79
Turn the main power OFF and check the SD card insertion status. ................... 6-103
In the case of a file system error, reformat the SD card (using the "SD Formatter"
made by Panasonic).* .........................................................................................6-103
Turn the main power OFF and check the SD card insertion status. ................... 6-103
6.10 SC9XX: OTHERS................................................................................................ 6-114
6.11PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS ......................................................... 6-127
6.11.1 PROCESS CONTROL SELF-CHECK RESULT ............................................. 6-127
Vsg Adjustment Result ........................................................................................6-129
6.11.2 LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT RESULT ...................................................... 6-130
6.12 TROUBLESHOOTING FOR IMAGE QUALITY PROBLEMS ............................. 6-131
6.12.1 FLOWCHART FOR IDENTIFYING UNIT CAUSING IMAGE QUALITY
DEGRADATION (PROBLEM AT REGULAR INTERVALS) ....................................... 6-131
Enter the SP mode, and then select SP2-109-003. ............................................ 6-132
6.12.2 ONLY BLACK IS NOT PRINTED .................................................................... 6-133
Black cannot be printed.......................................................................................6-133
The ITB contact/release lever is not set to the proper position. ......................... 6-133
Set the ITB contact/release lever to the proper position..................................... 6-134
6.12.3 MISRECOGNITION OF AUTO COLOR SELECTION WHEN SCANNING
ORIGINALS................................................................................................................6-134
In Auto Color Selection (ACS) mode, 2 processes are carried out, namely (1)
Chromatic Color Recognition and (2) Size Recognition, to determine whether the
scanned original is full color or black-and-white. ................................................ 6-134
In “A.C.S. Sensitivity”, you can adjust the level of (2)Size Recognition for
SM xvi D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB
recognizing whether the original is full color or black-and-white. ....................... 6-135
Using SP4-939-001 (ACS:Color Range), you can adjust the level of (1) Chromatic
Color Recognition for recognizing whether the original is full color or
black-and-white. ..................................................................................................6-136
6.12.4 MISRECOGNITION OF AUTO COLOR SELECTION (COPY/SCANNER) ... 6-136
Error Condition ....................................................................................................6-136
The misrecognition occurs when copying an original which has color at the edge,
and that color is printed on the output 10 mm from the edge in the ACS mode. 6-136
The misrecognition occurs when scanning an original which has color only 15 mm
from the edge (using the original as a standard) in the ACS mode. ................... 6-137
Cause ..................................................................................................................6-137
Countermeasure..................................................................................................6-137
6.12.5 FAILURE TO REPRODUCE COLORED TEXT DURING COLOR COPYING6-139
6.12.6 LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT ..................................................................... 6-141
Test ......................................................................................................................6-141
Countermeasure List for Color Registration Errors............................................. 6-142
6.12.7 BLANK PRINT .................................................................................................6-146
6.12.8 ALL-BLACK PRINT .........................................................................................6-147
6.12.9 MISSING CMY COLOR ..................................................................................6-147
6.12.10 LIGHT PRINT ............................................................................................6-147
6.12.11 REPEATED SPOTS OR LINES ON PRINTS ........................................... 6-148
6.12.12 DARK VERTICAL LINE ON PRINTS........................................................ 6-148
6.12.13 WHITE HORIZONTAL LINES OR BANDS ............................................... 6-148
6.12.14 MISSING PARTS OF IMAGES ................................................................. 6-149
6.12.15 DIRTY BACKGROUND ............................................................................ 6-149
6.12.16 PARTIAL CMY COLOR DOTS ................................................................. 6-149
6.12.17 DARK IRREGULAR STREAKS ON PRINTS ........................................... 6-149
6.12.18 CMY COLOR IRREGULAR STREAKS .................................................... 6-149
6.12.19 GHOSTING ...............................................................................................6-149
6.12.20 UNFUSED OR PARTIALLY FUSED PRINTS .......................................... 6-150
6.12.21 IMAGE SKEW ...........................................................................................6-150
6.12.22 BACKGROUND STAIN ............................................................................. 6-151
6.12.23 NO PRINTING ON PAPER EDGE............................................................ 6-151
6.12.24 IMAGE NOT CENTERED WHEN IT SHOULD BE .................................. 6-151
6.13 TROUBLESHOOTING FOR OTHER PROBLEMS ............................................ 6-152
6.13.1 WHEN YOU CANNOT OPEN THE RIGHT DOOR ......................................... 6-152
6.13.2 WHEN FLUORESCENT OR LED LAMPS FLICKER ..................................... 6-155
6.13.3 WHEN ABNORMAL NOISE OCCURS ........................................................... 6-157
Checking Abnormal Noise from the Fusing Unit ................................................. 6-157
D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB xvii SM
6.14 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS ............................................................ 6-160
6.14.1 SENSORS .......................................................................................................6-160
6.14.2 FUSE LOCATION ............................................................................................6-165
6.15 JAM DETECTION ...............................................................................................6-167
6.15.1 PAPER JAM HISTORY ...................................................................................6-167
Plotter (print engine) jam history can be displayed using SP7-507. The jam history
of the 10 latest jams is displayed. ....................................................................... 6-167
SP7-507 shows the paper jam history. ............................................................... 6-167
6.15.2 JAM CODES AND DISPLAY CODES ............................................................. 6-167
Sensor Layout .....................................................................................................6-172
Paper Size Code .................................................................................................6-175
7. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ....................................................... 7-1

7.1 MACHINE OVERVIEW .................................................................................................. 7-1
7.1.1 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.2 PAPER PATH....................................................................................................... 7-4
7.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT .................................................................................................. 7-7
7.1.4 COMPONENT LAYOUT ...................................................................................... 7-9
Scanner Unit / Laser Unit / Others .......................................................................... 7-9
Internal Finisher..................................................................................................... 7-11
Paper Feed ............................................................................................................ 7-12
Paper Exit / Duplex / Waste Toner ........................................................................ 7-14
Fusing .................................................................................................................... 7-15
Development Unit / ITB/ Paper Transfer ............................................................... 7-17
Drive Unit ............................................................................................................... 7-19
Electrical Parts ...................................................................................................... 7-20
ADF Unit ................................................................................................................ 7-21
7.2 ADF UNIT ..................................................................................................................... 7-22
7.2.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................... 7-22
7.2.2 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT DRIVE ...................................................................... 7-24
7.2.3 ORIGINAL SET DETECTION............................................................................ 7-24
7.2.4 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT PATH ........................................................................ 7-25
7.2.5 DOUBLE-FEED DETECTION (OPTIONAL) ..................................................... 7-27
7.3 SCANNER UNIT .......................................................................................................... 7-29
7.3.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................... 7-29
7.3.2 LIGHT SOURCE AND EXPOSURE .................................................................. 7-29
7.3.3 SCANNER CARRIAGE DRIVE ......................................................................... 7-31
7.3.4 IMPROVED TOLERANCE TO BLACK LINES WHEN PAPER PASSES
THROUGH ADF ........................................................................................................... 7-32
7.3.5 SCANNING POSITION CORRECTION ............................................................ 7-33
SM xviii D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB
7.4 INTERNAL FINISHER.................................................................................................. 7-34
7.4.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................... 7-34
7.4.2 COMPONENT LAYOUT .................................................................................... 7-34
7.4.3 PAPER FEED .................................................................................................... 7-35
7.4.4 FINISHER FREE RUN ...................................................................................... 7-40
7.4.5 JOGGER FENCE FINE ADJUSTMENT ........................................................... 7-40
7.5 LASER UNIT ................................................................................................................ 7-41
7.5.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................... 7-41
7.5.2 LASER SYNCHRONIZING SYSTEM ............................................................... 7-42
7.5.3 LINE SCANNING MECHANISM ....................................................................... 7-43
7.5.4 IMAGE SKEW ADJUSTMENT .......................................................................... 7-44
7.5.5 DUST SHIELD GLASS ...................................................................................... 7-44
7.5.6 LD SAFETY SWITCH ........................................................................................ 7-44
7.6 PCDU ........................................................................................................................... 7-46
7.6.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................... 7-46
7.6.2 OPC DRUM ....................................................................................................... 7-47
Differences between K and CMY .......................................................................... 7-48
7.6.3 DEVELOPMENT UNIT ...................................................................................... 7-48
7.6.4 OPC DRUM/DEVELOPMENT DRIVE .............................................................. 7-50
7.7 TONER SUPPLY SECTION......................................................................................... 7-51
7.7.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................... 7-51
7.7.2 TONER SUPPLY AND TRANSPORT MECHANISM ........................................ 7-51
7.7.3 TONER BOTTLE SET SENSOR MECHANISM ............................................... 7-53
7.7.4 TONER NEAR END/END DETECTION............................................................ 7-53
Estimated Toner Near End (Toner Near End detection by referring to pixel count and
total counts by toner supply motor (M1-M4)): ....................................................... 7-54
Toner End is detected if one of the following conditions is met: ........................... 7-55
7.7.5 TONER SUPPLY UNIT...................................................................................... 7-56
7.7.6 ID CHIP (PCB3-PCB6) ...................................................................................... 7-57
7.8 WASTE TONER COLLECTION ................................................................................... 7-58
7.8.1 WASTE TONER TRANSPORT MECHANISM .................................................. 7-58
7.8.2 WASTE TONER COLLECTION MECHANISM ................................................. 7-59
7.8.3 WASTE TONER FULL DETECTION................................................................. 7-60
7.9 ITB/ PAPER TRANSFER ............................................................................................. 7-61
7.9.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................... 7-61
7.9.2 TRANSFER MOVEMENT AND IMAGE TRANSPORT..................................... 7-61
7.9.3 TRANSFER BIAS .............................................................................................. 7-62
7.9.4 ITB CONTACT ................................................................................................... 7-63
7.9.5 ITB CLEANING.................................................................................................. 7-64
D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB xix SM
7.9.6 IMAGE POSITION CORRECTION ................................................................... 7-64
7.10 PROCESS CONTROL AND MUSIC ..................................................................... 7-65
7.10.1 PROCESS CONTROL ...................................................................................... 7-65
Outline ................................................................................................................... 7-65
Charge/Development Bias Control and Vtref Compensation ............................... 7-67
This step agitates the developer, and gets the TD sensor output. ....................... 7-68
Toner Near-End ..................................................................................................... 7-69
ID sensor (S27-S29).............................................................................................. 7-71
TD Sensor (S14-S17) ............................................................................................ 7-71
7.10.2 MUSIC ............................................................................................................... 7-72
Color Skew Adjustment Timing ............................................................................. 7-72
MUSIC Error Determination .................................................................................. 7-73
Adjustment Overview ............................................................................................ 7-73
7.11FUSING ........................................................................................................................ 7-74
7.11.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................... 7-74
7.11.2 FUSING MECHANISM ...................................................................................... 7-75
7.11.3 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL .............................................................. 7-76
7.11.4 FUSING DRIVE ................................................................................................. 7-77
7.11.5 FUSING MODE CONTROL .............................................................................. 7-78
7.11.6 CPM DOWN CONTROL ................................................................................... 7-79
7.12 PAPER FEED AND REGISTRATION (IM C300 SERIES) .................................... 7-80
7.12.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................... 7-80
7.12.2 PAPER TRANSPORT MOTOR (M12) .............................................................. 7-81
7.12.3 TRAY LIFT MECHANISM .................................................................................. 7-82
7.12.4 TRANSPORT CONTROL .................................................................................. 7-83
7.12.5 TRAY AUTO-CLOSE MECHANISM .................................................................. 7-83
7.13 PAPER FEED AND REGISTRATION (IM C400 SERIES) .................................... 7-84
7.13.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................... 7-84
7.13.2 PAPER TRANSPORT ....................................................................................... 7-85
7.13.3 PAPER FEED MECHANISM ............................................................................. 7-86
In this machine, to maintain the paper gap constant, the paper feed sensor (S31) [A]
near the paper feed roller adjusts the paper feed timing. ..................................... 7-86
7.13.4 PAPER END DETECTION ................................................................................ 7-88
7.13.5 TRAY LIFT MECHANISM .................................................................................. 7-89
7.13.6 TRAY AUTO-CLOSE MECHANISM .................................................................. 7-90
7.14 PAPER FEED AND REGISTRATION (NEW FUNCTIONS) ................................. 7-91
7.15 BYPASS TRAY ...................................................................................................... 7-93
7.15.1 BYPASS TRAY BOTTOM PLATE LIFT MECHANISM ...................................... 7-93
7.15.2 PAPER SIZE DETECTION AND PAPER END DETECTION ........................... 7-94
SM xx D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB
7.16 DUPLEX ................................................................................................................ 7-96
7.16.1 OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................... 7-96
7.16.2 DUPLEX MECHANISM ..................................................................................... 7-99
7.16.3 INTERLEAVING ..............................................................................................7-101
7.17 PAPER EXIT AND INVERTER ............................................................................ 7-103
7.17.1 OVERVIEW .....................................................................................................7-103
7.17.2 PAPER EXIT OPERATION.............................................................................. 7-105
7.17.3 INVERTER OPERATION ................................................................................ 7-107
7.18 ELECTRICAL PARTS..........................................................................................7-109
7.18.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM...........................................................................................7-109
7.18.2 BOARD OUTLINE ........................................................................................... 7-110
7.19 MACHINE VENTILATION ................................................................................... 7-112
7.19.1 OVERVIEW ..................................................................................................... 7-112
7.19.2 MACHINE VENTILATION ............................................................................... 7-114
7.20 ENERGY SAVE ................................................................................................... 7-116
7.20.1 ENERGY SAVER MODES .............................................................................. 7-116
7.20.2 POWER STATES OF THIS MACHINE ........................................................... 7-118
7.20.3 VERIFICATION OF UP TIME FOR EACH ENERGY SAVING STATE ........... 7-121
7.20.4 CHECKING THE UP TIME BY DEVICE STATE ............................................. 7-122
7.20.5 RECOMMENDATION ......................................................................................7-123
7.21 NEW FUNCTIONS ..............................................................................................7-124
7.21.1 PS3/PDF DIRECT EMULATION (CLONE PS) ............................................... 7-124
Overview..............................................................................................................7-124
How to Distinguish Adobe PS from Clone PS ..................................................... 7-125
Difference in Device Fonts ..................................................................................7-128
Font Change Confirmation Screen ..................................................................... 7-129
List of fonts and their replacements (Adobe PS -> Clone PS) ........................... 7-130
Differences in Driver Functions ........................................................................... 7-134
7.21.2 OTHER NEW FEATURES .............................................................................. 7-135
8. SMART OPERATION PANEL ..................................................... 8-1

8.1 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT .......................................................................... 8-1
8.1.1 MAIN CONTROLLER BOARD ............................................................................ 8-1
8.1.2 WI-FI MODULE (PCB21) .................................................................................... 8-4
8.1.3 LCD...................................................................................................................... 8-5
8.1.4 SPEAKER ............................................................................................................ 8-7
8.1.5 MICROPHONE .................................................................................................... 8-8
8.1.6 NFC BOARD ....................................................................................................... 8-8
8.2 MECHANISM ............................................................................................................... 8-10
8.2.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS ................................................................................. 8-10
D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB xxi SM
Hardware Specifications ....................................................................................... 8-10
Software Specifications ......................................................................................... 8-13
On the Smart Operation Panel, applications can be installed in addition to the
pre-installed applications....................................................................................... 8-14
Communication Specifications .............................................................................. 8-14
8.2.2 PANEL COMPONENTS/SCREEN LAYOUT ..................................................... 8-17
Components of the Control Panel ......................................................................... 8-17
Panel Display......................................................................................................... 8-18
Login user information and login/logout key also appear. .................................... 8-20
8.2.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ......................................................................... 8-21
Operation Panel Unit ............................................................................................. 8-21
Touch Panel ........................................................................................................... 8-21
8.2.4 CONTROLLING THE POWER SUPPLY .......................................................... 8-23
Exiting Energy Saving Modes ............................................................................... 8-23
Screen Startup Mode ............................................................................................ 8-23
In Normal mode ..................................................................................................... 8-24
In Quick mode ....................................................................................................... 8-24
Shutdown Functions .............................................................................................. 8-25
8.3 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE ........................................................................................... 8-27
8.3.1 MAINTENANCE MODES .................................................................................. 8-27
8.3.2 LOGIN TO/LOGOUT FROM CONTROL PANEL SERVICE MODE ................. 8-27
Login ...................................................................................................................... 8-27
Login Status Indicator............................................................................................ 8-28
Logout.................................................................................................................... 8-28
When Entry to Service Mode Is Prohibited by the Administrator .......................... 8-29
8.3.3 SERVICE MODE MENU ................................................................................... 8-29
Wireless & Networks ............................................................................................. 8-30
Device .................................................................................................................... 8-31
Personal ................................................................................................................ 8-32
System ................................................................................................................... 8-32
8.3.4 PANEL SELF CHECK ....................................................................................... 8-39
LED Check ............................................................................................................ 8-40
Key Check ............................................................................................................. 8-40
LCD Check ............................................................................................................ 8-41
TouchPanel Calibration ......................................................................................... 8-41
Bluetooth Check .................................................................................................... 8-42
Speaker Check ...................................................................................................... 8-43
TouchPanel Check ................................................................................................ 8-43
Wireless LAN Check ............................................................................................. 8-44
SM xxii D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB
MultiTouch Calibration ........................................................................................... 8-45
eMMC Erasure Count............................................................................................ 8-45
MultiTouch Sensitivity Adjustment ......................................................................... 8-46
If the sensitivity level is set to "0", the MultiTouch function is turned off and you
cannot pinch in or out. ........................................................................................... 8-46
Press [Detect level confirmation]........................................................................... 8-46
8.3.5 RECOVERY MODE........................................................................................... 8-48
8.3.6 SPECIAL KEY COMBINATIONS....................................................................... 8-48
8.3.7 BACKUP/RESTORE FOR SMART OPERATION PANEL
APPLICATION/SETTINGS FUNCTION....................................................................... 8-49
Overview................................................................................................................ 8-49
System application settings*1 ................................................................................ 8-49
Backup................................................................................................................... 8-49
The default setting is “Enabled”. To change it to “Disabled”, uncheck “Enabled”.
Restarting the machine is not necessary. ............................................................. 8-50
Restore .................................................................................................................. 8-50
If restore fails, an error code appears on the operation panel. ............................. 8-50
8.3.8 SOFTWARE UPDATE ....................................................................................... 8-51
Updating the Smart Operation Panel .................................................................... 8-51
Installation/Update from a Media .......................................................................... 8-52
Creating a media card for update ......................................................................... 8-52
Installation/Update from the eDC Server .............................................................. 8-53
Log in to the control panel’s service mode............................................................ 8-53
If you try to uninstall an activated application without first deactivating it, the
uninstallation will fail. However, the application can be uninstalled without
deactivation (forced uninstallation) in the following circumstances: ..................... 8-55
Application Site ...................................................................................................... 8-55
8.4 TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................................................. 8-56
8.4.1 MULTITOUCH MISDETECTION BY THE OPERATION PANEL DUE TO AN AM
RADIO SIGNAL............................................................................................................ 8-56
In "Checking the Influence of External Noise in the Installation Environment", if the
detection level is "3" or "4", you are receiving the external noise influence, so adjust
the sensitivity level. ............................................................................................... 8-57
8.4.2 PROBLEMS AND ERRORS RELATED TO HARDWARE ................................ 8-58
8.4.3 ERRORS RELATED TO APPLICATIONS ......................................................... 8-61
Applicable applications .......................................................................................... 8-61
D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB xxiii SM
If using a third-party application, the error message, code and solution may vary
depending on the application. Follow the third-party vendor’s instructions. ......... 8-61
8.4.4 FACTORY RESET AND RESTORATION ......................................................... 8-62
Factory Reset ........................................................................................................ 8-62
8.4.5 ERRORS THAT OCCUR DURING APPLICATION UPDATE FROM AN SD CARD
8-64
Error Messages ..................................................................................................... 8-64
Error Codes ........................................................................................................... 8-65
8.4.6 ERRORS THAT OCCUR DURING UPDATE FROM THE EDC SERVER ....... 8-66
8.4.7 OTHER TROUBLESHOOTING......................................................................... 8-68
Operation Panel Unit ............................................................................................. 8-68
SM xxiv D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB
SYMBOLS, ABBREVIATIONS AND TRADEMARKS
Symbols and Abbreviations

This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations. The meaning of those symbols and
abbreviations are as follows:
Symbol What it means
Clip ring
Screw
Connector
Clamp
E-ring
Flat Flexible Cable
Timing Belt
SEF Short Edge Feed
LEF Long Edge Feed
K Black
C Cyan
M Magenta
Y Yellow
B/W, BW Black and White
FC Full color
[A] Short Edge Feed (SEF)

[B] Long Edge Feed (LEF)
Trademarks
Adobe, Acrobat, PageMaker, PostScript, and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
and any use of such marks by Ricoh Company, Ltd. is under license.
Firefox and Thunderbird are registered trademarks of the Mozilla Foundation.
Dropbox is a registered trademark or trademark of Dropbox, Inc.
Google, Android, Google Drive, and Chrome are trademarks of Google Inc.
Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates.
JAWS® is a registered trademark of Freedom Scientific, Inc., St. Petersburg, Florida and/or
other countries.
Kerberos is a trademark of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT).
Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds.
Macintosh, OS X, Bonjour, Safari, and TrueType are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, Windows Vista, Internet Explorer, Microsoft Edge, and
Outlook are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corp. in the United States
and/or other countries.
PictBridge is a trademark.
QR Code is a registered trademark of DENSO WAVE INCORPORATED in Japan and in other
countries.
"Red Hat" is a registered trademark of Red Hat, Inc.
The SD and SD logo are trademarks of SD-3C, LLC.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group.
UPnP is a trademark of UPnP Implementers Corporation.
This product includes RSA BSAFE® Cryptographic software of EMC Corporation. RSA and
BSAFE are registered trademarks or trademarks of EMC Corporation in the United States and
other countries.
The proper names of Internet Explorer 9, 10, and 11 are as follows:

• Windows® Internet Explorer® 9
• Internet Explorer® 10
• Internet Explorer® 11
The proper names of the Windows operating systems are as follows:
• The product names of Windows Vista are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Ultimate
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Business
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Home Basic
Microsoft® Windows Vista® Enterprise
• The product names of Windows 7 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Home Premium
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Professional
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Ultimate
Microsoft® Windows® 7 Enterprise
Microsoft® Windows® 8
Microsoft® Windows® 8 Pro
• The product names of Windows 8.1 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Pro
Microsoft® Windows® 8.1 Enterprise
Microsoft® Windows® 10 Education
• The product names of Windows Server 2008 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 Enterprise
• The product names of Windows Server 2008 R2 are as follows:
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Standard
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2008 R2 Enterprise
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Foundation
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 Essentials
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Foundation
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2012 R2 Essentials
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks
of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
Microsoft product screen shots reprinted with permission from Microsoft Corporation.
PRODUCT INFORMATION
Differences between IM C300/C400 and MP C307/C407
1. PRODUCT INFORMATION
1.1 DIFFERENCES BETWEEN IM C300/C400 AND MP
Information
Product
C307/C407
The following table describes the differences between IM C300/C400 series and MP
C307/C407 series:
Items IM C300 /C400 series MP C307/C407
Main power switch position Front Right
Agitator mylar for toner supply in sub 2 sheets 1 sheet
hopper
Image/Paper ID sensor 1 Sensor 1 board, and 3 sensors Three sensors
Transfer unit (S27-S29) arranged on one bracket arranged on a
single board
VM Features Provided via an SD card Standard on
board
Smart operation Version G2.5 G2
panel Board with NFC Multiple units Only one
tag (Vanskee Enterprise, SAG) company
(Vanskee
Enterprise)
Auto Color Calibration (ACC) Corrections 1 to 4 Corrections 1 to 4
Equipped with "Quick Correction
Mode"
Changed the layout of the
correction sheet
PS3/PDF Direct Emulation Provided Not provided
Settings on Displaying an Alert When Provided Not provided
the Ethernet Cable is Broken or
Disconnected
"Web Help Support" Settings Provided Not provided
"RemoteConnect Support" Settings Provided Not provided
"Remote Panel Operation" Settings Provided Not provided
[Settings] items Integration of the items in [User -
Tools] > [Machine Features] and
other menus in [User Tools]
Internal Finisher Provided Not provided
SM 1-1 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB
Differences between IM C300/C400 and MP C307/C407
Items IM C300 /C400 series MP C307/C407

(only for C400SRF)
Paper Feed unit (main unit) 500 sheets 250 sheets
(only for C400F/C400SRF)
Paper Feed Mechanism Roller friction system Friction pad
(only for C400F/C400SRF) system
Machine Ventilation Paper exit/exhaust fan (FAN5) -
added
(only for C400SRF)
Caster Table Optional Not supported
Paper feed unit Maximum Three Two
installable
number
Duplex Delivery Path Delivery Path Extension -
(only for C400SRF)
Duplex paper Duplex Paper Transport Roller -
transport roller (Middle) added
(only for C400SRF)
Paper Feed Vertical transport clutch (CL10) -
added
(only for C400F/C400SRF)
Paper Exit Paper Exit Transport Roller added -
(only for C400SRF)
D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 1-2 SM
Machine Codes and Peripherals Configuration
1.2 MACHINE CODES AND PERIPHERALS
CONFIGURATION
Information
Product
1.2.1 MAIN MACHINE
NA = North America, EU = Europe, AA = Asia-Pacific, CHN = China, TWN = Taiwan, KOR =
Korea
Product name Machine Code Remarks Initial configuration
IM C300 D0CA IM C300 for EU/AA -
IM C300F D0C9 IM C300F for NA/EU/AA/TWN/KOR FAX
IM C400F D0C8 IM C400F for NA/EU/AA/CHN FAX
IM C400SRF D0CB IM C400SRF for NA/EU FAX/Internal Finisher
1.2.2 MACHINE CONFIGURATION
Item Machine Code Remarks New Option?

1 Bin Tray BN1040 [1] D574 - Yes
Page Keeper Type M28 [2] D3DQ Only for NA/EU No
Paper Feed Unit PB1170 [3] D3GQ Up to 3 can be stacked Yes
Caster Table Type M41 [4] D3GW - Yes
1.2.3 OPTIONS
Item Machine Code Remarks New Option?
Information
Product
1 Bin Tray BN1040 D574 - Yes
Page Keeper Type M28 D3DQ Only for NA/EU No
Paper Feed Unit PB1170 D3GQ Max 3 can be installed Yes
Caster Table Type M41 D3GW - Yes
NA = North America, EU = Europe, AA = Asia-Pacific, CHN = China, TWN = Taiwan, KOR =

Korea
Item Machine Code Remarks New
Option?
Fax Option Type D0CK-02(EU,AA,KOR) - Yes
M41 [1]
Fax Connection D0CK-00 Only for machines equipped with a Yes
Unit Type M41 fax unit.
Enhanced Security D792-09 (NA, EU) - No
HDD Option Type
M10 [2]
IEEE1284 Interface D3C0-17 Only one of these cards can be No
Board Type M19 [3] installed at a time.
IEEE 802.11a/g/n D3BR-01 (NA, EU, No
Interface Unit Type AA,KOR)
M19 [3]
File Format D3BR-04 No
Converter Type
Item Machine Code Remarks New

Option?
M19 [3]
Device Server D3GF-10 (NA) Yes
Option Type M37 D3GF-11 (EU, AA, KOR)
[3]
Camera Direct D3GF-30 If multiple applications are required, Yes
Print Card Type merge all applications into one SD
M37 [4] card with the SP mode. (SD Card
XPS Direct Print D0CJ-02 (NA) Appli Move) Yes
Option Type M41 D0CJ-20 (AA,
[4] CHN,TWN,KOR)
PostScript3 Unit D0CJ-26 (NA) Yes
Type M41 [4] D0CJ-27 (EU)
D0CJ-28 (Other)
OCR Unit Type D3AC-23 (NA) No
M13 [4] D3AC-24 (EU)
D3AC-25 (Other)
Data Overwrite D3BS-03 No
Security Unit Type
M19 [4]
VM CARD Type D3GF-32 Yes
M37 [4]
NFC Card Reader D3AC-21 - No
Type M13
Optional Counter B870-21 - No
Interface Unit Type
M12
Specifications
1.3 SPECIFICATIONS
See "Appendices" for the following information:
Information
• Specifications
Product
• Supported Paper Sizes
• Software Accessories
• Optional Equipment
INSTALLATION
Installation Requirements
2. INSTALLATION
2.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Installation
2.1.1 ENVIRONMENT
1. Temperature Range: 10°C to 32°C (50°F to 89.6°F)

2. Humidity Range: 15% to 80% RH
3. Ambient Illumination: Less than 1500 lux (do not expose to direct sunlight)
4. Ventilation: 3 times/hr/person or more
5. Avoid direct exposure to the following:
1) Cool air from an air conditioner
2) Heat from a heater
6. Do not install the machine in areas that are exposed to corrosive gas.
7. Do not install the machine at any location over 2,000 m (6,500 ft.) above sea level. [NA:
Can be installed up to 2,500m (8,202 ft.)]
8. Install the machine on a sturdy, level base. (Inclination on any side must be no more than 5
mm.)
9. Do not install the machine in areas that get strong vibrations.
2.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL

Front to back: Within 5 mm (0.2")
Right to left: Within 5 mm (0.2")
2.1.3 MACHINE SPACE REQUIREMENTS
• This machine uses high voltage power sources and can generate ozone gas. High
ozone density is harmful to human health. Therefore, the machine must be installed in
a well-ventilated room.
A IM C300 series / IM C400F: Over 7 cm (2.75")

IM C400SRF: Over 5 cm (1.96")
B Over 10 cm (3.93")
C IM C300 series / IM C400F: Over 40.2 cm (15.82")
IM C400SRF: Over 52 cm (20.47")
D IM C300 series: Over 33.3 cm (13.11")
IM C400 series: Over 32 cm (12.59")
Put the machine near the power source with the clearance shown above.
2.1.4 MACHINE DIMENSIONS
Model* W×D×H
Installation
IM C300 498 x 561 x 510 mm (19.6" × 23.0" × 20.1")
IM C300F 554 x 561 x 595 mm (21.9" × 23.0" × 23.4")
IM C400F 498 x 561 x 590 mm (19.6" × 23.0" × 23.2")
IM C400SRF 615 x 561 x 706 mm (24.2" × 23.0" × 27.7")
* including ADF and operation panel
Main unit only

• When the operation panel is upright: 708 x 561 mm
• When the operation panel is face up: 708 x 605 mm
When the 1-bin tray is installed

• When the operation panel is upright: 764 x 561 mm
• When the operation panel is face up to the maximum (tilted 20 degrees to the front): 764 x
615 mm
When the operation panel is upright: 825 x 561 mm

• When the operation panel is face up: 825 x 605 mm
Callout mm (inch) Callout mm (inch)

[A] 546.2 mm (approx. 21.5") [G] 554 mm (approx. 21.8")
[B] 498 mm (approx. 19.6") [H] 595 mm (approx. 23.4")
[C] 425 mm (approx. 16.7") [I] 510 mm (approx. 20.1")
[D] 510 mm (approx. 20.1") - -
[E] 280 mm (approx. 11.0") - -
[F] 210 mm (approx. 8.3") - -

[J] 505 mm (approx. 19.9") [L] 654 mm (approx. 25.7")
[K] 590 mm (approx. 23.2") [M] 560 mm (approx. 22")
- - [N] 621 mm (approx. 24.4")
Installation
- - [O] 706 mm (approx. 27.7")
Callout mm (inch) Note

[A] 1068 mm IM C400SRF
(approx.42.0")
[B] 1153 mm [A] + ADF
(approx. 45.3")
[C] 149 mm Paper Feed Unit
(approx. 5.9")
2.1.5 POWER REQUIREMENTS
• Insert the plug firmly into the outlet.

• Do not use an outlet extension plug or cord.
• Ground the machine.
1. Input voltage level:
• 110 V, 60 Hz More than 11 A
• 120 to 127 V, 60 Hz: More than 11 A
• 220 V to 240 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz: More than 5.5 A
2. Permissible voltage fluctuation:
NA: 108 V (120 V-10%) – 138 V (127 V+8.66 %)
EU/AA: 198 V (220 V-10%) – 264 V (240 V+10 %)
Taiwan: 99 V (110 V -10%) – 121 V (110 V + 10%)
3. Do not put things on the power cord.
Main Machine Installation: Important Notice on Security Issues
2.2 MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION: IMPORTANT
NOTICE ON SECURITY ISSUES
Installation
2.2.1 OVERVIEW
To increase the security of the MFP and ensure the customer sets an administrator password,
an administrator set/change prompt is displayed when the machine is turned on for the first
time. .
After the customer sets the administrator/supervisor login password, the home screen will be
displayed. However, customers can remove the administrator password setting screen with the
following the procedure.
1. On the Program/Change Administrator screen, press [Change] next to Supervisor and then
touch [OK] without inputting any password.
2. Touch [OK] again when the Confirm password display shows up.
3. For Administrator 1, do the same procedure as steps 1 and 2.
4. Press the [OK] button, and then turn the power OFF/ON.
SP5-755-002 (Display Setting: Hide Administrator Password Change Scrn) allows you to
skip this screen temporarily and continue the installation procedure without setting an
administrator password. However, the Program/Change Administrator screen appears every
time you turn the power OFF/ON if the password is not set.
• To enter the SP mode, there are two ways to display the numeric keypad on the
screen;
1. Press the "Document Server" icon.
2. Press and hold the button [A] located on the left side of the operation panel and
"Check Status [B]" at the same time.
• For more details about security issues of MFPs refer to the "Notes on Using
Multi-Function Printers Safely" supplied with the MFP.
• When Supervisor/Administrator 1-4 passwords are configured via network, the
"Change Supervisor login password" window won’t display.
2.2.2 PASSWORD SETTING PROCEDURE

1. After the installation, turn the power on.
Password change display appears.
2. Press [Change] and change the supervisor login password.
3. Input the password, and then press [OK].

4. Confirm the password, and then press [OK].
5. Change the administrator 1 login password.
Installation
6. Input the password, and then press [OK].
7. Confirm the password, and then press [OK].
8. Turn the main power OFF and back ON again.
The passwords for Supervisor or Administrator 1 to 4 can be set via "System Settings", but the
Program/Change Administrator screen appears every time the power switch is turned ON if the
passwords are set with this method. We recommend customers set the passwords via the
network or the Program/Change Administrator screen.
Main Machine Installation: Accessory Check
2.3 MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION: ACCESSORY
CHECK
2.3.1 FOR IM C300/C300F

Check the quantity and condition of these accessories.
Description Remark Q’ty

NA EU AA/KOR TWN
Decal – Emblem For the front cover 1 1 1 -
Decal – Paper Size / Tray Number 1 1 1 1
CE Marking Traceability Information Only for EU - 1 - -
Ferrite Core - 1 1 1
Modular Cord with Ferrite Core 1 - - -
Power Supply Cord 1 1 1 1
CD-ROM (Printer and Scanner Drivers) 1 1 1 -
CD-ROM (Operating Instructions) - - 1 -
CD-ROM (Printer and Scanner Drivers/ - - - 1
Operating Instructions)
Manual: Safety Information 1 1 1 1
Note to Using This Machine Safely 1 1 1 1
Note to Users in EU Countries - 1 - -
Note to Users in the USA 1 - - -
Note to Users in Canada 1 - - -
Software License Agreement 1 1 1 1
Notes For Users For printing with 1 1 1 1
AirPrint
For Users of This Product Before using the 1 - - -
wireless function
Manual: Read This First - - 1 1
Manual: Start Guide 1 - 1 -
Main Machine Installation: Accessory Check
2.3.2 FOR IM C400F/C400SRF

Check the quantity and condition of these accessories.
Installation
Description Remark Q’ty
NA EU AA CHN
Decal – Emblem For the front cover 1 1 1 -
Decal – Paper Size / Tray Number 1 1 1 1
CE Marking Traceability Information Only for EU - 1 - -
Ferrite Core - 1 1 1
Modular Cord with Ferrite Core 1 - - -
Power Supply Cord 1 1 1 1
CD-ROM (Printer and Scanner Drivers) 1 1 1 -
CD-ROM (Operating Instructions) - - 1 -
CD-ROM (Printer and Scanner Drivers/ - - - 1
Operating Instructions)
Manual: Safety Information 1 1 1 1
Note to Using This Machine Safely 1 1 1 1
Note to Users in EU Countries - 1 - -
Note to Users in the USA 1 - - -
Note to Users in Canada 1 - - -
Software License Agreement 1 1 1 1
Notes For Users For printing with AirPrint 1 1 1 1
For Users of This Product Before using the wireless 1 - - -
function
Manual: Read This First - - 1 -
Manual: Start Guide 1 - 1 -
Sheet:TEL - - - 1
Sheet: Warranty - - - 1
Main Machine Installation: Installation Procedures
2.4 MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION: INSTALLATION
PROCEDURES
2.4.1 INSTALLATION FLOWCHART

The flowcharts as shown below show the best procedure for installation.
IM C300 series/IM C400F
IM C400SRF
Installation
2.4.2 PACKAGING TAPES, RETAINERS AND TONER BOTTLES
• To install the main unit and the optional paper feed unit at the same time, first install
the optional paper feed unit, and then install the main unit and other options.
1. Remove the main unit from the packing box and check the supplied items.
• Grab the specified locations below when lifting the machine. Holding the operation
panel or scanner unit might damage the machine.
2. Remove the packaging tapes and the retainers from the machine.
IM C400SRF
3. Pull out the paper feed tray and remove the packaging tapes and protective sheet [A]
inside.
Installation
4. Open the ADF, and then remove all the tapes and the retainer (protective sheet) [A] from
the exposure glass.
5. Open the front cover [A].
6. Pull out all protection seals on the drums straight out towards the front.
• Do not remove the packaging tape [A] at this time.
7. Do the following procedure to remove the waste toner bottle.

IM C300 series
1. Close the front cover, and then remove the paper feed tray.
2. Open the front cover again, and then remove the waste toner bottle [A].
IM C400 series
1. Remove the waste toner bottle [A].
Installation
8. Remove the packaging tape [A] attached to the lever.
9. Set the lever [A] to the upright position.
10. Attach the waste toner bottle.

11. Attach the paper feed tray removed in Step 7 (IM C300 series only).
12. Shake each toner bottle five or six times.
13. Install each toner bottle [A] in the machine.

Install the black toner bottle first.
K (Black) bottle is larger than the other colors, C, M, and Y. To prevent bottles getting stuck
in different holders, begin installing with K (Black) bottle and then C, M, and Y.
14. Close the front cover.

15. Connect the power cord to the machine.
16. Connect the network cable, if the client IP addresses are automatically provided through a
system such as DHCP in the network settings. If a static IP address is provided to the client
machines, contact the customer (network administrator) to determine the appropriate
timing for connecting the network cable.
17. Turn ON the main power.
• Toner Initialization starts. It takes about 5 minutes to fill the toner up. Wait until it
finishes.
• The Program/Change Administrator screen is displayed at the first power-up. Follow

the procedure in Main Machine Installation: Important Notice on Security Issues.
Installation
18. After the toner initialization is completed, the machine beeps, and the following message is
displayed. Turn the main power OFF and back ON again.
• DO NOT switch OFF the main power until the machine finishes the initial settings and
emits a beep sound.
2.4.3 CLEANING CLOTH HOLDER

1. Clean the surface before placing the cleaning cloth holder.
2. Attach the cleaning cloth holder [A] to the left side of the scanner and put the cleaning cloth
into the holder.
2.4.4 INSTALLING THE FINISHER EXTENSION TRAY (IM C400SRF

ONLY)
1. Install the extension tray [A] in the finisher.
2.4.5 BRAND PLATE, DECALS
1. Attach the brand plate [A] to the front cover, if it is not attached.
2. Attach the tray number [A] and paper size [B] decals to the paper feed tray.
Store unused decals in the designated location as follows (Step 1 and 2,

apply to ONLY IMC300 series):
1. Pull out the paper feed tray.
2. Remove the front lower cover [A].
Installation
3. Open the front cover.
4. Remove the inner cover [A].
5. Store the decals in the area [B].
2.4.6 TELEPHONE CORD (FAX STANDARD MODEL)
Notes for Connecting the Telephone Line

Check the following before connecting the telephone line:
If a phone line dedicated to business phones is connected to the MFP, the fax board may be
damaged. Make sure that the connecting phone line is for fax.
Business phones have various functions that require access to a high current phone line.
Connecting the MFP to a high current phone line might damage components of the fax board.
Connecting the Telephone Cord (Fax Standard Model)

This section describes how to connect the modular cord.
1. As shown, form a double loop 3 cm (A) from the cable end to be connected to the
machine's connection socket, and then attach the supplied ferrite core.
2. Plug the connector into the "LINE" socket.

3. Insert the power plug into the power outlet and turn the machine ON.
2.4.7 LOADING PAPER, IMAGE QUALITY TEST

The following procedures are required after installing all the peripherals.
• Loading Paper
• Paper Registration
• Automatic Color Calibration (ACC)
• Color Registration (Skew Adjustment)
• Checking the Copy Image with Test Chart
• Confirm that there are no accessories (such as screws and clamps) left inside the
main machine and peripherals.
Loading Paper
The paper size is detected automatically.
1. Check that all packaging tape has been removed and connect the power plug to the wall
socket.
3. Confirm that a message to load the paper is displayed on the operation panel.
4. Pull out the paper feed tray until it stops.

5. Release the side fences.
6. Load paper into the paper feed tray.
7. Set the side fences according to the paper size while pressing the unlock lever.
Installation
8. Set the end fence according to the paper size while pressing the unlock lever.
Paper Registration
Adjust the registration setting for paper trays.
• SP1-002-001 (Side-to-Side Registration By-pass Table)
• SP1-002-002 (Side-to-Side Registration Paper Tray 1)
• SP1-002-005 (Side-to-Side Registration Duplex)
If one or more optional paper trays is installed, do the following SPs as well:
• Refer to the “Registration” section in Chapter 4 for how to adjust the SP setting.
Automatic Color Calibration (ACC)

Be sure to execute color registration when installing the machine.
- Copier mode -
1. Press [Settings] on the Home screen.
2. Press [Maintenance] > [Auto Color Calibration]
3. Press [Start Auto Calibration] for "Copier Function".
4. Press [Start Printing] to print the test pattern.
The test pattern is printed in A4 size.
5. Clean the exposure glass.
6. Put the test pattern on the exposure glass, and then put 10 sheets of white paper on the
test pattern.
This ensures the precise ACC adjustment. Close the ADF.
7. Press [Start Scanning].

The machine starts the ACC.
- Printer mode -
1. Then, Press [Start Auto Calibration] for "Printer Function".
2. Press [Quick Test Pattern], then press [Start Printing] to print the test pattern.
The test pattern is printed after self-checking.
3. Place the test pattern on the exposure glass, then close the ADF.
Put 10 sheets of white paper on the test chart. This ensures the precise ACC adjustment.
4. Press [Start Scanning].

The machine starts the ACC.
5. Confirm that the execution result is displayed.
For the Quick Test Pattern, the execution result is recorded with all resolutions (patterns 1
to 4).
• If the printed image is not adjusted properly after executing Quick Mode, perform
ACC in normal mode (test pattern in applicable resolution) again.
Color Registration (Color Skew Adjustment)

Execute SP2 -111 -004 (Forced Line Position Adj.: Mode d) and check whether the value for
each color is within the range of ± 5 on the SP below.
• SP2-117-004 (K)
• SP2-117-002 (C)
• SP2-117-001 (M)
• SP2-117-003 (Y)
The Color Registration (Color Skew Adjustment) should be executed if one or more of the
above SP values is not within ±5.
Installation
No Color Skew Adjustment is required if all SP values are within ±5.
The adjustment procedure is as follows:
Remove the paper exit tray [A].

2. Adjust the skew of the laser unit as follows:
Turn the knob for any color with a value other than "0", until it reads "0".
• Turning the knob clockwise by 90 degrees changes the SP value by -1.
• Turning the knob counter-clockwise by 90 degrees changes the SP value by +1.
• A click is felt every 90 degree rotation.
[A]: Black, [B]: Cyan, [C]: Magenta, [D]: Yellow

3. Check that the front cover is closed and execute SP2-111-004 (Forced Line Position Adj.:
Mode d).
4. Check the SP values for SP2-117–001 to 004 and repeat steps 2 to 4 until the SP values
for all colors fall within ± 5 (Target value: 0).
5. Exit the SP mode.
6. Reattach all parts that you removed in the above steps.
7. Print the test chart and check the image quality.
• Do not touch the laser units while installing the paper exit tray. If the laser units
move, the color skew might have to be adjusted again.
Open the front cover.

1. Remove the paper exit front cover, paper exit upper cover and paper exit tray. (Paper Exit
Front Cover/Paper Exit Upper Cover/Paper Exit Tray for IM C400SRF)
2. Remove the staple unit [A].

4. Insert a screwdriver through the adjustment hole and adjust the skew of the laser unit as
follows.
Turn the knob for any color with a value other than "0", until it reads "0".
• A click is felt every 90 degree rotation.
Installation
[A]: Black, [B]: Cyan, [C]: Magenta, [D]: Yellow
5. Check that the front cover is closed and execute SP2-111-004 (Forced Line Position Adj.:
Mode d).
6. Check the SP values for SP2-117–001 to 004 and repeat steps 4 to 6 until the SP values
for all colors fall within ± 5 (Target value: 0).
8. Reattach all parts that you removed in the above steps.
9. Print the test chart and check the image quality.
• Do not touch the laser units while installing the paper exit tray. If the laser units
Checking the Copy Image with Test Chart

Check the copy image quality with a test chart.
Non-fax standard model:
Check that the printer can print out in the customer’s environment.
Fax standard models:
Check that the fax can output a received image as well.
2.4.8 AUTO REMOTE FIRMWARE UPDATE (ARFU) SETTINGS

Specify ARFU settings as required.
Operating Conditions:
• ARFU requires an internet connection. Be sure to get permission from the customer
before setting up ARFU.
• The connection is one-way, so the user’s data cannot be accessed from the firmware
server.
ARFU enable setting

1. Server connection check
2. Prohibited date and time setting
Set SP5-886-111 (Auto Update Setting) to "1 (ON)".

1: ON / 0: OFF (Default)
To download the firmware only using SFU (Smart Firmware Update), and not by ARFU,
specify the settings as follows:
- SP5-886-111(Auto Update Setting) to "0 (OFF)"
- SP5-886-115 (SFU Auto Download Setting) to "1 (ON)"
Enter the SP mode.

1. Press [Firmware update] > [Update] > [Execute update].
Installation
2. Check if one of the following messages appears: "Will you download the latest package Ver
*** and update?" or "The installed package is the latest version.".
If any of these messages appear, ARFU can be executed. Press “No” and close SP mode
to complete the configuration.
The update will run immediately if you press “Yes” at the message "Will you download the
latest package Ver *** and update?" The update cannot be canceled if it is run by SFU.
(The update can be canceled if ARFU is used.)
SP5-886-116 (Auto Update Prohibit Term Setting) displays the scheduled date and time of
the next ARFU.
If error code 71: [Network connection error] appears when you click “Execute update”, see
troubleshooting below.
Ask the customer for the prohibited times and days of the week for ARFU
execution and set the following as needed. The default prohibited time is
from 9 a.m. to 5 p.m. and there is no prohibited day.
• SP5-886-112 (Auto Update Prohibit Term Setting) Default: 1 (ON)
• SP5-886-113 (Auto Update Prohibit Start hour) Default: 9
• SP5-886-114 (Auto Update Prohibit End hour) Default: 17
• SP5-886-120 (Auto Update Prohibit Day Of Week Setting) Default: 00000000 [00H]
Set the bits for the days of the week to prohibit updating.
Prohibited (Monday - Sunday): bit 7, Monday: bit 6, Tuesday: bit 5
Wednesday: bit 4, Thursday: bit 3, Friday: bit 2, Saturday: bit 1, Sunday: bit 0
e.g.) Prohibited on Mon., Fri., Sat., and Sun.: 01000111 [47H]
They can be specified also via Web Image Monitor if logged in as the machine administrator
from the device if SP5-886-111(Auto Update Setting) is set to "1 (ON)". For details,
seeSpecifying the Time and Day of the Week to Prohibit Updating via Web Image
Monitor.
If error code 71: [Network connection error] appears when you click
[Firmware update] > [Update] > [Execute update] in SP mode, check the
following.
• 4-1. IPv4 address, Subnet mask of the machine and Gateway IPv4 address
• 4-2. IPv4 address of the DNS server
• 4-3. Proxy server settings
4-1. IPv4 address, Subnet mask of the machine and Gateway IPv4 address
Check the machine’s IPv4 address, subnet mask, and gateway IPv4 address.
(In "Settings" icon > System Settings > Network/Interface)
4-2. IPv4 address of the DNS server

Check the DNS IPv4 address and check the connection.
(In "Settings" icon > System Settings > Network/Interface > DNS Configuration)
How to find the IP address:

Ask the customer for the IP address of the DNS server. If the customer does not know it, ask the
customer to check the IP address by one of the following ways:
1. Run "ipconfig / all" at the command prompt on the computer, then check the IP address of the
DNS server.
2. Open the IPv4 properties dialog box on the computer, then check whether the IP address
setting of the DNS server is manual or automatic.
• If the setting of the DNS IP address is automatic, select [Auto-Obtain (DHCP)] at the
MFP machine's DNS settings.
• If the setting of the DNS IP address is manual, select [Specify] and specify the DNS
server 1 to 3.
• Press [Connection Test] to check the connection with the input address. Make sure
that it is connected successfully.
Installation
4-3. Proxy server settings
Check the user’s network environment and, as required, specify the proxy server settings in the
following SPs:
• SP5-816-062 (Use Proxy)
1: Used / 0: Not used
• SP5-816-063 (Proxy Host)
• SP5-816-064 (Proxy PortNumber)
• SP5-816-065 (Proxy User Name)
• SP5-816-066 (Proxy Password)
If access to the external server is restricted, request the network administrator (customer) to
permit the following FQDN name for communication.- FQDN: p-rfu-ds2.support.ricoh.com
These settings can be specified also via Web Image Monitor if logged in as the machine
administrator from the device if SP5-886-111(Auto Update Setting) is set to "1(ON)". For details,
see Specifying the Time and Day of the Week to Prohibit Updating via Web Image
Monitor.
Specifying the Time and Day of the Week to Prohibit Updating via Web
Image Monitor
1. Start Web Image Monitor.
2. Log in as the machine administrator.
3. Go to [Device Management], and then click [Configuration].
4. Click "Auto Firmware Update".
Turn the main power OFF and back ON again after setting SP5-886-111
(AutoUpdateSetting) to "1 (ON)". "Auto Firmware Update" will appear in the menu list of
Web Image Monitor.
5. Specify the times and days of the week to prohibit updating.
Select the check boxes of the applicable days to prohibit updating.
Installation
2.4.9 SETTINGS RELEVANT TO THE SERVICE CONTRACT
Change the necessary settings for the following SP modes if the customer has made a service
contract.
SP No. Function Default
SP5-045-001 Specifies if the counting method used in meter charge mode "1": Prints
Counter method is based on developments, prints, or coverage.
SP5-104-001 Specifies whether the counter is doubled for A3/DLT size "0":Single
(SSP) paper. counting
A3/DLT double
count
SP5-812-001 and -001: shows or sets the telephone number of the service representative.
-002 -002: shows or sets the fax number of the service station. The number is
Service Tel: printed on the counter list when the "Meter Click Charge" is enabled. The
Telephone / user can send a fax message with the counter list.
Facsimile
Counter Display Method
There are 3 types (Developments, Prints, and Coverage). The display mode can be set by
SP5-045-001 (Accounting counter: Counter Method).
Value Mode Descriptions
0 Development Count YMC Development Counter
Bk Development Counter
1 Print Count Color Copy Counter
(Default) B&W Copy Counter
Color Print Counter
B&W Print Counter
Value Mode Descriptions

Color Total Counter
B&W Total Counter
2 Coverage Count Color Total Counter
B&W Total Counter
Color Coverage Counter 1
7 Coverage Count (YMC) Color Total Counter
B&W Total Counter
Color Coverage Counter 1 (YMC)
2.4.10 SETTINGS FOR @REMOTE SERVICE
• Prepare and check the following points before visiting the customer. For details, ask
the @Remote key person.
Check points before making @Remote settings
1. The setting of SP5-816-201 in the mainframe must be "0".
2. Print the SMC with SP5-990-002 and check the device ID2 from SP5-811-003, make sure it
is programmed correctly.
• 6 spaces must be put between the 3-digit prefix and the following 8-digit number (e.g.
xxx______xxxxxxxx).
• ID2 (SP5-811-003) and the serial number (SP5-811-001) must be the same (e.g. ID2:
A01______23456789 = serial No. A0123456789)
• Make sure to shut down and reboot the machine once before printing the SMC.
Otherwise, the latest settings may not be collected when the SMC is printed.
3. The following settings must be correctly programmed.
• Proxy server IP address (SP5-816-063)
• Proxy server Port number (SP5-816-064)
• Proxy User ID (SP5-816-065)
• Proxy Password (SP5-816-066)
4. Get a Request Number
Execute the @Remote Settings
1. Enter the SP mode.
2. Input the Request number obtained from @Remote Center GUI, and then enter [OK] with
SP5-816-202.
3. Confirm the Request number, and then click [EXECUTE] with SP5-816-203.
4. Check the confirmation result with SP5-816-204.
Value Meaning Solution/ Workaround
Installation
0 Succeeded -
3 Communication error (proxy Check the network condition.
enabled)
disabled)
5 Proxy error (authentication error) Check Proxy user name and password.
6 Communication error Check the network condition.
8 Other error See "SP5816-208 Error Codes" below this.
9 Request number confirmation Processing… Please wait.
executing
11 Already registered -
12 Parameter error -
20 Dial-up authentication error * These errors occur only in the modems that
21 Answer tone detection error support @Remote.
22 Carrier detection error
23 Invalid setting value (modem)
24 Low power supply current
25 Modem unplugged
26 Busy line
5. Make sure that the screen displays the Location Information with SP5-816-205 only when it
has been input at the Center GUI.
6. Click [EXECUTE] to execute the registration with SP5-816-206.
7. Check the registration result with SP5-816-207.
0 Succeeded -
1 Request number error Check the request number again.
2 Already registered Check the registration status.
enabled)
disabled)
5 Proxy error (Authentication Check Proxy user name and password.
error)
8 Other error See "SP5-816-208 Error Codes" below this.

9 Request number confirmation Processing… Please wait.
executing
11 Already registered -
12 Parameter error -
20 Dial-up authentication error * These errors occur only in the modems that
21 Answer tone detection error support @Remote.
22 Carrier detection error
23 Invalid setting value (modem)
24 Low power supply current
25 Modem unplugged
26 Busy line
SP5-816-208 Error Codes
Caused by Operation Error, Incorrect Setting
Code Meaning Solution/ Workaround
-12002 Inquiry, registration attempted without acquiring Obtain a Request Number before
Request No. attempting the Inquiry or
Registration.
-12003 Attempted registration without execution of a Perform Confirmation before
confirmation and no previous registration. attempting the Registration.
-12004 Attempted setting with illegal entries for Check ID2 of the mainframe.
certification and ID2.
-12005 @Remote communication is prohibited. The Make sure that "Remote Service" in
device has an Embedded RC gate-related User Tools is set to "Do not prohibit".
problem.
-12006 A confirmation request was made after the Execute registration.
confirmation had been already completed.
-12007 The request number used at registration was Check Request No.
different from the one used at confirmation.
-12008 Update certification failed because mainframe Check the mainframe condition. If the
was in use. mainframe is in use, try again later.
-12009 The ID2 in the NVRAM does not match the ID2 Check ID2 of the mainframe.
in the individual certification.
-12010 The certification area is not initialized. Initialize the certification area.
Error Caused by Response from GW URL
-2385 Other error
-2387 Not supported at the Service Center

-2389 Database out of service
-2390 Program out of service
-2391 Two registrations for the same Check the registration condition of the
Installation
mainframe mainframe
-2392 Parameter error
-2393 External RCG not managed
-2394 Mainframe not managed
-2395 Box ID for external RCG is illegal.
-2396 Mainframe ID for external RCG is
illegal.
-2397 Incorrect ID2 format Check the ID2 of the mainframe.
-2398 Incorrect request number format Check the Request No.
Main Machine Installation: When Moving the Machine
2.5 MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION: WHEN MOVING THE
MACHINE
• Do not lift the machine with any optional paper feed units attached.
If the machine already has one or more optional paper feed unit(s) attached, be sure
to disconnect the machine and paper feed unit(s), and lift them up separately when
moving/transporting. Otherwise, the handle of the paper feed unit will break due to the
machine’s weight, and it can cause an injury.
The following should be done before transporting the machine.
1. Remove the paper tray and waste toner bottle, and then move the ITB contact lever down
to the shipping position.
IM C400 series does not need to remove the tray.
• This moves the ITB away from the PCDU (K).

2. Hold the lever [A] in this position with securing tape.
3. Do SP4-806-001 (Carriage Retract Operation) to move the scanner carriage from the
home position.
This prevents dust from falling into the machine during transportation.
4. Remove the toner bottles.
This prevents toner flowing into the toner supply tube due to vibration during transport. This
can also cause the tube to be clogged with toner.
Main Machine Installation: When Moving the Machine
5. Make sure that there is no paper left in the paper trays, and then fix down the bottom plates
with a sheet of paper and securing tape.
6. Attach securing tape to stop the waste toner bottle from coming out.
7. Do one of the following:
Installation
• Attach shipping tape to the covers and doors.
• Shrink-wrap the machine tightly.
• Grab the machine in the specified locations when lifting.
Network Settings
2.6 NETWORK SETTINGS
2.6.1 SPECIFYING NETWORK SETTINGS ACCORDING TO

CUSTOMER'S ENVIRONMENT
Check the customer’s network environment and specify network settings

according to the functions to be used (such as a scanner, printer, and
Document Server setting).
1. Press the "Settings" icon.
2. Press [System Settings] > [Network/Interface].
3. Configure the required settings in [Network/Interface].
For the settings to be specified, see the user manual.
Check whether a network connection between the machine and the client
computer has been established.
2. Press [System Settings] > [Network/Interface] > [Ping Command].
3. Enter the client PC's IP address and press [Ping Command].
After confirming the communication, the result is displayed.
Network Settings
2.6.2 SETTINGS ON DISPLAYING AN ALERT WHEN THE

ETHERNET CABLE IS BROKEN OR DISCONNECTED
Display an alert if the Ethernet cable is disconnected while operating the machine.
Installation
By default, this setting is set to [OFF] and the interval to display the alert is set to 10 minutes.
Specify the setting according to the customer’s request. If the customer does not want to
connect the machine to the network, set this to [OFF].
2. Press [System Settings] > [Network/Interface] > [Unconnected Network Instruction
Screen].
3. Set this value to [Display].
Security Settings
2.7 SECURITY SETTINGS
2.7.1 SECURITY FUNCTION INSTALLATION

If the “Enhanced Security HDD Option Type M10” is installed at the same time as the main
machine’s installation, do not execute these settings described below.
• When the “Enhanced Security HDD Option Type M10” and security functions (Data
Overwrite Security and HDD Encryption functions) are activated in the same machine,
the function of the “Enhanced Security HDD Option” is not guaranteed.
The machine contains the security functions (Data Overwrite Security and HDD Encryption
functions) in the controller board (PCB24).
If you are installing a new machine, it is recommended to activate Data Overwrite Security and
HDD Encryption by selecting "Format All Data" in "Machine Data Encryption Settings".
("Settings" icon> [System Settings] > [Settings for Administrator] > [File Management] >
[Machine Data Encryption Settings])
• This method is recommended because there is no user data saved on the hard drive
yet such as Address Book, image data, etc.
If the customer wishes to activate the Data Overwrite Security and HDD Encryption functions on
a machine that is already running, it is recommended to activate these functions by selecting
"All Data" in "Machine Data Encryption Settings". ("Settings" icon> [System Settings] > [Settings
for Administrator] > [File Management] > [Machine Data Encryption Settings])
• If "All Data" is selected, all the data saved on the HDD will be preserved. If "Format All
Data" is selected, all the user data saved on the HDD will be erased.
After enabling encryption, the setting process takes several minutes to complete before the
machine can be used.
• If encryption is enabled after data has been stored on the HDD, or if the encryption key
is changed, this process can take up to three and a half hours or more.
The machine cannot be operated while data is being encrypted.
Once the encryption process begins, it cannot be stopped.
DO NOT turn off the power while the encryption process is in progress.
If the machine's main power is turned OFF while the encryption process is in progress, the HDD
will be damaged and all data on it will be unusable.
Print the encryption key or save to SD card and keep the encryption key (which is printed as a
paper sheet).
Keep the encryption key in a safe place. If the encryption key is lost and is needed, the
Security Settings
controller board (PCB24), HDD and NVRAM must all be replaced at the same time.
• "NVRAM" mentioned in here means the NVRAM on the Controller Board (PCB24).
• "NVRAM" or EEPROM on the BiCU (PCB1) has nothing to do with this.
Installation
If you need to reactivate the Data Overwrite Security and HDD Encryption functions, perform
the steps in the following sections:
2.7.2 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY
Before You Begin the Procedure

1. Make sure that the following settings (1) to (3) are not at their factory default values.
(1) Supervisor login password
(2) Administrator login name
(3) Administrator login password
If any of these settings is at a factory default value, tell the customer these settings must be
changed before the installation procedure.
2. Make sure that “Administrator Authentication” is On.
"Settings" icon > [System Settings] > [Administrator Authentication/User
Authentication/App Auth.] > [Administrator Authentication Management] > [Administrator
Authentication]
If this setting is off, tell the customer this setting must be on before the installation
procedure.
3. Make sure that “Administrator Tools” is enabled (selected).
Tools]
If this setting is disabled (not selected), tell the customer this setting must be enabled
(selected) before the installation procedure.
Using "Auto Erase Memory"

The Auto Erase Memory function can be enabled by the following procedure.
1. Log in as the machine administrator from the operation panel.
2. Press "Settings" icon.
Security Settings
3. Press [System Settings].
4. Press [Settings for Administrator] > [Data Management] > [Auto Erase Memory
Setting].
5. From the list next to Auto Erase Memory Setting, select [On], and then select an erase
method.
The default erase method is [Random Numbers], and the default number of overwrites
is [3].
• NSA*1: Overwrites data twice with random numbers and once with zeros.
• DoD*2: Overwrites data with a random number, then with its complement, then
with another random number, and the data is verified.
• Random Numbers: Overwrites data multiple times with random numbers. Select
the number of overwrites from one to nine.
*1 National Security Agency (U.S.A)
*2 Department of Defense (U.S.A)
6. Press [OK].
7. Press [ ], and then log out of the machine.
If you enable both overwriting and data encryption, the overwriting data will also be
encrypted.
To check the overwriting process on the operation panel
When Auto Erase Memory is enabled, the Data Overwrite icon is displayed at the bottom right
of the operation panel screen to indicate the status of data that is not overwritten.
Security Settings
1. Check the overwrite erase icon.

The icon [1] is lit when there is temporary data to be overwritten, and blinks during
overwriting.
The icon [2] is lit when there is no temporary data to be overwritten.
Installation
Icon This icon lights up when there is data to be overwritten, and flashes during
[1] overwriting.
Overwriting starts automatically once the job is completed.
The Copier, Fax, and Printer functions take priority over the Auto Erase
Memory function. Overwriting will start after the job is completed.
Icon The trash box of the icon is empty when there is no data to be overwritten.
[2] This icon is also displayed when there is Hold Print/Stored Print/Locked
Print/Sample Print data in the hard disk.
Security Settings
2.7.3 HDD ENCRYPTION

1. Make sure that the following settings (1) to (3) are not at their factory default values.
(1) Supervisor login password
(2) Administrator login name
(3) Administrator login password
2. Make sure that “Administrator Authentication” is On.
Authentication]
If this setting is off, tell the customer this setting must be on before the installation
procedure.
Tools]
Enable Encryption Setting

The data saved on the HDD, such as Address Book, authentication information, saved
documents, can be encrypted to prevent data leakage in case the HDD is removed from the
machine.
Once encryption is enabled, all data subsequently stored on the machine will be encrypted.
The encryption algorithm used in the machine is AES-256.
Setting Up Encryption
• This function is only available for the standard hard disk. If your machine is equipped
with the Enhanced Security HDD Option, data on the hard disk is always encrypted.
Therefore, this function can only encrypt the machine's NVRAM data.
• The machine cannot be operated while encrypting data, updating the encryption key,
or canceling encryption.
• The encryption process takes several hours. Once the encryption process starts, it
cannot be stopped.
When setting up encryption, specify whether to start encryption after deleting data (initialize) or
encrypt and retain existing data. If data is retained, it may take some time to encrypt it.
Security Settings

3. Press "Settings" icon > [System Settings].
4. Press [Settings for Administrator] > [File Management] > [Machine Data Encryption
Installation
Settings].
5. Press [Encrypt].
• If the data has been encrypted, you can decrypt the data, update the encryption Key,
or back up the data.
• Update Encryption Key: Encrypts data again and creates a new encryption Key.
• Cancel Encryption: Cancels encryption.
• Back Up Encryption Key: Makes a backup of the encryption key. The encryption
setting is not changed. Proceed to Step 7.
6. Select one of the options from among [All Data], [File System Data Only], and [Format All
Data] to encrypt the data.
• All Data: Encrypts all data.
• File System Data Only: The following data are encrypted or initialized:
• Data that are encrypted
Program/log of the Embedded Software Architecture application, Address Book,
registered fonts, job logs, access logs, thumbnail images of stored documents,
sent/ received e-mail, documents transferred to the document management
server, files received by Mail to Print, spooled jobs
• Data that are initialized
Stored documents (documents in the Document Server, documents related to
Locked Print/Sample Print/Stored Print/Hold Print, documents of fax stored
reception), registered data (stamps/forms)
• Format All Data: Initializes all data without encryption. The NVRAM data (memory
that remains even after the machine is turned off) will not be deleted (initialized).
7. Select the backup method.
If you have selected [Save to SD Card], load an SD card into the media slot on the side of
the operation panel and press [OK] to back up the machine's data encryption key.
If you have selected [Print on Paper], press the [Print] key. Print out the machine's data
Security Settings
encryption key.
8. Press [OK].
9. When the confirmation dialog is displayed, press [OK].
10. Press [ ], and then log out of the machine.
11. Turn OFF the main power, and then turn the main power back ON.
The machine will start to convert the data on the memory after you turn ON the machine.
Wait until the message "Memory conversion complete. Turn the main power switch OFF."
appears, and then turn the main power OFF again.
Check the Encryption Settings
Settings].
4. Confirm whether the encryption has been completed or not on this display.
Backing Up the Encryption Key

The encryption key can be backed up. Select whether to save it to an SD card or to print it.
• The encryption key is required for data recovery if the machine malfunctions. Be sure
to store the encryption key safely for retrieving backup data.
Settings].
5. Press [Print Encryption Key].
6. Select the backup method.
If you have selected [Save to SD Card], load an SD card into the media slot on the side of
the control panel and press [OK]. After the machine's data encryption key is backed up,
Security Settings
press [Exit].
If you have selected [Print on Paper], press the [Print] key. Print out the machine's data
encryption key.
7. Press [Exit].
Installation
8. Log out.
Encryption Key Restoration

How to restore the old encryption key to the machine
The following message appears after the controller board (PCB24) is replaced. In such a case,
it is necessary to restore the encryption key to the new controller board (PCB24).
To do this, follow the procedure below.

1. Prepare an SD card that has been initialized in FAT16 format.
2. Using a PC, create a folder in the SD card and name it "restore_key".
3. Create a folder in the “restore_key” folder and name it the same as machine’s serial
number, “xxxxxxxxxxx” (11 digits).
4. Create a text file called "key_xxxxxxxxxxx.txt" and save it in the "xxxxxxxxxxx“ folder. Write
the encryption key in the text file.
/restore_key/xxxxxxxxxxx/key_xxxxxxxxxxx.txt
• Ask an Administrator to enter the encryption key. The key has already been
printed out by the user and may have been saved in the "key_xxxxxxxxxxx.txt"
file.
6. Confirm that a message is displayed on the LCD telling to insert the SD card that contains
the encryption key.
7. Turn OFF the main power.
8. Insert the SD card that contains the encryption key into SD card slot 2 (the lower slot).
• The machine will automatically restore the encryption key to the flash memory on
the controller board (PCB24).
10. Turn OFF the main power when the machine has returned to normal status.
11. Remove the SD card from SD card slot 2.
How to do a forced start up with no encryption key
Security Settings
If the encryption key backup has been lost, follow the procedure below to do a forced start-up.
• The HDD will be formatted after the forced start-up.

• Encrypted data will be deleted.
• User settings will be cleared.
1. Prepare an SD card.
2. Create a directory named “restore_key” inside the root directory of the SD card. Then, save
the “nvram_key.txt” file using the following name:
/restore_key/nvram_key.txt
3. Create a text file and write "nvclear".
• Write this string at the head of the file.

• Use all lower-case letters.
• Do not use quotation marks or blank spaces.
• It is judged that a forced start has been selected when the content of "nvclear" is
executed and the machine shifts to the alternate system (forced start).
4. Confirm that a message is displayed on the LCD telling to insert the SD card that contains
the encryption key.
6. Insert the SD card that contains the encryption key into SD card slot 2 (the lower slot).
7. Turn ON the main power and the machine automatically clears the HDD encryption.
8. Turn OFF the main power when the machine has returned to normal status.
9. Remove the SD card from SD card Slot 2.
11. Memory clear SP5-801-xx (Exclude SP5-801-001: All Clear and SP5-801-002: Engine),
and clear SP5-846-046: address book.
12. Set necessary user settings with the User Tools key.
"Web Help Support" Settings
2.8 "WEB HELP SUPPORT" SETTINGS
2.8.1 OVERVIEW
Installation
The Web Help Support function is a feature that assists users on the operation panel. When a
user encounters a problem when operating the machine, the solution is displayed on the
operation panel, and users can attempt to resolve the problem by themselves. By offering this
solution, we aim to reduce the number of calls, thereby improving the rate of self-resolution.
This function is available when the machine is connected to the Internet.
[A]: Tap "?" to display help contents
The Web Help Support function is preinstalled and enabled by default. Specify whether or not to
enable or disable the function in SP or UP mode.
2.8.2 HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE WEB HELP SUPPORT

This function is enabled by default. If the customer does not want to use this function, it can be
disabled via UP or SP modes as follows:
UP setting
1. Enable machine administrator authentication and login as administrator.
4. Press [Machine] > [Others] > [Support Settings].
5. Select [On] or [Off] for "Help Functions".
SP setting
1. Log in to Screen SP mode.
2. Select "Screen Device Settings".
3. Select "Application Settings".
4. Select "Settings" for “Support Settings”.
5. Enable or disable Help Functions.
Installation
If this function is disabled in SP mode(5-828-091(Network Setting Web)), the function in the
UP setting menu will not be displayed.
"RemoteConnect Support" Settings
2.9 "REMOTECONNECT SUPPORT" SETTINGS
2.9.1 OVERVIEW
The RemoteConnect Support function allows monitoring and remote control of the customer’s
machine’s operation panel.
• Allows the customer support operator to remotely connect with client's machine equipped
with the Smart Operation panel, or PC over the internet.
• Enable the support center to diagnose and resolve the issue through real-time screen
sharing, remote guidance, and operation.
Previously, to avoid security concerns, the function was disabled by default. However, this has
changed and the application is now enabled by default on machines produced since September
2018. (This setting is enabled by default on the current model.)
So, it’s necessary to confirm with customers whether enabling the remote function is acceptable.
After explaining the function and benefits, if it is unacceptable for the customer, disable it via SP
mode.
2.9.2 HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE REMOTECONNECT SUPPORT

2. Select "Screen Device Settings".
3. Select "Application Settings".
Installation
4. Select "Settings" in "RemoteSupportService" and check "Service availability".
• The application is enabled by default on machines produced from September

2018.
• The setting is located in RemoteSupport Service. However, the name of the
settings menu is "RemoteConnect Support".
"RemoteConnectSupport" can be found in the application list, but this does not
have any settings. Be sure to open the settings of "RemoteSupportService".
5. Confirm if a connection can be established.

To confirm if RemoteConnect Support is working properly, open the application from the
"Check Status" menu or by pressing down on the status bar on the Smart Operation Panel
for over five seconds.
After pressing down for over five seconds, stop pressing on the panel and RemoteConnect
Support will open.
If setup was done correctly, four digits will be displayed on the panel. If the setup was not
done correctly, the four digits will not be displayed.
RemoteConnect Service requires an Internet connection, so the following error message

might appear after long-pressing the status bar if an Internet connection is not detected. To
check the connection, open the web browser in Smart Operation Panel and navigate to a
webpage to confirm that the machine is connected to the Internet.
• If the webpage cannot be connected, check the general network configuration settings,
such as the IP address and proxy settings.
2.9.3 UNINSTALLING REMOTECONNECT SUPPORT

Some customers might ask for this feature to be disabled because of security precautions. In
many cases, disabling RemoteConnect Support should be sufficient.
However, if a customer asks for RemoteConnect Support to be completely uninstalled, remove
Installation
it by conducting the following procedure:
2. Select Apps > Install.
3. Select Uninstall for the following two applications:
Firmware Type Part Number Version
RemoteConnectSupport D2411470A 1.0.5
RemoteSupportService D1961459A 1.0.1
"Remote Panel Operation" Settings
2.10 "REMOTE PANEL OPERATION" SETTINGS
2.10.1 OVERVIEW
Remote Panel Operation will be pre-installed in models that have Smart Operation Panel G2.5.
This is a built-in function.
Using Web Image Monitor, you can view on the computer screen the operation panels of
devices on the same network as well as remotely control such devices. For example, in a large
company, the machine administrator can use the remote control to check for errors, operate
machines, and change settings to provide support and manage machines easily.
[A]: Smart Operation Panel G2.5

[B]: Web browser
[C]: IT manager/ administrator
• Eliminating a trip to the device
• Reducing end user's wait time
Usage
• Remote Panel Operation enables the IT manager or in-house help desk staff to remotely
view and operate the Smart Operation Panel G2.5 screen through a Web UI.
• It can be used to provide real-time interactive user support and also facilitate customer
training.
Startup
1. Log in to Web Image Monitor as the administrator.
"Remote Panel Operation" Settings
2. Click [Device Management] > [Remote Panel Operation]
Installation
Notes
• When connected by the Remote Panel Operation function, the machine does not
automatically switch to Sleep mode, and the Auto Logout and System Auto Reset functions
do not operate.
• You cannot connect to a single unit from multiple computers and operate it by the Remote
Panel Operation function.
• The Remote Panel Operation function is supported by Internet Explorer 11 and later
versions, Google Chrome 62 and later versions, Firefox 56 and later versions, and
Microsoft Edge 40 and later versions.
About the Settings
• This function has been preinstalled. (Its icon does not appear on the operation panel.)
• For security reasons, the settings have not been specified by default. Enable or disable
each setting according to the customer’s request.
2.10.2 HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE REMOTE PANEL

OPERATION/MONITORING
1. Enable machine administrator authentication and login as administrator.
2. Press the "Settings" icon on the Home screen.
4. Press [Settings for Administrator] > [Remote Panel Operation].
5. Select [Active] or [Inactive] for "Remote Operation/Monitoring”.
• “Remote Operation/Monitoring” Functions is disabled by default. When it is disabled,

Remote Panel Operation is not displayed in the Web Image Monitor.
Paper Feed Unit PB1170(D3GQ-17)
2.11 PAPER FEED UNIT PB1170(D3GQ-17)
2.11.1 ACCESSORY CHECK

Confirm that you have the accessories listed below.
No. Description Q’ty
- EMC Address 1
- Name Plate 1
- Decal Paper Size/ Tray Number 1
- Decal CHN 10mm 1
- Decal CHN Date 40mm 1
A Joint bracket (Front left) 1
B Joint bracket (Front right) 1
C Joint bracket (Front center) 1
D Joint bracket (Frame) 1
E Joint bracket (Rear) 1
- Screw M3x6 7
- Screw M3x8 3
- Screw M3x12 1
• The supplied brackets [A] to [E] and screws are used when installing the
dehumidification heater. Refer to "Dehumidification Heater (PFU)" for how to install
the dehumidification heater.
2.11.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE
• Turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from the wall socket. If the main
power is not turned OFF before installing, an electric shock or malfunction might occur.
Installation
• Lifting the mainframe requires two or more people. The mainframe is highly unstable
when lifted by one person and could cause injury or property damage.
If the machine already has one or more optional paper feed unit(s) attached, be sure to
disconnect the machine and paper feed unit(s), and lift them up separately when
mainframe’s weight, and it can cause an injury.
• Be sure to hold the following positions when lifting the mainframe.
1. Remove the packaging tapes and the sheet (EMC address) on the paper feed unit.
2. Slowly place the main machine on the paper feed unit.
• When installing the second paper feed unit, place it on the first paper feed unit.
Then place the main machine on the pair of paper feed units.
3. Attach the appropriate paper tray number decal [A] and paper size decal [B] above and
below the line [C] on each tray of the paper feed unit.
4. Load paper into the paper tray(s) and set the side fences and end fence(s).
5. Adjust the registration for each tray (Image Adjustment).
• For tray 2, use SP1-002-003
6. Check the paper feed unit operation and copy/print quality.
Caster Table Type M41 (D3GW03)
2.12 CASTER TABLE TYPE M41 (D3GW03)
Installation
No. Description Q’ty Remarks
1 Positioning Pin Right 1
2 Positioning Pin Left 1
3 Joint Bracket A 2
4 Fixing Screw 7
5 Cap for a Handle 2
6 Joint Bracket B 1
2.12.2 INSTALLATION CONDITIONS

Possible configurations are as follows:
Optional paper feed units 0 1 2 3
Securing with Joint Bracket Not Required Required Required Required

B
Do not use a joint bracket if the optional paper feed unit is not installed. If used, the paper feed
tray cannot be pulled out.
Remove the handle [A] attached to the back of the caster table.
1. Attach the handle [A] removed in step 1 to the screw holes on the front of the caster table.
2. Fit the caps [A] in the screw hole of the handle.
3. Attach two pins to the caster table.
Attach the long pin [A] to the right hole and the short pin [B] to the left hole.
4. Place the main machine [B] on the caster table [A].
Installation
5. Loosen the screws of the stabilizer [A] on the front side, lower the stabilizer until the
machine is stable, and tighten the screws.
6. Loosen the screws of the stabilizers on the left, right, and rear sides, lower the stabilizers,
and tighten the screws.
4. Attach the bracket [A] to the caster table.
5. Place the optional paper feed unit [B] on the caster table [A].
6. Place the main machine [C] on the optional paper feed unit [B].
8. Secure the caster table and optional paper feed unit with the screw [A].
Installation
9. Remove the rear cover [A] of the optional paper feed unit.
10. Secure the caster table and the 1st level of the optional paper feed unit with the two joint
brackets [A].
11. Secure the 1st level of the optional paper feed unit and the main machine with the two joint
brackets [A].
Use the screws [B] on the main machine

12. Reattach the rear cover of the optional paper feed unit.
Installation
4. Attach the bracket [A] to the caster table.
5. Place the optional paper feed units [B],[C] on the caster table [A].
6. Place the main machine [D] on the optional paper feed unit [C].

8. Secure the caster table and optional paper feed unit with the screw [A].
9. Remove the rear covers [A] of the optional paper feed units.
10. Secure the caster table and the 2nd level of the optional paper feed unit with the two joint
brackets [A].
Installation
11. Secure the 1st and 2nd levels of the optional paper feed unit and the main machine with
the four joint brackets [A].
Use the screws [B] on the main machine.
Installing the caster table, optional paper feed unit (3nd level), and main machine
Follow the same procedure when installing the 3rd level of the optional paper feed
unit.When you do this, secure the 1st, 2nd, and 3rd levels of the optional paper feed unit
and the main machine with six joint brackets [A].
12. Reattach the rear covers of the optional paper feed units.
Installation
1-Bin Tray BN1040 (D574-59)
2.13 1-BIN TRAY BN1040 (D574-59)

Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list.
1 1-Bin Tray Unit 1
2 Tray 1
3 Binding Screw (M3×6) 2
4 Screw (M3×10) 18
5 Grounding Plate 1
6 Front Right Cover 1
7 Left Upper Cover 1
8 Right Upper Cover 1
9 Rear Upper Cover 1
10 Mounting Frame 1
11 Mounting Frame Junction 1
12 Ferrite Core Cover 1
13 Ferrite Core 2
- Ground Wire 1
- Name Plate 1
- Decal 1
- Label 1
1-Bin Tray BN1040 (D574-59)
Installation
Remove the left upper cover [A] .
1. Remove the rear cover [A].
2. Open the right cover, and then remove the right rear cover [A] .
1-Bin Tray BN1040 (D574-59)
3. Remove the front right cover [A] and the hinge cover [B].
4. Remove the scanner rear cover [A] and scanner rear small cover [B].
5. Release two screws and three tabs for attaching the relay board (PCB12) [A] and FFC, to
release the FFC.
6. Remove the FFC fixing bracket [A] on the back side of the FFC.
1-Bin Tray BN1040 (D574-59)
Remove the FFC fixing bracket while turning it counterclockwise and releasing the tab.
Installation
7. Release the clamp for fixing the I/F cable [A].
8. Remove the grounding plate [A].(This procedure is for IM C300 series/IM C400F)
1-Bin Tray BN1040 (D574-59)
9. Disconnect the FFC [A] from the relay board (PCB12).
Disconnect the FFC for the relay board (PCB12) while pulling it out straight, because it
does not have a lock mechanism.
10. Remove the harnesses and FFC from the scanner unit on the BiCU (PCB1) [A].
When lifting the scanner unit, move the harnesses out of the frame so that they do not
interfere.
Disconnect the scanner FFC for the BiCU (PCB1) while pressing the lock release button.
1-Bin Tray BN1040 (D574-59)
11. Remove the screws, and then remove the scanner unit [B] with the ADF [A].
Installation
Remove the Packaging tapes on the 1-bin tray unit.
1. Attach the small frame [A].
1-Bin Tray BN1040 (D574-59)
2. Attach the mounting frame [A].
• Install the screws in this order: .

3. Attach the 1-bin tray unit [A]. (M3x10: 4 screws, and M3×6: 1 binding screw [D])
Fasten the grounding wire [B] included in this kit with one screw as shown below. Fasten
the other end of the grounding wire with the screw [C].
4. Connect the connector of the 1-bin tray unit to CN527 on the BiCU (PCB1), and then fasten
the harness [A].
Route the harness with the hook (marked by the dashed circle).
1-Bin Tray BN1040 (D574-59)
Installation
5. Install the 1-bin tray [A].
6. Install the scanner unit [A] with the ADF.
1-Bin Tray BN1040 (D574-59)
When installing the scanner unit, make sure that the harnesses are not pinched between
the scanner unit and the 1-bin tray unit .
7. Attach the grounding plate [A] and clamp the harness [B] to the ADF. (Upper: blue screw ×1,
Lower: M3x10 (existing))
8. Connect the relay board (PCB12) [A] and FFC [B].

Turn over twice to unravel the FFC.
The FFC does not have a lock mechanism, so push it straight in to connect it. .
When reassembling, the FFC must be connected straight. If not connected properly,
SC154, SC151, SC152 and SC112 may occur.
1-Bin Tray BN1040 (D574-59)
9. Attach the FFC fixing bracket [A].
Installation
10. Attach the relay board (PCB12) [B] with the three hooks [A] on the FFC fixing bracket.
11. Attach the FFC with the screw [C].
12. Set two ferrite cores [B] in the ferrite core holder [A] included in this kit.
13. Route the FFC of the scanner unit through the two ferrite cores in step 13.
Align the ferrite core holder [A] with the reference ribs on the back of the unit, and attach it
with double-sided tape.
1-Bin Tray BN1040 (D574-59)
14. Route the FFC [A] in step 14 through one ferrite core [B] attached to the control box, and
connect it to the BiCU (PCB1).
• The FFC should be routed under the USB cable.

• Do not connect the FFC at an angle. Otherwise, the scanner unit may be
damaged.
• Connect the scanner FFC for the BiCU (PCB1) while pressing the lock release
button.
15. Attach the following items:

• Hinge cover [A]
• Front right cover [B] (from the accessories, not the original cover)
1-Bin Tray BN1040 (D574-59)
Installation
• Right rear cover [A] (from the accessories)
• Rear upper cover [B] (from the accessories)
• Left upper cover [C] (from the accessories, not the original cover)

• Scanner rear small cover
• Scanner rear cover
• Right rear cover
• Rear cover
18. Turn ON the main power and check the 1-bin tray unit operation.
Page Keeper Type M28 (D3DQ-17)
2.14 PAGE KEEPER TYPE M28 (D3DQ-17)
This option is only for NA/EU.

No. Description Q’ty Remark
1 Double-feed sensor: Receiver (PCB15) 1
2 Ground plate: Receiver 1
3 Double-feed sensor: Emitter (PCB14) 1
4 Ground plate: Emitter 1
5 Tapping Screws: 3x10 4
6 Screw: M3x6 1
7 Harness: Receiver 1 Long harness
8 Harness: Emitter 1 Short harness
9 Harness: Ground wire 1
Open the ADF top cover [A].

1. Remove the screw, and lift up the original tray [B].
Installation
2. Open the ADF [A], and release the five tabs of the ADF rear cover by using a thin
screwdriver.
3. Remove the ADF rear cover [A].
4. Close the ADF.
Open the ADF top cover [A].

2. Open the ADF, then release the three tabs of the ADF front cover [A].
3. Close the ADF slightly, then remove the ADF front cover [A] while releasing the two tabs
with a thin screwdriver.
Installation
Slide the shaft [A] of the original feed unit toward the rear to remove it.
1. Remove the ADF inner cover [A].(Pivot Screws x 2)
• Lift the back of the ADF inner cover [A] while swinging up the original tray [B], and
then slide the ADF inner cover toward the back of the ADF unit.
2. Remove the guide [A].
3. Put the grounding plate [A] on the double-feed sensor (MFTB) (PCB14) [B].
4. Attach the double-feed sensor (MFTB) (PCB14) [A] and grounding plate [B] as a set.
(Tapping screw: 3x10)
Installation
Disconnect the harness [A] of the ADF top cover [B] from ADF relay
board (PCB13) (CN5), and release the clamp.
1. Remove the harness [A] from the harness guide.
2. Remove the ADF top cover [A].(Pivot Screw x 1)
3. Remove the five screws and release the four tabs, and then remove the inner cover [A].
4. Attach the grounding plate [A] and the grounding wire [B], and insert the grounding wire in
the notch. (Tapping Screw: 3x10)
5. Connect the long harness to the double-feed sensor (URRB) (PCB15) [A].
Installation
6. Attach the double-feed sensor (URRB) (PCB15) [A]. (Tapping screw: 3x10)
7. Route the harnesses [B].
8. Reattach the inner cover ( x5), and then reattach the ADF top cover ( x1).
• Make sure the ADF top cover is set correctly so that the two tabs fit into the holes.
9. Attach the clamp while the top cover is open, and attach the ground wire while putting it on
the guide (marked by the blue arrow). (Screw: M3x6)
Connect the harness to the connector of the double-feed sensor (MFTB)

[A] and ADF relay board (PCB13) [B] (CN3), and then route it.
The connectors are different colors, connect as listed below.

- Double-feed sensor (PCB14)(PCB15): White connector
- ADF relay board (PCB13): Black connector
1. Connect the harnesses [A] from the ADF top cover to the connectors of the ADF relay
board (PCB13) [B] (CN5, CN6).
2. Reattach the covers and original feed unit.
When reattaching the ADF inner cover, make sure that the shaft [A] fits into the groove (this
is the shaft of the lock lever for the friction pad on the back side of the cover). If the shaft
Installation
does not fit, the ADF top cover will not be closed.
When reattaching the ADF inner cover [A], move it under the coupling shaft (marked by the
dashed circle) of the original feed unit, and then you can install the ADF inner cover
correctly.
Connect the power cord and turn ON the main power.

2. Set the SP6-040-001 (Page Keeper: Mount Select) to “1(ON)”.
3. Press [END] twice.
4. Turn the main power OFF and ON.
5. Login as Administrator.
7. Press [System Settings] > [Machine] > [Print Action/Image Quality Adjustment].
8. Check that [ADF Original Double Feed Detection] is displayed.
9. Press [ON].
Optional Counter Interface Unit Type M12 (B870-21)
2.15 OPTIONAL COUNTER INTERFACE UNIT TYPE M12
(B870-21)

1 Counter interface board 1
2 Harness 1
3 Stud 4
4 Clamp 1
5 Harness band 1
6 Screws (Not used) 4
7 Screws (Not used) 2
- Caution Chart 1
1. Remove the rear cover. (Rear Cover)
2. Install the four studs [A] in the controller box.
Installation
3. Install the key counter interface board [A] shown below on the four studs.
4. Connect the harness included in this kit to the connector [A] on the interface board.
5. Do the following steps:

• Route the harness through the rear of the interface board, and then connect it to
CN570 [A].
• Bind the harness at the point [B] with the harness band included in this kit to prevent
interference with other harnesses.

• Insert the clamp included in this kit at [C], and clamp the harness with the clamp to
prevent interference with other harnesses.
7. Cut out the hole for the counter device cable to pass through the scanner rear cover [A].
8. Reattach the scanner rear cover.

9. Connect the harness from the counter device to CN4 [A] on the key counter interface board
and route the harness.
10. Route the harness through the scanner rear cover [B] as shown below.
Installation
11. Reassemble the machine.
NFC Card Reader Type M13 (D3AC-21)
2.16 NFC CARD READER TYPE M13 (D3AC-21)
No. Description Q'ty

1 Cable Cover 2
2 USB Cable 1
3 NFC Reader 1
4 Ferrite Core 1
- Caution Chart 1
- EMC Address 1
- Fastener 2
- Decal 2
- Label 1
• Two types of cable cover are included:

[A]: For machines without the 1-Bin tray unit.
[B]: For machines with the 1-Bin tray unit, "1 BIN" is inscribed on the cable cover.
Installation
This section includes the procedure for a machine that does not have the 1-Bin Tray Unit option.
However, this procedure can be used for a machine that has a 1-Bin Tray Unit installed.
1. Open the right cover.
2. Remove the front right cover [A] and hinge cover [B].
3. Remove the connector cover [A] on the operation panel.
4. Make a loop with the USB cable of the NFC reader, and then attach the ferrite core [A].
5. Connect the USB cable to the operation panel.
6. Attach the cover removed in step 3.
• Fit the cable into the slit [A] in the cover.
7. Attach the fasteners to the front side of the NFC reader .
Installation
8. Attach the NFC reader [A] to the back side of the front right cover with adhesive tape.
9. Attach the hinge cover [A].
Fit the cable into the slit.
10. Reattach the front right cover with the NFC card reader [A].
Make sure that the harnesses are not pinched between the red dotted areas in the photos.
11. Push the USB cable into the covers.
• Make sure that the cable fits in the slit [B].

12. Slide the cable cover [A] into the front right small cover as shown below.
13. Secure the cable cover together with the front right cover. ( × 1)
14. Attach the decal to the area [A] as shown below.
Anti-condensation Heater
2.17 ANTI-CONDENSATION HEATER
Installation
All the accessories required to install the Anti-condensation Heater are available as the
following parts. Order each part separately.
No. Description Q'ty Part Number

1 Junction Harness 1 D1965265*1
2 Heater Power Switch 1 12042570
3 Clamp 1 11050511
4 Screw 1 08010231
5 Heater kit 1 D1175097: EU/AA/KOR/CHN
D1175091: NA/TWN
• *1 This harness (P/N: D1965265) is also used as a harness for dehumidification heater
(PFU), and dehumidification heater (main unit) . If you have already ordered this
harness for these heaters, it is not necessary to order this harness again at this time.
• Do not lift the machine with any optional paper feed units attached
2. Remove the front cover [A].
3. Remove the waste toner bottle [A].
4. Remove the upper left cover [A].
5. Remove the cover [A].
Installation
7. Remove the bracket [A].

8. Remove the screws from the fan cover [B].
9. Remove the PSU exhaust fan (FAN4) [A].
10. Insert the heater harness into the hole [A].

11. Fit the small bumps on the heater into the holes [B] to install the heater [C] ( (M3×6) × 1)
Use a short screwdriver to secure the screw.
12. Remove the cover [A].(Hooks × 2)
13. Connect the connector [A] of junction harness to the connector of heater.( × 1)
Installation
A: To the heater
B: Not used
C: To the optional PFU heater (if installed)
D: To the PSU (PCB17)
14. Store the connector [A] with the connector of heater in the connector holder, then push the
power switch [B] into the switch hole until you feel it click into place.
15. Route the junction harness as shown below.
16. Connect the connector [A] shown in step 13 to CN600.
17. Connect the connector [B] in the holder [C].Do not attach the holder [C] to the PSU
(PCB17), when the dehumidification heater will be installed
18. When installing the dehumidification heater (PFU): Pull out the connector [A] and its
harness to the lower part of the machine. Then uncap the connector isolation cap in the
optional paper feed unit and connect the connector [A] to the uncapped connector.
(Dehumidification Heater (PFU))
Installation
• The mainframe and the optional paper feed unit should be joined to each other if
the dehumidification heater (PFU) is installed. See Dehumidification Heater
(PFU) for details.
Dehumidification Heater (main unit)
2.18 DEHUMIDIFICATION HEATER (MAIN UNIT)
2.18.1 ACCESSORY CHECK FOR IM C300 SERIES
No. Items Q’ty Remarks See Note *2

1 Screw M4 x 6 2 A: Heater Kit
2 Harness 1
3 Heater 1
4 Harness 1 *1 B: Harness
5 Clamps 5 A: Heater Kit
6 Bracket 1 C: Bracket Set
7 Bracket 1
8 Bracket 1
9 Locating pin (Long) 1 E: Pin Set
10 Locating pin (Short) 1
11 Base 1 D: Base Set
• *1 This harness (P/N: D1965265) is also used as a harness for Dehumidification

Heater (PFU), and Anti-condensation Heater. If you have already ordered this harness
for these heaters, it is not necessary to order this harness again at this time.
• *2 All the accessories required to install the dehumidification heater (main unit) are
available as the following kits or components. Order these separately from the heater:
A: Heater Kit (D5730400 for NA/TWN, D5730401 for EU/AA/CHN)
B: Harness (D1965265)
C: Bracket Set (D1965093)
D: Base Set (D1965098)

E: Pin Set (D1965092)
2.18.2 ACCESSORY CHECK FOR IM C400 SERIES
Installation
All the accessories required to install the Dehumidification Heater (main unit) are available as
the following parts. Order each part separately.
No. Items Q’ty P/N Remarks

1 Heater cover 1 D0CB2898
2 Heater 1 D0CB2554 (EU/AA/CHN)
D0CB2552 (NA)
3 Clamps 3 11050760
4 Clamp 1 11050723
5 Screws M 3 x 6 2 04543006Q
6 Junction harness 1 D1965265 *1
7 Harness with the isolation cap 1 D5735340
• *1 This harness (P/N: D1965265) is also used as a harness for dehumidification heater
(PFU), and Anti-condensation Heater. If you have already ordered this harness for
these heaters, it is not necessary to order this harness again at this time.
2.18.3 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR IM C300 SERIES
• Do the following procedure to prevent the harnesses from being damaged.
• Check that harnesses are not damaged or pinched after installation.
1. Attach the two locating pins [A] [B] on the table.
2. Attach the heater bracket [A].
• Pass the connector through the hole in the table.

3. Connect the heater harness [A] to the heater and route it as shown below.
• A:For the dehumidification heater (H3)

• B:For the junction harness
• C:Not used (For the isolation cap)
Installation
• D:Isolation cap
• The connector [C] is not used. Put the connector into the opening.
4. Put the mainframe on the table.

7. Open the front cover and remove the left cover [A].

10. Remove the screws from the fan cover [B].
Installation
12. Remove the switch cover [A].(Hooks × 2)
13. Cut out the switch hole [A] in the switch cover.
14. Push the heater power switch to the switch cover.

15. Connect the heater power switch to the connectors of the junction harness [A].( × 2)
Attach the rocker switch so that the white point [B] is on the upper side of the switch.
• A:Not used (For the drum heater: If installing the anti-condensation heater (H1))
• B:For the locker switch
• C:For the heater harness
• D:For the PSU (PCB17) (CN600)
• Store the connector [A] into the area as shown below, then attach the switch
cover.
16. Connect the connector to CN600 [A] on the PSU (PCB17) and route the junction harness
along the red dotted line in the photo. ( × 1)
Installation
17. Attach the PSU exhaust fan (FAN4).
18. Connect the junction harness [A] to the heater harness and route the junction harness
along the red dotted line in the photo.
19. Attach the rear cover.

20. Attach the two securing brackets [A] [B] at the rear of the machine. ( × 5)
• Use the screws which are holding the rear cover.
21. Attach the securing bracket [A] at the left of the machine. ( × 2)
22. Attach the left cover.

23. Turn ON the switch[A].
2.18.4 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE FOR IM C400 SERIES

• Installation Procedure for b/b-finisher
• Do the following procedure to prevent the harnesses from being damaged.
2. Remove the rear bottom cover.(Rear Bottom Cover)
3. Pull out the waste toner bottle [A]
Installation
4. Pull out the paper tray.
5. Connect the connector of the junction harness to CN600 [A] on the PSU (PCB17).
6. Connect the connector of the junction harness to the bracket [B].
7. Route the junction harness in the red dotted line in the photo.
• A: For anti-condensation heater (H1)

• B:Not used (For the Locker switch)
• C: For the heater harness
8. Slide the tray heater [A] to the paper feed unit and connect the heater harness [B] to the
connector [C].
9. Attach the tray heater cover[A].
Dehumidification Heater (PFU)
2.19 DEHUMIDIFICATION HEATER (PFU)
Installation
There is no need to order individual kits. Part Number "D3GQ0400" for NA/TWN,
"D3GQ0401" for EU/AA/KOR/CHN contains all required accessories to install the heater for
the paper feed tray.
After ordering "D3GQ0400", check the quantity and condition of the accessories against the
following list.
For Installing the Heater:
No. Description Q’ty Remark
1 Dehumidification Heater 1
2 Harness with the isolation cap 1
3 M4 × 10: Screw 2
4 Junction harness 1
- Clamp 5
For Joining the Mainframe and Another Paper Feed Unit:

5 Joint bracket (Front left) 1
6 Joint bracket (Front right) 1
7 Joint bracket (Front center) (only for the optional paper feed unit) 1
8 Joint bracket (Rear) 4
9 Joint bracket (Frame) (only for optional paper feed unit) 1
10 M3 x 6: Screw 11
11 M3 x 12: Screw 1
12 Tapping screw 3 x 8 3
• The following junction harness [A] (D1965265 / Accessory #4) is the same harness
that is supplied with the anti-condensation heater or dehumidification heater (main
unit). So if you already have it, you can use it.
• Do the following procedure not to damage any harnesses.
For Installing the Tray Heater on the 1st Paper Feed Unit
3. Remove the left cover [A].
Installation

6. Remove the screws form the fan cover [B].
8. Remove the switch cover [A]. (Hooks × 2)
9. Cut out the switch hole [A] in the switch cover.
10. Push the heater power switch to the switch cover.

11. Connect the heater power switch to the connectors of the junction harness [A].
Attach the rocker switch so that the white point [B] is on the upper side of the switch.
• A:Not used (For the drum heater: If

installing the anti-condensation heater
(H1))
• B:For the locker switch
• C:For the heater harness
• Store the connector [A] into the area as shown below, then attach the switch
cover.
Installation
12. Reattach the switch cover.
13. Connect the connector [A] to CN600 on the PSU (PCB17) and route the junction harness
along the red dotted line in the photo. ( × 1)
14. Reattach the PSU exhaust fan (FAN4).
• Confirm the above connecters are connected to the PSU exhaust fan (FAN4) when
attaching the PSU exhaust fan (FAN4).
15. Slide in the tray heater [A], and pass the heater harness [B] through the square hole [C].
16. Install the tray heater [A] in the paper feed unit.
17. Connect the connector [A] to the tray heater connector (attached in step 15).
18. Connect the harness [B] to the junction harness (mainframe).
19. Attach two clamps [E] and route the harness through them.
Installation
• A: For this tray heater

• B: For the junction harness of the mainframe
• C: For another optional tray heater
• D: Isolation cap (uncap if installing the heater for 2nd paper tray)
20. Reattach all the covers removed.
21. Turn ON the switch [A].
For Installing the Tray Heater on the 2nd Optional Paper Feed Unit
1. Do the same procedure for the 1st optional paper feed unit from step 1 to step 19.
2. Connect the harness [A] and heater connector for the 2nd tray.
3. Remove the cap on the 1st tray harness and connect the 2nd tray harness [B].
4. Attach three clamps [E] and route the harness through them.
• A: To the 2nd tray heater

• B: To the 1st tray heater harness
• C: Not used
Installation
• D: Cap
5. Reattach all the covers removed.

6. Turn ON the switch[A].
For Joining the Mainframe with the Optional Paper Feed Unit
The mainframe and the optional paper feed unit should be joined with joint brackets after the
dehumidification heater installation, because the heater harness might be damaged if the
mainframe is accidentally removed.
1. Remove the upper cover [A] of the paper feed unit.
2. Remove the rear cover [A] of the paper feed unit.
3. Attach the joint bracket (frame) [C]. ( :Tapping × 1 [A], M3×6: × 1 [B])
4. Reattach the upper cover removed in step 1.

5. Put the mainframe on the paper feed unit.
6. Remove the paper trays from the mainframe and the optional paper feed unit.
7. Remove two screws [A] on the rear panel of the mainframe. Keep these screws until the
joint brackets (rear) are installed.
8. Remove the left cover [B] of the mainframe. ( × 2)
Installation
1: Rear
2: Front
3: Left
9. Join the mainframe with the optional paper feed unit with four joint brackets [A] (front right),
[B] (front left) and [C] (rear) (×2). These brackets are secured with the following screws.
1: Front right
2: Left
3: Rear
[A]: M3×12 (included in this kit)

[B]: M3×6 (included in this kit)
[C] (Upper): Existing screws (×2) (Screws remove in step 7)
[C] (Lower): M3×6 (included in this kit)
10. Reassemble the mainframe and the paper feed unit.
Joining Two Optional Paper Feed Units

1. Attach the joint bracket (front center) [A] to the 2nd paper feed unit that will be installed at
the lowest position. ( :Tapping × 2 (included in this kit))
2. Put the 1st optional paper feed unit on the 2nd paper feed unit that is fitted with the bracket
[A] in step 1.
3. Remove the paper trays.
4. Join the two paper feed units with two joint brackets (rear) [A] and one screw [B]. (M3×6:
× 3 (included in this kit))
Installation
1: Rear
2: Front center
5. Bend and cut off the back cover tab [A] of the upper optional paper feed unit before
attaching it.
6. Reassemble the mainframe and the paper feed units.
When installing a mainframe with two paper feed units, attach the two paper feed units to
each other first, and then attach the paper feed units to the mainframe.
If the machine already has one or more optional paper feed unit(s) attached, be
sure to disconnect the machine and paper feed unit(s), and lift them up separately
when moving/transporting. Otherwise, the handle of the paper feed unit will break
due to the mainframe’s weight, and it can cause an injury.
Controller Options
2.20 CONTROLLER OPTIONS
2.20.1 OVERVIEW
Installation
• Always touch a grounded surface to discharge static electricity from your hands before
you handle SD cards, printed circuit boards, or memory boards.
This machine has I/F card slots for optional I/F connections and SD card slots applications.
After you install an option, check that the machine can recognize it (See Check All
Connections at the end of this section).
Callout Slots Options

[A] I/F slot This is used for one of the optional I/F connections (only one can be
installed):
File Format Converter, IEEE 1284 Interface Board, IEEE 802.11a/g/n
Interface Unit, Device Server Option
[B] SD card Slot 1 (upper) is used for optional applications (PostScript3 Unit, Camera
slot 1 Direct Print Card, XPS Direct Print Option, Data Overwrite Security Unit,
OCR Unit).
[C] SD card Slot 2 (lower) is used for service only (for example,VM Card updating the
slot 2 firmware).
[D] USB I/F These ports (right and left) [B] are used for the IC Card Reader.
[E] USB External options can be connected.
Type B
I/F
Controller Options
2.20.2 IEEE 1284 INTERFACE BOARD TYPE M19 (D3C0-17)
Component Check
No. Description Qty Remarks
1 IEEE 1284 Interface Board 1
2 FCC document 1
3 Notes for users 1
Installation Procedure
• Do not put your hand into the controller box. It will result in a malfunction or injury.
• Before doing any work, touch a metal object to discharge static electricity from the
body.There is a possibility that the IEEE 1284 Interface Board may malfunction due to
static electricity.
Only one of the following network interfaces can be installed at one time:
• File Format Converter
• IEEE 1284 Interface Board
• IEEE 802.11a/g/n Interface Unit
• Device Server Option
1. Remove the slot cover [A].
Controller Options
2. Install the interface board [A] into the slot. (Knob-screw × 2 [B])
When inserting into the slot, push the interface board until it is inserted properly.
Installation
3. Turn ON the power.
4. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option (see Check All Connections at the
end of this section).
The customer should keep the removed slot cover.
2.20.3 FILE FORMAT CONVERTER TYPE M19 (D3BR-04)
Component Check
1 File Format Converter 1
2 Notes for Users 1
Controller Options
body. There is a possibility that the File Format Converter may malfunction due to
static electricity.
1. Remove the slot cover [A].
2. Install the file format converter [A] into the slot and then fasten it with screws.
When inserting into the slot, push the file format converter until it is inserted properly.
Controller Options
3. Plug in and turn ON the main power switch.

4. Check or set the following SP codes with the values shown below.
SP No. Title Setting
SP5-836-001 Capture Function (0:Off 1:On) "1"
Installation
SP5-836-002 Panel Setting "0"
2.20.4 IEEE 802.11A/G/N INTERFACE UNIT TYPE M19 (D3BR-01)
Component Check
1 IEEE802.11a/g/n Unit 1
2 Clamps 2
3 Look and loop fasteners 8
4 Notes for Users 2
• Since disassembly/alteration of a wireless LAN board is illegal, during service

replacements, replace the whole PCB assembly.
• Be sure to give the provided leaflet to the customer.
Controller Options
• Turn OFF the main power and unplug the power cord from the wall socket.If the main
body.There is a possibility that the IEEE 802.11a/g/n Interface Unit may malfunction
due to static electricity.
Installing the wireless LAN board
1. Remove the slot cover [A] from the board slot.
2. Install the wireless LAN board [A] (Knob × 2) into the board slot.
When inserting into the slot, push the wireless LAN board until it is inserted properly.
Controller Options
Installing the antennae

1. Peel off the double-sided tapes on the hook and loop fasteners [A], and then attach them
[A] to the antennae.
Installation
Attach the fasteners to the lower half of the antennae (The side of cable).
You can attach the fasteners to either side of the antenna.
2. Attach "ANT1" (having a black ferrite core) [B] to the rear of the machine, and then attach
"ANT2" (having a white ferrite core) [C] to the front left (forward) of the machine.
3. Attach the clamps [D] as shown below, and then wire the cables and clamp them. ( × 4)
• "ANT1" is a transmission/reception antenna and "ANT2" is a reception antenna.

Do not attach them at the wrong places.
1: Rear
2: Left
Make sure that the cables are not slack. Keep them wired tightly along the covers.
You may have to move the machine if the reception is not clear.
• Make sure that the machine is not located near an appliance or any type of equipment that
generates strong magnetic fields.
• Put the machine as close as possible to the access point.
Controller Options
User Tool Settings for Wireless LAN

Enter the UP mode. Follow the procedure below to perform the initial interface settings for IEEE
802.11a/g/n. These settings take effect every time the machine is powered on.
• You cannot use the wireless LAN if you use Ethernet.

2. Press "System Settings".
• Select "Network/Interface"> "IEEE802.X Authentication" > "IEEE802.X

Authentication for Ethernet". Either the Ethernet or the wireless LAN must be set
to "Inactive".
3. Select "Network/Interface" > "Control Panel:Wireless LAN". Only the wireless LAN options
show.
4. Set the “Communication Mode”.
5. Enter the SSID setting. (The setting is case sensitive.)
6. Set the “Ad-hoc Channel”. You need this setting when Ad Hoc Mode is selected. The
allowed range for the channel settings may vary for different countries.
Region A (mainly Europe and Asia)
Range: 1-13, 36, 40, 44 and 48 channels (default: 11)
In some countries, only the following channels are available:
Range: 1-11 channels (default: 11)
Region B (mainly North America)
Range: 1-11, 36, 40, 44 and 48 channels (default: 11)
7. Set the “Security Method” to specify the encryption of the Wireless LAN.
• The WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy) setting is designed to protect wireless data
transmission. The same WEP key is required on the receiving side to unlock encoded
data. There are 64 bit and 128 bit WEP keys.
Range of Allowed Settings:
- 64 bit: 10 characters
- 128 bit: 26 characters
• Specify “WPA2” when “Communication Mode” is set to “Infrastructure Mode”. Set the
“WPA2 Encryption Method” and “WPA2 Authent. Method”.
WPA2 Encryption Method: CCMP (AES) is fixed.
WPA2 Authent. Method: Select either “WPA2-PSK” or ”WPA2”.
If you select “WPA2-PSK”, enter the pre-shared key (PSK) of 8 -63 characters in ASCII
code. When “WPA2” are selected, authentication settings and certificate installation
settings are required.
8. Press "Wireless LAN Signal Status" to check the machine’s radio wave status using the
Controller Options
operation panel.
Press "Restore Factory Defaults" to initialize the following settings:

• Transmission mode
Installation
• Channel
• WEP
• SSID
• WEP Key
SP Mode and UP Mode Settings for IEEE 802.11a/g/n

The following SP commands and UP modes can be set for IEEE 802.11a/g/n:
SP No. Name Function
SP5-840-011 WEP Key Used to select the WEP key (Default: 00).
Select
UP mode Name Function
SSID Used to confirm the current SSID setting.
WEP Key Used to confirm the current WEP key setting.
WEP Mode Used to show the maximum length of the string that can be used
for the WEP Key entry.
2.20.5 DEVICE SERVER OPTION TYPE M37 (D3GF-10, -11)
Component Check
No Items Q’ty Remarks
1 Cable Ties 2
2 Interface Board 1
3 Ferrite Core 2
Controller Options
• An Ethernet cable is not included with this option.
• There is a possibility that the Device Server Option may malfunction due to static
electricity.
1. Remove the interface slot cover [A].
2. Insert the interface board [A] in the interface slot and then fasten it with screws.
When inserting into the slot, push the interface board until it is inserted properly.
3. Attach the ferrite cores to the Ethernet cable, while looping the cable at 3 cm (approx. 1.2
Controller Options
inch) [A] from each end of the cable.
Installation
4. Only for installing this option in North America, bind both cores with cable ties [A] as shown
below.
5. Insert the Ethernet cable [A] into the Ethernet port on this option.
6. Insert the other end of the Ethernet cable to a PC for network setting.
When you install this option on the main machine for the first time, the interface board must
be connected directly to the PC to set up the IP address and other network settings.
7. Plug the power cord and turn ON the power.
8. Make sure that the machine recognizes this option correctly by doing one of the following:
Controller Options
Confirm that “Optional Network” is displayed in the setting on the operation panel at the location
shown below.
Location : [System Settings] > [Network/Interface]> [Optional Network]
• On the Web Image Monitor, “Optional Network” can be found at the following
location.
Location : [Device Management] > [Configuration] > [Network] > [Option
Network Interface]
• When installing the Device Server Option Type M37, the installation status is not
shown on the Configuration Page.
• The customer should keep the removed slot cover.
What Do the LED Indications Mean?

When this option is properly installed and recognized by the main machine, the LED indicators
light up under the following conditions.
No. Light Color Lights Up When:

1 Green and Yellow 1000BASE-T operates
2 Green 10BASE-T operates
3 Yellow 100BASE-TX operates
1. Enter SP mode, and then set SP5-191-001 (Power Setting: Power Str) to "0 (Off)".
Controller Options
IP Address Setting
This section describes how to set an IP address on this option manually. Not only can you set
an IP address on the same network segment, but it is also possible to set an IP address on a
Installation
different network segment to share a single printer with devices in multiple networks.
• Changing the IP address from the operation panel of the main machine.
1. Press [System Settings] in [Settings] on the operation panel.
2. Press [Optional Networks] in [Network/Interface].
3. Set the IP address, Subnet mask and Default Gateway which the customer specified.
• Changing the IP address from Web Image Monitor.
• When changing the IP address from Web Image Monitor, start Web Image Monitor
through the main machine’s IP address.
1. Start the Web Image Monitor.
2. Log in as the machine administrator.
3. Point to [Device Management], and then click [Configuration].
4. Click "Option Network Interface".
Controller Options
5. Set the IP address, Subnet mask and Default Gateway specified by the customer.
2.20.6 ENHANCED SECURITY HDD OPTION TYPE M10 (D792-09)
Accessory Check
1 Enhanced Security HDD 1
- EMC Address 1
Controller Options
Installation
• When the MFP is already in use (not a new machine) and “Data Encryption Settings” is
enabled, disable Data Encryption Settings before installing this option. If installing
without disabling, the function of the Enhanced Security HDD Option is not
guaranteed.
• When the MFP is already in use (not a new machine), Copy the address book data to
an SD card with SP5-846-051 (Backup All Addr Book) if possible.
1. Remove the standard HDD installed. (HDD)
2. Separate the standard HDD from the bracket.
3. Disconnect the cables from the standard HDD. ( × 2)
Controller Options
4. Remove the enhanced security HDD from its protective pack.
5. Connect the two cables to the enhanced security HDD. ( × 2)
6. Fasten the HDD to the bracket. ( × 4)
7. Install the HDD bracket in the mainframe. ( × 3, × 2)

Controller Options
After Installing the HDD
1. Connect the power cord and turn the machine on. A message prompts you to format the
hard disk.
Installation
2. Touch [Format].
3. Wait for the machine to finish formatting the hard disk.
• Do not touch the power switch while the hard disk format is in progress. Wait for
the machine to tell you that the formatting is finished.
4. Turn the machine off/on after the message tells you formatting is finished.
5. Do this step only if you are installing the option on a machine that is already in use (not a
new machine):
 Enter the SP mode
 Run SP5-853-001, to install the fixed stamps.
 Run SP5-846-052, to copy the address book from the SD card to the HDD.
 Turn off the machine, and then turn it back on.
Controller Options
SP descriptions
• SP5-853-001 (Stamp Date Download)

Downloads the fixed stamp data from the machine ROM onto the hard disk. Then these
stamps can be used by the Settings menu. If this is not done, the user will not have access
to the fixed stamps ("Confidential", "Secret", etc.).
You must always execute this SP after replacing the HDD or after formatting the HDD.
• SP5-846-052 (UCS Setting: Restore All Addr Book)

Downloads all directory information from the SD card.
6. Confirm that "Secure HDD" is displayed in the firmware version list to be sure that
encryption is performed correctly. If "Secure HDD" is displayed, there are no abnormalities
in the Enhanced Security HDD Option and the encryption function is running.
The firmware version can be confirmed in the setting on the operation panel at the location
shown below.
Menu location/item Display
name
[System Settings] >
[Machine/Control
Panel Information]>
[Firmware Version]
SD Card Options
2.21 SD CARD OPTIONS
2.21.1 SD CARD APPLI MOVE
Installation
Overview
There are only two SD card slots (one is a service slot), so only two SD card applications can be
used simultaneously.
However, if multiple SD card applications are merged, three or more SD card options can be
used.
This function is referred to as the "SD card merge function".
The "SD card merge function" is a function which enables the use of three or more functions
within the capacity of two SD cards by physically transferring the function of one SD card to
other SD cards (all SD card options can be stored in two SD cards).
However, SD card applications are under license, and the license is transferred to the target SD
card after the merge. Therefore, the original SD card cannot be used after the merge. It cannot
be used even if it is moved to the target machine.
There is also a process to prevent illegal copying.
In the previous models, the PostScript 3 unit data was prohibited from being moved by the
license. Since the software related to the license has been transferred to the controller board
(PCB24) and is provided as standard equipment in the present model, the PostScript 3 unit data
can be moved.
SD Card Storage Location

1. Remove the paper tray.
3. Open the front door.
SD Card Options
4. Remove the cover [A]. (hook × 1)
5. Insert the SD card into either socket [A] or [B].
SMC Sheet Storage Location

1. Open the ADF.
2. Remove the platen sheet [A].
SD Card Options
3. Store the SMC sheet on the red dotted area [A] as shown below .
Installation
4. Reattach the platen sheet.
The original application SD card should be kept in a safe place, for the following reasons:
• The SD card is the only proof that the user is licensed to use the application.
• The data on the SD card might need to be checked in the future to resolve
problems.
Move Exec
"Move Exec" (SP5-873-001) lets you move application programs from the original SD card to
another SD card.
• Do not turn ON the write protect switch of the system SD card or application SD card
on the machine. If the write protect switch is ON, a download error (e.g. Error Code 44)
occurs during a firmware update or application merge.
1. Turn OFF the power.
2. Remove the SD card slot cover [A].
3. Make sure that a target SD card is in SD card slot 1 (upper). The application program is
moved to this SD card.
4. Insert the source SD card with the application program in SD card slot 2 (lower). The
application program is copied from this source SD card.
7. Select SP5-873-001 "Move Exec".
SD Card Options
8. Follow the messages shown on the operation panel.

10. Remove the source SD card from SD card slot 2 (lower).
11. Attach the slot cover.
13. Check that the application programs run properly.
Undo Exec
"Undo Exec" (SP5-873-002) lets you move application programs from an SD card in SD card
slot 1 (upper) back to the original SD card in SD card slot 2 (lower). This program could be
used if a mistake was made when using Move Exec (SP5-873-001).
• Do not turn ON the write protect switch of the system SD card or application SD card
on the machine. If the write protect switch is ON, a download error (e.g. Error Code 44)
occurs during a firmware upgrade or application merge.
3. Insert the original SD card in SD card slot 2 (lower). The application program is copied
back into this card.
4. Insert the SD card with the application program in SD card slot 1 (upper). The application
program is copied back from this SD card.
6. Start the SP mode.
7. Select SP5-873-002 "Undo Exec."
8. Follow the messages shown on the operation panel.
10. Reattach the SD card slot cover.
SD Card Options
2.21.2 OCR UNIT TYPE M13 (D3AC-23, -24, -25)
Installation
Component Check
1 SD Card 1
Searchable PDF Function Outline

This option adds a searchable PDF function to the scanning function.
• The searchable PDF function performs OCR by the MFP on a document read with the
scanner and embeds text data in the PDF. This permits PDF text browsing, automatic
assignment of filenames, and automatic alignment of document orientation.
• This option is provided with an SD card. By installing an SD card in the MFP, a functional
icon is added to the control unit. Installing software on a PC is not required.
• If this option is installed, various settings related to the searchable PDF function are
available.
• OCR is performed after the document has been read (after being read by the ADF and
output). Therefore, after reading is completed, documents can be collected from the
document glass or ADF.
• Other functions, such as the copy function and printer function, can be used during OCR.
SD Card Options
1. Remove the SD card slot cover [A] from the SD card slots.
2. Insert the SD card in SD slot 1 (upper) with its label face to the front of the machine.
4. Enter the SP mode, and then press “Enter” in SP5-878-004 (Option Setup: OCR
Dictionary).
The SD card ID is saved in the NVRAM, and the ID of the MFP is saved on the SD card.
The MFP and SD card are thereby linked.
5. When “operation complete” is displayed, press "Close”.
• If installation fails, "Failed" is displayed.

• If installation fails, perform the following steps:
1. Check whether it is a used SD card.
2. Turn the main power OFF, and repeat steps 2-5.
6. Cycle the power OFF and ON.
7. Press “Enter” in SP5-878-004 (Option Setup: OCR Dictionary).
Dictionary data is copied to the HDD.
• On the first run, SP5-878-004 links the SD card, and on the second run, copies
dictionary data.
8. Turn OFF the power, and remove the SD card from the SD card slot.
• Keep the SD card in the SD card storage location of the MFP. The original SD
card is needed in the event of a HDD malfunction.
9. Return the SD card slot cover to the original position.
11. Press [Scanner (Classic Mode)] on the Home screen.
SD Card Options
12. Press [Send File Type / Name].
Installation
13. Check if [OCR Settings] is displayed on the [Send File Type / Name] screen.
• After installation, the OCR setting can be changed on the "OCR setting" screen.
• When setting up OCR, set [OCR setting] to [Yes]. (Default setting: [No])
Recovery Procedure
When this option is installed, a function is saved on the HDD, and ID information on the SD card
is saved in the NVRAM. Therefore, when replacing the HDD and/or NVRAM, this option must
be reinstalled.
When only the HDD is replaced, reinstall using the original SD card.
• When only the NVRAM is replaced, if uploading or downloading NVRAM data, reinstall
using the original SD card.If not uploading or downloading NVRAM data, order and reinstall
a new SD card (service part).
• When the HDD and NVRAM are replaced simultaneously, reinstall using the original SD
card.
SD Card Options
Order and reinstall a new SD card (service part).
• Perform reinstallation in the same way as installation.
2.21.3 DATA OVERWRITE SECURITY UNIT TYPE M19 (D3BS-03)
Overview
The machine’s hard disk stores all document data from the Copier, Printer, and Scanner
functions. It also stores the data of users’ Document Server and code counters, and the
Address Book. To prevent data on the hard disk being leaked before disposing of the machine,
you can overwrite all data stored on the hard disk (Erase All Memory). You can also
automatically overwrite temporarily-stored data (Auto Erase Memory).
This option has the same function as the Data Overwrite Security in the Security Functions,
which is standard on this machine. This option should be installed only for customers requiring
the CC certified Data Overwrite Security function.
Component Check
Check the quantity and condition of the accessories in the box against the following list.
1. SD Card 1
- Comments Sheet 1
- Operating Instructions CD-ROM 1

1. Confirm that the Data Overwrite Security unit SD card is the correct type for the machine.
The correct type for this machine is "Type M19".
• If any version other than "Type M19" is installed, the NVRAM has to be replaced,
and this installation procedure has to be done again .
2. Make sure that the following settings are not at their factory default values:
• Supervisor login name
SD Card Options
• Supervisor login password

• Administrator login name
• Administrator login password
Installation
3. Make sure that “Admin. Authentication” is ON.
[Settings] > [System Settings] > [Settings for Administrator] > [Authentication/Charge] >
[Administrator Authentication/User Authentication/App Authentication] > [Administrator
Authentication Management] > [Admin. Authentication]
If this setting is OFF, tell the customer this setting must be ON before the installation
procedure.
[Settings] > [System Settings] > [Settings for Administrator] > [Authentication/Charge] >
[Administrator Authentication/User Authentication/App Authentication] > [Administrator
Authentication Management]> [Available Settings]
Seal Check and Removal

Make sure that the box seals are attached to the box properly. If those are not, this option has
an initial failure.
“VOID” [B] can be seen when the seal is removed.
Before installation, you must make sure the box seals have not been opened since they were
initially sealed at the factory.
1. Check the box seals [A] on each corner of the box.
• Make sure that a tape is attached to each corner.
SD Card Options
• The surface of the tape must be blank. If you see "VOID" on the tape, do not install the
components of the box.
2. If the tape surface does not show “VOID”, remove them from the corners of the box.
3. You can see the “VOID” marks [B] when you remove each seal. In this condition, they
cannot be attached to the box again.
Installing the data overwrite security unit
1. Remove the network cable.
Merge the SD card contents if necessary. (SD Card Appli Move)

3. Insert the SD card (DataOverwriteSecurity Unit) in SD slot 1 (upper) with its label face to
the front of the machine.
5. Enter the SP mode, and then execute SP5-878-001 (Option Setup: Data Overwrite
Security). If the installation fails, "Installation failed" is displayed when this SP is executed.
[If using the same HDD after installing the data overwrite security unit]
If using the same HDD after installing this option, execute the SPs listed below ("1" through
"3") before specifying SP5 -878 001. However, if replacing the HDD, you need only execute
"1".
If the customer continues using the same hard disk, the overwriting of the data stored on
the disk before the option is installed cannot be guaranteed. It is highly recommended to
replace the hard disk with a new one.
• SP5-801-014 (Clear DCS Setting)
SD Card Options
• SP5-832-001 (HDD Formatting (ALL))

• SP5-832-002 (HDD Formatting (IMH))
6. Set SP5-836-001 (Capture Function (0:Off 1:On)) to a value of 0 (disabled).
Installation
8. Print out the System Settings List and make sure that the option was installed
successfully.(see "Check All Connections" at the end of this section)
11. Reattach the network cable.
Confirming the firmware version
When you finish executing SP5-878-001 ([Option Setup: Data Overwrite Security), make sure
to confirm the firmware version before executing "Auto Erase Memory"
1. Enter the SP mode, and then execute SP5-990-005 (SP print mode Diagnostic Report).
Make sure to shut down and reboot the machine once before printing the SMC. Otherwise,
the latest settings may not be collected when the SMC is printed.
2. Make sure that ROM number "D3BC5757A" and firmware version "1.02" or newer appear
in both of the following areas on the report (they must match):
• "ROM Number / Firmware Version" - "HDD Format Option"
• "Loading Program"
Configuring "Auto Erase Memory" (Performed by the Customer)

Refer to "Using "Auto Erase Memory".
2.21.4 CAMERA DIRECT PRINT CARD TYPE M37 (D3GF-30)
Component Check
1 SD Card 1
SD Card Options
2. Insert the SD card (PictBridge) in SD slot 1 (upper) with its label face to the front of the
machine.

4. Attach the SD card slot cover.
5. Make sure that the machine can recognize the option. (see Check All Connections at the
end of this section)
2.21.5 POSTSCRIPT3 UNIT TYPE M41 (D0CJ-26, -27, -28)
Overview
This machine is equipped with a clone program for emulating Adobe PostScript/PDF (hereafter
“Clone PS”) as a standard feature. So, by factory default, it can print using PostScript 3 and
PDF Direct Print, in addition to RPCS.
However, the variety and number of built-in fonts (device fonts) differ between Adobe PS and
Clone PS, sometimes resulting in different printing results.
The PostScript3 Unit Type M41 is an available option to address the possible customer needs
listed below.
• When the customer wants to use device fonts supplied with Adobe PS.
• Since forms and ledgers have been created based on device fonts supplied with Adobe PS,
a changeover to Clone PS requires a redesign of these documents.
• From the viewpoint of a precise printing operation, it is impossible to accept any differences
in output results in comparison with Adobe PS.
SD Card Options
Refer to "PS3/PDF Direct Emulation (Clone PS)" for detailed functions of Adobe PS3/PDF
and PS3/PDF Direct Emulation
Installation
Component Check
1 SD Card 1
2 PS3 Decal 1
Installation Procedure (Adobe PS)
• Since PS3/PDF Direct Emulation and Adobe PS/PDF cannot be launched at the same
time, PS3/PDF Direct Emulation is disabled when PS3 card type M 41 is installed.
2. Insert the SD card in SD slot 1 (upper) with its label face to the front of the machine.
SD Card Options
3. Stick the "Adobe PostScript3" decal [A] on the front face of the MFP.

• Note that the description of Firmware Version shown in the printed Configuration Page
differs between Clone PS and Adobe PS.
PS type Description of Firmware Version
When PostScript3 Unit Type M41 (Adobe RPCS [x.xx.xx] Adobe PostScript 3 [x.xx],
PS) is installed Adobe PDF [x.xx]
Clone PS RPCS [x.xx.xx] PS3 [x.xx], PDF [x.xx]
Initial Settings for the Printer Driver

After installing an SD card, configure the printer driver settings based on the PS type.
• The same printer driver, the PS3 printer driver, can be used for printing either Adobe
PS or Clone PS.
Setting items (Windows):
If interactive communication is enabled, the machine tries to acquire information to configure
automatically.
If configuring manually, select “Adobe PostScript” if Adobe PS is used, and choose “Emulated
PostScript” if Clone PS is used.
1. On the [Start] menu, click [Devices and Printers].
2. Right-click the icon of the printer you want to use.
3. Click [Printer properties].
4. Click the “Accessories” tab and configure settings for Adobe PS/Clone PS using the
PostScript pull-down menu.
SD Card Options
Installation
Setting items (Mac OS X):
If the driver is installed through the Bonjour function or “HP Jetdirect - Socket”, the settings will
be automatically configured.
Automatic configuration will not work if any other protocol is used for installation. In this case,
manual configuration is required.
If configuring manually, select “Adobe PostScript” if Adobe PS is used, and “Emulated
PostScript” if Clone PS is used.
Switching back to Clone PS from Adobe PS

Clone PS can be resumed by removing the Adobe PS card from the SD card slot and applying
the firmware for Clone PS/PDF (“.fwu” or “.rfu”).
• This should be done by service technicians.
In doing this, be sure to apply both PS3 and PDF firmware modules. If only one of them is
applied, the machine will not operate properly. (As a stopgap measure to fix the malfunction,
insert the optional Adobe PS card again into the SD card slot to enable the use of Adobe PS.
Then, Clone PS can be resumed by applying both the PS3 and PDF firmware modules once
again.)
Classification Firmware name Software part number
Clone PS Clone PS3 D0AF5573
component firmware Clone PDF D0AF5575
IRIPS Font D0AF5577
Adobe PS Adobe PS3 D3BD5731
component firmware Adobe PDF D3BD5733
PS3 Font D2415681
SD Card Options
2.21.6 XPS DIRECT PRINT OPTION TYPE M41 (D0CJ-02, -20)
Component Check
No. Description Q'ty Remarks
1 XPS Direct Print SD Card 1
2. Insert the SD card (XPS) in SD slot 1 (upper) with its label face to the front of the machine.

SD Card Options
2.21.7 VM CARD TYPE M37
Component Check
No. Description Q’ty Remarks
Installation
1 SD Card 1
• When installing more than one SD card, perform the merge operation (SD Card Appli
Move).
• Before installing Embedded Software Architecture (ESA) apps, install the Java
platform with a VM card on the machine. Without the Java platform installed, no ESA
app will run on the MFP.
SD Card Options
2. Insert the VM Card in SD card slot 2 [A: Lower Slot].

5. Print out the "Configuration Page", and then check if this option is correctly recognized.(see
"Check All Connections" at the end of this section)
Installing the Java Platform

Insert the SD card and turn the main power on, then the Java platform is automatically
installed.
• Automatic installation takes approximately 1 minute.
• If you turn the power off during installation, the VM card may be damaged.
• Be sure to check the following before turning the power off.
3. Press [System settings], [Extended Feature Information], and then [Extended Feature
Information].
4. If the installation is completed correctly, [JavaTM Platform] appears in the Extended
Feature Information menu.
5. Press [Exit] twice to exit from the Extended Feature Information menu.
Operate the machine with the JavaVM SD card installed in SD Card Slot 2 (bottom slot).
6. Turn OFF the main power and then back on
Check All Connections
2.22 CHECK ALL CONNECTIONS
1. Plug in the power cord.
Installation
3. Print the configuration page.
[Settings] > [Printer Settings] > [List/Test Prints] > [Machine Information] > [Configuration
Page]
All installed options are shown in the "System Reference" column.
Instructions for the Customers
2.23 INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE CUSTOMERS
Please explain the following points to customers when installing the machine. These items are
explained in more detail in the operating instructions.
• How to add paper to the paper feed unit and the by-pass feed unit.
• How to install a toner bottle
• How to handle paper jams
• How to appear Supplies Replacement Video list
1. Click “Check Status”.
2. Click “Maintnc/Inquiry/Mach.Info".
3. Click “Supplies Replacement Video List”.
Instructions for the Customers
4. Select the color that you want to replace, then click .
Installation
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Maintenance Tables
3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
3.1 MAINTENANCE TABLES
Maintenance
Preventive
• Maintenance Tables
PM/Yield Parts Settings
3.2 PM/YIELD PARTS SETTINGS
3.2.1 REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE OF THE PM/YIELD PARTS

There are two ways to reset the PM counter for this machine.
• Method 1: Reset by SP3-701 (New Unit Detection). This is the conventional method
• Method 2: Reset by [PM Counter / New Unit Set] Menu
Method 2 is recommended for its ease of operation.
For the following units, there is a new unit detection mechanism. It is not necessary to reset PM
counters.
• Fusing unit
• PCDU
• Waste toner bottle (When the bottle is replaced AFTER a waste toner full or near-full
message appears on the operation panel)
Method 1: By SP3-701 (New Unit Detection)

2. Output the SMC log data using one of the following ways:
a) Execute SP5-990-001 to print SMC log data.
b) Execute SP5-992-001 to save SMC log data to an SD card. (Refer to "SMC List Card
Save Function")
Print out the PM counter list by following the procedure below.

1. In the SP mode menu, press [PM Counter / New Unit Set].
2. Press [Counterlist print out].
Maintenance
Preventive
3.Press [EXECUTE] to output the PM counter list.
4. Press [Exit].
3. In the SMC data, check the values of the counters in SP7-621-002 to 208, to determine
what parts should be replaced. (Refer to the SP table in the appendix.)
4. Set the following SPs (New Unit Detection) to "1" to reset the PM counter.
Item SP
Fusing sleeve belt assembly SP3-701-116
Pressure roller SP3-701-118
ITB unit SP3-701-093
Paper transfer roller unit SP3-701-109
Waste toner bottle SP3-701-142
(When the bottle is replaced BEFORE a waste toner full or
near-full message appears)
ADF Friction pad: SP3-701-206
Pickup roller: SP3-701-207
Feed roller: SP3-701-208
Paper feed tray (Tray 1) For A Feed roller: SP3-701-147
Friction pad: SP3-701-148
Paper feed tray (Tray 1) for B/Bf Pick-up roller:
SP3-701-158
Feed roller: SP3-701-159
Item SP
Separation
roller:SP3-701-160
Paper feed tray (Tray 2) Feed roller: SP3-701-150
Bypass feed roller SP3-701-169
The PCDU and fusing unit detect a new unit automatically.
5. Turn OFF the main power, and unplug the power cord.
6. Replace the PM parts and turn ON the power.
The machine will reset the PM counters automatically. In the case of the development unit,
developer initialization will also be done automatically.
Method 2: By [PM Counter / New Unit Set] Menu

2. Output the SMC log data using one of the following ways:
a) Execute SP5-990-001 to print SMC log data.
b) Execute SP5-992-001 to save SMC log data to an SD card. (Refer to "SMC List Card
Save Function")

Maintenance
Preventive
3. Press [EXECUTE] to output the PM counter list.
4. Press [Exit].
3. In the SMC data, check the values of the counters in SP 7-621-002 to 208, to determine
what parts should be replaced. (Refer to the SP table in the appendix.)
5. Press [All PM Parts List : New Unit Set].
6. Set the PM part that you want to replace to "YES" under "New Unit Set".
After pressing "YES", the [Exit] key will not be available.
7. Turn OFF the power and unplug the power cord.

8. Replace the PM parts and turn ON the power.
The machine will reset the PM counters automatically. In the case of the development unit,
developer initialization will also be done automatically.
3.2.2 AFTER INSTALLING THE NEW PM PARTS

1. Turn the main power ON, and enter the SP mode.
2. Make sure that the PM counters for the replaced units are "0" with SP7-621-002 to 208.
If the PM counter for a unit was not reset, then execute the new unit detect setting with
SP3-701 again and turn the main power OFF/ON.

1. Press [PM Counter / New Unit Set].
Maintenance
Preventive
3. Press [EXECUTE] to output the PM counter list.
3.2.3 PREPARATION BEFORE OPERATION CHECK

Execute Automatic Color Calibration (ACC) and Forced Line Position Adjustment before
operation check.
1. Execute Automatic Color Calibration (ACC) by referring to "Automatic Color Calibration
(ACC)" section.
2. Exit the User Tools mode, and then enter the SP mode.
3. Do the "Forced line position adjustment" as follows.
• First do SP2-111-003 (Mode c).
• Then do SP2-111-001 (Mode a).
• To check if SP 2-111-001 was successful, watch the screen during the process. A
message is displayed at the end. Also, you can check the result with SP 2-194-010 to
-012.
3.2.4 OPERATION CHECK

Check if the sample image has been copied correctly.
REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
Notes on the Main Power Switch (SW1)
4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
4.1 NOTES ON THE MAIN POWER SWITCH (SW1)
Replacement
Adjustment
&
4.1.1 PUSH SWITCH
The main power button of this machine has been changed to a push-button switch from the
conventional rocker switch. The push switch has characteristics and specifications different
from the rocker switch. Care must be taken when replacing and adjusting parts.
Characteristics of the Push Switch (Main Power Switch (SW1))
The push switch in this machine uses DC (direct current). Therefore, if

the AC power cord is connected to an electrical outlet, power is supplied
to the controller board (PCB24), the operation unit and other modules
even when the main power is turned OFF. When replacing the controller
board (PCB24) and the operation unit in this state, not only these boards,
but other electrical components will be damaged.
So, when performing maintenance work such as replacing parts, in addition to turning OFF the
main power with the push switch, always unplug the AC power cord after the LED on the
operation panel is turned OFF and press the push switch to discharge any residual voltage, see
information below.
• If you unplug the power cord before turning off the LED, some icons on the operation
panel will not appear at the next start-up. Restarting the machine again will solve this
issue.
When you disconnect the power cord from the AC wall outlet, there is still
residual charge inside the machine for a while. Therefore, if you remove
boards in this state, it can cause a blown fuse or memory failure.
• How to remove the residual charge inside the machine
After you unplug the power cord from the AC wall outlet, in order to remove the residual
charge from inside the machine, press the main power switch (SW1). The charge
remaining in the machine is released, and it is possible to remove boards.
In order to remove the residual charge, push the main power switch
(SW1) after you disconnect the AC power cord. At that time, the power ON
flag inside the machine is set. Therefore, after you finish work on the
machine and reconnect the power cord to the AC, even if you do not press
the main power switch (SW1), the machine will start automatically and the
moving parts will begin to move. When working on moving parts, be
careful that fingers or clothes do not get caught.
• Automatic restart deals with cases when you accidentally unplugged the AC power
cord or unexpected power outages. By keeping the power flag ON, after the
resumption of power, the machine will start up automatically.
In rare cases, when you reconnect the AC power cord to a power outlet, the machine does not
start automatically. In this case, the machine has not failed. The cause is due to the timing of
releasing the residual charge. If you press the main power switch (SW1) when the residual
charge was already released, the power ON flag will not be set. At this time, start the machine
manually by pressing the main power switch (SW1).
Shutdown Method
1. Press the main power switch (SW1) [A] on the machine.
2. The shutdown message appears. After the shutdown process, the main power is turned off
automatically. The LED on the operation panel is turned off when the machine completes
the shutdown.
Before removing and adjusting electrical boards, do the following procedure. Otherwise,
the board can be damaged by the residual charge inside the machine and must be
replaced.
3. Unplug the power cord after shutdown.
4. Press the main power switch (SW1) for a second to remove the residual charge inside the
machine.
Forced Shutdown
In case normal shutdown does not complete for some reason, the machine has a forced
shutdown function.
To make a forced shutdown, press and hold the main power switch (SW1) for 6 seconds.
In general, do not use the forced shutdown.
• Forced shutdown may damage the hard disk and memory, and can cause damage to
the machine. Use a forced shutdown only if it is unavoidable.
Replacement
Adjustment
&
Beforehand
4.2 BEFOREHAND
• Before installing options, please do the following:

If there is a fax unit in the machine, print out all messages stored in the memory, the
lists of user-programmed items, and the system parameter list.
If there are printer jobs in the machine, print out all jobs in the printer buffer.
Turn OFF the main switch and disconnect the power cord, the telephone line, and the
network cable.
• Always touch a grounded surface to discharge static electricity from your hands before
you handle SD cards, printed circuit boards, or memory boards.
• Before you start to remove components from the machine, do the following:
• Turn OFF the main power switch (SW1).
• Make sure that the shutdown process has finished and that the LED on the operation
panel has turned OFF.
• Unplug the power cord.
• After the main power switch (SW1) of the machine has been turned OFF, the power
relay board (PCB12) (SDB) keeps the power supply to the controller until the HDD unit
has been shut down safely.
• Press the main power switch (SW1) again to discharge any residual voltage.
Special Tools
4.3 SPECIAL TOOLS
4.3.1 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICANTS
Replacement
Adjustment
Item Part Description Q'ty Unique or Usage
&
Number Common
1 VSST9003 C5Y Color Chart 1 C(General) For checking the image quality
(2SHEETS/3
sets) *
2 C4019503 20× Magnification 1 C(General) For checking the image quality
Scope
3 B6455030 SD Card 2GB 1 C(General) For software upgrade and log
trace
trace
trace
6 VSSG9006 MOLYKOTE 1 C(General) For greasing the drive unit to
G-1077 GREASE reduce noise(Where to Apply
Noise-Reduction Grease)
7 VSSG9005 MOLYKOTE 1 C(General) For greasing the drive unit to
EM-50L reduce noise(Where to Apply
Noise-Reduction Grease)
8 52039502 Silicone Grease 1 C(General) For greasing resin gears
G-501
9 A2579300 Grease Barrierta 1 C(General) For greasing fusing gears
– S552R (Except for fusing rollers)
10 VSSG9008 FLOIL G348 1 C(General) For greasing the drive unit of
scanner(For the guide rod and
the slide rail in the scanner
carriage)
• C-5Y Color Chart is a set of two A4 size charts and looks like this.
Special Tools
4.3.2 WHERE TO APPLY NOISE-REDUCTION GREASE
• When applying grease, You can use both MOLYKOTE G-1077 GREASE and
MOLYKOTE EM-50L.
• Apply grease on the spots indicated in red in the photos and diagrams.
Drive: Fusing Drive Unit
Drive Unit Fusing Drive Gear

Lubrication parts Lubrication spots
1 gear 4 spots
• Drive Unit Fusing Drive Bracket

2 studs 2 spots
Special Tools
Do NOT apply grease on the tips of the studs.
Maximum minimum
Replacement
Adjustment
0.02g 0.004g
&
The Images of the maximum amount [A] and minimum amount [B]
• Drive Unit Fusing Drive Gear
• Drive Unit Fusing Drive Brackets
Drive: Transport Drive Unit: IM C300 series
Description Description
[A] Transport Gear 01 [D] Transport Gear 04
[B] Transport Gear 02 [E] Registration Clutch (CL8)
[C] Transport Gear 03
Transport Drive Bracket

Special Tools

4 studs 4 spots
4 sliding parts 4 spots

• Output Gear 01
1 gear 1 spot
• Output Gear 02
2 gears 1 spot
• Paper Feed Roller Axis

1 axis 1 spot
Special Tools
Replacement
Adjustment
&
• Transport Gear 01 [A]
1 gear 4 spots
• Transport Gear 02 [B]

1 gear 4 spots
• Transport Gear 03 [C]

1 gear 4 spots
• Transport Gear 04 [D]

1 gear 4 spots
Special Tools
• Registration Clutch (CL8) [E]

1 clutch 2 spots
Maximum minimum
0.04g 0.008g
• Transport Drive Bracket
Special Tools
• Output Gear 01
Replacement
Adjustment
&
• Output Gear 02
• Paper Feed Roller Axis
Special Tools
• Transport Gear 01 [A]
• Transport Gear 02 [B]
• Transport Gear 03 [C]
Special Tools
• Transport Gear 04 [D]
Replacement
Adjustment
&
• Registration Clutch (CL8) [E]
Drive: Transport Drive Unit: IM C400 series
[A] Transport Gear 01 [E] Transport Gear 05
[B] Transport Gear 02 [F] Vertical Transport Gear 01
[C] Transport Gear 03 [G] Vertical Transport Gear 02
[D] Transport Gear 04
Transport Drive Bracket

6 studs 6 spots
Special Tools

Apply grease in the range indicated in red in the following diagram.
• [A] The area 0-10 mm from the stepped part of the stud
• [B] The area 0-10 mm from the groove of the stud
• [C] The area 0-10 mm from the groove of the stud
• [D] The area 0-10 mm from the stepped part of the stud
• [E] The area 0-10 mm from the E-ring of the stud
• [F] The area 0-10 mm from the groove of the stud
• Transport Gear 01
1 gear 4 spot
Special Tools
Replacement
Adjustment
&
1 gear 4 spot
1 gear 2 spot
1 gear 3 spots
1 gear 4 spots
Special Tools
• Vertical Transport Gear 01

1 gear 1 spots

1 gear 1 spots
Maximum minimum
0.04g 0.008g
Special Tools
• Transport Drive Bracket
Replacement
Adjustment
&
Special Tools
Special Tools
Replacement
Adjustment
&
Scanner: Scanner Motor: Gear
Timing Belt Gear [A]

• Reduction Gear [B]
2 gears 5 spots
Special Tools
Maximum minimum
0.0125g 0.0025g
• Timing Belt Gear
• Reduction Gear
Scan 5 times to check if the scanner unit works properly, after applying grease.
Special Tools
Tonner: Toner Supply Motor: Gear
Idler Gear [A]

Replacement
Adjustment
1 gear 3 spots
&
Maximum minimum
0.085g 0.0065g
• Idler Gear
Special Tools
Paper Exit: Paper Exit Drive Unit
Studs
4 studs 6 spots
[A] Paper Exit Drive Unit Stud 01 [C] Paper Exit Drive Unit Stud 03
[B] Paper Exit Drive Unit Stud 02 [D] Paper Exit Drive Unit Stud 04
• Gears
9 gears 12 spots
Special Tools
Replacement
Adjustment
&
[A] Paper Exit Drive Gear 01 [E] Paper Exit Idler Gear 02
[B] Paper Exit Drive Gear 02 [F] Paper Exit Idler Gear 03
[C] Paper Exit Drive Gear 03 [G] Paper Exit Idler Gear 04
[D] Paper Exit Idler Gear 01
• Paper Exit Unit Guide
1 guide 1 spots
Special Tools
• Junction Gate
2 tips of the junction gate 2 spots
• Junction Gate Lever

1 lever 1 spot
Special Tools
Replacement
Adjustment
&
Maximum minimum
0.6193g 0.0774g
• Paper Exit Drive Unit Stud 01
• Paper Exit Drive Gear 01
Special Tools
• Paper Exit Idler Gear 01
Special Tools
Replacement
Adjustment
&
Special Tools
• Paper Exit Unit Guide
• Junction Gate
• Junction Gate Lever
Special Tools
1Bin: Drive Unit: Gear
1Bin Drive Unit Bracket [A]
Replacement
Adjustment
4 studs 4 spots
&
• 1Bin Drive Unit Gear 01 [A]
• 1Bin Drive Unit Gear 02 [B]
2 gears 6 spots
Special Tools
Exterior Covers
4.4 EXTERIOR COVERS
4.4.1 FRONT COVER
Replacement
Adjustment
&
2. Remove the front lower cover [A]
Exterior Covers
4. Remove the front cover [A] (pins × 2)
IM C400SRF
2. Remove the front lower cover [A]

4. Unhook the belt’s tip and detach the belt [A].
Exterior Covers
5. Remove the front cover [B]
Replacement
Adjustment
&
4.4.2 UPPER LEFT COVER
IM C400SRF
Exterior Covers
4.4.3 LEFT COVER

1. Remove the upper left cover (Upper Left Cover)
3. Open the front cover and remove the left cover [A].
IM C400SRF
Exterior Covers
4.4.4 REAR COVER

Replacement
Adjustment
&
IM C400SRF
4.4.5 RIGHT REAR COVER

IM C400SRF
Exterior Covers
2. Remove the right rear cover [A]

IM C400SRF
• Remove the right rear cover while pushing it downward.
Exterior Covers
4.4.6 PAPER EXIT TRAY
Paper Exit Tray for IM C300 series/IM C400F
Replacement
Adjustment
2. Remove the paper exit tray [A].
&
Paper Exit Front Cover/Paper Exit Upper Cover/Paper Exit Tray for IM
C400SRF
The following procedure for finisher model below includes steps to remove the paper exit front
cover and the paper exit upper cover.

2. Remove the paper exit front cover[A].
3. Remove the paper exit upper cover[A].
Exterior Covers
4.4.7 SCANNER INNER COVER

1. Remove the ADF and scanner unit. (Scanner Unit with the ADF)
2. Remove the operation panel. (Operation Panel)
3. Remove the cover [A] under the operation panel.
Exterior Covers
Replacement
Adjustment
&
6. Disconnect the harnesses [B] to remove the inner cover [A].
Exterior Covers
7. Remove the scanner inner cover [A].
IM C400SRF
1. Remove the ADF and scanner unit (Scanner Unit with the ADF)
2. Remove the operation panel (Operation Panel)
3. Remove the paper exit front cover[A].
Exterior Covers
Replacement
Adjustment
&
5. Disconnect the harnesses [B] to remove the inner cover [A].
Exterior Covers
6. Remove the scanner inner cover [A].
Exterior Covers
4.4.8 OZONE FILTER

1. Remove the filter cover [A].
Replacement
Adjustment
&
IM C400SRF
2. Remove the ozone filter [A] from the filter cover.
Exterior Covers
4.4.9 REAR BOTTOM COVER
This procedure is for IM C400SRF.

1. Remove the rear bottom cover[A].
4.4.10 RIGHT BOTTOM COVER
These procedures are for IM C400SRF.

1. Remove the front lower cover.
2. Remove the right rear cover.(Right Rear Cover)
3. Remove the right bottom cover[A].
Operation Panel
4.5 OPERATION PANEL
The replacement procedures for the other parts are included in the FSM for the Smart
Replacement
Adjustment
Operation Panel, because these parts are also used with other models.
&
4.5.1 OPERATION PANEL
3. Remove the screws fixing the operation panel [A].
Operation Panel
• Spread a cloth or service mat [A] on the paper exit tray to protect the display.
Place the operation panel on the paper exit tray so that the display faces down.
4. Remove the small rear cover [A].
5. Remove the harness guide[A].
6. Disconnect the connector [A].
Operation Panel
Replacement
Adjustment
&
8. Remove the hinge base cover [A].
9. Remove the hinge base [A].
Check before Installing the New Operation Panel

There is a DIP switch [A] on the sub board in the operation panel unit.
Operation Panel
The switch setting to use depends on the model.

For the IM C300/C400 series, make sure that switches 1,3 and 6 are ON. Otherwise, SC672-11
occurs when starting the machine.
Operation Panel
4.5.2 INTERNAL PARTS

Refer to the FSM for the Smart Operation Panel.
Replacement
Adjustment
&
ADF
4.6 ADF
4.6.1 ADF UNIT

IM C400SRF
Remove the rear upper cover [C] for IM C400SRF.

3. Release the two screws and three tabs for attaching the relay board (PCB12) [A] and FFC
to release the FFC.
ADF
Replacement
Adjustment
&
5. Disconnect the harness [A] from the ADF.
ADF
Disconnect the FFC for the relay board (PCB12) by pulling it out straight, because it does
not have a lock mechanism.
When reassembling, the FFC must be connected straight.
7. Remove the shoulder screw for fixing the ADF.
8. Remove the ADF unit [A] from the machine.
When Installing the ADF

1. Open the ADF.
• Place the platen sheet [A] on the exposure glass.
ADF
• Align the platen sheet with hook and loop fastener [C], with the rear left corner [B] on
the exposure glass as a reference.
Replacement
Adjustment
&
3. Close the ADF.
4. Reopen the ADF.
5. Press the surface of the platen sheet gently to fix it on the ADF firmly.
Adjustment after ADF Unit Replacement

See "Adjustment after CIS Unit Replacement".
4.6.2 ADF REAR COVER

1. Open the ADF top cover [A] and remove the screw.
2. Lift the original tray [B].
ADF
3. Open the ADF [A], and release the five tabs of the ADF rear cover by using a thin
screwdriver.
4. Remove the ADF rear cover [A].
ADF
4.6.3 ADF FRONT COVER

1. Open the ADF top cover [A].
Replacement
Adjustment
&
3. Open the ADF, then release the three tabs of the ADF front cover [A].
4. Close the ADF slightly, then remove the ADF front cover [A] while releasing the two tabs
with a thin screwdriver.
ADF
4.6.4 ORIGINAL FEED UNIT

1. Open the ADF top cover.
2. Slide the shaft [A] of the original feed unit toward the rear to remove it.
4.6.5 PICKUP ROLLER, FEED ROLLER
Before replacing the pickup roller and feed roller, reset the PM counter.
1. Turn the power ON.
2. Reset the PM counter. (Refer to Replacement Procedure of the PM/Yield Parts)
3. Turn the power OFF.
Remove the original feed unit. (Original Feed Unit)

1. Release the hook [A].
ADF
2. Slide the shaft [A], and then remove the pickup roller [B].
Replacement
Adjustment
&
1. Remove the clip [A].
2. Slide the shaft [A], and then remove the pin [B].
ADF
3. Slide the shaft [A], and then remove the feed roller [B].
4.6.6 ADF FRICTION PAD
Before replacing the friction pad, reset the PM counter.


1. Push the lever [A] and then remove the friction pad [B].
ADF
4.6.7 ADF RELAY BOARD (PCB13)

1. Remove the ADF rear cover. (ADF Rear Cover)
2. Remove the ADF relay board (PCB13) [A] while releasing the hook.
Replacement
Adjustment
&
4.6.8 ADF TOP COVER SET SENSOR (S23), ORIGINAL SET
SENSOR (S22)
1. Remove the ADF front cover (ADF Front Cover)
2. Remove the top cover set sensor (S23) [A].
3. Remove the original set sensor (S22) [A].
ADF
4.6.9 ADF MOTOR (M8)

2. Remove the ADF motor (M8).
4.6.10 ORIGINAL FEED CLUTCH (CL4)

1. Remove the ADF front cover. (ADF Front Cover)
2. Release the hook while swinging up the original tray [A], and then remove the harness
guide [B].
3. Remove the original feed clutch (CL4) [A].
ADF
4.6.11 ADF REGISTRATION SENSOR (S24)

1. Remove the ADF front cover. (ADF Front Cover)
2. Open the ADF [A].
Replacement
Adjustment
3. Slide the hook [B], and then remove Scanning guide plate (front side) [C].
&
4. Remove the ADF registration sensor holder [A].
5. Remove the ADF registration sensor (S24) [A] from the holder.
ADF
4.6.12 ORIGINAL FEED SENSOR (S25)

2. Disconnect the harness [A] from the ADF top cover [B], and release the clamp.
3. Remove the harness [A] from the harness guide.
4. Remove the ADF top cover [A].(Pivot screw × 1)
ADF
5. Remove the five screws and release the four tabs, and then remove the inner cover [A].
Replacement
Adjustment
&
6. Remove the original feed sensor (S25) [A].
• When reattaching the ADF top cover, make sure it is set correctly so that the two tabs
fit into the holes.
ADF
4.6.13 CIS UNIT (S21)

1. Remove the following parts
• ADF Rear Cover
• ADF Front Cover
• Original Feed Unit
2. Remove the ADF inner cover [A].(Pivot Screws × 2)
Lift the back of the ADF inner cover [A] while swinging up the original tray [B], and then
slide the ADF inner cover toward the back of the ADF unit.
ADF
3. Disconnect the FFC [A].
Replacement
Adjustment
&
4. Release the hook while swinging up the original tray [A], and then remove the harness
guide [B].
5. Remove the gear bracket [A].
6. Remove the two gears [A].
Do not remove the gear [B], to prevent the inner pin [C] from dropping into the machine.
ADF
7. Open the ADF unit [A] while holding the gear [B] by hand.
8. Open the scanning guide plate (rear side) [C] by pulling the release lever [D].
• Hold the gear [B]. It is not fixed, and may drop into the machine.
• Open the scanning guide plate (rear side) [C] before replacing the CIS unit.
Otherwise, the surface could be damaged.
9. Pull out the CIS unit (S21) [A] from the ADF unit.
The CIS unit (S21) can be easily removed by pushing it from behind.
When reattaching the ADF inner cover, make sure that the shaft [A] fits into the groove (this
is the shaft of the lock lever for the friction pad on the back side of the cover). If the shaft
does not fit, the ADF top cover will not be closed.
ADF
Replacement
Adjustment
&
When reattaching the ADF inner cover [A], move it under the coupling shaft (marked by the
dashed circle) of the original feed unit, and then you can install the ADF inner cover
correctly.
Adjustment after CIS Unit Replacement

Correct the color deviation of the CIS (S21) after replacing the ADF unit or CIS unit.
1. Perform the registration adjustment of the ADF (back side). (ADF Side-to-Side and
Leading Edge Registration)
2. Print an ACC test pattern.
[Settings] icon > [Maintenance] > [Auto Color Calibration] > [Copier Function] > [Start Auto
Calibration] > [Start Printing]
3. Press [Stop].
An error screen will be displayed if [Start Scanning] is pressed.
ADF
4. Turn over the ACC test pattern [A] and set it on the ADF. (Set the arrow position of the test
pattern in accordance with the arrow position of the photograph below.)
5. Exit the User Tools mode, and then enter the SP mode.
6. Execute SP4-482-001 (Read/Restore Std: Rear: Read New Chart).
7. When the correction is completed successfully, [A] is displayed.
If it failed, [B] will be displayed. Repeat steps 4 to 6.
ADF
The causes of the failure may be as follows.
Replacement
Adjustment
• The test pattern was not set correctly.
&
• A jam occurred at the time of reading.
• The ACC test pattern is abnormal (e.g. a pattern is missing).
• The reading position has deviated (4mm or more) due to skewing for example.
Scanner
4.7 SCANNER
4.7.1 SCANNER UNIT

1. Remove the right rear cover. (Right Rear Cover)
2. Remove the upper left cover. (Upper Left Cover)
4. Remove the ADF. (ADF Unit)

5. Remove the grounding plate [A].
6. Disconnect the harnesses and FFC from the scanner unit.

interfere.
Scanner
IM C400SRF
Replacement
Adjustment
&
• When disconnecting or connecting the FFC, push the lock button to unlock it as
shown below.
• If the FFC is not connected correctly, SC101 may occur.
Scanner
7. Remove the scanner unit [A].
4.7.2 SCANNER UNIT WITH THE ADF

1. Remove the following parts
• Rear Cover
• Right Rear Cover
• Upper Left Cover
Scanner
Replacement
Adjustment
&
IM C400SRF
Remove the rear upper cover [C] for IM C400SRF.

release the FFC.
Scanner
6. Release the clamp for the harness [A] to the ADF.
Scanner
Replacement
Adjustment
&
Disconnect the FFC for relay board (PCB12) by pulling it out straight, because it does not
have a lock mechanism.
When reassembling, the FFC must be connected straight.
9. Disconnect the harnesses and FFC for the scanner unit.
interfere.
Scanner
IM C400SRF
When disconnecting or connecting the FFC, push the lock button to unlock it as shown
below.
If the FFC is not connected correctly, SC101 may occur.
10. Remove the scanner unit [B] with the ADF [A].
Scanner
Replacement
Adjustment
&
4.7.3 SCANNER FRONT COVER
1. Remove the front right cover [A] and the hinge cover [B] .
2. Open the ADF.

3. Remove the scanner front cover [A]. Use a short screwdriver.
Scanner
There are five tabs on the back of the scanner front cover.
4.7.4 ADF POSITION SENSOR (S19)

1. Remove the scanner unit. (Scanner Unit)
2. Remove the scanner front cover. (Scanner Front Cover)
3. Remove the scanner upper cover [A].
4. Remove the ADF position sensor (S19) [A].
Scanner
4.7.5 SCANNER HP SENSOR (S20)

1. Remove the ADF unit. (ADF Unit)
Replacement
Adjustment
&
4. Move the scanner carriage to the right.
• To move the carriage, hold the carriage belt and move it carefully.
• Never hold the carriage itself.
5. Remove the brackets [A][B].
Scanner
6. Remove the scanner HP sensor (S20) [B] while lifting up the bracket [A] slightly.
4.7.6 SCANNER MOTOR (M7)

4. Remove the shield plate [A]. ( × 2)
Scanner
5. Remove the scanner motor (M7) with the bracket [A]. ( × 3, belt × 1)
Replacement
Adjustment
&
6. Remove the scanner motor (M7) [A]. ( × 1, × 2)
4.7.7 SCANNER CARRIAGE

Scanner
4. Move the carriage to the right.
• To move the carriage, hold the carriage belt and move it carefully.
• Never hold the carriage itself.
5. Remove the brackets [A][B].
6. Slide the bracket [A] and then detach the carriage belt [B] from the pulley.
Scanner
7. Disconnect the FFC [B] while lifting up the scanner carriage [A]. ( x1)
Replacement
Adjustment
&
• In the area [C], the FFC is attached with double-sided tape. Do not try to strip the
FFC [B] off by force.
• When reassembling, be sure to align the tape position where originally attached.
8. Remove the shaft [B] from the carriage [A].
• Never wipe off the grease on the shaft of the scanner carriage.
Reinstalling the Scanner Carriage

Make sure that the FFC of the carriage is correctly connected and routed referring to the
following points.
• The FFC [A] must be connected straight, and not at an angle.
• Never connect the FFC to the carriage connector at an angle. Otherwise, the BiCU
(PCB1) or the SBU (PCB11) may be damaged.
Scanner
• The FFC must not be sagging and must not drag on the bottom of the scanner unit [B].
• The FFC must be hooked at part [A] of the carriage.
Internal Finisher (IM C400SRF Only)
4.8 INTERNAL FINISHER (IM C400SRF ONLY)
4.8.1 REMOVING THE INTERNAL FINISHER
Replacement
Adjustment
&
2. Remove the paper exit front cover [A].
5. Remove the inner cover [A].
6. Remove the internal finisher [A] from the main machine.
4.8.2 STAPLER UNIT

Replacement
Adjustment
&
3. Remove the stapler unit with bracket [A].
4. Remove the stapler unit [A].
4.8.3 GATHERING ROLLER MOTOR (M18)

1. Remove the internal finisher. (Removing the Internal Finisher)
2. Remove the gathering roller motor (M18) [A] ( x 2, x 1).
4.8.4 PAPER EXIT MOTOR (M17)

2. Remove the paper exit motor bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1).
3. Remove the paper exit motor (M17) [A] ( x 2).
4.8.5 SHIFT ROLLER MOTOR (M19)

2. Remove the paper exit motor. (Paper Exit Motor (M17))
3.
Replacement
Remove the shift roller motor bracket [A] ( x 2).
Adjustment
&
4. Remove the shift roller motor (M19) [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 1).
4.8.6 TRANSPORT MOTOR (M16)

2. Remove the transport motor (M16) [A] ( x 2, x 1).
4.8.7 TRAY LIFT MOTOR (M22)

2. Remove the main board cover.
3. Release the tray lift motor bracket [A].
4. Remove the gear [A] and bushing [B] ( x 1).
5. Remove the gear [A] and shaft [B] ( x 1).
Replacement
Adjustment
&
6. Remove the gear [A] ( x 1).
7. Remove the tray lift motor (M22) [A] ( x 2).
4.8.8 JOGGER MOTOR (M20)

2. Remove the transport motor. (Transport Motor (M16))
3. Remove the paper exit upper cover [A].
4. Remove the cover [A] ( x 1).
5. Remove the guide plate [A] ( x 1).
6. Remove the jogger fence HP sensor bracket [A] ( x 1).
Replacement
Adjustment
&
7. Remove the two screws.
8. Remove the jogger motor bracket [A] ( x 1, x 2).
9. Remove the jogger motor (M20) [A] ( x 2).
4.8.9 EXIT GUIDE PLATE MOTOR (M21)

3. Remove the exit guide plate motor bracket [A] ( x 2, x 1, x 1).
4. Remove the exit guide plate motor (M21) [A] ( x 2).
4.8.10 SHIFT ROLLER HP SENSOR (S37)

2. Remove the shift roller HP sensor (S37) [A] ( x 1).
Replacement
Adjustment
&
4.8.11 GATHERING ROLLER HP SENSOR (S38)
2. Remove the gathering roller motor bracket [A] ( x 2, x 2, x 1).
3. Remove the gathering roller HP sensor (S38) [A] ( x 1).
4.8.12 JOGGER FENCE HP SENSOR (S41)

5. Remove the jogger fence HP sensor bracket [A] ( x 1).
Replacement
Adjustment
&
6. Remove the jogger fence HP sensor (S41) [A] ( x 1, x 1).
4.8.13 ENTRANCE SENSOR (S45)

3. Remove the entrance sensor bracket [A] ( x 1).
4. Remove the entrance sensor (S45) [A] ( x 1, x 1).
5. Remove the anti-static cover from the Entrance Sensor (S45) [A].
4.8.14 PAPER EXIT SENSOR (S43)

Replacement
Adjustment
&
5. Remove the paper exit sensor (S43) [A] ( x1).
4.8.15 REMAINING PAPER SENSOR (S40)

2. Remove the Remaining Paper Sensor bracket [A] ( x 1).
3. Remove the Remaining Paper Sensor (S40) [A] ( x 1).
4.8.16 STAPLE TRAY PAPER SENSOR (S42)

2. Remove the staple tray paper sensor bracket [A] ( x 1).
Replacement
Adjustment
&
3. Remove the staple tray paper sensor (S42) [A] ( x 1).
4.8.17 TRAY LOWER LIMIT SENSOR (S39)

4. Remove the tray lower limit sensor (S39) [A].
Replacement
Adjustment
&
4.8.18 INTERLOCK SWITCH (SW3)
5. Remove the interlock switch (SW3) [A].
4.8.19 STOPPER SOLENOID (SOL3)

Replacement
Adjustment
&
3. Remove the stopper solenoid (SOL3) [A].
4.8.20 MAIN BOARD (PCB25)

4. Remove the main board cover.
5. Remove the main board (PCB25).
Replacement
Adjustment
&
When Reinstalling the Main Board
Check the DIP switch [A] on the old main board. If the settings on the new main board differ
from the old main board, change the settings on the new main board to match the old main
board.
Laser Optics
4.9 LASER OPTICS
• Turn off the main power switch (SW1) and unplug the machine before beginning any of
the procedures in this section. Laser beams can cause serious eye injuries.
4.9.1 WARNING DECAL LOCATION

The warning decal is attached as shown below.
4.9.2 LASER UNITS
• The machine has two laser units. This procedure describes replacement of laser unit 1.
Replacement of laser unit 2 can be done in the same way.
1. Remove the paper exit tray (Paper Exit Tray)
2. Remove the internal finisher.(Removing the Internal Finisher)
3. Remove the screw and connector. Disconnect the stopper of the FFC of the laser unit 1 [A].
Repeat this procedure with the laser unit 2 [B].
Laser Optics
Replacement
Adjustment
&
• Be sure to install the washer under the screw when assembling.
4. Pull the laser unit [A] out slightly, open the connector cover, and then disconnect the FFC
[B]. ( × 1)
Laser Optics
• Unlock the FFC [A] by lowering the white tab.
• Never touch the shield glass under the laser units when replacing them.
Adjustment after Laser Unit Replacement

Do the following settings after replacing the laser unit.
Plug in and turn ON the main power switch (SW1) of the machine.
2. Execute SP2-110-006 to upload the data for new laser unit to the MFP.
If failed, execute SP2-110-006 again. Otherwise the machine cannot print normally.
3. Exit SP mode.
4. Cycle the main power OFF/ON.
6. Execute SP3-011-001 (Manual ProCon: Exe, Normal ProCon).
Do the skew adjustment manually.

Refer to “Color Skew Adjustment”
4.9.3 LD UNIT COOLING FAN (FAN2)

1. Remove the following parts.
• Scanner Unit with the ADF
• Operation Panel
• IM C300 series/IM C400F
• Paper Exit Tray for IM C300 series/IM C400F
Laser Optics
2. Remove the LD unit cooling fan (FAN2) [A]. ( × 1)
Replacement
Adjustment
&
IM C400SRF
• Left Cover
• Rear Cover
3. Remove the scanner rear cover[A] ,scanner rear small cover [B] and rear upper cover [C].
4. Remove the ADF Unit. (IM C300 series/IM C400F)

5. Remove the internal finisher.(Removing the Internal Finisher)
Laser Optics
6. Remove the LD unit cooling fan cover [A].
7. Remove the LD unit cooling fan (FAN2) [A].
PCDU, Toner Supply
4.10 PCDU, TONER SUPPLY
4.10.1 PCDU (PHOTO CONDUCTOR AND DEVELOPMENT UNIT)
Replacement
Adjustment
&
• The PCDU (K) for IM C300 is different from the one for IM C400. Make sure that you
use the correct part number when ordering a PCDU (K).
1. Remove the waste toner bottle. (Waste Toner Bottle)
2. Remove the Fusing Unit. (Fusing Unit)
3. Place a sheet of paper on the open duplex unit.
4. Only when removing the PCDU (K),make sure that there is the bracket [A] as shown in the
photo.
5. Release the ITB contact lever [B].
• This step is not required for removing the PCDU (CMY).
PCDU, Toner Supply
6. Remove the PCDU [A]. (The examples [A] in the photo are for yellow)
Check that the ITB has no tension before removing the PCDU. Otherwise, the ITB may be
damaged. To release the tension of the ITB, turn the ITB contact cam's screw [A]
counterclockwise, until the flat part of the half moon on the screw points to the right.
• Before putting the PCDU back in the machine, check that the ITB has no tension.
See step 6 for how to do this.
7. Put the removed PCDU on a flat surface with a sheet of paper under it.
• After replacing the PCDU, set the ITB contact lever released in step 5.
• A new unit detection mechanism for the PCDU clears the PM counters
PCDU, Toner Supply
automatically.
• After replacing the PCDU, do the skew adjustment manually. See “Color Skew
Adjustment”.
Replacement
4.10.2 TONER BOTTLE SENSOR BOARD (PCB7)
Adjustment
&
• Rear Cover
• Left Cover
• PSU (AC) (PCB17), PSU (DC) (PCB16)
• High-Voltage Power Supply (Development) (PCB22)
2. Remove the toner bottle sensor board (PCB7) [A].
4.10.3 TONER SUPPLY MOTORS (M1-M4)
• The following is the replacement procedure for Y. The motors for the other three colors
can be replaced with the same procedure as Y.
• Rear Cover
• Left Cover
• Controller Box
• Toner Bottle Sensor Board (PCB7)
PCDU, Toner Supply
2. Remove the toner supply motor unit [A].
3. Remove the gear [A].
4. Remove the shaft [A], bearing [B], and gear [C].
5. Remove the toner supply motor [A] (M1-M4).
PCDU, Toner Supply
4.10.4 TONER TRANSPORT SECTION
Before replacing the toner transport section (the toner sub-hopper), reset
the PM counter and execute the forced toner supply.
Replacement
Adjustment
&
3. Set the following SPs (Manual New Unit Set) to “1” depending upon the color of the
replaced unit to reset the PM counter.
• SP3-701-220 (Manual New Unit Set: Toner Sub Hopper:Bk)
• SP3-701-221 (Manual New Unit Set: Toner Sub Hopper:C)
• SP3-701-222 (Manual New Unit Set: Toner Sub Hopper:M)
• SP3-701-223 (Manual New Unit Set: Toner Sub Hopper:Y)
4. Set the following SPs (Toner supply flag) to “1” depending upon the color of the replaced
unit.
• SP3-510-031 (Image Quality Adj.: Exec Flag Init Toner Replenishment: Bk)
• SP3-510-032 (Image Quality Adj.: Exec Flag Init Toner Replenishment: C)
• SP3-510-033 (Image Quality Adj.: Exec Flag Init Toner Replenishment: M)
• SP3-510-034 (Image Quality Adj.: Exec Flag Init Toner Replenishment: Y)
5. Exit from the SP mode.
Remove the following parts.

• Rear Cover
• Left Cover
• Controller Box
• Toner Supply Motors (M1-M4)
PCDU, Toner Supply
• After removing the toner supply motors (M1-M4), secure four screws [A] on the
toner transport section to prevent toner from flying off.
1. Remove the toner bottles (all colors).

2. Remove the PCDU (all colors). (PCDU (Photo Conductor and Development Unit))
3. Remove the toner supply unit [A].
• Pull out the toner supply unit upward at an angle.
PCDU, Toner Supply
4. Remove the toner transport section [A].
Replacement
Adjustment
&
Waste Toner
4.11 WASTE TONER
4.11.1 WASTE TONER BOTTLE
When you replace the waste toner bottle AFTER a waste toner full or
near-full message appears on the operation panel, the PM counters are
automatically cleared after turning the main power ON.
When you replace the waste toner bottle BEFORE a waste toner full or near-full message
appears on the operation panel, do the following procedure to reset the PM counter.
Pull out the paper tray.(This procedure is for IM C300 series/IM C400F)
2. Pull out the waste toner bottle [A].
Waste Toner
3. Install the five waste toner bottle caps on the waste toner inlets. The examples [A] in the
photo are for black.
Replacement
Adjustment
&
4.11.2 WASTE TONER FULL SENSOR (S36)
2. Remove the waste toner full sensor (S36) [A].
Waste Toner
4.11.3 WASTE TONER BOTTLE SET SENSOR (S26)

2. Remove the waste toner bottle set sensor (S26) [A].
• Release the tab with a jeweler’s screwdriver to remove the sensor.

3. Remove the harness from the waste toner bottle set sensor (S26) [A]. ( × 1)
Image/Paper Transfer
4.12 IMAGE/PAPER TRANSFER
4.12.1 ITB (IMAGE TRANSFER BELT) UNIT
Replacement
Adjustment
Before replacing the ITB unit, reset the PM counter.
&

• Waste Toner Bottle
• PCDU (Photo Conductor and Development Unit)
• Fusing Unit
1. Remove the tension spring cover [A].
IM C400SRF
2. Release the tension spring [A].

IM C400SRF
3. Release the tension belt [A].

IM C400SRF
4. Put a sheet of paper [A] on the duplex unit with the short edge of the paper pointing
towards the ITB unit.
Replacement
Adjustment
&
• This is to protect the paper transfer unit from toner when removing the ITB unit.
5. Remove the ITB unit securing bracket [A].
6. Pull out the ITB unit [A].
After Replacing the Image Transfer Belt Unit

Do the following after replacing the ITB unit.
2. Set SP1-001-031 (Leading Edge Registration Std. Measure: On/Off) to “1”.
3. Execute SP2-111-004 (Forced Line Position Adj. Mode d).
4. SP values from SP1-001-033 to 040 (Leading Edge Registration Offset Standard: 1 to 8)
are updated by the above steps.
5. Reset SP1-001-031 to “0”.
6. Exit from the SP mode.
4.12.2 ITB LIFT MOTOR (M14)

• Rear Cover
• Left Cover
• Controller Box
• PSU Exhaust Fan (FAN4)
• High-Voltage Power Supply (Transfer) (PCB23)
• Toner Supply Unit (Toner Transport Section)
• Development Motor (CMY) (M9)
• Drum Motor (CMY) (M10)
• Drum Motor (M11)
• Development Clutch (K) (CL5)
• AC Detection Board (PCB18)
• Fusing Motor (M13)
• Paper Transport Motor (M12)
• Drive Unit
2. Remove the ITB lift unit [A].
3. Remove the cover [A]. ( × 2)
Replacement
Adjustment
&
4. Remove the gear [A] and ITB lift motor (M14) [B]. ( × 2)
4.12.3 ITB LIFT HP SENSOR (S33)

• Rear Cover
• Left Cover
• Controller Box

• Drive Unit
2. Remove the ITB lift unit [A].
3. Remove the ITB lift HP sensor (S33) with the bracket [A].
4. Remove the ITB lift HP sensor (S33) [A]. (Hook × 2)
4.12.4 ID SENSOR (M27-M29)

1. Remove the ITB unit. (ITB (Image Transfer Belt) Unit)
2. Remove the guide plate [A].
Replacement
Adjustment
&
3. Remove the ID sensor [A] with the bracket.
5. Remove the ID sensors (M27-M29) [A].
• ID sensor(front) (S27)
• ID sensor(center) (S28)
• ID sensor(rear) (S29)
• When cleaning the ID sensor, wipe the parts [A] with a damp cloth.
• Do not wipe it with a dry cloth, or the ID sensor may attract dirt because of static
electricity. Let it dry naturally if necessary.
Before Installing a New ID Sensor Board

Do the following adjustment before installing a new ID sensor board.
The correction coefficients must be entered before replacement.

Enter correction coefficients into ID sensor(center) (S28) only.
1. Plug in and turn ON the main power.
3. Enter two correction coefficients in the dotted square in the photo for the ID sensor with the
SP modes, referring to the barcode sheet provided with the new ID sensor board.
Value SP No. Category
1 3-331-021 ID Sen. Sensitivity Coef.: Set K2: Check
2 3-331-031 ID Sen. Sensitivity Coef.: Set Diffuse Ratio Correction Coef.
Enter correction coefficients on barcode sheet for value 1 and 2.
• For example, enter “1.02” with value 2.
Replacement
Adjustment
&
4.12.5 ID SENSOR SHUTTER SOLENOID (SOL2)
• Waste Toner Bottle
• PCDU (Photo Conductor and Development Unit)
• Fusing Unit
• ITB (Image Transfer Belt) Unit
2. Remove the guide plate [A].
3. Remove the ID sensor (S27-S29) [A] with the bracket.
4. Remove the ID sensor shutter solenoid (SOL2) [A].
4.12.6 PAPER TRANSFER ROLLER UNIT
Before replacing the paper transfer roller unit, reset the PM counter.
Open the right door.
• If you find paper dust on the registration section when you open the duplex unit,
remove the dust. Otherwise, the dust causes lines on the image.
1. Remove the paper transfer roller unit [A] while holding the knobs on both ends of the paper
transfer roller with your fingers.
Drive
4.13 DRIVE
4.13.1 OVERVIEW
Replacement
Adjustment
&
No. Description No. Description
1 Development motor (CMY) (M9) 8 Registration clutch (CL8)
2 Drum motor (CMY) (M10) 9 Duplex clutch (CL6)
3 Drum motor (M11) 10 Bypass feed clutch (CL7)
4 Development clutch (K) (CL5) 11 Paper feed clutch (CL9)
5 Tray lift motor (M15) 12 Bypass tray lift clutch (CL1)
6 Fusing motor(M13) 13 Reverse clutch (CL2)
7 Paper transport motor (M12) 14 Paper exit clutch (CL3)
Drive

1 Development motor (CMY) (M9) 9 Duplex clutch (CL6)
2 Drum motor (CMY) (M10) 10 Bypass feed clutch (CL7)
3 Drum motor (M11) 11 Paper feed clutch (CL9)
4 Development clutch (K) (CL5) 12 Bypass tray lift clutch (CL1)
5 Tray lift motor (M15) 13 Reverse clutch (CL2)
6 Fusing motor(M13) 14 Paper exit clutch (CL3)
7 Paper transport motor (M12) 15 Vertical transport clutch (CL10)
8 Registration clutch (CL8) - -
Drive
Replacement
Adjustment
&
1 Development motor (CMY) (M9) 9 Duplex clutch (CL6)
2 Drum motor (CMY) (M10) 10 Bypass feed clutch (CL7)
3 Drum motor (M11) 11 Paper feed clutch (CL9)
4 Development clutch (K) (CL5) 12 Bypass tray lift clutch (CL1)
5 Tray lift motor (M15) 13 Reverse clutch (CL2)
6 Fusing motor(M13) 14 Paper exit clutch (CL3)
7 Paper transport motor (M12) 15 Vertical transport clutch (CL10)
8 Registration clutch (CL8) - -
Drive
4.13.2 DEVELOPMENT MOTOR (CMY) (M9)

• Rear Cover
• Left Cover
• Controller Box
2. Remove the development motor (CMY) (M9) [A]. ( × 4, × 1)
The motor with the white label is for the IM C300 series.
The motor with the green label is for the IM C400 series.
Drive
4.13.3 DRUM MOTOR (CMY) (M10)

Replacement
Adjustment
• Rear Cover
&
• Left Cover
• Controller Box
2. Remove the drum motor (CMY) (M10) [A]. ( × 4, × 1)
Drive
4.13.4 DRUM MOTOR (M11)

• Rear Cover
• Left Cover
• Controller Box
2. Remove the drum motor (M11) [A]. ( × 4, × 1)
Drive
4.13.5 DEVELOPMENT CLUTCH (K) (CL5)

Replacement
Adjustment
• Rear Cover
&
• Left Cover
• Controller Box
2. Remove the development clutch cover [A] by rotating it counterclockwise.
3. Remove the bearing [A].

4. Remove the development clutch (K) (CL5) [B].
IM C300 series
Drive
IM C400 series
4.13.6 DRIVE UNIT

• Rear Cover
• Left Cover
• Controller Box
2. Remove the gear cover [A], belt [B], and grounding plate [C]. ( × 3, × 1)
Drive
IM C300 series
Replacement
Adjustment
&
IM C400 series
3. Remove the drive unit [A]. ( × 6)

IM C300 series
Drive
IM C400 series
4.13.7 TRAY LIFT MOTOR (M15)

• Rear Cover
• Left Cover
• Controller Box
• Drive Unit
Drive
1. Remove the tray lift motor unit [A].
Replacement
Adjustment
&
2. Remove the motor cover [A]. ( × 2)
3. Remove the tray lift motor (M15) [A]. ( × 2)

• Rear Cover
• Rear Bottom Cover
• Tray Set Sensor (S34)
Drive
1. Remove the tray lift motor (M15) [A]
4.13.8 FUSING MOTOR (M13)

• Rear Cover
• Left Cover
• Controller Box
2. Remove the cover [A]. ( × 2, × 1)
IM C300 series
Drive
IM C400 series
Replacement
Adjustment
&
3. Remove the high-voltage power supply (Development). (High-Voltage Power Supply
(Development) (PCB22))
4. Release the harness and remove the harness guide [A]. ( × 4, × 1)
5. Remove the fusing motor (M13) [A]. ( × 4)
4.13.9 PAPER TRANSPORT MOTOR (M12)

• Rear Cover
• Left Cover
• Controller Box
Drive

2. Remove the fusing motor bracket [A].
3. Remove the harness guide [A]. ( × 3, × 14)
• There are connectors behind the harness guide. Remove the guide carefully.
IM C300 series
Drive
IM C400 series
Replacement
Adjustment
&
4. Remove the paper transport motor (M12) [A].
IM C300 series
Drive
IM C400 series
4.13.10 DUPLEX CLUTCH (CL6), BYPASS FEED CLUTCH (CL7),

REGISTRATION CLUTCH (CL8), PAPER FEED CLUTCH (CL9),
VERTICAL TRANSPORT CLUTCH (CL10)

• Rear Cover
• Left Cover
• Controller Box
1. Remove the gear cover [A] and gear [B]. ( × 1, × 1)
2. Remove the grounding plate [C]. ( × 2)
Drive
3. Remove the paper transport unit [D]. ( × 3)
Replacement
Adjustment
&
4. Remove the paper transport unit cover [A]. ( × 4)
5. Remove each clutch. ( × 1 each)
[A]: Duplex clutch (CL6)

[B]: Bypass feed clutch (CL7)
[C]: Paper feed clutch (CL9)
[D]: Registration clutch (CL8)
Drive

• Rear Cover
• Left Cover
• Controller Box
1. Remove the gear cover [A] and grounding plate [B].
2. Remove the gear [C].
3. Remove the paper transport Unit [D].
4. Remove the paper transport unit cover [A].
Drive
5. Remove the four speed nuts [A].
Replacement
Adjustment
&
6. Remove each clutch.
[A]: Duplex clutch (CL6)

[B]: Bypass feed clutch (CL7)
[C]: Vertical transport clutch (CL10)
[D]: Paper feed clutch (CL9)
[E]: Registration clutch (CL8)
Fusing
4.14 FUSING
4.14.1 FUSING UNIT
• Turn OFF the main power switch (SW1) and wait until the fusing unit cools down
before beginning any of the procedures in this section. The fusing unit can cause
serious burns.
• Do not touch the surface of the sleeve belt, when replacing the fusing unit.
• Basically, the entire fusing unit must be replaced when SC544-00 or SC554-00 occurs.
• In some cases, the fusing unit need not be replaced if SC544-00 or SC554-00 occurs.
See “Actions When SC554-00 Occurs” for these cases.
The fusing unit features the new unit detection function, so it is not necessary to reset the PM
counter manually when replacing the fusing unit and dust filter together.
1. Release the left and right lock levers, then pull out the fusing unit [A].
Fusing
4.14.2 FUSING UPPER COVER

1. Remove the fusing unit. (Fusing Unit)
2. Remove the fusing upper cover [A]. ( × 4)
Replacement
Adjustment
&
4.14.3 FUSING LOWER COVER
2. Remove the fusing lower cover [A]. ( × 4)
4.14.4 FUSING ENTRANCE GUIDE PLATE

2. Remove the fusing entrance guide plate [A]. ( × 2)
Fusing
• There are two screw holes for each screw on the entrance guide plate. Use the
outer holes when tightening the entrance guide plate.
• Different types of screws are used for [A] and [B]:
[A]: Shoulder screw
[B]: Double sems screw (a screw with a washer)
4.14.5 FUSING THERMOSTAT (TH6)

1. Remove the fusing upper cover. (Fusing Upper Cover)
2. Remove the fusing thermostat (TH6) [A]. ( × 2)
• Never reuse an activated thermostat. Use a new thermostat for replacement.
4.14.6 FUSING THERMISTOR (NON-CONTACT SENSOR) (S10)
• If the hook of the fusing thermistor (non-contact sensor) (S10) is broken, the fusing
thermistor (non-contact sensor) (S10) cannot be attached. Replace the entire fusing
unit in that case.
Fusing
2. Push the hooks and remove the fusing thermistor (non-contact sensor) (S10) [A]. ( ×
1).
Replacement
Adjustment
&
4.14.7 PRESSURE ROLLER THERMISTORS (TH2-TH4)
1. Remove the fusing upper cover (Fusing Upper Cover)
2. Raise the fusing lever.
3. Remove the bracket [A]. ( × 4)
Fusing
• Lift the fusing lever [A] while removing the upper screws.
4. Remove the pressure roller thermistors [A], [B] or [C].

A: Pressure roller thermistor(edge: front) (TH2)
B: Pressure roller thermistor(edge: center) (TH4)
C: Pressure roller thermistor(edge: rear) (TH3)
Fusing
4.14.8 PRESSURE ROLLER
Before replacing the pressure roller, reset the PM counter.
Replacement
Adjustment
&
Remove the fusing sleeve belt assembly. (Fusing Sleeve Belt Assembly)
1. Remove the pressure roller [A].
4.14.9 FUSING SLEEVE BELT ASSEMBLY
Before replacing the fusing sleeve belt assembly, reset the PM counter.

• Fusing Lower Cover
• Fusing Entrance Guide Plate
• Fusing Upper Cover
1. Raise the fusing exit guide plate [A].
Fusing
Place a cloth or sheet of paper under the fusing unit when removing the fusing lower cover.
Otherwise, the screw(s) and gear(s) exposed after removing the cover will scratch or
transfer grease to the work surface.
2. Remove the springs [B], which are on both ends of the separation plate [A], from the holes
in the frame. ( × 2)
3. Remove the springs [B], which are on both ends of the separation plate [A], from the holes
in the separation plate. ( × 2)
Fusing
4. Rotate the separation plate [A], and remove it from the frame.
Replacement
Adjustment
&
Do not apply excess force to the separation plate when removing it, to prevent the
separation plate from deforming.
When reattaching the separation plate, make sure that the plate is firmly attached to the
frame hole.
5. Remove the fusing lamp harnesses. ( × 2)
6. Remove the screws on the rear frame [A]. ( × 6)
When reattaching the harness, route the harness exactly the same way as before removal.
Fusing
7. Remove the screws of the frame [A] at the right.
8. Remove the screws of the frame [A] at the left. ( × 2)
9. Pull out the rear frame [A], and take out the fusing sleeve belt assembly [B].
Do not touch the surface of the fusing sleeve belt assembly.

When reattaching the rear frame, do not let the fusing sleeve belt hit the projection of the
thermostat and the frame.
Fusing
Replacement
Adjustment
&
When reattaching the fusing sleeve belt assembly, do not let the fusing sleeve belt assembly hit
the projection of the sensor or the screws on the stay.
Make sure that both side plates fit right into the positioning bumps on the frame before securing
the screws.
The new fusing sleeve belt assembly has a jig [A] that must be removed. Set the fusing sleeve
belt assembly first, tighten the screws, and then remove the jig.
Fusing
4.14.10 FUSING ENTRANCE SENSOR (S3)

1. Open the right door.
• If you find paper dust in the registration section when you open the right door,
remove the dust. Otherwise, the dust can cause lines on the image.
2. Remove the fusing entrance sensor (S3) [A].

IM C400SRF
Fusing
Replacement
Adjustment
&
4.14.11 FUSING EXIT SENSOR (S8)
• Fusing Unit
• Operation Panel
• Scanner Inner Cover
• Paper Exit Tray
• Paper Exit Unit
Remove the fusing unit and paper exit unit for IM C400SRF
2. Remove the fusing exit sensor (S8) [A].
Fusing
4.14.12 FUSING THERMOPILE (TH1)

• Fusing Unit
• Operation Panel
• Paper Exit Tray
• Paper Exit Unit
Remove just the fusing unit and paper exit unit for IM C400SRF
2. Remove the fusing thermopile (TH1) with the bracket [A].
3. Remove the fusing thermopile (TH1) [A]. ( × 1)
Fusing
4.14.13 NEW FUSING UNIT DETECTION FUSE (S9)

1. Remove the fusing unit.(Fusing Unit)
Replacement
Adjustment
3. Remove the new fusing unit detection fuse (S9) [A] if the old blown fuse is attached. ( x
&
1)
4. Connect the fuse connector, and insert the fuse into place from the upper side.
• Refer to the flow chart below when SC544-00 or SC554-00 occurs. (Actions
When SC554-00 Occurs)
4.14.14 ACTIONS WHEN SC554-00 OCCURS

Basically, the entire fusing unit must be replaced when SC554-00 occurs. However, the old
fusing unit can continue to be used if no damage is found during inspection, following the
flowchart below.
Fusing
*1:Make sure to keep the door closed when executing SP5-810-002 (Fusing SC Reset Hard
High Temp Detection). If executed with the door open, the SC will not be cleared. If the SC
reset procedure is executed when the door is open, "SC reset failed" will be shown without
blowing the fuse for new fusing unit detection.
If the door is opened during the SC reset procedure, the fuse is blown, but the SC reset
procedure is not completed and "SC reset failed" will be shown.
“SC reset failure” will be shown when this SP (SP5-810-002 (Fusing SC Reset Hard High Temp
Detection)) is executed if an SC other than SC554-00 occurred.
*2: If there is no fuse for new unit detection (such as in the fusing unit that comes with the
machine from the factory), install a fuse.
• Never use a damaged fusing unit.

• Inspect the entire fusing unit carefully if you will continue to use this unit.
Paper Feed
4.15 PAPER FEED
4.15.1 IM C300 SERIES
Replacement
Adjustment
Paper Feed Roller, Friction Pad
&
Before replacing the paper feed roller and friction pad, reset the PM
counter.
Pull out the paper tray.

1. Pull out the bearing. ( × 1)
2. Lift up the shaft, then remove the sub paper feed roller [A]. (Hooks × 2)
Paper Feed
3. Remove the paper feed roller [A]. (Hook × 1)
4. Remove the friction pad [A]. (Hooks × 2)
Registration Sensor (S32), Paper Feed Sensor (S31)

• If you find paper dust in the registration section when you open the duplex unit,
2. Pull down the guide plate [A].
Paper Feed
3. Remove the sensor cover [B].
Replacement
Adjustment
&
4. Remove the sensor bracket [A].
5. Remove the registration sensor (S32) [A]. (Hook × 4)

6. Remove the paper feed sensor (S31) [B]. (Hook × 4)
Paper Feed
Tray Paper End Sensor (main unit) (S30)

2. Remove the tray paper end sensor (main unit) (S30) [A]. (hook × 2)
When reattaching the tray paper end sensor (main unit) (S30), make sure that the shaft of
the feeler is hooked onto the bracket [A].
Tray Lift Sensor (S35)

2. Remove the tray lift sensor (S35) [A]. (hook × 2)
Paper Feed
Draw-in Unit
• Rear Cover
Replacement
Adjustment
&
• Left Cover
2. Remove the screw.
3. Remove the draw-in unit [A] with bracket.
4. Remove the bracket [B] and grounding plate [C] from the draw-in unit [A].
Paper Feed
• When installing the draw-in unit, fit the bracket’s holes onto the bosses on the
mainframe. ( × 4)
4.15.2 IM C400 SERIES
Pick-up roller/Paper feed roller/Friction roller
Before replacing the Pick-up roller,Paper feed roller and Friction roller,
reset the PM counter.
Pull out the paper feed tray.

1. Remove the waste toner bottle.(Waste Toner Bottle)
2. Remove the roller holder [A].
Paper Feed
3. Remove the Pick-up roller [A],Paper feed roller [B] and Friction roller [C].
Replacement
Adjustment
&
Paper Feed Unit
• Rear Cover
• Front Cover
• Right Bottom Cover
• Duplex Unit
• Bypass Feed Unit
2. Remove the guide [A]
3. Remove the brackets [A] [B] .
Paper Feed
4. Remove the guide [A].
5. Remove the paper feed unit [A].
Paper Feed Sensor (S31)

1. Remove the paper feed unit.(Paper Feed Unit)
2. Remove the paper feed sensor bracket [A].
3. Remove the paper feed sensor (S31) [A].(Hook x 4)
Paper Feed
Tray Paper End Sensor (main unit) (S30)

2. Remove the tray paper end sensor (main unit) (S30) [A].(Hook x 4)
Replacement
Adjustment
&
Tray Lift Sensor (S35)
2. Remove the tray lift sensor (S35) [A].(Hook x 4)
Paper Feed
Registration Sensor (S32)

• If you find paper dust in the registration section when you open the duplex unit,
2. Remove the sensor cover [A].
4. Remove the registration sensor (S32) [A]. (Hook × 4)
Paper Feed
Tray Set Sensor (S34)

1. Remove the rear cover.(Rear Cover)
3. Remove the stay [A].
Replacement
Adjustment
4. Remove the sensor bracket [B].
&
5. Remove the tray set sensor (S34) [A].
Paper Feed
Draw-in Unit
1. Remove the rear cover.(Rear Cover)
3. Remove the stay [A].
4. Remove the draw-in unit [B].
Bypass
4.16 BYPASS
4.16.1 BYPASS TRAY
Replacement
Adjustment
1. Open the bypass tray [A].
&
2. Remove the E-rings [A], and stopper. (Stopper x 1)
3. Close the bypass tray [A] slightly and pull it out upwards.
Since the bearing on the left side of the main machine is C-cut, align the shaft in the
direction of the cut and pull it out.
Bypass
4.16.2 BYPASS FEED UNIT
The bypass feed roller is attached to the bypass feed unit.Therefore, when replacing the bypass
feed unit, it is necessary to reset the PM counter.
Refer to "Replacement Procedure of the PM/Yield Parts".
1. Remove the duplex unit. (Duplex Unit)

2. Disconnect the connector.
3. Remove the two screws.
Bypass
4. Remove the bypass feed unit [A].
Replacement
Adjustment
&
• Lift up the left side of the unit and remove it while pulling it out forward.
4.16.3 PAPER END SENSOR (BYPASS) (S6)

1. Remove the duplex unit.(Duplex Unit)
2. Remove the bypass feed unit. (Bypass Feed Unit)
4. Remove the paper end sensor (bypass) (S6) with the holder [A].
Bypass
5. Remove the paper end sensor (bypass) (S6) [A]. (Hooks × 4)
4.16.4 BYPASS PAPER WIDTH SENSOR (S5)

4. Remove the bypass paper width sensor (S5) with the holder [A].
5. Remove the bypass paper width sensor (S5) [A]. (Hooks × 4)
Bypass
4.16.5 BYPASS FEED ROLLER
Before replacing the bypass feed roller, reset the PM counter.

Replacement
Adjustment
&
Remove the duplex unit.(Duplex Unit)

3. Remove the E-ring [A] and bearing [B] at the front of the bypass feed unit. ( × 1, bearing
× 1)
4. Remove the E-ring and the gear at the rear of the bypass feed unit. ( × 1, gear × 1)
Bypass
5. Remove the bearing (bearing × 1)
6. Remove the E-ring at the front of the bypass feed unit ( × 1)
7. Remove the E-ring at the rear of the bypass feed unit ( × 1)
8. Move the front cam and rear cam [B] inward while pushing down the bottom plate [A].
Bypass
9. Remove the bypass feed roller with the shaft from the front side.
Replacement
Adjustment
&
10. Remove the bypass feed roller [A] (Hook × 1)
Bypass
4.16.6 BYPASS TRAY LIFT SENSOR (S4)

3. Remove the sensor holder [A]. ( × 2, × 1)

5. Remove the bypass tray lift sensor (S4) [B]. (Hooks × 4)
Bypass
4.16.7 BYPASS TRAY LIFT CLUTCH (CL1)

Replacement
Adjustment
&
4. Disconnect the connector of the clutch. ( × 1)
5. Remove the bypass tray lift clutch (CL1) [A]. ( × 1)
Paper Exit
4.17 PAPER EXIT
4.17.1 IM C300 SERIES/IM C400F
Paper Exit Unit

• Operation Panel
• Paper Exit Tray
2. Remove the paper exit unit [A].
Paper Exit
Paper Exit Sensor (S7)

1. Remove the paper exit unit. (Paper Exit Unit)
2. Remove the sensor holder [A].
Replacement
Adjustment
&
3. Remove the paper exit sensor (S7) [A]. ( × 1)
Paper Exit
Junction Gate Solenoid (SOL1)

2. Remove the junction gate solenoid (SOL1) [A] with the bracket.
3. Remove the bracket from the junction gate solenoid (SOL1) [A].
When reattaching the junction gate solenoid (SOL1), make sure that the solenoid works in
conjunction with the exit junction gate.
Paper Exit
Replacement
Adjustment
&
Paper Exit Clutch (CL3), Reverse Clutch (CL2)
3. Pull out the bushing [A].
Paper Exit
4. Remove the paper exit clutch (CL3) and reverse clutch (CL2) with the bracket [A].
5. Remove the paper exit clutch (CL3) [A] and reverse clutch (CL2) [B].
Paper Exit
4.17.2 IM C400SRF
Paper Exit Unit
Replacement
Adjustment
&
2. Remove the scanner rear cover [A],scanner rear small cover [B] and the rear upper cover
[C].
3. Remove the connector [A]
4. Remove the fusing unit.(Fusing Unit)

6. Remove the paper exit unit [B].
Paper Exit
Paper Exit Sensor (S7)

1. Remove the cover [A] from the paper exit unit.
2. Remove the paper exit sensor (S7) [A] with the bracket.
3. Remove the paper exit sensor (S7) [A] from the bracket. (Hooks × 1)
Paper Exit
4. Remove the anti-static cover [A] from the paper exit sensor (S7).
Replacement
Adjustment
&
Junction Gate Solenoid (SOL1)
2. Remove the junction gate solenoid (SOL1) [A] with the bracket.
3. Remove the bracket from the junction gate solenoid (SOL1) [A].
Paper Exit
When reattaching the junction gate solenoid (SOL1), make sure that the solenoid works in
conjunction with the exit junction gate.
Paper Exit Clutch (CL3), Reverse Clutch (CL2)

3. Remove the bracket [A] with the paper exit clutch (CL3) and reverse clutch (CL2).
4. Remove the cover [A] from the bracket.
Paper Exit
5. Remove the paper exit clutch (CL3) [A] and reverse clutch (CL2) [B].
Replacement
Adjustment
&
Duplex
4.18 DUPLEX
4.18.1 DUPLEX UNIT

IM C400SRF
2. Push the lever and reduce the tension of the belt [A], then remove the belt.
When reattaching the duplex unit, make sure that the belt [A] is attached firmly. If the belt is
not attached, the right door will not be opened even if the opening/closing lever is operated.
For details, please refer to When You Cannot Open the Right Door
3. Remove the two screws on the paper transport unit [A].
Duplex
Replacement
Adjustment
&
IM C400SRF
4. Lift the paper transport unit [A].

IM C400SRF
5. Remove the tension spring cover [A].
Duplex
IM C400SRF
6. Lift the duplex unit, then remove the tension spring [A].
IM C400SRF
7. Release the tension wire [A] from the roller [B].
Duplex
Replacement
Adjustment
&
IM C400SRF
8. Restore the paper transport unit [A].

IM C400SRF
9. Remove the connector cover [A].
Duplex
IM C400SRF
10. Disconnect the connectors.

IM C400SRF
11. Release the belt [A].

12. Remove the duplex unit [B].
Duplex
Replacement
Adjustment
&
IM C400SRF
4.18.2 DUPLEX ENTRANCE SENSOR (S1)

2. Remove the sensor cover [A].
Duplex
IM C400SRF
3. Remove the duplex entrance sensor (S1) [A].

IM C400SRF
Duplex
4.18.3 DUPLEX EXIT SENSOR (S2)

1. Remove the paper transfer roller unit. (Paper Transfer Roller Unit)
2. Remove the cover [A]. (Hook × 1)
Replacement
Adjustment
&
3. Remove the roller unit [A].(This procedure is for IM C400 series)
Duplex
5. Remove the registration roller unit [A].
Duplex
7. Remove the duplex exit sensor (S2) [A].
Replacement
Adjustment
&
4.18.4 RIGHT COVER SENSOR (SW2)
2. Release the tab of the right cover sensor (SW2) [A] with a jeweler’s screwdriver.
IM C400SRF
Duplex
3. Remove the right cover sensor (SW2) [A]. ( × 1)
Electrical Components
4.19 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
4.19.1 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS OVERVIEW
Replacement
Adjustment
&
1 BiCU (PCB1) 4 FCU (PCB2) (if the machine has the fax unit)
2 Controller Board (PCB24) 5 PSU (AC) (PCB17)
3 HDD 6 PSU (DC) (PCB16)

7 High-Voltage Power Supply (Development) 9 AC Detection Board (PCB18)
(PCB22)
8 Toner Bottle Sensor Board (PCB7) 10 High-Voltage Power Supply (Transfer)
(PCB23)
4.19.2 HDD
• Before replacing the HDD, copy the address book data to an SD card with
SP5-846-051 if there is no problem.
• If the customer uses the Data Overwrite Security, IC card reader, or OCR unit, these
applications must be installed again after replacing the HDD.

• Rear Cover
• Left Cover
2. Remove the HDD with the bracket [A].
3. Remove the bracket from the HDD [A].
Adjustment after Replacement

1. Do SP5-832-001 to initialize the HDD.
Initialization should be performed for the HDD which was already formatted before.
Replacement
Adjustment
2. Do SP5-853-001 to download stamp data.
&
3. If applicable, do SP5-846-052 to restore the address data from SD card to the HDD.
4. Cycle the power OFF/ON.
4.19.3 CONTROLLER BOARD (PCB24)
• Keep NVRAMs away from any objects that can cause static electricity. Static electricity
can damage NVRAM data.
• Rear Cover
• Left Cover
• Fax Option Type M41
2. Remove the controller box cover [A] with the HDD [B].
3. Pull out the controller board (PCB24) [A].
4. Remove the guide rails [A] from the old controller board, and install them on the new
controller board.
5. Remove the used NVRAM from the old controller board, and install it on the new controller
board.
• Make sure the NVRAM [A] is installed at the correct mounting location and
orientation. Install the NVRAM so that the indentation on the NVRAM corresponds
with the mark [B] on the controller board (PCB24).
• Incorrect installation of the NVRAM will damage both the controller board
(PCB24) and NVRAM.
NVRAM on the controller board
• SC195 (Machine serial number error) will be displayed if you forget to attach the
Replacement
Adjustment
NVRAM.
&
• Passwords for the Supervisor and Administrator 1 will be discarded later in this
procedure.
• If you mounted the NVRAM in the wrong direction, each component needs to be
replaced because a short circuit was caused in the controller board (PCB24) and the
NVRAM.
• Installing a new NVRAM initializes SPs and issues an SC. Reset the SC with the
procedure below.
1. Make sure that you have the SMC report (factory settings). This report comes with the
machine.
2. Output the SMC log using one of the following methods:
To print SMC log data, execute SP5-990-001.
To save SMC log data to an SD card, execute SP5-992-001 (SMC List Card Save
Function).
3. Turn OFF the main power switch (SW1).
4. Insert a blank SD card in the SD slot 2, and then turn ON the main power switch (SW1).
5. Use SP5-824-001 to upload the NVRAM data from the controller board (PCB24).
• Make sure to note the following SP settings as they will not be automatically
uploaded to the SD card. These settings will be input manually in Step 24.
• SP5-193-001 (External Controller Info. Setting)
0: No external controller, 1: EFI controller
• SP5-895-001 (Application invalidation / Printer )
0: Valid, 1: Invalid
• SP5-895-002 (Application invalidation / Scanner )
0: Valid, 1: Invalid
• SP5-985-001 (Device Setting / On Board NIC )
0: Invalid, 1: Valid
• SP5-985-002 (Device Setting / On Board USB )
0: Invalid, 1: Valid
6. Make sure the customer has a backup of their address book data. If not, obtain the backup
by referring to SP5-846-051.
• The address data stored in the machine will be discarded later during this
procedure. So be sure to obtain a backup of the customer’s address book data.
• Note that the counters for the user will be reset when doing the backup/restore of
the address book data.
• If they have a backup of the address book data, use their own backup data for
restoring. This is because there is a risk that the data cannot be backed up
properly depending on the NVRAM condition.
7. Do the following steps if the machine has the fax unit. If not, skip this step:
1. Print the Box List with the User Tools/Counter.
• [Fax Setting] - [Reception Settings] - [Box Settings] - [Box Setting: Print List]
2. Print the Special Sender List by pressing these buttons in the following order.
• [Fax Setting] - [Reception Settings] - [Register Special Sender] - [Register Special
Sender: Print List]
3. Write down the following fax settings.
• [Receiver] in [Fax Setting] - [Reception Settings] - [Reception File Settings] -
[Action on Receiving File] - [Forwarding].
• [Notify Destination] in [Fax Setting] - [Reception Settings] - [Reception File
Settings] - [Action on Receiving File] - [Store].
• [Specify User] in [Fax Setting] - [Reception Settings] - [Stored Reception File User
Setting].
• [Notify Destination] in [Fax Setting] - [Reception Settings] - [Folder transfer
Settings] - [Folder Transfer Result Report].
• Specified folder in [Fax Setting] - [Send Settings] - [Backup File Transmission
Setting].
• [Receiver] in [Fax Setting] - [Reception Settings] - [Reception File Settings] -
[Output Mode Switch Timer].
• [Store: Notify Destination] in [Fax Setting] - [Reception Settings] - [Reception File
Settings] - [Output Mode Switch Timer].
• All the destination information shown on the display.
• In the fax settings, address book data is stored with entry IDs, which the
system internally assigns to each data. The entry IDs may be changed due to
re-assigning in backup/restore operations.
4. Make sure that there is no transmission standby file. If any standby file exists, ask the
customer to delete it or complete the transmission.
8. Turn the main power OFF and unplug the power supply cord.
9. Push the main power switch (SW1) ON again to discharge the residual charge.
10. Remove the SD card containing the NVRAM data from slot 2.
11. Replace the NVRAM with a new one.
• After turning ON the main power, SC870 will occur and the address book data will
be cleared.
Replacement
Adjustment
• SC673 appears at start-up, but this is normal behavior. This is because the
&
controller and the smart operation panel cannot communicate with each other due
to changing the SP settings for the operation panel.
13. Change the SP settings for the operation panel.
If you switch the screen to enter the SP mode, SC995-02 is displayed. However, continue
the following steps.
• SP5-748-101: (OpePanel Setting: Op Type Action Setting): Change bit 0 from 0 to 1.
• SP5-748-201: (OpePanel Setting: Cheetah Panel Connect Setting): Change the value
from 0 to 1.
14. Change the Flair API SP values.
• SP5-752-001 (Copy FlairAPIFunction Setting): Change bit 0 from 0 to 1.
• SP3-301-001 (FAX:FlairAPI Setting) Change bit 0 from 0 to 1.(You can NOT change
this Values if the FCU is not equipped with main machine )
15. Cycle the main power OFF/ON with the SD card where the NVRAM data has been
uploaded in SD slot 2.
• The model information is written on the NVRAM (Novita), so SC995-02 does not
occur.
• Program/Change Administrator will be displayed in Japanese, but this is normal.
16. Enter the SP mode and specify the following settings manually.
• a. SP5-985-001 (Device Setting: On Board NIC) Change the value from 0 to 1.
• b. SP5-985-002 (Device Setting: On Board USB) Change the value from 0 to 1.
17. Turn OFF the main power and then insert the SD card to which the NV-RAM data has been
uploaded in Slot 2.
18. Turn the main power ON.
19. Download the NV-RAM data stored in the SD card to the brand-new NV-RAM using
SP5-825-001 (NV-RAM Data Download).
The download will take a couple of minutes.

20. Change the Flair API SP values.
• SP1-041-001 (Scan:FlairAPI Setting): Change bit 0 from 0 to 1.
21. Turn the power OFF and remove the SD card from slot 2.
23. Execute SP5-755-002 (Hide Administrator Password Change Scrn).
After you execute this SP and exit SP mode, the Home screen is displayed and user
functions can be used.
24. Make sure that icons for scanner and fax are displayed and enter the values that you note
in Step 5.
• SP5-193-001 (External Controller Info. Setting)

• SP5-895-001 (Application invalidation / Printer)
• SP5-895-002 (Application invalidation / Scanner)
• SP5-985-001 (Device Setting / On Board NIC)
• SP5-985-002 (Device Setting / On Board USB)
25. If the security functions (HDD Encryption and HDD Data Overwrite Security) were applied,
set the functions again.
26. Restore the original settings of the following SPs, referring to the SMC data obtained in
step 2.
SP5-825-001 does not download the following SP data to the new NVRAM. So you must
set them manually.
a. SP5-985-001(Device Setting: On Board NIC)
b. SP5-985-002(Device Setting: On Board USB)
27. Ask the customer to restore their address book. Or restore the address book data using
SP5-846-052 (UCS Setting: Restore All Addr Book), and ask the customer to ensure the
address book data has been restored properly.
• If you have obtained the backup of the customer’s address book data, delete the
backup immediately after the NVRAM replacement to avoid accidentally taking
out the customer’s data.
28. Output all the SMC data with SP5-990-001 and make sure all the SP/UP settings except for
counter information are properly restored, by checking the SMC data obtained in step 2.
• Check that the counters are reset.

29. Make sure that the list output in step 7-1 through step 7-3 matches the destination
information in step 7-4. If not, set it to the setting before replacement.
30. Execute the process control (SP3-011-001).
• If you cannot execute SP5-824-001 or SP5-825-001 for some reason, try all the
following things.
- Check the changed SP value on the SMC which was output in step 2 and set it
manually. Especially, ensure that the values of the following SPs are same as the
setting before the replacement.

- a. SP5-045-001 (Accounting counter: Counter Method)
- b. SP5-302-002 (Set Time: Time Difference)
• Because the PM counters have been reset during NV-RAM replacement, it is
Replacement
Adjustment
necessary to replace all the PM parts for proper PM management.
&
• If a message tells you need an SD card to restore displays after the NVRAM
replacement, create a “SD card for restoration” and restore with the SD card.
Refer to “Encryption Key Restoration”
31. Execute the ACC (Copy).
32. Execute the ACC (Printer).
4.19.4 BICU (PCB1)

2. Slide the BiCU (PCB1) [A] in the direction of the blue arrow below and remove it.
IM C400SRF
Replacement
Adjustment
&
There are three kinds of FFC connectors.
A: Disconnect the FFC while pushing the lock lever.
B: Disconnect the FFC while lifting up the lock lever.
C: Disconnect the FFC while pulling it out straight. It does not have a lock mechanism.
3. Remove the SMB [A] from the old BiCU and attach it to the new BiCU.
• Attaching the used SMB to the new BiCU allows users to use old data such as SP
settings.
Replacing the SMB on the BiCU
• The following shows the procedure for replacing the SMB on the BiCU (PCB1) with a
new SMB.
1. Make sure that you have the SMC report (factory settings). This report comes with the
machine.
2. Output the SMC data (“ALL”) using SP5-990-001 printed, or saved to SD card with
SP5-992-001.
3. Turn OFF the main power switch (SW1).
4. Insert a blank SD card in the SD slot #2, and then turn ON the main power switch (SW1).
5. Use SP5-824-001 to upload the SMB data from the BiCU (PCB1)
6. Turn OFF the main power switch (SW1) and unplug the power cord.
7. Replace the SMB on the BCU with a new one.
• Install a new SMB [A] on the BiCU (PCB1) in the right direction. Incorrect
installation of the SMB will damage both the BiCU (PCB1) and SMB.
Replacement
Adjustment
&
8. Plug in, and then turn ON the main power switch (SW1).
• When the power is turned ON, SC195-00 appears. Continue with the following
steps.
9. Select the destination setting (SP5-131-001 - JPN: 0, NA: 1, EU/AA/TWN/CHN: 2)
10. Set the machine serial number SP5-811-001, Area selection SP5-807-001, CPM set
SP5-882-001.
• For information on how to configure the above SPs, contact the supervisor in your
branch office.
12. Use SP5-801-002 “Memory Clear Engine”.
• After changing the SMB, some SPs may not have the correct values.
• Make sure that 12 must be done after Area selection SP5-807-001 and CPM set
SP5-882-001.
13. Turn OFF the machine, and then turn it back ON.
14. From the SD card where you saved the SMB data in step 5, download the SMB data with
SP5-825-001.
15. Turn OFF the machine, and then remove the SD card from SD slot 2.
16. Turn ON the main power switch (SW1).
17. Check the factory setting sheet and the SMC data printout from step 2, and set the user
tool and SP settings so they are the same as before.
18. Execute ACC (Copy and Printer).
4.19.5 CONTROLLER BOX
• If the optional counter interface unit is installed, remove the optional counter interface
unit before removing the controller box.
• Rear Cover
• Left Cover
2. Remove the scanner rear cover [A] and scanner rear small cover [B].(This procedure is for
IM C300 series/IM C400F)
3. Remove the scanner rear cover [A],scanner rear small cover [B] and rear upper cover
[C].(This procedure is for IM C400SRF)
IM C400SRF
release the FFC.
Replacement
Adjustment
&
6. Release the clamp of the harness to the ADF [A].
8. Remove the controller box cover [A] with the HDD [B].
9. Disconnect all the connectors on the BiCU (PCB1) [A].

Remove the clamps to make room for removal of the BiCU (PCB1) [A].
Replacement
Adjustment
&
IM C400SRF
10. Remove the grounding wire [A] and connector [B] from the left side of the controller box.
11. Remove the harness guide [C] while releasing the harnesses on it.
Replacement
Adjustment
&
12. Remove the brackets ([A] and [B]), and two screws from the right side of the controller box.
13. Remove the controller box [A].

IM C400SRF
4.19.6 PSU (AC) (PCB17), PSU (DC) (PCB16)
• Do not touch the areas outlined in red in the following diagrams when replacing the
PSU. Residual charge on the board may cause electric shock.
• When replacing the PSU, please DO NOT put too much pressure on electrical
components on the PSU, such as the coil. Asserting too much pressure will cause
the pad, which is soldered on the back side of the controller board, to detach,
triggering a short circuit in the PSU and SC errors.
• For 100V:
• For 200V:
Replacement
Adjustment
&
Common Procedures
• Rear Cover
• Left Cover
• Controller Box
2. Disconnect the harness and
remove the harness guide [A].
There is a hook in the red dotted area in the photo. Use a straight slot screwdriver to
remove the harness guide.
For removing the PSUs (PCB16)(PCB17) with the bracket.

1. Follow common procedures above.
2. Disconnect the connectors on the PSU (AC) (PCB17) [A] and PSU (DC) (PCB16) [B].
Note: Please avoid putting too much pressure on the PSU, as it might trigger a short circuit.
For removing the PSU (DC) (PCB16) with the bracket.

2. Remove the PSU (DC) (PCB16) [A]. (Locking wire saddle ×1)
The locking wire saddle is released from the notch above the cooling plate.
For removing the PSU (AC) (PCB17) with the bracket.
Replacement
Adjustment
&
2. Remove the PSU (AC) (PCB17) [A].
Reference
Properly Soldered Detached
Putting too much power onto the board will cause the detachment of the pad soldered to the
back side.
The detached pad burns when turning on the fusing heater,

causing SC542 (Fusing Thermopile;TH1 reload Error), SC545
(Fusing Central Heater Continuously Heat) error.
4.19.7 AC DETECTION BOARD (PCB18)

• Rear Cover
• Left Cover
• Controller Box
2. Remove the AC detection board (PCB18) with the cover [A].
IM C300 series
IM C400 series
3. Remove the AC detection board (PCB18) [A]. ( × 2, × 1)
4.19.8 HIGH-VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY (DEVELOPMENT)

(PCB22)
Replacement
• Rear Cover
Adjustment
&
• Left Cover
• Controller Box
2. Disconnect the harness and remove the harness guide [A]. (hook × 3)
• Release the harness guide [A] as shown below.
3. Remove the high-voltage power supply (Development) (PCB22) [A] with the bracket. ( ×
5, hook × 1)
4. Remove the high-voltage power supply (Development) (PCB22) [A]. ( × 5, × 1)
4.19.9 HIGH-VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY (TRANSFER) (PCB23)

• Rear Cover
Replacement
Adjustment
&
• Left Cover
• Controller Box
2. Disconnect the harness attached to the high-voltage power supply’s bracket, and then
remove the high-voltage power supply (Transfer) (PCB23) [A] with the bracket. ( × 3,
× 1)
High-Voltage Power Supply (Transfer) (PCB23) Alone

• Rear Cover
• Left Cover
• Controller Box
2. Remove the high-voltage power supply (Transfer) (PCB23) [A]. ( × 5, × 1)
4.19.10 PSU EXHAUST FAN (FAN4)

2. Remove the left cover. (Left Cover)
4. Remove the screws of the fan cover [B]. ( × 4)
IM C300 series
IM C400 series
5. Disconnect the connectors and pull out the PSU exhaust fan (FAN4) [A] with the cover.
IM C300 series
Replacement
Adjustment
&
IM C400 series
6. Remove the cover from the PSU exhaust fan (FAN4) [A]. ( × 2)
IM C300 series
IM C400 series
• Install the PSU exhaust fan (FAN4) with its label facing the inside of the machine.
4.19.11 PCDU COOLING FAN (FAN3)

2. Remove the left cover. (Left Cover)
3. Remove the PCDU cooling fan (FAN3) [A] with the duct. ( × 2, × 1)
4. Remove the PCDU cooling fan (FAN3) [A]. ( × 2, hook × 4)
• Install the PCDU cooling fan (FAN3) with its label facing the inside of the machine.
4.19.12 FUSING UNIT COOLING FAN (FAN1)

2. Remove the fusing unit cooling fan (FAN1) [A] with the cover. ( × 2, × 1)
Replacement
Adjustment
&
3. Remove the cover from the fusing unit cooling fan (FAN1) [A].
• Install the fusing unit cooling fan (FAN1) with its label facing the outside of the
machine.
4.19.13 TEMPERATURE/HUMIDITY SENSOR (S18)/MAIN POWER

SWITCH (SW1)
IM C400SRF
3. Remove the temperature/humidity sensor (S18) [A] and the main power switch (SW1) [B].
4.19.14 IMAGING TEMPERATURE SENSOR (TH5)

• Rear Cover
• Left Cover
• Controller Box
2. Remove the imaging temperature sensor (TH5) [A] while releasing the harness of the
imaging temperature sensor (TH5) from the harness guide [B]. ( × 1, × 1)
Replacement
Adjustment
&
4.19.15 INTERLOCK SWITCHES
IM C300 series
IM C400 series
4. Remove the interlock switch cover [A].

IM C300 series
IM C400 series
5. Remove the Interlock switches [A]. ( × each 2)
4.19.16 PAPER EXIT EXHAUST FAN (FAN5)
This procedure is for the Finisher Model.

Replacement
Adjustment
&
4. Remove the scanner rear cover [A],scanner rear small cover [B] and rear upper cover [C].
5. Remove the scanner unit.(Scanner Unit with the ADF)

6. Remove the two screws [A].
7. Remove the cover [A] from the paper exit unit.
8. Remove the grounding plate [B].
9. Remove the paper exit exhaust fan (FAN5) with the bracket [A].
Replacement
Adjustment
&
11. Remove the paper exit exhaust fan (FAN5) [A] (Hook×3).
Image Adjustment
4.20 IMAGE ADJUSTMENT
4.20.1 HOW TO USE THE COLOR CHARTS

Here is an introduction of how to check the image quality using the color charts.
No. Check Check Item Description

Area
1 Frame line Registration Check the registration amount of the leading edge and
amount trailing edge (sub scan direction). Overlay the chart and
the copy, then check that the frame lines of the side [A]
and leading edge [B] do not deviate.
Margin length Check the margin length of the leading edge and trailing
edge (sub scan direction). Overlay the chart and the copy,
then check the erased length [A] (margin length).
Perpendicularity Fold the paper, and check the deviation of the
Image Adjustment

Area
superimposed frame lines. If deviations in the main scan
direction and sub scan direction are the same, it is a right
Replacement
Adjustment
angle.
&
1. Check the lengths between the leading edge and front
end frame line at measuring positions [A] and [B].
2. Check the lengths between the side edge and lateral
frame line at measuring positions [C] and [D].
At this time, position [D] is equivalent to position [A],
when making the fold line as shown in the above figure.
3. Check the difference between 1 and 2.
If each deviation is different, it is a parallelogram
image (non-right angle).
If the deviations are the same, it is a right angle. If
there are deviations, check the feed mechanism for errors
such as skewing.
Example:
1: Right angle, correct feeding

2: Right angle, incorrect feeding (Oblique feeding)
3: Non-right angle, correct feeding (Parallelogram)
4: Non-right angle, incorrect feeding (Oblique
feeding+Parallelogram)
Linearity Check the linearity with a scale. Check in both the main
Image Adjustment

Area
scan direction and sub scan direction.
Overlay the scale on any frame line, adjust to a position
where the frame line is not hidden, and measure the most
distant position. If difficult to check, draw an auxiliary
baseline in position with no distortion to the frame line, and
measure the deviation length from the baseline with the
scale.
A: Measuring length, B: Base line, C:Copy

If meandering, measure the maximum amplitude. If difficult
to measure, draw an auxiliary baseline, measure the
deviation length from the baseline with the scale, and sum
it up.
A: Measuring length, B: Base line, C:Copy

2 Cornfield Resolution Check the number next to the finest set of lines that can be
pattern distinguished from each other clearly, and do not blur into
each other. The intervals between lines in the chart are the
following, in 15 steps. A higher number means a finer
image (higher resolution).
2.0/2.2/2.5/2.8/3.2/3.6/4.0/4.5/5.0/5.6/6.3/7.1/8.0/9.0/10.0
[lines/mm]
Image Adjustment

Area
3 Colored Color Check the distances [A] between the colors making up the
L-shaped registration RGB lines (Y+M/ Y+C/ C+M), using a loupe.
Replacement
Adjustment
lines errors
&
4 Solid color Solid density Check the density of each color patch between the chart
patches and the copy .
5 13 Halftone density Check that the density of each color patch in the 3rd row in
gradations the chart and the copy are the same.
scale Gray balance Check that the K density of the 3rd and 5th rows in the
chart and the copy are the same.
Gradation On the copy, check that the densities of each color patch in
the 11th and 12th rows are different.
Equal Check that the magnification is equal in the chart and the
magnification copy using the scale under the gradation patches.
(main scan The scale is 10mm per row. Check 10 consecutive rows.
direction)
6 Halftone Gray color Check that the density in the chart and the copy is the
area difference same. There must be no unevenness in density between
the front, rear, and middle.
7 Solid area Solid filling Check that there is no density unevenness in solid color.
There should be no color unevenness in density between
the front, rear, and middle.
8 Low Reproducibility Check that "C0.4" is readable in the copy when using the
contrast of low contrast center notch (notch 5). In addition, "E0.2" must be deleted.
characters
9 Six sizes of Character Check the minimum size of characters that are readable,
Image Adjustment

Area
characters reproducibility and that have no broken lines or blurred characters.
(no broken lines
or blurred
characters)
10 Gray Gray color Check that the color and density of the 3rd row in the chart
patches difference and and the copy are the same.
density
11 Color patch Color Check that the density of each color (KCMYRGB) in the
reproducibility chart and the copy are the same.
Color Check that the density in the chart and a 2nd generation
reproducibility of copy are the same.
2nd generation
12 Radial Jagged slanting Check that the lines in the copy are not rough or jagged.
lines lines
Broken slanting Check that the lines in the copy are not broken.
lines
13 Color bold Solid color filling Check that there is no missing color and no unevenness in
text RGB (YM/YC/CM) solid colors.
14 Color text Color text Check that the reproduced image is the same as the chart.
reproduction The following diagram shows examples of errors.
15 Horizontal Image position In the copy, check the distance between the center line
scale in the main scan made by folding the paper and the line at the center of the
direction chart.
(Whether the Trim pattern adjustment for each paper feed tray must be
image is at the completed before checking.
center of the
paper)
Image Adjustment

Area
A: Center line, B: Fold line, C: Distance between the center
line and the fold line
Replacement
Adjustment
16 Vertical Equal Check the magnification error in the sub scan direction
&
scale magnification using the crossed lines 100mm away from the leading and
(Sub scan trailing edges of the paper
direction)
17 Lot number - Shows the lot number of the test chart.

18 Chart Reproduction of Check that the reproduced image is the same as the chart.
name black characters
19 Portrait Reproducibility Make a copy after setting the document type to photo
photograph of the skin, hair, mode, and check the reproducibility of the photo.
and clothes Check the reproducibility of the granular state, and tone of
color in the skin, hair, and clothes. Also check for
overexposure and underexposure.
20 Landscape Reproducibility Make a copy after setting the document type to photo
photograph of sky blue mode, and check the reproducibility of the photo.
Check that the color tone of the chart and the copy are the
same.
21 Notes Check the Check the reproducibility, such as the presence of breaks
reproducibility in frame lines and characters.
(for example, There is a place for writing down the output settings when
there should be you print the image samples and/or compare adjustments.
no breaks in
frame lines and
characters).
4.20.2 SCANNING
Check the printing registration/side-to-side adjustment and the blank margin adjustment before
you do the following scanner adjustments.
Image Adjustment
• Use C-5Y color chart to do the following adjustments.
Scanner Sub-Scan Magnification
A: Sub-scan magnification
1. Put the test chart on the exposure glass. Then make a copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the magnification ratio. Adjust with SP4-008-001(Sub Scan Magnification Adj.) if
necessary.
Standard: ±1.0%.
Scanner Leading Edge and Side-to-Side Registration
A: Leading Edge Registration

B: Side-to-side Registration
1. Put the test chart on the exposure glass. Then make a copy from one of the feed stations.
2. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration. Adjust the following SP modes if
necessary.
Standard: 0 ± 2mm for the leading edge registration, 0 ± 2.5mm for the side-to-side
registration.
What It Does SP Code
Leading Edge Registration SP4-010-001
Side-to-Side Registration SP4-011-001
Image Adjustment
4.20.3 ADF ADJUSTMENT
ADF Side-to-Side and Leading Edge Registration

1. Use A4/LT paper to make a temporary test chart as shown below.
Replacement
Adjustment
2. Put the temporary test chart on the ADF. Then make a copy from one of the feed stations.
&
3. Check the leading edge and side-to-side registration. Adjust the following SP modes if
necessary.
Standard: 4.2 ± 2.0 mm for the leading edge registration, 2.0 ± 1.0 mm for the side-to-side
registration. The following diagram shows how the image is affected when you adjust in the
+ or -. direction.
1: Feed direction
SP Code What It Does Adjustment Range
SP6-006-001 Side-to-Side Regist: Face ± 3.0 mm
SP6-006-002 Side-to-Side Regist (1-pass): Back ± 2.0 mm
SP6-006-010 Leading Edge Regist (1-pass): Face ± 5.0 mm
SP6-006-011 Leading Edge Regist (1-pass): Back ± 5.0 mm
ADF Trailing Edge Erase Width

1. Use A4/LT paper to make a temporary test chart as shown below.
3. Check the trailing edge erase width. Adjust the following SP modes if necessary. The
following diagram shows how the image is affected when you adjust in the + or -. direction.
Image Adjustment
1: Feed direction
SP Code What It Does Adjustment Range
SP6-006-014 Trailing Edge Erase Width (1-Pass):Face ± 5.0 mm
SP6-006-015 Trailing Edge Erase Width (1-Pass):Back ± 5.0 mm
ADF Sub-scan Magnification

2. Check the magnification ratio. Adjust with SP6-017-001(ADF Adjustment L-Edge Mag) if
necessary.
• Standard: ±5.0%
• Reduction mode: ±1.0%
• Enlargement mode: ±1.0%
4.20.4 REGISTRATION
Adjustment Standard
[1]: Feed direction, [2]: Image area

Make sure that the registration is adjusted within the adjustment standard range.
After doing the registration adjustment, do the Erase Margin Adjustment in the next section.
Leading edge (sub-scan direction):

B = 3.25 ± 2.75 mm
Image Adjustment
• Trailing edge (sub-scan direction):

D = 3.25 ± 2.75 mm
• Side to side (main-scan direction):
A = C = 2.25 ± 1.75 mm
Replacement
Adjustment
&
Registration Standard
Adjusts the side-to-side registration for each paper feed station. Use SP
mode (SP1-002) to adjust the side-to-side registration for the optional
paper feed unit and duplex unit.
SP No. SP Name Range
SP1-002-001 Side-to-Side Registration: By-pass Table ± 4.0 mm
SP1-002-002 Side-to-Side Registration: Tray 1 ± 4.0 mm
SP1-002-005 Side-to-Side Registration: Duplex ± 4.0 mm
Adjusts the leading edge registration for each paper type and process
line speed. Use SP mode (SP1-001) to adjust the leading edge registration.
SP1-001-001 Leading Edge Registration: Tray: Plain ± 9.0 mm
SP1-001-002 Leading Edge Registration: Tray: Middle Thick ± 9.0 mm
SP1-001-003 Leading Edge Registration: Tray: Thick ± 9.0 mm
SP1-001-005 Leading Edge Registration: Tray: Plain: 1200 ± 9.0 mm
SP1-001-006 Leading Edge Registration: Tray: Middle Thick: 1200 ± 9.0 mm
SP1-001-007 Leading Edge Registration: By-pass: Plain ± 9.0 mm
SP1-001-008 Leading Edge Registration: By-pass: Middle Thick ± 9.0 mm
SP1-001-009 Leading Edge Registration: By-pass: Thick ± 9.0 mm
SP1-001-012 Leading Edge Registration: By-pass: Plain: 1200 ± 9.0 mm
SP1-001-013 Leading Edge Registration: By-pass: Middle Thick: 1200 ± 9.0 mm
SP1-001-014 Leading Edge Registration: Duplex: Plain ± 9.0 mm
SP1-001-015 Leading Edge Registration: Duplex: Middle Thick ± 9.0 mm
SP1-001-016 Leading Edge Registration: Duplex: Thick ± 9.0 mm
SP1-001-017 Leading Edge Registration: Tray: Special 1 ± 9.0 mm
SP1-001-018 Leading Edge Registration: By-pass: Special 1 ± 9.0 mm
SP1-001-019 Leading Edge Registration: Duplex: Plain: 1200 ± 9.0 mm
SP1-001-020 Leading Edge Registration: Duplex: Middle Thick: 1200 ± 9.0 mm
Image Adjustment

SP1-001-021 Leading Edge Registration: Duplex: Special 1 ± 9.0 mm
SP1-001-022 Leading Edge Registration: Tray: Special 1: 1200 ± 9.0 mm
SP1-001-023 Leading Edge Registration: By-pass: Special 1: 1200 ± 9.0 mm
SP1-001-024 Leading Edge Registration: Duplex: Special 1: 1200 ± 9.0 mm
SP1-001-041 Leading Edge Registration: Tray: Plain: Std Speed 2 ± 9.0 mm
SP1-001-043 Leading Edge Registration: By-pass: Plain: Std Speed 2 ± 9.0 mm
SP1-001-045 Leading Edge Registration: Duplex: Plain: Std Speed 2 ± 9.0 mm
SP1-001-047 Leading Edge Registration: Tray: Special1: Std Speed 2 ± 9.0 mm
SP1-001-048 Leading Edge Registration: By-pass: Special1: Std Speed 2 ± 9.0 mm
SP1-001-049 Leading Edge Registration: Duplex: Special1: Std Speed 2 ± 9.0 mm
Adjustment Procedure
1. Enter SP2-109-003.
2. Print out the test pattern (14: 1-dot trimming pattern) with SP2-109-003.
• Registration can change slightly as shown on the previous page. Print some
pages of the 1-dot trimming pattern for steps 3 and 4. Then average the leading
edge and side-to-side registration values, and adjust each SP mode.
3. Do the leading edge registration adjustment.
1) Check the leading edge registration and adjust it with SP1-001.
2) Select the adjustment conditions (paper type and process line speed).
3) Input the value. Then press [#].
4) Generate a trim pattern to check the leading edge adjustment.
4. Do the side-to-side registration adjustment.
1) Check the side-to-side registration and adjust it with SP1-002.
2) Select the adjustment conditions (paper feed station).
3) Input the value. Then press [#].
4) Generate a trim pattern to check the side-to-side registration adjustment.
4.20.5 ERASE MARGIN ADJUSTMENT
• After adjusting the Leading Edge Registration and Side Registration settings (see the
previous section), do the Erase Margin Adjustment. To do this, check the values of
Margins C and D.
• If they are not within the specifications (see below), then adjust C and D with
SP2-103-001 to -004 as explained below. Then check Margins A and B again.
Image Adjustment
Replacement
Adjustment
&
[1]: Feed direction, [2]: Image area
2. Print out the test pattern (14: 1-dot trimming pattern) with SP2-109-003.
3. Check the erase margin A and B. Adjust them with SP2-103-001 to -004 if necessary.
• Leading edge: 0.0 to 9.9 mm (default: 4.2 mm)
• Side-to-side: 0.0 to 9.9 mm (default: 2.0 mm)
• Trailing edge: 0.0 to 9.9 mm (default: 4.2 mm)
4.20.6 COLOR REGISTRATION
Line Position Adjustment

The automatic line position adjustment usually is done for a specified condition to get the best
color prints.
Do the following if color registration shifts:
• Do "Auto Color Registration" as follows to do the forced line position adjustment.
1. First do SP2-111-003.
2. Then do SP2-111-001.
To check if SP2-111-001 was successful, watch the screen during the process. A message
is displayed at the end. Also, you can check the result with SP2-194-010 to -012.
• You should also do the line position adjustment at these times:
• After you transport or move the machine (you should do the forced line position
adjustment if you install the machine at the user location) if the machine is
pre-installed at the workshop and moved to the user location,
• When you remove or replace the motors, clutches, and/or gears related to the
drum/development/transfer sections
• When you remove or replace the image transfer belt, image transfer belt unit or laser
optical housing unit
Image Adjustment
4.20.7 PRINTER GAMMA CORRECTION
• The ACC is usually sufficient to adjust the color balance to get the best print output.
You only need the printer gamma correction to fine-tune to meet user requirements.
Use SP modes if you want to modify the printer gamma curve created with ACC. You can adjust
the gamma data for the following:
• Highlight
• Middle
• Shadow areas
• IDmax.
The adjustable range is from 0 to 30 (31 steps).
Copy Mode
- KCMY Color Balance Adjustment -
The adjustment uses only "Offset" values.
• Never change "Option" values (the default value is 0).

Highlight (Low Levels 1 through 6 in the C5-Y chart 13-level scale
ID)
Middle (Middle Levels 3 through 10 in the C5-Y chart 13-level scale
ID)
Shadow (High Levels 7 through 12 in the C5-Y chart 13-level scale
ID)
ID max Level 13 in the C5-Y chart 13-level scale (affects the entire image density)
Offset The higher the number in the range associated with the low ID, middle ID, high
ID, and ID max, the greater the density.
There are four adjustable modes (can be adjusted with SP4-918-009):
• Copy Photo mode
• Copy Letter mode
• Copy Letter (Single Color) mode
• Copy Photo (Single Color) mode
Image Adjustment
Replacement
Adjustment
&
- Adjustment Procedure -
1. Copy the C-5Y chart in the mode that you want to adjust.
3. Select "System SP."
4. Select SP4-918-009.
5. Adjust the offset values until the copy quality conforms to the standard (see the table
below).
• 1. Never change the "Option" value (the default value is "0").

• 2. Adjust the density in this order: "ID Max", "Middle", "Shadow", "Highlight".
- Photo Mode, Full Color -
Item to Level on the C-5Y chart Adjustment Standard
Adjust
1 ID max: Adjust the offset value so that the density of level
(K, C, M, and 13 matches that of level 13 on the C-5Y chart.
Y)
2 Middle Adjust the offset value so that the density of level
(Middle ID) 7 matches that of level 7 on the C-5Y chart.
(K, C, M, and
Y)
3 Shadow Adjust the offset value so that the density of level
(High ID) 11 matches that of level 11 on the C-5Y chart.
(K, C, M, and
Y)
4 Highlight Adjust the offset value so that dirty background
(Low ID) does not show on the copy and the density of
(K, C, M, and level 3 is slightly lighter than that of level 3 on the
Image Adjustment
Y) C-5Y chart.
5 K Highlight Adjust the offset value so that the color balance
(Low ID) of black scale levels 3 through 5 in the copy is
(C,M, and Y) seen as gray (no C, M, or Y should be visible). If
<on the full the black scale contains C, M, or Y, do steps 1 to
color copy> 4 again.
- Photo Mode, Single Color -
Adjust
1 ID max: (K) Adjust the offset value so that the density of level
13 matches that of level 13 on the C-5Y chart.
2 Middle Adjust the offset value so that the density of level 7
(Middle ID) matches that of level 7 on the C-5Y chart.
(K)
(K)
(Low ID) (K) does not show on the copy and the density of level
3 is slightly lighter than that of level 3 on the C-5Y
chart.
- Text (Letter) Mode, Full Color -
Adjust (K)
1 ID max: (K, Adjust the offset value so that the density of level
C, M, and Y) 13 matches that of level 13 on the C-5Y chart.
(K, C, M,
and Y)
(K, C, M,
and Y)
(Low ID) does not show on the copy and the density of
(K, C, M, level 3 is slightly lighter than that of level 3 on the
and Y) C-5Y chart.
- Text (Letter) Mode, Single Color -
Image Adjustment

Adjust (K)
1 ID max: (K) Adjust the offset value so that the density of level
13 matches that of level 13 on the C-5Y chart.
Replacement
Adjustment
&
(K)
(K)
(Low ID) (K) does not show on the copy and the density of
level 3 is slightly lighter than that of level 3 on the
C-5Y chart.
• Text parts of the test pattern cannot be printed clearly after you adjust "shadow" as
shown above. At this time, check if the 5 line/mm pattern at each corner is printed
clearly. If it is not, adjust the offset value of "shadow" again until it is.
Printer Mode
There are eight adjustable modes (select these modes with printer SP1-102-001):
SP Resolution Mode Bit Types of Colors
0 1200 x 1200 photo 1 4
1 600 x 600 photo 4 4
2 600 x 600 photo 2 4
3 600 x 600 photo 1 4
4 1200 x 1200 text 1 4
5 600 x 600 text 4 4
6 600 x 600 text 2 4
7 600 x 600 text 1 4
- Adjustment Procedure -
1. Execute ACC for the printer mode.
3. Select "Printer SP".
4. Select SP1-102-001. Then select the necessary print mode to adjust. Then select "2" that
is used by default printing as priority.
0: 1200 x 1200 photo mode (1bit/4col)
Image Adjustment
2: 600 x 600 photo mode (2bit/4col) (Default)

4: 1200 x 1200 text mode (1bit/4col)
5. Execute SP1-103-001 to print out a color grayscale chart sheet if you want to examine the
image quality for these settings.
6. Adjust the color density with SP1-104. Compare the color grayscale chart sheet with the
C-5Y chart.
1. Adjust the density in this order: "Shadow", "Middle", "Highlight".

2. Check that the following reference patches on the grayscale chart are within the
following range of the C-5Y chart.
Item to adjust Reference patch on the Level on the C-5Y chart
grayscale chart (13 rows scale)
(related to the half tone area)
Shadow (High 12th patch from the lighter C,M,Y: 6 to 10, Center is the
ID) density 8th row
K: 8 to 12, Center is the 10th
row
Middle (Middle 8th patch from the lighter density C,M,Y: 3 to 7, Center is the
ID) 5th row
K: 5 to 9, Center is the 7th
row
Highlight (Low 4th patch from the lighter density C,M,Y: 1 to 4, Center is the
ID) 2nd row
K: 1 to 5, Center is the 3rd
row
K C M Y
Shadow SP1-104-002 SP1-104-022 SP1-104-042 SP1-104-062
Middle SP1-104-003 SP1-104-023 SP1-104-043 SP1-104-063
Highlight SP1-104-001 SP1-104-021 SP1-104-041 SP1-104-061
7. Use SP1-105-001 to keep the adjusted settings.
4.20.8 COLOR SKEW ADJUSTMENT

The skew adjustment of this machine should be performed manually. The adjustment procedure
Image Adjustment
is as follows:
1. Turn ON the power and enter the SP mode.
2. Select "System SP."
3. Execute MUSIC (SP2-111-004).
Replacement
Adjustment
4. Check the result for each color with the following SPs.
&
• SP2-117-004 (K)
• SP2-117-002 (C)
• SP2-117-001 (M)
• SP2-117-003 (Y)
• If all of the SP values are within ±5, go to Step 9.

• If any of the SP values are not within ±5, go to Step 5.
Remove the paper exit tray [A]
1. Close the front door.

2. Rotate the knob(s) shown in the photo [A] to [D] at 90 degree intervals until the SP value for
the affected color(s) is 0.
• There are two knobs on each of the two LD units. A click is felt every 90 degree
rotation.
Image Adjustment
• Example:
SP value for magenta in Step 4 was “+6” Turn knob [C] 6 clicks (1 1/2
rotations) clockwise.
• SP value for yellow in Step 4 was “-7” Turn knob [D] 7 clicks (1 3/4 rotations)
counter-clockwise.
3. Make sure that the front door is closed, and execute execute MUSIC (SP2-111-004).
4. Check the result for each color.
the affected color(s) is within ±5 (target: 0).
7. Reattach the paper exit tray.
• Do not touch the LD units while installing the Paper Exit Tray. If the laser units
Image Adjustment
Open the front cover.

1. Remove the paper exit front cover, paper exit upper cover and paper exit tray. (Paper Exit
Front Cover/Paper Exit Upper Cover/Paper Exit Tray for IM C400SRF)
2. Remove the staple unit [A].
Replacement
Adjustment
&
the affected color(s) is 0.
• There are two knobs on each of the two LD units. A click is felt every 90 degree
rotation.
• Example:
SP value for magenta in Step 4 was “+6” Turn knob [C] 6 clicks (1 1/2
rotations) clockwise.
• SP value for yellow in Step 4 was “-7” Turn knob [D] 7 clicks (1 3/4 rotations)
counter-clockwise.
Image Adjustment
4. Make sure that the front door is closed, and execute execute MUSIC (SP2-111-004).
5. Check the result for each color.
the affected color(s) is within ±5 (target: 0).
8. Reattach the paper exit tray.
• Do not touch the LD units while installing the Paper Exit Tray. If the laser units
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
Service Program Mode
5. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
5.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
Maintenance
System
5.1.1 SP TABLES
• Service Program Mode
• SP Tables - SP1-XXX
• Printer SP Mode
• Scanner SP Mode
• Input and Output Check
Overview of Firmware Update
5.2 OVERVIEW OF FIRMWARE UPDATE
5.2.1 DIFFERENCE FROM PREVIOUS MACHINE

• In addition to an SD card, a USB flash drive can be used for the firmware update. Firmware
update from a USB flash drive can only be performed using the slot on the operation panel.
• When using the slot on the operation panel for the firmware update from removable media
(SD card or USB flash drive), it is no longer necessary to turn the machine’s main power
OFF and then back ON.
• Firmware update from removable media can be executed at the programmed date and
time via the package file read from the removable media in advance.
• Firmware update by the module alone is no longer available. However, an individual
firmware module may be provided on special occasions, such as for correcting a problem.
5.2.2 OVERVIEW
• The firmware is basically supplied as a package. However, an individual firmware

module may be provided on special occasions, such as for correcting a problem.
Each firmware module (such as System/Copy, Engine, etc.) used to be updated individually.
However, an all-inclusive firmware package (package_ALL) is now available.
There are four ways to update using the firmware package.
• Removable media
By downloading the firmware package to an SD card or USB flash drive in advance, you
can update the firmware when there is no network connection.
• RFU (Remote Firmware Update)
You can have the firmware package sent from the call center to the machine over the
network for automatic firmware update.
• SFU (Smart Firmware Update)
Operate the machine to download the firmware package from the server, either
immediately or at the programmed date and time.
• ARFU (Automatic Remote Firmware Update)
The machine automatically checks the server for firmware packages every 76 hours. If
there is a newer package than that on the machine, that package is downloaded for
firmware update.
SFU Removable media RFU ARFU

Individual firmware*1 N/A Available Available N/A
Firmware package Available Available Available Available
Maintenance
*1 Not abailable for this machine.
System
5.2.3 FIRMWARE TYPES
Firmware type Firmware location
System/Copy Controller Board (PCB24)
Engine BiCU (PCB1)
Operation Panel Smart Operation Panel
ADF ADF
Bank Bank
FCU FCU (PCB2)
Network Support Smart Operation Panel – CPU board (PCB20)
Bank2 Bank
BIOS BiCU (PCB1)
HDD format option Controller Board (PCB24)
RPCS Controller Board (PCB24)
PS Controller Board (PCB24)
RPDL Controller Board (PCB24)
R98 Controller Board (PCB24)
RPGL Controller Board (PCB24)
RTIFF Controller Board (PCB24)
PCL Controller Board (PCB24)
PCLXL Controller Board (PCB24)
MSIS Controller Board (PCB24)
PDF Controller Board (PCB24)
PictBridge Controller Board (PCB24)
PJL Controller Board (PCB24)
MediaPrint: JPEG Controller Board (PCB24)
MediaPrint: TIFF Controller Board (PCB24)
XPS Controller Board (PCB24)
FONT Controller Board (PCB24)
FONT1 Controller Board (PCB24)
FONT2 Controller Board (PCB24)
Firmware type Firmware location

Copy apl Smart Operation Panel – CPU board (PCB20)
NetworkDocBox Smart Operation Panel – CPU board (PCB20)
Fax apl Smart Operation Panel – CPU board (PCB20)
Printer apl Smart Operation Panel – CPU board (PCB20)
Scanner apl Smart Operation Panel – CPU board (PCB20)
Remote Fax apl Smart Operation Panel – CPU board (PCB20)
MIB Smart Operation Panel – CPU board (PCB20)
Websupport Smart Operation Panel – CPU board (PCB20)
WebUapl Smart Operation Panel – CPU board (PCB20)
CSPF Smart Operation Panel – CPU board (PCB20)
Firmware Type Firmware Location

Animation Smart Operation Panel
• Like the previous model, animation is updated by inserting the SD card into the SD
card slot (bottom) at the back of the main unit.
Firmware Update (Removable Media)
5.3 FIRMWARE UPDATE (REMOVABLE MEDIA)
5.3.1 OVERVIEW
Maintenance
System
• Removable media (SD card or USB flash drive) are a precision device, so when you
handle them, respect the following.
• When the power is switched ON, do not insert or remove the removable media.
• During installation, do not switch the power OFF.
• Since the removable media is manufactured to high precision, do not store it in a hot or
humid location, or in direct sunlight.
• Do not bend the removable media, scratch it, or give it a strong shock.
• Before downloading firmware to an SD card, check whether write-protection of the SD
card is disabled. If write-protection is enabled, an error code (error code 44, etc.) will
be displayed during download, and the download will fail.
• Before updating the firmware, remove the network cable from this machine.
• During software update, disconnect network cables and interface cables, remove
wireless boards, etc., (so that they are not accessed during the update).
5.3.2 MEDIA SLOT TO USE WHEN UPDATING
Using the SD card

Use SD Card Slot 2 [A: Lower Slot] on the back of the machine or the SD card slot [B] on the left
side of the operation panel.
• When inserting into the slot, push the SD card until it clicks.
• Check whether the card is properly in the SD card slot. When an SD card is inserted, a
click is heard, and it is locked.
• To remove the card, release by pressing once.
To use the SD card slot [A], remove the SD card slot cover [C] in the
figure below.
Using the USB Flash Drive

Use the USB slot [A] on the left side of the operation panel.
5.3.3 UPDATE PROCEDURE
Preparation
Download the latest version firmware to the removable media in advance.
Create a folder called “package” on the removable media, and then download the package
firmware (xxxxxxxx.pkg) to it.
• Do not put multiple machine firmware programs on the same SD card. Copy the only
model firmware you want.
• If you download the firmware package to the “romdata” folder, which is the one
normally used, the firmware package cannot be updated.
• When updating the firmware package of the same model, be sure to download each
version separately. If you download multiple versions for the same model, only one of
these versions is displayed on the machine’s operation panel, but which version is
displayed is unpredictable.
Note for Update
• When the power supply is switched OFF during firmware update, the update is
interrupted. When the power is switched ON again, normal operation cannot be
guaranteed.
• An update error continues to be displayed until the update is successful. In this case,
switch the power OFF, insert the removable media again, switch the power ON, and
continue the download of the firmware from the removable media.
• The PS3 firmware program is included in the preinstalled PDF firmware. In the default
state, although the PS3 firmware program is hidden in the disabled state, the function
is enabled by installing the PS3 card. (The program installed in the PS3 card is a
dongle (key) for enabling the PS3 function).
• Due to the above specification, the self-diagnosis result report shows the ROM module
number /software version of the PDF firmware at the PS location.
Using the Slot on the Back of the Machine
Maintenance
System
2. Insert the SD card into the SD card slot on the back of the machine.
Wait until the update screen starts (about 30 seconds).
When it appears, "Please Wait" is displayed.
4. Select the package, and then press [Execute].
Display Contents
ROM: Display installed module number/version information.
NEW: Display module number/version information in the card.
*The upper row corresponds to the module name, the lower row corresponds to the version
number.
5. After the data waiting screen is displayed, the update is automatically started. When the
firmware update is complete, "Update done" is displayed.
The figures at the lower right of the display indicate "Number of updated items/ All items to
be updated".
6. Turning the main power OFF.
7. Remove the SD card.
8. Turn the main power ON again, and check whether the machine is operating normally.
9. Return the SD card slot cover to the original position.
Using the Slot on the Operation Panel (Immediate Update)

2. Touch [Firmware Update].
3. Touch [Media Update].
Maintenance
System
4. When the following screen is displayed, insert the removable media into the slot on the
operation panel and touch [OK].
5. Touch [Execute].
7. After the data waiting screen is displayed, the update is automatically started. When the
firmware update is complete, "Update done" is displayed.
The figures at the lower right of the display indicate "Number of updated items/ All items to
be updated".
8. Turning the main power OFF.
9. Remove the removable media from the slot on the operation panel.
10. Turn the main power ON again, and check whether the machine is operating normally.
Using the Slot on the Operation Panel (Reserve)

Firmware update can be executed at the programmed date and time.
3. Touch [Media Update].
Maintenance
System
4. When the following screen is displayed, insert the removable media into the slot on the
operation panel and touch [OK].
5. Touch [Execute].
7. Enter update date and time and specify the Retry Setting, then touch [Set].
In "Retry setting", it is set whether or not to retry when updating cannot be started
depending on the state of the machine.
8. When the following screen is displayed, pull out the removable media from the slot on the
operation panel, and then touch [OK].
Firmware update is executed at the programmed date and time.
Whether updating is possible or not depends on ARFU setting. However, whether to start
updating does not depend on SP5-886-111 (automatic update setting) setting.
Firmware Update (Smart Firmware Update)
5.4 FIRMWARE UPDATE (SMART FIRMWARE UPDATE)
Maintenance
• A HDD unit must be installed on the machine to enable the SFU or the package
System
firmware update via media device.
5.4.1 OVERVIEW
Smart firmware update (SFU) is a system to download a firmware package. Since downloading
the package takes time, SFU lets you schedule the download to take place when the machine is
not in use, such as at night or at the weekend.
There are the following methods of updating using SFU.
1. Immediate Update: To update and download the firmware when visiting.
2. Update at the next visit: To set the date and time for firmware downloading. The firmware
will be automatically downloaded beforehand and updated at the following visit.
"Update at the next visit" is recommended since firmware download may take some
minutes due to the network condition.
• SFU requires the connection to @Remote via a device which has the embedded
@Remote communicating function. When a machine is connected to @Remote via an
intermediate device (RC Gate), the SFU function is disabled.
5.4.2 IMMEDIATE UPDATE

Enter the [Firmware Update] menu in the SP mode and update the package firmware.
• The [Firmware Update] button will appear even when a machine is connected to
@Remote with a device which does not have an embedded @Remote communicating
function.
• If an error code is displayed, refer to Firmware Update (Error Screens During
Updating).
3. Touch [Network Update].
4. Touch [Execute Update].
5. Touch [YES].
6. The following will be displayed.
Maintenance
System
• If the error code E66, which indicates that the download of the firmware has failed,
is displayed, go back to step 1.
• The update will be started automatically after the download is finished.
• When the machine is in the update mode, the automatic update is suspended if a
print job is started. After the print job is finished, touch the [YES] button on the
display, shown below, to restart updating.
7. [Update done] is displayed. The machine will automatically reboot itself.
• The figures at the lower right of the display indicate "Number of updated items/ All
items to be updated".
5.4.3 UPDATE AT THE NEXT VISIT (RESERVE)

It is possible to set the machine to download the package firmware which is necessary for SFU
in advance, and then perform the actual installation at the next service visit. This saves waiting
time for the firmware to download at the service visit.
How to Set the Machine to Download Firmware Later (Reserve)

Enter the [Firmware Update] menu in the SP mode and update the package firmware.
• The [Firmware Update] button will appear even when a machine is connected to
@Remote with a device which does not have an embedded @Remote communicating
function. If an error code is displayed, refer to Firmware Update (Error Screens
During Updating).
Maintenance
System
3. Touch [Reserve].
4. Touch [Reservation setting].
5. Enter the dates and times of the next visit and the start of receiving data.
• "Next time to visit this customer": The package firmware will be automatically
downloaded by this time/date.
• "When to receive? (1-7)": The download of the package firmware will begin this
number of days before the next visit.
When reservation update by the media device is set, the update date and time is displayed.
In the two diagrams below, the firmware is set to be downloaded by the

day before the next scheduled visit. In the first diagram, the download is
successful on the first try. In the second diagram, the download fails three
times and is successful on the fourth try.
• If the firmware download fails or cannot be completed due to the network settings/condition,
no power to the machine, or other reason, the machine will continue retrying every six
hours until the scheduled deadline (up to a maximum of four tries). For example, if the
download is set for the day before the next visit, the machine will attempt the download at
24 hours before the visit, and then continue trying every six hours (max. four tries total).
• The retry is only performed in cases when the firmware download has failed.
• If the machine is in Energy Saver mode when the download is scheduled to begin, the
download will be performed in the background and the machine/panel will stay in Energy
Saver mode.
• The download will continue uninterrupted even if the customer initiates a print job, copy job,
fax receiving or other operation while the download is in progress.
• The download will be terminated if the customer turns the power OFF while the download is
in progress.
• If the download cannot be completed successfully by the time of the next scheduled visit,
the machine will stop trying to download the firmware.
How to Check if the Firmware Downloaded with Reserve

Maintenance
System
3. Touch [Reserve].
4. Touch [Reserved package information].
5. Check the information displayed.

When the package firmware was downloaded successfully, the details of the download
result are displayed as the following picture shows.
• This information will only be displayed if the reserved firmware has already been
downloaded. If not, all the data items are indicated with "-".
• When reservation update by the media device is set, the package firmware
information reserved from the media device is displayed.
How to Install Firmware Downloaded with Reserve

3. Touch [Network Update].
4. Touch [Execute Update].
Maintenance
System
5. Check the version of the received package firmware, and then touch [YES].
• The update is started.
• If the version of the reserved package in the HDD is older than the latest version,
the messages shown in the following picture are displayed.
• If you wish to download the latest version, touch [Execute] beside the message
"Download and update the latest package." Then the update of the package
firmware will be started.
• If you wish to update using the firmware in the HDD (old version), touch [Execute]
beside the message "Update to the received package."
6. [Update done] is displayed.
• The machine will automatically reboot itself.
• The figures at the lower right of the display indicate "Number of updated items/ All
items to be updated".
Firmware Update (Remote Firmware Update)
5.5 FIRMWARE UPDATE (REMOTE FIRMWARE UPDATE)
In this machine, the software can be updated by remote control using @Remote.
Maintenance
System
5.5.1 RFU PERFORMABLE CONDITION
RFU is performable for a device which meets the following conditions.
1. The customer consents to the use of RFU.
2. The device is connected to a network via TCP/IP for @Remote.
Firmware Update (Auto Remote Firmware Update)
5.6 FIRMWARE UPDATE (AUTO REMOTE FIRMWARE
UPDATE)
• Auto remote firmware update (ARFU) requires a connection to an external network. Be

sure to get permission from the customer before setting.
• Internet connection is needed.
5.6.1 OVERVIEW
Using Auto Remote Firmware Update (ARFU), the machine checks package firmware files on
the global server every 76 hours. If there is a version available newer than the one on the
machine, the machine downloads the file to update the machine’s package firmware.
5.6.2 DOWNLOADING AND UPDATING PROCESS
Maintenance
System
Downloads the Latest Package
The machine accesses the server to check for latest package version.
If the version of the package on the global server is later than that of the package installed on
the machine, or if the machine has not downloaded the firmware package, the machine
downloads the latest package in the background even when the customer is using the machine.
If the download fails, the machine will retry downloading 76 hours later.
The downloaded package can also be used with SFU (Smart Firmware Update). A package
downloaded with SFU (Smart Firmware Update) can be used with ARFU (Auto Remote
Firmware Update) and vice versa.
When replacing the hard disk, information concerning the current firmware package becomes
lost from the hard disk. So, even if the latest firmware is on the new hard disk, be sure to
download the latest package data.
When the machine connects to the server where the package files are stored, the DNS settings
and the name solution by DNS is needed. The machine will still try to download the package
even if the name cannot be resolved, but will fail as the name is not resolved.
The time and date to send the next inquiry to the global server can be checked with
SP5-886-116 (Farm Update Setting: Auto Update Next Date).
The auto remote firmware update is executed every 76 hours.
ARFU Update Determination

When the machine has successfully downloaded the latest package firmware file, or if the file
has already been downloaded, the machine verifies whether a firmware update is necessary.
If the timing of determination is within the update prohibition period or day set in the SP
configuration or Web Image Monitor, the machine will retry the firmware update determination
76 hours later.
If the machine is in use at the time of firmware update, the machine will retry the update. The
machine retries update up to three times at one-hour intervals (which can be changed in the SP
configuration). If the machine is in use on all three retries, the machine will retry the update 76
hours later.
Maintenance
System
No. Situations in which the machine is determined to be in use
1 When the operation panel is used within 30 seconds
2 During firmware update
3 While firmware update is disabled
4 While printing (copy, printer, fax, re-printing via network)
5 While scanning (copy, scanner, fax)
6 Retrieving image data via the network
7 While initial setting ([Settings] icon) or SP is being set
8 While fax is transferring data
9 During on-hook/on the handset
10 During the PC-FAX process (from PC to machine data transfer to the end of the job)
11 While switching to/from the energy saving mode
12 When not being able to run the firmware update due to the modules that are running
e.g.) Waiting for DCS transfer (refer to appendix), accessing devices such as HDD/SD card,
etc.
13 While displaying a preview
14 While the document server function is in use
15 Connecting to TWAIN
16 During the interrupt copy process
17 While displaying the printer menu
18 While updating the display for the document server function via WIM or for stored fax
documents
19 While writing log information
20 While accessing the address book
21 During SC
22 While shutting down
No. Situations in which the machine is determined to be in use

23 While importing/exporting SP settings
24 The interval between changing settings that require a reboot and actually rebooting (A
reboot notification message pops up after changing the settings.)
25 While verifying the operation panel (smart panel)
Update Process
When the machine updates the firmware by Auto Remote Firmware Update (ARFU), a
message dialog box opens to indicate the start of update.
“Cancel” and “OK” buttons appear in the dialog box. Update can be manually started by
pressing “OK” or starts automatically if the button is not pressed for 30 seconds.
If “Cancel” is pressed, the machine will perform the same retry process as when the machine is
in use at the time of update.
If the firmware update and three retries fail, the SC of the defective module during update will be
displayed as the update error. If the following SC occurs, replacing the corresponding device
restores the machine. The SC will not be reported to the call center.
Device name SC number

Engine board SC845-01
Controller board (PCB24) SC845-02
Operation panel (normal panel)*1 SC845-03
Operation panel (smart panel) SC845-04
FCU (PCB2) SC845-05
*1 Not available for this machine
Using the operation panel, the user can cancel the update (including update through the
retry process) being performed by Auto Remote Firmware Update (ARFU).
Maintenance
System
However, while the firmware of the operation panel is being updated, cancellation is not
possible because the keys are disabled.
(Since the update of the operation panel firmware is performed at the end, you cannot cancel
the update at this point.)
If the update is canceled, the machine will reboot when the firmware update of all modules
included in the following parts is complete.
1. Engine Board
2. FCU (PCB2)
3. Controller Board (PCB24)
4. Operation Panel
For example, if the first firmware update for the Controller Board (PCB24) is canceled, the
machine will reboot when the firmware update of all modules included in the Controller Board
(PCB24) is complete.
The firmware configuration contained in the package is listed in the accompanying SERES
release note.
If the update is canceled, it will be performed again 76 hours later. If there is a difference in
version between the package obtained at that time and the one already stored (in other words,
the one canceled), the old package will be discarded and the latest one will be received.
5.6.3 RELATED SP
SP Number Selection Overview
Def.
SP5-886-111 0: OFF Sets auto update ON/OFF by ARFU.
1: ON
SP5-886-112 0: OFF Will not run the update when update prohibited time setting is ON
1: ON and the current time is in the range of the time set.
SP5-886-113 0 to 23 • Start time < End time: Prohibited time is from the start time to
9 the end time on the same day.
SP5-886-114 0 to 23 • Start time > End time: Prohibited time is from the start time to
17 the end time on the next day.
• Start time == End time: Prohibited time setting is disabled.
(Update will not be prohibited.)
SP5-886-115 0: OFF Even when the auto update function is disabled, downloading the
1: ON package is allowed.
The downloaded package can be used with SFU.
SP5-886-116 Display Displays when the latest package check will run.
only
SP5-886-117 1 to 24 Set time for the next version check after retry.
1
SP5-886-120 0x00 The update will not run if the corresponding bit for each day
below is set to 1.
• prohibited:bit7
• Monday: bit 6
• Tuesday: bit 5
• Wednesday: bit 4
• Thursday: bit 3
• Friday: bit 2
• Saturday: bit 1
• Sunday: bit 0
This setting is not affected by the prohibited time setting.
e.g.) Prohibited on Mon., Fri., Sat., and Sun. : 0x47 (01000111)
SP7-520-011 to Display History of date and time when the update has started.
015 only The five most recent are recorded, the lowest number being the
most recent.
If the last update failed, this is not recorded.
SP7-520-021 to Display History of date and time when the update has finished.
SP Number Selection Overview

Def.
most recent.
The record is created when the update has successfully finished.
Maintenance
When the update is canceled, no record is created.
System
SP7-520-031 to Display History of the package number (including suffix) for which update
035 only has completed.
The five most recent are recorded, the lowest number being the
most recent.
SP7-520-041 to Display History of the package version for which update has completed.
most recent.
SP7-520-051 to Display History of the result of the download and the update.
060 only Refer below for the numbers set.
No. Result Description

1 Downloading with SFU Cannot download or update as the machine is now
downloading the package for SFU.
2 HDD uninstalled Cannot download or update as the machine has no
HDD.
3 Updating with SFU Cannot download or update as the machine is being
updated with SFU.
4 HDD error Cannot download or update as the HDD cannot be
used.
5 Version information obtain error Cannot download or update as the version information
cannot be obtained.
6 Update download error Cannot download or update as the update download
failed.
In the non @Remote method, this shows that the
download failed because there was no proxy set.
7 Name resolution error Cannot download or update as the name cannot be
resolved upon downloading the update.
8 Auto update setting disabled The package has been downloaded but will not run the
update as SP5-886-111 (auto update setting) is disabled

and SP5-886-115 (auto download setting for SFU) is
enabled.
9 Update prohibited time Cannot start to update as the auto-update prohibited
time setting (SP5-886-112) is enabled and the time
update initiated was in the range of prohibited time
(SP5-886-113 to 114).
Or the day which update was initiated was a day for
which update was prohibited (SP5-886-120).
10 Update postponed due to the Cannot start update due to the following conditions
machine in use when the update was initiated.
• The machine is in use by a user (the panel was
used within 30 seconds)
• Machine offline for other reasons
• Operation prohibited
• Displaying SP/UP menu
• The firmware update is running with another
method
• Configuration change prohibited
• Verifying the operation panel (smart panel)
11 Update canceled by the user The update was canceled because a user selected
"Cancel" in the popup shown before starting the update.
12 Offline failed Cannot start to update as the machine is offline for other
reasons.
13 Update successful The update was started and successfully completed.
14 Update failed The update was started but failed.
15 Update canceled by the user The update was canceled after the process initiated
after update initiated because a user selected "Cancel" during the update.
16 Update deemed completed The update was canceled after the process was initiated
because a user selected “Cancel”. There is no need to
resume the update due to one of the following reasons:
• A newer update has been released and received.
• When retrying ARFU, the update has already been
completed by another method.
17 Version information obtain error Cannot download or update as the proxy verification
(proxy verification failure) failed with proxy settings when obtaining version
information.
18 Version information obtain error Cannot download or update as an error other than proxy
(other than proxy verification verification with proxy settings occurred when obtaining

failure when the proxy is set) version information.
19 Update download error (proxy Cannot download or update as the proxy verification
verification failure) failed with proxy settings when downloading the
Maintenance
package.
System
20 Update download error (other Cannot download or update as an error other than proxy
than proxy verification failure verification with proxy settings occurred when
when the proxy is set) downloading the package.
22 Update by retry successful After a power failure, unsuccessful update, or rebooting,
update by retry is executed successfully.
However, this does not apply to the case where the
update was canceled after the process was initiated
because a user selected “Cancel”.
In this case, the update is “successful” if the retry is not
executed between the start and completion of the next
update (76 hours after the cancellation).
23 Update data decompression has Receiving the update data successfully completed but
failed failed to update because update data decompression
failed.
Data in the package file may be corrupted, or data may
be garbled due to a defect in the DIMM or the HDD.
Firmware Update (Error Screens During Updating)
5.7 FIRMWARE UPDATE (ERROR SCREENS DURING
UPDATING)
EXX shows an error code.

For error codes, refer to the following table:
Error Code List
Code Contents Solutions
20 Physical address mapping cannot be • Switch the main power supply OFF and
performed. ON to try again.
• Re-insert the removable media to reboot
it.
• Replace the controller board (PCB24) if
the above solutions do not solve the
problem.
21 Insufficient memory for the download • Switch the main power supply OFF and
ON to try again.
the updating cannot be done by switching
the power OFF and ON.
22 Decompression of compressed data • Switch the main power supply OFF and
failed. ON to try again.
• Replace the removable media used for
the update.
problem.
24 Removable media access error • Re-insert the removable media.
• Switch the main power supply OFF and
ON to try again.
• Replace the removable media used for
the update.

problem.
Maintenance
32 The removable media used after • Insert the removable media containing the
System
download suspension is incorrect. same program as when the firmware
Removable media is different between update was suspended, and then switch
the one which was inserted before the main power supply OFF and ON to try
power interruption and the one which again.
was inserted after the power • There is a possibility that the removable
interruption. media is damaged if the update cannot be
done after the correct removable media
has been inserted. In this case, try again
with a different removable media.
problem.
Replace all relevant boards if the update
is done for the BICU (PCB1) and FCU
(PCB2).
Replace the operation panel unit if the
update is done for the operation panel.
• After replacing the unit, update it using the
same removable media. If the update is
successful, this error code disappears.
33 Removable media version error. • Install the correct ROM update data for
The wrong removable media version is each version in the removable media.
downloaded.
34 Destination error. • Install the correct ROM update data for
A removable media for the wrong each destination (JPN/ EXP/ OEM) in the
destination is inserted. removable media.
35 Model error. • Install the correct ROM update data for
A removable media for the wrong model each model in the removable media.
is inserted.
36 Module error. • Install the program to be updated in
The program to be downloaded does not advance.
exist on the main machine. • There is a possibility that the removable
The download destination specified by media containing the program to be
the removable media does not match up updated has not been mounted. Check to

to the destination for the main machine’s confirm that the removable media has
program. been correctly mounted.
• The removable media is incorrect if the
program to be updated has been correctly
installed. In this case, insert the correct
removable media.
38 The version of the downloaded program • Make sure that the program to be
has not been authorized for the update. overwritten is the specified version.
40 Engine download fails. • Switch the main power supply OFF and
ON to try again.
• If this error occurs while using the media
slot on the left side of the operation panel,
perform a retry using the media slot on the
back of the machine.
• If the download fails again, replace the
controller board (PCB24) and the BICU
(PCB1).
41 Fax download fails. • Switch the main power supply OFF and
ON to try again.
controller board (PCB24) and the FCU
board.
42 Control panel/language download fails. • Switch the main power supply OFF and
ON to try again.
controller board (PCB24) and the
operation panel unit.
43 Printing download fails. • Switch the main power supply OFF and
ON to try again.

• The removable media is damaged if the
update fails again. Replace the removable
media.
Maintenance
44 The data to be overwritten cannot be • Switch the main power supply OFF and
System
accessed when controller-related ON to try again.
programs are downloaded. • Install the correct ROM update data in the
removable media.
the data to be overwritten is contained on
the controller board (PCB24).
49 Firmware updates are currently • The setting of Update Firmware in the
prohibited. Administrator Tools has been set to
[Prohibit] by an administrator. Amend the
setting to [Do not Prohibit] and try again.
50 The results of the electronic • Install the correct ROM update data in the
authorization check have rejected the removable media.
update data.
57 @Remote is not connected at the • Check the @Remote connection.
date/time reserved for receiving the
package firmware update from the
network.
58 Update cannot be done due to a • Check the @Remote connection.
reception route problem.
59 HDD is not mounted. • Check the HDD connection.
60 HDD could not be used during the • Try again.
package firmware update. • Replace the HDD if the download fails
again.
61 The module ID for the package firmware • Prepare the correct package files.
update is incorrect.
62 The configuration of the package • Prepare the correct package files.
firmware update files is incorrect.
63 Reception fails due to the power off at • Update is to be done automatically when
the reserved date/time of the remote the next reception time has elapsed.
firmware update from the network.
64 Reception fails due to the power off at • Reset the reservation date/time for the
the reserved date/time of the package remote update.
65 Reception fails due to the status error of • Update is to be done automatically when

the machine at the reserved date/time of the next reception time has elapsed.
the remote firmware update from the
network.
66 Reception failed due to the status error • Reset the reservation date/time for the
of the machine at the reserved date/time remote update.
of the package firmware update from the
network.
67 Acquisition of the latest version • Check that the network is connected
information from the Gateway fails at the correctly.
reserved date/time of the remote
68 Acquisition of the latest version • Check that the network is connected
information from the Gateway fails. correctly.
69 Download fails at the reserved date/time • Check that the network is connected
of the remote firmware update from the correctly.
network.
70 Package firmware download from the • Check that the network is connected
network fails. correctly.
71 Network communication error occurs at • Check that the network is connected
the reserved date/time of the package correctly.
72 The setting of @Remote is invalid at the • Set the setting of @Remote Service in the
reserved date/time of the package Administrator Tools to [Do not Prohibit].
74 Package file decompression has failed. • If this occurred during the update by the
removable media, check that the
removable media is not defective,
download the package again, and retry
the update.
• If this occurred during the remote
firmware update (WIM and utility) in the
local environment, replace the package
file in the local environment with the
correct one and retry the update.
• If this has occurred on other occasions or
keeps occurring even on the above
mentioned occasions, replace the DIMM
of the controller board (PCB24).

If it persists, replace the hard disk.
75 The amount of update data has • Move “fwu” in the “/romdata” directory out
exceeded the limit. There is too much of that directory so that the same modules
Maintenance
data in the removable media. are not located in the same directory.
System
83 Package RFU reception has been • Package RFU reception has been
canceled by the user. canceled by the user.
84 Package RFU reception timeout. The • Check the network connection.
reception time has exceeded the limit
(100 minutes).
Updating JavaVM
5.8 UPDATING JAVAVM
5.8.1 OVERVIEW
Updating Java VM is performed with a PC using the update tool.
SD memory card reader/writer

• PC
Deactivate the SDK applications.

1. Remove the VM Card Type M37 from the main machine.
2. Update Java VM with the PC using the update tool.
3. Insert the VM Card Type M37 in the main machine.
4. Activate the SDK applications.
5.8.2 DEACTIVATING SDK APPLICATIONS AND REMOVING THE

VM CARD
Operation from Operation Panel

1. Enable [Machine Management] of the administrator authentication, and log in as the
machine administrator.
Select the [Settings] icon > [System Settings] > [Settings for Administrator] >
[Authentication/Charge] > [Administrator Authentication/User Authentication/App Auth.] >
[Administrator Authentication Management Register/Change Administrator]. Enable
[Machine Management] and login as the machine administrator.
2. Press the [Settings] icon on Home screen.
4. Press [Extended Feature Information] twice.
5. Press [Heap/Stack Size Information].
6. Take a note of the current heap size settings in order to check them after version update.
7. Return to the [Extended Feature Settings] screen, and press the [Startup Setting] tab.
8. Disable all SDK applications except Java TM Platform.
9. Press the SDK applications until the status changes from "Starting Up"/"Suspend"/"Ending"
to "Stop".
10. Press the [Extended Feature Info] tab.
11. Press the stopped SDK applications to set "Auto Start" to "Off".
"Auto Start" settings can be enabled on this screen if Type-J SDK applications are enabled.
12. Select [OK] > [Exit].
Updating JavaVM
13. Turn the main power OFF.

14. Remove the SD card slot cover [A] (coin screw x 1).
Maintenance
System
15. Remove VM Card Type M37 from SD Card Slot 2 [A: Lower Slot].
Operation from Web Image Monitor

1. Log in as the administrator from Web Image Monitor.
2. Take a note of the current heap size setting in [Heap / Stack Size Settings].
[Device Management] -> [Configuration] -> [Extended Feature Settings] -> [Administrator
Tools] -> [Heap / Stack Size Settings]
3. Stop all SDK applications except for Java TM Platform.
1. Display the [Startup Setting] menu.
[Device Management] -> [Configuration] -> [Extended Feature Settings] -> [Startup
Setting]
2. Check the radio button of the SDK application which status is "Starting Up".
3. Click [Start Up/Stop] to stop the application.
4. "Stop" is displayed in the status column.
Do not change the status of Java TM Platform to "Stop".

4. Make sure that "Auto Start" is set to "Off" for each SDK application.
1. Click the [Details] icon ( ) for each SDK application in [Startup Setting].
2. Make sure that "Auto Start" is set to "Off". (Default: On)
5. Turn the main power OFF.
Updating JavaVM
6. Remove the SD card slot cover [A] (Coin screw x 1).
7. Remove VM Card Type M37 from SD Card Slot 2 [A: Lower Slot].
5.8.3 UPDATING JAVAVM AND INSERTING THE VM CARD

1. Insert VM Card Type M37 into the SD memory card reader/writer of the PC.
2. Check that the SD memory card reader/writer is detected on the PC, and then write down
the drive letter. (If the SD memory card reader/writer is detected as (F:), the drive letter is
"f")
3. Download the update modules from the Firmware Download Center.
4. Unzip the downloaded file, and then execute the .exe file.
5. The folder is generated.
6. Execute the .bat file in the folder.
7. Input the drive letter following the message "Please input drive letter of SD card [a - x]: ". (If
the SD memory card reader/writer is detected as (F:), input "f")
8. Press the [Enter] key to start updating Java VM.

It takes 3 minutes to update Java VM.
9. After completing the update, remove VM Card Type M37 from the SD memory card
Updating JavaVM
reader/writer of the PC.

10. Insert VM Card Type M37 into SD Card Slot 2 (Lower slot) of the machine.
5.8.4 ACTIVATING SDK APPLICATIONS
Maintenance
1. Make sure that the VM card is fully inserted, and then turn the main power ON.
System
2. Log in as the machine administrator from Operation panel / Web Image Monitor.
3. Set "Auto Start" whose status is "OFF" to "On".
4. Compare the current heap size settings and the values recorded before update.
If the settings are not the same as the recorded values, correct the settings to the recorded
values.
5. Enable the disabled SDK application.
NVRAM Data Upload/Download
5.9 NVRAM DATA UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD
5.9.1 UPLOADING CONTENT OF NVRAM TO AN SD CARD

Do the following procedure to upload SP code settings from NVRAM to an SD card.
• This data should always be uploaded to an SD card before the NVRAM is replaced.
• Make sure that the write protection of an SD card is unlocked.
1. Do SP5-990-001 (SP Print Mode: All(Data List)) before you turn the machine off. You will
need a record of the NVRAM settings if the upload fails.
Make sure to shut down and reboot the machine once before printing the SMC. Otherwise,
the latest settings may not be collected when the SMC is printed.
3. Remove the SD slot cover [A].
4. Insert the SD card into SD card slot 2 (lower) [A].

6. Do SP5-824-001 (NVRAM Data Upload) and then press [Execute].
7. The following files are coped to an NVRAM folder on the SD card when the upload
procedure is finished. The file is saved to the path and the following filename:
NVRAM\<serial number>.NV
Here is an example with Serial Number "K5000017114":
NVRAM\K5000017114.NV
NVRAM Data Upload/Download
8. In order to prevent an error during the download, be sure to mark the SD card that holds
the uploaded data with the number of the machine from which the data was uploaded.
• You can upload NVRAM data from more than one machine to the same SD card.
Maintenance
System
5.9.2 DOWNLOADING AN SD CARD TO NVRAM
Do the following procedure to download SP data from an SD card to the NVRAM in the
machine.
• The NVRAM data download may fail if the SD card with the NVRAM data is damaged, or if
the connection between the controller and BiCU (PCB1) is defective.
• Do the download procedure again if the download fails.
• Do the following procedure if the second attempt fails:
• Enter the NVRAM data manually using the SMC print you created before uploading the
NVRAM data.
2. Remove the SD slot cover.
3. Insert the SD card with the NVRAM data into SD card slot 2 (lower).
5. Do SP5-825-001 (NVRAM Data Download) and press [Execute].
• The serial number of the file on the SD card must match the serial number of the
machine for the NVRAM data to download successfully. The download fails if the
serial numbers do not match.
This procedure does not download the following data to the NVRAM:
• Total Count
• C/O, P/O Count
Address Book Upload/Download
5.10 ADDRESS BOOK UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD
5.10.1 INFORMATION LIST

The following information is possible to be uploaded and downloaded.
Information
• Registration No. • Select Title
• User Code • Folder
• E-mail • Local Authentication
• Protection Code • Folder Authentication
• Fax Destination • Account ACL
• Fax Option • New Document Initial ACL
• Group Name • LDAP Authentication
• Key Display
5.10.2 DOWNLOAD
1. Prepare a formatted SD card.
2. Make sure that the write-protection on the SD card is off.
4. Remove the SD slot cover [A] at the left rear side of the machine.
5. Install the SD card into the SD card slot 2 (lower) [A] (for service use).

8. Do SP5-846-051 (Backup All Addr Book).
Address Book Upload/Download
9. Exit the SP mode, and then turn OFF the power.

10. Remove the SD card form the SD card slot 2 (lower).
11. Install the SD slot cover.
Maintenance
• If the capacity of SD card is not enough to store the local user information, an
System
error message is displayed.
• Carefully handle the SD card, which contains user information. Do not take it back
to your location.
5.10.3 UPLOAD
2. Remove the SD slot cover at the left rear side of the machine.
3. Install the SD card, which has already been uploaded, into the SD card slot 2 (lower).
6. Do SP5-846-052 (Restore All Addr Book).
7. Exit the SP mode, and then turn OFF the power.
8. Remove the SD card form the SD card slot 2 (lower).
9. Install the SD slot cover.
• The counter in the user code information is initialized after uploading.

• The information of an administrator and supervisor cannot be downloaded nor
uploaded.
• If there is no data of address book information in the SD card, an error message is
displayed.
SMC List Card Save Function
5.11 SMC LIST CARD SAVE FUNCTION
5.11.1 OVERVIEW
The SMC List Card Save (SP Text Mode) function is used to save the SMC list as CSV files to
the SD card inserted into the operation panel SD card slot.
• Make sure to shut down and reboot the machine once before exporting the SMC sheet
data. Otherwise, the latest settings may not be collected when the SMC is exported.
5.11.2 PROCEDURE
2. Insert the SD card into the operation panel SD-card slot or the SD card slot 2 (lower), and
then turn ON the power.
3. Enter SP mode.
4. Select [System/Copy SP].
5. Select SP5-992-001 (SP Text Mode) and then, select a detail SP number shown below to
save data on the SD card.
SP5-992-xxx (SP Text Mode)
Detail No. SMC Categories to Save
001 All (Data List)
002 SP (Mode Data List)
003 User Program
004 Logging Data
005 Diagnostic Report
006 Non-Default
007 NIB Summary
008 Capture Log
021 Copier User Program
022 Scanner SP
023 Scanner User Program
024 SDK/J Summary
025 SDK/J Application Info
026 Printer SP
027 Smart Operation Panel SP
028 Smart Operation Panel UP
6. Press [EXECUTE].
Maintenance
System
7. Press [EXECUTE] again to start. Press [CANCEL] to cancel the saving.
8. “It is executing it” is shown on the screen while executing.
9. Wait for 2 to 3 minutes until “Completed” is shown.
• The SMC list saving may take from 2 to 3 minutes to complete.

• Press [CANCEL] to abort executing.
10. Press [Exit].
11. Press [Exit] to exit from SP mode.
5.11.3 FILE NAMES OF THE SAVED SMC LISTS

The SMC list data saved on the SD card will be named automatically. The file naming rules are
as follows.
Example:
A:
Machine serial number (fixed for each machine)
B:
SP number saved in this file.
First four digits (5992) in this part are fixed. The other one or two digits are the detail SP
number(s). In this case, it is one digit. Therefore, this file is of SP5-992-001 (All data list). See
the upper SP table for the correspondence between SP detail numbers and the contents.
C:
File creation date
Year/Month/Day (“Zero” will be omitted if each is one digit.)
D:
File creation time
Hour/Minute/Second (“Zero” will be omitted if each is one digit.)
E:
File Extension CSV (Comma Separated Value)
This part is fixed.
• A folder named by the machine serial number will be created on the SD card when this
function is executed.
• This function can save the SMC list data only to an SD card inserted into the operation
Maintenance
panel SD card slot.
System
5.11.4 ERROR MESSAGES
SMC List Card Save error message:
• Failed:
FACTOR: Read-only file system, No space left on device.
If an error occurs, pressing “Exit” will cause the device to discard the job and return to the ready
state.
Capturing the Device Logs
5.12 CAPTURING THE DEVICE LOGS
5.12.1 OVERVIEW
With this feature, you can save device logs that are stored in the machine (HDD or operation
panel) on an SD card. It allows the Customer Engineer to save and retrieve error information for
analysis.
The Capturing Log feature saves device logs for the following five.
• Controller device log including operation log
• Engine device log
• FCU device log
• Operation panel log
• SC819 log
• In older models, a technician enabled the logging tool after a problem occurred. After
that, when the problem had been reproduced, the technician was able to retrieve the
device log.
• However, this new feature saves the device logs when problems occur. Then you can
copy the logs to an SD card.
• You can retrieve the device logs using a SD card without a network.
• Analysis of the device log is effective for problems caused by the software. Analysis of
the device log is not valid for the selection of defective parts or problems caused by
hardware.
• Make sure to shut down and reboot the machine once before retrieving the Debug
Logs. Otherwise, the latest settings may not be collected when the debug logs are
retrieved.
Type Storage Timing Destination (maximum

storage capacity)
Controller device • Saved at all times HDD or SD card
log including (2GB/8GB) connected to
operation log the service slot.
When the data gets over
the capacity of the SD
card, the older data is
deleted.
Engine device • When an engine SC occurs HDD or SD card
log • When paper feeding/output stop because of connected to the service
a jam slot (Up to 300 times)
Type Storage Timing Destination (maximum

storage capacity)
• When the machine doors are opened during
normal operation
Maintenance
FCU device log • When a specified amount of FCU device log HDD or SD card
System
is stored in the FCU (PCB2). If fax connected to the service
application is unavailable (e.g. not installed), slot
the machine does not transfer the log.
Operation panel • When an error related to the operation panel Memory in the operation
log occurs. panel.
SC819 log • When the main power button is switched On HDD
after SC819 occurs.
• Device logs are not saved in the following conditions:

• While erasing all memory
• While data encryption equipment is installed
• While changing the firmware configuration
• Forced power OFF (accidentally disconnecting the outlet)
• Engine device log while the machine is shutting down
• When the power supply to the HDD is off because of energy saving (engine OFF
mode/STR mode)
• When one of the following SCs occurs: SC672, SC816, SC819, SC878, SC899,
SC859, SC860, SC861, SC863, or SC864
• The following logs are not saved:

• Logs related to the energy saver mode (Engine-off, suspend-mode, or other cases)
Network communication log
Logs related to NRS
IP-FAX log
Access log for unauthorized users (guests)
• HTTP session timeout log
• Auto log-out log
• IC card related log
• Authorization for Fax
Security of the Operation Log

The following operation logs related to security are not saved.
• User ID
• Password
• IP address
• Telephone number
• Encryption key
• Transition to SP mode
5.12.2 RETRIEVING THE DEVICE LOGS VIA OPERATION PANEL
• Retrieve device logs to identify the date of occurrence of the problems and to find
details of the problems
• e.g.: At around 8:00 am on March 10, an engine stall occurred. The operation panel
does not respond. Turn the main power supply OFF / ON.
• Analysis of the device log is effective for problems caused by the software. Analysis of
the device log is not valid for the selection of defective parts or problems caused by
hardware.
Procedure for Retrieving the Device Log with SD Card

1. Open the front cover with the main machine turned ON.
• If the engine log remains in the SRAM on the BiCU (PCB1), the engine log for the
last 5 to 10 minutes can be transferred to the HDD by opening the front cover.
3. Insert the SD card into the slot on the side of the operation panel or the service slot.
• It is recommended to use the SD card (2 GBs* or 8 GBs**) provided as a service

part. This is because the log data can be acquired much faster than when using
commercially available SD cards.
• Format the SD card by using SD Formatter from Panasonic before copying the
logs: https://www.sdcard.org/downloads/formatter_3/ (free software)
• Insert the SD card into the machine's service slot instead of the SD slot on the
side of the operation panel.
* The part number of the SD card with 2 GBs that is registered as a service part is
"B6455030".
** The part number of the SD card with 8 GBs that is registered as a service part is
"B6455040".
5. Enter SP mode.
6. Specify the date that the problem occurred in SP5-858-101 (Start Date) by setting it to the
year-month-day calendar format.
• For example, if a problem occurred on February 1, 2015, the date should be set to
"20150201", as shown above.

• Be sure to confirm the date when the problem occurred before obtaining the logs.
7. Specify the number of days to collect the logs in SP5-858-102 (Days of Tracing).
• "2" is set by default, which is the minimum needed for investigating the problem.
Maintenance
• A value of "1" to "180" can be set.
System
8. Execute SP5-858-111 (Acquire All Info & Logs) to copy all of the log types to an SD card.
It is possible to obtain the logs separately by the following SPs.
SP Collectable Information and/or Logs
SP5-858-111 All of the information and logs that are collected by executing the SPs from
SP5-858-121 to SP5-858-145, and SMC.
SP5-858-121 Configuration page
SP5-858-122 Font page
SP5-858-123 Print settings list
SP5-858-124 Error log
SP5-858-131 Fax information (whether the fax destinations are included or not depends on
the setting of SP5-858-103.)
SP5-858-141 Controller log, engine log, operation panel log, FCU (PCB2), and SMC.
SP5-858-142 Controller log
SP5-858-143 Engine log
SP5-858-144 Operation panel log
SP5-858-145 FCU log
SP5-992-001 SMC
9. After executing the SP for copying the information and/or logs, a confirmation screen will
appear. To proceed with obtaining the information and/or logs, tap "Execute"
• The approximate time it takes to transfer the debug log is as follows. Transfer time
may be affected by the type or format of the SD card.
Controller device log (GW device log): 2 - 20 minutes
Engine device log: 2 minutes
Operation panel device log: 2 - 20 minutes
If the estimated time is not calculated due to an error, an error code will be displayed.
Error Description
Code
-1 Other.
-2 No SD card is inserted in the service slot or in the SD slot on the side of the
operation panel. In this case, insert an SD card into either of the SD slots.
-3 The SD card is locked. In this case, unlock the SD card, as shown below.
[A]: Unlocked, [B]: Locked

10. Wait for the information and/or logs to be copied to the SD card.
11. After a message stating that the process has completed appears on the operation panel,
confirm that the LED light next to the SD card slot is not flashing and then remove the SD
card.
• The process of obtaining logs fails in the following cases:

- When the size of the logs to obtain exceeds the amount of space available on
the SD card.
- When the SD card is removed while the logs are being copied to it.
- When the SD card is not formatted.
• If ‘failed’ appears on the touch panel display, turn the power off, and then recover
from step 1 again.
5.12.3 RETRIEVING THE DEVICE LOGS VIA WEB IMAGE

MONITOR
The device logs can be retrieved via the Web Image Monitor.
Maintenance
1. Access the following URL and logon as an administrator:
System
http://[IP address or host name]/web/entry/df/websys/direct/getSysInfo.cgi
2. Specify the date that the problem occurred and the number of days to download the logs. If
the fax destinations need to be included in the fax information, set "On" as "Obtain Fax
Destination(s) Information". Then click "Calculate".
• "2" is set by default for "Number of days, including date fault occurred, to obtain".
However "2", which is the minimum needed for investigating the problems, is
recommended for reducing the downloading time.
• "Obtain Fax Destination(s) Information" is set to "Off" by default.
3. Click "Start".
4. The confirmation screen will appear and the information and/or logs will start downloading.
To proceed to download the information and/or logs, wait for the save or save and open
dialog to appear.
• To cancel downloading, click "Cancel".

• Operation panel when downloading the logs:
5. After a while, the save or save and open dialog will appear. Specify where to download and
save the file.
• The debug logs are saved with the following file names. These names are the
same as the files downloaded with SD card.
Following device logs are saved.
• Engine debug log
• Condition data log
• Operation panel debug log
• FCU debug log
• Communication log (network packet)
• Configuration Page
• Printer Setting List
• Font List
• Error Log
• Fax information
• SMC
Maintenance
• SC 819 log
System
UP/SP Data Import/Export
5.13 UP/SP DATA IMPORT/EXPORT
5.13.1 UP DATA IMPORT/EXPORT
Data that can be Imported and Exported

• Copier / Document Server Settings
• Printer Settings
• Scanner Settings
• Fax Settings
• Browser settings
• Program (Document Server)
• Program (Copy)
• Program (Scanner)
• Web Image Monitor Setting
• Web Service Settings
• System Settings
• Screen Features Settings
• Home screen customization settings*1
*1 Wallpaper cannot be exported if "Live Wallpaper" is selected.
Data that cannot be Imported or Exported

• Some System Settings *1
• Extended Feature Settings
• Address book
• Program (Fax function)
• Program (Printer function)
• Settings that can be specified via telnet
• RICOH@Remote-related data
• Counters
• Settings that can only be specified via Web Image Monitor or Web Service (for example,
Bonjour, SSDP setting)
*1 The setting for the date, settings that require device certificate, settings that need to be
adjusted for each machine (for example, image adjustment settings), settings only for executing
functions, and settings only for viewing cannot be imported or exported.
Exporting Device Information

This can be exported / imported by an administrator with all privileges.
When exporting SP device information from the operation panel, the data is saved on an SD
Maintenance
card.
System
1. With the Copy/Printer/Scanner/Fax/Settings screen open, insert an SD card into the media
slot on the side of the operation panel.
2. Log in from the operation panel as an administrator with all privileges.
3. Press [Settings] on the Home screen > [System Settings].
4. Press [Settings for Administrator] > [Data Management] > [Device Setting Information:
Export (Memory Storage Device)].
5. Set the export conditions.
• Specify whether to [Include] or [Exclude] the "Device Unique Information". "Device

Unique Information" includes the IP address, host name, fax number, etc.
• Specify an encryption key.
6. Press [Run Export].
7. Press [OK].
8. Press [Exit].
9. Log out.
• If data export fails, the details of the error can be viewed in the log.
• When device Information is periodically imported, it is necessary to create the device
setting information file with special software and store it on the web server.
Importing Device Information

This can be exported / imported by an administrator with all privileges.
Import device information saved on an SD card.
2. Log in from the operation panel as an administrator with all privileges.
3. Press [Settings] on the Home screen > [System Settings].
4. Press [Settings for Administrator] > [Data Management] > [Device Setting Information:
Import (Memory Storage Device)].
5. Configure the import conditions.
• Press [Select File] of the "Device Setting Information File" to select the file(s) to import.
• Specify whether to [Include] or [Exclude] the "Device Unique Information". "Device
Unique Information" includes the IP address, host name, fax number, etc.
• Press [Change], enter the encryption key that was specified when the file was
exported, and press [OK].
6. Press [Run Import].
7. Press [OK].
8. Press [Exit].
The machine restarts.
• If data export/import fails, the details of the error can be viewed in the log.
5.13.2 SP DATA IMPORT/EXPORT
Data that can be imported and exported
Maintenance
• System SP
System
• Printer SP
• Fax SP
• Scanner SP
Exporting Device Information

When exporting SP device information from the operation panel, the data is saved on an SD
card.
2. Enter SP mode.
3. Press SP5-749-001 (Import/Export: Export)
4. Select "Target" SP settings (System/Printer/Fax/Scanner/Smart Operation Panel) to be
exported.
5. Select "Option" settings (Unique/Secret).
Item Specification Note
Unique Unique information of the machine is Unique information that can be updated
included in the exported file if you #1. Items that are to be used to identify the
select "Unique" setting. machine.
Example: Network Information/ Host name /
Information related to fax number /Mail
address assigned to the machine
#2. Items for specifying the options
equipped on the machine.
Example: Lot number for developer
Unique information that cannot be
updated
#1. Items that may cause a problem if
imported
Example: Serial number / Information
related to @Remote
#2. Items for managing the history of the
machine
Example: Time and date / Counter
information / Installation date
#3. Setting values for the Engine
Item Specification Note

Secret Secret information is exported if you Secret information
select "Secret" setting. #1. Data that cannot be exported without
being encrypted.
(Exported data is encrypted.)
Example: Password / Encryption key / PIN
code
#2. Confidential information for the
customer
Example: User name / User ID /
Department code / Mail address / Phone
number
#3. Personal information
Example: Document name / Image data
#4. Sensitive information for the customer
Example: MAC address / Network
parameters
* The IP address is exported when both 'Unique' and 'Secret' are selected.
6. Select "Crypt config" setting (Encryption).
Encryption Select whether to encrypt or not If the encryption function is used, setting of
when exporting. an encryption key is required by direct
If you push the "Encryption" key, input.
you can export secret information. • Type the arbitrary password using the
soft keyboard
• Can enter up to 32 characters
7. Press [Execute].
8. Press [OK].
Importing Device Information

Import device information saved on an SD card.
1. Insert an SD card into the media slot on the side of the operation panel.
2. Enter SP mode.
3. Press SP5-749-101(Import/Export: Import)
4. Select a unique setting.
5. Press [Encryption Key], if the encryption key was created when the file was exported.
6. Select an encryption setting.

Unique If you want to apply the unique information to the target Refer to the above
machine, select the "Unique" key. information.
Encryption If an encrypted file is selected as the import file, this
Maintenance
setting is required.
System
7. Press [Execute].
8. Press [OK].
5.13.3 POSSIBLE SOLUTIONS FOR IMPORT/EXPORT PROBLEMS

The access log file is created when export/import is executed. The file is stored in the same
location as the exported device setting information file.
If an error occurs, check the log's result code in the access log file first. Values other than 0
indicate that an error occurred.
The result code will appear in the circled area illustrated below.
- Example of a log file
If you cannot solve the problem or do not know how to solve it after checking the code, note
down the error log entry, then contact your supervisor.
Result Code Cause Solutions
2 (INVALID A file import was attempted between Import files exported from the same
REQUEST) different models or machines with model with the same device
different device configurations. configurations.
4 (INVALID Failed to write the device Check whether the destination device is
OUTPUT DIR) information to the destination operating normally.
device.
7( MODULE An unexpected error occurred Switch the power off and then back on,
Result Code Cause Solutions

ERROR) during import or export. and then try the operation again. If the
error persists, contact your supervisor.
8 (DISK FULL) The available storage space on the Execute the operation again after
external medium is insufficient. making sure there is enough storage
space.
9 (DEVICE Failed to write or read the log file. Check whether the path to the folder for
ERROR) storing the file or the folder in which the
file is stored is missing.
10 (LOG The hard disk is faulty. Contact your supervisor.
ERROR)
20 (PART Failed to import some settings. The reason for the failure is logged in
FAILED) "NgCode". Check the code.
Reason for the Error (Ng-Name)
2. INVALID VALUE
The specified value exceeds the
allowable range.
3. PERMISSION ERROR
The permission to edit the setting is
missing.
4. NOT EXIST
The setting does not exist in the system.
5. INTERLOCK ERROR
The setting cannot be changed because
of the system status or interlocking with
other specified settings.
6. OTHER ERROR
The setting cannot be changed for some
other reason.
21 (INVALID Failed to import the file because it is Check whether the file format is correct.
FILE) in the wrong format in the external The import file should be a CSV file.
medium.
22 (INVALID The encryption key is not valid. Use the correct encryption key.
KEY)
• When exporting device information from the operation panel, the data can be saved
only on an SD card.
• The file format for exports is CSV.
Test Pattern Printing
5.14 TEST PATTERN PRINTING
Printing Test pattern: SP2-109
Maintenance
Some of these test patterns are used for copy image adjustments but most are used primarily
System
for design testing.
• Do not operate the machine until the test pattern is printed out completely. Otherwise,
an SC occurs.
2. Select SP2-109-003.
3. Enter the number for the test pattern that you want to print and press [#].
No. Pattern No. Pattern
0 None 12 Independent Pattern (2-dot)
1 Vertical Line (1dot) 13 Independent Pattern (4-dot)
2 Vertical Line (2dot) 14 Trimming Area
3 Horizontal Line (1dot) 15 Hound's Tooth Check (Vertical)
4 Horizontal Line (2dot) 16 Hound's Tooth Check (Horizontal)
5 Grid Vertical Line 17 Band (Horizontal)
6 Grid Horizontal Line 18 Band (Vertical)
7 Grid Pattern Small 19 Checker Flag Pattern
8 Grid Pattern Large 20 Grayscale (Vertical Margin)
9 Argyle Pattern Small 21 Grayscale (Horizontal Margin)
10 Argyle Pattern Large 22 Two Beam Density Pattern
11 Independent Pattern (1-dot) 23 Full Dot Pattern
4. When you want to select the single color of Magenta, Yellow or Cyan for printing a test
pattern, select the color with SP2-109-005 (2: Magenta, 3: Yellow, 4: Cyan).
5. When you want to change the density of printing a test pattern, select the density with
SP2-109-006 to -009 for each color.
• If you select "0" with SP2-109-006 to -009, the color to be adjusted to "0" does not
come up on a test pattern.
6. Touch "Copy Window" to open the copy window, then select the settings for the test print
(paper size etc.).
Test Pattern Printing
• If you want to use black and white printing, touch "Black & White" on the LCD. If
you want to use color printing, touch "Full Color" on the LCD.
7. Press the "Start" key to start the test print.
8. After checking the test pattern, touch "SP Mode" on the LCD to return to the SP mode
display.
9. Reset all settings to the default values.
10. Touch "Exit" twice to exit SP mode.
Card Save Function
5.15 CARD SAVE FUNCTION
5.15.1 OVERVIEW
Maintenance
System
Card Save:
• The Card Save function is used to save print jobs received by the printer on an SD card
with no print output. Card Save mode is toggled using printer Bit Switch #1 bit number 4.
Card Save will remain enabled until the SD card becomes full, or until all file names have
been used.
• Captures are stored on the SD card in the folder /prt/cardsave. File names are assigned
sequentially from PRT00000.prn to PRT99999.prn. An additional file PRT.CTL will be
created. This file contains a list of all files created on the card by the card save function.
• Previously stored files on the SD card can be overwritten or left intact. Card Save SD has
"Add" and "New" menu items.
• Card Save (Add): Appends files to the SD Card. Does not overwrite existing files. If
the card becomes full or if all file names are used, an error will be displayed on the
operation panel. Subsequent jobs will not be stored.
• Card Save (New): Overwrites files in the card's /prt/cardsave directory.
Limitation:
• Card Save cannot be used with PJL Status Readback commands. PJL Status Readbacks
will not work. In addition they will cause the Card Save to fail.
5.15.2 PROCEDURE
2. Insert the SD card into slot 2 (lower), and then turn ON the power.
3. Enter SP mode.
4. Select the [Printer SP].
5. Select SP1-001 (Bit Switch).
Card Save Function
6. Select "Bit Switch 1 Settings" and use the numeric keypad to turn bit 4 ON and then press
the "#" button to register the change. The result should look like: 00010000. By doing this,
Card Save option will appear in the "List/Test Print" menu.
7. Press [Exit] to exit SP Mode.

8. Press [Settings] icon.
9. Press [Printer Setings].
10. Press [List/Test Print] > [Change Modes].

11. [Card Save (Add)] and [Card Save (New)] should be displayed on the screen. Select [Card
Save (Add)] or [Card Save (New)].
Card Save Function
12. Press [Start] and then exit the "Settings" menu.
Maintenance
System
13. Press [Printer] icon.
14. "Card Save" is be displayed in the top left of the display panel.
15. Send a job to the printer. The Communicating light should start blinking.
16. As soon as the printer receives the data, it will be stored on the SD card automatically with
no print output. Nothing is displayed on the screen, indicating that a Card Save operation
was successful.
17. Press [Cancel the Mode] to exit Card Save mode.
18. Change the Bit Switch Settings back to the default 00000000. Press [#] in the numeric
keypad to register the changes.
19. Remove the SD card after the power is turned OFF.
Card Save Function
5.15.3 ERROR MESSAGES

Card Save error messages:
• Init error: A card save process (e.g. card detection, change to kernel mode) failed to
initialize.
• Card not found: Card cannot be detected in the slot.
• No memory: Insufficient working memory to process the job.
• Write error: Failed to write to the card.
• Other error: An unknown error occurred.
If an error occurs, pressing [OK] will cause the device to discard the job and return to the ready
state.
Self-Diagnostic Mode
6. TROUBLESHOOTING
6.1 SELF-DIAGNOSTIC MODE
Troubleshooting
6.1.1 SERVICE CALL CONDITIONS
The ‘SC Table’ section shows the SC codes for controller errors and other errors. The latter are
put into four types. The type is determined by their reset procedures. The table shows the
classification of the SC codes.
Type Display How to reset SC call or
SC alarm in
customer
support
system
A The SC is Reset the SC (set SP5-810-001) and then cycle the Occurrence
immediately power OFF and ON. & alarm
displayed on the count
operation panel • When canceling a fusing unit SC,
when SC occurs. (SC544-00/SC554-00/SC564-00/SC574-00) Immediate
The error involves , perform part replacement in accordance alarm
the fusing unit. with the above procedure.
The machine
operation is
disabled. The
user cannot reset
the error.
B When a function Turn the main power switch (SW1) OFF and ON. Occurrence
is selected, the & alarm
SC is displayed count
on the operation
panel. Power OFF
The machine and ON
cannot be used
(down-time Alarm count
mitigation). and alarm
only if
recurrence
C No display on the The machine operates as usual. Occurrence
Type Display How to reset SC call or

SC alarm in
customer
support
system
operation panel. Only the SC history is updated.
The machine Logging
operates as count &
usual. alarm count
D The SC is Turn the main power switch (SW1) OFF and ON. Occurrence
displayed on the & alarm
operation panel. count
The machine Power OFF
cannot be used and ON
(machine-error
SC). Alarm count
and alarm
only if
recurrence
• When an ordinary SC (type D) is generated, an automatic reboot is performed. When

an event is reported by the customer support system, even in the event of an ordinary
SC, reboot is not performed. During automatic reboot, a confirmation screen is
displayed after the reboot.
• When automatic reboot occurs twice continuously, an SC is displayed without
rebooting, and logging count is performed. Also, when an SMC print is output, an *
mark is added alongside the SC number for clarity.
• Automatic reboot can be enabled or disabled with SP5-875-001 (SC automatic reboot
setting) (default value: OFF).
6.1.2 SC LOGGING
When an SC is generated, the "total count value when the SC is generated" and the "SC code"
are logged. However, if the total count value during the SC is the same as last time, logging is
not performed.
Logged data can be checked by outputting an administrative report (SMC print). The SC history
is logged up to the last 10 entries, and if there are more than 10 entries, data are progressively
deleted starting from the oldest.
6.1.3 SC AUTOMATIC REBOOT

When an ordinary SC (pattern D) is generated, automatically reboot is performed. Automatic
reboot or reboot by user operation can be set by SP5-875-001 (SC automatic reboot setting
Troubleshooting
out) (default value: 1 "OFF").
When a type D occurs, automatic reboot is done or the machine display asks the customer if it
can reboot. However, when the SC occurs twice in a short time, the machine sends a report to
the @Remote server without rebooting. This is because just rebooting may not be a good
solution if an SC occurs twice.
When an automatic reboot is performed, a confirmation screen is displayed after reboot. The
confirmation screen can be cancelled by pressing the [OK] key (display is not cancelled only
when the main power switch (SW1) is switched OFF to ON).
Status display on the current screen

• Post-processing ...... Post-processing during printing, etc.
• Automatic reboot .... After operation end
Post-processing
Until automatic reboot
• Reset key (Reboot key)

Key to perform reboot
# Cancel key is not displayed.
• Turn on spanner LED (same as when an SC is generated).
Timing of SC reboot
When @Remote is enabled, and when a NRS alarm*1 is not generated, the corresponding
SC is the object of an automatic reboot.
*1 NRS alarm: Issued when an ordinary SC (type D) is generated twice while the total
counter counts 10 times.
• Time to automatic reboot
Reboot is performed 30 seconds after an engine reboot is possible, after the end of
post-processing during printing, etc.
At that time, a reboot is performed even if the MFP is operating. The engine does not start
process control when a reboot is possible.
• Automatic reboot
See the flowchart below.
6.1.4 SC MANUAL REBOOT

When the automatic reboot is disabled in SP5-875-001 (SC automatic reboot setting), user
reboot the machine manually. See the flowchart below.
Troubleshooting
SC1xx: Scanning
6.2 SC1XX: SCANNING
No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

SC101-01 D LED Error
The peak white level is less than the prescribed value.
This SC is detected when the machine adjusts the LED’s light intensity or
before just scanning.
• Loose connector
• Defective scanner carriage
• Defective BiCU (PCB1)
• Damaged harness (FFC)
• White plate for shading adjustment is dirty or incorrect.
• Scanning guide plate is dirty or incorrect.
Check if the SC occurs by turning the power OFF then ON. If the SC occurs
again, do the following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power
after each step.
1. Check the scanning guide plate.
If the scanning guide plate is dirty, clean it.
2. Reconnect the following connectors:
• Scanner Carriage - BiCU harness (FFC)
• SBU (PCB11) - LEDB (scanner lamp board) harness (FFC)
connector
3. Check the whit plate that is used for shading adjustment. This plate is
attached to the back side of the sheet-through or platen exposure glass.
If the white plate is dirty, clean it or replace the sheet-through exposure
glass.
4. Replace the scanning guide plate.
5. Replace the scanner carriage.
6. Replace the BiCU (PCB1).
7. Replace the following harnesses:
• Scanner Carriage - BiCU (PCB1) (FFC)
SC1xx: Scanning

SC101-02 D LED Error (LED illumination adjustment)
Troubleshooting
This SC is detected when the machine adjusts the LED’s light intensity.
• Condensation in scanner unit
• Connector defective (disconnected, loose)
• BiCU defective
• Scanner carriage defective
• Harness defective
• White plate for shading adjustment is dirty or installed incorrectly.
after each step.
connector
glass.
3. Replace the scanner carriage

SC102-00 D LED Intensity Adjustment Error
The peak white level cannot be in the prescribed value even though adjusting
several times.
This SC is detected when the machine adjusts the LED’s light intensity.
• Loose connector
• BiCU defective
SC1xx: Scanning

after each step.
connector
glass.
SC No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

SC111-01 D LED Error (Scanning): Rear Side
• Loose connector
• Defective CIS (S21)
• Damaged harness
• Dirty or incorrect scanning guide plate
after each step.
1. Check the scanning guide plate (rear side).
If the scanning guide plate is dirty or damaged, clean or replace it.
• CIS (S21) - BiCU (PCB1) (FFC)
3. Replace the CIS (S21).
4. Replace the harness (FFC).
SC1xx: Scanning
SC No. Type Details (Symptom, Possible Cause, Troubleshooting Procedures)

SC112-00 D LED Illumination Adjustment Error: Rear Side
The white level peak reached the prescribed threshold when the white plate
Troubleshooting
was scanned after a specified number of adjustments.
• Loose connector
• Defective CIS (S21).
• Damaged harness
• Dirty or incorrect scanning guide plate
after each step.

SC120-00 D Scanner Home Position Error 1
The Scanner HP Sensor (S20) did not go OFF :
• During homing operation (power ON, leaving low power mode)
• During auto adjustment (power ON, leaving low power mode)
• During document, book scanning
• Motor drive error
• Defective motor
• Defective sensor
• Disconnected connectors or damaged harness
• Timing belt, pulley, wires or scanner carriage failure
after each step.
1. Check the input of the scanner HP sensor (S20) with SP5-803-200.
2. Replace the Scanner HP Sensor (S20), if input check fails.
3. Replace the Scanner Motor (M7).
4. Replace the harness.
SC1xx: Scanning

SC121-00 D Scanner Home Position Error 2
The Scanner HP Sensor (S20) did not go ON :
• During homing operation
• During auto adjustment
• During document, book scanning
• Defective Scanner Motor (M7)
• Defective Scanner HP Sensor (S20)
• Timing belt, pulley, wires or carriage failure
after each step.
1. Check the input of the scanner HP sensor (S20) with SP5-803-200.
2. Replace the Scanner HP Sensor (S20), if input check fails
3. Replace the Scanner Motor (M7).

SC141-00 D Black Level Detection Error
Black level is not less than the prescribed value.
This SC is detected when: the scanner power is turned on and the machine
returns from the energy saver mode.
• Loose connector
after each step.
• SBU (PCB11) - BiCU harness (FFC)
SC1xx: Scanning

SC142-00 D White Level Detection Error
The white peak level cannot be in the prescribed value when adjusting the
Troubleshooting
scanner gain.
This SC is detected when the scanner power is turned on and the machine
• Condensation in scanner unit
• BiCU defective
• Connector defective (disconnected, loose)
• White plate for shading adjustment is dirty or installed incorrectly.
after each step.
connector
2. Check the white plate that is used for shading adjustment. This plate is
attached to the back of the sheet-through or platen exposure glass.
glass.
SC1xx: Scanning

SC144-00 D SBU Communication Error
The machine cannot detect that the SBU (PCB11) is connected.
• Loose connector or damaged harness
after each step.
4. Replace the following harness:

SC151-00 D Black Level Correction Error: Rear Side
The automatic adjustment has failed to correct the black level (rear side) to
the permissible range.
• Loose connector
after each step.
• CIS (S21) - BiCU harness (FFC)
SC1xx: Scanning

SC152-00 D White Level Correction Error: Rear Side
The automatic adjustment has failed to correct the white level (rear side) to
Troubleshooting
the permissible range.
• Loose connector
• Dirty or incorrect scanning guide plate (rear side)
after each step.

SC154-00 D CIS Communication Error: Rear Side
The machine cannot detect that the CIS (S21) is connected.
This SC is detected when: the main power is turned ON and the machine
• Loose connector
• Damaged harness
after each step.
4. Replace the following harness:
SC1xx: Scanning

SC161-20 D BiCU Error (DRAM initialization failure)
The DRAM initialization flow is not completed successfully.
This SC is detected when: the main power is turned ON and the machine
• Defective DRAM device
after each step.
1. 1. Reconnect all the connectors on the BiCU board if disconnected, or
loose.
2. 2. Replace the BiCU (PCB1).

SC180-01 B BiCU Error (Double-feed detection failure)
Error signal is detected during the failure detection operation.
• Sensors abnormal output
• Defective Double-Feed Sensors (PCB14)(PCB15)
• Defective ADF Relay Board (PCB13)
1. Check the Double-Feed Sensors (PCB14)(PCB15) and harnesses.
2. Reconnect the harness for Double-Feed Sensors (PCB14)(PCB15).
3. Replace the harnesses for Double-Feed Sensors (PCB14)(PCB15).
4. Replace the Double-Feed Sensors (PCB14)(PCB15).
5. Replace the ADF Relay Board (PCB13).

SC195-00 D Serial Number Mismatch
Serial number stored in the memory does not have the correct code.
• EEPROM defective
• BiCU (PCB1) replaced without original EEPROM
1. Check the serial number with SP5-811-002.
2. If the stored serial number is incorrect, contact your supervisor.
SC2xx: Exposure
6.3 SC2XX: EXPOSURE
Troubleshooting
SC202-01 D Polygon Motor Error 0: ON Timeout: K, C
SC202-03 D Polygon Motor Error 1: ON Timeout: M, Y
Polygon Mirror Motor (M5,M6) cannot rotate correctly.
This SC is detected when the Polygon Mirror Motor (M5,M6) starts rotating, or
its rotating speed is changed.
• Polygon Mirror Motor failure
• Polygon Mirror Motor harness is defective, disconnected, or
short-circuited
• BiCU failure (Incorrect polygon motor control signal, damaged Laser
ASIC)
• Defective PSU (PCB16)(PCB17) or power supply part for polygon motor
• Incorrect AC voltage
2. Check the harness between Laser unit and BiCU (PCB1).
3. Check CN300 (a connector with three pins) for the Polygon Mirror Motor
(M5,M6) from the PSU (PCB16)(PCB17).
There is no problem if the multimeter indicates 24±2V.
4. Replace the Laser unit (Polygon Mirror Motor (M5,M6)).
5. Replace the harness between the Laser unit and BiCU (PCB1).
7. Replace the PSU (PCB16)(PCB17).

SC203-01 D Polygon Motor Error 0: OFF Timeout: K, C
SC203-03 D Polygon Motor Error 1: OFF Timeout: M, Y
Polygon Mirror Motor (M5,M6) cannot stop correctly.
This SC is detected when the Polygon Mirror Motor (M5,M6) is deactivated.
short-circuited
ASIC)
• Defective PSU (PCB16)(PCB17) or power supply part for Polygon Motor
SC2xx: Exposure

• Incorrect AC voltage
There is no problem if the multimeter indicates 24±2V.
6. Replace the BiCU (PCB1)..

SC204-01 D Polygon Motor Error 0: XSCRDY Signal Error: K, C
SC204-03 D Polygon Motor Error 1: XSCRDY Signal Error: M, Y
Polygon mirror Motor (M5,M6) cannot rotate correctly.
This SC is detected when the Polygon Mirror Motor (M5,M6) is deactivated.
short-circuited
ASIC)
• Defective PSU (PCB16)(PCB17) or power supply part for polygon motor
There is no problem if the multi meter indicates 24±2V.
6. Replace the BiCU (PCB1)..
SC2xx: Exposure

SC220-01 D Laser Synchronizing Detection Error: Start Position LD1: K/C
SC220-03 D Laser Synchronizing Detection Error: Start Position LD1: M/Y
Troubleshooting
Synchronizing detection signal cannot be received.
This SC is detected when:
• The machine starts up.
• The machine is copying.
• Defective Laser unit (Synchronizing mechanism or LDB failure)
• BiCU failure (Damaged laser ASIC)
• Disconnected LDB harness
1. Cycle the power off/on.
2. Check for condensation on the LDB.
3. Check the harness between LDB (Synchronizing mechanism) and BiCU
(PCB1).
4. Replace the Laser unit.
6. Replace the harness between LDB and BiCU (PCB1).

SC230-01 D FGATE ON Error: K
SC230-02 D FGATE ON Error: C
SC230-03 D FGATE ON Error: M
SC230-04 D FGATE ON Error: Y
FGATE signal cannot be received even when the laser is ready to emit.
This SC is detected when the machine is copying.
• Connection error between BiCU (PCB1) and Controller
2. Check the connection between BiCU (PCB1) and Controller Board
(PCB24).
SC2xx: Exposure

SC231-01 D FGATE OFF Error: K
SC231-02 D FGATE OFF Error: C
SC231-03 D FGATE OFF Error: M
SC231-04 D FGATE OFF Error: Y
FGATE signal is not OFF even when the laser is ready to end.
This SC is detected when the machine is copying.
• Connection error between BiCU (PCB1) and Controller
2. Check the connection between BiCU (PCB1) and Controller Board
(PCB24).

SC240-01 D LD Error: K
SC240-02 D LD Error: C
SC240-03 D LD Error: M
SC240-04 D LD Error: Y
• The LD current is more than the prescribed current during emitting light.
• LD driver cannot be initialized correctly.
• Disconnected LDB harness.
This SC is detected when:
• The machine starts up.
• The machine is copying.
• LDB harness connection error
• Deteriorated LD (LD broken)
• LDB (Laser unit) failure
• LDB harness failure
2. Check the value in SP2-110-001 to 004 (LD Driver).
• If current value is "0", perform step 3.
• If current value is "1", perform steps 3 and 5.
• If current value is "2" to "FF", perform step 4.
3. Reconnect the connectors between LDB and BICU (PCB1).
SC2xx: Exposure

SC272-01 D LD Driver Communication Error: K
Troubleshooting
SC272-02 D LD Driver Communication Error: C
SC272-03 D LD Driver Communication Error: M
SC272-04 D LD Driver Communication Error: Y
Communication between the CPU and LD driver was not performed correctly.
• BiCU failure (LD 5V Power error)
• LDB failure (LD drive error)
• Model mismatch between BiCU (PCB1) and Laser unit
2. Check the harness between LDB and BiCU (PCB1).
3. Check the combination of BiCU (PCB1) and Laser unit.
Check that the BiCU (PCB1) of an IM C300 is not being used with the
laser unit of an IM C400 or vice versa.

SC272-10 D LD Driver Communication Error: Others
Communication between the CPU and LD driver was not performed correctly.
• BiCU failure (LD 5V Power error)
• LDB failure (LD drive error)
• Interlock Switch failure
2. Check the harness between LDB and BiCU (PCB1).
6. Replace the Interlock Switch.
SC2xx: Exposure

SC285-00 C MUSIC Error
The results of MUSIC pattern reading failed 4 times.
The ID sensors (S27-S29) cannot detect the MUSIC pattern
Color registration error is larger than the specified value
Refer to "When SC285-00 (MUSIC error) Is Displayed"
6.3.1 WHEN SC285-00 (MUSIC ERROR) IS DISPLAYED

As SC285-00 is a logging SC (SC Type C), it is not displayed at once when an error occurs.
Though the equipment can be operated, check the SC history and perform a recovery operation
if the SC has occurred.
SC2xx: Exposure
An abnormal value may be contained in the SP where the MUSIC corrected

result is saved.
1. Execute SP2-180-001 (Line Pos. Adj.: Clear Color Regist.).
Troubleshooting
2. Execute SP2-111-004 (Forced Line Position: Adj. Mode d).
3. Check SP2-194-007 (MUSIC Execution Result: Execution Result).
Execute MUSIC and check the result.

1. Execute SP3-011-001 (Manual ProCon :Exe : Normal ProCon).
Execute SP2-112-001 (TM/ID Sensor Check: Execute).

1. Check SP2-112-010 (TM/ID Sensor Check: Display Result: Front-Center-Rear).
• Normal if the result is "111"
-->Execute other countermeasures.
• Vsg adjustment failed if the result is "2xx", "x2x", or "xx2"
-->Execute recovery operation for SC370
• There is a high probability that contaminants, scars, or irregularities may exist on the
belt if the result is "3xx", "x3x", or "xx3"
-->Execute the following procedure;
1. Remove the ITB unit, and check for abnormalities such as contaminants or scars, and
set it after cleaning.
4. If it fails, replace the ITB unit.
• There is a high probability that contaminants or curl may exist on the belt if the result is
"5xx", "6xx", "7xx", "8xx", "x5x", "x6x", "x7x", "x8x", "xx5", "xx6", "xx7", or "xx8".
--> Execute the following procedure
1. Remove the ITB unit, and check for abnormalities such as contaminants or scars, and
set it after cleaning.
4. If it fails, replace the ITB unit.
SC2xx: Exposure
Follow the next step if executing SP2-111-004 (Forced Line Position: Adj.
Mode d) and SP2-194-007 (MUSIC Execution Result: Execution Result)
fails.
1. Clean the ID Sensors (S27-S29).
2. Check the harness and connector for ID Sensors (S27-S29).
3. Replace the ID Sensors (S27-S29).
Check if there is no problem concerning the mechanism (interference or

deformation).
1. Execute SP5-804-021 (OUTPUT Check: TM sensor Shutter Solenoid) to operate the ID
Sensor Shutter Solenoid (SOL2) to check opening/closing of the shutter.
2. Check for a broken harness or connector disconnection.
3. If the problem cannot be solved, replace the BiCU (PCB1).
SC3xx: Image Processing
6.4 SC3XX: IMAGE PROCESSING
Troubleshooting
SC312-01 D Charge Roller Feed back Voltage Error: K
SC312-02 D Charge Roller Feed back Voltage Error: C
SC312-03 D Charge Roller Feed back Voltage Error: M
SC312-04 D Charge Roller Feed back Voltage Error: Y
The feedback voltage of the charge AC for each color is 0.15V or less for
consecutive 200ms after the charge AC is activated in the standard or half line
speed.
• Disconnected/incorrect harness for the High-Voltage Power Supply
(Development) (PCB22)
• Damaged/incorrect PCDU
• High-Voltage Power Supply (Development) failure
• Disconnected harness/connector
Troubleshooting procedure:
after each step.
1. Check the drum condition:
Check the terminal [A] (see the picture below for the terminal location) to
see if there is dust, damage, or deformation.
If there are any defects, replace the PCDU.
2. Check all the related connectors are firmly connected:
If not good, reconnect the connector.
3. Check the mainframe condition:
Check if there is dust on the terminal for charging, or any
damage/deformation. Check the continuity between the High-Voltage
Power Supply (Development) (PCB22) and charging terminal.
4. Check the High-Voltage Power Supply (Development) (PCB22):
Try installing a new High-Voltage Power Supply (Development) (PCB22)
to determine whether the High-Voltage Power Supply (Development)
(PCB22) is the cause. If the SC does not occur with the new one, the old
High-Voltage Power Supply (Development) (PCB22) was defective.

SC325-00 D Development Motor (CMY) Error
Each lock signal is observed at 100ms intervals during motor ON, and the
high level is detected 20 times consecutively.
• Defective Development Motor (CMY) (M9)
• Disconnected harness for the motor
• Development unit torque increased
after each step.
1. Replace the Development Motor (CMY) (M9).
2. Reconnect the connector.
5. Replace the PCDU.

SC325-01 D Development Motor (CMY) Error: When Motor is Deactivated
Each lock signal is observed at 100ms intervals during motor OFF (including
the period between turning the main power ON and the motor ON), and the
low level is detected 20 times consecutively.
• Defective Development Motor (CMY) (M9)
• Disconnected harness for the motor
after each step.
1. Replace the Development Motor (CMY) (M9).
2. Replace the harness for the Development Motor (CMY) (M9).

SC396-00 D Drum Motor (K) Error
SC397-00 D Drum Motor (CMY) Error
Each lock signal is observed at 100ms intervals during motor ON, and the
Troubleshooting
high level is detected 20 times consecutively.
• PCDU overload
• Connector disconnected
• Drum Motor (K) failure (SC396)
• Drum Motor (CMY) failure (SC397)
• Harness broken
• PCDU torque increased
after each step.
1. Replace the Drum Motor (K) (M11) (SC396)
2. Replace the Drum Motor (CMY) (M10) (SC397)
4. Replace the harness for the Drum Motor (M10,M11).
6. Replace the PCDU.

SC396-01 D Drum Motor (K) Error: When Motor is Deactivated
SC397-01 D Drum Motor (CMY) Error: When Motor is Deactivated
Each lock signal is observed at 100ms intervals during motor OFF (including
the period between turning the main power ON and the motor ON), and the
low level is detected 20 times consecutively.
• Drum Motor (K) failure (SC396)
• Drum Motor (CMY) failure (SC397)
• Disconnected harness for the Drum Motor (M10,M11)
after each step.
1. Replace the Drum Motor (K) (M11) (SC396)
2. Replace the Drum Motor (CMY) (M10) (SC397)
3. Replace the harness for the Drum Motor (M10,M11).

SC360-01 D TD Sensor (Vt high) Error 1: K
SC360-02 D TD Sensor (Vt high) Error 1: C
SC360-03 D TD Sensor (Vt high) Error 1: M
SC360-04 D TD Sensor (Vt high) Error 1: Y
• count is higher than the threshold which detects no developer
• count is lower than the upper/lower target thresholds three
consecutive times.
• TD Sensor (mu sensor, sensor) failure
• Harness loose or disconnected
• An old PCDU may be installed
after each step.
1. Check all the related connectors are connected.
If not good, reconnect the connectors.
2. Check the PCDU (e.g. Gear/harness disconnected? Heat protection
seal removed? Using an old PCDU?).
If not good, replace the PCDU.
3. Check whether the TD Sensor (S14) is deformed, scratched,
damaged or has dust sticking to it.
4. Check the TD Sensor (S14) harnesses, and the harness between the
mainframe and PCDU.
If not good, replace the harness.

SC361-01 D TD Sensor (Vt) Upper Limit Error: K
SC361-02 D TD Sensor (Vt) Upper Limit Error 1: C
SC361-03 D TD Sensor (Vt) Upper Limit Error 1: M
SC361-04 D TD Sensor (Vt) Upper Limit Error 1: Y
The machine detects that Vt (TD sensor output, SP3-210-001 to 004) is
higher than the upper limit threshold for the specified consecutive times.
• TD Sensor (S14) connector is disconnected
To check if the issue is resolved:
2. Feed one sheet of paper.

3. Check Vt with SP3-210-001 through -004.
4. Check if Vt is higher than the upper threshold (specified in SP3-211-002).
Incorrect: Vt is higher than the upper threshold
Troubleshooting
Correct: Vt is equal to or lower than the upper threshold
after each step.
1. Check all the connectors are firmly connected.
2. Check the PCDU for the following points and recover or replace it if
there are any defects.
• Gear comes off
• PCDU is not installed correctly
3. Check the TD Sensor (S14) and recover or replace it if there are any
defects.
4. Check the parameters (e.g. SP3-030-061 through -064 should be
changed from its initial value, but could not be changed due to
possible NVRAM clearing).
If there is an error to any SP parameter, replace the PCDU and then
execute SP3-320-001.
5. Check the Toner Supply Unit for the following points and recover or
replace it if there are any defects.
• The toner bottle is empty.
• Toner bottle operation error
• The toner supply path is clogged.
6. Check the harness for TD Sensor (S14).
Replace the harness if it is disconnected, or damaged.
7. Replace the BiCU (PCB1) if the SC cannot be recovered even after
executing steps 1 to 6.

SC362-01 D TD Sensor (Vt) Lower Limit Error 1: K
SC362-02 D TD Sensor (Vt) Lower Limit Error 1: C
SC362-03 D TD Sensor (Vt) Lower Limit Error 1: M
SC362-04 D TD Sensor (Vt) Lower Limit Error 1: Y
The machine detects that Vt (TD sensor output, SP3-210-001 to 004) is lower
than the lower limit threshold for the specified consecutive times..
• TD Sensor (S14) connector is disconnected.
after each step.
1. Check all the connectors are firmly connected. Confirm the
connectors of the PSU exhaust fan (FAN4) are connected when
installing the options listed below:
• Dehumidification Heater (PFU)
• Dehumidification Heater (main unit)
• Anti-condensation Heater
2. Check the PCDU for the following points and recover or replace it if
there are any defects.
• Gear comes off.
• PCDU is not installed correctly.
3. Check the TD Sensor (S14) and recover or replace it if there are any
defects.
4. Check the parameters (e.g. SP3-030-061 through -064 should be
changed from its initial value, but could be not changed due to
possible NVRAM clearing).
If there is an error to any SP parameter, replace the PCDU and then
execute SP3-320-001.
5. Check the Toner Supply Unit for the following points and recover or
replace it if there are any defects.
• The toner bottle is empty.
• Toner bottle operation error
• The toner supply path is clogged.
6. Check the harness for TD Sensor (S14).
Replace the harness if it is disconnected, or damaged.

SC370-00 D ID Sensor Calibration Error
The reflection light output voltage of the ID Sensor (Vsg_reg) is not adjusted
Troubleshooting
within the target range.
Upper limit: Default: 4.5 V
Lower limit: Default: 3.5 V
• Disconnected ID Sensor connectors
• Dirty or defective ID Sensors (S27-S29)
• Defective image transfer belt
To check if the issue is resolved:
1. Open the front door and check the result code in SP3-323-001.
Correct: The result is “111”
Incorrect: The result is not “111”
2. In the case of an error, make entries in the following SPs.
The result code "111" indicates the front, center and rear ID Sensors
(S27-S29).
For example "211" indicates an error at the front.
• If an error is detected at the front ID Sensor (S27): enter the
maximum value (50) in SP3-322-021.
• If an error is detected at the center ID Sensor (S28): enter the
maximum value (50) in SP3-322-022.
• If an error is detected at the rear ID Sensor(S29): enter the maximum
value (50) in SP3-322-023.
3. Close the front door.
4. Execute SP3-320-001.
5. Check the result code in SP3-323-001 again.
after each step.
1. Check all the connectors are firmly connected.
If not, reconnect the connectors.
2. Clean the detecting parts of the ID Sensors (S27-S29)
• Do not wipe with a dry cloth. Wipe with a damp cloth.

3. Check the ID Sensor shutter.
If the shutter does not move correctly, replace the shutter solenoid.
4. Replace the drum and/or ITB if the following is found:

Scratches, toner filming, wavy belt, or insufficient cleaning
5. Replace the ID Sensors (S27-S29).
6. Check and connect the related harness if it is disconnected.
6.5 SC4XX: IMAGE PROCESSING
Troubleshooting
SC442-00 D ITB Lift Motor Error
ITB Lift HP Sensor (S33) cannot detect the sensor feeler condition within a
specified time even when the ITB Lift Motor (M14) rotates.
• Contact/Release: 5 sec.
• Homing: 10 sec.
• Sampling interval: 0.01 sec.
• Broken harness or defective connectors
• Disconnected connector of ITB Lift HP Sensor (S33) or motor
• Defective ITB Lift Motor (M14)
• ITB unit not installed
1. Set the ITB unit firmly.
2. Replace the ITB unit.
3. Clean the ITB Lift HP Sensor (S33).
4. Check the harnesses.
5. Replace the ITB Lift HP Sensor (S33).
6. Replace the ITB Lift Motor (M14)

SC491-00 C High Voltage Power: Charge/Development Bias Output Error
Incorrect PWM signal is detected 10 times for consecutive 0.02 sec.
Hardware related causes:
• Contact failure
• Loose connector (Controller side)
• Grounding, open-circuit in the high voltage route
• Arc discharge due to lack of space
• Shorted harness (Controller side)
• BiCU malfunction (Signal error)
• High-Voltage Power Supply (Development) failure
Load related causes:
• Short-circuit
• Arc discharge due to lack of space
• Deteriorated drum (overcurrent)
• Condensated drum (overcurrent)
• Incorrect gap between drum and charge roller (incorrect PCDU)
• PCDU not installed firmly

First, cycle the main power OFF/ON to check if this SC occurs again.
If this SC reoccurs, do the following:
1. Remove and install the PCDU again to make sure that the PCDU is firmly
set. Cycle the main power OFF/ON to check if this SC occurs again. If the
SC occurs again, go to the next step.
2. Check if there are scratches on the drum surface. If you can see the
internal element of the drum (plain pipe) on the surface, go to the next
step, because too much electricity can flow at this point, which caused
the SC.
3. Replace the PCDU and cycle the main power OFF/ON to check if this SC
occurs again.
4. Reconnect the connector (CN561) on the BiCU (PCB1) and cycle the
main power OFF/ON. Be careful not to bend the connector pins when
reconnecting. If the SC occurs again, go to the next step.
5. Reconnect the connector (CN801) on the High-Voltage Power Supply
(Development) (PCB22) and cycle the main power OFF/ON. If the SC
occurs again, go to the next step.
6. Remove and install the High-Voltage Power Supply (Development)
(PCB22) again and cycle the main power OFF/ON. Check if the spring
near the High-Voltage Power Supply (Development) terminal bends and
comes in contact with other contacts. Cycle the main power OFF/ON to
check if this SC occurs again.
7. Replace the High-Voltage Power Supply (Development) (PCB22) and
cycle the main power OFF/ON to check if the SC occurs again.
8. Replace the BiCU (PCB1) and cycle the main power OFF/ON to check if
the SC occurs again.
9. Make sure that the harnesses on the High-Voltage Power Supply
(Development) (PCB22) are not shorted. If not good, replace the harness
and cycle the main power OFF/ON.

SC492-00 C High Voltage Power: Transfer Bias Output Error
Incorrect PWM signal is detected for 0.2 sec.
Hardware related causes:
• Contact failure
• Loose connector (Controller side)
• Grounding, open-circuit in the high voltage route
• Shorted harness (Controller side)

• BiCU malfunction (Signal error)
• High-Voltage Power Supply (Transfer) failure
Load related causes:
Troubleshooting
• Increased impedance in the paper transfer roller
• Increased impedance in the ITB
• Open-circuit
• Transfer unit not installed firmly
• This is a logging SC (No action required).

SC497-00 C Imaging Temperature Sensor Error
The thermistor output of the temperature sensor is not within the prescribed
range (more than 0.5 V to less than 3.0 V).
• Damaged or loose connector
• Defective Imaging Temperature Sensor (TH5)
Cycle the main power OFF/ON to check if this SC occurs again.
1. Reconnect all the related connectors, and cycle the main power OFF/ON
to check if the SC reoccurs.
2. Replace the Imaging Temperature Sensor (TH5), and cycle the main
power OFF/ON to check if the SC reoccurs.

SC498-00 C Temperature/Humidity Sensor Error
• The thermistor output of the temperature sensor is not within the
prescribed range (more than 3.0V to less than 0.5V.
• The thermistor output of the humidity sensor is not within the prescribed
range (2.4V or more).
• Damaged or loose connector
• Defective Temperature/Humidity Sensor (S18)
Cycle the main power OFF/ON to check if this SC occurs again.
1. Reconnect all the related connectors, and cycle the main power OFF/ON
to check if the SC reoccurs.
2. Replace the Temperature/Humidity Sensor (S18), and cycle the main
power OFF/ON to check if the SC reoccurs.
SC5xx: Paper Feed and Fusing
6.6 SC5XX: PAPER FEED AND FUSING

SC501-00 B 1st Paper Tray Error (IM C300 series only)
This SC occurs if no paper is detected within the prescribed time when the
tray is set correctly, and the tray lift motor starts rotating CW or CCW.
• Incorrect/disconnected Tray Lift Motor (M15) connector
• Loose, disconnected or damaged Tray Lift Sensor (S35) connector
• An obstruction such as jammed paper scraps blocks the motor operation
Remove the jammed paper or slip of paper from the tray, and check if the SC
occurs by turning the main power OFF then ON. If the SC occurs again, do
the following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power after each
step.
1. Replace the Tray Lift Motor (M15) .

SC501-01 B 1st Paper Tray Lift Error (IM C400 series only)
1st Tray Lift Motor (M15) lift error was detected for 3 times consecutively.
• Incorrect/disconnected or damaged Tray Lift Motor (M15) connector
• An obstruction such as jammed paper scraps blocks the motor operation
• Paper set incorrectly
step.
1. Remove the obstruction and load paper again.
2. Check the harness of the Tray Lift Sensor (S35) or Tray Lift Motor (M15),
and reconnect/clean it.
3. Replace the harness of the Tray Lift Sensor (S35) or Tray Lift Motor
(M15).
4. Replace the paper feed unit, or paper tray.

SC501-02 B 1st Paper Tray Descent Error
(IM C400 1st Tray Lift Motor (M15) descent error was detected for 5 times
Troubleshooting
only) consecutively.
• Incorrect/disconnected or damaged Tray Lift Motor (M15) connector
• An obstruction such as jammed paper scraps blocks the motor
operation
• Paper set incorrectly
• Paper overload
step.
1. Remove the obstruction and load paper again.
2. Check the harness of the Tray Lift Sensor (S35) or Tray Lift Motor
(M15), and reconnect/clean it.
3. Replace the harness of the Tray Lift Sensor (S35) or Tray Lift Motor
(M15).
4. Replace the paper feed unit, or paper tray.

SC502-00 B Optional PFU 1 Paper Tray Lift Motor (M2) Error (2nd Tray)
SC503-00 B Optional PFU 2 Paper Tray Lift Motor (M2) Error (3rd Tray)
SC504-00 B Optional PFU 3 Paper Tray Lift Motor (M2) Error (4th Tray)
When the tray is lifted up, the Tray Lift Motor (M2) error, or Sensor error is
detected.
• PFU Tray Lift Motor (M2) disconnection or loose harness
• PFU Tray Bottom Plate lift Sensor (S4) disconnection or loose harness
• PFU Tray Bottom Plate HP Sensor (S5) disconnection or loose harness
• Other defective mechanical parts
Do the following steps. Cycle the power OFF/ON after doing each step to
check if the SC occurs.
1. Reconnect the connector of the PFU Tray Bottom Plate HP Sensor (S4).
2. Reconnect the connector of the PFU Tray Bottom Plate lift Sensor (S5).
3. Replace the lift lever encoder, gear encoder for tray lift unit, and the
tension spring for paper feed.

4. Replace the PFU Tray Lift Motor (M2).
6. Replace the Controller Board (PCB1) in the tray.

SC508-00 B Bypass Bottom Plate Error
The signal from the Bypass Tray Lift Sensor (S4) does not change for two
seconds after the bypass lift clutch was activated.
If this condition occurs three consecutive times, this SC is generated.
• Disconnected or defective connectors of the Bypass Tray Lift Clutch
(CL1)
• Disconnected or defective Bypass Tray Lift Sensor (S4)
• Defective bypass bottom plate detection filler
1. Check or replace the connectors of the Bypass Tray Lift Clutch (CL1)
2. Check or replace the Bypass Tray Lift Sensor (S4).

SC524-00 D Paper Transport Motor (M12) Error
When the motor is ON, the each lock signal is checked every 100msec. This
SC occurs if the High status is detected for 20 times consecutively.
• Defective Paper Transport Motor (M12)
• Disconnected or defective connectors of the Paper Transport Motor
(M12)
• Unit torque increased
1. Replace the Paper Transport Motor (M12).
2. Reconnect the connector of the Paper Transport Motor (M12).

SC524-01 D Paper Transport Motor (M12) Error (While the motor is OFF)
When the motor is OFF, the each lock signal is checked every 100msec. This
Troubleshooting
SC occurs if the LOW status is detected for 20 times consecutively.
• Defective Paper Transport Motor (M12)
• Disconnected or defective connectors of the Paper Transport Motor
(M12)
2. Replace the harness for the Paper Transport Motor (M12).

SC525-00 B Optional PFU 1 Paper Transport Motor (M1) Error (2nd Tray)
SC526-00 B Optional PFU 2 Paper Transport Motor (M1) Error (3rd Tray)
SC527-00 B Optional PFU 3 Paper Transport Motor (M1) Error (4th Tray)
The motor LOCK signal from the optional PFU is detected while the motor is
ON.
• Motor overload
• Defective motor
• Disconnected connectors
• Damaged harness
Do the following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power after
each step.

SC530-00 D Fusing Unit Cooling Fan (FAN1) Error
SC530-02 D Paper Exit Exhaust Fan (FAN5) Error *IM C400SRF only
SC531-00 D PCDU Cooling Fan (FAN3) Error
SC532-00 D LD Unit Cooling Fan (FAN2) Error
SC533-00 D PSU Exhaust Fan (FAN4) Error
This SC occurs if the error count reaches 3 in the following conditions:
• When each motor is ON, its lock signal is checked every 100 ms.
• If a defective lock signal is detected 50 times consecutively, the error
count increases by 1. If a normal lock signal is detected 50 times

consecutively, the error count is reset
• Defective each fan
• Disconnected harness
• Loose connection
1. Replace the fan.
2. Reconnect the fan connector.

SC540-00 D Fusing Motor (M13) Error
When the Fusing Motor (M13) is ON, each lock signal is checked every 100
ms. This SC occurs if HIGH status is detected 20 times consecutively.
• Defective Fusing Motor (M13)
• Disconnected or defective harness
• Fusing unit torque increased
1. Replace the Fusing Motor (M13).
2. Reconnect the connector of the Fusing Motor (M13).
3. Replace the harness of the Fusing Motor (M13).
5. Replace the fusing unit.

SC540-01 D Fusing Motor (M13) Error (While the Motor is OFF)
When the Fusing Motor (M13) is OFF, the each lock signal is checked every
100msec. This SC occurs if the LOW status is detected for 20 times
consecutively.
• Defective Fusing Motor
• Defective harness
2. Replace the harness of the Fusing Motor (M13).

SC541-01 A Fusing Thermopile (TH1) Error
SC541-11 D Fusing Thermopile (TH1) Error (Low Power)
• Broken Thermopile
Troubleshooting
• Connector contact failure
1. Reconnect the connector between the fusing unit and BiCU (PCB1).
2. Replace the Fusing Thermopile (TH1)
3. Replace the harness between the fusing unit and BiCU (PCB1).
5. Replace the PSU (AC) (PCB17).

SC542-02 A Fusing Thermopile (TH1) Reload Error
SC542-12 D Fusing Thermopile (TH1) Reload Error (Low Power)
Fusing temperature failed to reach a temperature of 80 degrees C after
passing six seconds when:
• The machine starts warming up.
• The machine returns from energy saver mode.
• The fusing lamp is activated.
• Dirty or deformed Fusing Thermopile (TH1) lenses
• Disconnected or defective Fusing Thermopile (TH1)
• Input voltage out of specification (out of warranty)
• Fusing Thermostat open
1. Check the input voltage and replace the power plug (SC542-12 only).
2. Replace the Fusing Thermostat.
3. Replace the Fusing Sleeve Belt Assembly (fusing lamp).
4. Check and clean the Thermopile lenses or replace the Fusing Thermopile
(TH1).

SC542-03 A Fusing Thermopile (TH1) Reload Error
SC542-13 D Fusing Thermopile (TH1) Reload Error (Low Power)
Fusing Thermopile (TH1) has failed to reach the "permissible temperature for
reloading" in 13 seconds after it detects 80 degrees C when:
• The machine starts warming up.
• The machine returns from energy saver mode.
• Dirty or deformed Fusing Thermopile (TH1) lenses
4. Check and clean the Thermopile lenses or replace the Fusing Thermopile
(TH1).

SC543-00 A Fusing Thermopile (TH1) Overheat (Software Error)
Fusing Thermopile detects a temperature of 240 degrees C or more for 10
seconds after the relay is activated.
• Triac short
2. Replace the Fusing Thermopile (TH1).
6. Replace the fusing unit (if the problem cannot be resolved).

SC544-00 A Fusing Thermopile (TH1) Overheat (Hardware Error)
Fusing Thermopile (TH1) detects a temperature of 250 degrees C.
Troubleshooting
• Triac short
• Defective fusing control system
1. Inspect the Fusing Sleeve Belt Assembly.
If the fusing sleeve belt assembly is torn or exhibits any other damage,
replace it. Otherwise, proceed to next step.

SC545-01 A Fusing Lamp Consecutive Full Power
SC545-11 D Fusing Lamp Consecutive Full Power (Low Power)
This SC occurs if the fusing lamp keeps operating consecutively at full power
for longer than the specified length of time.
• Broken fusing lamp
1. Check to see if there is paper remaining in the fusing unit.
7. Replace the PSU (AC) (PCB17)

SC547-01 D Zero Cross Error (Fusing lamp relay contact welding)
Zero cross signal is detected when the fusing relay is deactivated.
• Damaged fusing relay
• Fusing relay drive circuit failure
1. Make sure that the harness between the PSU (AC) (PCB17) and BiCU
(PCB1) is firmly connected.
SC547-02 D Zero Cross Error (Fusing lamp relay contact defective)
Zero cross signal cannot be detected if the fusing relay is activated.
• Broken fusing relay (open circuit)
• Fusing relay circuit failure
• PSU fuse (24VS) worn out
1. Make sure that the harness between the PSU (AC) (PCB17) and BiCU
(PCB1) is firmly connected.
4. Replace the harness between the PSU (AC) (PCB17) and BiCU (PCB1).
SC547-03 D Zero Cross Error (Low frequencies error)
The frequency of the power source is lower than 44Hz.
Unstable frequency
1. Check the frequency is 45Hz or more.
If not, the power supply from the wall socket may be the cause. Ask for
your supervisor or the electrician in charge at the site.

SC549-00 D Fusing Center Low Temperature
After passing 60 seconds when FGATE is ON, the Fusing Thermopile (TH1)
Troubleshooting
detects a temperature of -100 degrees C from the compensated target
temperature for consecutive 60 seconds.
• Fusing lamp disconnection during paper passing
• Loose connector
1. Check the power supply voltage and reconnect the cable to the outlet.

SC554-00 A Fusing Thermistor (non-contact sensor) (S10) High Temperature Error
(Hardware Error)
Fusing Thermistor (non-contact sensor) (S10) detects a temperature of 250
degrees C..
• Shorted triac
Basically, the entire fusing unit must be replaced when SC554-00 occurs. For
details, refer to "Actions When SC554-00 Occurs."
Do the following steps:
1. Inspect the Fusing Sleeve Belt Assembly.
If the fusing sleeve belt assembly is torn or exhibits any other damage,
replace it. Otherwise, proceed to next step.
3. Replace the Fusing Thermistor (non-contact sensor) (S10).

SC557-00 C Zero Cross Frequency Error
The frequency of the power source is 66Hz or more. This SC is detected just
after the main power is turned ON.
• Noise (High frequency)
• The frequency of the utility power line is unstable.
1. Check the power supply source.

SC559-00 A Consecutive Fusing Jam
The paper jam counter for the fusing unit reaches three consecutive times
after 1st count(the Fusing Exit Sensor (S8) does not detect the paper).
After the first fusing jam, further fusing jams (the fusing exit sensor failing to
detect the paper) have occurred 3 times consecutively.
Paper jam in the fusing unit.
1. Replace the separation plate.
2. Replace the gear (fusing unit).
3. Replace the fusing unit.
5. Replace the gear (mainframe), if damaged.

SC561-01 A Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: center) (TH4) Disconnection
SC561-11 D Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: center) (TH4) Disconnection (Low
Power)
Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: center) (TH4) detects a temperature of -20
degrees or below for 29 consecutive seconds after the fusing lamp is
activated when the machine starts, or during feeding paper or in low power.
• Disconnected or defective Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: center)
(TH4)
2. Reconnect the connectors between the fusing drawer connector, BiCU
(PCB1), and Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: center) (TH4) .
3. Replace the Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: center) (TH4).
4. Replace the harnesses between the BiCU (PCB1) and the fusing unit.

7. Replace the fusing unit if all the above steps cannot resolve the issue.
Troubleshooting
SC562-02 A Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: center) (TH4) Cannot be Reloaded
SC562-12 D Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: center) (TH4) Cannot be Reloaded
(Low Power)
Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: center) (TH4) detects that the
temperature does not reach a temperature of 40 degrees C for 27 consecutive
seconds when the main power is turned on.
• Dirty or deformed Fusing Thermopile (TH1)
• Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: center) (TH4) deformed or floating
4. Replace the Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: center) (TH4).

SC563-00 A Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: center) (TH4) Overheat (Software
Error)
Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: center) (TH4) detects a temperature of 248
degrees C 10 times after the fusing relay is ON.
• Shorted triac
(PCB1), and Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: center) (TH4).
2. Replace the harnesses between the BiCU (PCB1) and Pressure Roller
Thermistor (edge: center) (TH4).

SC564-00 A Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: center) (TH4) Overheat (Hardtware
Error)
Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: center) (TH4) detects a temperature of 248
degrees C.
• Shorted triac
(PCB1), and Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: center) (TH4).
2. Replace the Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: center) (TH4) .
Thermistor (edge: center) (TH4) .

SC571-01 A Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: rear) (TH3) Disconnection
SC571-11 D Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: rear) (TH3) Disconnection (Low
Power)
Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: rear) (TH3) detects a temperature of -20
degrees C or below for 29 consecutive seconds after the fusing lamp is
activated in a specified condition.
• Disconnected or defective Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: rear) (TH3)
(PCB1), and Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: rear) (TH3).
3. Replace the Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: rear) (TH3).
4. Replace the harnesses between the BiCU (PCB1) and fusing unit.

SC572-02 A Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: rear) (TH3) Cannot be Reloaded
SC572-12 D Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: rear) (TH3) Cannot be Reloaded (Low
Troubleshooting
Power)
Fusing temperature failed to reach a temperature of 45 degrees C when 100
seconds passes after starting a job where the paper width is wider than 206
mm AND is equal or smaller than 216 mm.
• Dirty or deformed Fusing Thermopile (TH1)
• Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: rear) (TH3) deformed or floating
• Outside input voltage guarantee

SC573-00 A Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: rear) (TH3) Overheat (Software Error)
Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: rear) (TH3) detects a temperature of 248
degrees C for 10 consecutive times in a specific machine condition.
• Shorted triac
(PCB1), and Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: rear) (TH3).
3. Replace the harnesses between the BiCU (PCB1) and the Pressure
Roller Thermistor (edge: rear) (TH3).

SC574-00 A Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: rear) (TH3) Overheat (Hardware Error)
Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: rear) (TH3) detects a temperature of 248
degrees C.
• Shorted triac
(PCB1), and Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: rear) (TH3)
3. Replace the harnesses between the BiCU (PCB1) and the Pressure
Roller Thermistor (edge: rear) (TH3).

SC581-01 A Open Fusing Thermistor (non-contact sensor) (S10)
SC581-02 A Shorted Fusing Thermistor (non-contact sensor) (S10)
SC581-11 D Open Fusing Thermistor (non-contact sensor) (S10) (Low Power)
SC581-12 D Shorted Fusing Thermistor (non-contact sensor) (S10) (Low Power)
• Thermopile disconnection (SC581-01)
• Shorted fusing thermistor (SC581-02)
1. Check the input voltage and replace the power plug (SC581-11/-12).
2. Reconnect the connectors between the fusing unit, fusing drawer
connector, and BiCU (PCB1).
3. Replace the Fusing Thermistor (non-contact sensor) (S10).
4. Replace the harnesses between the BiCU (PCB1) and the fusing drawer
connector.

SC591-01 A Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: front) (TH2) Disconnection
SC591-11 D Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: front) (TH2) Disconnection (Low
Troubleshooting
Power)
Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: front) (TH2) detects a temperature of -20
degrees C or below for 29 consecutive seconds when the fusing lamp is
activated.
• Disconnected or defective Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: front) (TH2)
3. Replace the Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: front) (TH2).
Thermistor (edge: front) (TH2).

SC592-02 A Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: front) (TH2) Cannot be Reloaded
SC592-12 D Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: front) (TH2) Cannot be Reloaded (Low
Power)
The machine temperature does not reach a temperature of 45 degrees C
when 100 seconds passes after starting a job where the paper width is wider
than 206 mm AND is equal or smaller than 216 mm.
• Dirty or deformed Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: front) (TH2)

SC593-00 A Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: front) (TH2) High Temperature
(Software Error)
Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: front) (TH2) detects a temperature of 248
degrees C for consecutive 10 times when the fusing lamp is activated.
• Shorted triac
Thermistor (edge: front) (TH2)

SC594-00 A Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: front) (TH2) High Temperature
(Hardware Error)
Pressure Roller Thermistor (edge: front) (TH2) detects a temperature of 248
degrees C.
• Shorted triac
Thermistor (edge: front) (TH2).
SC6xx: Communication
6.7 SC6XX: COMMUNICATION
SC No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution
Troubleshooting
SC621-00 D Finisher Communication Error
An error signal is detected during communication between the finisher and the
main machine.
• Connection error between finisher and main machine.
• The finisher firmware is not properly updated.
• The BiCU firmware is not properly updated.
• BiCU (PCB1) is defective.
• Finisher Main Board (PCB1) is defective.
• Noise contamination
Check if the SC occurs by turning the main power OFF then ON. If the SC
occurs again, do the following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the
power after each step.
1. Reconnect the finisher interface cable.
2. Check the machine and finisher firmware version. Run the firmware
update when there is a new firmware released.
5. Replace the finisher Main Board (PCB25).

SC622-00 D Optional Paper Feed Unit 1 (Paper Tray 2) Communication Error
An error signal is detected during communication between the optional paper
feed unit and the main machine.
• Optional Paper Feed Unit 1 Main Board (PCB1) is defective.
• BiCU (PCB1) is defective.
• Connection error between Paper Feed Unit 1 and main machine.
1. Replace the Paper Feed Unit 1 Main Board (PCB1).
3. Reattach the Paper Feed Unit 1 to the machine.

• Connection error between Paper Feed Unit 1 and Paper Feed Unit 2.
3. Reattach the Paper Feed Unit 2 to the Paper Feed Unit 1.

• Connection error between Paper Feed Unit 2 and Paper Feed Unit 3.
3. Reattach the Paper Feed Unit 3 to the Paper Feed Unit 2.

SC632-00 D Counter Device Error 1
After 3 attempts to send a data frame to the optional counter device via the
serial communication line, no ACK signal was received within 100 ms.
Serial line between the optional counter device, the relay board and copier
control board is disconnected or damaged.
1. Turn the main switch OFF and ON.
2. Check the serial communication line.

Troubleshooting
After communication was established, the controller received the brake signal
from the accounting device.
Serial line between the optional counter device, the relay board and copier
control board is disconnected or damaged.
2. Check the serial communication line.

A backup RAM error was returned by the counter device.

Counter device control board or the backup battery of counter device
defective
1. Replace the counter device control board.
2. Replace the backup battery.

A backup battery error was returned by the counter device.
Counter device control board or the backup battery of counter device
defective
• Replace the counter device control board.
• Replace the backup battery.

SC636-02 D IC Card Error (Version Error)
The version of the expanded authentication module is not correct.
Incorrect module version
Install the correct file of the expanded authentication module.

SC637-01 D Tracking Information Notification Error (Tracking Application Error)
Tracking information was lost.
• Tracking SDK application error
• Internal notification error
Turn the main switch OFF and ON.

SC637-02 D Tracking Information Notification Error (Management Server Error)
Tracking information was lost.
Communication with tracking management server failed.
• Network error
• tracking management server error
• Tracking SDK application error
Turn the main switch OFF and ON.

SC641-00 D Communication Error between Engine and Controller
Although frame is sent from controller, engine does not reply to it.
• Controller Board software error
• BiCU software error
• BiCU and Controller Board connection error
2. Check the connection between the BiCU (PCB1) and the Controller
Board (PCB24).

SC645-01 C Toner Supply: ID Chip Communication Error (K)
SC645-02 C Toner Supply: ID Chip Communication Error (M)
Troubleshooting
SC645-03 C Toner Supply: ID Chip Communication Error (C)
SC645-04 C Toner Supply: ID Chip Communication Error (Y)
A communication error is received during EEPROM communication and the
machine fails to recover even if the power is switched OFF and back ON for
tagging.
Connection error between the toner ID Chip (PCB3-PCB6) and the Toner
Bottle Sensor Board (PCB7).
1. Clean the contact part of the toner bottle ID chip (PCB3-PCB6) and check
that the pins of the Toner Bottle Sensor Board (PCB7) connector are not
bent. If any of the pins are bent, replace the Toner Bottle Sensor Board
(PCB7).
2. Reconnect the connectors between the BiCU (PCB1) and Toner Bottle
Sensor Board (PCB7).
3. Replace the harness between the BiCU (PCB1) and Toner Bottle Sensor
Board (PCB7).

SC650-01 C Remote Service Modem Communication Error (Dialup Authentication
Failure)
• An error related to communication (dialup connection, modem board etc.)
using the RC Gate Type M was detected or an error that prevents RC
Gate operation was detected at power on.
• Displayed only when an error is detected while RC Gate is operating.
• SC is not issued if an error occurs during RC Gate installation (because it
can be referenced using SP).
• SP settings invalid
• Modem connector disconnected
• Modem board disconnected
• Wireless LAN card disconnected
Check the following SPs.
• SP5-816-156 (Remote Service: Dial Up User Name)
• SP5-816-157 (Remote Service: Dial Up Password)

SC650-04 C Remote Service Modem Communication Error (dialup failing because of
incorrect modem configuration)
Software bug.

SC650-05 C Remote Service Modem Communication Error (Insufficient Current or
Connection Fault)
The line is not supported and nothing can be done.

SC650-13 C Remote Service Modem Communication Error (RC Gate Type M was
installed but modem is not present (detected during operation))
• SC is not issued if an error occurs during RC Gate installation (because
this error can be referred by using SP).

Troubleshooting
• If a modem board is not installed, install it.
• Check again if the modem driver configurations (SP5-816-160,
SP5-816-165 to 171, and SP5-816-165 to 171) are correct.
• If the problem is not solved, replace the modem.

SC650-14 C Remote Service Modem Communication Error (RC Gate Type N was
installed but modem is present or wired/wireless LAN is not working
correctly)
using the RC Gate was detected or an error that prevents RC Gate
operation was detected at power on.
• SC is not issued if an error occurs during RC Gate installation (because
this error can be referred by using SP).
• If a modem board is attached, remove it.
• Check if wired/wireless LAN works.

SC651-01 C Illegal Remote Service Dial-up (Chat Program Parameter Error)
An unexpected error occurred when RC Gate Type M dialed up the NRS
Center.
Software bug
Logging only.

SC651-02 C Illegal Remote Service Dial-up (Chat Program Execution Error)
An unexpected error occurred when RC Gate dialed up the NRS Center.
Software bug
Logging only.

SC652-00 A Remote Service ID2 Mismatching
There was an authentication mismatch between ID2 for @Remote, the
Controller Board (PCB24), and NVRAM.
• Used Controller Board installed
• Used NVRAM installed (This action is not allowed.)
• If this occurs during RC Gate installation:
Check the validity of the certificate and the NVRAM, check the machine
serial number, write the common certificate, and then begin installation
again.
• If this occurs after RC Gate installation:
Clear the RC Gate install status, check the validity of the certificate and
the NVRAM, check the machine serial number, write the common
certificate, and then begin installation again.

SC653-00 A Incorrect Remote Service ID2
ID2 stored in the NVRAM has either of the following problems.
• Number of characters is not 17.
• Includes a character that cannot be printed.
• All spaces
• NULL
Replace the NVRAM.
Clear the RC Gate install status, write the common certificate, and then begin
installation again.

SC664-01 D VODKA1 – SRAM Communication Error
• When the machine starts or returns from the energy saver mode, a
connection error signal between VODKA1 and SRAM device is detected.

SC665-05 D BiCU Control Signal Connection Error (Master)
SC665-07 D BiCU Control Signal Connection Error (IPU)
Troubleshooting
SC665-08 D BiCU Control Signal Connection Error (IOB)
When the machine starts or returns from the energy saver mode, a
connection error signal between CPU and slave device is detected, or the
machine cannot access all I/O IPU-ASICs correctly.
• Incorrect FFC connection
• Damaged FFC (disconnection or dust)
• BiCU failure (Deteriorated board, sticking dust, or damaged parts)

SC665-11 D Vodka1 Connection Error
A communication error between the CPU and Vodka1 is detected when the
engine starts up.
BiCU (PCB1) error (failure to mount the part, solder scrap, mounted part
malfunction, etc.)

SC665-61 D Vodka1 Connection Error (Continuous Detection)
A communication error between the CPU and Vodka1 is detected during
continuous detection.
malfunction, etc.)

SC665-71 D Macaron1 Connection Error (Continuous Detection)
A communication error between the CPU and Macaron1 is detected during
continuous detection.
malfunction, etc.)

SC667-01 D Master Device Operation Mode Setting Error
When the machine starts or returns from the energy saver mode, a CPU
mode setting error is detected.
malfunction, etc.)

SC667-10 D Slave Device 1 Operation Mode Setting Error
When the machine starts or returns from the energy saver mode, an error in
the slave device 1 is detected.
malfunction, etc.)

SC667-40 D Macaron 1 Operation Mode Setting Error
When the machine starts or returns from the energy saver mode, a CPU
mode setting error is detected.
BiCU error (failure to mount the part, solder scrap, mounted part malfunction,
etc.)

SC669 EEPROM Communication Error
SC669-01 D EEPROM OPEN: ID error
Troubleshooting
SC669-02 D EEPROM OPEN: Channel error
SC669-03 D EEPROM OPEN: Device error
SC669-04 D EEPROM OPEN: Communication abort error
SC669-05 D EEPROM OPEN: Communication timeout error
SC669-06 D EEPROM OPEN: Operation stopped error
SC669-07 D EEPROM OPEN: Buffer full
SC669-08 D EEPROM OPEN: No error code
SC669-09 D EEPROM CLOSE: ID error
SC669-10 D EEPROM CLOSE: No error code
SC669-11 D EEPROM Data write: ID error
SC669-12 D EEPROM Data write: Channel error
SC669-13 D EEPROM Data write: Device error
SC669-14 D EEPROM Data write: Communication abort error
SC669-15 D EEPROM Data write: Communication timeout error
SC669-16 D EEPROM Data write: Operation stopped error
SC669-17 D EEPROM Data write: Buffer full
SC669-18 D EEPROM Data write: No error code
SC669-19 D EEPROM Data read: ID error
SC669-20 D EEPROM Data read: Channel error
SC669-21 D EEPROM Data read: Device error
SC669-22 D EEPROM Data read: Communication abort error
SC669-23 D EEPROM Data read: Communication timeout error
SC669-24 D EEPROM Data read: Operation stopped error
SC669-25 D EEPROM Data read: Buffer full
SC669-26 D EEPROM Data read: No error code
SC669-36 D Verification error
SC669-37 D Error Detection
The TD Sensors (S14-S17) cannot be recovered after retrying three times for
EEPROM communication error.
• Electrical noise
• EEPROM not connected fully
• EEPROM not installed
• EEPROM damaged
• BiCU damaged

1. Reconnect the EEPROM on the BiCU (PCB1).
2. Replace the EEPROM.

SC670-01 D Engine Start Up Error when Main Power Switch ON (* Refer to “When
SC670 Is Displayed” below)
• ENGRDY signal was not asserted when the machine was turned on or
returned from energy saver mode.
• EC response was not received within specified time from power ON.
• PC response was not received within specified time from power ON.
• SC response was not received within specified time from power ON.
• Writing to Rapi driver failed (the other party not found through PCI).
• BiCU (PCB1) does not start up.
Check if the SC occurs by turning the main power OFF then ON at least 10
times. If the SC occurs again, do the following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs
by cycling the power after each step.
1. Reconnect the BiCU (PCB1) and Controller board (PCB24).
2. Replace the board in the following priority:
1. BiCU (PCB1)
2. PSU (PCB16)
3. Controller board (PCB24)

SC670-02 D Engine is Down When Machine Starts Up (SC reboot can be performed)
(* See “When SC670 Is Displayed” below)
Machine-down was detected after the ENGRDY signal was not asserted.
• CPU reset by watchdog timer
• CPU reset by software
• CPU reset by CPU exception handling
• Slave VODKA reset
• CPU reset due to hardware malfunction/noise
• Slave VODKA reset due to hardware malfunction/noise
The engine board was reset at an unexpected time.

Troubleshooting
1. BiCU (PCB1)
2. PSU (PCB16)

SC670-03 D IPU Fails to Operate When Power is Turned On (* See “When SC670 Is
Displayed” below)
The VDET_EPCI signal failed to assert.
PSU, or Controller Board defective
1. BiCU (PCB1)
2. PSU (PCB16)

SC670-04 D Failed to Link Up (* See “When SC670 Is Displayed” below)
Linkup error
Controller Board defective
1. BiCU (PCB1)
2. PSU (PCB16)

SC670-05 C Linkup Error
If failing to link up by the 4th lane, the specified communication channel (and
instead linking up by the 1st or 2nd lane) at the PCIe I/F connection between
the controller and BiCU (PCB01) when the machine starts or returns from the
energy saver mode.
-
This is a logging SC.

SC672-00 C Controller Start Up Error
After the machine was powered ON, communication between the controller
and the operation panel was not established, or communication with controller
was interrupted after a normal startup.
• Controller stalled
• Board installed incorrectly
• Controller Board (PCB24) defective
• Operation panel connector loose, broken or defective
2. Check the connection of USB cable between the operation panel and the

BiCU (PCB1).
3. Check the connection of the Controller Board (PCB24).
4. Replace the Controller Board (PCB24).
Troubleshooting
SC672-10 D Controller Start Up Error
and the operation panel was not established.
• Controller Board defective
• Controller late
2. Check the connection of USB cable between the operation panel and the
BiCU (PCB1).

• Controller late
• Incorrect Dip Switch Setting on Smart Operation Panel
4. Check the control panel harness.
5. Make sure that the DIP switch numbers 1,3 and 6 are ON.

Communication with controller was interrupted after a normal startup.
• Controller late

The operation panel detects that the controller is down due to other reason
shown in SC672-00, SC672-10, SC672-11, and SC672-12.
• Controller late

Troubleshooting
Operation panel harness connection error
1. Reconnect the USB cable and harness. (Reconnect both the operation
panel end and the controller end.)
2. Replace the USB cable and harness.
3. Replace the controller board.
4. Replace the operation panel.

Controller Board is defective.
1. Replace the controller board.
2. Replace the USB cable and harness.
3. Replace the operation panel.

The operation panel software ended abnormally.
• Controller late

SC673-10 D Operation Panel Flair Communication Error (Smart Operation Panel)
This SC is issued only for the machine that has the Smart Operation Panel
installed.
• Communication between Smart Operation Panel and main machine (this
is called “Flair communication”) is not sent to Smart Operation Panel.
• SP setting (SP5-748-201) for Smart Operation Panel is not activated.
The CATS module (controller) did not see the response to notification of
monitoring service module (operation panel)
• Turn the main switch OFF and ON.
• Set SP5-748-201 to “1: Connect” if the value is “0: Not connect”

SC681-** D Toner Bottle: ID Chip Communication Error
• Corrupted ID data
• Disconnected ID Chip (PCB3-PCB6)
• No ID Chip (PCB3-PCB6)
• Noise
Check the SC’s branch number (-** part) and do the above steps for the
corresponding color.
If the last digit of the SC’s branch number (-**) is:

1 or 6, then do the above steps for K
2 or 7, then do the above steps for M
3 or 8, then do the above steps for C
4 or 9, then do the above steps for Y
1. Clean the contact part of the toner bottle ID chip (PCB3-PCB6) and check
that the pins of the Toner Bottle Sensor Board (PCB7) connector are not

bent. If any of the pins are bent, replace the Toner Bottle Sensor Board
(PCB7).
2. Replace the toner bottle.
Troubleshooting
3. Check the Toner Bottle Sensor Board (PCB7), and replace if damaged.
4. Reattach the Toner Bottle Sensor Board (PCB7).
5. Replace the harness between the BiCU (PCB1) and toner bottle detection
board.
What to do if a connection error has occurred for all colors
1. Reconnect the harness between the BiCU (PCB1) and Toner Bottle
Sensor Board (PCB7).
2. Replace the harness between the BiCU (PCB1) and Toner Bottle Sensor
Board (PCB7).
3. Replace the BiCU (PCB1) and toner bottle at the same time.
No. Detail Causes

681 01 - 04 Invalid device ID Noise, Incorrect connection, Malfunction
06 - 09 Channel error Noise, Incorrect connection, Malfunction
11 - 14 Device Error Noise, Incorrect connection
16 - 19 Communication error (interrupted) Noise, Incorrect connection
21 - 24 Communication timeout Noise, Incorrect connection, Malfunction
26 - 29 Device stops (logically) Noise, Incorrect connection, Malfunction
31 - 34 Full of buffer (request) Noise, Incorrect connection, Malfunction
36 - 39 Verification error Noise, Incorrect connection

SC682-** D TD Sensor Communication Error
TD Sensors (S14-S17) cannot be recovered after retrying three times for an ID
Chip communication error.
• Corrupted ID data
• Disconnected ID Chip (PCB3-PCB6)
• No ID Chip (PCB3-PCB6)
• Noise
1. Remove the PCDU and check the connector condition.
2. Re-insert the harness (BiCU side) between the BiCU (PCB1) and the TD
Sensors (S14-S17).
3. Replace the PCDU (if the TD Sensors (S14-S17) work incorrectly)
4. Replace the harness between the BiCU (PCB1) and the TD Sensors
(S14-S17).
Check the SC’s branch number (-** part) and do the above steps for the
corresponding color.
• If the last digit of the SC’s branch number (-**) is:

1 or 6, then do the above steps for K
2 or 7, then do the above steps for M
3 or 8, then do the above steps for C
4 or 9, then do the above steps for Y
What to do if a connection error has occurred for all colors
1. Reconnect the harness between the BiCU (PCB1) and TD sensor
(S14-S17).
2. Replace the harness between the BiCU (PCB1) and TD sensor (S14-S17)
3. Replace the BiCU (PCB1) and TD sensor (S14-S17) at the same time.
No. Description Cause

682 01 - Invalid device ID Noise, Incorrect connection,
04 Malfunction
Troubleshooting
06 - Channel error Noise, Incorrect connection,
09 Malfunction
11 - Device Error Noise, Incorrect connection
14
16 - Communication error (interrupted) Noise, Incorrect connection
19
21 - Communication timeout Noise, Incorrect connection,
24 Malfunction
26 - Device stops (logically) Noise, Incorrect connection,
29 Malfunction
31 - Full of buffer (request) Noise, Incorrect connection,
34 Malfunction
36 - Verification error Noise, Incorrect connection
39
51 Verification error (during storing to Noise
EEPROM)
52 Verification error (SRAM) Noise

SC687-00 D PER Not Received Error
• Unable to receive the PER command of the I/F commands from the
controller.
• Unable to prepare the image data with the controller.
• Communication error
• The software of controller is defective.
SC7xx: Peripherals
6.8 SC7XX: PERIPHERALS

SC724-03 D Protection Device Intercept Error 1
Failure to supply power to fuse and later circuits (parts) of finisher Main Board
detected continuously for 2 seconds.
• Fuse open
• Stopper Solenoid (SOL3) defective
• Motor defective
• Connector disconnected/damaged
1. Check if the harness between the finisher Main Board (PCB25) and the
solenoid / sensor is not stripped or entrapped.
Replace the harness if there are any defects.
2. Check if there is any unusual odor from the solenoid or any problem with
its appearance.
Replace the solenoid if there are any defects.
3. Check if there is any unusual odor from the motor or any problem with its
appearance.
Replace the solenoid if there are any defects.

SC724-04 D Protection Device Intercept Error 2
Fault signal of sensor power protection device (high-side switch) detected

continuously for 2 seconds.
• Fuse open
• Motor defective
• Connector disconnected/damaged
sensor is not stripped or entrapped. Replace the harness if there are any
SC7xx: Peripherals

defects.
2. Check if there is any unusual odor from each sensor or any problem with
its appearance.
Troubleshooting
Replace the sensor if there are any defects.

SC724-30 D Jogger Motor (M20) Error
The Jogger Fence HP Sensor (SN41) does not turn OFF even though the
Jogger Motor (M20) rotates clockwise or counter-clockwise to move away
from the home position with the specified number of pulses. (The first four
times are displayed as jams. An SC is displayed when it is repeated five
times.)
• Motor defective
• Motor overload
• Jogger fence HP sensor (S41) defective
Jogger Fence HP Sensor (S41) / Jogger Motor (M20) is not stripped or
entrapped.
2. Check if there is any unusual odor from the Jogger Fence HP Sensor
(S41) or any problem with its appearance.
Replace it if there are any defects.
3. Check if there is any unusual odor from the Jogger Motor (M20) or any
problem with its appearance.
SC7xx: Peripherals

SC724-44 D Stapler Motor (M23) Error
• The Staple Tray Paper Sensor (S42) does not turn OFF even though the
Stapler Motor (M23) rotates with the specified number of pulses to move
away from the home position.
• The Staple Tray Paper Sensor (S42) does not turn ON (Home Position)
even though the Stapler Motor (M23) rotates with the specified number of
pulses to move to the home position.
• Staple jam
• Motor overload
• Motor defective
• Staple Tray Paper Sensor (S42) defective
Staple Tray Paper Sensor (S42) / Stapler Motor (M23) is not stripped or
entrapped.
2. Check if there is any unusual odor from the Staple Tray Paper Sensor
(SN42) or any problem with its appearance. Replace it if there are any
defects.
3. Check if there is any unusual odor from the Stapler Motor (M23) or any

SC724-80 D Gathering Roller Motor (M18) Error
• During the initial operation or the gathering roller descends onto the
paper, the Gathering Roller HP Sensor (S38) does not turn OFF even
though the Gathering Roller Motor (M18) rotates with the specified
number of pulses to move away from the home position. (The first four
times.)
• During the initial operation, the Gathering Roller HP Sensor (S38) does
not turn ON (Home Position) even though the Gathering Roller Motor
SC7xx: Peripherals

(M18) rotates with the specified number of pulses to move to the home
position. (The first four times are displayed as jams. An SC is displayed
when it is repeated five times.)
Troubleshooting
• Motor defective
• Motor overload
• Gathering Roller HP Sensor (S38) defective
Gathering Roller HP Sensor (S38) / Gathering Roller Motor (M18) is not
stripped or entrapped.
2. Check if there is any unusual odor from the Gathering Roller HP Sensor
3. Check if there is any unusual odor from the Gathering Roller Motor (M18)
or any problem with its appearance. Replace it if there are any defects.

SC724-81 D Exit Guide Plate Motor (M21) Error
paper, the Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor (S44) does not turn OFF even
though the Exit Guide Plate Motor (M21) rotates with the specified
number of pulses to move away from the home position. (The first four
times.)
• During the initial operation, the Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor (S44) does
not turn ON (Home Position) even though the Exit Guide Plate Motor
(M21) rotates with the specified number of pulses to move to the home
position. (The first four times are displayed as jams. An SC is displayed
• Motor defectivee
• Motor overload
• Exit Guide Plate Motor (M21) defective
SC7xx: Peripherals

Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor (S44) / Exit Guide Plate Motor (M21) is not
stripped or entrapped.
2. Check if there is any unusual odor from the Exit Guide Plate HP Sensor
(S44) or any problem with its appearance. Replace it if there are any
defects.
3. Check if there is any unusual odor from the Exit Guide Plate Motor (M21)
or any problem with its appearance. Replace it if there are any defects.

SC724-82 D Shift Roller Motor (M19) Error
paper, the Shift Roller HP Sensor (S37) does not turn OFF even though
the Shift Roller Motor (M19) rotates with the specified number of pulses
to move away from the home position. (The first four times are displayed
as jams. An SC is displayed when it is repeated five times.)
• During the initial operation, the Shift Roller HP Sensor (S37) does not
turn ON (Home Position) even though the Shift Roller Motor (M19)
rotates with the specified number of pulses to move to the home position.
(The first four times are displayed as jams. An SC is displayed when it is
repeated five times.)
• Motor defective
• Motor overload
• Shift Roller HP Sensor (S37) defective
Shift Roller HP Sensor (S37) / Shift Roller Motor (M19) is not stripped or
entrapped.
SC7xx: Peripherals

2. Check if there is any unusual odor from the Shift Roller HP Sensor (S37)
or any problem with its appearance.
Troubleshooting
3. Check if there is any unusual odor from the Shift Roller Motor (M19) or
any problem with its appearance. Replace it if there are any defects.

SC724-83 D Tray Lift Motor (M22) Error
• When the tray is lifted, the Remaining Paper Sensor (S40) does not turn
OFF even after the specified lapse of time. (The first four times are
displayed as jams. An SC is displayed when it is repeated five times.)
• When the tray is lowered, the Remaining Paper Sensor (SN40) does not
turn ON even after the specified lapse of time. (The first four times are
displayed as jams. An SC is displayed when it is repeated five times.)
• Motor defective
• Motor overload
• Remaining Paper Sensor (S40) defective
Remaining Paper Sensor (S40) / Tray Lift Motor (M22) is not stripped or
entrapped.
2. Check if there is any unusual odor from the Remaining Paper Sensor
(S40) or any problem with its appearance. Replace it if there are any
defects.
3. Check if there is any unusual odor from the Tray Lift Motor (M22) or any
SC7xx: Peripherals

SC724-85 D Stopper Solenoid (SOL3) Error
• When the Stopper Solenoid (SOL3) lowers the actuator down to the
topmost paper of the paper stack, the Remaining Paper Sensor (S40)
turns OFF. (The first four times are displayed as jams. An SC is displayed
• Motor overload
• Remaining Paper Sensor (S40) defective
Remaining Paper Sensor (S40) / Stopper Solenoid (SOL3) is not stripped
or entrapped.
2. Check if there is any unusual odor from the Remaining Paper Sensor
3. Check if there is any unusual odor from the Stopper Solenoid (SOL3) or
any problem with its appearance.

SC790-00 D Stacking the Paper Feed Units Over the Limit
Received a connection identification code other than "01H", "02H" and "03H".
Four or more paper feed units are stacked.
1. Reduce the stack of paper feed units to 3 or less. (Including the standard
main unit paper tray, there can be a total of 4 paper feed units.)
SC8xx: Overall System
6.9 SC8XX: OVERALL SYSTEM
Troubleshooting
SC816-** [0x0000] Energy Save I/O Subsystem Error
SC816-01 D Subsystem error
SC816-02 D Sysarch (LPUX_GET_PORT_INFO) error
SC816-03 D Transition to STR was denied.
SC816-04 D Interrupt in kernel communication driver
SC816-05 D Preparation for transition to STR failed.
SC816-07 D Sysarch (LPUX_GET_PORT_INFO) error
SC816-08 D Sysarch (LPUX_ENGINE_TIMERCTRL) error
SC816-09 D Sysarch (LPUX_RETURN_FACTOR_STR) error
SC816-10 to D Sysarch (LPUX_GET_PORT_INFO) error
12
SC816-13 D open() error
SC816-14 D Memory address error
SC816-15 to D open() error
18
SC816-19 D Double open() error
SC816-20 D open() error
SC816-22 D Parameter error
SC816-23, D read() error
24
SC816-25 D write () error
SC816-26 to D write() communication retry error
28
SC816-29, D read() communication retry error
30
SC816-35 D read() error
SC816-36 to D Subsystem error
96, 98
Energy save I/O subsystem detected some abnormality.
• Energy save I/O subsystem defective
• Energy save I/O subsystem detected a Controller Board error
(non-response).
• Error was detected during preparation for transition to STR.
• C816-99 occurs as a subsystem error except any error from -06 to
96.

Check if the SC occurs by turning the power OFF then ON. If the SC
occurs again, do the following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by
cycling the power after each step.
1. Update the "System/Copy" firmware and the other system
firmware to the latest version.
2. Disable the STR shift function with SP5-191-001 (Power Str Set).

SC818-00 D Watchdog Timer Error
The system program fell into a bus-hold state or an endless loop of the
program interruption occurred, causing other process to stop.
• System program defective
• Optional board defective
1. Cycle the main power OFF and ON.
3. Update the system firmware.
4. Replace the peripheral.

SC819-00 D Kernel Halt Error
[xxxx]: Detailed error code
Due to a control error, a RAM overflow occurred during system
processing. One of the following messages was displayed on the
operation panel.
[0x5032] HAIC-P2 Error
HAIC-P2 decompression error (An error occurred in the ASIC
compression/decompression module.)
• The code data saved in the HDD was broken for an unexpected
reason. (HDD device defective)
• The code data saved to memory was broken for an unexpected
reason. (Memory device defective)
• ASIC defective
• Data other than code data was unzipped due to a software
malfunction.
Check if the SC occurs by turning the power OFF then ON. If the SC
occurs again, do the following steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by

cycling the power after each step.
1. Replace the HDD.
2. Replace the memory device.
Troubleshooting
4. Fix the software.
[0x5245] Link Up Error
Link up transaction between Engine ASIC and Veena was not
completed within 100 ms.
Either one of following message appears on console if Link up error
occurs.
RESUME:PCI-Express bus ROOT_DL status error
RESUME:PCI-Express bus DETUP status error
"0x53554D45" -> Link up error
Also, error code "0x5245" and detail code ""0x53554D45" -> Link up
error" appears on operation panel.
1. Check if the SC occurs by turning the power OFF then ON. If the
SC occurs again, proceed to the next step.
2. Replace the Controller Board (PCB24) or the engine board (BiCU
(PCB1)).
[0x5355] L2 Status Timeout
L2 status register between Engine ASIC and Veena was not reached the
target value within 1 sec.
Engine ASIC during operation was rebooted or shifted to energy saving
mode.
Machine reboots when SC23x, SC30x occurs.
If Engine ASIC is working when rebooting (or shifting to the energy
saving mode), L2 status value is not on target.
The following message appears on console.
SUSPEND:PCI-Express L2 Status Check Error
SUSPEND:PCI-Express L2 Status Check Error
Also, error code "0x5355" and detail code ""0x5350454E44" -> L2 status
time out" appears on operation panel.
1. Check if the SC occurs by turning the power OFF then ON. If the
SC occurs again, proceed to the next step.
2. Replace the Controller Board (PCB24) or the engine board (BiCU
(PCB1)).
[0x6261] HDD Defective
Received file system data was broken even if the initialization succeeds

and there was no error reply from the HDD.
Power supply disconnection during data writing to the HDD.
1. This SC may occur when turning ON the machine for the first time
with a new HDD.
In this case, Automatic Reboot is performed by Kernel.
[0x696e] gwinit Processing End
If the SCS process is ended for some reason
If an unexpected error occurs at SCS processing end, gwinit processing
also halts (this result is judged a kernel stop error, by gwinit
specification)
“0x69742064” -> “init died”
1. When this error occurs, Automatic Reboot is performed by Kernel.
[0x766d] VM Full Error
Occurs when too much RAM is used during system processing
"vm_pageout: VM is full"
Console Other Error (characters on operation panel)
string System detected internal mismatch error
• Software defective
• Insufficient memory
• Hardware driver defective (RAM, flash memory)

SC820-00 C Self-diagnostics Error: CPU
[XXXX]: Detailed error code
[0001] TLB change (store) exception error
[0002] TLB miss (load) exception error
[0003] TLB miss (store) exception error
[0004] Read address exception error
[0005] Write address exception error
[0006] Instruction bus exception error
[0007] Data bus exception error
[0008] System call exception error
[0009] Break exception error
[000A] Invalid instruction exception error
[000B] Co-processor exception error

[000C] Overflow exception error
[000D] UTLB miss exception error
[0010] Interrupt line 0 error
Troubleshooting
Unexpected exception or interrupt occurred
• CPU device error
• The boot monitor program or self-diagnostic program is broken.
• Replace the Controller Board (PCB24).
• Reinstall the controller system software.

[00FF] Uninitialized Interrupt Error
Cache error (such as a parity error) occurred.
• Local bus defective
2. Reinstall the controller system software.
4. Replace the connected controller option with a new one.

[0601] Read address exception error
[0602] Write address exception error
[0605] System call exception error
[0606] Break exception error
[0607] Invalid instruction exception error
[0609] Overflow exception error
Exception does not occur though executing exception by intention.
CPU device error

1. Replace the Controller Board (PCB24)

[060A] Interrupt line 0 mask exception error
[060B] Interrupt line 1 mask exception error
[060C] Interrupt line 2 mask exception error
[060D] Interrupt line 3 mask exception error
[060E] Interrupt line 4 mask exception error
Interrupt does not occur though setting interrupt by timer.
• ASIC device error

[0610] CPU Interrupt Timer 2 Set Error
Interrupt does not occur though setting interrupt by CPU interrupt timer.
CPU device error

[0612] ASIC interrupt error
Interrupt Occurs in an ASIC.
• Peripherals device error
2. Replace the connected controller option with a new one.

Troubleshooting
[06FF] CPU Master Clock Error
Pipeline clock frequency ratio of CPU is different from specified value.
• Module bit that initializes the CPU is defective

SC820-00 D Self-diagnostics Error: CPU
[0701] Instruction Cache Capacity Error
The CPU cannot read the instruction cache stored in the primary cache.
CPU device error

[0702] Instruction Cache Error
The program executed in the instruction cache result was different from
expected.
• CPU cache defective
• Memory too slow
• Replace the memory device.

[0703] Instruction Uncache Error
[0704] Instruction Cache Hit Error
[0705] Instruction Cache Clear Error
Data in the instruction cache which is set in the primary instruction cache of
the CPU is different from the contents of the pre-set
CPU device error


[0706] Data Cache Capacity Error
[0707] Data Cache Error
[0708] Data Uncache Error
Data in the data cache which is set in the primary data cache of the CPU is
different from the contents of the pre-set
-
-

[0709] Data Cache Hit Error
[070A] Data Cache Clear Error
In spite of writing data only in the cache area, data is updated in the
non-cache area
CPU device error
• Replace the memory device.

[0801] TLB virtual address error
[0804] TLB global error
[0807] UTLB miss error
[0808] TLB read miss error
[0809] TLB write miss error
[080A] TLB modify error
Error occurred during TLB checking.
CPU device error

[4002] Single precision arithmetic error
Troubleshooting
[4003] Double precision arithmetic error
[4004] Exception error
[4005] Exception mask error
Error occurred during a calculation with the co-processor in the CPU.
CPU device error

SC821-00 D Self-diagnostics Error: ASIC
[0B00] ASIC Register Check Error
The write-&-verify check has occurred in the ASIC.
Defective ASIC device
[0B06] ASIC Detection Error
Error in the I/O ASIC for system control detection
• Defective ASIC
• Defective North Bridge and PCII/F
[0D05] Comparison Error of CPU and ASIC Timer
The CPU checks if the ASIC timer works correctly compared with the CPU
timer. If the ASIC timer does not function in the specified range, this SC
code is displayed.
• Defective ASIC timer device
• Defective CPU device
[50A1] Video Bridge Device Detection Error
Video bridge device is not detected.
• Video bridge device ASIC (HARP or KLAVIER) defective.
• Connection error between PCI I / F of the controller ASIC and video
bridge device ASIC.
[50A2] Video Bridge Device (ASIC) Register Error
The CPU detects the video bridge device, but detects error data from the

video bridge device.
Defective I/F between the video bridge device and the controller

SC822-00 D Self-diagnostic Error: HDD
[3003] HDD Timeout
Check performed only when HDD is installed:
• HDD device busy for over 31sec.
• After a diagnostic command is set for the HDD, but the device remains
busy for over 6 sec.
• HDD defective
• HDD harness disconnected, defective
1. Replace the HDD.
2. Replace the HDD connector.
[3004] Diagnostic Command Error
No response to the self-diagnostic command from the ASIC to the HDD.
HDD defective
1. Replace the HDD.
[3013] HDD Timeout (first machine)
HDD device busy for over 31 seconds.
A diagnostic command is set for the HDD, but the device remains busy for
over 6 seconds.
• Defective HDD device
• Defective HDD connector
• Defective ASIC device
1. Replace or remove the HDD device.
2. Replace the HDD connector
3. Replace the Controller Board (PCB24)
[3014] Diagnostics Command Error (First machine)
Result of the issuance of diagnostic command is error.
Defective HDD device
1. Replace the HDD device.

SC823-00 B Self-diagnostics Error: NIC
Troubleshooting
[6101] MAC Address Check Sum Error
The result of the MAC address check sum does not match the check sum
stored in ROM.
• Defective SEEP ROM
• Defective I2C bus (connection)
[6104] PHY IC Error
The PHY IC on the controller cannot be correctly recognized.
• Defective PHY chip
• Defective ASIC MII I/F
[6105] PHY IC Loop-back Error
An error occurred during the loop-back test for the PHY IC on the controller.
• PHY chip
• Defective MAC of ASIC (SIMAC/COMIC/CELLO)
• Defective I/F with the PHY board
• Defective solder on the PHY board

SC824-00 C Self-diagnostics Error: NVRAM (resident)
[1401] NVRAM Verify Error
NVRAM device is missing or NVRAM device is damaged.
• The NVRAM device is missing.
• The NVRAM device is damaged.
• NVRAM backup battery exhausted
• NVRAM socket damaged
1. Replace the NVRAM device.

SC827-00 D Self-diagnostic Error: RAM
[0201] Resident Memory Verification Error
Error detected during a write/verify check for the standard RAM*1 on
Controller Board (PCB24).
*1 Standard RAM on controller (2GB) in this machine is divided into the
resident RAM (1GB) and the optional RAM (1GB).
• Defective memory device (on the Controller Board (PCB24)).
[0202] Resident Memory Structure Error
The SPD values in all RAM DIMM are incorrect or unreadable.
• Defective RAM DIMM
• Defective SPD ROM on RAM DIMM
• Defective 12C bus

SC828-00 D Self-diagnostic Error: ROM
[0101] Check Sum Error 1
The boot monitor and OS program stored in the ROM DIMM is checked. If
the check sum of the program is incorrect, this SC code is displayed.
• Defective flash ROM device
• Defective CPU device

SC829-00 D Self-diagnostic Error: Optional RAM
[0301] Optional Memory 0 Verify Error
• For machines with resident RAM, Optional Memory 0 refers the RAM
DIMM installed in the RAM Slot.
• For machines without resident RAM, Optional Memory 0 refers to the
RAM DIMM installed in Slot 0.
• This error does not occur with machines that do not have resident RAM.
• The memory is defective.
1. Replace the controller board (for machines with no resident RAM,

replace the RAM-DIMM).
[0302] Optional Memory 0 Structural Error
Every time the main power is turned ON, the structure of the optional RAM is
Troubleshooting
checked.
If an error is detected at this point, the self-diagnostic module will not check
the optional RAM.
-
-
[0401] Optional RAM1: Verify Error
In this machine, the standard RAM on the controller (2GB) is divided into the
resident RAM (1GB) and the optional RAM (1GB).
• Defective memory device (on the Controller Board (PCB24)).
[0402] Optional RAM1: Structure Error
Every time the main power turns on, structures of the optional RAM are
checked. If an error is detected at this time, the self-diagnostic module will
not check the optional RAM.
-
-

SC833-00 D Self-diagnostic Error: Engine I/F ASIC
[0F30] Engine I/F ASIC Detection Error
ASIC (Mandolin) for engine control could not be detected.
ASIC (Mandolin) error
1. Replace the Engine I/F board (mother board).
[50B1] Video Device: Clock Generator Detection Error
Could not initialize or read the bus connection.
• Defective connection bus
• Defective SSCG
[50B2] Video Device: Clock Generator Verify Error
Value of the SSCG register is incorrect.
• Defective connection bus
• Defective SSCG

SC834-00 D Self-diagnostic error: Optional memory
[5101] Engine I/F optional memory verify error
An error occurs after write/verify check for optional RAM on the engine I/F
board (mother board).
Defective memory device
Replace the Engine I/F board (mother board).

SC835-00 B Self-diagnostic Error: Centronic Device
[1102] Verify Error
The loopback connector is connected but check results is an error.
• IEEE1284 connector error
• Centronic loopback connector defective
[110C] DMA Verify Error
The loopback connector is connected but check results is an error.
• IEEE1284 connector error
• Centronic loopback connector is defective
[1120] Loopback Connector Not Detected
Centronic loopback connector is not connected for detailed self-diagnostic
test.
• Centronic loopback connector not connected correctly
• Centronic loopback connector is defective
• ASIC device is defective
1. Connect the centronic loopback connector
2. Replace the centronic loopback connector

SC838-00 C Self-diagnostic Error: Clock Generator
Troubleshooting
[2701] Verify Error
A verify error occurred when setting data was read from the clock generator
via the I2C bus.
• Defective clock generator
• Defective I2C bus
• Defective I2C port on the CPU

SC839-00 D Self-diagnostic Error: Serial Flash
[9001] Serial Flash Access Error
USB NAND Flash ROM cannot be read.
Defective Controller Board (PCB24)

SC840-00 D EEPROM Access Error
• During the I/O processing, a reading error occurred. The 3rd reading
failure causes this SC code.
• During the I/O processing, a writing error occurred.
• Defective EEPROM
-

SC841-00 D EEPROM Read Data Error
Mirrored data of the EEPROM is different from the original data in EEPROM.
Data in the EEPROM is overwritten for some reason.
-

SC842-00 C Nand-Flash Updating Verification Error
SCS write error (verify error) occurred at the Nand-Flash module when
remote ROM or main ROM was updated.
Nand-Flash defective
1. Turn the main power OFF/ON.

SC842-01 C Insufficient Nand-Flash Blocks (Threshold exceeded)
At startup, or when machine returned from low power mode, the Nand-Flash
status was read and judged that the number of unusable blocks had
exceeded threshold, and then SCS generated the SC code.
Number of unusable blocks exceeded threshold for Nand-Flash

SC842-02 C Number of Nand-Flash Block Deletions Exceeded
At startup, or when the machined returned from low power mode, the
Nand-Flash was read and judged that the number of deleted blocks had
exceeded threshold, and then SCS generated this SC code.
Number of blocks deleted exceeded threshold for Nand-Flash

SC845-** Hardware Error Detected when the Automatic Firmware Update
SC845-01 D Engine Board
SC845-02 D Controller Board (PCB24)
SC845-03 D Operation Panel (Normal) (This machine does not support a (Normal)
Operation Panel.)
SC845-04 D Operation Panel (Smart Panel)
SC845-05 D FCU
When updating the firmware automatically (ARFU), the firmware cannot be
read or written normally, and the firmware update cannot be completed even
by 3 retries.
Hardware abnormality of the target board
1. Replace the target board.
2. For SC845-02, HDD and memory may cause the problem. Replace the

HDD or memory if the SC cannot be recovered by replacing the
Troubleshooting
No. Type Error Name/Error Condition/Major Cause/Solution
SC845-50 D DIMM or Hard Disk Failure
This SC occurs if auto firmware decompression fails after downloading the
package firmware during auto firmware update or receiving reservation
setting in SFU.
The machine operates normally if you turn the main power OFF and then
back ON, but the SC occurs again when firmware decompression fails again
during the next auto firmware update.
Hardware failure (DIMM or hard disk failure) or the package file released via
the global server (SERES) is corrupt.
1. Replace the DIMM on the Controller Board (PCB24).
If the problem persists after replacing the DIMM, replace the hard disk.

SC845-51 C Network, DIMM or Hard Disk Failure
This SC occurs if auto firmware decompression fails after downloading the
package firmware during auto firmware update, update from the application
site, or receiving reservation setting in SFU.
Failure in the customer’s network or hardware (DIMM or hard disk) failure.
1. This may be recovered by retrying the firmware update.
2. If the problem persists, replace the DIMM on the Controller Board
(PCB24).
3. If the problem persists after replacing the DIMM, replace the hard disk.

SC855-01 B Wireless LAN Board Error (Driver attachment failure)
Wireless LAN board error (wireless LAN card: 802.11 is covered)
• Defective wireless LAN board
2. Replace wireless LAN board

SC855-02 B Wireless LAN Board Error (Driver initialization failure)
Wireless LAN board error (wireless LAN card: 802.11 is covered)
• Defective wireless LAN board
2. Replace wireless LAN board

SC857-00 B USB I/F Error
The USB interface is unusable because of a driver error.
USB driver error (There are three causes of USB error: RX error/CRC
error/STALL. SC is issued only in the case of STALL.)

SC859-01 B Data Encryption Conversion HDD Conversion Error (HDD check error)
When the data encryption key was updated, HDD data was converted, but not
correctly. Image displayed at conversion only (this SC is not displayed), but
SC is displayed after machine is cycled off/on.
• HDD conversion was set with the data encryption key update function,
but the HDD was removed.
• Machine lost power during data encryption key update
• Electrostatic noise, or an HDD error occurred, during data encryption key
update, and data was not encrypted.
1. Check the HDD connection.
2. Format the HDD (SP5-832: HDD formatting).
3. If there is a problem with the HDD, it has to be replaced.

SC859-02 B Data Encryption Conversion HDD Conversion Error (Power failure
during conversion)
Troubleshooting
SC is displayed after machine is cycled off/on.
Details:
NVRAM/HDD conversion is incomplete.
Power failure occurred during encryption key update.
None
The display after restart instructs the user to format the HDD.

SC859-10 B Data Encryption Conversion HDD Conversion Error (Data read/write
command error)
SC is displayed after machine is cycled OFF/ON.
Details:
Abnormal DMAC return value has been received two or more times (DMAC
timeout, serial communication error etc.)
HDD was not successfully converted during encryption key update due to
HDD errors or cable noises.
1. Check the HDD connection.

SC860-00 B HDD Startup Error at Main Power On (HDD error)
• The HDD is connected but the driver detected the following errors.
• SS_NO.T_READY:/* (-2)HDD does not become READY*/
• SS_BAD_LABEL:/* (-4)Wrong partition type*/
• SS_READ_ERROR:/* (-5)Error occurred while reading or checking the
label*/
• SS_WRITE_ERROR:/* (-6)Error occurred while writing or checking the
label*/
• SS_FS_ERROR:/* (-7)Failed to repair the filesystem*/
• SS_MOUNT_ERROR:/* (-8)Failed to mount the filesystem*/

• SS_COMMAND_ERROR:/* (-9)Drive not responding to command*/
• SS_KERNEL_ERROR:/* (-10)Internal kernel error*/
• SS_SIZE_ERROR:/* (-11)Drive size too small*/
• SS_NO._PARTITION:/* (-12)The specified partition does not exist*/
• SS_NO._FILE:/* (-13)Device file does not exist*/
• Attempted to acquire HDD status through the driver but there has been
no response for 30 seconds or more.
• Unformatted HDD
• Label data corrupted
• HDD defective

SC860-01 D HDD File System Error at Main Power On (HDD error)
Failed to mount any of the hard disk partitions.
Power failed while writing files to the hard disk.
The machine shut down while writing files to the hard disk.
Be sure to back up the address book and retrieve the log before formatting the
hard disk.
It may take a while to shut down because of the hard disk failure.
2. Format the HDD (SP5-832: HDD formatting) through SP mode.

SC860-02 D HDD Label Error at Main Power On (HDD error)
Hard disk partition data abnormal.
Power failed while writing files to the hard disk.
The machine shut down while writing files to the hard disk.
hard disk.

SC860-03 D HDD Encryption Key Error at Main Power On (HDD error)
The encryption key for reading the encrypted hard disk data has failed.
Troubleshooting
The controller’s ROM (NAND) and NVRAM are both damaged. (Rare)
hard disk.

SC861-50 D Storage Boot Failure
Access to the storage device fails when recovery from energy saving.
No response from the storage device.
2. If the problem persists, replace the storage device.

SC863-01 D HDD Data Read Failure
The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally.
Bad sectors were generated during operation.
(An error occurred in an area that does not belong to a partition, such as the
disk label area.)
Guide for when to replace the HDD
1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more
• The interval is short.
• Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on, etc.).
• Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned ON.
2. It takes a long time after main power ON for the operation panel to
become ready.
HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after
main power ON is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for the
engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more, the HDD
may be the cause. If there is a problem with the HDD, HDD-related SCs
such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently. Print the SC log data
and check them.

SC863-02 D HDD Data Read Failure
to 23 The data written to the HDD cannot be read normally.
(An error occurred in partition "a" (SC863-02) to partition “v” (SC863-23)).
Guide for when to replace the HDD
1. When SC863 has occurred ten times or more
• The interval is short.
• Repeatedly occurs in the same situation (At power-on, etc.).
• Startup takes a long time when the main power is turned ON.
2. It takes a long time after main power ON for the operation panel to
become ready.
HDD access may be consuming time. Normal HDD access time after
main power ON is about 5 seconds. If the machine is not waiting for the
engine to be ready and it still takes 20 to 30 seconds or more, the HDD
may be the cause. If there is a problem with the HDD, HDD-related SCs
such as SC860 and SC863 will occur frequently. Print the SC log data
and check them.

SC864-00 D HD Data CRC Error
During HD operation, the HD cannot respond to a CRC error query. Data
transfer did not execute normally while data was being written to the HD.
HD defective
-

SC864-01 D HDD Data CRC Error
During HDD operation, the HDD cannot respond to a CRC error query. Data
transfer did not execute normally while data was being written to the HDD.
disk label area.)
1. Format the HDD.
2. Replace the HDD.

SC864-02 to D HDD Data CRC Error
23 During HDD operation, the HDD cannot respond to a CRC error query.
Troubleshooting
Data transfer did not execute normally while data was being written to the
HDD.
2. Replace the HDD.

SC865-00 D HDD Access Error
During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.
The HDD returned an error that does not constitute SC863 (bad sector) or
SC864 (CRC error).
1. Replace the HDD.

SC865-01 D HDD Access Error
During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.
SC864 (CRC error).
disk label area.)
1. Replace the HDD.

SC865-02 to D HDD Access Error
23 During HDD operation, the HDD returned an error.
SC864 (CRC error).
1. Replace the HDD.

SC865-50 to D HDD Time-out Error
73 The machine does not detect a reply from the HDD during the HDD
operation.
SC865-50:The location where the error occurred cannot be identified.
SC865-51: An error occurred outside of partition data area.
SC865-52 to 73: An error occurred in partition "a" to "v".
The HDD does not respond to the read/ write command from the
machine.
1. Check the harness connections between the Controller Board
(PCB24) and HDD.
2. Replace the HDD.

SC866-00 B SD Card Authentication Error
A license error of an application that is started from the SD card was detected.
Invalid program data is stored on the SD card.
1. Store a valid program data on the SD card.

SC867-00 B SD Card Removed
The SD card was removed while the machine is on.
An application SD card has been removed from the slot (mount point of
/mnt/sd0).

/mnt/sd1).

Troubleshooting
/mnt/sd2).

SC868-** SD Card Access Error
SC868-00 D The SD controller returned an error during operation. (An error occurred
at the mount point of /mnt/sd0)
• SD card defective
• SD controller defective
Slot number is displayed on the sub code.
Detail code is described in SMC print can confirm the details of the error.
• -13 to -3: File system check error
• Otherwise (no code, -2) : Device access error
Turn the main power OFF and check the SD card insertion
status.
1. If no problem is found, insert the SD card and turn the main power ON.
2. If an error occurs, replace the SD card.
3. If the error persists even after replacing the SD card, replace the
In the case of a file system error, reformat the SD card

(using the "SD Formatter" made by Panasonic).*
Turn the main power OFF and check the SD card insertion
status.
1. If no problem is found, insert the SD card and turn the main power ON.
2. If an error occurs, use another SD card.
3. If the error persists even after replacing the SD card, replace the
* Do not format an SD card supplied with the main machine or sold as an option. You may only
format SD cards used for Firmware Update by a Customer Engineer.
SC870-00 B Address Book data error (Anytime: Address Book Error.)
SC870-01 B Address Book data error (On startup: Media required for storing the
Address Book is missing.)
SC870-02 B Address Book data error (On startup: encryption is configured but the
module required for encryption (DESS) is missing.)
SC870-03 B Address Book data error (Initialization: Failed to generate a file to store
internal Address Book.)
delivery sender.)
delivery destination.)
information required for LDAP search.)
SC870-07 B Address Book data error (Initialization: Failed to initialize entries
required for machine operation.)
SC870-08 B Address Book data error (Machine configuration: HDD is present but the
space for storing the Address Book is unusable.)
SC870-09 B Address Book data error (Machine configuration: Inconsistency in the
NVRAM area used for storing settings required for Address Book
configuration.)
SC870-10 B Address Book data error (Machine configuration: Cannot make a
directory for storing the Address Book in the SD/USB FlashROM.)
SC870-11 B Address Book data error (On startup: Inconsistency in Address Book
entry number.)
SC870-20 B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to initialize file.)
SC870-21 B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to generate file.)
SC870-22 B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to open file.)
SC870-23 B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to write to file.)
SC870-24 B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to read file.)
SC870-25 B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to check file size.)
SC870-26 B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to delete data.)
SC870-27 B Address Book data error (File I/O: Failed to add data.)
SC870-30 B Address Book data error (Search: Failed to obtain data from cache when
searching in the machine Address Book. delivery destination/sender.)
SC870-31 B Address Book data error (Search: Failed to obtain data from cache
during LDAP search.)

SC870-32 B Address Book data error (Search: Failed to obtain data from cache while
searching the WS-Scanner Address Book.)
SC870-41 B Address Book data error (Cache: failed to obtain data from cache.)
Troubleshooting
SC870-50 B Address Book data error (On startup: Detected abnormality of the
Address Book encryption status.)
SC870-51 B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to create directory
required for conversion between plaintext and encrypted text.)
SC870-52 B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to convert from
plaintext to encrypted text.)
SC870-53 B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to convert from
encrypted text to plaintext.)
SC870-54 B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Detected data
inconsistency when reading the encrypted Address Book.)
SC870-55 B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to delete file when
changing encryption setting.)
SC870-56 B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to erase the file
that records the encryption key during an attempt to change the
encryption setting.)
SC870-57 B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to move a file
during an attempt to change the encryption setting.)
SC870-58 B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Failed to delete a
directory during an attempt to change the encryption setting.)
SC870-59 B Address Book data error (Encryption settings: Detected a resource
shortage during an attempt to change the encryption setting.)
SC870-60 B Address Book data error (Unable to obtain the on/off setting for
administrator authentication (06A and later).)
When an error related to the Address Book is detected during startup or
operation.
• Software bug
• Inconsistency of Address Book source location (machine/delivery
server/LDAP server)
• Inconsistency of Address Book encryption setting or encryption key
(NVRAM or HDD was replaced individually without formatting the
Address Book)
• Address Book storage device (SD/HDD) was temporarily removed or
hardware configuration does not match the application configuration.
• Address Book data corruption was detected.
Install the device that contains address book information properly, and turn

the main power off/on. If SC occurs again, do the following steps.
1. After installing the HDD, or SD/USB ROM, execute SP5-846-046.
2. Wait more than 3 seconds, then execute SP5-832.
Procedure after SC870 is cleared
1. If there is backup data in SD card or Web Image Monitor, restore the
address book data. (To restore from SD card, enter the encryption
password which is the same as when you enter to backup.)

SC871-00 D FCU Error
An error occurred when FCU defective.
• Time-out error
• Abnormal Parameter
2. Update the firmware if more recent firmware was released.

SC872-00 B HDD Mail Reception Error
An error was detected on the HDD immediately after the machine was turned
ON.
• HDD defective
• Power was turned OFF while the machine used the HDD.
1. Format the HDD (SP5-832-007).
2. Replace the HDD.
When you do the above, the following information will be initialized.
• Partly received partial mail messages.
• Already-read statuses of POP3-received messages (All messages on the
mail server are handled as new messages).

SC873-00 B HDD Mail Reception Error
An error was detected on the HDD immediately after the machine was turned
ON.
• HDD defective
• Power was turned OFF while the machine used the HDD.
1. Format the HDD (SP5-832-007).
2. Replace the HDD.

When you do the above, the following information will be initialized.
• Sender’s mail text
• Default sender name/password (SMB/FTP/NCP)
Troubleshooting
• Administrator mail address
• Scanner delivery history

SC874-05 D Delete All Error (Delete Data Area) : Read error
SC874-06 D Delete All Error (Delete Data Area) : Write error
SC874-09 D Delete All Error (Delete Data Area) : No response from HDD
SC874-10 D Delete All Error (Delete Data Area) : Error in Kernel
SC874-12 D Delete All Error (Delete Data Area) : No designated partition
SC874-13 D Delete All Error (Delete Data Area) : No device file
SC874-14 D Delete All Error (Delete Data Area) : Start option error
SC874-15 D Delete All Error (Delete Data Area) : No designated sector number
SC874-16 D Delete All Error (Delete Data Area) : failure in performing hdderase
SC874-41 D Delete All Error (Delete Data Area) : Other fatal errors
SC874-42 D Delete All Error (Delete Data Area) : End by cancellation
SC874-61 D Delete All Error (Delete Data Area) : library error
to 65
SC874-66 D Delete All Error (Delete Data Area) : Unavailable
SC874-67 D Delete All Error (Delete Data Area) : Erasing not finished
SC874-68 D Delete All Error (Delete Data Area) : HDD format failure (Normal)
SC874-69 D Delete All Error (Delete Data Area) : HDD format failure (Abnormal)
SC874-70 D Delete All Error (Delete Data Area) : Unauthorized library
SC874-99 D Delete All Error (Delete Data Area) : other errors
An error occurred while data was being erased on HDD or NVRAM.
• Error detected in HDD data delete program
• Error detected in NVRAM data delete program
• The “Delete All” option was not set
• Turn the Main Power Switch (SW1) OFF and back ON, and then
execute "Erase All Memory" in UP mode again. (However, if there is a
defective sector or other problem with the hard disk, the error will persist
even after trying the above.)
• If the "Delete All" option is not installed when this error occurs, install
the option.

SC875-01 D Bulk Data Erase Error (HDD erasure) (hddchack –i error)
SC875-02 D Bulk Data Erase Error (HDD erasure) (Data deletion failure)
An error was detected before HDD/data erasure starts. (Failed to erase
data/failed to logically format HDD)
• HDD logical formatting failed.
• The modules failed to erase data.

SC876-00 D Log Data Error
An error was detected in the handling of the log data at power on or during
machine operation.
• Damaged log data file.
• Log encryption is enabled but encryption module is not installed.
• Inconsistency of encryption key between NVRAM and HDD.
• Software bug.
Try the SC876-01 to -99 solutions listed below. If it is not solved, do the
following steps (for when only an HDD is replaced):
1. Disconnect the HDD and turn ON the main power.
2. Execute SP5-801-019.
4. Connect the HDD and turn ON the main power.
5. Execute SP5-832-004.
The following step is to configure the logging/encryption setting again.
8. Set SP9-730-002 through -004 to 1.

SC876-01 D Log Data Error 1
machine operation.
Damaged log data file
1. Initialize the HDD (SP5-832-004).

Troubleshooting
machine operation.
Log encryption is enabled but encryption module is not installed.
• Replace or set again the encryption module.
• Disable the log encryption setting.

machine operation.
Inconsistency of encryption key between NVRAM and HDD.
• Disable the log encryption setting.
• Initialize LCS memory (SP5-801-019).
• Initialize the HDD (SP5-832-004).

machine operation.
• Log encryption key is disabled but the log data file is encrypted. (NVRAM
data corruption)
• Log encryption key is enabled but the log data file is not encrypted.
(NVRAM data corruption)
1. Initialize the HDD (SP5-832-004).

machine operation.
• Only the NVRAM has been replaced with one previously used in another
machine.
• Only the HDD has been replaced with one previously used in another
machine.
• Attach the original NVRAM.
• Attach the original HDD.
• With the configuration that caused the SC, initialize the HDD

(SP5-832-004).

machine operation.
Other causes
-

SC877-00 B Data Overwrite Security Card Error
The "Auto Erase Memory" function of the Data Overwrite Security is set to on
but it cannot be done.
• Data Overwrite Security option SD card is broken.
• Data Overwrite Security option SD card has been removed.
1. If the SD card is broken, prepare a new Data Overwrite Security option
SD card and replace the NVRAM.
2. If the SD card has been removed, turn the main power OFF and reinstall
a working Data Overwrite Security option SD card.

SC878-00 D TPM Authentication Error
TPM electronic recognition failure
• Update of system module attempted without correct update path
• USB flash memory not operating correctly
Trusted Platform Module
• In computing, Trusted Platform Module (TPM) is both the name of a published specification
detailing a secure crypto processor that can store cryptographic keys that protect
information, as well as the general name of implementations of that specification often
called the "TPM chip" or "TPM Security Device" (as designated in certain Dell BIOS
settings).
SC878-01 D USB Flash Error
There is a problem in the file system of the USB flash memory.
USB Flash system files corrupted

SC878-02 D TPM Error
An error occurred in either TPM or the TPM driver
TPM not operating correctly
Troubleshooting

SC878-03 D TCSD Error
An error occurred in the TPM software stack.
• TPM, TPM software cannot start
• A file required by TPM is missing

SC878-20 D Random Number Test Error
An error was detected when a random number table was generated during a
self-test.
TPM is defective
2. Replace the Controller Board (PCB24) if the SC occurs again.

SC878-21 D DESS Self-test Error
The power-on self-test for TPM failed at startup when the controller encryption
software was tested.
TPM firmware or CPU is defective

SC880-00 D File Format Converter Error
Reply to File Format Converter access was not returned within a specified
time.
File Format Converter defective
1. Replace the File Format Converter.
2. Remove the File Format Converter.

SC881-01 D Management Area Error
• A problem was detected in the software
• This error may even occur is an IC card option is not installed.
• This is caused by accumulation of abnormal authentication information in
the software. (User operation will not directly cause it.)
• At login
Example: When a job is sent to the printer/when logged on from the
operation panel/when logged on from a Web browser

SC890-01 A PaaS* Function: Tampering Detection
PaaS data in NVRAM and on USB flash drive do not match at startup.
-
Activate PaaS => Install => After successful installation, reboot.
Notes on application:
Before attempting recovery, check whether the device is registered to
PaaS-PF. If it is, cancel the registration.
The SC is resolved by rebooting after successful installation.
* PaaS stands for “Printer as a Service”. It is a remote service like the @remote service.

SC890-02 D PaaS Function: Suspended
This SC occurs when the PaaS function is suspended because of an internal
or external factor (receiving a request from PaaS-PF to suspend).
-
The warning dialog box displayed when this SC occurs contains instructions.
Follow the instructions to solve the problem.

SC899-00 D Software Performance Error (signal reception end)
Unknown software error occurred.
Troubleshooting
Occurs when an internal program behaves abnormally.
In the case of a hardware defect
1. Replace the hardware.
In the case of a software error
2. Try updating the firmware.
peripheral
SC9xx: Others
6.10 SC9XX: OTHERS

SC900-00 A Electrical Total Counter Error
The total counter contains data that is not a number.
• NVRAM incorrect type
• NVRAM defective or corrupted
• Unexpected error from external source
• When PRT received signals at SRM, the requested count did not
complete.
1. Replace the NVRAM.

SC920-00 B Printer Application Error (no response within determined time in
Printing)
SC920-01 B Printer Application Error (Timeout during Printing)
SC920-02 B Printer Error (WORK memory not acquired)
SC920-03 B Printer Application Error (Filter process not started)
SC920-04 B Printer Error (Filter processing ended abnormally)
When an error is detected in the application, which makes continued
operation impossible.
• Software bug
• Unexpected hardware configuration (such as insufficient memory)
2. Increase the memory storage capacity (Only for SC920-02).

SC921-00 B Printer Application Error (Resident font not found)
Resident font was not found at printer startup.
Preinstalled font files not found.
SC9xx: Others

SC925-00 B NetFile Function Error
SC925-01 B NetFile Function Error
Troubleshooting
The NetFile file management on the HDD cannot be used, or a NetFile
management file is corrupted and operation cannot continue. The HDDs are
defective and they cannot be debugged or partitioned, so the Scan Router
functions (delivery of received faxes, document capture, etc.), Web services,
and other network functions cannot be used.
HDD status codes are displayed below the SC code:
• HDD defective
• Power loss while data was writing to HDD
• Software bug
See the table and the procedure below.
Here is a list of HDD status codes:
Display Meaning
(-1) HDD not connected
(-2) HDD not ready
(-3) No label
(-4) Partition type incorrect
(-5) Error returned during label read or check
(-6) Error returned during label read or check
(-7) “filesystem” repair failed
(-8) “filesystem” mount failed
(-9) Drive does not answer command
(-10) Internal kernel error
(-11) Size of drive is too small
(-12) Specified partition does not exist
(-13) Device file does not exist
Recovery from SC 925
Procedure 1
1. If the machine shows SC codes for HDD errors (SC860 to SC865) with SC 925, do the
recovery procedures for SC860 to SC865.
Procedure 2
1. If the machine does not show one of the five HDD errors (SC860 to SC865), cycle the main
power OFF/ON.
2. If this is not the solution for the problem, then initialize the NetFile partition on the HDD with
SP5-832-11 (HDD Formatting - Ridoc I/F).
NetFiles: These are jobs printed from the document server using a PC and DeskTopBinder.
SC9xx: Others
Before you initialize the NetFile partition on the HDD, tell the customer:
• Received faxes on the delivery server will be erased
• All captured documents will be erased
• Desk Top Binder/Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor job history will be erased
• Documents on the document server, and scanned documents, will not be erased.
• The first time that the network gets access to the machine, the management
information must be configured again (this will use a lot of time).
3. Before you initialize the Netfile partition with SP5-832-11, do these steps:
4. In the User Tools mode, do Document Management> Batch Delete Transfer Documents.
Do SP5-832-11, and cycle the main power OFF/ON.
Procedure 3
1. If “Procedure 2” is not the solution for the problem, do SP5-832-001 (HDD Formatting - All)
2. Cycle the machine OFF/ON.
• SP5-832-001 erases all document and address book data on the hard disks.
Consult with the customer before you do this SP code.
Procedure 4
1. If “Procedure 3” does not solve the problem, replace the HDD.

SC926-01 D Log Transfer Function Error
The capture operation timeout occurred when the capture setting and log
encryption setting are ON.
• Continuously capture data transmission failure
• Continuously capture data conversion failure
• Software bug
1. Automatic reboot is performed.

SC940-02 C Paper Feed Clutch (CL9) Malfunction (when not operating)
This SC occurs if the value of the register of the error detection signal is zero
three times in a row when the Paper Feed Clutch (CL9) is not operating.
• The harness is broken.
• The harness is trapped.
• The Paper Feed Clutch (CL9) is malfunctioning.
• The Paper Feed Clutch (CL9) driver is malfunctioning.
• The interlock switch is OFF.
Check if the SC occurs by executing two-sided printing after switching the
SC9xx: Others

main power OFF and then back ON. If the SC occurs again, do the following
steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power after each step.
1. Reconnect the connector to the BiCU (PCB1).
Troubleshooting
Take care not to bend the connector pins when reconnecting the
connector.
2. Reconnect the relay connector and Paper Feed Clutch (CL9) connector.
connector.
3. Replace the Paper Feed Clutch (CL9).
4. Replace the harness between the BiCU (PCB1) and Paper Feed Clutch
(CL9).

SC940-03 C Bypass Feed Clutch (CL7) Malfunction (when not operating)
three times in a row when the Bypass Feed Clutch (CL7) is not operating.
• Bypass Feed Clutch (CL7) is malfunctioning.
• Bypass Feed Clutch (CL7) driver is malfunctioning.
Check if the SC occurs by executing two-sided printing after turning the main
power OFF and then back ON. If the SC occurs again, do the following steps.
Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power after each step.
connector.
2. Reconnect the relay connector and Bypass Feed Clutch (CL7) connector.
connector.
3. Replace the Bypass Feed Clutch (CL7).
4. Replace the harness between the BiCU (PCB1) and Bypass Feed Clutch
(CL7).
SC9xx: Others

SC940-04 C Bypass Tray Lift Clutch (CL1) Malfunction (when not operating)
three times in a row when the Bypass Tray Lift Clutch (CL1) is not operating.
• Bypass Tray Lift Clutch (CL1) is malfunctioning.
• Bypass Tray Lift Clutch (CL1) driver is malfunctioning.
connector.
2. Reconnect the relay connector and Bypass Tray Lift Clutch (CL1)
connector.
connector.
3. Replace the Bypass Tray Lift Clutch (CL1).
4. Replace the harness between the BiCU (PCB1) and Bypass Tray Lift
Clutch (CL1).

SC940-06 C Duplex Clutch (CL6) Malfunction (when not operating)
three times in a row when the Duplex Clutch (CL6) is not operating.
• Duplex Clutch (CL6) is malfunctioning.
• Duplex Clutch (CL6) driver is malfunctioning.
connector.
2. Reconnect the relay connector and Duplex Clutch (CL6) connector.
SC9xx: Others

connector.
3. Replace the Duplex Clutch (CL6).
Troubleshooting
4. Replace the harness between the BiCU (PCB1) and Duplex Clutch
(CL6).

SC940-08 C ITB Lift Motor (M14) Malfunction (when not operating)
three times in a row when the ITB lift motor (M14) is not operating.
• ITB Lift Motor (M14) is malfunctioning.
• ITB Lift Motor (M14) driver is malfunctioning.
connector.
2. Reconnect the relay connector and ITB Lift Motor (M14) connector.
connector.
3. Replace the ITB Lift Motor (M14).
4. Replace the harness between the BiCU (PCB1) and ITB Lift Motor (M14).

SC940-11 C Toner Supply Motor (Y) (M4) Malfunction (when not operating)
SC940-12 C Toner Supply Motor (M) (M3) Malfunction (when not operating)
SC940-13 C Toner Supply Motor (C) (M2) Malfunction (when not operating)
SC940-14 C Toner Supply Motor (K) (M1) Malfunction (when not operating)
three times in a row when the Toner Supply Motor is not operating.
SC9xx: Others

• Toner Supply Motor (M1-M4) is malfunctioning.
• Toner Supply Motor driver is malfunctioning.
connector.
2. Reconnect the relay connector and Toner Supply Motor connector.
connector.
3. Replace the Toner Supply Motor (M1-M4).
4. Replace the harness between the BiCU (PCB1) and Toner Supply Motor
(M1-M4).

SC940-50 C Optional Counter Interface Unit Error
Setting of the optional counter interface is ON, and register values, of the set
detection signal of the optional counter interface unit, is "1" 3 times in a row.
Driver's error of the optional counter interface
2. If the problem cannot be solved, replace the BiCU (PCB1).

SC940-52 C Paper Feed Clutch (CL9) Malfunction (during operation)
three times in a row when the Paper Feed Clutch (CL9) is operating.
• The Paper Feed Clutch (CL9) driver is malfunctioning.
Check if the SC occurs by executing two-sided printing after switching the
main power OFF and then back ON. If the SC occurs again, do the following
steps. Check if the SC reoccurs by cycling the power after each step.
connector.
2. Reconnect the relay connector and Paper Feed Clutch (CL9) connector.
connector.
SC9xx: Others

3. Replace the Paper Feed Clutch (CL9).
Troubleshooting
SC940-53 C Bypass Feed Clutch (CL7) Malfunction (during operation)
three times in a row when the Bypass Feed Clutch (CL7) is operating.
• The Bypass Feed Clutch (CL7) driver is malfunctioning.
connector.
2. Reconnect the relay connector and Bypass Feed Clutch (CL7) connector.
connector.
3. Replace the Bypass Feed Clutch (CL7) .

SC940-54 C Bypass Tray Lift Clutch (CL1) Malfunction (during operation)
three times in a row when the Bypass Tray Lift Clutch (CL1) is operating.
The Bypass Tray Lift Clutch (CL1) driver is malfunctioning.
connector.
2. Reconnect the relay connector and Bypass Tray Lift Clutch (CL1)
connector.
connector.
3. Replace the Bypass Tray Lift Clutch (CL1).
SC9xx: Others

SC940-56 C Duplex Clutch (CL6) Malfunction (during operation)
three times in a row when the Duplex Clutch (CL6) is operating.
The Duplex Clutch (CL6) driver is malfunctioning.
connector.
2. Reconnect the relay connector and Duplex Clutch (CL6) connector.
connector.
3. Replace the Duplex Clutch (CL6).

SC940-81 D Load SW (3.3V_L): Overcurrent Detection
The load SW has detected and limited overcurrent.
• Short circuit on the BiCU (PCB1)
• Short circuit in the ID Sensor (S27 to S29), or its harness
Check whether the SC occurs by removing the CN555 connector from the
BiCU (PCB1) and turning the main power OFF and then back ON.
SC does not occur:
1. Replace the ID Sensor (S27 to S29) or its harness.
SC occurs:

SC940-84 D Load SW (3.3V_MYU): Overcurrent Detection
• Short circuit on the BiCU (PCB1)
• Short circuit in the TD Sensor (S14 to S17), or its harness
SC does not occur:
1. Replace the TD Sensor (S14 to S17) or its harness.
SC occurs:
SC9xx: Others

Troubleshooting
SC940-85 D Load SW (5V_IO): Overcurrent Detection
One of the following units or the harness connected to it has shorted:
• BiCU (PCB1)
• ID Chip (PCB3)
• Paper End Sensor(bypass) (S6)
• ITB lift HP sensor (S33)
• Registration Sensor (S24)
• Duplex Entrance Sensor (S1)
• 1-Bin Tray Exit Sensor
• Paper Feed Sensor (S31)
• Tray Lift Sensor (S35)
• Duplex Exit Sensor (S2)
• Paper Exit Sensor (S7)
• Fusing Entrance Sensor (S3)
• Fusing Exit Sensor (S8)
• Bypass Tray Lift Sensor (S4)
• Bypass Paper Width Sensor (S5)
• Fusing Thermopile (TH1)
• Waste Toner Full Sensor (S36)
• Tray Paper End Sensor (main unit) (S30)
• Paper Transport Sensor (S1)
• Key Card Option
Check whether the SC occurs by removing each of the CN523, CN525,
CN527, CN543, CN559, and CN570 connectors from the BiCU (PCB1) and
turning the main power OFF and then back ON.
SC does not occur:
1. Check whether the SC occurs by pressing each of the above mentioned
connectors and turning the main power OFF and then back ON in order
to identify the malfunctioning part. Then replace the malfunctioning
harness or electrical component.
SC occurs:
SC9xx: Others

SC940-86 D Load SW (5V_SCN1): Overcurrent Detection
One of the following units or the harness connected to it has shorted:
• BiCU (PCB1)
• SBU (PCB11)
• Scanner HP Sensor (S20)
• ADF Motor (M8)
• Registration Sensor (ADF) (S24)
• ADF top cover sensor (S23)
• Original Feed Sensor (S25)
• Double-feed Sensor (MFTB/ URRB) (PCB14, PCB15)
Check whether the SC occurs by removing each of the CN400, CN403, and
CN404 connectors from the BiCU (PCB1) and turning the main power OFF
and then back ON.
SC does not occur:
1. Check whether the SC occurs by pressing each of the above mentioned
connectors and turning the main power OFF and then back ON in order
to identify the malfunctioning part. Then replace the malfunctioning
harness or electrical component.
SC occurs:

SC940-87 D Load SW5 (Optional PFU): Overcurrent Detection
The load SW has detected and limited overcurrent
• Short circuit on the BICU.
• Short circuit on the Controller Board in the optional PFU.
• Shorted harness in the optional PFU.
SC does not occur:
1. Replace the Controller Board (PCB24) or the harness in the optional
PFU.
SC occurs:
SC9xx: Others

SC990-00 D Software Operation Error
Software attempted an unexpected operation.
Troubleshooting
• Parameter error
• Internal parameter error
• Insufficient work memory
• Operation error caused by abnormalities that are normally undetectable.
2. Reinstall the software of the controller and BiCU (PCB1).

SC991-00 C Recoverable Software Operation Error
Software attempted an unexpected operation.
SC991 covers recoverable errors as opposed to SC990.
• Parameter error
• Internal parameter error
• Insufficient work memory
• Operation error caused by abnormalities that are normally undetectable.
Logging only.

SC992-00 D Undefined SC Issued
An SC, that is not controlled by the system, occurred.
• An SC for the previous model was used mistakenly, etc.
• Basically a software bug.

SC994-00 C Application Item Error
The numbers of executed application items on the operation panel reach the
maximum limit for the operation panel structure.
Too many executed application items
Logging only
SC9xx: Others

SC997-00 D Application Function Selection Error
• The application has not responded to the set command created by SCS
within a certain period of time.
• The application selected ended abnormally.
Software bug
1. Check whether an option required by the application (RAM, DIMM,
board) is installed properly.
2. Check whether downloaded applications are correctly configured. (Take
necessary countermeasures specific to the application in which the error
occurs. In some applications, the logs can be taken from the monitor. If
this option is available, analyze the logs.)

SC998-00 D Application Start Error
• After power on, no application program is registered to the system within
a predetermined period of time. (no application starts or ends normally.)
• Even if they are started, all applications have become unable to be
rendered due to an unknown defect.
• Software bug
• An option required by the application (RAM, DIMM, board) is not installed
properly
1. Turn the main power switch (SW1) OFF and ON.
2. Check whether an option required by the application (RAM, DIMM,
board) is installed properly.
3. Check whether downloaded applications are correctly configured.
Process Control Error Conditions
6.11 PROCESS CONTROL ERROR CONDITIONS
6.11.1 PROCESS CONTROL SELF-CHECK RESULT
Troubleshooting
Displayed number shows results of each color sensor check.
00000000 = YYCCMMKK
No. Result Description Possible Causes/Action

11 Successfully Process control self-check Check the Vsg adjustment.
completed successfully completed. See the "Vsg Adjustment
Result" following this table.
41 Vt error Vt maximum or minimum error is • Defective development
to detected. unit
42 Vt maximum error and an
image is faint:
1. Replace the toner supply
pump unit.
Vt maximum error and an
image is O.K:
1. Replace the
development unit.
2. Replace the BiCU
(PCB1).
Vt minimum error:
1. Replace the
development unit.
2. Replace the BiCU board.
45 P_Pattern detect Not read TonerPatch Same as 53
error
53 ID sensor coefficient Not enough data can be sampled. • Solid image is not
(K5) detection error sufficient density:
1. Retry the process
control.
2. Replace the ID sensors
(S27-S29).
3. Replace the BiCU
(PCB1).
• Solid image is O.K.

(S27-S29).
2. Replace the BiCU
(PCB1).
• ID sensors (S27-S29)
are dirty:
1. Clean the ID sensors
(S27-S29).
2. Retry the process
control.
54 ID sensor coefficient When the K5 is more than the • ID sensor pattern density
(K5) maximum/ value of SP3-362-003 or less than is too high or low.
minimum error the value of SP3-362-004, the error • ID sensors (S27-S29) or
54 is displayed. shutter are defective.
Same as 53
55 Gamma error: Gamma is out of range. 5.0 < • ID sensor pattern density
Maximum Gamma is too high.
• Hardware defective.
Same as 53
56 Gamma error: Gamma is out of range. • ID sensor pattern density
Minimum Gamma < 0.15 is too low.
1. Same as 53
2. Replace the toner supply
pump unit.
57 Vk error: Maximum Vk is out of range. • ID sensor pattern density
150 < Vk is too low.
Same as 53
58 Vk error: Minimum Vk is out of range. • ID sensor pattern density
Vk < –150 is too high.
• Background dirty
• Hardware defective
Same as 53
59 Sampling data error Not enough data can be sampled • ID sensor pattern density
during gamma during the gamma correction. is too high or low.
correction • Hardware defective
Same as 53
99 Unexpected error Process control fails. • Power Failure

Check the power source.
Vsg Adjustment Result
Troubleshooting
1 O.K Vsg adjustment is correctly done. -
2 ID sensor Vsg cannot be adjusted within 4.0 • Dirty ID sensors (S27-S29)
adjustment error ±0.5V. (toner, dust, or foreign
material)
• Dirty transfer belt
• Scratched image transfer belt
• Defective ID sensors
(S27-S29)
• Poor connection
1. Clean the ID sensors
(S27-S29).
2. Check the belt cleaning.
Clean or replace the transfer
belt.
3. Replace the image transfer
belt.
(S27-S29).
5. Check the connection.
3 ID sensor output ID sensor output is more than • Defective ID sensors
error "Voffset Threshold" (SP3-324-004) (S27-S29)
• Poor connection
(S27-S29).
2. Check the connection.
3. Replace the (PCB1).
9 Vsg Adjustment Vsg adjustment has not been • Other cases
error completed. Retry SP3-321-010.
6.11.2 LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT RESULT

SP2-194-010 to -012 (Line Position Adjustment Result: M, C, Y)
This SP shows the number as a line position adjustment result on the LCD. It shows which color
has an error (M, Y or C).
No. Result Description Note
0 Not done Line position adjustment has not been done. -
1 Completed Line position adjustment has correctly been done, -
successfully
2 Cannot detect patterns ID sensors (S27-S29) have not detected the patterns for See
line position adjustment. Note
3 Fewer lines on the The patterns, which ID sensors (S27-S29) have detected, See
pattern than the target are not enough for line position adjustment. Note
4 More lines on the Not used in this machine. -
pattern than the target
5 Out of the adjustment ID sensors (S27-S29) have correctly detected the See
range patterns for line position adjustment, but a shift of Note
patterns is out of adjustable range.
6-9 Not used - -
• For details, see the "Line Position Adjustment" section.
Troubleshooting for Image Quality Problems
6.12 TROUBLESHOOTING FOR IMAGE QUALITY
PROBLEMS
Troubleshooting
6.12.1 FLOWCHART FOR IDENTIFYING UNIT CAUSING IMAGE
QUALITY DEGRADATION (PROBLEM AT REGULAR
INTERVALS)
Image problems may appear at regular intervals that depend on the circumference of
certain components.
The following diagram shows the possible symptoms (black or white dots at regular intervals).
[A]: Paper feed direction

[B]: Problems at regular intervals
Enter the SP mode, and then select SP2-109-003.

1. Select the test pattern to print from the list, and then press [OK].
• "13 (Independent Pattern (4dot))" pattern is recommended to identify the problem
color.
2. Select SP2-109-005 (1: Full Color, 2: Cyan, 3: Magenta, 4: Yellow, 5: Black) to select the
printing color.
3. To change the density of test pattern, select density with SP2-109-006 to 009 for each
color.
If select "0" with SP2-109-006 through 009, the color adjusted so will not show up in the
test pattern.
4. Press "Copy Window", then specify the settings on the copier application for test print
(paper size etc…).
5. Press "Start" to start the test print.
Interval Target part Replacement part Roller R
(pitch) (phi)
26.7mm Charge roller cleaner PCDU (Photo Conductor and 8.5mm
50.4mm lubricant roller (Brush Development Unit) 10mm
33.7mm roller) PCDU (Photo Conductor and 10.73mm
55mm Charge roller Development Unit) 17.5mm
68.5mm Paper transfer roller PCDU (Photo Conductor and 21.664mm
22.5mm ITB drive roller Development Unit) 12mm
22.5mm Development roller (K) Paper Transfer Roller Unit 12mm
75.3mm Development roller ITB (Image Transfer Belt) Unit 24mm
78.5mm (CMY) PCDU (Photo Conductor and 25mm
78.5mm Drum Development Unit) (K) 25mm
Interval Target part Replacement part Roller R

(pitch) (phi)
749.9mm Fusing sleeve belt PCDU (Photo Conductor and
Pressure roller Development Unit) (CMY)
Troubleshooting
Image transfer belt PCDU (Photo Conductor and
Development Unit)
Fusing Sleeve Belt Assembly, or Fusing
Unit
Pressure Roller, or Fusing Unit
ITB (Image Transfer Belt) Unit
6.12.2 ONLY BLACK IS NOT PRINTED
Black cannot be printed.

[A]: Normal
[B]: Problem evident
The ITB contact/release lever is not set to the proper position.
• If the ITB contact/release lever is not set to the proper position, by setting the waste
toner bottle all the way, the lever is automatically set to the proper position. However, it
may be possible to close the front cover without inserting the waste toner bottle all the
way through. If it is, black cannot be printed because the image transfer belt and drum
are separated.
Set the ITB contact/release lever to the proper position.

[A]: The lever is set to the proper position.
[B]: The lever is not set to the proper position.
6.12.3 MISRECOGNITION OF AUTO COLOR SELECTION WHEN

SCANNING ORIGINALS
In Auto Color Selection (ACS) mode, 2 processes are carried out, namely
(1) Chromatic Color Recognition and (2) Size Recognition, to determine
whether the scanned original is full color or black-and-white.
In (1) Chromatic Color Recognition, each pixel is assessed for whether it has a chromatic color
or not according to its RGB deviation.
Troubleshooting
By (2) Size Recognition, whether the original is recognized as full color or black-and-white
depends on the continuity of the chromatic color in (1) Chromatic Color Recognition.
The original is recognized to be full color only if chromatic color pixels are detected continually.
If interspersed minute chromatic color pixels are detected (as shown below), the original is not
recognized as a full color original.
In “A.C.S. Sensitivity”, you can adjust the level of (2)Size Recognition for
recognizing whether the original is full color or black-and-white.
From both Copier or Scanner application, you can specify this setting in the 5-level scale, from
0 (Black & White) to 4 (Full Color).
• Adjust the A.C.S. Sensitivity in Classic (Legacy UI) copier or scanner. There is no
5-level scale in New (Simple UI) Copier or Scanner application.
Using SP4-939-001 (ACS:Color Range), you can adjust the level of (1)
Chromatic Color Recognition for recognizing whether the original is full
color or black-and-white.
This is the SP for both copier and scanner settings, and you can adjust this setting with the
5-level scale from -2 to 2 (Default: 0).
If an original with a colored background fails to be recognized as a black-and-white original by
ACS, set the value of this SP to “-1” or “-2”.
If an original with a gray or faintly colored background fails to be recognized as a full color
original by ACS, set the value of this SP to “1” or “2”.
6.12.4 MISRECOGNITION OF AUTO COLOR SELECTION

(COPY/SCANNER)
In the Auto Color Selection (hereafter called ACS) mode, if copying or scanning an original on
which color is printed only on the edge, the original will be misrecognized as monochrome. If so,
color is not printed on the output.
Error Condition
The misrecognition occurs when copying an original which has color at

the edge, and that color is printed on the output 10 mm from the edge in
the ACS mode.
When using the copy application, if the original is recognized as monochrome, color on the
document may not be printed on the output. When printing the standard 10 colors used in
Microsoft Office Word 2013 (an example is shown below), the following colors with the "x" mark
will disappear if the document is recognized as monochrome in the ACS mode.
• Colors with the "x" mark will not be printed if the document is recognized as
monochrome. The result may differ depending on the equipment status or
environment.
The misrecognition occurs when scanning an original which has color

only 15 mm from the edge (using the original as a standard) in the ACS
mode.
Troubleshooting
Cause
In the ACS mode, the edge of the original is not recognized. Only the center part of the original
document is the target area to recognize color or monochrome (in order to prevent
misrecognition due to noise).
When copying in the ACS mode, ACS recognition and the image processing equivalent to full
color is performed simultaneously. If recognized as monochrome in the ACS recognition, color
without a K component will not be printed.
Countermeasure
Change the ACS area excluded from recognition with the following SP settings.
The smaller the value, the smaller the ACS area excluded from recognition becomes, which
enables the document to be recognized as color.
SP No. SP Name Def. Max. Min.

4-938-001 ACS:Edge Mask Copy:Sub LEdge 15 0 31
4-938-002 ACS:Edge Mask Copy:Sub TEdge 10 0 31
4-938-003 ACS:Edge Mask Copy:Main LEdge 10 0 31
4-938-004 ACS:Edge Mask Copy:Main TEdge 10 0 31
4-938-005 ACS:Edge Mask Scan:Sub LEdge 15 0 31
4-938-006 ACS:Edge Mask Scan:Sub TEdge 15 0 31
4-938-007 ACS:Edge Mask Scan:Main LEdge 15 0 31
4-938-008 ACS:Edge Mask Scan:Main TEdge 15 0 31
[A]: Sub scan direction: leading edge (left)

[B]: Main scan direction (front)
[C]: Sub scan direction: leading edge (right)
[D]: Main scan direction (rear)
[E]: Paper
[F]: ACS area excluded from recognition
• Because the edge of the original is subject to noise, color misrecognition may occur
after setting these SPs smaller than the defaults. In this case, in order to avoid
complaints concerning extra cost, be sure to ask the customer for permission before
changing these SP settings.
6.12.5 FAILURE TO REPRODUCE COLORED TEXT DURING

COLOR COPYING
Some colored text is printed in black.
Troubleshooting
Condition
This occurs when copying an original including faintly colored text or dark colored text in Full
Color / Auto Color Selection / Two-Color mode. (The following figure shows an example of
colored text being printed in black.)
This occurs when copying an original with an image visible from the other side (colored text
printed on the paper with relatively thick-colored photos or graphs) in Full Color / Auto Color
Selection / Two-Color mode. (The following figure shows an example of an original with an
image visible from the other side.)
Cause
In the copier image processing, text areas and color areas are extracted from the scanned
image of the original.
This extraction is called “image area separation”. The area recognized as black text (text area
and black and white area) is printed in black only.
Cause 1
To prioritize the image of the black text and prevent erroneously extracting the black text as the
colored text area, slight colored areas on scanned black text are recognized as black text.
Therefore, faint colors and low chroma colors (or achromatic color) may be partly erroneously
recognized as black text and printed with black only.
Cause 2
Colored text with an image visible from the other side, which is scanned darkly compared to
colored text without an image visible from the other side, may be partly erroneously recognized
as black text and printed with black only.
Solution
By setting the value closest to [photo], the entire image is equally processed as an image
instead of processing areas separately, thus preventing colored text from being printed in black.
• Adjust the Text/Photo Sensitivity in Classic mode (Legacy UI) copier or scanner. There
is no 5-level scale in New (Simple UI) Copier or Scanner application.
1. Press [Edit / Color].
2. Select the [Color] tab.
3. Select [Adjust Color].
4. Select the [Color Quality] tab, and then set the value in [Text/Photo Sensitivity] closest to
[Photo].
Troubleshooting
6.12.6 LINE POSITION ADJUSTMENT
When there are color registration errors on the output, do the line position adjustment as
follows.
Test
1. Do SP2-111-003 (Mode c: rough adjustment).
2. Use SP2-194-007 to check if the result of the line position adjustment is correct (0:
Completed successfully, 1: Not completed). If the result is "1", refer to ‘Countermeasure list
for color registration errors’.
3. Do SP2-111-001 (Mode a: fine adjustment twice).
4. Use SP2-194-007 to check if the result of the line position adjustment is correct (0:
Completed successfully, 1: Not completed). If the result is "1", refer to ‘Countermeasure list
for color registration errors’.
5. Put some A4/LT paper on the bypass tray.
• When you print a test pattern, use the bypass tray to feed the paper.
6. Print out test pattern "7" with SP2-109-003.
7. Check the printed output with a loupe.
8. If there are no color registration errors on the output, the line position adjustment is
correctly done. If not, refer to the countermeasure list for color registration errors.
Countermeasure List for Color Registration Errors

After Executing SP2-111-003
• Result: "1" in SP2-194-007
• Result: "2" or "3" (Line pattern detection failure) in SP2-194-010, -011, -012
Test pattern check Possible cause/Countermeasure
White image, Abnormal image, • Defective image processing unit
Low density • Low density of test pattern
1. Replace the high-voltage power supply unit
(PCB22)(PCB23).
2. Do the forced process control (SP3-011-001) or supply
some toner (SP3-030-xxx).
Normal image, but with color • Defective ID sensor shutter
registration errors • Defective ID sensors (S27-S29)
1. Replace the ID sensor shutter solenoid (SOL2).
2. Replace the ID sensors (S27-S29).
• Result: "1" in SP2-194-007
• One of results: "5" (Out of adjustable range) in SP2-194-010, -011, -012, -013
The main scan registrations of M, C, Y, K are shifted by • Defective laser unit
more than ±15. • Defective BiCU (PCB1)
1. Perform the color skew
adjustment (Image Adjustment).
2. Replace the laser unit.
The sub scan registrations of M, C, Y, K are shifted by • Defective image transfer belt
more than ±20. • Defective drive units
1. Replace the image transfer belt.
2. Replace the drum motor
(M10,M11).
The main scan registration is shifted by more than ±0.66 • Defective ID sensor (S28) at
mm, but only at the central area of the image on the center

output. • Deformed center area on the
image transfer belt
Troubleshooting
(S27-S29).
The skew for M, C, Y, K is more than ±0.75 mm. • Defective PCDU
• Defective laser optics housing unit
2. Reinstall or replace the PCDU.
3. Replace the laser optics housing
unit.
Others • Skew correction upper limit error
3. Replace the laser optics housing
unit.
• Result: "1" in SP2-194-007
• Result: "0" in SP2-194-010, -011, -012, -013
Do SP2-111-001 or -002.
• Result: "1" in SP2-194-007
• Result: "2" or "3" (Line pattern detection failure) in SP2-194-010, -011, -012, -013
White image, Abnormal image, • Defective laser optics housing unit shutter
Low density • Defective image processing unit
• Low density of test pattern

2. Replace the high-voltage power supply unit
(PCB22)(PCB23).
3. Do the forced process control (SP3-011-001) or supply
some toner (SP3-030-xxx).
Normal image, but with color 1. Defective ID sensor shutter
registration errors 2. Defective ID sensors (S27-S29)
3. Defective BiCU (PCB1)
• Result: "1" in SP2-194-007
• Result: "5" (Out of adjustable range) in SP2-194-010, -011, -012
Low image density on the output • Low pattern density
Do the forced process control (SP3-011-001)
or supply some toner (SP3-030-xxx).
The main scan registrations of M, C, Y, K are • Defective laser optics housing unit
shifted by more than ±1.4. • Defective BiCU (PCB1)
1. Do SP2-111-003 again.
2. Replace the laser optics housing unit.
The sub scan registrations of M, C, Y are shifted • Defective image transfer belt
by more than ±1.4mm from the sub scan • Defective drive units
registration of K. • Defective BiCU (PCB1)
1. Do SP2-111-003 again.
3. Replace the drum motor (M10,M11).
The main scan registration is shifted by more than • Defective ID sensor (S28) at center
±0.66 mm, but only at the central area of the • Deformed center area on the image
image on the output. transfer belt
The skew for M, C, Y, K is more than ± 0.75 mm at • Defective PCDU

the end of the scan line? • Defective laser optics housing unit
1. Perform the color skew adjustment
Troubleshooting
(Image Adjustment).
Others • Skew correction upper limit error
2. Perform the color skew adjustment
(Image Adjustment).
• Result: "0" in SP2-194-007
• Result: Color registration errors in SP2-194-010, -011, -012, -013
Low image density on the output • Low pattern density
Do the forced process control (SP3-011-001) or
supply some toner (SP3-030-xxx).
The main scan registration is shifted, but only • Defective ID sensor (S28) at center
at the central area of the image on the output. • Deformed center area on the image transfer
belt
The main scan registrations of M, C, Y, K are • Defective laser optics housing unit
shifted. • Defective ID sensors (S27-S29)
• Incorrect SP value
1. Perform the color skew adjustment (Image
Adjustment).
5. Adjust the value with SP2-182-004 to -021.

The sub scan registrations of M, C, Y, K are • Defective image transfer belt
shifted. • Defective drive units
• Defective ID sensors (S27-S29)
• Incorrect SP value
3. Replace the drum motor (M10,M11).
5. Adjust the value with SP2-182-022 to -039.
The skew of M, C, Y, K is different. • Defective PCDU
2. Perform the color skew adjustment (Image
Adjustment).
The sub scan lines are shifted. Shifted lines • Defective PCDU
appear cyclically. • Defective drive unit
• Drum phase adjustment error
2. Check or replace the drive unit.
6.12.7 BLANK PRINT

Symptom Possible cause Necessary actions
No image is Defective laser unit Replace the laser unit.
printed. Defective PCDU Replace the PCDU.
Defective image transfer belt unit Replace the image transfer belt unit.
Incorrect action of paper transfer Check the guide and the paper transfer
roller roller.
Defective HVPS Replace HVPS.
Defective BiCU (PCB1) Replace the BiCU (PCB1).
6.12.8 ALL-BLACK PRINT

All the paper is black. Incorrectly installed PCDU Install the PCDU correctly.
Troubleshooting
Defective PCDU Replace the PCDU.
Defective HVPS Replace the HVPS.
Defective laser unit Replace the laser unit.
Defective main board Replace the main board.
6.12.9 MISSING CMY COLOR

C, M, or Y is Defective PCDU Replace the PCDU.
missing. Loss of Primary Transfer HV Replace High-Voltage Power Supply
output (Transfer) (PCB23).
Image transfer belt not Check the belt tension unit.
contacting PCDU
Defective the drum motor Replace the drum motor (CMY) (M10).
(CMY) (M10)
6.12.10 LIGHT PRINT

Printed images are Loose connection between paper Check the connection between the
too weak. transfer roller and HVPS paper transfer roller and the HVPS.
Dust in the laser beam path Clean the laser beam path.
Image transfer belt not contacting Check the image transfer belt unit.
PCDU
Defective PCDU Replace the PCDU.
Defective paper transfer roller Replace the paper transfer roller.
Defective fusing unit Replace the fusing unit.
6.12.11 REPEATED SPOTS OR LINES ON PRINTS

The same spots or lines appear at regular intervals.
Interval Possible cause Necessary actions
At intervals of 33.6 mm (1.32 inches) Defective charge Replace the PCDU.
roller
At intervals of 20.9 mm (0.82 inches) Defective Replace the PCDU.
development roller
At intervals from 55.0 (end) to 55.4 (center) Defective paper Replace the paper transfer
mm (from 2.16 to 2.18 inches) transfer roller roller unit.
At intervals of 75.4 mm (2.96 inches) Defective OPC drum Replace the PCDU.
At intervals of 78.5 mm (3.09 inches) Defective pressure Replace the pressure roller
roller or fusing unit.
At intervals of 78.5 mm (3.09 inches) Defective fusing belt Replace the fusing unit.
At intervals of 40.82 mm (1.60 inches) Defective image Replace the image transfer
transfer roller roller.
6.12.12 DARK VERTICAL LINE ON PRINTS

A dark line in one CMY color appears. The line is Defective PCDU Replace the PCDU.
parallel to the paper feed direction.
A dark line in any color (not C, M, or Y) appears. Dust in the laser Clean the laser beam
The line is parallel to the paper feed direction. beam path path.
Defective image Replace the image
transfer belt unit transfer belt unit.
Defective fusing unit Replace the fusing
unit.
6.12.13 WHITE HORIZONTAL LINES OR BANDS

White lines or bands appear in Defective PCDU Replace the PCDU.
images. Defective image transfer Replace the image transfer
belt unit belt unit.
Defective paper transfer Replace the paper transfer
roller roller.
6.12.14 MISSING PARTS OF IMAGES

Some parts of images are Defective PCDU Replace the PCDU.
Troubleshooting
missing. Defective image transfer belt Replace the image transfer belt
unit unit.
Defective paper transfer Replace the paper transfer
roller roller.
6.12.15 DIRTY BACKGROUND

Backgrounds of one CMYK color are too dense. Defective Replace the
PCDU PCDU.
Backgrounds of more than one CMYK color are too Defective HVPS Replace the HVPS.
dense.
6.12.16 PARTIAL CMY COLOR DOTS

Unexpected dots of the same color appear Defective PCDU Replace the PCDU.
at irregular intervals. Defective image Replace the image
6.12.17 DARK IRREGULAR STREAKS ON PRINTS

Unexpected streaks appear at irregular Defective image Replace the image transfer
intervals. transfer belt belt unit.
6.12.18 CMY COLOR IRREGULAR STREAKS

Unexpected streaks of the same color Defective PCDU Replace the PCDU.
appear at irregular intervals. Defective image Replace the image
6.12.19 GHOSTING
The same or similar image appears two or more times. Defective PCDU Replace the PCDU.

They get weaker and weaker. Defective Replace the
transfer unit transfer unit.
6.12.20 UNFUSED OR PARTIALLY FUSED PRINTS

Some parts of images are not Non-standard paper in Use recommended paper.
fused very well. use
Incorrect media type Select an appropriate mode for
mode the media.
6.12.21 IMAGE SKEW

Images are Incorrect Install the paper correctly.
skewed installation of
paper
Incorrect paper Adjust the paper guide correctly.
guide position
• When adjusting the paper width, use the right side
guide only, with the green clip. Do not hold the left
side guide at this time, or skew will occur.
Defective Repair the paper feed unit.
registration roller
Incorrect action of Check the paper transfer roller.
paper transfer
roller
Defective BiCU Replace the BiCU (PCB1).
(PCB1)
Incorrect Uninstall the paper tray units and re-install them.
installation of
paper tray
6.12.22 BACKGROUND STAIN

The reverse side of the paper is not Dirty paper transfer Clean the paper transfer
Troubleshooting
clean. roller roller.
Dirty paper path Clean the paper path.
Dirty registration roller Clean the registration roller.
6.12.23 NO PRINTING ON PAPER EDGE

Images are not printed in the areas Defective PCDU Replace the PCDU.
around the paper edges. Defective toner cartridge Replace the toner
cartridge.
Defective image transfer Replace the image
belt unit transfer belt unit.
Image transfer belt not Check the image transfer
contacting PCDU belt unit.
6.12.24 IMAGE NOT CENTERED WHEN IT SHOULD BE

Images do not come to the Incorrect installation of Install the paper correctly.
center. paper
Incorrect paper guide Adjust the paper guide correctly.
position
Incorrect margin setting Adjust the margin setting.
Incorrect installation of Uninstall the paper tray units and
paper tray re-install them.
Troubleshooting for Other Problems
6.13 TROUBLESHOOTING FOR OTHER PROBLEMS
6.13.1 WHEN YOU CANNOT OPEN THE RIGHT DOOR

Problem:
The right cover (duplex unit) does not open, even if the opening/closing lever is operated.
Causes:
When replacing parts, for example, the duplex unit, hooking the hook band [A] has been
forgotten, so the opening/closing lever and the duplex hook parts do not work together. (Tension
is not applied.)
Solutions:
Release the hook, and then attach the belt.
IM C300series
IM C400series
Troubleshooting
4. Remove the interlock switch cover [A].

IM C300series
IM C400series
5. Remove the bracket. ( ×1)
IM C300series
IM C400series
6. Release the hook [A] from the hole where the bracket was removed.
IM C300series
IM C400series
Troubleshooting
6.13.2 WHEN FLUORESCENT OR LED LAMPS FLICKER
Problem:
Under the usage environment of this machine, at the placement location, fluorescent and/or
LED lamps flicker.
Causes:
This is a result of the voltage drop that occurs when power is applied to the fusing lamp. It
depends on the electrical power environment at the customer's location.
Solutions:
The procedure varies by the flicker occurrence timing. So check the occurrence timing, and do
the procedure that matches the timing.
Occurrence Timing:
Timing Solutions Side Effect

Set SP1-135-001 (Inrush Recovery time from energy saving becomes
Recovery Control) to "1 (ON)." slower approx. 0.9 sec.
from energy
saving
After the Set SP1-135-001 (Inrush • Recovery time from energy saving becomes
recovery from Control) to "1 (ON)." slower approx. 0.9 sec..
energy saving Set SP1-190-001 (Flicker • If the adhesion amount of an image is large,
Control) to "1 (ON)." an offset may occur.
• If a fusing offset occurs, in the related SP to
fusing offsets, setting values must be changed
If the problem persists, perform The fusing temperature is lowered during the
the following additional steps: standby mode, and after the job is started, the
• Make the fusing heater machine takes time to rise the fusing
turned OFF with temperature to the printable temperature. So
SP1-121-001 the printing takes approx. 1 or 2 seconds
(Switch:Rotation longer to complete.
Start/Stop: Time:After
Reload).
Change this SP from "30
sec. (initial value)" to "0".
Then the fusing heater
does not turn ON after the
warm-up mode.
Printing Set SP1-190-001 (Flicker • If the adhesion amount of an image is large,
Control) to "1 (ON)". an offset may occur.
• If a fusing offset occurs, in the related SP to
fusing offsets, setting values must be
changed.
Related SP to Fusing Offsets
SP Name SP No. Value
Print Target SP1-105-001 As initial values + 10 °C are the upper limits,
Temp.:Plain1:FC:Center change values to improve offsets.
Print Target SP1-105-003
Temp.:Plain1:BW:Center
Temp.:Plain2:FC:Center
SP Name SP No. Value

Temp.:Plain2:BW:Center
Temp.:Thin:FC:Center
Troubleshooting
Temp.:Thin:BW:Center
Temp.:M-thick:FC:Center
Temp.:M-thick:BW:Center
6.13.3 WHEN ABNORMAL NOISE OCCURS

When abnormal noise occurs while the machine is operating, identify where the noise comes
from by using various output checks. However, for the fusing unit drive, work through the check
procedures given below.
Because damaged or dirty parts can lead to secondary failure, always follow the procedure.
Take particular care not to be caught in the rotating parts of the motors and/or gears.
Checking Abnormal Noise from the Fusing Unit

When the abnormal noise is coming from the fusing unit, work through the following flow chart,
and check whether the fusing unit is the cause, by using SP1-158 (Abnormal Noise
Confirmation).
If the fusing unit is the cause, replace the fusing unit. If the drive module is the cause, in addition
perform the operation check of various motors by using output checks, to identify which motor is
the cause.
Related SPs
SP No. SP Name Function Description
SP1-158-001 Abnormal Noise The fusing motor (M13) Fails if the fusing unit is
Confirmation: Unit: rotates with the heating not installed or the cover
Troubleshooting
Execute control. is open
SP1-158-002 Abnormal Noise The fusing motor (M13) Fails if the fusing unit is
Confirmation: No Unit: rotates without the heating installed or the cover is
Execute control. open
SP1-158-003 Abnormal Noise Rotates during this time. -
Confirmation: Operation Initial value: 20 sec.
Time
SP1-158-004 Abnormal Noise Line speed at the time of
Confirmation: Operation rotation
Line Speed IM C300 series
0: 89 mm/s
1: 178 mm/s
2: 178 mm/s
3: 178 mm/s
IM C400 series
0: 89 mm/s
1: 178 mm/s
2: 252 mm/s
3: 276 mm/s
SP1-158-005 Abnormal Noise Temperature setting for Do not change

Confirmation: Heat SP1-153-001 (Unit:
Center Target Temp Execute)
SP1-158-007 Abnormal Noise Temperature setting for
Confirmation: Press SP1-153-001 (Unit:
Target Temp Execute)
Electrical Component Defects
6.14 ELECTRICAL COMPONENT DEFECTS
6.14.1 SENSORS
No. Sensor Name/ Activ CN No./ Conditi Symptom
Sensor Board e Pin No. on
Name
S1 Duplex entrance L CN523/15 Open Jam Z (Jam
sensor (S1) 26)
Shorted Jam Z (Jam
18)
S2 Duplex exit sensor L CN523/25 Open Jam Z (Jam
(S2) 25)
Shorted Jam Z
S3 Fusing entrance L CN523/22 Open Jam B (Jam
sensor (S3) 18)
Shorted Jam C
S4 Bypass tray lift H CN523/11 Open SC508
sensor (S4) Shorted
S5 Bypass paper L CN523/2 Open A4/LT size is
width sensor (S5) not detected.
Shorted A4/LT size is
detected.
S6 Paper end sensor L CN523/5 Open Paper is
(bypass) (S6) detected on
the by-pass
tray when no
paper is set.
Shorted Paper is not
detected on
the by-pass
tray when
paper is set.
S7 Paper exit sensor L CN525/11 Open Jam C (Jam
(S7) 20)
Shorted Jam C (Jam
60)
S8 Fusing exit sensor L CN525/8 Open Jam C (Jam

Name
(S8) 19)
Troubleshooting
Shorted Jam C
S9 New fusing unit L CN525/34 Open A new fusing
detection fuse unit is
(S9) erroneously
identified as
an old one.
Shorted A shorted
fuse
S10 Fusing thermistor A CN525/27 Open SC581
(non-contact Shorted
sensor) (S10)
S11 Toner end sensor A CN539/10 Open SC374
(C) (S11) Shorted
(M) (S12) Shorted
(Y) (S13) Shorted
S14 TD sensor (K) A CN540/2 Open PCU setting
(S14) Shorted Error occurs.
S15 TD sensor (C) A CN540/8 Open PCU setting
S16 TD sensor (M) A CN540/14 Open PCU setting
S17 TD sensor (Y) A CN540/20 Open PCU setting
S18 Temperature/humi A CN526/6,8 Open • Printed
dity sensor (S18) Shorted image is
wrong,
such as
rough
image,
dirty
backgro
und or
weak

Name
image.
• SC498
S19 ADF position L CN403/2 Open ADF open
sensor (S19) Shorted cannot be
detected.
S20 Scanner HP H CN403/5 Open SC120,
sensor (S20) Shorted SC121
S21 CIS (S21) H CN401/1,2,3,5 Open SC154 (CIS
Shorted communicati
on error:
rear side)
H CN401/7,8,10,11,13,14,16,17,19,20 Open SC151
,22,23 Shorted (Black level
correction
error: rear
side)
S22 Original set L CN404/26 Open Original set
sensor (S22) Shorted cannot be
detected.
S23 ADF top cover L CN404/24 Open Top cover
sensor (S23) Shorted open cannot
be detected.
S24 Registration L CN404/28 Open Jam P
sensor (S24) Shorted
S25 Original feed L CN404/3 Open Jam P
S26 Waste toner bottle L CN535/1 Open Waste toner
set sensor (S26) bottle cannot
be detected.
Shorted Waste toner
bottle is
detected
when the
waste toner
bottle is not
set.

Name
S27 ID sensor (front) A CN555/3 Open SC370
Troubleshooting
(S27) Shorted
S28 ID sensor (center) A CN555/7 Open SC370
(S28) Shorted
S29 ID sensor (rear) A CN555/12 Open SC370
(S29) Shorted
S30 Tray paper end L CN571/8 Open Paper end is
sensor (main unit) detected
(S30) when there
is paper in
the paper
tray.
Shorted Paper end is
not detected
when there
is no paper
in the paper
tray.
S31 Paper feed sensor L CN571/5 Open Jam A
(S31) Shorted Normal
operation
S32 Registration L CN571/2 Open Jam A (Jam
sensor (S32) 17)
Shorted Jam B
S33 ITB lift HP sensor L CN543/7 Open SC442
(S33) Shorted
S34 Tray set sensor L CN543/10 Open Paper tray
(S34) cannot be
detected.
Shorted Paper tray is
detected
when the
paper tray is
not set.
S35 Tray Bottom Plate H CN571/11 Open SC501
lift Sensor (S5) Shorted

Name
S36 Waste toner full H CN571/14 Open Waste toner
sensor (S36) full is
detected
when it is not
near full.
Shorted Waste toner
full cannot
be detected
when the
waste toner
bottle is
nearly full.
TH Fusing thermopile A CN525/6 Open SC541
1 (TH1) Shorted
TH Pressure roller A CN525/25 Open SC591
2 thermistor (edge: Shorted
front) (TH2)
rear) (TH3)
center) (TH4)
TH Imaging A CN526/4 Open SC497
5 temperature Shorted
sensor (TH5)
SW Right cover L CN559/14 Open “Cover
2 sensor (SW2) closed”
cannot be
detected.
Shorted “Open
Cover”
cannot be
detected.
No. Sensor Name/ Active CN No./ Condition Symptom

Sensor Board Name Pin No.
SN1 Shift roller HP sensor H CN109/2 Open SC724-82
(S37) Shorted
Troubleshooting
SN2 Gathering roller HP H CN109/5 Open SC724-80
SN3 Tray lower limit sensor H CN113/2 Open The paper exit tray is erroneously
(S39) detected as full.
Shorted The paper exit tray is full but it is
not detected.
SN4 Remaining paper H CN113/5 Open SC724-83
SN5 Jogger fence HP H CN110/2 Open SC724-30
SN6 Staple tray paper H CN110/5 Open A paper jam is erroneously
sensor (S42) detected.
Shorted Paper is not detected and
stapling is not executed.
SN7 Paper exit sensor L CN110/8 Open Failed to detect paper jam.
(S43) Shorted Stay Jam (JAM code: 1)
SN8 Exit guide plate HP H CN111/2 Open SC724-81
SN9 Entrance sensor (S45) L CN111/5 Open Late Jam (JAM code: 240)
Shorted Stay Jam (JAM code: 1)
6.14.2 FUSE LOCATION

Fuse Connector (Out) Capacity Voltage Part No. Part Name Replaceable
Name
FU1 CN611-1 (24V) 8A 250V 11071393 51MS(P)-080H No
GF-009
FU2 CN610-1 (24VL) 8A 250V 11071393 51MS(P)-080H No
GF-009
FU3 CN610-2 4A 250V 11071360 SCT4A No
(24VL_LPS)
FU4 CN611-3 (24V_LPS) 4A 250V 11071393 SCT4 No
FU5 CN613-2 (5V) 4A 250V 11071351 SCT4 No
FU102 N/A (Protecting the 10A 250V 11071388 FIH 250V No
voltage converter 10A(EM)8A03
Fuse Connector (Out) Capacity Voltage Part No. Part Name Replaceable
Name
circuit in the PSU
(PCB17))
FU101 N/A (Protecting the 15A 250V 11071241 TCL-15A-N4 Yes
fusing circuit in the
PSU (PCB16))
FU103 CN600-4,5 2A 250V 11071362 SCT2A No
(Anti-condensation
Heater (H1))
The photograph shows an example using the IM C300 series. The fuse position is the same for
the IM C400 series.
Jam Detection
6.15 JAM DETECTION
6.15.1 PAPER JAM HISTORY
Troubleshooting
Plotter (print engine) jam history can be displayed using SP7-507. The
jam history of the 10 latest jams is displayed.
• SP7-507-001 "Plotter Jam: History Latest"
• SP7-507-002 "Plotter Jam: History Latest1"
SP7-507 shows the paper jam history.
• CODE: Indicates the jam code.

• SIZE: Indicates the paper size code.
• TOTAL: Indicates the total counter (SP7-502-001).
• DATE: indicates the date when the jam occurred.
Initial jams at power on are not displayed here.
6.15.2 JAM CODES AND DISPLAY CODES

If a paper jam occurs, the machine displays the location where the jam occurs on the operation
panel.
Jam Detection
Jam Detection
Cause Cause of jam Late Lag Stay Display

code Jam Jam Jam code
001 Registration sensor (S24) B
001 Fusing entrance sensor (S3) C
Troubleshooting
001 Fusing exit sensor (S8) C
001 Paper exit sensor (S7) C
001 Duplex entrance sensor (S1) Z
001 Duplex exit sensor (S2) Z
001 Paper transport sensor 1 (S1) Y1
001 1-Bin Tray Exit Sensor*3 C
001 Initial jam at power on: Entrance sensor (SN9)*4 R
001 Initial jam at power on: Internal Finisher paper exit R
sensor (SN7) *4
001 Stapler*4 S
003 Paper not fed from 1st tray A*1
A1*2
004 Paper not fed from 2nd tray (optional) Y1
005 Paper not fed from 3rd tray (optional) Y2
006 Paper not fed from 4th tray (optional) Y3
008 Registration sensor (S32) (When paper is fed A
from bypass tray)
009 Registration sensor (S32) (When printing in Z
duplex mode)
010 Cannot make the paper slack for skew adjustment Z
on the registration roller (when printing in duplex
mode).
from 1st tray)
from optional paper feed units)
015 Cannot make the paper slack for skew adjustment Z
on the registration roller (when paper is fed from
bypass tray).
016 Cannot make the paper slack for skew adjustment A
Jam Detection

optional paper feed units).
017 Cannot make the paper slack for skew adjustment A
1st tray).
018 Fusing entrance sensor (S3) B
019 Fusing exit sensor (S8) C
050 Registration sensor (S32) (When printing in B
duplex mode)
055 Registration sensor (S32) (When paper is fed B
from bypass tray)
from optional paper feed units)
from 1st tray)
230 The report notifying completion of the paper R
delivery to the finisher is missing.*4
240 Internal finisher entrance sensor (S45)*4 R
241 Internal finisher entrance sensor (S45) *4 R
242 Internal finisher paper exit jam*4 R
243 Internal finisher jogger motor (M20) jam*4 R
244 Internal finisher shift roller motor (M19) jam*4 R
245 Internal finisher gathering roller motor (M18) jam*4 R
246 Internal finisher exit guide plate motor (M21) jam*4 R
247 Internal finisher tray lift motor (M22) jam*4 R
Jam Detection

248 Internal finisher stapler motor (M23) jam*4 S
249 Internal finisher stopper solenoid (SOL3) jam*4 R
Troubleshooting
250 Main Machine Data Corrupt *4 R
*1 IM C300 series only
*3 Basic model (IM C300/C300F/C400F) only
*4 Finisher model (IM C400SRF) only
Cause Cause of jam Late Lag Stay Indication on the

code Jam Jam Jam operation panel
001 Initial jam at power on P
004 Registration sensor P
(S24)
013 Original feed sensor P
(S25)
054 Registration sensor P
(S24)
063 Original feed sensor P
(S25)
097 Paper jam: timing error P
098 Paper jam: insufficient P
interval
099 Double-feed detected. P
100 ADF motor (M8) P
Jam Detection
Sensor Layout
Jam Detection
Troubleshooting
Jam Detection
Callout Sensor Callout Sensor

[A] 1-Bin Tray Paper Remaining Sensor [K] Paper end sensor (bypass) (S6)
[B] 1-Bin Tray Exit Sensor [L] Paper transport sensor 1 (S1)
[C] Paper exit sensor (S7) [M] Paper transport sensor 2 (S1)
[D] Fusing exit sensor (S8) [N] Paper end sensor (S2)
[E] Fusing entrance sensor (S3) [O] Remaining paper sensor (S3)
[F] Registration sensor (S32) [P] Paper transport sensor 3 (S1)
[G] Paper feed sensor (S31) [Q] Tray paper end sensor (main unit) (S30)
[H] Tray lift sensor (S35) [R] Tray lower limit sensor
[I] Duplex entrance sensor (S1) [S] Entrance sensor (S45)
[J] Duplex exit sensor (S2) [T] Remaining paper sensor (S40)
Jam Detection
Paper Size Code

Size Code Paper Size Size Code Paper Size
05 A4 LEF 141 B4 SEF
Troubleshooting
06 A5 LEF 142 B5 SEF
14 B5 LEF 160 DLT SEF
38 LT LEF 164 LG SEF
44 HLT LEF 166 LT SEF
133 A4 SEF 172 HLT SEF
134 A5 SEF 255 Others
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
Machine Overview
7. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
7.1 MACHINE OVERVIEW
Descriptions
Detailed
7.1.1 OVERVIEW
IM C300 series
Machine Overview
IM C400F
Machine Overview
IM C400SRF
Descriptions
Detailed
Callout Item Callout Item

[A] ADF [I] Paper feed tray
[B] Scanner unit [J] Waste toner bottle
[C] Paper exit unit [K] ITB unit
[D] Fusing unit [L] PCDU
[E] Duplex unit [M] Toner bottle
[F] Paper transfer roller [N] Laser unit
[G] Registration roller [O] Internal finisher
[H] Bypass feed tray - -
Machine Overview
7.1.2 PAPER PATH

IM C300 series
Machine Overview
IM C400F
Descriptions
Detailed
Machine Overview
IM C400SRF

[A] ADF transport path [E] Optional paper feed unit path (1st)
[B] 1-Bin tray path*1 [F] Optional paper feed unit path (2nd)
[C] Duplex paper transport path [G] Standard paper tray path
[D] Bypass paper feed path [H] Optional paper feed unit path (3rd)
*1 IM C 300 series/C400F are optional. IM C400SRF is not supported.
Machine Overview
7.1.3 DRIVE LAYOUT

IM C300 series
Descriptions
Detailed
IM C400F
Machine Overview
IM C400SRF

[A] Scanner Motor (M7) [I] Paper Feed Clutch (CL9)
[B] Paper Exit Clutch (CL3) [J] Bypass Tray Lift Clutch (CL1)
[C] Reverse Clutch (CL2) [K] Paper Transport Motor (M12)
[D] Development Clutch(K) (CL5) [L] Bypass Feed Clutch (CL7)
[E] Drum Motor (M11) [M] Duplex Clutch (CL6)
[F] Drum Motor (CMY) (M10) [N] Registration Clutch (CL8)
[G] Development Motor (CMY) (M9) [O] Fusing Motor (M13)
[H] Tray Lift Motor (M15) [P] Vertical Transport Clutch (CL10) *1
*1
IM C400 series only
Machine Overview
7.1.4 COMPONENT LAYOUT

The descriptions of the IM C400 series are accompanied by illustrations of the IM C400SRF.
Descriptions
Scanner Unit / Laser Unit / Others
Detailed
IM C300 series
Machine Overview
IM C400 series

1 Scanner Lamp 8 Scanner Motor (M7)
2 SBU (PCB11) 9 Polygon Mirror Motor (M/Y) (M6)
3 Scanner HP Sensor (S20) 10 Imaging Temperature Sensor (TH5)
4 Polygon Mirror Motor (K/C) (M5) 11 Temperature/humidity Sensor (S18)
5 LD Drive Board (K/C) (PCB8) 12 Interlock Switch
6 ADF Position Sensor (S19) 13 Operation Panel
7 LD Drive Board (M/Y) (PCB9) 14 Main Power Switch (SW1)
Machine Overview
Internal Finisher
Descriptions
Detailed
1 Main Board (PCB25) 5 Stopper Solenoid (SOL3)
2 Tray Lift Motor (M22) 6 Exit Guide Plate Motor (M21)
3 Tray Lower Limit Sensor (S39) 7 Interlock Switch (SW3)
4 Remaining paper sensor (S40) - -

1 Gathering Roller HP Sensor (S38) 5 Paper Exit Sensor (S43)
2 Gathering Roller Motor (M18) 6 Entrance Sensor (S45)
3 Jogger Motor (M20) 7 Staple Tray Paper Sensor (S42)
4 Jogger Fence HP Sensor (S41) - -
Machine Overview
Paper Feed
IM C300 series

1 Tray Lift Motor (M15) 8 Registration Sensor (S32)
2 Paper Feed Clutch (CL9) 9 Bypass Paper Width Sensor (S5)
3 Registration Clutch (CL8) 10 Paper Feed Sensor (S31)
4 Bypass Feed Clutch (CL7) 11 Bypass Tray Lift Sensor (S4)
5 Bypass Tray Lift Clutch (CL1) 12 Tray Paper End Sensor (Main Unit) (S30)
6 Tray Lift Sensor (S35) 13 Tray Set Sensor (S34)
7 Paper End Sensor (Bypass) (S6)
Machine Overview
IM C400 series
Descriptions
Detailed
1 Tray Lift Motor (M15) 8 Registration Sensor (S32)
2 Paper Feed Clutch (CL9) 9 Bypass Paper Width Sensor (S5)
3 Registration Clutch (CL8) 10 Paper Feed Sensor (S31)
4 Bypass Feed Clutch (CL7) 11 Bypass Tray Lift Sensor (S4)
5 Bypass Tray Lift Clutch (CL1) 12 Tray Paper End Sensor (Main Unit) (S30)
6 Tray Lift Sensor (S35) 13 Tray Set Sensor (S34)
7 Paper End Sensor (Bypass) (S6) 14 Vertical Transport Clutch (CL10)*1
Machine Overview
Paper Exit / Duplex / Waste Toner

IM C300 series
IM C400 series

1 Reverse Clutch (CL2) 6 Paper Exit Sensor (S7)
2 Paper Exit Clutch (CL3) 7 Duplex Exit Sensor (S2)
3 Duplex Entrance Sensor (S1) 8 Waste Toner Full Sensor (S36)
4 Right Cover Sensor (SW2) 9 Junction Gate Solenoid (SOL1)
5 Duplex Clutch (CL6) 10 Waste Toner Bottle Set Sensor (S26)
Machine Overview
Fusing
IM C300 series
Descriptions
Detailed
IM C400 series
Machine Overview

1 Fusing Thermostat 6 Pressure Roller Thermistor (Edge:
front) (TH2)
2 Fusing Heater 7 Fusing Exit Sensor (S8)
3 Fusing Thermistor (Non-contact 8 Fusing Entrance Sensor (S3)
Sensor) (S10)
4 Pressure Roller Thermistor (Edge: 9 Fusing Thermopile (TH1)
rear) (TH3)
5 Pressure Roller Thermistor (Edge: - -
center) (TH4)
Machine Overview
Development Unit / ITB/ Paper Transfer

IM C300 series
Descriptions
Detailed
IM C400 series
Machine Overview

1 toner bottle sensor board (PCB7) 9 ITB lift HP sensor (S33)
2 toner supply motor (K) (M1) 10 ITB lift motor (M14)
3 toner end sensor (C) (S11) 11 ID sensor (S27-S29)
4 toner supply motor (C) (M2) 12 ID sensor shutter solenoid (SOL2)
5 toner end sensor (M) (S12) 13 TD sensor (Y) (S17)
6 toner supply motor (M) (M3) 14 TD sensor (M) (S16)
7 toner end sensor (Y) (S13) 15 TD sensor (C) (S15)
8 toner supply motor (Y) (M4) 16 TD sensor (K) (S14)
Machine Overview
Drive Unit
IM C300 series
Descriptions
Detailed
IM C400 series

1 Fusing Motor (M13) 4 Drum Motor (CMY) (M10)
2 Paper Transport Motor (M12) 5 Drum Motor (M11)
3 Development Motor (CMY) (M9) 6 Development Clutch(K) (CL5)
Machine Overview
Electrical Parts
IM C300 series
IM C400 series
Machine Overview
Descriptions
1 Fusing Unit Cooling Fan (FAN1) 8 PSU Exhaust Fan (FAN4)
Detailed
2 High-Voltage Power Supply 9 PSU AC (PCB17)
(Development) (PCB22)
3 LD Unit Cooling Fan (FAN2) 10 High-Voltage Power Supply
(Transfer) (PCB23)
4 PCDU Cooling Fan (FAN3) 11 PSU DC (PCB16)
5 Controller Board (PCB24) 12 BiCU (PCB1)
6 HDD 13 Paper Exit Exhaust Fan (FAN5)*1
7 AC Detection Board (PCB18) - -
*1 IM C400SRF only
ADF Unit
No. Name No. Name

1 Original Feed Clutch (CL4) 5 ADF Relay Board (PCB13)
2 Original Feed Sensor (S25) 6 ADF Motor (M8)
3 Registration Sensor (S24) 7 ADF Top Cover Sensor (S23)
4 CIS (S21) 8 Original Set Sensor (S22)
ADF Unit
7.2 ADF UNIT
7.2.1 OVERVIEW
No. Name No. Name

1 Original tray 13 Registration sensor (S24)
2 ADF top cover sensor (S23) 14 Scanning guide plate (front side)
3 Original set sensor (S22) 15 Pre-scanning roller (rear side)
4 Pick-up roller 16 Scanning guide plate (rear side)
5 Original set sensor actuator 17 CIS (S21)
6 Stopper 18 ADF exit roller
7 Friction pad 19 Platen
8 Feed roller 20 Original exit tray
9 Original feed sensor actuator 21 ADF motor (M8)
10 Original feed sensor (S25) 22 Double-feed sensor (URRB)*1 (receiver) (PCB15)
11 ADF entrance roller 23 Double-feed sensor (MFTB)*1 (emitter) (PCB14)
12 Pre-scanning roller (front side) - -

*1 Option
ADF Unit
Descriptions
Detailed
No. Name No. Name
1 Original feed clutch (CL4) 5 ADF relay board (PCB13)
2 Original feed sensor (S25) 6 ADF motor (M8)
3 Registration sensor (S24) 7 ADF top cover sensor (S23)
4 CIS (S21) 8 Original set sensor (S22)
• The ADF of this machine does not have an automatic size detection function because
it does not have sensors to detect the length and width of the original.
ADF Unit
7.2.2 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT DRIVE

The ADF motor (M8) [A] drives all ADF rollers via gears.
The original feed clutch (CL4) [B] controls the mechanism for picking up the original.
7.2.3 ORIGINAL SET DETECTION

When an original [A] is placed on the original tray correctly, the original set sensor actuator [B] is
pushed up and the original set sensor (S22) [C] turns off (not interrupted). The machine judges
this state as the placement of an original.
The stopper [D] prevents the user from placing originals too far into the feeder.
ADF Unit
7.2.4 ORIGINAL TRANSPORT PATH

When [Start] is pressed, the original feed clutch (CL4) is turned ON. Then the feed roller [A]
rotates to drop the pick-up roller [B] onto the top original of the stack. This moves the stopper
Descriptions
Detailed
[E] out of the way, and the original can be fed from the feed roller [A] to the ADF entrance roller
[C].
The friction pad [D] ensures that only one sheet of the original enters the feeder at a time.
When the original is being fed, the stopper [E] becomes unrestricted so as not to impose a load
on the feeding.
When the original reaches the pre-scanning (front side) roller [B] via the ADF entrance roller [A],
the original moves the feed sensor actuator [C] and the original feed sensor (S25) [D] is turned
ON. Then the original feed clutch (CL4) [E] is turned OFF to stop the feed roller [F] and the
pick-up roller [G], to prevent the next original from being picked up.
ADF Unit
The original is fed by the ADF entrance roller [A] and the pre-scanning (front side) roller [B],
scanned on the exposure glass under the scanning guide plate (front side) [C], and then
delivered by the pre-scanning (rear side) roller [D].
The feeding of the original is detected by registration sensor (S24) [E]. If an error occurs, it is
reported as a paper jam.
The original is fed by the pre-scanning (rear side) roller [D], scanned by the CIS (S21) [F] on the
scanning guide plate (rear side) [G], and then fed out by the exit roller [H].
When the original passes through the ADF entrance roller [A], the original feed sensor (S25) [B]
is detected OFF. If the next original is set, the original set sensor (S22) [F] detects ON and the
original feed clutch (CL4) [C] is turned ON. Then, the feed roller [D] and pick-up roller [E] rotate
to pick up the next original.
ADF Unit
Descriptions
Detailed
7.2.5 DOUBLE-FEED DETECTION (OPTIONAL)
A pair of ultrasound sensors are mounted in the ADF, one below the original feed path (emitter
[A]) and the other above the path (receiver [B]).
• When the original passes between the sensors, an ultra-sound wave from the emitter
sensor below passes through the paper to the receiver above.
• The receiver converts the signal generated by the vibration of the signal against the paper
to an electrical pulse and checks its level.
• If a double feed occurs, the space between the sheets will generate a lower signal. When
the receiver detects this lower signal (lower than that of a single sheet) it causes the
machine to issue Jam Code J099 (double-feed detected) and then original feed stops.
ADF Unit
This double feed detection will not function with originals that have:
• Folds, wrinkles, tears
• Holes
• Imperfectly fused images
• Perforations
• Taped connections
• Taped surfaces
Feeding such originals could cause false detection of double-feeds.
The service technician can also switch double-feed detection OFF/ON with SP6-040-001 (Page
Keeper: Mount Select, Default 0: Off).
Do not change the settings of SP6-040-005 (Page Keeper: Clear Select).
Scanner Unit
7.3 SCANNER UNIT
7.3.1 OVERVIEW
Descriptions
Detailed
[A] Exposure Glass (for ADF) [E] ADF Position Sensor (S19)
[B] Exposure Glass (for platen mode) [F] Scanner Carriage Drive Belt
[C] Scanner HP Sensor (S20) [G] Scanner Motor (M7)
[D] Scanner Carriage - -
• Automatic paper size detection is not available because this model has no APS
(sensor that detects original’s paper size) in the scanner.
7.3.2 LIGHT SOURCE AND EXPOSURE

This model uses an LED for the light source. Light from the LED array board (LEDB) [A] goes to
the original via the light guiding panel [B] and the reflector [C]. Then from the original, the light
follows the light path to the CCD [J].
The LED lamps are disposed at both ends so that sufficient light reaches the left and right ends
of the document.
The light reflected from the original travels as follows:
LED exposure -> 1st mirror [D] -> 2nd mirror [E] -> 3rd mirror [F] -> 4th mirror [G] -> 5th mirror [H]
-> Lens [I] -> CCD [J]
Scanner Unit

[A] LED array board (LEDB) [G] 4th mirror
[B] Light guiding panel [H] 5th mirror
[C] Reflectors [I] Lens
[D] 1st mirror [J] CCD
[E] 2nd mirror [K] Light Path
[F] 3rd mirror - -
Scanner Unit
7.3.3 SCANNER CARRIAGE DRIVE

The scanner motor (M7) [B] drives the drive belt [D] in order to move the scanner carriage [A]
along the guide rod [C].
Descriptions
Detailed
Scanning starts with the scanner carriage [A] at the scanner HP sensor (S20) [E]. After
scanning, the scanner carriage returns to the scanner HP sensor (S20) . The actuator for the
scanner HP sensor (S20) is on the underside of the carriage.
When you wish to move the carriage, use the drive belt. Do not pull the carriage directly.
Callout Callout Item

[A] Scanner Carriage [D] Scanner Drive Belt
[B] Scanner Motor (M7) [E] Scanner HP Sensor (S20)
[C] Guide Rod - -
Scanner Unit
7.3.4 IMPROVED TOLERANCE TO BLACK LINES WHEN PAPER

PASSES THROUGH ADF
This model uses a conventional mechanism in which paper comes in contact with the exposure
glass during feeding. This is useful for dealing with adhesion of free dirt particles (paper scraps,
etc.). (Self-cleaning mechanism using paper)
On the other hand, sticky dirt adhering to the document sticks to the exposure glass, and may
cause black lines in scanned images.
ADF cross-section diagram
[A]: Exposure glass

[B]: Reading position
[C]: Original feed path
Scanner Unit
7.3.5 SCANNING POSITION CORRECTION

By changing SP4-020-001 (Dust Check Dust Detect:On/Off), when dirt is detected at the
scanning position, the scanning position may be changed to avoid the dirt.
Descriptions
Detailed
(If it cannot be avoided, an alert is displayed on the operation panel advising the user to perform
target glass cleaning).
Likewise, the scanning position correction can be switched on/off for the back of the original by
SP4-020-011 (Dust Detect Level: Rear).
Image diagram
[A]: Scanning position

[B]: Sheet-through exposure glass
[C]: Dirt
• Dirt is detected when a document passes through, so the alert will not disappear until
the scanning of the next document begins, even after the sheet-through exposure
glass cleaning is performed.
• If dirt is detected not on the sheet-through exposure glass but on the background
guide plate, the alert will not disappear even if the glass is wiped.
• The time required for the first copy is slightly (almost imperceptibly) longer.
• The detection threshold value can be changed using SP4-020-002 (Dust Check Dust
Detect:Lvl). Likewise, the detection level on the back of the original can be changed
with SP4-020-012 (Correction Level: Rear). (The larger the value is, the smaller the
dirt particles that can be detected become.)
• It is prohibited to change the setting of SP4-020-003 (Dust Check Lvl Dust Reject:Lvl).
Internal Finisher
7.4 INTERNAL FINISHER
7.4.1 OVERVIEW
Item Specifications
Productivity 40cpm
Paper size LT to A6 (SEF)
Maximum stack on output tray 250 sheets(80 g/m2)
Number of stapling positions 1 position
Punch N/A
Staple capacity (80 g/m2, 30 sheets: 8 1/2 ×14SEF, 81/2 × 13SEF, 81/2 × 11SEF
20 lb. Bond)
Stack capacity after stapling • 2 sheets: 33 sets
(80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond) • 30 sheets: 7 sets
Power requirements Power is supplied from the main unit.
7.4.2 COMPONENT LAYOUT
No. Parts Name No. Parts Name

1 Output Tray 8 Stapler
2 Paper Exit Roller 9 Staple Tray Paper Sensor (S42)
3 Gathering Roller 10 Reverse Roller
4 Paper Trailing Edge Guide 11 Jogger Fence
5 Shift Roller 12 Paper Exit Sensor (S43)
6 Entrance Sensor (S45) 13 Paper Sensor Arm
7 Entrance Roller 14 Main board (PCB25)
No. Parts Name

1 Tray Lift Motor (M22)
2 Gathering Roller Motor (M18)
3 Exit Guide Plate Motor (M21)
4 Shift Roller Motor (M19)
5 Paper Transport Motor (M16)
6 Jogger Motor (M20)
7 Paper Exit Motor (M17)
Internal Finisher
7.4.3 PAPER FEED

Paper transport motor (M16) [A] drives the entrance roller [B] and shift roller [C].
• Paper exit motor (M17) [D] drives the paper exit roller [E].
Descriptions
• When the entrance sensor (S45) [F] detects the leading edge of the paper, the exit guide
Detailed
plate unit [G] is lowered from its home position by the exit guide plate motor (M21) [H].
• Paper exit roller [E] feeds the paper to the output tray.
This diagram shows paper feed without stapling.
Internal Finisher
The finisher separates each stack by shifting alternately to the left and right.
• Shift roller motor (M19) [A] moves the shift roller [B] from side to side.
• Shift roller HP sensor (S37) [C] detects whether or not the shift roller [B] is at the home
position again after jogging.
Internal Finisher
The exit guide plate motor (M21) [A] drops the gathering roller onto the paper.
• The paper exit motor (M17) [B] turns the roller in reverse.
• When the staple tray paper sensor (S42) [D] detects the paper, the motors stop feeding.
([C] is the paper transport motor (M16))
Descriptions
This diagram shows how the machine reverse-feeds the sheet of paper into the stapler.
Detailed
• The next sheet is fed into the finisher, then reversed into the stapler tray.
• Jogger motor (M20) [A] moves the jogger fence [B].

• Jogger fence HP sensor (S41) [C] detects whether or not the jogger fence [B] is at the
home position again after jogging.
Internal Finisher
• Stapler [D] is driven by the stapler motor (M23) in stapler.
• After stapling, the exit guide plate roller driven by the exit guide plate motor (M21) [A] drops
onto the top of the stack.
• The paper exit roller driven by the paper exit motor (M17) [B] feeds out the stack.
Internal Finisher
stopper solenoid (SOL3)[A] moves the actuator [B] until it touches the top of the stack.
Descriptions
Detailed
• When the remaining paper sensor (SN40) [A] detects the actuator, the tray lift motor (M22)
[C] lowers the end of the tray nearest the exit. This makes room for more paper on the tray
[B].
• If the tray lower limit sensor (S39) [D] is activated, the tray cannot be lowered any more.
Internal Finisher
7.4.4 FINISHER FREE RUN

You can make a finisher free run with the following SPs. No paper is required when executing
these SPs.
• 6-137-001: Free Run 1 (Shift mode)
• 6-137-002: Free Run 2 (Staple mode)
• 6-137-003: Free Run 3 (Packing mode: Output tray descends to the lowest position.)
• 6-137-004: Free Run 4 (Not assigned)
You can also make a free run with dip switches.
1 2 3 4 Mode
OFF OFF OFF OFF Normal mode
ON OFF OFF OFF Shift mode
OFF ON OFF OFF Staple mode
OFF OFF ON OFF Packing mode: Output tray descends to the lowest position
7.4.5 JOGGER FENCE FINE ADJUSTMENT

You can adjust the jogging position of the jogger fence with the following SPs (from -1.0 mm to
1.0 mm).
• A4: 6-132-003
• B5: 6-132-005
• Legal: 6-132-008
• Letter: 6-132-009
• Other: 6-132-012
Laser Unit
7.5 LASER UNIT
7.5.1 OVERVIEW
Descriptions
Detailed
This machine has two LD units. One is for yellow and magenta. Another is for cyan and black.
Each LD unit produces laser beams for two colors.

[A] Polygon Motor (M5,M6) [F] Mirror 3
[B] Lens (L1) [G] Lens (L2)
[C] LD Drive Board (PCB8)(PCB9) [H] Shield Glass
[D] Mirror 2 [I] Lens (L2)
[E] Mirror 1 - -
Laser Unit
7.5.2 LASER SYNCHRONIZING SYSTEM

The LD unit has a synchronization detector at the left side of each unit (for the optical paths for
the K and M drums only). A laser beam coming from the LD Board [A] travels to the collimating
lens [B] polygon motor (M5,M6) [C] lens (L1) [D] Mirror 1 [E] Mirror 2 Mirror
3 Drum.
When the beam is at the beginning of the line, the synchronization mirror [F] reflects it to the
synchronization lens. The synchronization detector [H] mounted on LD drive board
(PCB8)(PCB9) [I] detects the beam reflected.

[A] LD Board [F] Synchronization Mirror
[B] Collimating Lens [G] Synchronization Lens
[C] Polygon Motor (M5,M6) [H] Synchronization Detector
[D] Lens (L1) [I] LD Drive Board (PCB8)(PCB9)
[E] Mirror 1 - -
Laser Unit
7.5.3 LINE SCANNING MECHANISM

The image read by the scanner is written on the OPC drum [E] with the laser beams. The
direction of main scanning is from the front to the rear of the machine. The polygon motor
Descriptions
Detailed
(M5,M6) [A] rotates counterclockwise.

[A] Polygon Motor (M5,M6) (With Polygon Mirror) [D] Lens (L1)
[B] Collimating Lens [E] OPC Drum
[C] LD Drive Board (PCB8)(PCB9) - -
Laser Unit
7.5.4 IMAGE SKEW ADJUSTMENT

In this machine, you can adjust the image skew correction manually. When turning the adjuster
[A] clockwise or counterclockwise, the front of the lens moves to the left or right, and this adjusts
the image skew.

[A] Adjuster [C] OPC Drum
[B] Lens (L2) - -
7.5.5 DUST SHIELD GLASS

The laser unit is located between the upper side of toner bottle and PCDU. The LD unit emits a
laser beam to above the OPC drum. This mechanism keeps the shield glass free from toner
dropping and thus requires no cleaning tool.
7.5.6 LD SAFETY SWITCH

The +24VL_LPS goes through the interlock switch and is converted the +5VS_LPS on the BiCU
(PCB1).
The +5VS_LPS are supplied to the two LD boards respectively. A safety switch turns OFF when
the front cover or the right door is opened. As a result, the power supply (+24VL_LPS) to the
BiCU (PCB1) is cut off. This system prevents unexpected laser emission, ensures user safety
and technician safety.
Laser Unit
Descriptions
Detailed
PCDU
7.6 PCDU
7.6.1 OVERVIEW

[A] OPC Drum [E] Cleaning Blade
[B] Waste Toner Transport Coil [F] Charge Roller
[C] Lubricant Brush Roller [G] Charge Roller Cleaning Roller
[D] Lubricant - -

[H] Doctor Blade [K] Transport Coil (Lower)
[I] Transport Coil (Upper) [L] TD sensor (S14) (S15) (S16) (S17)
[J] Development Roller [M] Toner Catching Mylar
The OPC drum section and the development section are joined by plates at the front and rear of
the unit.
PCDU
7.6.2 OPC DRUM
Descriptions
Detailed
[A] Waste Toner Transport Coil [F] Charge Roller Cleaning Roller
[B] Lubricant Brush roller [G] OPC Drum
[C] Lubricant [H] Image Transfer Belt (ITB)
[D] Drum Cleaning Blade (Counter [I] Image Transfer Roller (1st Transfer
Rotation) Roller)
[E] Charge Roller - -
A charge roller [E] charges the surface of the OPC drum [G] and drives the charge roller
cleaning roller [F].
This machine uses an organic photo conductor drum (OPC drum) [G] for image
creation.
The laser from the laser unit forms an electrostatic latent image on the OPC drum (exposure),
and the toner supplied from the developing unit adheres to the OPC drum (development). The
toner on the OPC drum is transferred to the image transfer belt [H].
The drum cleaning blade [D] is mounted in contact with the OPC drum [G] in a direction
opposite to the drum rotation, and scrapes off the toner.
OPC drum cleaning and lubricant application are done at the same time.
The lubricant is applied with the lubricant brush roller [B].
The lubricant brush roller [B] rotates in the opposite direction to the OPC drum [G].
Toner and foreign objects are removed from the edges of the blade by rotating the drum
counterclockwise when a copy job is done.
The waste toner collected by the drum cleaning blade [D] is transported to the front of the
machine by the waste toner transport coil [A] and deposited in the waste toner bottle.
PCDU
After a job (not between consecutive jobs), the OPC drum is neutralized using the laser
of the Laser Unit.
Differences between K and CMY
Left: K
Right: CMY
The following points are the differences between K and CMY.
K CMY
Lubricant [B] quantity K > CMY
Lubricant application method Arm [A] Pressure spring [C]
Silencer [D] Available Available
The silencer [D] is an internal layer of the OPC drum, added to reduce sound during rotation.
7.6.3 DEVELOPMENT UNIT

• Developer Agitation Mechanism
The developer is agitated by the upper [A] and lower [B] transport coils.
Toner and developer are regulated by the doctor blade [F], and applied to the development
roller [D].
• Toner Density Detection Mechanism
TD sensors (S14-S17) [C] detect the toner density. Toner is supplied when the toner
density is not sufficient.
• Toner Density Control
The ID sensors (S27-S29) at the lower right of the ITB detect the amount of light reflected
from the ITB and detects the toner density. Toner is supplied based on the information
which the ID sensors (S27-S29) detect.
PCDU
Descriptions
Detailed
[A] Transport Coil (Upper) [D] Development Roller (Sleeve Architecture)
[B] Transport Coil (Lower) [E] OPC Drum
[C] TD Sensor (S14-S17) [F] Doctor Blade

[A] Transport Coil (Upper) [C] TD sensor (S14-S17)
[B] Transport Coil (Lower) - -
PCDU
7.6.4 OPC DRUM/DEVELOPMENT DRIVE

The drum motor (M11) [K] drives the drum (K). The development clutch(K) (CL5) [L] drives the
Development Unit for K.
The drum motor (CMY) (M10) [J] drives the other three drums and the development motor
(CMY) (M9) [I] drives the Development Units for C/M/Y.
Do not disassemble the three drive gears ([C], [E], and [G]) in the field. These are precisely
assembled in the factory.

[A] Drum Drive Gear (K) [G] Drum Drive Gear (Y)
[B] Development Drive Gear (K) [H] Development Drive Gear (Y)
[C] Drum Drive Gear (C) [I] Development Motor (CMY) (M9)
[D] Development Drive Gear (C) [J] Drum Motor (CMY) (M10)
[E] Drum Drive Gear (M) [K] Drum Motor (M11)
[F] Development Drive Gear (M) [L] Development Clutch(K) (CL5)
Toner Supply Section
7.7 TONER SUPPLY SECTION
7.7.1 OVERVIEW
Descriptions
Detailed
[A] ID Chip (K) (PCB3) [E] Transport Coil
[B] Toner Bottle Sensor Board (PCB7) [F] Agitator
[C] Toner Bottle [G] Toner End Sensor (Y) (S13)
[D] Toner Supply Motor (Y) (M4) [H] Shutter
7.7.2 TONER SUPPLY AND TRANSPORT MECHANISM

Rotating the toner bottle [B] transports the toner towards the rear of the machine. Each toner
bottle has an ID chip (PCB3-PCB6) that stores information for each toner bottle. The toner from
the toner bottles goes into the hopper and is agitated by the agitator [E].
Then, rotating the transport coil [D] transports the toner to the development unit. Only color
hoppers have the toner end sensor (S11-S13) [A]. The ID chip (K) (PCB3) manages the
remaining amount of black toner.

[A] Toner End Sensor (S11-S13) (Only for CMY) [D] Transport Coil
[B] Toner Bottle [E] Agitator
[C] Toner Supply Motor (M1-M4)
7.7.3 TONER BOTTLE SET SENSOR MECHANISM

Each toner bottle [C] has an ID chip (PCB3-PCB6) [B]. When the toner bottle [C] comes in
contact with the toner bottle sensor board (PCB7) [A], the machine detects that the toner bottle
Descriptions
Detailed
is set.

[A] Toner Bottle Sensor Board (PCB7) [C] Toner Bottle
[B] ID Chip (PCB3-PCB6) (One for Each Color)
7.7.4 TONER NEAR END/END DETECTION

The following table shows the conditions to detect when the toner has run out (Toner End) or
almost run out (Toner Near End) and the operations following the detection.
Status Operation panel Detection conditions
message
Toner Near End Operation panel Toner Near End is detected by the following 2
SP3-101-001 to banner display: systems:
004="1" <Toner Cartridge is (1) Toner Near End detection by Toner End sensor
empty. (S11-S13). (Definite Toner Near End)
Printing will be (2) Toner Near End detection by referring to pixel
suspended soon. count and total counts by toner supply motor
Replace the (M1-M4) (Estimated Toner Near End)
cartridge.> The Toner Near End detection system is determined
according to the Toner Near End Detection System
(SP3-100-002) setting.
If SP3-100-002 is set to "0": Both detection systems
are applied.
If SP3-100-002 is set to "1": Only (1) is applied.
Status Operation panel Detection conditions

message
Toner End Operation panel Toner End is detected if one of the following
SP3-101-001 to pop-up display (alert conditions is met:
004="0" screen): (1) Toner End detection by Toner End sensor
<Toner has been (S11-S13).
depleted. (2) Toner End detection by Vt output.
Replace Toner
Cartridge.>
Estimated Toner Near End (Toner Near End detection by referring to pixel
count and total counts by toner supply motor (M1-M4)):
1. The toner residual amount calculated by the toner supply motor (M1-M4) drive period
(SP3-102-001 to 004) and the toner residual amount calculated by pixel count
(SP3-102-011 to 014) are compared. Then the one with the smaller amount counts as the
toner residual amount.
2. If the toner residual amount is less than the Near End Threshold Value (SP3-110-001 to
004), Toner Near End is detected.
However, Toner Near End is not detected if:
• Toner Near End Threshold Value (SP3-110-001 to 004) is "0".
• Process control or other adjustment is ongoing.
Definite Toner Near End (Toner Near End detection by Toner End sensor (S11-S13)):
Toner Near End detection by the Toner End sensor (S11-S13) is done with colors other than
black.
1. The toner residual amount calculated by the toner supply motor (M1-M4) drive period
(SP3-102-001 to 004) and the toner residual amount calculated by pixel count
(SP3-102-011 to 014) are compared. Then the one with the smaller amount counts as the
toner residual amount.
2. Whether or not to execute Toner Near End by the Toner End sensor (S11-S13) is
determined according to the following criteria:
Toner replenishment amount (SP3-102-021 to 024) is not Toner End Sensor (S11-S13) is
below the threshold (50%) to start Toner End Sensor not used to detect Toner Near
(S11-S13) End.
Toner replenishment amount (SP3-102-021 to 024) is Toner End Sensor (S11-S13) is
below the threshold (50%) to start Toner End Sensor used to detect Toner Near End.
(S11-S13) (Go to Step 3.)
3. If Toner End Counter (SP3-121-001 to 004) exceeds threshold (2 times) to detect Toner
Near End, Toner Near End is detected.
Toner End is detected if one of the following conditions is met:

(1) Toner End detection by Toner End sensor (S11-S13).
(2) Toner End detection by Vt output.
Descriptions
Detailed
Toner End detection by Toner End sensor (S11-S13):
Toner Near End detection by the Toner End sensor (S11-S13) is done with colors other than
black.
1. Check that the toner residual amount (SP3-101-001 to 004) is "1".
2. In Step 1, if the Toner End Counter (SP3-121-001 to 004) exceeds the threshold to detect
Toner End by the Toner Sensor (SP3-130-001 to 004), Toner Near End is detected.
Toner End Detection by Vt Output of Other than That of Black
1. Calculate the difference (delta Vt) between the TD sensor current voltage (Vt)
(SP3-210-002 to 004) and its target figure (Vtref) (SP3-230-002 to 004).
2. If delta Vt is higher than the delta Vt threshold value (SP3-131-001), the value is added to
sigma-delta Vt (SP3-132-002 to 004).
If the condition is not met even once, the added values (SP3-132-002 to 004) are cleared.
3. If sigma-delta Vt (SP3-132-002 to 004) exceeds the total delta Vt threshold (SP3-131-002),
Toner End is detected.
Toner End Detection by Vt Output of Black
1. In the case of high toner density, check that the toner density (SP3-200-001) is not below
the toner density threshold (SP-3-131-041).
In the case of low toner density, check that the toner density (SP3-200-001) is not above
the toner density threshold (SP-3-131-041).
2. In the Step 1 status, calculate the difference (delta Vt) between the TD sensor current
voltage (Vt) (SP3-210-001) and its target figure (Vtref) (SP3-230-001).
3. If delta Vt is not below the delta Vt threshold for high/low toner density (SP3-131-021 / 031),
that value is added as sigma-delta Vt (SP3-132-001).
If delta Vt goes below the delta Vt threshold for high/low toner density (SP3-131-021 / 031),
the added values (SP3-132-001) are cleared.
4. If sigma-delta Vt (SP3-132-001) exceeds the sigma-delta Vt threshold for high/low toner
density (SP3-131-022 / 032), Estimated Toner End is notified.
5. After this, Toner End detection is performed according to the following flowchart:
7.7.5 TONER SUPPLY UNIT

The agitator [C] (in the lower image) transports the toner supplied into the sub-hopper by raising
it to the toner transport path [D] (in the lower image). The transport path is level to make the
machine’s height lower.
[A] Supply Housing

[B] Toner Transport Path
[C] Shutter
[D] Sub-hopper
Descriptions
Detailed
[A] Toner Bottle Cap
[B] Sub-hopper
[C] Agitator
[D] Toner Transport Path
7.7.6 ID CHIP (PCB3-PCB6)

Contact type ID chip (PCB3-PCB6) [B] is correctly mounted by means of the tapered boss for
chip positioning [C] and the positioning hole [A]. The information on the toner bottle can be read
when the bottle is properly installed.
[A] Positioning Hole

[B] ID Chip (PCB3-PCB6)
[C] Tapered Boss (for Chip Positioning)
Waste Toner Collection
7.8 WASTE TONER COLLECTION
7.8.1 WASTE TONER TRANSPORT MECHANISM

The waste toner collected from the ITB cleaning unit is transported towards the front of the
machine and it goes into the waste toner bottle [A].
The waste toner of yellow and magenta coming from the PCDU (Y/M) and the waste toner from
the ITB cleaning unit is collected at the center of the waste toner bottle by the waste toner bottle
transport coil [B]. The black and cyan waste toner comes from the PCDU (K/C) to the waste
toner bottle directly.
The waste toner agitator [C] carries waste toner piled up at the front of the waste toner bottle to
the rear.
The waste toner bottle set sensor (S26) [E] detects the presence of the waste toner bottle, and
there is also a waste toner full sensor (S36) [D].

[A] Waste Toner Bottle [D] Waste Toner Full Sensor (S36)
[B] Waste Toner Bottle Transport Coil [E] Waste Toner Bottle Set Sensor (S26)
[C] Waste Toner Agitator - -
7.8.2 WASTE TONER COLLECTION MECHANISM

The waste toner agitator [B] carries waste toner piled up at the front of the waste toner bottle to
the rear. The agitator [C] moves together with the waste toner bottle transport coil [D].
Descriptions
Detailed
When the waste toner full sensor (S36) [A] detects a “waste toner near full”, the machine
displays an alert message on the operation panel, which prompts users to replace the waste
toner bottle.

[A] Waste Toner Full Sensor (S36) [C] Waste Toner Agitator (for ITB Cleaning Unit)
[B] Waste Toner Agitator [D] Waste Toner Bottle Transport Coil
7.8.3 WASTE TONER FULL DETECTION

When the waste toner moves the rubber actuator [B] to the highest position, the waste toner full
sensor (S36) [A] detects that the waste toner bottle is near-full. The machine does not stop at
this time.
When the quantity of waste toner calculated by the machine reaches 25 g or 3,000 sheets in
standard mode, whichever comes first after near-full was detected, the machine detects that the
waste toner bottle is full, and stops itself automatically.
• When the waste toner bottle is empty:
• When the waste toner bottle is full:
• [A] Waste Toner Full Sensor (S36)

• [B] Rubber Actuator
• [C] Waste toner agitator
• [D] Waste Toner
ITB/ Paper Transfer
7.9 ITB/ PAPER TRANSFER
7.9.1 OVERVIEW
Descriptions
Detailed
[A] Belt Tension Roller [H] ID Sensor Shutter
[B] ITB Cleaning Blade [I] ID Sensor Shutter Solenoid (SOL2)
[C] Waste Toner Transport Coil [J] ITB Contact Cam (CMY)
[D] Discharge Plate [K] ITB Contact Slider
[E] Paper Transfer Roller [L] ITB (Image Transfer Belt)
[F] ITB Drive Roller [M] ITB Contact Cam (K)
[G] ID Sensor (S27-S29) [N] Image Transfer Roller
7.9.2 TRANSFER MOVEMENT AND IMAGE TRANSPORT

Images of each color are created and transferred to the ITB (image transfer belt) [C].
The paper transfer roller [B] transfers the toner image from the ITB to the paper.

[A] OPC Drum [C] ITB
[B] Paper Transfer Roller [D] Image Transfer Roller (First Transfer Roller)
This model uses the indirect transfer method to enhance the quality of transfer.
ITB/ Paper Transfer
• Indirect Image Transfer + Attraction Transfer Method :

There is an attraction method where bias is applied to the paper transfer roller [A].
7.9.3 TRANSFER BIAS

The High-Voltage Power Supply (Transfer) (PCB23)[E] applies a transfer bias to the image
transfer roller [A].
The ITB drive roller [B] and discharge plate [C] are grounded through a diode.
There is no contact/release mechanism for the paper transfer system, which the previous model
uses, to reduce noise.

[A] Image Transfer Roller (First Transfer [D] Paper Transfer Roller
Roller)
[B] ITB Drive Roller [E] High-Voltage Power Supply (Transfer)
(PCB23)
[C] Discharge Plate - -
ITB/ Paper Transfer
7.9.4 ITB CONTACT

ITB has a contact mechanism to prevent the CMY drums from early deterioration. The color
drums are not needed for B/W printing, so this mechanism releases the ITB from the CMY
Descriptions
Detailed
drums.
The ITB lift motor (M14) [B] rotates the ITB contact cam [A] through a gear. The contact slider
then moves and raises the image transfer roller [E] into contact with the CMY drums.
If the mechanism is defective (e.g. Paper jams), and is stuck with the CMY rollers up against the
ITB, the cam can be turned manually to lower the rollers. In order to remove the ITB unit without
damaging, turn the ITB contact cam's screw to the left until the flat part of the half moon on the
screw points to the right.

[A] ITB Contact Cam (CMY) [D] Contact Slider
[B] ITB Lift Motor (M14) [E] Image Transfer Roller (First Transfer Roller)
[C] ITB Lift HP Sensor (S33) - -
ITB/ Paper Transfer
7.9.5 ITB CLEANING

The cleaning blade [A] cleans the ITB [C]. The waste toner collection coil [B] transports the
waste toner removed by the ITB cleaning blade towards the front of the machine.

[A] ITB Cleaning Blade [C] ITB
[B] Waste Toner Collection Coil - -
7.9.6 IMAGE POSITION CORRECTION

The image position adjustment is done by the three ID sensors (S27-S29)[A].

[A] ID Sensor (S27-S29) [C] OPC Drum
[B] ITB - -
Process Control and MUSIC
7.10 PROCESS CONTROL AND MUSIC
7.10.1 PROCESS CONTROL
Descriptions
Detailed
Outline
Process control adjusts the image creation process to maintain a constant image density.
Process control is executed at the following times.
Trigger Operative Condition Notes
Power ON • When a certain time passes after the previous job end, Except when
AND: recovering from an
1. More than six hours pass after the last OPC drum SC or jam
operation (SP3-530-001).
2. More than 100 full color copies or more than 250
B/W copies are made between the second latest
power-on and the latest power-on.
• When a certain time passes after the previous job end,
OR, the change of temperature/humidity after the last
OPC drum operation exceeds the following condition:
1. The change of temperature is more than or equal
to the threshold [deg] (SP3-530-002).
2. The change of relative humidity is more than or
equal to the threshold [%RH] (SP3-530-003).
3. The change of absolute humidity is more than or
equal to the threshold [g/m3] (SP3-530-004).
Default settings:
Time: 360 minutes
Temperature: 10 deg
Relative humidity: 50%RH
Absolute humidity: 6 g/m3
Other related SPs:
SP3-530-005/006
Job End When the job end counter becomes more than the -
threshold.
Related SPs:
SP3-534-001/011
Job When the job interrupt counter becomes more than the -
Interruption threshold.
Related SPs:
Trigger Operative Condition Notes

SP3-533-001/011
Non-use (Idle) Non-use time becomes more than the value in -
SP3-531-001.
Manual When SP3-011-001 is executed. -
Process
Control
Toner End When a Toner End is resolved. -
Recovery
Initial Setting When an initial developer setting is completed. -
Vc is the charge bias, which is applied to the charge rollers.
Vd is the potential of the unexposed (charged) drum.
The value of Vc is not equal to Vd.
For example, if applying a Vc of 700 [-V], the actual drum potential (Vd) tends to be about 650
[-V].
Vb is the potential when toner starts to stick to the drum (Development bias).
When the potential gets to Vb or greater, toner starts to stick to the drum in proportion to the
potential. Development gamma is the coefficient showing the relation between the potential and
the volume of toner adhesion.
In addition to the development gamma and the potential, the toner density in the developer
needs to be controlled. This is done to maintain the proper toner density (the amount of toner
adhesion).
The target for the toner density in the developer is when the output from the TD sensor (S14) is
Vtref.
Process Control is done as shown in the following chart, which includes development gamma
determination, Vtref correction, and LD power control.
Descriptions
Detailed
Charge/Development Bias Control and Vtref Compensation

Charge/Development bias control and Vtref Compensation is done using the following
procedure. Its operating time varies depending on the machine’s line speed.
This step adjusts ID sensor’s LED’s light intensity so that Vsg, which is the ID sensor
(S27-S29) output when monitoring the bare surface of the ITB, becomes within 4.0±0.5V.
When Vsg does not reach the target value three times, the machine issues SC370 (ID
sensor Calibration Error).
• SP3-320-011 (Vsg Error Counter)
• SP3-320-013 (Vsg Upper Threshold)
• SP3-320-014 (Vsg Lower Threshold)
• The above SPs can only be accessed from Special Service mode.
This step agitates the developer, and gets the TD sensor output.
The developer agitation time is determined by the three factors below.
1. The change of absolute humidity
2. Non-use time
3. Coverage
Five patterns are created by adjusting the charge/development bias on the transfer belt
for each color. Then the ID sensor (S27-S29) detects the created patterns.
The ID sensor (S27-S29) consists of an LED and two types of photo detector. The sensor
detects the reflection from the LED [B] with the direct reflection detector (REG) [A] and the
diffused reflection detector (DIF) [C].
Detecting the development gamma value with an ID sensor pattern and measuring
Vsp/Vsg determines the charge/development bias for the correct image density.
Also, the reading from the TD sensor (S14-S17) and the development gamma determine Vtref,
which is the reference value for the TD sensor (S14-S17) .
LD Control is set with SP3-600-001 (Process Control/ Select ProCon: LD Control).

• If SP 3-600-001 is set to LD Power Control by Process Control (Default): The LD strength is
adjusted based on a table which is determined by Development Bias Control and Vtref
Correction.
Descriptions
• If SP 3-600-001 is set to use a fixed LD power, the LD power that is used depends on the
Detailed
settings of SP2-221-001/002/003/004.
SP3-400-001, -002, -003, -004
0: Fixed supply method
2: PID method
4: DANC method (Default)
• Fixed Supply method
Toner supply time is calculated based on the supply rate of SP3-440-001 through -004
(DrvTime: Setting).
• PID method
PID (Proportion Integral Differential)
The amount of toner supply is calculated based on the pixel information and TD sensor
information.
• DANC method
DANC (Divided Active Noise Control): Conventional PID method + active noise control. It
controls the timing to supply the developer to minimize uneven developer density in the
development unit.
Toner Near-End
First, the amount of remaining toner is detected with the pixel count and the driving time of the
toner supply motor(M1-M4). Then, when the amount of remaining toner is less than the
threshold for toner near-end (K = 23 g, CMY = 10 g), the machine determines a toner near-end.
For CMY, when the amount of remaining toner is less than 50 g, or when the toner end sensor
(S11-S13), which is a piezoelectric sensor, detects toner near-end twice, the machine also
determines a toner near-end.
Toner End
A toner end is detected when the toner end sensor (S11-S13) detects the end threshold six
times in the toner near-end condition.
The machine also detects a toner end when the difference of the Vt and Vtref, and their total
difference are as in the following matrix:
Condition Vt/Vtref: Diff Vt/Vtref: Diff: Total
K Before Near-End 0.7 V or more Over 10 V
After Near-End 0.3 V or more Over 3 V
CMY - 0.5 V or more Over 10 V
When you open and close the front door, or turn the main power OFF and ON, the machine
checks whether a new toner bottle has been set. The machine then starts the toner supply to
recover from the toner end. After supplying toner, the machine checks the toner end sensor
(S11-S13) and Vt condition and deactivates the toner end condition.
When a new PCDU is set in the machine, the machine automatically detects it and enters
the developer initial setting mode. The machine then detects the count which is an
output from the TD sensor (S14-S17) . The developer initial setting is done as follows.
1. Starting the developer initial setting mode
The new unit detection mechanism triggers the developer initial setting mode.
2. Agitating the developer
The machine rotates the development roller and transport coil to agitate the developer for
30 seconds.
3. Detecting the count (Initial value)
While agitating the developer, the machine detects the output from the TD sensor
(S14-S17) , and stores this output as the initial count.
4. Calculating Vt
The machine calculates Vt using the difference of the current count while referring to
the initial count through SP.
5. Forced toner supply (only when newly installing the machine)
This step is required only when the machine is newly installed because there is no toner in
the toner transport route.
When the developer initial setting is successfully completed, the machine stores the calculated
Vt as Vtref. The Vtref is used as a reference the next time the machine performs an initial
developer setting.
SC360-01 through -04 appears if the results of step 3 are as follows:
The count is equal or exceeds the threshold (6480 [counts]).
The count does not match the target threshold (5800 – 6380 [counts]) three times
consecutively.
Process Control and MUSIC are forcibly done after developer initial setting when a PCDU is
replaced.
(S27)(S28)(S29)
ID sensor (S27-S29)
Descriptions
Detailed
The ID sensor (S27-S29) has 3 sensors laid out on 1 bracket. The ID sensor (center) (S28) [B]
acts as an ID sensor and a MUSIC sensor. The ID sensor (front) (S27) [A] and ID sensor (rear)
(S29) [C] are used only for MUSIC.
The ID sensors (S27-S29) [A] are installed at the upstream side of the paper transfer roller [B]
and detect image density at the plate [C]. This layout allows the machine to detect a pattern
faster and to help reduce waiting time.
TD Sensor (S14-S17)
In this model, a non-contact toner density (TD) sensor, which we also call a mu ( ) sensor, is
used for toner density control.
The TD sensor (S14-S17) is attached on the lower side of the development unit. Unlike a HST
sensor, the board of the TD sensor is exposed. So there is a cover around the sensor to protect
it and to maintain a good contact between the sensor and development unit.
The TD (S14-S17) sensor measures the permeability of the developer without contacting it,
from the outside of the case, and converts the measured value to the toner density.
According to the toner density measured by this sensor, the proper amount of toner is supplied
to the developer.
A counter corresponding to the frequency is used as the unit of TD sensor output. Thus, unlike a
HST sensor which directly detects Vt, the TD sensor output is converted into Vt for toner supply
control.
In the TD sensor (S14-S17), there is an ID chip (PCB3-PCB6) storing the machine identification
information, the running distance information of Development unit and PCU, and other
information used by image density control.
7.10.2 MUSIC
Color Skew Adjustment Timing

This model has a mechanism that adjusts color skew, which we call MUSIC. The machine
creates a pattern for correction, measures the image position by the pattern, and adjusts the
image position.
No. MUSIC performs when: Notes
1 The power switch is just turned ON, or the machine recovers Executes [Mode b] (*2) or
from the energy save mode. [Mode a] (*1)
2 The machine does a print job. Executes [Mode b] (*2)
3 Printing is completed. Executes [Mode b] (*2)
4 The front cover is closed. Executes [Mode b] (*2) or
[Mode a] (*1)
5 The machine is waiting. Executes [Mode b] (*2)
6 The machine detects a new PCDU automatically, ITB Executes [Mode a] (*1)
manually.
*1 [Mode a] fine adjusts twice.
*2 [Mode b] fine adjusts once.
To operate modes a/b/c manually, use the following SPs:
• SP2-111-001 (Forced Line Position Adj.: [Mode a])
• SP2-111-002 (Forced Line Position Adj.: [Mode b])
• SP2-111-003 (Forced Line Position Adj.: [Mode c]): Do this SP when you have replaced a
laser unit, or when significant color skew occurs.
• Do [Mode a] and [Mode b] after doing [Mode c].
MUSIC Error Determination

MUSIC determines whether an error occurs for each color.
SP2-194-007 shows the results, and SP2-194-010 through -013 show the error details.
Descriptions
SP2-194-007 (MUSIC Execution Result - Execution Result)
Detailed
SP2-194-010 (MUSIC Execution Result - Error Result: C)
SP2-194-011 (MUSIC Execution Result - Error Result: M)
SP2-194-012 (MUSIC Execution Result - Error Result: Y)
SP2-194-013 (MUSIC Execution Result - Error Result: K)
Error Details Description
0 Not done
1 Completed successfully
2 Cannot detect patterns
3 Insufficient lines for a pattern
4 Out of the adjustment range
5 or 6 ID sensor (S27-S29) false detection
Adjustment Overview
1. Performs Vsg adjustment to correct ID sensor (S27-S29) output.
2. Creates a MUSIC pattern on the transfer belt with each color toner.
3. Reads the MUSIC pattern on the belt, and measures the positions of the lines on the
pattern.
4. Calculates the color skew amount from the position data.
5. Calculates the tolerance/deviation for main scan magnification, and the main/scan
registration skew amount. Then determines the amount of color skew adjustment.
Fusing
7.11 FUSING
7.11.1 OVERVIEW

[A] Fusing Thermopile (TH1) [G] Pressure Roller
[B] Fusing Thermistor [H] Pressure Roller Thermistors (TH2-TH4)
(Non-contact Sensor) (S10) (Edge: Front, Center, and Edge: Rear)
[C] Fusing Thermostat [I] Entrance Guide Plate
[D] Separation Plate [J] Fusing Sleeve Belt (QSU Method)
[E] Exit Guide Plate [K] Fusing Lamp
[F] Pressure Arm [L] New Fusing Unit Detection Fuse (S9)
Fusing
7.11.2 FUSING MECHANISM

The fusing unit uses the QSU system. (QSU: Quick Start Up).
The heat from the fusing lamp [B] is reflected by the reflector [C] and heats the fusing sleeve
Descriptions
Detailed
belt [D].
The temperature at both ends of the fusing lamp is lower than the middle.
The fusing sleeve belt itself has no drive mechanism; the pressure roller drives [F] it. The nip
pad [E] at the sleeve belt side is pushed against the pressure roller [F] and keeps the nip width
on the sleeve belt.

[A] Stay [D] Fusing Sleeve Belt (Diameter: 25)
[B] Fusing Lamp [E] Nip Pad
[C] Reflector [F] Pressure Roller (Diameter: 25)
Fusing
7.11.3 FUSING TEMPERATURE CONTROL

The fusing temperature is controlled by the fusing thermopile (TH1)[C].
The thermostat [B] is a safety switch. The fusing unit must be replaced if the thermostat opens.

[A] Fusing Lamp [D] Fusing Thermistor (Non-contact Sensor) (S10)
[B] Fusing Thermostat [E] Pressure Roller Thermistors (TH2-TH4) (Edge: Front,
Center, and Edge: Rear)
[C] Fusing Thermopile - -
(TH1)
Fusing
7.11.4 FUSING DRIVE

The fusing motor (M13) [B] drives the pressure roller [D] through gears.
The pressure roller [D] drives the fusing sleeve belt [E].
Descriptions
Detailed
The fusing entrance sensor (S3) [C] and fusing exit sensor (S8) [A] detect paper jams around/in
the fusing unit.

[A] Fusing Exit Sensor (S8) [D] Pressure Roller
[B] Fusing Motor (M13) [E] Fusing Sleeve Belt
[C] Fusing Entrance Sensor (S3) - -
Fusing
7.11.5 FUSING MODE CONTROL

When the main power switch (SW1) is turned ON, the machine starts the fusing warm-up.
The machine drives the fusing motor (M13) to increase the fusing temperature to the
reload target temperature. When the machine completes the fusing warm-up, it keeps the
reload target temperature by driving the fusing motor (M13) for a certain period of time.
When a certain period of time passes after fusing reload is completed, the machine
stops the fusing lamp and fusing motor (M13). Then the machine keeps the fusing
temperature to the standby target temperature by energizing the fusing lamp.
In standby mode, the machine starts the fusing motor (M13) intermittently.
After returning to standby mode, the machine lights the fusing lamp to increase the
fusing temperature to the printing ready target temperature. If there is no printing job,
the machine then moves back to the standby mode.
If there is a printing job, the machine starts the fusing lamp to increase the fusing temperature to
the target temperature after reload/feeding, and then starts the print job.
Fusing
7.11.6 CPM DOWN CONTROL

This machine automatically lowers the CPM according to usage and machine status to obtain
the best image quality and keep the machine in good condition.
Descriptions
Detailed
If the fusing lamp is always activated during consecutive printing, and/or the paper size is
smaller than the lamp’s width, then some heat will not be used for fusing and may stay around
the front and rear ends of the fusing unit. This will increase the temperature in the fusing unit
abnormally.
CPM down control keeps the machine’s CPM low until the fusing unit sufficiently cools down.
Normally, it takes 10 minutes to recover the original CPM.
A5 Postcard Envelope Recovery

Time
CPM (Standard) 15 15 15 10 mins.
CPM Down Starting Sheet Count No CPM 13th 4th sheet
control sheet
CPM (Controlled) 10 6
Output sheet count after one minute from 14 6
recovery
Paper Feed and Registration (IM C300 Series)
7.12 PAPER FEED AND REGISTRATION (IM C300 SERIES)
7.12.1 OVERVIEW

[A] End Fence [H] Registration Sensor (S32)
[B] Paper Feed Tray [I] Paper Feed Sensor (S31)
[C] Side Fence [J] Bypass Feed Roller
[D] Tray Paper End Sensor (Main Unit) (S30) [K] Bypass Paper Width Sensor
(S5)
[E] Paper Feed Roller [L] Paper End Sensor (Bypass)
(S6)
[F] Dust Collection Tray [M] Friction Pad
[G] Registration Rollers (Right: Driven, Left: - -
Drive)

[A] Tray Paper End Sensor (Main Unit) (S30) [D] Bypass Paper Width Sensor (S5)
[B] Paper Feed Sensor (S31) [E] Paper End Sensor (Bypass) (S6)
[C] Registration Sensor (S32) - -
7.12.2 PAPER TRANSPORT MOTOR (M12)

The drive from the paper transport motor (M12) [E] is transmitted to each clutch through gears.
The paper transport motor (M12) [E] controls paper feed/exit, duplex, registration, waste toner
Descriptions
transport coil and bypass tray lift.
Detailed
[A] Paper Feed Roller [E] Paper Transport Motor (M12)
[B] Paper Feed Clutch (CL9) [F] Bypass Feed Clutch (CL7)
[C] Registration Roller [G] Bypass Feed Roller
[D] Registration Clutch (CL8) - -
7.12.3 TRAY LIFT MECHANISM

The tray lift motor (M15) [D] rotates the gear [C] and the gear makes the rack [F] move.
The movement of the rack pulls the spring and this moves the bottom plate lift arm [B].
The arm lifts the bottom plate [A].
The position of the bottom plate is detected by the tray lift sensor (S35) [E]. This machine does
not use motor control to detect the bottom plate position.

[A] Bottom Plate [D] Tray Lift Motor (M15)
[B] Bottom Plate Lift Arm [E] Tray Lift Sensor (S35)
[C] Bottom Plate Lift Gear [F] Rack and Pinion Mechanism
7.12.4 TRANSPORT CONTROL

The paper feed sensor (S31) [B] monitors whether the paper is fed by the paper feed roller [A]
at intervals that are too short.
Descriptions
Detailed
If an overly short interval is detected, the paper feed clutch (CL9) is stopped momentarily to
increase the interval and prevent a paper jam due to such a short interval.
7.12.5 TRAY AUTO-CLOSE MECHANISM

The tray has a pin [A] on its bottom. When the tray is set, the spring [C] in the draw-in unit [B]
slowly pulls the tray in. When the tray is pulled out, the pin stretches the spring.
[A]: Pin
[B]: Draw-in Unit
[C]: Spring
7.13 PAPER FEED AND REGISTRATION (IM C400 SERIES)
7.13.1 OVERVIEW
Callout Item
[A] Pick-up Roller
[B] Paper Feed Roller
[C] Registration Roller
[D] Vertical Transport Roller
[E] Friction Roller

[A] Pick-up Arm [D] Paper Feed Roller
[B] Tray Lift Sensor (S35) [E] Friction Roller
[C] Pick-up Roller - -
7.13.2 PAPER TRANSPORT

The drive from the paper transport motor (M12) is transmitted to each clutch through gears. The
paper transport motor (M12) controls paper feed, duplex, registration, waste toner transport coil
Descriptions
Detailed
and bypass tray lift.

[A] Paper Feed Roller [G] Bypass Feed Roller
[B] Paper Feed Clutch (CL9) [H] Friction Roller
[C] Registration Roller [I] Pick-up Roller
[D] Registration Clutch (CL8) [J] Vertical Transport Clutch (CL10)
[E] Paper Transport Motor (M12) [K] Vertical Transport Roller
[F] Bypass Feed Clutch (CL7) - -
7.13.3 PAPER FEED MECHANISM

When the paper feed tray is set in the machine, a pressure release lever [A] is pressed, the
friction roller [B] comes in contact with the paper feed roller, and the pick-up roller [C] contacts
the top of the paper (to prevent paper remaining, when the paper feed tray is withdrawn, the
pressure release lever returns and contact with the rollers is released).
The machine is in standby mode for paper feeding when the tray bottom plate moves up. When
the paper feed clutch (CL9) turns ON after the paper transport motor (M12) turns ON, the rollers
start to rotate and paper is fed.
The feed guide functions as a paper guide and roller clip ring. The feed guide prevents the
paper from winding up.
In this machine, to maintain the paper gap constant, the paper feed
sensor (S31) [A] near the paper feed roller adjusts the paper feed timing.
1. The paper transport motor (M12) [C] is switched ON, then the paper feed clutch (CL9) [D]
turns ON, the first sheet is supplied.
2. Just before the rear edge of the first sheet leaves the paper feed roller [B], the paper feed
clutch (CL9) [D] switches OFF.
At this time, if the paper feed sensor (S31) [A] detects "Paper Out" (if a second sheet has
not been transported to the paper feed sensor position), the paper feed clutch (CL9) [D]
does not switch OFF, and pre-feed is performed. Pre-feed is as follows:
1.The second sheet is transported to the paper feed sensor (S31) [A] position.
2.When the leading edge of the second sheet reaches the paper feed sensor (S31) [A], the
Descriptions
paper feed clutch (CL9) [D] switches OFF.
Detailed
3. When the first sheet is transported a predetermined distance by the downstream transport
roller, the paper feed clutch (CL9) [D] switches ON to supply the second sheet of paper.
4. The transported sheet is controlled so as not to be jammed by the paper feed sensor (S31)
[A].
7.13.4 PAPER END DETECTION

When there is no more paper in the paper feed tray, the leading edge of the paper end feeler [2]
falls into a notch [3] in the base plate, and the tray paper end sensor (main unit) (S30) [1] at the
rear edge of the paper end feeler switches ON.
Callout Item
1 Tray Paper End Sensor (Main Unit) (S30)
2 Paper End Feeler
3 Notch
7.13.5 TRAY LIFT MECHANISM

When the paper feed tray is set in the machine, the set sensor (S34) at the rear of the tray
switches ON, and it is detected that the tray is set.
Descriptions
Detailed
The coupling [B] between the shaft [C] at the rear of the tray and the tray lift motor (M15) [A]
then engages, the motor rotates, and the tray base plate [D] is lifted.
The tray base plate lifts until the paper surface pushes the pick-up roller up [E], the tray lift
sensor (S35) [F] switches OFF (interrupt), and the machine enters paper feed standby mode.
When the tray is removed, the coupling is released, and the base plate moves down. The tray
lift motor (M15) then rotates until the coupling returns to the home position.
7.13.6 TRAY AUTO-CLOSE MECHANISM
No. Part name No. Part name

1 Paper Feed Tray 4 One-way Clutch
2 Draw-in pin 5 Draw-in lever
3 Oil Damper 6 Tray draw-in unit
To enhance operability, a tray draw-in mechanism is used.
The tray is drawn in by a one-way clutch in the draw-in unit. To draw the tray out, an oil damper
is released.
The pin [A] of the paper supply tray is drawn in by the tray draw-in unit [B].
[A]: Paper supply tray pin
[B]: Tray draw-in unit
[C]: One-way clutch
[D]: Tray draw-in lever
[E]: Oil damper
Paper Feed and Registration (New Functions)
7.14 PAPER FEED AND REGISTRATION (NEW
FUNCTIONS)
Descriptions
Detailed
The actual paper length is measured by the registration sensor (S32) and compared with
the paper length configured in the machine's Paper Tray Settings. If there is a difference
of 30 mm or more, an internal flag is set to indicate a paper length error.
If paper jams while this flag is set, a message reporting a paper configuration error and
explaining the correct way to configure the paper setting appears on the operation panel. This
reduces paper jams due to misconfiguration by the user.
You can specify whether or not to display the guidance and check the occurrence count with the
following SP.
Function SP No.
Displaying Guidance SP1-010-001 (Size Set Miss Detection Mode:
Paper Length Detection)
0: OFF
1: ON
Paper Length Error Detection Count: Tray 1 SP1-011-001 (Size Set Miss Detection Count: Papr
Lngth Dtct:F1)
Paper Length Error Detection Count: SP1-011-002 (Size Set Miss Detection Count: Papr
Bypass Tray Lngth Dtct:MF)
(Optional PFU1) Lngth Dtct:F2)
If the image fails to be transferred to the paper in time after the paper reaches the
registration point, it is possible to continue printing by forming the image again
(resending the image). This reduces the paper jam (JAM10, 15, 16, 17) (failing to slacken
the paper for skew adjustment on the registration roller).
You can specify whether or not to resend the image with the following SPs. (The default setting
of each is "ON".)
0: OFF
1: ON
Paper Feed and Registration (New Functions)
Item SP No.
Tray 1 SP1-909-002 (ImageRetry: Function:Tray1)
Bypass Tray SP1-909-003 (ImageRetry: Function:MF)
Resending the image increases toner consumption, so if the need to form the image
again increases, you can select between 2 actions.
• 1-909-012 to 016
0: Delivers the paper securely by resending the image.
1: Increases the interval between images in order to widen the margins to prevent paper
slips when the paper is fed.
However, if the image still fails to be transferred in time even with widened margins, the
image is resent.
Bypass Tray
7.15 BYPASS TRAY
7.15.1 BYPASS TRAY BOTTOM PLATE LIFT MECHANISM
Descriptions
Detailed
The paper transport motor (M12) rotates the bypass tray lift clutch (CL1) [F], and this moves the
bypass tray bottom plate [A] up and down.
The position of the bypass tray bottom plate lift cams (and because of this, the bypass tray
bottom plate) is detected by the bypass tray lift sensor (S4) [C].

[A] Bypass Tray Bottom [D] Actuator
Plate
[B] Pressure Spring [E] Bypass Tray Bottom Plate Lifting-up Cam (Front
and Rear)
[C] Bypass Tray Lift Sensor [F] Bypass Tray Lift Clutch (CL1)
(S4)
Bypass Tray
7.15.2 PAPER SIZE DETECTION AND PAPER END DETECTION

The bypass paper width sensor (S5) [A] is not at the side of the tray but at the side of the
bypass paper feed unit.

[A] Bypass Paper Width Sensor (S5) [C] Paper End Sensor (Bypass) (S6)
[B] Bypass Feed Roller [D] Bypass Feed Friction Pad
The paper size is detected by the bypass paper width sensor (S5) [A]. Size mismatch is
detected if one of the following conditions is met.
Paper size (width) specified in Tray Paper Paper width detected by the bypass
Settings on the operation panel paper width sensor (S5)
1 180 mm or more OFF (148 mm or less)
2 148 mm or less ON (180 mm or more)
• Size mismatch is not detected for the specified size less than 180 mm and more than 148
mm.
• If size mismatch is detected, it is regarded a paper jam. Printing stops and an alert
message appears on the operation panel.
• When printing a single-page job, the job is delivered (and included in the billing), and then
an alert message appears on the operation panel.
The paper length is detected by the registration sensor (S32) in the machine's paper
transfer path. (Available only with the bypass tray)
Size mismatch is detected if one of the following conditions is met.
1 Paper size (length) specified in Tray Paper Settings on the operation panel - 35 mm > Size
(length) detected by the registration sensor (S32)
2 Paper size (length) specified in Tray Paper Settings on the operation panel + 70 mm < Size
(length) detected by the registration sensor (S32)
Bypass Tray
• If size mismatch is detected, it is regarded as a paper jam. Printing stops and an alert
message appears on the operation panel.
• When printing a single-page job, the job is delivered (and included in the billing), and then
an alert message appears on the operation panel.
Descriptions
If the paper is loaded, the paper end sensor (bypass) (S6) [C] is turned ON.When the
Detailed
paper runs out, it is turned OFF and detects Paper End.
.
Duplex
7.16 DUPLEX
7.16.1 OVERVIEW
IM C300 series
Duplex
IM C400F
Descriptions
Detailed
Duplex
IM C400SRF

[A] Duplex Entrance Sensor (S1) [D] Duplex Exit Sensor (S2)
[B] Duplex Paper Transport Roller [E] Duplex Paper Transport Roller
(Upper) (Middle)*1
[C] Duplex Paper Transport Roller - -
(Lower)
*1 IM C400SRF only
• The IM C400SRF has a longer paper transfer path for duplex printing than other
models, so a Duplex Paper Transport Roller (Middle) is provided.
Duplex
7.16.2 DUPLEX MECHANISM

The drive from the paper transport motor (M12) [D] is transmitted to the duplex clutch
(CL6) [C] through a gear, and the duplex clutch (CL6) turns on to drive the duplex paper
Descriptions
Detailed
transport rollers.
Drive is transmitted to the Duplex Paper Transport Roller in the order of lower, middle*1 and
upper rollers through the timing belt.
*1 IM C400SRF only
There are two paper sensors (upper and lower) in the duplex unit. The upper sensor is
the duplex entrance sensor (S1) [A].
The lower sensor is the duplex exit sensor (S2) [B].
Duplex
IM C400SRF
Callout Item
[A] Duplex Entrance Sensor (S1)
[B] Duplex Exit Sensor (S2)
[C] Duplex Clutch (CL6)
[D] Paper Transport Motor (M12)
Duplex
7.16.3 INTERLEAVING
• The following descriptions are accompanied by illustrations of the IM C300 series, but
Descriptions
Detailed
the IM C400 series has the same mechanism.
This machine adopts “2 in 1” interleaving.
The interleave operation of this machine is as follows:
1st sheet back -> 2nd sheet back -> first sheet front -> 3rd sheet back -> 2nd sheet front-> 4th
sheet back.
Duplex
Paper Exit and Inverter
7.17 PAPER EXIT AND INVERTER
7.17.1 OVERVIEW
Descriptions
Detailed

[A] Fusing Exit Sensor (S8) [D] Exit Junction Gate
[B] Paper Exit Sensor (S7) [E] Paper Exit Transport Roller
[C] Paper Exit/reverse Roller - -
7.17.2 PAPER EXIT OPERATION

The paper transport motor (M12) rotates the paper exit/reverse roller [A] through a gear. The
paper exit sensor (S7) [C] detects paper exit jams and the paper inversion timing.
Descriptions
Detailed

[A] Paper Exit/reverse Roller [C] Paper Exit Sensor (S7)
[B] Exit Junction Gate [D] Paper Exit Transport Roller
The paper exit transport roller [E] is provided on the IM C400SRF because the transport path
from fusing to paper exit is longer than on other models. The paper exit transport roller conveys
the drive from the paper transport motor (M12) [F] via a timing belt.
7.17.3 INVERTER OPERATION
Descriptions
Detailed
[A] Junction Gate Solenoid (SOL1) [C] Reverse Clutch (CL2)
[B] Paper Exit Clutch (CL3) - -
The junction gate solenoid (SOL1) [A], paper exit clutch (CL3)[B], and reverse clutch (CL2)[C]
control the exit junction gate and paper exit/reverse roller simultaneously.
The paper exit clutch (CL3) and reverse clutch (CL2) transmit the driving to the paper exit
inverter roller, in opposite directions respectively.
The paper exit/reverse roller rotates in the normal direction when the paper exit clutch (CL3) is
turned ON, to feed the paper to the paper exit path.
When the reverse clutch (CL2) turns ON, the paper exit/reverse roller rotates in the reverse
direction, to feed the paper to the inverter path or 1-bin exit path (when 1-bin tray unit is
installed).
In duplex printing, after the first side of a sheet has been printed, the exit junction gate solenoid
(SOL1) turns ON, and the exit junction gate has been switched to direct the paper to the inverter
path.
And then, the paper exit clutch (CL3) turns OFF and the paper reverse clutch (CL2) turns ON, to
rotate the paper exit roller in reverse to feed the paper towards the inverter exit (see the left
illustration above).
When the trailing edge of the paper passes the paper exit sensor (S7), the machine turns OFF
the junction gate solenoid (SOL1), turns ON the paper exit clutch (CL3), and turns OFF the
reverse clutch (CL2). It switches the exit junction gate back to the original position before the
paper completely goes out of the inverter exit, and rotates the paper exit/reverse roller forward
to feed the paper to the duplex transport path.
After that, the machine starts to print the second side and feeds out the paper that is printed on
both sides to the paper exit tray.
Electrical Parts
7.18 ELECTRICAL PARTS
7.18.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM
Descriptions
Detailed
Electrical Parts
7.18.2 BOARD OUTLINE

Controls all the systems related to the main machine. Contains an x86 CPU, controller
ASIC, IO control ASIC, and RAM.
Scanning control circuit which performs analog signal processing and AD image
conversion of the CCD read image.
Electrical Parts
It also has an interface with the BiCU (PCB1), and controls scanner input and output
signals according to CPU commands.
LD control circuit which drives the laser diode with a universal driver.
Descriptions
Controls the engine, as well as the sensors, motors and solenoids of main machine.
Detailed
Controls the fax program.
Controls the control panel.
Generates high-voltage power required for image creation.
The High-Voltage Power Supply unit consists of two units: PCB23 is for transfer and
PCB22 is for charging/developing.
Generates DC power from the main AC power supply, and supplies it to each control
circuit. Contains an A/C drive circuit for controlling the fusing lamp.
Detects the voltage of the main AC supply.
Controls motors, sensors, and solenoids in the ADF.
Refer to Fuse Location (Fuse Location).
Machine Ventilation
7.19 MACHINE VENTILATION
7.19.1 OVERVIEW
IM C300 series / IM C400F
Machine Ventilation
IM C400SRF
Descriptions
Detailed
[A] LD Unit Cooling Fan (FAN2) [E] PCDU Cooling Fan (FAN3)
[B] Fusing Unit Cooling Fan (FAN1) [F] PSU Exhaust Fan (FAN4)
[C] Ozone Filter [G] Paper Exit Exhaust Fan (FAN5)*1
[D] Temperature/Humidity Sensor (S18) - -
*1 IM C400SRF only
The machine has four fans [A] [B] [E] [F] to ventilate the interior of the machine. There is a
temperature/humidity sensor (S18)[D] at the front (lower right) of the machine. The machine
takes in air from the left of the machine and exhausts it from the right of the machine after it
cools the machine interior.
The ozone filter [C] is installed at the right of the fusing unit cooling fan (FAN1), which helps
make it easier to replace the filter.
Machine Ventilation
On the IM C400SRF, the transport path from fusing to paper exit is longer than on other models,
resulting in the roller being susceptible to condensation due to the influence of outside air.
Therefore, the IM C400SRF is provided with a paper exit exhaust fan (FAN5) to prevent
condensation on the paper exit roller [B] and the paper exit reverse roller driven roller [A].
7.19.2 MACHINE VENTILATION

The following tables summarize the fan control.
Status PCDU Cooling Fan Fusing Unit PSU LD Unit Cooling Paper Exit
(FAN3) Cooling Fan Exhaust Fan (FAN2) Exhaust
(FAN1) Fan Fan (FAN5)
(FAN4) (IM
C400SRF
only)
Engine Off
Off
Power Stops
ON –
Warm-up
Standby Stops Rotates at Stops Stops Rotates at
low speed low speed
Standby *1
after
printing
Printing Rotates at Rotates at Rotates at Rotates at Rotates at
full-speed Stops*2 full-speed full-speed* 3
full-speed Stops*2 full-speed
Rotates at Rotates at
low-speed* 2
low-speed*2
Machine Ventilation
Status PCDU Cooling Fan Fusing Unit PSU LD Unit Cooling Paper Exit
(FAN3) Cooling Fan Exhaust Fan (FAN2) Exhaust
(FAN1) Fan Fan (FAN5)
(FAN4) (IM
Descriptions
C400SRF
Detailed
only)
Lower Stops *4 Rotates at Stops *4 Stops *4 Rotates at
Power low-speed*4 low-speed*4
Silent Stops *4
Abnormal
status
Notes:
1. Keeps the printing status for the time specified in SP1-950-001 through -004. Then the fan
keeps rotating until it reaches the temperature specified in SP2-241-004.
001: PCDU cooling fan (FAN3)
002: Fusing unit cooling fan (FAN1), paper exit/exhaust fan (FAN5)
003: PSU exhaust fan (FAN4)
004: LD unit cooling fan (FAN2)
2. Rotates at full speed when the temperature around the drum exceeds the temperature
specified in SP1-955-001 through -004; Stops or rotates at low-speed when the
temperature is out of the threshold specified in SP1-955-005.
001: PCDU cooling fan (FAN3)
002: Fusing unit cooling fan (FAN1), paper exit exhaust fan (FAN5)
004: LD unit cooling fan (FAN2)
3. If the time interval between the end timing of the last printing status and the start timing of
the next printing status exceeds the value in SP1-955-007, the machine stops the fan until
the duration specified in SP1-955-006, and then rotates at full speed.
4. If the fan is rotating, the machine keeps rotating it until the time specified in SP1-950-001
through -004.
Energy Save
7.20 ENERGY SAVE
7.20.1 ENERGY SAVER MODES

Customers should use energy saver modes properly, to save energy and protect the
environment.
The area shaded grey in this diagram represents the amount of energy that is saved when the
timers are at the default settings. If the timers are changed, then the energy saved will be
different. For example, if the timers are all set to 60 min., the grey area will disappear, and no
energy is saved before 60 min. expires.
Setting Items that are Related to Energy Saving
The user can set these timers with [Settings] (System Settings > Date/Time/Timer > Timer)
[Settings] (System Settings > Date/Time/Timer > Timer > Sleep Mode Timer)
After a specified period has passed, or [Energy Saver] is pressed, the machine enters Sleep
mode in order to conserve energy. Specify the time to elapse before Sleep mode.
Default: [1 minute(s)]
Sleep Mode Timer may not work when error messages appear.
Depending on which Embedded Software Architecture application is installed on it, the machine
might take longer than indicated to enter Sleep mode.
[Settings] (System Settings > Date/Time/Timer > Timer > Fusing Unit Off Mode (Energy
Saving) On/Off)
Specifies whether Fusing Unit Off mode is enabled or not.
Energy Save
When Fusing Unit Off mode is enabled, the display is on but the fusing unit is off to save energy.
The machine requires roughly the same time as warm-up time to recover from Fusing Unit Off
mode.
Default: [On]
Descriptions
If [Fusing Unit Off Mode (Energy Saving) On/Off] is set to [On], you can specify when to exit
Detailed
Fusing Unit Off mode and the time to elapse before entering Fusing Unit Off mode.
If [Exit Fusing Unit Off Mode] is set to [On Printing], the machine exits Fusing Unit Off mode
when printing is performed.
If [Exit Fusing Unit Off Mode] is set to [On Operating Control Panel], the machine exits Fusing
Unit Off mode when a key other than the copy function key is pressed on the control panel of
the machine.
[Settings] (System Settings > Machine > Power/Energy Saving > Energy Saving
Recovery for Business Application)
Specify whether or not to enable low-energy recovery from Sleep mode to use applications
independent of the machine, such as Address Book Management or Browser.
Default: [Off]
If [On (Energy Saving)] is selected, it takes longer than usual to be ready to use the machine.
Recovery Time/Reduced Electrical Consumption
Model Name Reduced electrical consumption in Sleep Recovery time from Sleep
mode*1 mode*1
IM C300 0.65 W 7.7 sec.
IM C300F 0.65 W 7.7 sec.
IM C400F 0.65 W 8.0 sec.
IM 0.65 W 8.2 sec.
C400SRF
Model Reduced electrical consumption in Sleep Recovery time from Sleep

Name mode*1 mode*1
IM C300 0.65 W 7.7 sec.
IM C300F 0.66 W 7.7 sec.
IM C400F 0.65 W 8.0 sec.
Energy Save
Model Name Reduced electrical consumption in Sleep Recovery time from Sleep
mode*1 mode*1
IM C300F 0.65 W 8.1 sec.
IM C400F 0.65 W 8.0 sec.
IM 0.65 W 8.3 sec.
C400SRF
*1 The time it takes to switch out from energy saving functions and electrical consumption may
differ depending on the conditions and environment of the machine.
7.20.2 POWER STATES OF THIS MACHINE
Energy Save
State Description
1 Standby/Printing • State where normal operation is possible after warm-up
• State during printing
2 Printing State when printing with the backlight of the operation panel turned OFF
Descriptions
state/Panel OFF
Detailed
3 Fusing OFF State where the Standby Fusing OFF state is entered when the time set
with the "Fusing Unit Off Mode (Energy Saving) On/Off" setting of the
User Tools has elapsed.
• State where the operation panel is flashing and the fusing lamp is
OFF.
• The bottom plate of the paper feed tray is raised.
4 Quiet state Quiet state is entered when the Energy Saving key is pressed or the
time set with the "Sleep Mode Timer" of the User Tools has elapsed.
This is a temporary energy saving state before entering sleep mode.
• Basically, no homing (initialization) of peripheral devices is
performed.
• The bottom plate of the paper feed tray is raised.
• The fusing lamp is turned OFF.
5 Engine OFF Entered from Quiet state with internal timer.
(Sleep mode) • The relevant power systems (24V, 12V, 5V) are turned OFF at the
same time as the fusing lamp.
• When printing is performed in engine OFF state, warm-up is started
and printing is performed while the backlight of the operation panel
is turned OFF.
6 STR state Supplying of power and clock to the CPU and peripheral chips on the
(Sleep mode) controller board (PCB24) is stopped.
Energy Save
Device state for each Energy Saving state

State Energy Saving Operation Engine (Printer) HDD CTL
LED panel
LCD
Standby/Printing ON ON ON ON ON
Printing state/Panel ON OFF ON ON ON
OFF
fusing OFF ON ON ON ON ON
(Printer is in Quiet
state)
Quiet state ON OFF ON ON ON
ON*1 (Printer is in Quiet
state)
Engine OFF Blinking Sleep OFF OFF ON
gradually OFF or ON*1 ON*1
ON*1
STR state Blinking Sleep OFF OFF STR
gradually
*1 When [Energy Saving Recovery for Business Application] is [On (Energy Saving)], ON/OFF
is determined by the internal timer of the Smart Operation Panel.
Normally, the Energy Saving state of the operation panel LCD changes in step with the
energy saving state of the MFP/LP main unit, but to support the scenario where an
application that does not use the engine (printer) is executed from the operation panel,
the Energy Saving state of the operation panel is transitioned through the three states
ON, OFF, and Sleep with its internal timer when [Energy Saving Recovery for Business
Application] is [On (Energy Saving)].
Energy Save
7.20.3 VERIFICATION OF UP TIME FOR EACH ENERGY SAVING

STATE
The up time for each power state of the machine can be checked with SP8-961 (Electricity
Descriptions
Detailed
Status). It is also output on the SMC sheet.
SP Name Description
SP8-961-001 Ctrl Standby Time Cumulative time of Engine OFF mode, Quiet mode, and
Standby mode
SP8-961-002 STR Time Cumulative time of STR mode
SP8-961-003 Main Power Off Cumulative time of state in which the power plug is
Time connected to the outlet but the main power is OFF
SP8-961-004 Reading and Cumulative time of state in which the plotter engine is
Printing Time running or warming up
SP8-961-005 Printing Time Cumulative time of the state in which the plotter engine is
running
SP8-961-007 Eng Waiting Time Cumulative time of state in which the power state of the
engine is Standby state
SP8-961-008 Low Power State Not used for this machine
Time
SP8-961-009 Quiet State Time Cumulative time of the state in which the power state of the
engine is Quiet state
SP8-961-010 Fusing Lamp Off Cumulative time of the state in which the power state of the
State Time engine is Fusing OFF state
SP8-961-011 LCD on Time Cumulative time of the state in which the backlight of the
LCD is on.
Energy Save
7.20.4 CHECKING THE UP TIME BY DEVICE STATE

SP 8941 (Machine Status) keeps a record of the amount of time that the machine spends in
each mode.
SP8-941-001 Operation Cumulative time of the state in which the engine state
Time notification is enabled.
The state in which the engine is not running (such as when
storing to HD only with the controller) is excluded from the
running state.
SP8-941-002 Standby Cumulative time of the state in which the engine state is not
Time running.
SP8-941-003 Low Power Not used for this machine
Time
SP8-941-004 Sleep mode Cumulative time in Sleep Mode state.
time
SP8-941-005 Off Mode Cumulative time in which the Energy Saving state of the device
Time is Engine OFF state.
SP8-941-006 to Down time Cumulative time in which the device is disabled because itself
009 or its component is in the following state.
• SP8-941-006: SC (excluding mode SC)
• SP8-941-007: Jam (plotter)
• SP8-941-009: Supply/PM unit end
With this data, and the power consumption values from the specifications, we can estimate the
amount of energy that is used by the machine.
This should only be used as a reference value, because the power consumption specifications
are measured in a controlled environment with a constant power supply.
To get an exact measurement at the customer’s site, a watt meter must be used to measure the
actual energy consumed.
To use SP8941 to calculate the energy consumed:
• At the start of the measurement period, read the values of SP8-941-001 to 005.
• At the end of the measurement period, read the values of SP8-941-001 to 005 again.
• Find the amount of time spent in each mode (subtract the earlier measurement from the
later measurement).
• Multiply this by the power consumption spec for each mode.
• Convert the result to kWh (kilowatt hours)
Energy Save
7.20.5 RECOMMENDATION
We recommend that the default settings related to energy saving should be kept.
• If the customer requests that these settings should be changed, please explain that their
Descriptions
Detailed
energy costs could increase, and that they should consider the effects on the environment
of extra energy use.
New Functions
7.21 NEW FUNCTIONS
7.21.1 PS3/PDF DIRECT EMULATION (CLONE PS)
Overview
This machine is equipped with a clone program for emulating Adobe PostScript/PDF (hereafter
“Clone PS”) as a standard feature. So, by default, it can perform printing using PostScript 3 and
PDF Direct Print, in addition to RPCS.
• What is Clone PS?
Based on the specifications of PostScript/PDF languages developed by Adobe, clone
programs for interpretation of PostScript and PDF documents have been created by
various companies other than Adobe. While the original program sold by the developer of
the language is named Adobe PS, compatible programs made by other manufacturers are
called clones. Strictly speaking, these clones must be fully compatible with the original
program; however, they are called clones even if they have some differences because they
cannot completely imitate the original.
Clone PS is basically designed to perform similar functions to Adobe PS, except for several
differences such as the inability to use Adobe fonts.
• Adobe PS, previously offered as an optional product for past models, is available again as
an option. (SD card option.)
• Clone PS and Adobe PS cannot be run simultaneously.
• The same printer driver can be used for Clone PS and Adobe PS.
• Clone PS emulates Adobe PostScript 3 version 3017. (The version of Adobe PS used in
the SD card option is v. 3018.)
• For the PDF Direct Print function, Clone PS emulates Adobe PDF version 1.7.
New Functions
How to Distinguish Adobe PS from Clone PS

In the operation panel screen, it is difficult to tell whether Adobe PS or Clone PS is in use.
Both “PS3” and “PDF” are shown on the screen, regardless of whether Adobe PS or Clone PS
Descriptions
is used.
Detailed
Identification can be done as follows:
The description of the Firmware Version listed on the page varies as shown below:
PS type Description of Firmware Version
Adobe PS RPCS [x.xx.xx] Adobe PostScript 3 [x.xx], Adobe PDF [x.xx]
Clone PS RPCS [x.xx.xx] PS3 [x.xx], PDF [x.xx]
The manufacturer's name “Adobe” is shown in the list if Adobe PS is used.
The description of the Firmware Version listed on the page varies as shown below:
• Web Image Monitor

Go to Status/Information > Device Info, and open the Printer Language menu.
If Adobe PS is used, the screen shows the program name “Adobe PostScript 3” and
"Adobe PDF".
New Functions
• Operation Panel: Firmware Version

Settings > System Settings > Machine/Control Panel Information > Firmware Version
When PostScript3 Unit Type M41 (Adobe PS) is installed:
New Functions
When Clone PS only:
Descriptions
Detailed
No. Module Description
Name
1 PS3 / The Clone PS firmware number appears.
IRIPS PS3 The Clone PS firmware number starts with “D0C9”.
2 PS3 The Adobe PS firmware number starts with "D0CJ" appears. This module
name appears in the firmware list only if PostScript3 Unit Type M41 is
installed.
3 PDF / The Clone PDF firmware number appears.
IRIPS PDF The Clone PDF firmware number starts with "D0C9".
4 PDF The Adobe PS firmware number starts with "D0CJ".
This module name appears in the firmware list only if PostScript3 Unit
Type M41 is installed.
New Functions
• Font Change Confirmation screen

The “Font Change Confirmation” screen is accessible only when Clone PS is used.
On the Home screen, select the Settings icon > Printer Settings > PS Menu > Font Change
Confirmation.
Difference in Device Fonts

The variety and number of built-in fonts (device fonts) differ between Adobe PS and Clone PS.
PS type Number of European fonts
Adobe PS 136 fonts
Clone PS 93 fonts
For license reasons, the device fonts for Adobe PS cannot be handled by Clone PS. Instead,
Clone PS is equipped with fonts similar to Adobe device fonts under different names; when an
Adobe PS font is specified in the data to be printed, Clone PS will replace it with a similar font.
Use of a substitute font sometimes leads to different printing results, as shown in the table
below.
Example 1
PS Helvetica
type
Adobe
PS
Clone
PS
When Helvetica is used in the original document, Clone PS applies a substitute font
named NimbusSans-Regular, maintaining almost the same appearance as the original
data.
New Functions
Example 2
PS LetterGothic
type
Adobe
Descriptions
PS
Detailed
Clone
PS
When LetterGothic is originally used, Clone PS substitutes it with LetterGothic-Regular.
In this case, the character spacing differs from that in the original data.
Example 3
PS type Chicago
Adobe
PS
Clone
PS
Clone PS does not support alternative fonts for Chicago; instead, the Courier font (*) is
used. (The font shape differs significantly from Chicago.)
* Since Courier itself is named among the Adobe PS device fonts, Clone PS substitutes
it with an alternative font, NimbusMonoPS-Regular.
Font Change Confirmation Screen

Clone PS itself incorporates no Adobe fonts in it, and therefore replaces them with similar fonts
when Adobe PS fonts are specified in the print data output to the printer.
However, there is a possibility that a substitute font not desired by the customer may be used; to
cope with this issue, the operation panel shows a confirmation screen whenever an Adobe font
is to be replaced by a similar font.
New Functions
If the customer often prints data containing Adobe fonts that are almost the same in terms of
spacing and shape as their substitutes, the confirmation screen appears every time printing is
performed, making the printing operation cumbersome. In such a case, the font change
confirmation screen can be hidden.
• "Settings" icon on Home screen > Printer Settings > PS Menu > Font Change Confirmation
List of fonts and their replacements (Adobe PS -> Clone PS)

No. Adobe PS Clone PS
1 Courier NimbusMonoPS-Regular
2 Courier-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Bold
3 Courier-BoldOblique NimbusMonoPS-BoldItalic
4 Courier-Oblique NimbusMonoPS-Italic
5 Helvetica NimbusSans-Regular
6 Helvetica-Bold NimbusSans-Bold
7 Helvetica-BoldOblique NimbusSans-BoldOblique
8 Helvetica-Oblique NimbusSans-Oblique
9 Symbol StandardSymL
10 Times-Bold NimbusRoman-Bold
11 Times-BoldItalic NimbusRoman-BoldItalic
12 Times-Italic NimbusRoman-Italic
13 Times-Roman NimbusRoman-Regular
14 AlbertusMT NimbusMonoPS-Regular
15 AlbertusMT-Italic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
16 AlbertusMT-Light NimbusMonoPS-Regular
17 AntiqueOlive-Roman NimbusMonoPS-Regular
18 AntiqueOlive-Italic AntiqueOlive-Italic
19 AntiqueOlive-Bold AntiqueOlive-Bold
20 AntiqueOlive-Compact NimbusMonoPS-Regular
22 Apple-Chancery NimbusMonoPS-Regular
22 ArialMT NimbusSansNo2-Regular
23 Arial-ItalicMT NimbusSansNo2-Italic
24 Arial-BoldMT NimbusSansNo2-Bold
New Functions
25 Arial-BoldItalicMT NimbusSansNo2-BoldItalic
26 AvantGarde-Book URWGothic-Book
27 AvantGarde-BookOblique URWGothic-BookOblique
28 AvantGarde-Demi URWGothic-Demi
Descriptions
Detailed
29 AvantGarde-DemiOblique URWGothic-DemiOblique
30 Bodoni NimbusMonoPS-Regular
31 Bodoni-Italic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
32 Bodoni-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Regular
33 Bodoni-BoldItalic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
34 Bodoni-Poster NimbusMonoPS-Regular
35 Bodoni-PosterCompressed NimbusMonoPS-Regular
36 Bookman-Light URWBookman-Light
37 Bookman-LightItalic URWBookman-LightItalic
38 Bookman-Demi URWBookman-Demi
39 Bookman-DemiItalic URWBookman-DemiItalic
40 Carta NimbusMonoPS-Regular
41 Chicago NimbusMonoPS-Regular
42 Clarendon NimbusMonoPS-Regular
43 Clarendon-Light NimbusMonoPS-Regular
44 Clarendon-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Regular
45 CooperBlack NimbusMonoPS-Regular
46 CooperBlack-Italic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
47 Copperplate-ThirtyTwoBC NimbusMonoPS-Regular
48 Copperplate-ThirtyThreeBC NimbusMonoPS-Regular
49 Coronet-Regular NimbusMonoPS-Regular
50 Eurostile NimbusMonoPS-Regular
51 Eurostile-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Regular
52 Eurostile-ExtendedTwo NimbusMonoPS-Regular
53 Eurostile-BoldExtendedTwo NimbusMonoPS-Regular
54 Geneva NimbusMonoPS-Regular
55 GillSans NimbusMonoPS-Regular
56 GillSans-Italic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
57 GillSans-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Regular
58 GillSans-BoldItalic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
59 GillSans-Condensed NimbusMonoPS-Regular
60 GillSans-BoldCondensed NimbusMonoPS-Regular
61 GillSans-Light NimbusMonoPS-Regular
62 GillSans-LightItalic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
New Functions
63 GillSans-ExtraBold NimbusMonoPS-Regular
64 Goudy NimbusMonoPS-Regular
65 Goudy-Italic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
66 Goudy-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Regular
67 Goudy-BoldItalic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
68 Goudy-ExtraBold NimbusMonoPS-Regular
69 Helvetica-Condensed NimbusMonoPS-Regular
70 Helvetica-Condensed-Oblique NimbusMonoPS-Regular
71 Helvetica-Condensed-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Regular
72 Helvetica-Condensed-BoldObl NimbusMonoPS-Regular
73 Helvetica-Narrow NimbusSansNarrow-Regular
74 Helvetica-Narrow-Oblique NimbusSansNarrow-Oblique
75 Helvetica-Narrow-Bold NimbusSansNarrow-Bold
76 Helvetica-Narrow-BoldOblique NimbusSansNarrow-BoldOblique
77 HoeflerText-Regular NimbusMonoPS-Regular
78 HoeflerText-Italic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
79 HoeflerText-Black NimbusMonoPS-Regular
80 HoeflerText-BlackItalic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
81 HoeflerText-Ornaments NimbusMonoPS-Regular
82 JoannaMT NimbusMonoPS-Regular
83 JoannaMT-Italic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
84 JoannaMT-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Regular
85 JoannaMT-BoldItalic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
86 LetterGothic LetterGothic-Regular
87 LetterGothic-Slanted NimbusMonoPS-Regular
88 LetterGothic-Bold LetterGothic-Bold
89 LetterGothic-BoldSlanted NimbusMonoPS-Regular
90 LubalinGraph-Book NimbusMonoPS-Regular
91 LubalinGraph-BookOblique NimbusMonoPS-Regular
92 LubalinGraph-Demi NimbusMonoPS-Regular
93 LubalinGraph-DemiOblique NimbusMonoPS-Regular
94 Marigold Mauritius-Regular
95 Monaco NimbusMonoPS-Regular
96 MonaLisa-Recut NimbusMonoPS-Regular
97 NewCenturySchlbk-Roman URWCenturySchoolbook-Roman
98 NewCenturySchlbk-Italic URWCenturySchoolbook-Italic
99 NewCenturySchlbk-Bold URWCenturySchoolbook-Bold
100 NewCenturySchlbk-BoldItalic URWCenturySchoolbook-BdIta
New Functions
101 NewYork NimbusMonoPS-Regular

102 Optima NimbusMonoPS-Regular
103 Optima-Italic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
104 Optima-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Regular
Descriptions
Detailed
105 Optima-BoldItalic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
106 Oxford NimbusMonoPS-Regular
107 Palatino-Roman Palladio-Roman
108 Palatino-Italic Palladio-Italic
109 Palatino-Bold Palladio-Bold
110 Palatino-BoldItalic Palladio-BoldItalic
111 StempelGaramond-Roman NimbusMonoPS-Regular
112 StempelGaramond-Italic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
113 StempelGaramond-Bold NimbusMonoPS-Regular
114 StempelGaramond-BoldItalic NimbusMonoPS-Regular
115 Tekton NimbusMonoPS-Regular
116 TimesNewRomanPSMT NimbusRomanNo9-Regular
117 TimesNewRomanPS-ItalicMT NimbusRomanNo9-Italic
118 TimesNewRomanPS-BoldMT NimbusRomanNo9-Bold
119 TimesNewRomanPS-BoldItalicMT NimbusRomanNo9-BoldItalic
120 Univers NimbusMonoPS-Regular
121 Univers-Oblique NimbusMonoPS-Regular
122 Univers-Bold URWClassicSans-Bold
123 Univers-BoldOblique NimbusMonoPS-Regular
124 Univers-Light NimbusMonoPS-Regular
125 Univers-LightOblique NimbusMonoPS-Regular
126 Univers-Condensed NimbusMonoPS-Regular
127 Univers-CondensedOblique NimbusMonoPS-Regular
128 Univers-CondensedBold NimbusMonoPS-Regular
129 Univers-CondensedBoldOblique NimbusMonoPS-Regular
130 Univers-Extended NimbusMonoPS-Regular
131 Univers-ExtendedObl NimbusMonoPS-Regular
132 Univers-BoldExt NimbusMonoPS-Regular
133 Univers-BoldExtObl NimbusMonoPS-Regular
134 Wingdings-Regular URWDingbats
135 ZapfChancery-MediumItalic URWChancery-MediumItalic
136 ZapfDingbats Dingbats
New Functions
Differences in Driver Functions

As shown below, there are differences in available driver functions between Adobe PS and
Clone PS.
1. Font Substitution Table (Applicable only to the driver for Windows OS)
Start > Device and Printer > Printer Properties > Device Settings
For Clone PS, the Font Substitution Table under the Device Settings menu will not be
displayed. Clone PS has font substitution table data similar to that of Adobe PS and
performs font replacement as appropriate.
To disable font replacement, go to Printing Preferences > Detailed Settings > “Print Quality:
Option” > “True Type Font:” option, and select “Download as SoftFont”.
2. Fonts used for unauthorized copy prevention (Common to drivers for Windows OS
and Mac OS X)
The watermark text used for unauthorized copy prevention consists of a device font. The
range of available fonts varies between Adobe PS and Clone PS because of the difference
in available device fonts.
Adobe PS provides a choice from 136 fonts while 3 fonts are selectable for Clone PS.
3. "User Setting” for dithering (Common to drivers for Windows OS and Mac OS X)
Clone PS ignores the “User Setting” option for dithering and performs dithering in the same
manner as when the “Automatic” setting (*) is selected.
New Functions
Descriptions
Detailed
* “Text Priority” is selected for text, and “Photo” for graphics and images.
In the driver menu for Mac OS X, the “User Setting” option is shown at half brightness
and cannot be selected.
7.21.2 OTHER NEW FEATURES

• Settings on Displaying an Alert When the Ethernet Cable is Broken or Disconnected
(Settings on Displaying an Alert When the Ethernet Cable is Broken or
Disconnected)
• "Web Help Support" Settings ("Web Help Support" Settings)
• "RemoteConnect Support" Settings ("RemoteConnect Support" Settings)
• "Remote Panel Operation" Settings ("Remote Panel Operation" Settings)
SMART OPERATION PANEL
Replacement and Adjustment
8. SMART OPERATION PANEL
8.1 REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT
Operation
Smart
Panel
8.1.1 MAIN CONTROLLER BOARD
1. Remove the operation panel unit. (Operation Panel)
2. Remove the bottom cover [A] ( ×4).
• There are ten hooks inside the operation panel unit. Before removing the
operation panel bottom cover, check the photos below.
3. Remove the base bracket [A].
4. Remove the main controller board [A].
Lift the fastener of the LCD I/F cable [A] on the main controller board side.
• By factory default, the following switches of the DIP switch [A] on the main controller
board are set to ON: No.1, No.3, and No.6. When installing the operation panel unit,
make sure that the DIP switch setting is correct for the MFP on which you are installing
the panel.
• The correct DIP switch setting depends on the MFP. Note the DIP switch settings of
the old operation panel unit before replacing, and apply the same settings to the new
Smart Operation Panel.
The following example is for DIP switch settings when the following switches are set to
ON: No.1, No.3, and No.6 (this is the factory default setting of a service part).
Operation
Smart
Panel
• If the DIP switch setting is wrong, SC672 will be displayed.
• DIP switch No.1 turns ON/OFF the SC reduction function. Change the setting when
needed.
• 0 (OFF): The SC is displayed on the operation panel when SC672/SC673 occur.
• 1 (ON): If the error is caused by a software defect when SC672/SC673 occur,
automatically reboot is performed and the SC is reset. If the error is caused by a
hardware defect when SC672/SC673 occur, the SC is displayed on the operation
panel.
• After replacing the main controller board, perform the following checks:
• LED Check (LED Check)
• Key Check (Key Check)
8.1.2 WI-FI MODULE (PCB21)

2. Remove the base bracket (Main Controller Board).
3. Remove the Wi-Fi module (PCB21) [A].
• After replacing the Wi-Fi module (PCB21), perform the following checks:
• Wireless LAN Check (Wireless LAN Check)
• Bluetooth Check (Bluetooth Check)
8.1.3 LCD
2. Remove the main controller board (Main Controller Board).
Operation
3. Remove the connector of the LCD I/F cable [A].
Smart
Panel
Lift the fastener of the LCD I/F cable [A].
5. Remove the LCD unit [A].
6. Remove the LCD [A].
• After replacing the LCD, perform the following checks.

• LCD Check (LCD Check)
• TouchPanel Check (TouchPanel Check)
• Perform "TouchPanel Calibration" (TouchPanel Calibration) and "MultiTouch
Calibration" (MultiTouch Calibration) of the Self Check function.
8.1.4 SPEAKER
2. Remove the bottom cover (Main Controller Board).
Operation
3. Remove the speaker [A] together with the speaker holder.
Smart
Panel
4. Remove the speaker [A] from the speaker holder [B].
• After replacing the speaker, perform the following check.

• Speaker Check (Speaker Check)
8.1.5 MICROPHONE
2. Remove the main controller board (Main Controller Board).
3. Remove the LCD unit (LCD).
4. Remove the microphone [A].
8.1.6 NFC BOARD

2. Remove the hinge cover [A].
3. Remove the cover of the NFC board [A].
4. Remove the NFC board [A].
Operation
Smart
Panel
A protective sheet [B] is attach to the surface of the NFC board [A].
Mechanism
8.2 MECHANISM
8.2.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS
Hardware Specifications
No. Name No. Name

1 Speaker 9 Microphone
2 Main power indicator 10 Extended Feature key (EX3)
3 USB slot for digital cameras 11 Extended Feature key (EX2)
4 USB slot for NFC card readers 12 Extended Feature key (EX1)
5 NFC tag 13 Control panel reboot key
6 [Check Status] indicator 14 SD card slot
7 Data In indicator (facsimile and printer modes) 15 Media access lamp
8 Fax indicator 16 USB slot
Category Specification
LCD panel • Size
10.1 inch panel
• Resolution
WSVGA (1024x600)
• Bit width
RGB666 (18 bit color)
• Brightness
250cd/m2 (typ.)
• Backlight
LED Backlight (life: 15,000 hours)
Mechanism
CPU ARM Cortex-A9 Quad Core 1GHz (SoC: MCIMX6Q5EYM10AD)
Touch panel Low load touch panel (recognizes touches to two points)
Memory • Volatile Memory
Operation
RAM (DDR3L-1066), 2GB
Smart
Panel
• Non-Volatile Memory
eMMC NAND, 8GB
• Uses a 16GB product in SLC Mode.

• Program area and data area for the operating system and
applications.
External interfaces • USB Memory
USB2.0 Host Type-A
• SD Card
SD card slot 1ch (SD*1/SDHC*2)
*1 Up to 2GB
*2 Up to 32GB
• USB expansion
USB2.0 Host Type-A
(for camera, USB keyboard, USB card reader)
• USB expansion
USB2.0 Host Type-miniB
(for NFC expansion)
Network • Wireless LAN
802.11ac/a/b/g/n (for Taiwan/China/Asia)
802.11b/g/n (2.4GHz only) (for North America/EU/Korea)
• Bluetooth
Bluetooth4.2
Audio input/output Monaural speaker 1ch (output: 1 to 2 W), Microphone
RTC accuracy ±52.56 seconds per month (using external crystal oscillator, 20 ppm)
Hard keys • Extended Feature keys (EX1, EX2, and EX3)
Use for startup in extended mode etc.
• Control panel reboot key
Use to reboot the control panel when it freezes.
LED types • Main power indicator (blue)
Lights when the power is ON. Flashes slowly in Sleep mode.
Flashes gradually in Energy Saver mode
• [Check Status] indicator lamp (red/blue)
Lights when an error occurs.
Mechanism
• Data In indicator (blue)
Flashes when the machine receives data from a printer driver or
LAN-Fax driver.
• Fax indicator (blue)
Flashes while sending or receiving a fax. Lights when there is a
received fax document in the fax memory.
• Media access lamp (blue)
Lights when there is an SD card inserted in the SD card slot.
Maximum power 4.5 W or less in standby mode (excluding external interfaces and internal
consumption feature expansions)
6 W or less when using wireless LAN (during high-load operation)
NFC Built-in NFC tag
• Made by Vanskee Enterprise
RCH-NTI2CP1K-BSA-PCB-CE-1128
• Made by SAG
SCTNX1128250R
Power consumption 0.18 W or less
in Sleep mode (When in Sleep mode, power is not supplied to USB devices connected to
the USB slots except when the IC card R / W (NFC) is connected.)
Tilt function Equipped with an angle-adjustable hinge. Clicks at the standard position.
Depending on the model, there is also a hinge-less fixed type.
Item This model Previous model

Appearance
Control panel size 274.5 × 160 mm 267 × 160 mm

(Width × Height)
Brightness of LCD 250cd/m2 (typ.) 200cd/m2 (typ.)
panel
CPU ARM Cortex-A9 Quad Core 1GHz ARM Cortex-A9 Dual Core
(SoC: MCIMX6Q5EYM10AD) 1GHz
(SoC:
MCIMX6D5EYM10AC)
Volatile Memory RAM (DDR3L-1066), 2GB RAM (DDR3-1066), 2GB
Wireless LAN 802.11ac/a/b/g/n (for 802.11b/g/n
Taiwan/China/Asia)
Mechanism
Item This model Previous model

802.11b/g/n (2.4GHz only) (for North
America/EU/Korea)
Bluetooth Bluetooth4.2 Bluetooth4.0
Operation
NFC tag Built in Not equipped
Smart
Panel
Power consumption in 0.18 W or less 0.35 W or less
Sleep mode
Japanese, English, French, German, Italian, Spanish, Dutch, Norwegian, Danish,
Swedish, Polish, Portuguese, Hungarian, Czech, Finnish, Simplified Chinese, Traditional
Chinese, Thai, Russian, Arabic, Greek, Korean, Catalan, Turkish, Brazilian Portuguese
Note: Available languages may vary depending on the machine’s specifications.
Software Specifications
A software package consisting of the Android Firmware and the manufacturer’s own
pre-installed applications is installed on the Smart Operation Panel.
The following three types of software are installed on the Smart Operation Panel.
1. Android Firmware (Android OS)
2. Pre-installed applications
3. Applications that can be installed additionally
Mechanism
The Android Firmware (Android OS) consists of the following modules that are called
“stacks”.
• Linux kernel
• Android Runtime
• Library
• Application Framework
On the Smart Operation Panel, applications such as the GW applications

(Copy/Printer/Document Server/Scanner/Fax), Control Panel Browser, the standard
keyboard, Installer, Gallery, Self Check are pre-installed. Unlike those installed on the
main controller board of the MFP, GW applications that are installed on the Smart
Operation Panel are for controlling operation and display of the Smart Operation Panel.
Pre-installed applications are provided as part of the control panel firmware (Cheetah System)
together with the Android firmware. When you update the control panel firmware using the
recovery mode or another method, the pre-installed applications will also be updated.
On the Smart Operation Panel, applications can be installed in addition to

the pre-installed applications.
Applications that can be installed include optional applications that customers can purchase,
applications that are installed only on machines sold in specific regions, and custom-made
applications.
On an MFP, applications such as Simple UI applications (Quick Copy, Quick Fax, and Quick
Scanner) and Scan to Me are installed.
Communication Specifications
The Smart Operation Panel and the GW controller are connected by a USB 2.0/3.0 cable. They
communicate with each other via the Android OS on the Smart Operation Panel, using
protocols called “OCS Library” and “Flair-API (System/Application)”.
Mechanism
Operation
Smart
Panel
Communication Details
module/signal name
OCS Library OSC stands for Operating Control Service. It is a module that controls
the control panel. The set of signals used by this module to control the
control panel are called the OCS Library.
It is used during communication between the Legacy UI (system)
module on the Smart Operation Panel and the GW module for the
following processes.
• Deciding on the display format suitable for a particular model of
the control panel, so that the intended image data can be
converted to actual image data.
• Converting touch panel operations to commands.
Flair-API Flair is the manufacturer's own communication interface between
(System/Application) software modules. The interface uses a generic WebAPI.
It is divided into two parts: a part that communicates directly with
applications such as the application manager, Home, Authentication,
Banner, Check Status, and Widgets, and a part that monitors
Mechanism
Communication Details
module/signal name
applications. It communicates with the GW controller via the CATS
module.
CATS CATS stands for Cheetah Application Total System. It is a module in
the GW controller.
Because the Smart Operation Panel uses the Android OS, the contents
and protocols of communication are not the same as those of the
conventional control panel. CATS serves as an intermediary between
the GW controller and the Smart Operation Panel.
It also controls the power status of the control panel.
CATS communicates with the Smart Operation Panel using the
Flair-API, and communicates with the GW module using the GW-API.
GW-IPC The name of the interface used among modules in the GW controller.
The role is the same as that of the Flair-API.
• API stands for Application Programming Interface. An API is an interface that software
modules use in order to communicate with each other.
Mechanism
8.2.2 PANEL COMPONENTS/SCREEN LAYOUT
Components of the Control Panel
Operation
Smart
Panel
No. Name Description
1 Display panel Displays icons for functions and applications. Displays the
operation screens, operation keys and other information.
2 Speaker Produces the operation and warning sounds.
3 Main power indicator Indicates power OFF/ON, and energy saving status.
4 USB slot for digital You can connect the optional numeric keypad and digital cameras.
cameras
5 USB slot for NFC You can connect the authentication card reader/writer and devices
card readers supporting near-field communication (NFC).
6 NFC tag Used to connect the machine and a smart device with the RICOH
simple input and output.
7 [Check Status] Indicates system status.
indicator
8 Data In indicator Flashes when the machine receives data from a printer driver or
LAN-Fax driver.
9 Fax indicator Indicates fax status.
• During communication: Flashes
• When fax documents have been received using Substitute
Reception: Lights
• When the machine has received a confidential fax document:
Lights
10 Microphone There is currently no function that uses this.
11 Extended Feature Used for system maintenance, such as control panel self-check.
key (EX3)
Mechanism

key (EX2)
key (EX1)
14 Control panel reboot Used when rebooting the control panel.
key
15 SD card slot Insert an SD card here.
16 Media access lamp Lights when an external media is inserted into the SD card slot or
the USB slot.
17 USB slot Insert a USB memory device here.
Panel Display

1 [Function] Users can assign shortcuts for each application. Up to three applications
keys can be assigned as shortcuts. When an application is assigned as a
function key, users can call the application from any screen. Users can
assign the application to each function key at [Settings] > [System
Settings] > [Display/Input] > [Key/Keyboard/Input Assistance] > [Function
Key Settings].
2 [System System messages are displayed in this area. If there are multiple
messages] messages to be displayed, they are displayed alternately. Tapping the
key message opens a dialog which shows all the messages.
3 [Help] key This icon is displayed when Help is available for the displayed screen or
Mechanism

errors occurring when the machine is connected to the Internet.
Specify [Cookie] in the control panel browser to [ON] to display Help
properly.
Operation
4 [Energy Enters Sleep mode.
Smart
Panel
Saver] key
5 [Switch Press to scroll the screens right and left. The Home screen has 5
Screens] key screens.You can switch between the screens by flicking.
6 [Application Displays the list of installed applications.
List] key
7 [Current Shows which of the five screens is currently displayed.
display
position] key
8 [Stop] key Stops the scanning of a document, fax transmission, or printing to paper.
9 [Menu] key Displays the menu screen of the application in use. May not be available
depending on the application.
10 [Home] key Displays the Home screen.
11 [Back] key Use this to go back to the previous screen when the Settings screen or the
screen of an application is displayed.
12 [Media] key Displays icons when a USB flash drive or SD card is inserted.
By pressing this key, you can choose the media to remove and use.
Depending on the media, one of the following icons appear.
USB icon (key)
SD card icon (key)
USB/SD icon (key)
13 [Check You can check the status of the MFP, each function, and the current job.
Status] key You can also check the job history and maintenance information of the
MFP.
Mechanism
Login user information and login/logout key also appear.

1 [User icon] key You can configure the authentication setting. This key appears when
someone is logging in. If pressed after logging in, the login user name
appears for a while in the login user information display area.
2 [Login/Logout] key This key is displayed if the authentication function is enabled. By
pressing [Login], the login menu appears. If you have already logged
in, [Logout] appears. By pressing [Logout], you can log out.
3 Login user The name of the user logging in appears in this area. By pressing the
information display [User icon] key, the name of the user logging in appears for
area approximately 5 seconds (and then automatically switches back to
displaying the function keys.)

1 Extended This icon is displayed if [Settings] > [System Settings] > [Settings for
Security icon Administrator] > [Security] > [Extended Security Settings] > [Enhance File
Protection] is set to [On].
2 Overwrite icon Displays the hard disk overwrite status when [Settings] > [System
Settings] > [Settings for Administrator] > [Data Management] > [Auto Erase
Memory Setting] is set to [On].
Mechanism
8.2.3 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Operation Panel Unit
Operation
Smart
Panel
Touch Panel
The touch panel of this machine uses a 4-wire resistive film method (low load resistive film
analog 4-wire method). It can detect two points for flick/drag/pinch-in/pinch-out operations.
Resistive touch panel has been adopted in order to allow operation with a prosthetic hand.
An analog 4-wire resistive film touch panel has 2 layers. Two materials (mainly film or
glass) with transparent conductive film (ITO) are attached such that the transparent
conductive film layers face each other.
When the film is pressed with a finger or a pen, the transparent conductive films [C] contact
each other and the touch panel operation is recognized.
Insulators (spacing dots [A]) secure space between the two transparent conductive film layers
to prevent short-circuiting.
Because the transparent conductive film [C] has a uniform resistance characteristic, the
resistance value reflects the distance of contact.
Mechanism
[A]: Spacing dot

[B]: PET film
[C]: Transparent conductive film
[D]: Base glass
[E]: LCD panel
With the Multi-touch calibration in the self-check function, the touch panel is
automatically calibrated using the results of touches to the top left and bottom right
positions.
The values of “EVR_X”, “EVR_Y”, “X_MAX”, and “Y_MAX” are used for internal processing.
They do not indicate the positions or distance of the touched points. There is no problem unless
there is a huge difference between the values of the first calibration and the second calibration.
Mechanism
8.2.4 CONTROLLING THE POWER SUPPLY
Exiting Energy Saving Modes

Because this model of Smart Operation Panel has no hardware keys, the MFP exits from
Operation
Smart
Panel
energy saving mode when the user does one of the following:
• Touches the display panel
• Lifts the ADF
• Sets an original in the ADF
Screen Startup Mode

There are two screen startup modes. The factory default setting is Normal.
1. Normal
This is the standard startup mode. When the main power of the MFP is turned ON, the
control panel starts up using less power compared to Quick mode.
2. Quick
By preparing for the next startup when the machine shuts down, the control panel starts up
faster than in Normal mode.
Screen Startup Mode can be changed in Screen Features Settings.
Select [Settings] > [System Settings] > [Machine] > [Power/Energy Saving] > [Control Panel
Startup Mode], and then select [Normal] or [Quick].
Mechanism
• In the following cases, the control panel starts up in Normal mode even if [Quick] is
selected.
• The power cord has been disconnected from the power outlet after the last
shutdown.
• The MFP is turned ON after being turned OFF due to reasons such as a power
failure.
• The MFP was not properly shut down the last time it was turned OFF.
In Normal mode
The startup screen is displayed on the display panel, followed by the startup animation.
In Quick mode
The [Home] screen is displayed immediately after the main power of the MFP is turned ON. The
startup screen displayed when starting in Normal mode is not displayed.
When Quick mode is selected, the MFP prepares for the next startup when it shuts
down. The main power indicator flashes during preparation for the next startup. The
indicator turns OFF when preparation is completed.
If the MFP is turned ON during shutdown, the preparation for the next startup continues. When
preparation for the next startup is completed, the control panel starts up in Quick mode.
• When Quick mode is selected, the control panel starts up faster than in Normal mode
but shutdown takes longer than in Normal mode.
Mechanism
Shutdown Functions
The shutdown functions and their uses are as follows.
Shutdown Use Operation
mode
Operation
Smart
Normal Same as shutdown by users. Turn the main power switch (SW1)
Panel
Shutdown OFF.
Forced When normal shutdown does not Hold the main power switch
shutdown complete even though you waited a long (SW1) 6 seconds or longer.
time.
Shutdown for • When you have to disconnect the Turn the main power switch (SW1)
parts power cord from the power outlet, OFF while holding down [Stop].
replacement such as when replacing parts. Continue to hold down the [Stop]
• When you want to start the machine key until the shutdown screen is
normally and then enter recovery displayed.
mode, without changing the Startup
mode in [Control Panel Startup
Mode]. (For updating control panel
firmware)
Shutdown for When you are going to turn ON the MFP Turn the main power switch (SW1)
software within 5 minutes for updating the MFP OFF while holding down the [EX1]
update firmware or package. key. Continue to hold down the
(Use shutdown for parts replacement if [Stop] key until the shutdown
you are updating the control panel screen is displayed.
firmware.)
The MFP is equipped with a function to shut down safely in order to:
• Prevent damage to the file systems in the HDD and the NAND flash memory.
• Prevent paper from being left inside the body of the MFP (except when paper is jammed).
The shutdown process begins when the main power switch (SW1) is pressed. To make a forced
shutdown, press and hold the main power switch (SW1) for 6 seconds. However, if you force a
shutdown during the shutdown process, data being processed may be lost. Forced shutdown is
to be used to shut down the MFP without disconnecting the power cord when the shutdown
process cannot be completed.
Mechanism
This MFP has two additional shutdown functions to facilitate maintenance.

Shutting down the MFP for parts replacement (Starting up in Normal mode when Quick
mode is selected)
When Quick mode is selected, the MFP prepares for the next startup when it shuts down. This
causes the shutdown process to take longer than when Normal mode is selected.
If you need to disconnect the power cord after shutdown in order to replace parts or for other
reasons, you can use the following procedure to shut down the MFP just like you do in Normal
mode. This shortens the time it takes to shut down the MFP.
• Procedure
Turn the main power switch (SW1) OFF while holding down the [Stop] key on the control
panel. Continue to hold down the [Stop] key until the shutdown screen is displayed.
Shutting down the MFP for software updates (Shutting down the MFP with the control
panel in Sleep mode)
If you are going to turn ON the MFP within 5 minutes, you can use the following procedure to
shut down the MFP with the control panel in Sleep mode.
• Procedure
Turn the main power switch (SW1) OFF while holding down the [EX1] key. Continue to hold
down the [EX1] key until the shutdown screen is displayed.
• You must turn ON the MFP within 5 minutes.

• If more than 5 minutes has elapsed after shutting down the MFP using the above
procedure, the machine starts up in Normal mode even if Quick mode is selected.
System Maintenance
8.3 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
8.3.1 MAINTENANCE MODES
Operation
Smart
Panel
Service program (SP) modes for the Smart Operation Panel are as follows:
Mode Use Notes
SP Mode (MFP) SP modes for the MFP The numeric keys are required to enter this
(controller, engine) mode. Display the application where soft keys
are displayed or the soft keys of the SP mode.
Service mode SP modes for the Smart Same as above
(operation Operation Panel.
panel) • Changing SP mode
settings in the Screen
Features Settings menu.
• Installing and updating
applications that can be
installed
Recovery mode Maintenance modes for the -
Android OS
• Updating firmware
• Initializing all data
8.3.2 LOGIN TO/LOGOUT FROM CONTROL PANEL SERVICE

MODE
Login
In the same way as you log in to the SP Mode on the MFP, you use the soft keys to enter a
combination of numbers in order to login to the service mode of the control panel.
• You cannot log in to the service mode of the control panel when one of the following
screens is displayed.
• Stop All Jobs
• Settings
• Address Book Management
Use the numeric keys on one of the following screens.
• Soft keys on the application screen where soft keys appear
• Soft keys for the control panel’s service mode (displayed by pressing both the [EX3] key
and [Check Status] at the same time)
System Maintenance
• To exit the soft keys, press [EXIT] on the screen.
Login Status Indicator

When you log in to the control panel’s service mode, the Screen Features Settings screen is
displayed.
• “Service” is displayed in the login information area [A].
• [Logout] is displayed in the Login key area [B] to allow logout from the service mode.
Logout
Press [Logout] to log out from the control panel’s service mode.
• You need to logout manually because the Auto Logout function does not work.
Depending on the authentication settings of the MFP, the following screen is displayed after you
log out.
System Maintenance
Authentication settings
Administrator authentication: OFF Administrator authentication: ON Administrator
User authentication: OFF User authentication: OFF authentication: ON
User authentication: ON
Operation
Screen of the function selected in Screen of the function selected in [Home] screen
Smart
Panel
[Function Priority] [Function Priority]
When Entry to Service Mode Is Prohibited by the Administrator

The administrator of the MFP can prohibit entry into the control panel’s service mode by
enabling [Settings] > [System Settings] > [Settings for Administrator] > [Security] > [Service
Mode Lock].
When [Service Mode Lock] is enabled, the machine does not enter the service mode even if
you enter the number combination for the control panel’s service mode. There will be beeping
sounds to indicate login failure.
• The machine can enter the recovery mode even if [Service Mode Lock] is enabled.
8.3.3 SERVICE MODE MENU

There are four menus of settings.
• Wireless & networks
• Device
• Personal
• System
System Maintenance
Wireless & Networks

Menu level Description
1st level 2nd level 3rd level
Wireless Group Owner Mode You can only view the setting.
Direct
Settings
Connection Password You can only view the setting.
DHCP Server IP Address You can only view the setting.
DHCP IP Address Range You can only view the setting.
Select Channel You can only view the setting.
Fix SSID You can only view the setting.
PEER DEVICES View and configure devices that can
be connected.
REMEMBERED Displays groups that have been
GROUPS previously connected.
Bluetooth ON/OFF You can only view the setting.
SEARCH FOR DEVICES Scans for Bluetooth devices in the
vicinity.
(name of this device) You can only view the setting.
PAIRED DEVICES View and configure paired devices.
AVAILABLE DEVICES View and configure available
devices.
Port Port Forwarding Settings Port Requests sent to the wireless LAN
Forwarding Forwarding unit of the Smart Operation Panel
to Machine Config 1-20 can be forwarded to the controller of
the MFP. You can enable or disable
ports to forward these requests.
MTU PathMTU(Enable/Disable) Enables/disables the PathMTU size
Settings set in [MTU Size]. When you change
this setting, the control panel
restarts.
MTU Size Sets the size of PathMTU. Default:
1500.
System Maintenance
Device
1st level 2nd level 3rd level
Operation
Storage & Internal Used and Total Displays the used size and total size of the
Smart
Panel
USB storage Storage Capacity internal storage.
SD CARD*1 Used and Total SD Displays the used size and total size of the SD
Card Capacity card.
Safely Remove *To remove the SD card, click the or
Hardware icon ( ) icon instead of the Safely Remove Hardware
icon ( ).
USB Used and Total Displays the used size and total size of the
STORAGE*2 USB Storage USB stroage device.
Capacity *To remove the USB flash drive, click the
Safely Remove or icon instead of the Safely Remove
Hardware icon ( ) Hardware icon ( ).
Apps Install Install from SD Install or update applications from an SD card.
Card
Install from Server Enter a product key to install or update
applications from the server.
Application Site Start up Application Site.
Activate Activate applications that have been installed
Applications from the server.
Update Update applications that have been installed.
Applications
Uninstall Uninstall applications.
Install From Install applications from internal storage.
Internal Storage
Check Server Check if you can connect to the Server.
Connect
Firmware update Update the firmware from the SD card set in
the operation panel slot. If the SD card is not
inserted, an error message is displayed.
*1 Displayed only when an SD card is inserted into the SD card slot of the operation panel.
*2 Displayed only when an USB storage device is inserted into the USB slot of the operation
panel.
System Maintenance
Personal
1st level 2nd level 3rd
level
Language & Registration - You can register the external keyboard, display the
input Keyboard connected keyboard, or remove the external
keyboard.
System
1st level 2nd level 3rd level 4th level
Screen Status Displays the following:
Device • Wireless LAN MAC
Settings address
Information • Interface Settings
• Wi-Fi settings
(ON/OFF)
• IP address
Legal information Open source Displays the open source
licenses license information.
System Displays the license of the
WebView system used in this
Licences machine.
Wallpapers Displays the copy light of
the picture of the wallpaper.
Software Version Version List Displays the versions of
List Record operation panel firmware
Save to SD and installed applications.
Card*1 When saving the software
version list on an SD card,
insert an SD card into the
SD card slot of the
operation panel, and then
press [Save to SD Card].
Operation Panel Displays the hardware
Kind information of the operation
panel with a 4-digit code.
1st digit: LCD size
• 1: 10.1"
System Maintenance

• 2: 7"
• 3: 17"
Operation
2nd digit: LCD vendor
Smart
Panel
• 0: AUO
• 1: INNOLUX
• 2: Dongbond
• 5: AUO
• 6: Giantplus
3rd digit: eMMC version
• 5: Version 4.41
• 7: Version 5.00
• 8: Version 5.10
4th digit: PCB vendor
• N: NEC
• R: RICOH
Screen Use of External Screen SD Card Specify the SD card slot
Device Interface slot availability on the Smart
Settings Operation Panel.
When [Inactive] is selected,
no power is available
because the hardware is
deactivated.
Screen USB Port Specify the USB port
1 to 3 availability on the Smart
Operation Panel for each
USB port.
When [Inactive] is selected,
no power is available
because the hardware is
deactivated.
Prohibit Use of Wi-Fi If you select [Prohibit] for
External (Do not this setting, the Wi-Fi
Interface Prohibit / function is automatically set
Prohibit) to [OFF] and the Wi-Fi
function setting is hidden at
[Settings] > [System
Settings] >
System Maintenance

[Network/Interface] >
[Control Panel: Wireless
LAN].
If you select [Do not
prohibit] for this setting, the
Wi-Fi function setting in
LAN] is displayed. The
setting remains unchanged.
Wireless If you select [Prohibit] for
Direct this setting, the Wireless
(Do not Direct function is
Prohibit / automatically set to [OFF]
Prohibit) and the Wireless Direct
Settings] >
LAN].
Wireless Direct function
setting in [Control Panel:
Wireless LAN] is displayed.
The setting remains
unchanged.
Bluetooth If you select [Prohibit] for
(Do not this setting, the Bluetooth
Prohibit / function is automatically set
Prohibit) to [OFF] and the Bluetooth
Settings] >
[Bluetooth].
System Maintenance

Bluetooth function setting in
Operation
[Bluetooth] is displayed. The
Smart
Panel
Screen If you select [Prohibit] for
SD Card this setting, the Screen SD
Slot Card Slot function is
(Do not automatically set to [OFF]
Prohibit / and [Control Panel SD Card
Prohibit) Slot] is hidden at [Settings]
> [System Settings] >
[Machine] > [External
Device].
prohibit] for this setting,
[Control Panel SD Card
Slot] is displayed. The
Screen If you select [Prohibit] for
USB this setting, the Screen USB
Memory Memory Slot function is
Slot automatically set to [OFF]
(Do not and [Control Panel USB
Prohibit / Memory Slot] is hidden at
Prohibit) [Settings] > [System
Settings] > [Machine] >
[External Device].
prohibit] for this setting,
[Control Panel USB Memory
Slot] is displayed. The
Server Settings Port number Input a port number for
communication with the
import/export and RFU
server. The input number is
used for both HTTP and
System Maintenance

HTTPS connections.
(Normally, input a number
within 55101-55111.)
Home Key Settings Home Key You can change the
Settings transition destination except
for the Home screen when
pushing the [Home] icon.
Home Key Normal mode:
Assignment In addition to pressing the
Mode [Home] icon, in all statuses
such as logout and restoring
from lower power display
mode, the screen transitions
to the destination which the
user set with [Home Key
Application].
UI change mode:
The screen transitions to
the destination which the
user set with [Home Key
Application] only when you
press the [Home] icon.
Home Key You can set the application
Application of the transition destination
when pressing the [Home]
icon.
Show default You can specify whether the
Home for guest user can access the
unauthenticated application selected in
user [Home Key Application]
when user authentication is
set to ON.
System Home You can use this setting only
Key Icon when [Home Key
Settings Assignment Mode] is [ON]
and [UI Change Mode] is
selected in [Home Key
System Maintenance

Assignment Mode].
You cannot set other than
Operation
the above because of high
Smart
Panel
brightness.
Application Displays a list of installed
Settings applications.
If you press [SETTINGS] for
an application, the setting
screen for the CE is
displayed. The screen does
not change if the application
has no setting items.
Recovery by Recovery by This setting gives priority to
Authentication Authentication the recovery time from
Priority Priority energy saving modes when
an IC card authentication
device is connected.
When this setting is
selected, the MFP does not
enter Engine OFF mode,
and always recovers from
Silent mode.
Start Time You can specify the start
(hh:mm) time of Authentication
priority mode.
Note: This can be changed
only when [Recovery by
Authentication Priority] is
deselected.
Period (Hours) You can specify the period
of validity of Authentication
priority mode.
Note: This can be changed
only when [Recovery by
Authentication Priority] is
deselected.
Backup/Restore Specify whether to enable
System Maintenance

Settings or disable backups and
restore backup data.
Screen device This setting prevents the
always-connection operation panel from
Setting entering Sleep mode, so
that Bluetooth and other
communication devices
remain connected.
When this setting is
selected, the operation
panel does not enter Sleep
mode. Only the LCD
(display panel) turns OFF.
Intelligent Voice Specify whether or not to
Control display the AI Speaker Link
Setting Menu.
Inactive: hide
Active: view
If deactivated, the function
itself is turned OFF.
Panel Self Check Starts self-diagnosis of the
operation panel.
(Panel Self Check)
*1 This can be pressed only when an SD card is inserted to the SD card slot of the operation
panel.
System Maintenance
8.3.4 PANEL SELF CHECK

The following are available as self-diagnostics functions of the control panel:
• LED Check
Operation
• Key Check
Smart
Panel
• LCD Check
• TouchPanel Calibration
• Bluetooth Check
• Speaker Check
• TouchPanel Check
• Wireless LAN Check
• MultiTouch Calibration
• eMMC Erasure Count
• MultiTouch sensitivity Adjustment
*The [microSD Erasure Count] menu can not be used with this machine.
• The [Self Check] menu is displayed in either English or Japanese. The language can
be changed using [Change Language] in the Home screen.
• If an unavailable language is selected, English will be displayed.
• With some diagnostic items, press [Back] [A] at the bottom of the screen to return to
the top menu of [Self Check].
System Maintenance
LED Check
Select the [All Light On] check box, and make sure the following LEDs light:
• Data In indicator (facsimile and printer modes)
• Fax indicator
• [Check Status] indicator (flashes in red and orange alternately)
• Operation call light (if attached) (lights in red/blue)
When the check is completed, press [Back] to return to the top menu of [Self Check].
Key Check
Check if the Extended Feature keys on the left side of the control panel (EX1, EX2, EX3 from
top to bottom) are functioning normally. If they are functioning normally, the key will turn green
when pressed.
[FOOT SW] is not used.
When the check is completed, press [End] to return to the top menu of [Self Check].
System Maintenance
LCD Check
Visually inspect the color of the LCD. The displayed colors are white/black/red/green/blue. The
LCD changes to the next color when you press it.
Operation
Smart
Panel
The check is completed when all colors have been displayed. The screen returns to the top
menu of [Self Check].
TouchPanel Calibration
Calibrate the touch panel by touching the center of each of the five “+” signs.
The five “+” signs are displayed in the order of top left, bottom right, bottom left, center, and top
right.
After you have touched the five “+” signs, the display switches to the [Retry/OK] screen.
• If you want to calibrate again, press [EX1].
• If you want to confirm that the calibration results are OK, press the [EX3] key to return to
System Maintenance
Bluetooth Check
Check and configure the Bluetooth device connection.
• You cannot switch Bluetooth to [ON] or [OFF] from the [Self Check] menu. Before
checking the Bluetooth device connection, specify [ON] for [Bluetooth] in [Settings] >
[System Settings] > [Network/Interface] > [Bluetooth].
System Maintenance
Speaker Check
Tests the speaker by playing the reference sound.
1. Select the frequency (220Hz, 440Hz, 880Hz, 1760Hz, or 2000Hz).
2. Press [START/STOP] to play the sound.
Operation
3. Touch the volume bar, and play the sound at minimum and maximum volumes.
Smart
Panel
4. Press [START/STOP] to stop the sound.
TouchPanel Check
For each of the nine reference points on the screen, the distance between the detected pressed
position and the nearest reference point is displayed. The distance is displayed continually near
each reference point.
If all the distances between each detected pressed position and the nearest of the five
reference points on the screen (at the four corners and the center) are within ±12px, the [OK]
button appears. (However, even when the [OK] button is being displayed, if you press the
screen again and the distance exceeds ±12px, the [OK] button disappears.)
System Maintenance
If you press the [OK] button, the inspection implementation status switches to “Adjusted” and
the screen returns to the self-inspection menu.
If you press the [Back] key, the inspection implementation status does not switch and the
screen returns to the self-inspection menu.
Wireless LAN Check

Checks the condition of the wireless LAN connection.
When you select the connected access point, the signal strength, IP address and other
information are displayed.
System Maintenance
MultiTouch Calibration
Calibrate the touch panel for multi-tap input methods such as pinch-in/pinch-out.
Operation
Touch the center of both “+” signs. The two “+” signs are displayed in the order of top left and
Smart
Panel
bottom right. Repeat the procedure. The touch panel will be calibrated.
• If you want to adjust it again, press the [EX1] key.
• If you want to confirm that the calibration results are OK, press the [EX3] key to return to
• The values of “EVR_X”, “EVR_Y”, “X_MAX”, and “Y_MAX” are for internal processing
and do not indicate the positions or distance of the points touched. There is no
problem unless there is a huge difference between the values of the first calibration
and the second calibration.
eMMC Erasure Count

Displays the status of the eMMC Erasure Count and the current number of times of rewriting.
System Maintenance
MultiTouch Sensitivity Adjustment

Adjusts the MultiTouch sensitivity of the operation panel.
Check the influence of external noise. If the detection level is 3 or higher, adjustment is
necessary.
The sensitivity level can be adjusted between "0" and "10". The default setting is "10". If set to
"0", the MultiTouch function is turned off.
• Sensitivity level: 10 (Default)
• Sensitivity level: 0 (MultiTouch function off.)
If the sensitivity level is set to "0", the MultiTouch function is turned off
and you cannot pinch in or out.
• If the sensitivity level is set between "1" and "9", the distance between the 2 points for
detecting MultiTouch increases as the sensitivity level is decreased. At the default setting
(sensitivity level 10), MultiTouch is detected for a distance of approximately 3 cm between
the 2 points. At sensitivity level 1, MultiTouch is detected for a distance of approximately 4
cm between the 2 points.
Press [Detect level confirmation].
System Maintenance
1. Keep your finger on the cross at the top right.
Operation
Smart
Panel
2. Check the result. If the detection level is "3" or "4", adjust the MultiTouch sensitivity.
3. Use [V] or [^] to adjust the sensitivity level.
System Maintenance
8.3.5 RECOVERY MODE

The recovery mode menu is as follows. Ask your manager for details on how to enter Recovery
mode.
Menu Description
reboot system Reboots the Android OS.
now
apply update from Updates the Cheetah System firmware by specifying the folder path.
sdcard
wipe data/factory Deletes all installed applications and all settings on the Cheetah.
reset
wipe cache Deletes all data that is stored on the cache partition. Currently, Cheetah does
partition not use the cache partition, so nothing happens when this menu item is
accessed.
wipe free area Deletes all data that is stored on the free partition. Cheetah stores the version
partition history on the free partition. When this menu item is selected, it will then
disappear.
wipe LegacyUI Deletes Legacy UI.
area
micon update Updates Keymicon by specifying the folder path.
from sdcard
view recovery Displays the recovery log.
logs
• If [Settings] > [System Settings] > [Settings for Administrator] > [Security] > [Extended
Security Settings] > [Update Firmware] is set to [Prohibit], the control panel cannot
enter the recovery mode.
• Ask your manager for information on how to enter the recovery Mode.
8.3.6 SPECIAL KEY COMBINATIONS
Function Operation for Smart Operation Panel

Resetting Settings In the Settings screen, press a Settings category while holding
down the EX3 key.
Available for: System Settings, Copier/Document Server Settings,
and Scanner Settings.
System Reset Hold down the EX3 key and [#] simultaneously for 10 seconds.
Resets the controller software of the main machine.
Application Reset Hold down the EX3 key and [9] simultaneously for 10 seconds.
System Maintenance
Function Operation for Smart Operation Panel

Resets a single application.
Resetting User Code Hold down [Reset] for 2 seconds.
Authentication Returns to the User Code entry screen.
Operation
Smart
Panel
8.3.7 BACKUP/RESTORE FOR SMART OPERATION PANEL
APPLICATION/SETTINGS FUNCTION
Overview
Application settings and additional applications installed on the Smart Operation Panel can be
backed up automatically and can be restored, e.g. after Smart Operation Panel replacement.
In Cheetah SP mode, select [Screen Device Settings]> [Backup / Restore Settings].
System application settings*1

• Standard application settings*1
• Pre-install application settings*1
• Add-on applications (including hybrids)*2
*1: The system application, standard installed application, and pre-installed application are
installed in MultiLink-Panel, so the application itself is not backed up or restored after
replacement.
*2: Add-on applications settings are not backed up or restored.
Backup
• After replacing the smart operation panel, if the version of the cheetah system
firmware is older than a certain version, update it to a later version.
• Backup cannot be performed manually by the user or the technician.
• During the backup, the message being backed up is displayed and other operations
cannot be performed.
• A backup is performed 24 hours after the last backup. If the machine doesn’t have backup
data, the first backup is performed at 2:00AM.
• A backup cannot be performed under any of the conditions below. Backup will retry 1 hour
later.
• During ARFU, firmware updating from download site, etc
• LCD on the operation panel: ON.
• HDD cannot be accessed for 60 sec.
• If the backup data has not changed, no backup will be performed. (Maximum - 7 days)
• During the backup, the LCD is off.
• Backup data is stored on the HDD.
System Maintenance
• The amount of time for the backup is as follows:

Example:
Data Backup time
Additional applications 106MB 1m 6s
Application settings 0.2MB 36s
Total 106.2MB 1m 42s
The default setting is “Enabled”. To change it to “Disabled”, uncheck

“Enabled”. Restarting the machine is not necessary.
In Cheetah SP mode, select [Screen Device Settings] > [Backup/Restore Settings] In Cheetah
SP mode.
Restore
• After replacing the smart operation panel, if the version of the cheetah system
firmware is older than a certain version, update it to a later version.
• If the machine doesn’t have any backup data, the restore function cannot be used.
1. Execute [Cheetah SP mode] > [Screen Device Settings] > [Backup/Restore Settings] >
[Start Restore].
2. After a message indicating that restoration takes several minutes is displayed, touch
"execute".
A message saying please wait for a while is displayed. Time is about 10 minutes.
3. After a message indicating that the next message is displayed, touch [Close].
A message that the restoration was successful is displayed.
4. Turn the main switch OFF/ON.
If restore fails, an error code appears on the operation panel.

Code Cause Solution
1 Failed to restore additionally installed application data Retry the Restore procedure.
3 Failed to restore application setting data Retry the Restore procedure.
System Maintenance
8.3.8 SOFTWARE UPDATE
Updating the Smart Operation Panel
Operation
Smart
Panel
• In the case of models provided with package firmware only, updates for the Smart
Operation Panel and applications are also provided via package firmware. For details,
see "Firmware Update (Removable Media)".
There are three methods to update the Smart Operation Panel. The method is different
depending on what you want to update.
1. Installation/update from a media
2. Installation/update from the eDC Server
3. Installation/update from Application Site
Update method Features Control Applications
panel
firmware
Installation/update Installation or update is possible in the Yes Yes
from a media following two ways.
1. Applications
• Use the installation screen in the
control panel’s service mode to
update applications.
• You can install or update multiple
applications at once.
• You can also uninstall an application.
2. Package firmware (SD card or USB flash
drive)
Refer to ”Firmware Update (Removable
Media)”.
Installation/update Install or update applications directly from the No Yes
from the eDC Server eDC Server.
This method is mainly for paid applications. A
product key is required when an application is
installed for the first time.
*The update procedure is the same as when
updating the Smart Operation Panel application
already released.
Installation/update Installation and Updating of applications and Yes*1 Yes
from Application Site firmware update can be done from Application
System Maintenance
Update method Features Control Applications

panel
firmware
Site. When administrator authentication is
enabled, an administrator privilege is required
to start Application Site. If you log in to the
operation panel service mode, however, you
can use it with CE privilege.
*1 Update can only be done by using a package file.
The following two methods can be used for updating the firmware.
• Update from a media
• Installation/update from Application Site
The following three methods can be used for updating an application.
• Installation/update from a media
• Installation/update from the eDC Server
• Installation/update from Application Site
Installation/Update from a Media
Creating a media card for update

1. Download the update modules from the Firmware Download Center.
2. Create a folder named “romdata” in the root directory of the media.
3. Put the application zip file in the "romdata" folder.
Do not unzip the zip file.

Update procedure
1. Log in to the control panel in service mode.
2. Insert the SD card into the SD card slot of the control panel.
3. Select [Apps] > [Install] > [Install from SD Card].
4. Select the application you want to install or update, and then press [Install]
5. The installation or update results are displayed.
6. Check that the application is correctly installed or updated, and then press [reboot
operation panel].
This method uses the package update function to update the control panel firmware
and/or applications. The package update function is provided by the controller.
Update is done in the following order:
1. Controller firmware
2. Applications
3. Control panel firmware
System Maintenance
If the control panel firmware has to be updated, the control panel starts in the recovery mode
and the firmware is automatically updated.
The control panel restarts when updating is completed. The result notification is processed after
the control panel restarts.
Operation
Refer to ”Firmware Update (Removable Media)” for details.
Smart
Panel
When Installation/Update Is Prohibited
If [Settings] > [System Settings] > [Settings for Administrator] > [Security] > [Extended Security
Settings] > [Update Firmware] is set to [Prohibit], the execution key is grayed out and
installation/update cannot be executed.
When trying to update from a PC, updating fails and the result is recorded as “Failed”.
Installation/Update from the eDC Server

Downloads applications from the eDC Server, and installs or updates them.
• Installation/activation/update of applications from the server can only be done in the

service mode.
Log in to the control panel’s service mode.

1. Select [Apps] > [Install].
2. Press [Check Server Connect] and make sure that “Connect Server Succeeded!” is
displayed.
• The server address is stored in the firmware of the Smart Operation Panel.
• To connect to the server, the network settings of the MFP must be configured
correctly. For the required configuration, see the Field Service Manual of the MFP.
• If server connection fails, see Troubleshooting for error codes.

System Maintenance
2. Select [Install from Server].

3. Enter the product key and press [Execute].
4. Follow the instructions shown on the screen.
• An application cannot be installed unless it is digitally signed by Ricoh.

2. Select [Activate Applications].
3. Select the application to be activated, and then enter the activation key and press
[Execute].
• Only charged applications have to be activated.

2. Select [Update Applications].
3. Select the application to be updated, and then press [Check Update Status].
System Maintenance
If you try to uninstall an activated application without first deactivating it,

the uninstallation will fail. However, the application can be uninstalled
without deactivation (forced uninstallation) in the following
Operation
Smart
Panel
circumstances:
• Uninstallation using the service login uninstallation menu
• Deactivation failure due to the license information stored in the control panel not matching
the license information published by the server
• Forced uninstallation cannot be performed if deactivation fails because of other factors

(such as failure to connect to the server because of temporary network disconnection
or server maintenance).
During forced uninstallation, the message indicating that deactivation failed appears.
If [OK] of the message is selected, uninstallation is executed forcibly without deactivation.
If [Cancel] of the message is selected, uninstallation is not executed.
• If executing forced uninstallation, forced deactivation must also be executed on the

eDC server. Accordingly, check whether the license has been published for the eDC
server.
Application Site
"Application Site" has been added to Screen Service mode. Field engineers can start up
Application Site to install or update applications or firmware without needing user administrator
credentials.
This menu item opens Application Site by using the Web Browser NX app.
Troubleshooting
8.4 TROUBLESHOOTING
8.4.1 MULTITOUCH MISDETECTION BY THE OPERATION PANEL

DUE TO AN AM RADIO SIGNAL
• MultiTouch is detected even though only a single point on the operation panel is
touched.
• If there is an AM radio tower near the machine’s location, the person using the
operation panel acts as an antenna and radio noise enters the operation panel. As
the result, in spite of only a single point being touched, the machine senses
MultiTouch.
• Adjust the MultiTouch sensitivity of the operation panel.
Operation panel SP mode > Screen Device Settings > Panel Self Check > MultiTouch
Sensitivity Adjustment
Press [Detection level confirmation].
Troubleshooting
1. Keep your finger on the cross at the top right.
Operation
Smart
Panel
2. Check the result, and if the detection level is "3" or "4", adjust the MultiTouch sensitivity.
<Displayed Result Example>
Detection Level 1 (Best): No Problem. (Not required to adjust the sensitivity level.)
• Detection Level 2 (Fine environment): No Problem. (Not required to adjust the sensitivity
level.)
• Detection Level 3 (Non-recommended environment): Receiving the external noise
influence. (Required to adjust the sensitivity level)
• Detection Level 4 (Unusable environment): Receiving the external noise influence.
(Required to adjust the sensitivity level)
In "Checking the Influence of External Noise in the Installation

Troubleshooting
Environment", if the detection level is "3" or "4", you are receiving the external noise
influence, so adjust the sensitivity level.
• The sensitivity level can be adjusted between "0" and "10". (Default: 10). If set to "0", the
MultiTouch function is turned off.
• When decreasing the sensitivity level, perform "Checking the Influence of External Noise in
the Installation Environment" again to check the influence of external noise.
• Sensitivity level: 10 (Default)
• Sensitivity level: 0 (MultiTouch function off.)
If the sensitivity level is set to "0", the MultiTouch function is turned off and you cannot
pinch in or out.
• If the sensitivity level is set between "1" and "9", the distance between the 2 points for
detecting MultiTouch increases as the sensitivity level is decreased.
• At the default setting (sensitivity level 10), MultiTouch is detected for a distance of
approximately 3 cm between the 2 points. At sensitivity level 1, MultiTouch is detected for a
distance of approximately 4 cm between the 2 points.
• If you cannot enter the adjustment menu due to receiving the radio wave influence, connect
a mouse to the operation panel by USB connection or operate with a non-conducting pen.
• Take care not to use a pointed obstacle for the operation. Doing so may damage the
operation panel.
8.4.2 PROBLEMS AND ERRORS RELATED TO HARDWARE

Symptom Solution
The touch panel is damaged (broken, • Connecting a commercially available USB mouse
dented, etc.) and cannot be operated. enables the same operation as the touch panel.
• Replace the LCD.
• Replace the operation panel unit (you need to
transfer user information, and reinstall the
applications, etc.). Refer to "Factory Reset and
Restoration".
The touch panel does not respond. • Connecting a commercially available USB mouse
enables the same operation as the touch panel.
• Execute the Panel Self Check.
• Check the operations other than that of the touch
panel.
• Replace the LCD.
Restoration".
Troubleshooting
Symptom Solution
The touch panel’s coordinates have • Connecting a commercially available USB mouse
shifted substantially, resulting in not enables the same operation as the touch panel. So
being able to execute its calibration. you can execute the calibration
Operation
• Execute the Panel Self Check, or the TouchPanel
Smart
Panel
Calibration
• Execute the MultiTouch Calibration.
• If the shift occurs even after turning the power and
then back ON, check the battery voltage of the
operation panel’s main controller board.
• Replace the main controller board.
Restoration".
Cannot enter the SSP mode. If using the screen in a Classic Application, it does not
support multitouch, so you cannot enter the SSP mode
by the normal operation.
Instead, use the EX3 key. Press and hold the EX3 key,
and then press the "System/Copy" button in the SP
mode menu.
SC672-11 appears. Cause
Communication between the controller and the
operation panel was not established after a normal
startup.
USB cable between the operation panel and the MFP is
disconnected, damaged or defective.
Solution
Reconnect or replace the USB cable. For details about
how to replace the USB cable, refer to the service
manual for the MFP.
Reference
For details about SC672, refer to the service manual for
the MFP.
SC672-12 appears. Cause
Communication between the controller and the
operation panel was interrupted after a normal startup.
Troubleshooting
Symptom Solution
USB cable between the operation panel and the MFP is
disconnected, damaged or defective.
Solution
Reconnect or replace the USB cable. For details about
how to replace the USB cable, refer to the service
manual for the MFP.
Reference
For details about SC672, refer to the service manual for
the MFP.
Troubleshooting
8.4.3 ERRORS RELATED TO APPLICATIONS
Applicable applications
Copy (Classic) / Scanner (Classic) / Printer (Classic) / Document Server / Quick Copy / Quick
Operation
Smart
Panel
Fax / Quick Scanner / Web Browser
/ Quick ID Card Authentication Config*
*Depends on the model whether it is a pre-installed application
If an error related to the application occurs, the operation panel’s operating system
automatically restarts the application (with a confirmation dialog box).
If using a third-party application, the error message, code and solution

may vary depending on the application. Follow the third-party vendor’s
instructions.
Troubleshooting
8.4.4 FACTORY RESET AND RESTORATION

• This
DOsection
NOT USEexplains the Factory
the “Wipe Reset and
data/factory” subsequent
feature (recoveryprocedure. Factory
mode) of SOP Reset
in the may be
field.
• executed when an some
This is because abnormal operation
problems (e.x.due to the
SLNX system
is not or anproperly)
launched application
willoccurs or when
occur after a factory reset
replacing the operation
is performed, and thepanel (at the
SOP unit request
or PCB of the
should becustomer
replaced.to delete settings, etc.)
• When you execute the Factory Reset:

All data that created by users will be initialized.
All applications (including the applications from eDC server or Application Site) will be
deleted.
Items Objective
Only delete Reset application Update system and reset
data configuration to factory application configuration to
settings. factory settings.
Exporting configuration - As required As required
file
Storing user information - As required As required
other than those
exported
Factory reset Required Required Required
System update - - Required
Application installation - Required Required
Importing configuration - As required As required
file
Registering user - As required As required
information other than
those imported
Before executing Factory Reset, be sure to obtain the package firmware and copy it to the SD
card.
Factory Reset
1. Enter the recovery mode.
2. Select and execute "wipe data/factory reset".
Press the EX1 and EX2 keys to move the cursor up and down.
Press the EX3 key to execute the selected function.
Troubleshooting
Operation
Smart
Panel
3. A reconfirmation screen is displayed. Select [Yes].
The message “wiping data…” appears and the data and cache are cleared (within 1
minute).
On completion, the displayed screen returns to the recovery mode menu.
If you reboot the machine as is, the machine cannot display the messages in the local
language because of the absence of the LegacyUI data.
The pre-installed applications have also been deleted, so the alert appears.
For restoration, follow the installation procedure of package firmware, and update it.
Troubleshooting
8.4.5 ERRORS THAT OCCUR DURING APPLICATION UPDATE

FROM AN SD CARD
Error Messages
Error message Explanation Solution
Insert a correct SD card. - • Remove the SD card and insert it
again.
• Make sure that the directory of
the SD card is correct. You must
create the "app" folder in the root
directory of the SD card and put
the zip file in the "app" folder.
You are trying to install the Displayed when you Check the file, and select [OK] or
same application with a attempt to update an [Cancel].
different part number. Is it application that is the same
OK to continue? but has a different part
number.
Some applications could Displayed in the following Restart the control panel and repeat
not be installed. cases. the update procedure.
• You attempted to
update a module
(application) in use.
• The application is
corrupted.
- - • Make sure that the directory of
(The application you want the SD card is correct. You must
to update is not displayed create the "app" folder in the root
in the list of applications.) directory of the SD card and put
the zip file in the "app" folder.
• Check the application file in the
SD card.
Troubleshooting
Error Codes
Error codes may appear along with the message reporting the installation failure.
Error Explanation
Operation
Code
Smart
Panel
215-01 Installation of an application that cannot be used according to the system configuration
was attempted.
(Example: This occurs when installing an application with the copier, scanner and fax
functions on a non-MFP printer. However, if any of these functions can be used, the
application with such multiple functions can be installed.)
215-02 This occurs if the hard disk cannot be used.
215-03 An application that does not match the type (LP/MFP) or model has been installed. *
215-04 Installation of an application that cannot be installed for Basic model was attempted.
221 The system cannot stop the application for the update or uninstallation.
222 The signature is not authentic.
235 The signature is not authentic.
* If the model information (type or model) does not match, even if SC215-03 does light up at the
time of installation, the error message may appear the next time the machine is started. The
message shows the model information of the correct firmware and installed firmware. This can
be restored by updating the firmware to the version with the correct model information.
Troubleshooting
8.4.6 ERRORS THAT OCCUR DURING UPDATE FROM THE EDC

SERVER
Example of an error code display
XXX (3 digit error)

Error Explanation
code
101 Server connection error
102 Signature verification error
103 License error (for example, the product key was keyed in wrongly)
215 Dependency check error
Displayed when the control panel firmware version does not meet the installation
requirement of the application.
Example: The firmware version of the control panel is 1.02 and you attempted to install
an application that requires firmware version 1.03.
20X Other errors
• An additional 3-digit code may be displayed to indicate the details.

Example: 101-805
XXX -XXX (3 digit-3 digit error)
Error Explanation Solution
code
101-801 Connection Timeout Check the network settings of the
device.
• Network selection (MFP /
Operation Panel)
• IP address
• Default gateway
• Check DNS etc.
Troubleshooting
Error Explanation Solution

code
101-802 SSL communication failed Check the network settings of the
device.
Operation
101-803 Proxy authentication failed Check the proxy settings of the
Smart
Panel
device.
101-804 Proxy Connection Timeout Check the proxy settings of the
device.
101-805 The server is under maintenance. Resume the operation after
Connection timeout. completing the server maintenance.
(An incorrect network was selected on the Check the machine’s network
operation panel.) settings.
103-705 Executed activation for an already-activated Execute the update, not activation.
machine with a different product key.
201-700 Activation is being attempted from a device Check the machine’s network
with an unauthorized serial number. settings.
203-706 License update has been executed using a Execute activation, not license
deactivated product key. update.
=> User operation is required because the
settings remain even after deactivation.
Troubleshooting
8.4.7 OTHER TROUBLESHOOTING
Operation Panel Unit

HW: Hardware issue, SW: Software issue
No. Symptom Cause Solution
1 Both the Smart Operation HW The Smart Operation 1. Reconnect the USB
Panel and the blue LED on Panel cannot be supplied cable between the
the operation panel do not with electrical power. BICU (PCB1) and
turn ON. the Smart
Operation Panel.
2. Replace the USB
cable.
3. Replace the main
controller board.
4. Replace the BICU
(PCB1).
2 The Smart Operation Panel HW The Smart Operation 1. Reconnect the LCD
does not turn ON, but the blue Panel can be supplied I/F cable.
LED on the operation panel with electrical power 2. Replace the LCD.
turns ON. (blue LED lamp), but 3. Replace the main
nothing can be displayed controller board.
on the LCD. 4. Replace the LCD
I/F cable.
3 A splash (blue) screen or SW The Smart Operation 1. Update the Cheetah

“Please wait” message stays HW Panel and LCD can be System firmware in
on the display. supplied with electrical recovery mode.
power, but software 2. Do a factory reset.
issues occur during the 3. Replace the main
boot-up sequence. controller board.
Firmware or eMMC data
on the Board is defective.
D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB
SERVICE MANUAL APPENDICES
D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB APPENDICES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. APPENDICES: SPECIFICATIONS .............................................. 1-1

1.1 SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.1 MAINFRAME ....................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.2 PRINTER ............................................................................................................. 1-6
1.1.3 SCANNER ........................................................................................................... 1-7
1.1.4 ADF...................................................................................................................... 1-7
1.2 SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES ........................................................................................ 1-8
1.2.1 PAPER FEED ...................................................................................................... 1-8
1.2.2 PAPER EXIT ........................................................................................................ 1-9
Main Tray, 1 Bin Tray............................................................................................... 1-9
Internal Finisher..................................................................................................... 1-10
1.3 SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES ...................................................................................... 1-12
1.3.1 PRINTER DRIVERS .......................................................................................... 1-12
1.3.2 SCANNER AND LAN FAX DRIVERS ............................................................... 1-13
1.4 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT............................................................................................. 1-14
1.4.1 PAPER FEED UNIT (D3GQ) ............................................................................. 1-14
1.4.2 1 BIN TRAY UNIT (D574) .................................................................................. 1-14
2. APPENDICES: PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE TABLES ........... 2-1

2.1 MAINTENANCE TABLES .............................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ITEMS FOR IM C300 SERIES ........................ 2-1
2.1.2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ITEMS FOR IM C400 SERIES ........................ 2-4
3. SP MODE TABLES ..................................................................... 3-1

3.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE ........................................................................................ 3-1
3.1.1 ENABLING AND DISABLING SERVICE PROGRAM MODE ............................. 3-1
Entering SP Mode ................................................................................................... 3-1
Exiting SP Mode ...................................................................................................... 3-2
3.1.2 TYPES OF SP MODES ....................................................................................... 3-2
SP Mode Button Summary ...................................................................................... 3-3
Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing ............................. 3-4
Selecting the Program Number ............................................................................... 3-4
Service Mode Lock/Unlock ...................................................................................... 3-5
3.1.3 REMARKS ........................................................................................................... 3-5
SM Appendices i D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB
Display on the Control Panel Screen ...................................................................... 3-5
Others ...................................................................................................................... 3-6
3.2 SP1-XXX (FEED) ........................................................................................................... 3-8
3.3 SP2-XXX (DRUM) -1 ................................................................................................... 3-42
3.4 SP2-XXX (DRUM) -2 ................................................................................................... 3-74
3.5 SP3-XXX (PROCESS) ...............................................................................................3-130
3.6 SP4-XXX (SCANNER) ...............................................................................................3-179
3.7 SP5-XXX (MODE) ......................................................................................................3-195
3.8 SP6-XXX (PERIPHERALS) .......................................................................................3-256
3.9 SP7-XXX (DATA LOG) ...............................................................................................3-259
3.10 SP8-XXX (DATA LOG2) ......................................................................................3-331
3.10.1 OVERVIEW .....................................................................................................3-331
3.10.2 SP8-XXX (DATA LOG2) -1 .............................................................................. 3-333
3.10.3 SP8-XXX (DATA LOG2) -2 .............................................................................. 3-393
3.11PRINTER SERVICE MODE.......................................................................................3-420
3.12 SCANNER SERVICE MODE .............................................................................. 3-434
3.12.1 SP1-XXX (SYSTEM AND OTHERS) .............................................................. 3-434
3.12.2 SP2-XXX (SCANNING-IMAGE QUALITY) ..................................................... 3-436
3.12.3 SP3-XXX .........................................................................................................3-437
3.13 INPUT AND OUTPUT CHECK ............................................................................ 3-441
3.13.1 ADF UNIT ........................................................................................................3-441
3.13.2 SCANNER UNIT/ LASER UNIT ...................................................................... 3-441
3.13.3 INTERNAL FINISHER (IM C400SRF ONLY) .................................................. 3-444
3.13.4 PAPER FEED ..................................................................................................3-445
3.13.5 PAPER EXIT/ DUPLEX, WASTE TONER BOTTLE ....................................... 3-448
3.13.6 FUSING ...........................................................................................................3-449
3.13.7 TONER SUPPLY/ TRANSFER ....................................................................... 3-450
3.13.8 DRIVE UNIT ....................................................................................................3-453
3.13.9 FAN/ BOARD ...................................................................................................3-456
3.13.10 PAPER FEED UNIT (OPTIONAL) ........................................................... 3-460
3.13.11 1 BIN TRAY UNIT (BASIC MODEL) ........................................................ 3-461
4. APPENDICES: SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION......................... 4-1

4.1 MANAGEMENT FEATURES ......................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.1 HOW TO DISABLE THE DOCUMENT SERVER FUNCTION............................ 4-1
4.2 PRINTING FEATURES .................................................................................................. 4-2
4.2.1 BEHAVIOR OF USB PRINTER DETECTION..................................................... 4-2
4.2.2 AUTO PDL DETECTION FUNCTION ................................................................. 4-2
Overview.................................................................................................................. 4-2
Conditions for detection of the PDL ........................................................................ 4-2
D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB ii SM Appendices
PDL detection by the printer system, PCL interpreter and PS interpreter .............. 4-3
PDL selection and switching ................................................................................... 4-3
Triggers.................................................................................................................... 4-4
Some possible problems ......................................................................................... 4-5
Printer Bit Switch description .................................................................................. 4-5
4.2.3 PRINT IMAGES ROTATION................................................................................ 4-6
4.2.4 PJL USTATUS ..................................................................................................... 4-7
4.3 SCANNER FEATURES................................................................................................ 4-10
4.3.1 DISPLAY SETTINGS OF RECENTLY USED SCAN DESTINATION ............... 4-10
4.3.2 THE SETTING OF SMTP AUTHENTICATION IN SCAN TO EMAIL ............... 4-10
Typical example ..................................................................................................... 4-11
4.3.3 THE QUALIFICATION SWITCHING OF SCAN TO FOLDER .......................... 4-12
4.4 SECURITY FEATURES ............................................................................................... 4-14
4.4.1 HOW TO RESTRICT ACCESS TO THE WIM JOB MENU............................... 4-14
4.4.2 HOW TO RESTRICT WEB IMAGE MONITOR ACCESS TO THE DOCUMENT
SERVER....................................................................................................................... 4-14
4.4.3 USER AUTHENTICATION FOR SPECIFIC MFP APPLICATIONS .................. 4-15
SM Appendices iii D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB

APPENDICES:
SPECIFICATIONS
R E V I S I O N H I S T O RY
P ag e Dat e Add ed/ Upd at ed /N ew
1 04/01/2020 Updated Copy Speed
Rev. 04/01/2020 Specifications
1. APPENDICES: SPECIFICATIONS
Specifications
Appendices:
1.1 SPECIFICATIONS
1.1.1 MAINFRAME
Items Specifications
Configuration: Desktop
Scanning element: One-dimensional solid-state scanning through CCD
A CIS (S21) is also used for scanning the back side of the
ADF
Printing process: Dry Electrostatic transfer system with dual component
development; 4-drum method
Development: Dry two-component magnetic brush development system
Resolution: Scan:
• Exposure glass: 600 x 600 dpi
• ADF: 600 x 300 dpi (front), 600 x 600 dpi (front),300 x
600 dpi (back), 600 x 600 dpi (back)
Print:
• Copy:600 x 600 dpi
• Printer: 1,200 x 1,200 dpi (1 bit), 600 x 600 dpi (4/2/1 bit)
Fusing: New QSU fusing technology (DH fixing system)

Original type: Sheets, book, three-dimensional object
Maximum original size: A4 (8.5" x 14 ")
Copy Speed (IM C300 series): 30cpm (A4)/31 cpm (LT)
(A4 SEF/LT SEF(60-105 g/m2))
⇒ Copy Speed (IM C400 series): IM C400F:

(A4 SEF/LT SEF(60-81 g/m2)) • B&W 43 cpm (A4), 45 cpm (LT)
• 40 cpm (A4), 42 cpm (LT)
IM C400SRF:
• B&W, One-sided printing: 43 cpm (A4), 45cpm (LT)
• Full Color, One-sided printing: 40 cpm (A4), 42cpm (LT)
• B&W, 2-sided printing: 40 cpm (A4), 42cpm (LT)
• Full Color, 2-sided printing: 38 cpm (A4), 38cpm (LT)
First copy time: IM C300 series:

(A4 SEF /LT SEF, 1st tray 1, • Full Color: 8.6 seconds
exposure glass) • B&W: 7.2 seconds
IM C400F:
• Full Color:7.4 seconds
SM Appendices 1-1 D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB

Specifications
• B&W: 6.2 seconds
IM C400SRF:
• Full Color:7.9 seconds
• B&W: 6.7 seconds
Warm-up time: IM C300 series:
(23°C (73.4°F), rated voltage) • Normal mode: 48 seconds
• Quick mode: 19 seconds
IM C400 series:
• Normal mode: 48 seconds
• Quick mode: 17 seconds
Print paper capacity: IM C300 series:
(Standard tray/Optional tray: Standard tray: 250 sheets
60–163 g/m2, 16 lb. Bond–90 lb. Bypass tray: 100 sheets
Index) Optional tray: 550 sheets
(Bypass tray: 60–220 g/m2 (16 lb. IM C400 series:
Bond–80 lb. Cover)) Standard tray: 550 sheets
(Plain Paper 1) Bypass tray: 100 sheets
Optional tray: 550 sheets
Print paper size: Standard tray: A4 SEF / LT SEF to A5 SEF
Bypass tray: A4 / LG to A6 SEF / Envelope
Optional tray: A4 SEF / LG SEF to A5 SEF
For details, see Supported Paper Sizes
Printing paper weight: Standard tray: 60-163 g/m2 (16-90 lb.)
Bypass tray: 60-220 g/m2 (16-80 lb)
Optional tray: 60-163 g/m2 (16-90 lb.)
Duplex: 60-163 g/m2 (16-90 lb.)
Output paper capacity: Paper exit tray: 100 sheets
1-bin tray: 100 sheets
Internal Finisher: 250 sheets
Continuous copy: Up to 999 sheets
Memory: 2GB
Hard disk: 320GB
CPU: Intel® Atom Processor ApolloLake 1.3GHz
Zoom: Arbitrary:
From 25 to 400% (1% step)
Fixed:
North America
65%, 78%, 93%, 100%, 129%, 155%
D0CA/D0C9/D0C8/D0CB 1-2 SM Appendices

Specifications
Europe/Asia
50%, 71%, 93%, 100%, 141%, 200%
Specifications
Appendices:
Power source: North America
• IM C300F
120–127 V, 10 A, 60 Hz
• IM C400 series
120–127 V, 12 A, 60 Hz
EU/Asia
• IM C300 series
220–240 V, 5 A, 50/60 Hz
• IM C400 series
220–240 V, 7 A, 50/60 Hz
Taiwan
• IM C300F
110 V, 10 A, 60 Hz
Power consumption: North America
• IM C300 series
Maximum: 1,300 W
• IM C400 series
Maximum: 1,400 W
EU
• IM C300 series
Maximum: 1,200 W
• IM C400 series
Maximum: 1,350 W
Asia
• IM C300 series
Maximum: 1,200 W
• IM C400 series
Maximum: 1,350 W
* The complete system consists of the main unit, three
paper tray units, and 1-bin tray unit.
Energy saver: Reduced electrical consumption:
North America
• IM C300F
0.65W
• IM C400F
0.65W

Specifications
• IM C400SRF
0.65W
EU
• IM C300
0.65W
• IM C300F
0.66W
• IM C400F
0.65W
• IM C400SRF
0.65W
Asia
• IM C300
0.65W
• IM C300F
0.66W
• IM C400F
0.65W
Noise emission: Sound power level with full system
• IM C300 series
Stand-by: 31.3 dB (A)
Copying: B&W: 68.1 dB (A) / Color: 68.4 dB (A)
• IM C400F
• IM C400SRF
Sound pressure level with full system
• IM C300 series
• IM C400F
• IM C400SRF

Specifications
Sound power level and sound pressure level are actual
values measured in accordance with ISO 7779.
Specifications
Appendices:
Sound pressure level is measured from the position of the
bystander.
The full system consists of the main unit, 1-bin unit and two
paper tray units.
*The complete system of the IM C300 series/C400F
consists of the main unit, three paper tray units, and 1-bin
tray unit .
*The complete system of the IM C400SRF consists of the
main unit and three paper tray units.
Dimensions (W x D x H up to • IM C300 series
ADF): 498 x 561 x 510 mm (19.6" x 22.1" x 20.1")
• IM C400F
498 x 561 x 590 mm (19.6" x 22.1" x 23.2")
• IM C400SRF
615 x 561 x 706 mm (24.2" x 22.1" x 27.8")
Weight: • IM C300 series
48 kg (105.8 lb.)
• IM C400F
50 kg (110.2 lb.)
• IM C400SRF
60 kg (132.3 lb.)

Specifications
1.1.2 PRINTER
Printer Standard: PJL, PCL 5c/6, PostScript 3 Emulation, PDF Emulation,
languages: MediaPrint(JPEG, TIFF)
Option: Genuine Adobe PostScript 3/PDF, PictBridge, XPS
Resolution: 200 dpi, 300 dpi, 400 dpi, 600 dpi, 1200 dpi
Resident fonts: PostScript 3/PDF Emulation, PCL 5c/6: 93 fonts
Genuine Adobe PostScript 3/PDF: 136 fonts
Host interfaces: Standard:
Ethernet (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T)
USB2.0 (Type B) port
USB2.0 (Type A) port (on the control panel)
SD card slot (on the control panel)
Option:
IEEE 1284 parallel interface

IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n wireless LAN interface
File format converter
Device Server option
Network TCP/IP (IPv4, IPv6)
protocols:

Specifications
1.1.3 SCANNER
Specifications
Appendices:
Scanning method: Full-color scanner/Flatbed scanning
Scanning resolution: 200 dpi
TWAIN Mode:
• Exposure glass: 100 to 1200 dpi
• ADF: 100 to 600 dpi
WIA Mode:
• 100 to 1200 dpi
Grayscales: Black & White: 2 tones
Full Color/Gray Scale: 256 tones
Scanning Throughput: B&W, Color:
Simplex: 40 pages/minute (200 dpi)
Duplex: 80 pages/minute (200 dpi)
(A4/ 81/2 x 11 SEF)
Network interface: Standard:
Ethernet (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T)
USB 2.0 (Type A) port (on the control panel)
SD card slot (on the control panel)
Option:
IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n wireless LAN interface
Compression method: B&W: TIFF (MH, MR, MMR, JBIG2)
Gray Scale, Full Color: JPEG
1.1.4 ADF
Original size: A4 SEF to A6 SEF, 81/2 x 14 SEF to 51/2 x 81/2
Original weight: 52 to 128 g/m2 (14 to 34 lb. Bond)
Table capacity: 50 sheets (80 g/m2, 20 lb. Bond)
Separation: Friction pad
Original transport: Roller transport
Original feed order: From the top original
Power source: DC 24V, 5V from the main unit.

Supported Paper Sizes
1.2 SUPPORTED PAPER SIZES
1.2.1 PAPER FEED

Paper Size Main Tray Paper Feed Unit Bypass Tray
A4 SEF 210 x 297 mm
A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm
A5 LEF 210 x 148 mm - -
A6 SEF 105 x 148 mm - -
B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm
B6 SEF 128 x 182 mm - -
Legal SEF 8.5 x 14 inch -
Foolscap SEF 8.5 x 13 inch -
Letter SEF 8.5 x 11 inch
GovernmentLG SEF 8.25 x 14 inch -
Folio SEF 8.25 x 13 inch -
F/GL SEF 8 x 13 inch -
Eng Quatro SEF 8 x 10 inch -
Executive SEF 7.25 x 10.5 inch -
Half Letter SEF 5.5 x 8.5 inch
Half Letter LEF 8.5 x 5.5 inch - -
Com10 Env. SEF 4.125 x 9.5 inch - -
Monarch Env. SEF 3.875 x 7.5 inch - -
C5 Env. SEF 162 x 229 mm - -
C6 Env. SEF 114 x 162 mm - -
DL Env. SEF 110 x 220 mm - -
16K SEF 195 x 267 mm - -
8.5 × 12 SEF 8.5 x 12 inch -
8 1/2 × 13 2/5 SEF 8.5 x 13.4 inch -
Custom:
- Main Tray Paper Feed Unit Bypass Tray

Width 139.5 - 216.0 mm 139.5 - 216.0 mm 76.2 - 216.0 mm
5.50 - 8.50 inch 5.50 - 8.50 inch 3.00 - 8.50 inch
Length 210.0 - 297.0 mm 210.0 - 356.6 mm 139.0 - 600.0 mm
8.27 - 11.69 inch 8.27 - 14.03 inch 5.48 - 23.62 inch
Remarks
: Supported

1.2.2 PAPER EXIT
Main Tray, 1 Bin Tray
Specifications
Appendices:
Paper Size Main Tray 1 Bin Tray
A4 SEF 210 x 297 mm
A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm
A5 LEF 210 x 148 mm -
A6 SEF 105 x 148 mm -
B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm
B6 SEF 128 x 182 mm -
Legal SEF 8.5 x 14 inch
Foolscap SEF 8.5 x 13 inch
Letter SEF 8.5 x 11 inch
GovernmentLG SEF 8.25 x 14 inch
Folio SEF 8.25 x 13 inch
F/GL SEF 8 x 13 inch
Eng Quatro SEF 8 x 10 inch
Executive SEF 7.25 x 10.5 inch
Half Letter SEF 5.5 x 8.5 inch
Half Letter LEF 8.5 x 5.5 inch -
Com10 Env. SEF 4.125 x 9.5 inch -
Monarch Env. SEF 3.875 x 7.5 inch -
C5 Env. SEF 162 x 229 mm -
C6 Env. SEF 114 x 162 mm -
DL Env. SEF 110 x 220 mm -
16K SEF 195 x 267 mm
8.5 × 12 SEF 8.5 x 12 inch
1/ 2/
8 2 × 13 5 SEF 8.5 x 13.4 inch
Custom:
- Main Tray 1 Bin Tray

Width 76.2 - 216.0 mm 139.7 - 216.0 mm
3.00 - 8.50 inch 5.50 - 8.50 inch
Length 139.0 - 600.0 mm 210.0 - 600.0 mm
5.48 – 23.62 inch 8.27 - 23.62 inch
Remarks
: Supported

Internal Finisher
Paper Size Paper exit Staple
Shift Shifting Single stitch Stapling amount
A4 SEF 210 x 297 mm A A A 50
A5 SEF 148 x 210 mm B B - -
A5 LEF 210 x 148 mm B B - -
A6 SEF 105 x 148 mm B - - -
B5 SEF 182 x 257 mm A A A 50
B6 SEF 128 x 182 mm B - - -
Legal SEF 8.5 x 14 inch A A A 30

Foolscap SEF 8.5 x 13 inch A A A 30
Letter SEF 8.5 x 11 inch A A A 50
GovernmentLG SEF 8.25 x 14 inch A A A 30
Folio SEF 8.25 x 13 inch A A A 30
F/GL SEF 8 x 13 inch A A A 30
Eng Quatro SEF 8 x 10 inch A A - -
Executive SEF 7.25 x 10.5 inch A A A 50
Half Letter SEF 5.5 x 8.5 inch B - - -
Half Letter LEF 8.5 x 5.5 inch B B - -
Com10 Env. SEF 4.125 x 9.5 inch B - - -
Monarch Env. SEF 3.875 x 7.5 inch B - - -
C5 Env. SEF 162 x 229 mm B - - -
C6 Env. SEF 114 x 162 mm B - - -
DL Env. SEF 110 x 220 mm B - - -
16K SEF 195 x 267 mm A A - -
8.5 × 12 SEF 8.5 x 12 inch A A A 30
8 1/2 × 13 2/5 SEF 8.5 x 13.4 inch A A A 30

Custom:
- Paper exit
Specifications
Appendices:
Shift Shifting
Width 76.2 - 216.0 mm 148.0 - 216.0 mm
3.00 - 8.50 inch 5.83 - 8.50 inch
Length 139.0 - 600.0 mm 139.0 – 356.0 mm
5.48 – 23.62 inch 5.48 -14.01 inch
Remarks
A: Paper through, paper exit available.
B: Will not guarantee, but paper can go through or exit.
-: Not available.

Software Accessories
1.3 SOFTWARE ACCESSORIES
The printer drivers and utility software are provided on one CD-ROM. An auto-run installer
allows you to select which components to install.
1.3.1 PRINTER DRIVERS

Windows
OS Type PCL6 PS3
Windows 7 Starter - -
Home Basic - -
Home Premium
Professional
Ultimate
Enterprise
Windows 8.1 Pro
Enterprise
RT - -
Windows 10 Home
Pro
Enterprise
Education
Windows Server 2008/R2 Standard Edition
Enterprise Edition
Standard without Hyper-V - -
Enterprise without Hyper-V - -
Datacenter Edition - -
Web Edition - -
Windows Server 2012/R2 Foundation
Essentials
Standard
Datacenter - -
Windows Server 2016 Standard
Essentials
Datacenter
MultiPoint Premium Server
Windows Server 2019 Standard
Essentials

Software Accessories
OS Type PCL6 PS3

Datacenter
: Supported
Specifications
Appendices:
-: Not supported
Mac OS Environment
OS PS3 Printer Utility for Mac
macOS 10.12 Sierra -
macOS 10.13 High Sierra -
macOS 10.14 Mojave -
: Supported
-: Not supported
1.3.2 SCANNER AND LAN FAX DRIVERS

Operating system for TWAIN driver:
• Windows 7/8.1/10, Windows Server 2008/2008 R2/2012/2012 R2/2016/2019 (TWAIN

scanner runs in 32-bit compatible mode on a 64-bit operating system, so TWAIN scanner is
not compatible with 64-bit applications. Use it with 32-bit applications.)
Operating system for LAN FAX driver:
• Windows 7/8.1/10, Windows Server 2008/2008 R2/2012/2012 R2/2016/2019
• The LAN Fax driver lets you fax documents directly from your PC. Address Book
Editor and Cover Sheet Editor are to be installed as well.
• The Network TWAIN driver operates in 32-bit compatibility mode on 64-bit operating
systems.

Optional Equipment
1.4 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
1.4.1 PAPER FEED UNIT (D3GQ)

Paper Feed System: Feed Roller and Friction Pad
Paper Height Detection: Empty only
Tray Capacity: 500 sheets
Paper Weight: 60 to 163 g/m2 (16 to 43.5 lb.)
Paper Size: A5 SEF to A4/LG SEF
Power Source: DC 24V, 5V (from the mainframe)
Power Consumption: Less than 27 W
(Power is supplied from the mainframe.)
Dimensions (W x D x H): 498 mm x 552 mm x 150 mm (19.7" x 21.8" x 6.0")
Weight: 10.4 kg (23.0 lb.) or less
1.4.2 1 BIN TRAY UNIT (D574)
Paper detection: Detects paper

Tray Capacity: 100 sheets (80 g/m2)
Paper Weight: 60 to 163 g/m2 (16 to 43.5 lb.)
Paper Size: Width: 140 to 216 mm (5.5” to 8.5”)
Length: 210 to 356 mm (8.3” to 14.0”)
Power Source: DC 5V (from the mainframe)
Power Consumption: Less than 1 W
(Power is supplied from the mainframe.)
Dimensions (W x D x H): 554 mm x 482 mm x 138.5 mm (21.8" x 19.0" x 5.5")
Weight: 3.0 kg (6.6 lb.) or less

APPENDICES:
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE TABLES
Maintenance Tables
2. APPENDICES: PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
TABLES
Maintenance
Appendices
Preventive
Tables
2.1 MAINTENANCE TABLES
2.1.1 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ITEMS FOR IM C300 SERIES

Chart: A4 (LT)/5%
Mode: 2 prints/job
Color Ratio: 30%
Environment: Normal temperature and humidity
Yield may change depending on circumstances and print conditions.
Symbol keys: C: Clean, R: Replace, L: Lubricant, I: Inspect
Yield Parts:
The parts mentioned in these tables have a target yield. However, the total copy/print volume
made by the machine will not reach the target yield within the machine's targeted lifetime if the
machine is used under the target usage conditions (ACV, color ratio, and P/J). So, these parts
are categorized not as PM parts but as yield parts (EM parts). In this table, the parts with “Y” are
yield parts and the parts with “P” are PM parts.
ADF
The PM count for the following items is based on the number of originals fed:
Item PM/Yield 30k 45k EM Remarks
Parts
Friction pad Y* R C Wipe with a dry cloth.

ADF pick-up roller Y* R C Wipe with a damp
cloth.
ADF feed roller Y* R C Wipe with a damp
cloth.
ADF entrance roller C Wipe with a damp
cloth.
Pre-scanning roller (front side/ rear C Wipe with a damp
side) cloth.
ADF exit roller C Wipe with a damp
cloth.
* The actual lifetime of these parts depends on the type of paper used and machine operation.

Maintenance Tables
Therefore, these parts are treated as Yield Parts.
Scanner Unit
Item PM/Yield Parts EM Remarks
Exposure glass C Clean with a cleaning cloth.

ADF exposure glass C Clean with a cleaning cloth.
PCDU
The PM count for the following items is based on the sheets of copy paper fed:
Parts
PCDU P R The PCDU (K) for IM C300 series is different from IM
(K) C400 series. Make sure of the correct part number
before ordering it.
PCDU Y R At color ratio 30%, the replacement interval is 120k.
(C)
(M)
(Y)
Transfer Unit
Item PM/Yield Parts 120k EM Remarks
ITB (Image transfer belt) unit Y R

Paper transfer roller Y R
Fusing Unit
Parts
Fusing unit Y R
Entrance guide C Remove the toner, wax, and paper dust
plate with a dry cloth.
Exit guide plate C Remove the toner, wax, and paper dust
with a dry cloth.
Separation plate C Remove the toner, wax, and paper dust
with a dry cloth.

Maintenance Tables

Parts
Fusing thermopile C Remove the toner, wax, and paper dust
Maintenance
(TH1) with a dry cloth.
Appendices
Preventive
Tables
Pressure roller C Remove the toner, wax, and paper dust
with a dry cloth.
Paper Transport
Parts
Registration roller C Clean with a blower brush.
Registration sensor C Clean with a blower brush or wipe
(S32) with a dry cloth.
Paper dust case C Clean with a blower brush.
Paper feed roller Y R C Wipe with a damp cloth.
Friction pad (Tray 1) Y R C Wipe with a dry cloth.
Bypass feed roller Y R C Wipe with a damp cloth.
Friction pad (Bypass Y R C Wipe with a dry cloth.
Tray)
Paper feed sensor C Clean with a blower brush or wipe
(S31) with a dry cloth.
Duplex entrance C Clean with a blower brush or wipe
sensor (S1) with a dry cloth.
Duplex exit sensor (S2) C Clean with a blower brush or wipe
with a dry cloth.
Duplex paper transport C Wipe with a damp cloth.
rollers
Duplex entrance guide C Wipe with a cloth dampened with
plate ethyl alcohol.
Paper exit/reverse C Wipe with a damp cloth.
roller
Paper exit sensor(S7) C Clean with a blower brush or wipe
with a dry cloth.

Maintenance Tables
Others
Item PM/Yield 90k EM Remarks
Parts
Waste toner P R Replace if the waste toner bottle is detected to
bottle be full.
Ozone filter C
Paper Feed Unit (Optional)

Friction pad Y R C Wipe with a damp cloth.
Transport roller C Wipe with a damp cloth.
Tray lift pad C Wipe with a damp cloth.
Transport sensor (S1) C Wipe with a damp cloth.
1-Bin Tray Unit (Optional)
Item PM/Yield EM Remarks

Parts
Paper exit roller C Wipe with a damp cloth, and then wipe the
dry cloth.
Paper exit tray C Wipe with a damp cloth, and then wipe the
dry cloth.
1-bin tray exit sensor C Clean with a blower brush or wipe with a
dry cloth.
1-bin tray paper remaining C Clean with a blower brush or wipe with a
sensor dry cloth.
2.1.2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ITEMS FOR IM C400 SERIES

duplex entrance sensorChart: A4 (LT)/5%
Mode: 2 prints/job
Color Ratio: 30%
Environment: Normal temperature and humidity
Yield may change depending on circumstances and print conditions.
Symbol keys: C: Clean, R: Replace, L: Lubricant, I: Inspect
Yield Parts:

Maintenance Tables
The parts mentioned in these tables have a target yield. However, the total copy/print volume
made by the machine will not reach the target yield within the machine's targeted lifetime if the
machine is used under the target usage conditions (ACV, color ratio, and P/J). So, these parts
Maintenance
are categorized not as PM parts but as yield parts (EM parts). In this table, the parts with “Y” are
Appendices
Preventive
Tables
yield parts and the parts with “P” are PM parts.
ADF
The PM count for the following items is based on the number of originals fed:
Parts
Friction pad Y* R C Wipe with a dry cloth.

ADF pick-up roller Y* R C Wipe with a damp
cloth.
ADF feed roller Y* R C Wipe with a damp
cloth.
ADF entrance roller C Wipe with a damp
cloth.
Pre-scanning roller (front side/ rear C Wipe with a damp
side) cloth.
ADF exit roller C Wipe with a damp
cloth.
* The actual lifetime of these parts depends on the type of paper used and machine operation.
Therefore, these parts are treated as Yield Parts.
Scanner Unit
Item PM/Yield Parts EM Remarks
Exposure glass C Clean with a cleaning cloth.

ADF exposure glass C Clean with a cleaning cloth.
PCDU
Parts
PCDU P R The PCDU (K) for IM C300 series is different from IM
(K) C400 series. Make sure of the correct part number
before ordering it.
PCDU P R At color ratio 30%, the replacement interval is 120k.
(C)

Maintenance Tables

Parts
(M)
(Y)
Transfer Unit
ITB (Image transfer belt) unit P R

Paper transfer roller P R
Fusing Unit
Item PM/Yield Parts 60k 120k EM Remarks
Fusing unit P R
Entrance guide plate C Wipe with a dry cloth.
Exit guide plate C Wipe with a dry cloth.
Separation plate C Wipe with a dry cloth.
Fusing thermopile (TH1) C Wipe with a dry cloth.
Pressure roller C Wipe with a dry cloth.
Paper Transport
Item PM/Yield 60k 120k 300K EM Remarks
Parts
Registration roller C Clean with a blower brush.
Registration sensor C Clean with a blower brush or
(S32) wipe with a dry cloth.
Paper dust case C Clean with a blower brush.
Pick-up roller Y R C Wipe with a damp cloth.
Friction roller Y R C Wipe with a damp cloth.
Bypass feed roller P R C Wipe with a damp cloth.
Friction pad (Bypass P R C Wipe with a dry cloth.
Tray)
Paper feed sensor C Clean with a blower brush or

Maintenance Tables
Item PM/Yield 60k 120k 300K EM Remarks

Parts
Maintenance
Appendices
Duplex entrance C Clean with a blower brush or
Preventive
Tables
sensor (S1) wipe with a dry cloth.
Duplex exit sensor C Clean with a blower brush or
Duplex paper C Wipe with a damp cloth.
transport rollers
Duplex entrance C Wipe with a cloth dampened
guide plate with ethyl alcohol.
Paper exit/reverse C Wipe with a damp cloth.
roller
Paper exit sensor C Clean with a blower brush or
Others
Item PM/Yield 90k EM Remarks
Parts
Waste toner P R Replace if the waste toner bottle is detected to
bottle be full.
Ozone filter C
Paper Feed Unit (Optional)

Friction pad Y R C Wipe with a damp cloth.
Transport roller C Wipe with a damp cloth.
Tray Lift Pad C Wipe with a damp cloth.
Transport Sensor (S1) C Wipe with a damp cloth.
1-Bin Tray Unit (Optional)
Item PM/Yield EM Remarks

Parts
Paper exit roller C Wipe with a damp cloth, and then wipe the
dry cloth.

Maintenance Tables
Paper exit tray C Wipe with a damp cloth, and then wipe the
dry cloth.
1-bin tray exit sensor C Clean with a blower brush or wipe with a
dry cloth.
1-bin tray paper remaining C Clean with a blower brush or wipe with a
sensor dry cloth.

APPENDICES:
SP MODE TABLES
3. APPENDICES: SP MODE TABLES
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
3.1 SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
• Make sure that the data-in LED ( ) is not on before you go into the SP mode. This
LED indicates that some data is coming to the machine. When the LED is on, wait for
the copier to process the data.
3.1.1 ENABLING AND DISABLING SERVICE PROGRAM MODE
Make sure that the data-in LED ( ) is not on before you go into the SP mode. This LED
indicates that some data is coming to the machine. When the LED is on, wait for the copier to
process the data.
• The Service Program Mode is for use by service representatives only. If this mode is
used by anyone other than service representatives for any reason, data might be
deleted or settings might be changed. In such case, product quality cannot be
guaranteed any more.
Entering SP Mode
If there are no Classic Application (copy/printer/scanner/fax) icons on the HOME screen, follow
the procedure below to display the number keyboard.

1. Press and hold the button [A] located at the left side of the operation panel and "Check
Status [B]" at the same time, until the number keyboard is displayed.
2. Enter the key code for SP mode.
For details of the key code to enter the SP mode, ask your supervisor.
Exiting SP Mode
• Press "Exit" on the LCD twice to return to the copy window.
3.1.2 TYPES OF SP MODES

• System SP: SP modes related to the engine functions
• Printer SP: SP modes related to the controller functions
• Scanner SP: SP modes related to the scanner functions
• Fax SP: SP modes related to the fax functions
Select one of the Service Program modes (System, Printer, Scanner, or Fax) from the touch
panel as shown in the diagram below after you access the SP mode. This section explains the
functions of the System/Printer/Scanner SP modes. Refer to the Fax service manual for the Fax
SP modes.

SP Mode Tables
Appendices
SP Mode Button Summary
Here is a short summary of the touch-panel buttons.
1 Opens all SP groups and sublevels.

2 Closes all open groups and sublevels and restores the initial SP mode display.
3 Opens the copy window (copy mode) so you can make test copies. Press SP Mode
(highlighted) in the copy window to return to the SP mode screen,
4 Enter the SP code directly with the number keys if you know the SP number. Then press .
(The required SP Mode number will be highlighted when pressing . If not, just press the
required SP Mode number.)
5 Press two times to leave the SP mode and return to the copy window to resume normal
operation.
6 Press any Class 1 number to open a list of Class 2 SP modes.

7 Press to scroll the show to the previous or next group.

8 Press to scroll to the previous or next display in segments the size of the screen display
(page).
9 Press to scroll the show the previous or next line (line by line).
10 Press to move the highlight on the left to the previous or next selection in the list.
Switching Between SP Mode and Copy Mode for Test Printing

1. In the SP mode, select the test print. Then press "Copy Window".
2. Use the copy window (copier mode), to select the appropriate settings (paper size, etc.) for
the test print.
3. Press [Start] key to start the test print.
4. Press SP Mode (highlighted) to return to the SP mode screen and repeat from step 1.
Selecting the Program Number

Program numbers have two or three levels.
1. Refer to the Service Tables to find the SP that you want to adjust before you begin.
2. Press the Group number on the left side SP Mode window that contains the SP that you
want to adjust.
3. Use the scrolling buttons in the center of the SP mode window to show the SP number that
you want to open. Then press that number to expand the list.
4. Use the center touch-panel buttons to scroll to the number and title of the item that you
want to set and press it. The small entry box on the right activates and shows the below
default or the current settings.
• Refer to the Service Tables for the range of allowed settings.

5. Do this procedure to enter a setting:
• Press to toggle between plus and minus and use the keypad to enter the

appropriate number. The number you enter writes over the previous setting.
• Press [#] to enter the setting. (The value is not registered if you enter a number that is
out of range.)
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
• Press "Yes" when you are prompted to complete the selection.
6. If you need to perform a test print, press Copy Window to open the copy window and select
the settings for the test print. Press [Start] key and then press SP Mode (highlighted) in the
copy window to return to the SP mode display.
7. Press Exit two times to return to the copy window when you are finished.
Service Mode Lock/Unlock

At locations where the machine contains sensitive data, the customer engineer cannot operate
the machine until the Administrator turns the service mode lock off. This function makes sure
that work on the machine is always done with the permission of the Administrator.
1. If you cannot go into the SP mode, ask the Administrator to log in with the User Tool and
then set "Service Mode Lock" to OFF after he or she logs in: User Tools System
Settings Administrator Tools Service Mode Lock OFF
• This unlocks the machine and lets you get access to all the SP codes.
• The CE can service the machine and turn the machine off and on. It is not necessary
to ask the Administrator to log in again each time the machine is turned on.
2. Go into the SP mode and set SP5169 to "1" if you must use the printer bit switches.
3. After machine servicing is completed:
• Change SP5169 from "1" to "0".
• Turn the machine off and on. Tell the administrator that you have completed servicing
the machine.
• The Administrator will then set the "Service Mode Lock" to ON.
3.1.3 REMARKS
Display on the Control Panel Screen

The maximum number of characters which can show on the control panel screen is limited to 30
characters. For this reason, some of the SP modes shown on the screen need to be
abbreviated. The following are abbreviations used for the SP modes for which the full
description is over 20 characters.
Item Description
Paper Weight Plain Paper1: 60-74 g/m2, 16-20lb Bond.
Plain Paper2: 75-81 g/m2, 20lb Bond.
Middle Thick: 82-105 g/m2, 20-28lb Bond.
Thick Paper1: 106-130 g/m2, 28lb. Bond-35lb index.
Thick Paper2: 131-163 g/m2, 35lb. Bond–90lb Index.
Thick Paper3: 164-220 g/m2, 90lb. Index–80 lb Cover.

Item Description
Paper Type N: Normal paper
MTH: Middle thick paper
TH: Thick paper
Paper Feed P: Paper tray
Station B: Bypass table
Color Mode [K]: Black in B&W mode
[Color] [Y], [M], or [C]: Yellow, Magenta, or Cyan in Full Color mode
[YMC]: Only for Yellow, Magenta, and Cyan
[FC]: Full Color mode
[FC, K], [FC, Y], [FC, M], or [FC, C]: Black, Yellow, Magenta, or Cyan in full
color mode
Print Mode S: Simplex
D: Duplex
Process Speed L: Low speed (89 mm/s)
M: Middle speed (178 mm/s)
Others
The following symbols are used in the SP mode tables.
FA: Factory setting
(Data may be adjusted from the default setting at the factory. Refer to the factory setting sheets
enclosed. You can find it under the jammed paper removal decal.)
DFU: Design/Factory Use only
Do not touch these SP modes in the field.
A sharp (#) to the right hand side of the mode number column means that the main switch must
be turned off and on to effect the setting change.
An asterisk (*) to the right hand side of the mode number column means that this mode is
stored in the NVRAM and EEPROM. If you do a RAM clear, this SP mode will be reset to the
default value. "ENG" and "CTL" show which NVRAM contains the data.
• ENG: EEPROM on the BiCU board
• CTL: NVRAM on the controller board (PCB24)
The settings of each SP mode are explained in the right-hand column of the SP table in the
following way.
[Adjustable range / Default setting / Step] Alphanumeric
• If "Alphanumeric" is written to the right of the bracket as shown above, the setting of
the SP mode shows on the screen using alphanumeric characters instead of only

numbers. However, the settings in the bracket in the SP mode table are explained by
using only the numbers.
SSP: This denotes a "Special Service Program" mode setting.
SP Mode Tables
Appendices

SP1-XXX (Feed)
3.2 SP1-XXX (FEED)
SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG [Min to

or CTL Max/Init./Step]
1-001-001 Leading Edge Tray: Plain ENG [-9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 /
Registration 0.1mm/step]
1-001-002 Leading Edge Tray: Middle Thick ENG [-9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 /
1-001-003 Leading Edge Tray: Thick ENG [-9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 /
1-001-005 Leading Edge Tray: Plain: 1200 ENG [-9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 /
1-001-006 Leading Edge Tray: Middle Thick: 1200 ENG [-9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 /
1-001-007 Leading Edge By-pass: Plain ENG [-9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 /
1-001-008 Leading Edge By-pass: Middle Thick ENG [-9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 /
1-001-009 Leading Edge By-pass: Thick ENG [-9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 /
1-001-012 Leading Edge By-pass: Plain: 1200 ENG [-9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 /
1-001-013 Leading Edge By-pass: Middle Thick: 1200 ENG [-9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 /
1-001-014 Leading Edge Duplex: Plain ENG [-9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 /
1-001-015 Leading Edge Duplex: Middle Thick ENG [-9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 /
1-001-016 Leading Edge Duplex: Thick ENG [-9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 /
1-001-017 Leading Edge Tray: Special 1 ENG [-9.0 to 9.0 / 1.1 /
1-001-018 Leading Edge By-pass: Special 1 ENG [-9.0 to 9.0 / 1.1 /
1-001-019 Leading Edge Duplex: Plain: 1200 ENG [-9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 /
1-001-020 Leading Edge Duplex: Middle Thick: 1200 ENG [-9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 /

SP1-XXX (Feed)

1-001-021 Leading Edge Duplex: Special 1 ENG [-9.0 to 9.0 / 1.1 /
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1-001-022 Leading Edge Tray: Special 1: 1200 ENG [-9.0 to 9.0 / 1.1 /
1-001-023 Leading Edge By-pass: Special 1: 1200 ENG [-9.0 to 9.0 / 1.1 /
1-001-024 Leading Edge Duplex: Special 1: 1200 ENG [-9.0 to 9.0 / 1.1 /
1-001-026 Leading Edge Offset: Transfer Separation ENG* [-4.0 to 4.0 / 0.0 /
1-001-030 Leading Edge Auto correct: On/Off ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
Registration
1-001-031 Leading Edge Std. Measure: On/Off ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
Registration
1-001-032 Leading Edge Offset ENG* [-5.0 to 5.0 / 0.0 /
1-001-033 Leading Edge Offset Standard: 1 ENG* [0.0 to 999.0 / 0.0 /
1-001-041 Leading Edge Tray: Plain: Std Speed 2 ENG [-9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 /
1-001-043 Leading Edge By-pass: Plain: Std Speed 2 ENG [-9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 /
1-001-045 Leading Edge Duplex: Plain: Std Speed 2 ENG [-9.0 to 9.0 / 0.0 /

SP1-XXX (Feed)

1-001-047 Leading Edge Tray: Special1: Std Speed 2 ENG [-9.0 to 9.0 / 1.1 /
1-001-048 Leading Edge By-pass: Special1: Std Speed ENG [-9.0 to 9.0 / 1.1 /
Registration 2 0.1mm/step]
1-001-049 Leading Edge Duplex: Special1: Std Speed 2 ENG [-9.0 to 9.0 / 1.1 /
1-002-001 Side-to-Side By-pass Table ENG [-4.0 to 4.0 / 0.0 /
1-002-002 Side-to-Side Tray 1 ENG [-4.0 to 4.0 / 0.0 /
1-002-005 Side-to-Side Duplex ENG [-4.0 to 4.0 / 0.0 /
1-003-001 Paper Buckle Tray1: Plain ENG IM C300 series: [-5.0
to 5.0 / 2.0 /
0.1mm/step]
IM C400 series: [-5.0
to 5.0 / 0.0 /
0.1mm/step]
1-003-002 Paper Buckle Tray1: Middle Thick ENG [-5.0 to 5.0 / 0.0 /
0.1mm/step]
1-003-003 Paper Buckle Tray1: Thick ENG IM C300 series: [-5.0
to 5.0 / 0.0 /
0.1mm/step]
to 5.0 / -2.0 /
0.1mm/step]
1-003-004 Paper Buckle Tray2/3/4: Plain ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
1mm/step]
1-003-005 Paper Buckle Tray2/3/4: Middle Thick ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
1mm/step]

SP1-XXX (Feed)

1-003-006 Paper Buckle Tray2/3/4: Thick ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1mm/step]
1-003-007 Paper Buckle By-pass: Plain ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
1mm/step]
1-003-008 Paper Buckle By-pass: Middle Thick ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
1mm/step]
1-003-009 Paper Buckle By-pass: Thick ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
1mm/step]
1-003-010 Paper Buckle Duplex: Plain ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
1mm/step]
1-003-011 Paper Buckle Duplex: Middle Thick ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
1mm/step]
1-003-012 Paper Buckle Duplex: Thick ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
1mm/step]
1-003-013 Paper Buckle Tray1: Plain:1200 ENG IM C300 series: [-5.0
to 5.0 / 2.0 /
0.1mm/step]
to 5.0 / 0.0 /
0.1mm/step]
1-003-014 Paper Buckle Tray1: Mid. Thick:1200 ENG [-5.0 to 5.0 / 0.0 /
0.1mm/step]
1-003-015 Paper Buckle Tray2/3/4: Plain:1200 ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
1mm/step]
1-003-016 Paper Buckle Tray2/3/4: Mid. Thick:1200 ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
1mm/step]
1-003-017 Paper Buckle By-pass: Plain:1200 ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
1mm/step]
1-003-018 Paper Buckle By-pass: Middle Thick:1200 ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
1mm/step]
1-003-019 Paper Buckle By-pass: Small size ENG [-5 to 5 / -2 /
1mm/step]
1-003-020 Paper Buckle Tray1: Plain: Std. Spd. 2 ENG IM C300 series: [-5.0
to 5.0 / 2.0 /
0.1mm/step]
to 5.0 / 0.0 /

SP1-XXX (Feed)

0.1mm/step]
1-003-022 Paper Buckle Tray2/3/4: Plain: Std. Spd. 2 ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
1mm/step]
1-003-024 Paper Buckle By-pass: Plain: Std. Spd. 2 ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
1mm/step]
1-003-025 Paper Buckle By-pass: Middle Thick: BW ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
1mm/step]
1-003-026 Paper Buckle Duplex: Plain: Std. Spd. 2 ENG [-5 to 5 / 0 /
1mm/step]
1-007-001 Size Miss Peper Paper Ejection :MF ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
Ejection Mode 0: OFF
1: ON
1-007-002 Wid_SizeMiss Paper Ejct :MF:Wid ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
Paper Eject Mode 0: OFF
1: ON
1-010-001 Size Set Miss Paper Length Detection ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
Detection Mode 0: OFF
1: ON
1-010-002 Size Set Miss Small Size Miss Set Detection ENG IM C300 series: [0 to
Detection Mode 1 / 0 / 1/step]
IM C400 series: [0 to
1 / 1 / 1/step]
0: OFF
1: ON
1-011-001 Size Set Miss Papr Lngth Dtct:F1 ENG [0 to 65535 / 0 /
Detection Count 1/step]
1-011-002 Size Set Miss Papr Lngth Dtct:MF ENG [0 to 65535 / 0 /
1-011-006 Size Set Miss Small Size Miss Set Detection ENG [0 to 65535 / 0 /
1-012-002 Size Miss Paper Ejection Count ENG [0 to 65535 / 0 /

SP1-XXX (Feed)

Ejection Count 1/step]
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1-012-003 Wid_SizeMiss Ejection Count:Wid ENG [0 to 65535 / 0 /
Paper Eject 1/step]
Count
1-013-001 Tray Down Erro Tray1 ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
Flag
1-105-001 Print Target Plain1:FC:Center ENG* IM C300 series: [100
Temperature to 180 / 134 /
1deg/step]
IM C400 series: [100
to 200 / 155 /
1deg/step]
1-105-003 Print Target Plain1:BW:Center ENG* IM C300 series: [100
1deg/step]
to 180 / 150 /
1deg/step]
1-105-005 Print Target Plain2:FC:Center ENG* IM C300 series: [100
1deg/step]
to 200 / 165 /
1deg/step]
1-105-007 Print Target Plain2:BW:Center ENG* IM C300 series: [100
1deg/step]
to 180 / 155 /
1deg/step]
1-105-009 Print Target Thin:FC:Center ENG* IM C300 series: [100
1deg/step]
to 180 / 163 /
1deg/step]
1-105-011 Print Target Thin:BW:Center ENG* IM C300 series: [100

SP1-XXX (Feed)

1deg/step]
to 180 / 147 /
1deg/step]
1-105-013 Print Target Middle Thick:FC:Center ENG* [100 to 180 / 153 /
Temperature 1deg/step]
1-105-015 Print Target Middle Thick:BW:Center ENG* [100 to 180 / 148 /
1-105-017 Print Target Thick1:FC:Center ENG* [100 to 180 / 138 /
1-105-019 Print Target Thick1:BW:Center ENG* [100 to 180 / 138 /
1-105-029 Print Target Special1:FC:Center ENG* IM C300 series: [100
1deg/step]
to 200 / 155 /
1deg/step]
1-105-031 Print Target Special1:BW:Center ENG* IM C300 series: [100
1deg/step]
to 180 / 150 /
1deg/step]
1-105-033 Print Target Special2:FC:Center ENG* IM C300 series: [100
1deg/step]

SP1-XXX (Feed)

to 200 / 165 /
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1deg/step]
1-105-035 Print Target Special2:BW:Center ENG* IM C300 series: [100
1deg/step]
to 180 / 155 /
1deg/step]
1-105-037 Print Target Special3:FC:Center ENG* [100 to 180 / 153 /
1-105-039 Print Target Special3:BW:Center ENG* [100 to 180 / 148 /
1-105-041 Print Target Envelop: Center ENG* [100 to 180 / 141 /
1-105-043 Print Target OHP: Center ENG* [100 to 180 / 160 /
1-105-101 Print Target Plain1:FC:Center:Low Speed ENG* [100 to 180 / 122 /
1-105-103 Print Target Plain1:BW:Center:Low Speed ENG* [100 to 180 / 122 /
1-105-105 Print Target Plain2:FC:Center:Low Speed ENG* [100 to 180 / 124 /
1-105-107 Print Target Plain2:BW:Center:Low Speed ENG* [100 to 180 / 124 /
1-105-109 Print Target Thin:FC:Center:Low Speed ENG* [100 to 180 / 123 /
1-105-111 Print Target Thin:BW:Center:Low Speed ENG* [100 to 180 / 123 /
1-105-113 Print Target Middle Thick:FC:Center:Low ENG* [100 to 180 / 136 /
Temperature Speed 1deg/step]
1-105-115 Print Target Middle Thick:BW:Center:Low ENG* [100 to 180 / 136 /
1-105-117 Print Target Special 1:FC:Center:Low ENG* [100 to 180 / 122 /
1-105-119 Print Target Special 1:BW:Center:Low ENG* [100 to 180 / 122 /

SP1-XXX (Feed)

1-105-129 Print Target Envelope:Thick1:FC:Center ENG* [100 to 180 / 141 /
1-105-141 Print Target Postcard:Thick1:FC:Center ENG* [100 to 180 / 126 /
1-105-151 Print Target Special 4:FC:Center ENG* [100 to 180 / 138 /
1-105-153 Print Target Special 4:BW:Center ENG* [100 to 180 / 138 /
1-106-001 Fusing Center ENG [-50 to 250 / 0 /
Display
1-106-002 Fusing End ENG [-20 to 348 / 0 /
Display

SP1-XXX (Feed)

1-106-003 Fusing Pressure: Center ENG [-20 to 250 / 0 /
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
Display
1-106-005 Fusing Pressure: End Rear ENG [-20 to 250 / 0 /
Display
1-106-006 Fusing Pressure: End Front ENG [-20 to 250 / 0 /
Display
1-109-001 Rotation Speed Overshoot Prevent Rotation ENG* [0 to 3 / 0 / 1/step]
Setting 0: 89mm/s (Type a,b)
1: 178mm/s (Type
a,b)
2: 212mm/s (Type b)
3: 252mm/s (Type b)
1-109-002 Rotation Speed After Reload Rotation ENG* [0 to 3 / 0 / 1/step]
1: 178mm/s (Type
a,b)
2: 212mm/s (Type b)
3: 252mm/s (Type b)
1-109-003 Rotation Speed Print Ready Rotation ENG* [0 to 3 / 0 / 1/step]
1: 178mm/s (Type
a,b)
2: 212mm/s (Type b)
3: 252mm/s (Type b)
1-112-002 Image Processing Temp.:Plain:Center:Energy ENG* IM C300 series: [-30
Temp. Correct Saving to 20 / 13 /
1deg/step]
IM C400 series: [-30
to 20 / 16 /
1deg/step]
1-112-004 Image Processing Temp.:Plain:Press:Energy ENG* [-30 to 20 / 0 /
Temp. Correct Saving 1deg/step]
1-113-001 Curl Correction Execute Pattern ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: OFF

SP1-XXX (Feed)

1: ON
1-120-001 Fuser Logs Mode Switch ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
acquisition
1-120-002 Fuser Logs Period Switch ENG* [0 to 4 / 0 / 1/step]
acquisition
1-131-001 Continuous Print Feed Permit Condition Setting ENG* [0 to 2 / 1 / 1/step]
Mode Switch 0: Productivity Mode
1: Fusing Quality
Mode 1
2: Fusing Quality
Mode 2
1-132-012 Voltage Detection Voltage Detection ENG* NA: [0.0 to 650.0 /
117.0 / 0.1V/step]
TWN: [0.0 to 650.0 /
107.0 / 0.1V/step]
KOR: [0.0 to 650.0 /
227.0 / 0.1V/step]
EU: [0.0 to 650.0 /
227.0 / 0.1V/step]
CHN: [0.0 to 650.0 /
227.0 / 0.1V/step]
AS: [0.0 to 650.0 /
227.0 / 0.1V/step]
1-132-014 Voltage Detection Max ENG* [0.0 to 350.0 / 0.0 /
0.1V/step]
1-132-015 Voltage Detection Min ENG* [0.0 to 350.0 / 0.0 /
0.1V/step]
1-132-016 Voltage Detection Latest ENG* [0.0 to 350.0 / 0.0 /
0.1V/step]
1-132-017 Voltage Detection SC Detection ENG* [0.0 to 350.0 / 0.0 /
0.1V/step]
1-132-018 Voltage Detection Max(standby) ENG* [0.0 to 350.0 / 0.0 /
0.1V/step]
1-132-019 Voltage Detection Min(standby) ENG* [0.0 to 350.0 / 0.0 /
0.1V/step]
1-135-001 Inrush Control Inrush Control ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1-136-001 Engy Svg Paper Control ON/OFF ENG* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]

SP1-XXX (Feed)

Feed Judg. 0: OFF
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1: ON
1-141-001 Fusing SC Issue SC Number ENG* [0 to 99999 / 0 /
Time Info 1/step]
1-141-101 Fusing SC Issue Heating Roller Temperature ENG* [-100 to 260 / 0 /
Time Info 1:Center 1deg/step]
Time Info 1:End 1deg/step]
1-141-107 Fusing SC Issue Press Roller Temperature 1 ENG* [-100 to 260 / 0 /
Time Info 1deg/step]
1-141-108 Fusing SC Issue Press Roller: End R ENG* [-100 to 260 / 0 /
Time Info Temperature 1 1deg/step]
1-141-109 Fusing SC Issue Press Roller: End F ENG* [-100 to 260 / 0 /
1-141-110 Fusing SC Error NC Sensor: Center ENG* [-100 to 300 / 0 /
Time Info Atmosphere Temp 1 1deg/step]
1-141-111 Fusing SC Error Fuser State Det 1 ENG* [0 to 100 / 0 / 1/step]
Time Info
1-141-112 Fusing SC Error Heater1 Duty Det 1 ENG* [0 to 100 / 0 /
Time Info 1%/step]
1-141-113 Fusing SC Error NC Sensor: Center Det Temp ENG* [0 to 2000 / 0 /
Time Info AD 1 1/step]
1-141-114 Fusing SC Error NC Sensor: Center ENG* [0 to 2000 / 0 /
Time Info Atmosphere Temp AD 1 1/step]
1-141-158 Fusing SC Issue Press Roller.End R ENG* [-100 to 260 / 0 /
1-141-159 Fusing SC Issue Press Roller.End F ENG* [-100 to 260 / 0 /

SP1-XXX (Feed)

Time Info
Time Info 1%/step]
1-141-208 Fusing SC Issue Press Roller.End R ENG* [-100 to 260 / 0 /
1-141-209 Fusing SC Issue Press Roller.End F ENG* [-100 to 260 / 0 /
Time Info
Time Info 1%/step]
1-142-001 Fusing Jam SC Display ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
Detection 0: OFF
1: ON
1-152-001 Fusing Nip Band Execute ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
Check
1-158-001 Abnormal Noise Unit: Execute ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
Confirmation
1-158-002 Abnormal Noise No Unit: Execute ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
Confirmation
1-158-003 Abnormal Noise Operation Time ENG* [0 to 200 / 20 /

SP1-XXX (Feed)

Confirmation 1sec/step]
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1-158-004 Abnormal Noise Operation Line Speed ENG* [0 to 3 / 0 / 1/step]
Confirmation 0: 89mm/s (Type a,b)
1: 178mm/s (Type
a,b)
2: 212mm/s (Type b)
3: 252mm/s (Type b)
1-158-005 Abnormal Noise Heat Center Target Temp ENG* IM C300 series: [100
Confirmation to 180 / 154 /
1deg/step]
to 180 / 180 /
1deg/step]
1-158-007 Abnormal Noise Press Target Temp ENG* [0 to 200 / 150 /
Confirmation 1deg/step]
1-190-001 Flicker Control Flicker Control ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1-201-001 1Bin Duty Control Control Operating Time ENG [5 to 35 / 35 /
15min/step]
1-801-001 Motor Speed Transport M: Plain1/2 ENG* [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.43 /
Adjustment 0.01%/step]
1-801-002 Motor Speed Transport M: Thin ENG* [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.43 /
1-801-003 Motor Speed Transport M: M-Thick:Std Spd1 ENG* [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.43 /
1-801-004 Motor Speed Transport M: Thick1 ENG* [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.43 /
1-801-007 Motor Speed Transport M: Special1 ENG* [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.43 /
1-801-010 Motor Speed Transport M: Envelope ENG* [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.00 /

SP1-XXX (Feed)

1-801-011 Motor Speed Transport M: OHP ENG* [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.43 /
1-801-012 Motor Speed Transport M: Plain1/2:Low ENG* [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.43 /
Adjustment Speed 0.01%/step]
1-801-013 Motor Speed Transport M: Thin:Low Speed ENG* [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.43 /
1-801-014 Motor Speed Transport M: M-Thick:Low ENG* [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.43 /
1-801-015 Motor Speed Transport M: Special1:Low ENG* [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.43 /
1-801-018 Motor Speed Transport M: Plain1/2: Gloss ENG* [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.43 /
1-801-019 Motor Speed Transport M: M-Thick: ENG* [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.43 /
Adjustment Gloss:Std Spd1 0.01%/step]
1-801-020 Motor Speed Transport M: Postcard ENG* [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.43 /
1-801-051 Motor Speed Bk Drum/Dev. Mot: Std Speed ENG* [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.00 /
Adjustment 1 0.01%/step]
1-801-052 Motor Speed Bk Drum/Dev. Mot: Low Speed ENG* [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.00 /
1-801-053 Motor Speed Col Drum/Dev. Mot: Std Speed ENG* IM C300 series: [-6
Adjustment 1 to 6 / 0 / 1STEP/step]
IM C400 series: [-5
to 5 / 0 / 1STEP/step]
1-801-054 Motor Speed Col Drum/Dev. Mot: Low ENG* [-6 to 6 / 0 /
Adjustment Speed 1STEP/step]
1-801-055 Motor Speed Offset: Std Speed 1: Color ENG* IM C300 series: [-6
Adjustment to 6 / 0 / 1STEP/step]
IM C400 series: [-5
to 5 / 0 / 1STEP/step]
1-801-056 Motor Speed Offset: Low Speed: Color ENG* [-6 to 6 / 0 /
Adjustment 1STEP/step]

SP1-XXX (Feed)

1-801-081 Motor Speed Transport M: Plain1/2: Std Spd ENG* [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.43 /
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
Adjustment 2 0.01%/step]
1-801-082 Motor Speed Transport M: Thin:Std Spd2 ENG* [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.43 /
1-801-084 Motor Speed Transport M: Special1: Std ENG* [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.43 /
Adjustment Spd2 0.01%/step]
1-801-085 Motor Speed Transport M: Special2: Std ENG* [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.43 /
1-801-086 Motor Speed Transport M: Special3:Std ENG* [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.43 /
1-801-087 Motor Speed Transport M: OHP:Std Spd2 ENG* [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.43 /
1-801-088 Motor Speed Transport M: ENG* [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.43 /
Adjustment Plain1/2:Gloss:Std Spd 2 0.01%/step]
1-801-130 Motor Speed Drum Motor Adjustment ENG* [0 to 1 / 1 /
Adjustment Control 1STEP/step]
1-801-131 Motor Speed Color Dev. Mot.:Std Speed1 ENG* [-20.0 to 20.0 / 0.0 /
1-801-132 Motor Speed Color Dev. Mot.:Low Speed ENG* [-20.0 to 20.0 / 0.0 /
1-801-133 Motor Speed Bk Drum/Dev. Mot:Std Speed2 ENG* [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.00 /
1-801-134 Motor Speed Bk Drum/Dev. Mot:Middle ENG* [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.00 /
1-801-135 Motor Speed Col Drum/Dev. Mot:Middle ENG* [-6 to 6 / 0 /
Adjustment Speed 1STEP/step]
1-801-136 Motor Speed Offset: Middle Speed: Color ENG* [-6 to 6 / 0 /
Adjustment 1STEP/step]
1-801-137 Motor Speed Color Dev M: Middle Speed ENG* [-20.0 to 20.0 / 0.0 /
1-801-138 Motor Speed Col Drum Mot: Std Spd 1: ENG* [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.00 /
Adjustment Indep. 0.01%/step]
1-801-139 Motor Speed Col Drum Mot: Mid Spd: Indep. ENG* [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.00 /
1-801-140 Motor Speed Col Drum Mot: Low Spd: ENG* [-4.00 to 4.00 / 0.00 /
Adjustment Indep. 0.01%/step]
1-902-001 Ladder Pattern Execute ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]

SP1-XXX (Feed)

Print
1-907-001 Paper Feed Tray1 Clutch ON: Plain ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 /
Timing Adj. 1mm/step]
1-907-002 Paper Feed Tray1 Clutch ON: Middle Thick ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 /
1-907-003 Paper Feed Tray1 Clutch ON: Thick ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 /
1-907-007 Paper Feed Tray1 Clutch OFF: Plain ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 /
1-907-008 Paper Feed Tray1 Clutch OFF: Middle ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 /
Timing Adj. Thick 1mm/step]
1-907-009 Paper Feed Tray1 Clutch OFF: Thick ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 /
1-907-010 Paper Feed Tray1 Paper Exit Sensor: Plain ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 /
1-907-011 Paper Feed Tray1 Paper Exit Sensor: ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 /
Timing Adj. Middle Thick 1mm/step]
1-907-012 Paper Feed Tray1 Paper Exit Sensor: Thick ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 /
1-907-013 Paper Feed By-pass Clutch ON: Plain ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 /
1-907-014 Paper Feed By-pass Clutch ON: Middle ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 /
1-907-015 Paper Feed By-pass Clutch ON: Thick ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 /
1-907-016 Paper Feed By-pass Clutch ON: Envelope ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 /
1-907-017 Paper Feed By-pass Clutch OFF: Plain ENG [-10 to 10 / -5 /
1-907-018 Paper Feed By-pass Clutch OFF: Middle ENG [-10 to 10 / -5 /
1-907-019 Paper Feed By-pass Clutch OFF: Thick ENG [-10 to 10 / -5 /
1-907-020 Paper Feed By-pass Clutch OFF: Envelope ENG [-10 to 10 / -5 /
1-907-021 Paper Feed Exit Junction Solenoid: OFF ENG [-20 to 20 / 0 /

SP1-XXX (Feed)

1-907-022 Paper Feed Exit Junction Solenoid: ON ENG IM C300 series: [-40
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
Timing Adj. to 20 / -9 / 1mm/step]
to 20 / -14 /
1mm/step]
1-907-025 Paper Feed Exit Junction Solenoid: ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 /
Timing Adj. OFF:Low 1mm/step]
1-907-026 Paper Feed Exit Junction Solenoid: ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 /
Timing Adj. ON:Low 1mm/step]
1-907-029 Paper Feed Tray Lift Motor Pressure ENG* [-2540 to 2540 / 0 /
Timing Adj. 20msec/step]
1-907-032 Paper Feed Tray Lift Motor Up ENG* [-2540 to 2540 / 0 /
1-907-033 Paper Feed Tray Lift Motor Down ENG* [-2540 to 2540 / 0 /
1-907-034 Paper Feed Tray Lift Motor Paper End ENG* [-2540 to 2540 / 0 /
1-907-035 Paper Feed Tray2: Paper Interval: Plain ENG* [-10 to 10 / 0 /
1-907-036 Paper Feed Tray2: Paper Interval: Mid. ENG* [-10 to 10 / 0 /
1-907-037 Paper Feed Tray2: Paper Interval: Thick ENG* [-10 to 10 / 0 /
1-907-041 Paper Feed Tray2: 1st Leading Edge Pos.: ENG* [0 to 10 / 0 /
Timing Adj. Plain 1mm/step]
Timing Adj. Mid. Thick 1mm/step]

SP1-XXX (Feed)

1-907-047 Paper Feed Tray2: Min. Paper Interval: ENG* [-10 to 10 / 0 /
1-907-053 Paper Feed Tray1 Clutch ON: Plain: Std ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 /
Timing Adj. Speed 2 1mm/step]
1-907-055 Paper Feed Tray1 Clutch OFF: Plain: Std ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 /
1-907-057 Paper Feed Tray1 Paper Exit Sen.: Plain: ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 /
Timing Adj. Std Spd 2 1mm/step]
1-907-058 Paper Feed Tray1 Paper Exit Sen.: Middle ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 /
Timing Adj. Thick: BW 1mm/step]
1-907-059 Paper Feed By-pass Clutch ON: Plain: Std ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 /
1-907-061 Paper Feed By-pass Clutch OFF: Plain: Std ENG [-10 to 10 / -5 /
1-907-063 Paper Feed Exit Junction SOL:OFF: Std ENG [-20 to 20 / 0 /
1-907-064 Paper Feed Exit Junction SOL:ON: Std ENG [-40 to 20 / -16 /
1-907-065 Paper Feed Exit Junction SOL:OFF: Mid ENG [-20 to 20 / 0 /
Timing Adj. Speed 1mm/step]
1-907-066 Paper Feed Exit Junction SOL:ON: Mid ENG [-40 to 20 / -9 /
1-907-067 Paper Feed Exit Clutch OFF: Exit Finish : ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 /

SP1-XXX (Feed)

SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1-907-068 Paper Feed Exit Clutch OFF: Reverse ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 /
Timing Adj. Finish : Plain 1mm/step]
1-907-069 Paper Feed Exit Clutch OFF: Invert Finish : ENG [-10 to 10 / 0 /
Timing Adj. Std Speed 2 1mm/step]
Timing Adj. Std Speed 2 1mm/step]
1-907-072 Paper Feed Exit Clutch ON: Std Speed 2 ENG [-20 to 20 / 0 /
Timing Adj. Low 1mm/step]
Timing Adj. Low 1mm/step]
1-907-075 Paper Feed Exit Clutch ON: Low Speed ENG [-20 to 20 / 0 /
Timing Adj. Mid Speed 1mm/step]
Timing Adj. Mid Speed 1mm/step]
1-907-078 Paper Feed Exit Clutch ON: Mid Speed ENG [-20 to 20 / 0 /
1-907-079 Paper Feed Invert Clutch OFF: Invert : ENG [-20 to 20 / 0 /
1-907-080 Paper Feed Invert Clutch OFF:1bin Exit: ENG [-20 to 20 / 0 /
1-907-081 Paper Feed Invert Clutch ON: Plain ENG [-20 to 20 / 0 /
1-907-082 Paper Feed Invert Clutch OFF: Invert:Std ENG [-20 to 20 / 0 /
1-907-083 Paper Feed Invert Clutch OFF:1BIN: Std ENG [-20 to 20 / 0 /
1-907-084 Paper Feed Invert Clutch ON: Std Speed 2 ENG [-20 to 20 / 0 /
1-907-085 Paper Feed Invert Clutch OFF: Invert: Low ENG [-20 to 20 / 0 /

SP1-XXX (Feed)

1-907-086 Paper Feed Invert Clutch OFF:1BIN: Low ENG [-20 to 20 / 0 /
1-907-087 Paper Feed Invert Clutch ON: Low Speed ENG [-20 to 20 / 0 /
1-907-088 Paper Feed Invert Clutch OFF: Invert :Mid ENG [-20 to 20 / 0 /
1-907-089 Paper Feed Invert Clutch OFF:1BIN: Mid ENG [-20 to 20 / 0 /
1-907-090 Paper Feed Invert Clutch ON: Mid Speed ENG [-20 to 20 / 0 /
1-908-090 Paper Feed NextFeed:sta1 ENG IM C300 series: [0 to
Timing Adj.:b 0 / 0 / 1mm/step]
IM C400 series:
[-120 to 120 / 0 /
1mm/step]
1-908-091 Paper Feed NextFeed:sta2 ENG IM C300 series: [0 to
IM C400 series:
[-120 to 120 / 0 /

SP1-XXX (Feed)

1mm/step]
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1-908-092 Paper Feed NextFeed:mid ENG IM C300 series: [0 to
IM C400 series:
[-120 to 120 / 0 /
1mm/step]
1-908-093 Paper Feed NextFeed:low ENG IM C300 series: [0 to
IM C400 series:
[-120 to 120 / 0 /
1mm/step]
1-908-094 Paper Feed NextFeed:small ENG IM C300 series: [0 to
IM C400 series:
[-120 to 120 / 0 /
1mm/step]
1-908-095 Paper Feed Refeed:sta1 ENG IM C300 series: [0 to
IM C400 series:
[-120 to 120 / 0 /
1mm/step]
1-908-096 Paper Feed Refeed:sta2 ENG IM C300 series: [0 to
IM C400 series:
[-120 to 120 / 0 /
1mm/step]
1-908-097 Paper Feed Refeed:mid ENG IM C300 series: [0 to
IM C400 series:
[-120 to 120 / 0 /
1mm/step]
1-908-098 Paper Feed Refeed:low ENG IM C300 series: [0 to
IM C400 series:
[-120 to 120 / 0 /
1mm/step]
1-908-099 Paper Feed Refeed:small ENG IM C300 series: [0 to

SP1-XXX (Feed)

IM C400 series:
[-120 to 120 / 0 /
1mm/step]
1-908-100 Paper Feed Feed_CL_ON3:plain ENG IM C300 series: [0 to
to 20 / 0 / 1mm/step]
1-908-101 Paper Feed Feed_CL_ON3:mid_th ENG IM C300 series: [0 to
to 20 / 0 / 1mm/step]
1-908-102 Paper Feed Feed_CL_ON3:thick ENG IM C300 series: [0 to
to 20 / 0 / 1mm/step]
1-908-103 Paper Feed Feed_CL_OFF1:plain ENG IM C300 series: [0 to
to 20 / 0 / 1mm/step]
1-908-104 Paper Feed Feed_CL_OFF1:mid_th ENG IM C300 series: [0 to
to 20 / 0 / 1mm/step]
1-908-105 Paper Feed Feed_CL_OFF1:thick ENG IM C300 series: [0 to
to 20 / 0 / 1mm/step]
1-908-106 Paper Feed Feed_CL_OFF2:sta1 ENG IM C300 series: [0 to
IM C400 series:
[-350 to 350 / 0 /
1mm/step]
1-908-107 Paper Feed Feed_CL_OFF2:sta2 ENG IM C300 series: [0 to
IM C400 series:
[-350 to 350 / 0 /

SP1-XXX (Feed)

1mm/step]
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1-908-108 Paper Feed Feed_CL_OFF2:mid ENG IM C300 series: [0 to
IM C400 series:
[-350 to 350 / 0 /
1mm/step]
1-908-109 Paper Feed Feed_CL_OFF2:low ENG IM C300 series: [0 to
IM C400 series:
[-350 to 350 / 0 /
1mm/step]
1-908-110 Paper Feed Feed_CL_OFF2:small ENG IM C300 series: [0 to
IM C400 series:
[-350 to 350 / 0 /
1mm/step]
1-908-111 Paper Feed Grip_CL_ON1:plain ENG IM C300 series: [0 to
20 / 0 / 1mm/step]
1-908-112 Paper Feed Grip_CL_ON1:mid_th ENG IM C300 series: [0 to
20 / 0 / 1mm/step]
1-908-113 Paper Feed Grip_CL_ON1:thick ENG IM C300 series: [0 to
20 / 0 / 1mm/step]
1-908-114 Paper Feed Grip_CL_ON2:plain ENG IM C300 series: [0 to
to 20 / 0 / 1mm/step]
1-908-115 Paper Feed Grip_CL_ON2:mid_th ENG IM C300 series: [0 to
to 20 / 0 / 1mm/step]
1-908-116 Paper Feed Grip_CL_ON2:thick ENG IM C300 series: [0 to

SP1-XXX (Feed)

to 20 / 0 / 1mm/step]
1-908-117 Paper Feed Grip_CL_OFF1:plain ENG IM C300 series: [0 to
to 20 / 0 / 1mm/step]
1-908-118 Paper Feed Grip_CL_OFF1:mid_th ENG IM C300 series: [0 to
to 20 / 0 / 1mm/step]
1-908-119 Paper Feed Grip_CL_OFF1:thick ENG IM C300 series: [0 to
to 20 / 0 / 1mm/step]
1-908-120 Paper Feed Grip_CL_OFF2:plain ENG IM C300 series: [0 to
to 20 / 0 / 1mm/step]
1-908-121 Paper Feed Grip_CL_OFF2:mid_th ENG IM C300 series: [0 to
to 20 / 0 / 1mm/step]
1-908-122 Paper Feed Grip_CL_OFF2:thick ENG IM C300 series: [0 to
to 20 / 0 / 1mm/step]
1-908-123 Paper Feed Reg_CL_ON1:plain ENG IM C300 series: [0 to
to 20 / 0 / 1mm/step]
1-908-124 Paper Feed Reg_CL_ON1:mid_th ENG IM C300 series: [0 to
to 20 / 0 / 1mm/step]
1-908-125 Paper Feed Reg_CL_ON1:thick ENG IM C300 series: [0 to

SP1-XXX (Feed)

SP Mode Tables
Appendices
to 20 / 0 / 1mm/step]
1-908-126 Paper Feed Reg_CL_OFF1:plain ENG IM C300 series: [0 to
to 20 / 0 / 1mm/step]
1-908-127 Paper Feed Reg_CL_OFF1:mid_th ENG IM C300 series: [0 to
to 20 / 0 / 1mm/step]
1-908-128 Paper Feed Reg_CL_OFF1:thick ENG IM C300 series: [0 to
to 20 / 0 / 1mm/step]
1-909-002 ImageRetry Function:Tray1 ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
0: OFF
1: ON
1-909-003 ImageRetry Function:MF ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
1-909-012 ImageRetry ContAct:Tray1 ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
0: OFF
1: ON
1-909-013 ImageRetry ContAct:MF ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF

SP1-XXX (Feed)

1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
1-909-022 ImageRetry ContInv:F1 ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
1count/step]
1-909-023 ImageRetry ContInv:MF ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
1count/step]
1count/step]
1count/step]
1count/step]
1-909-032 ImageRetry ContThresh:F1 ENG [0 to 255 / 4 /
1count/step]
1-909-033 ImageRetry ContThresh:MF ENG [0 to 255 / 4 /
1count/step]
1count/step]
1count/step]
1count/step]
1-909-102 ImageRetry ExeCnt:C1:Tray1 ENG [0 to 999999 / 0 /
1count/step]
1-909-103 ImageRetry ExeCnt:C1:MF ENG [0 to 999999 / 0 /
1count/step]
1count/step]
1count/step]
1count/step]

SP1-XXX (Feed)

SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1count/step]
1-909-108 ImageRetry ExeCnt:C2:MF ENG [0 to 999999 / 0 /
1count/step]
1count/step]
1count/step]
1count/step]
1-909-112 ImageRetry ExeCnt:MT:Tray1 ENG [0 to 999999 / 0 /
1count/step]
1-909-113 ImageRetry ExeCnt:MT:MF ENG [0 to 999999 / 0 /
1count/step]
1count/step]
1count/step]
1count/step]
1-909-117 ImageRetry ExeCnt:T1:Tray1 ENG [0 to 999999 / 0 /
1count/step]
1-909-118 ImageRetry ExeCnt:T1:MF ENG [0 to 999999 / 0 /
1count/step]
1count/step]
1count/step]
1count/step]
1count/step]
1count/step]
1count/step]

SP1-XXX (Feed)

1count/step]
1count/step]
1count/step]
1-909-202 ImageRetry PrntCnt:C1:Tray1 ENG [0 to 999999 / 0 /
1count/step]
1-909-203 ImageRetry PrntCnt:C1:MF ENG [0 to 999999 / 0 /
1count/step]
1count/step]
1count/step]
1count/step]
1count/step]
1-909-208 ImageRetry PrntCnt:C2:MF ENG [0 to 999999 / 0 /
1count/step]
1count/step]
1count/step]
1count/step]
1-909-212 ImageRetry PrntCnt:MT:Tray1 ENG [0 to 999999 / 0 /
1count/step]
1-909-213 ImageRetry PrntCnt:MT:MF ENG [0 to 999999 / 0 /
1count/step]
1count/step]
1count/step]
1count/step]
1-909-217 ImageRetry PrntCnt:T1:Tray1 ENG [0 to 999999 / 0 /
1count/step]

SP1-XXX (Feed)

1-909-218 ImageRetry PrntCnt:T1:MF ENG [0 to 999999 / 0 /
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1count/step]
1count/step]
1count/step]
1count/step]
1count/step]
1count/step]
1count/step]
1count/step]
1count/step]
1count/step]
1-910-002 ExpSlip PPM Lower:Tray1 ENG [0 to 99 / 60 /
1%/step]
1-910-003 ExpSlip PPM Lower:MF ENG [0 to 99 / 60 /
1%/step]
1%/step]
1%/step]
1%/step]
1-910-022 ExpSlip ContCnt:Tray1 ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
1count/step]
1-910-023 ExpSlip ContCnt:MF ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
1count/step]
1count/step]

SP1-XXX (Feed)

1count/step]
1count/step]
1-910-032 ExpSlip ContThresh:Tray1 ENG [0 to 255 / 7 /
1count/step]
1-910-033 ExpSlip ContThresh:MF ENG [0 to 255 / 7 /
1count/step]
1count/step]
1count/step]
1count/step]
1-910-052 ExpSlip ContFeed:Tray1 ENG [0 to 999 / 0 /
1count/step]
1-910-053 ExpSlip ContFeed:MF ENG [0 to 999 / 0 /
1count/step]
1count/step]
1count/step]
1count/step]
1-910-071 ImageRetry ExeCnt:Sl0:Tray1 ENG [0 to 999999 / 0 /
1count/step]
1count/step]
1-910-073 ImageRetry ExeCnt:Ret:Tray1 ENG [0 to 999999 / 0 /
1count/step]
1-910-074 ImageRetry ExeCnt:Jam:Tray1 ENG [0 to 999999 / 0 /
1count/step]
1-910-075 ImageRetry ExeCnt:Sl0:MF ENG [0 to 999999 / 0 /
1count/step]
1-910-076 ImageRetry ExeCnt:Sl1:MF ENG [0 to 999999 / 0 /
1count/step]
1-910-077 ImageRetry ExeCnt:Ret:MF ENG [0 to 999999 / 0 /
1count/step]

SP1-XXX (Feed)

1-910-078 ImageRetry ExeCnt:Jam:MF ENG [0 to 999999 / 0 /
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1count/step]
1count/step]
1count/step]
1count/step]
1count/step]
1count/step]
1count/step]
1count/step]
1count/step]
1count/step]
1count/step]
1count/step]
1count/step]
1-910-121 ExpSlip Slip1:Tray1 ENG [-999.9 to 999.9 / 0.0
/ 0.1mm/step]
/ 0.1mm/step]
/ 0.1mm/step]
1-910-131 ExpSlip Slip1:MF ENG [-999.9 to 999.9 / 0.0
/ 0.1mm/step]
/ 0.1mm/step]

SP1-XXX (Feed)

/ 0.1mm/step]
/ 0.1mm/step]
/ 0.1mm/step]
/ 0.1mm/step]
/ 0.1mm/step]
/ 0.1mm/step]
/ 0.1mm/step]
/ 0.1mm/step]
/ 0.1mm/step]
/ 0.1mm/step]
1-910-232 ExpSlip SlipTotal:Tray1 ENG [-999999.9 to
999999.9 / 0.0 /
0.1mm/step]
1-910-233 ExpSlip SlipTotal:MF ENG [-999999.9 to
999999.9 / 0.0 /
0.1mm/step]
999999.9 / 0.0 /
0.1mm/step]
999999.9 / 0.0 /
0.1mm/step]
999999.9 / 0.0 /
0.1mm/step]
1-950-001 Fan Cooling Time PCDU Cooling Fan ENG* [0 to 600 / 0 /
Set 1sec/step]
1-950-002 Fan Cooling Time Fusing Fan ENG* [0 to 600 / 10 /

SP1-XXX (Feed)

Set 1sec/step]
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1-950-003 Fan Cooling Time PSU Fan ENG* [0 to 600 / 0 /
Set 1sec/step]
1-950-004 Fan Cooling Time Laser Unit Fan ENG* [0 to 600 / 0 /
Set 1sec/step]
1-951-001 Fan Start Time PCDU Cooling Fan ENG* [0 to 120 / 0 /
Set 1sec/step]
1-951-002 Fan Start Time Fusing Fan ENG* [0 to 120 / 0 /
Set 1sec/step]
1-951-003 Fan Start Time PSU Fan ENG* [0 to 120 / 0 /
Set 1sec/step]
1-951-004 Fan Start Time Laser Unit Fan ENG* [0 to 120 / 0 /
Set 1sec/step]
1-952-001 Fan Control Off ENG* [10 to 60 / 10 /
Mode Time Set 1min/step]
1-953-001 Extra Fan Control Operation Status ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1-953-006 Extra Fan Control Extra Fan Start Temp. ENG* [0.0 to 50.0 / 5.0 /
0.1deg/step]
1-953-007 Extra Fan Control Extra Fan Stop Temp. ENG* [0.0 to 50.0 / 2.0 /
Threshold 0.1deg/step]
1-953-008 Extra Fan Control Set: Extra Operation ON/OFF ENG* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
1-955-001 Fan Control PCDU Fan Operation Sw ENG* [0.0 to 100.0 / 38.0 /
Temp. 0.1deg/step]
1-955-002 Fan Control Fusing Fan Operation Sw ENG* [0.0 to 100.0 / 0.0 /
Temp. 0.1deg/step]
1-955-004 Fan Control Laser Unit Fan Operation Sw ENG* [0.0 to 100.0 / 38.0 /
Temp. 0.1deg/step]
1-955-005 Fan Control Fan Operation Sw Temp. ENG* [0.0 to 100.0 / 2.0 /
1-955-006 Fan Control PSU Fan Operation Start ENG* [0 to 900 / 0 /
Time2 1sec/step]
1-955-007 Fan Control PSU Fan Ctrl Off Mode Time2 ENG* [0.0 to 60.0 / 10.0 /
0.1min./step]

SP2-XXX (Drum) -1
3.3 SP2-XXX (DRUM) -1

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
2-005-00 Charge DC Voltage: Fix Plain: Bk ENG [0 to 2000 /
1 * 590 /
10-V/step]
2-005-00 Charge DC Voltage: Fix Plain: C ENG [0 to 2000 /
2 * 590 /
10-V/step]
2-005-00 Charge DC Voltage: Fix Plain: M ENG [0 to 2000 /
3 * 590 /
10-V/step]
2-005-00 Charge DC Voltage: Fix Plain: Y ENG [0 to 2000 /
4 * 590 /
10-V/step]
2-013-00 Environmental Correction: PCU Environment Div. FC: ENG [0 to 5 / 0 /
1 Display * 1/step]
2-013-00 Environmental Correction: PCU Forced Setting ENG [0 to 5 / 0 /
2 * 1/step]
2-016-00 Lubricant Apply Operation Temperature ENG [0 to 50 / 15 /
1 Threshold: Low * 1deg/step]
2 Threshold: High * 1deg/step]
2-016-00 Lubricant Apply Operation Page Setting 1: Low ENG [0 to 999 / 10 /
3 Speed * 1page/step]
4 Temp. * 1page/step]
5 Temp. 2 * 1page/step]
2-016-00 Lubricant Apply Operation Page Setting 4: High ENG [0 to 999 / 20 /
2-016-00 Lubricant Apply Operation Coverage Threshold 1: ENG [0.00 to
7 Low Speed * 100.00 / 10.00
/ 0.01%/step]
2-016-00 Lubricant Apply Operation Coverage Threshold 2: ENG [0.00 to 60.00
8 Low Temp. * / 20.00 /

SP2-XXX (Drum) -1

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
0.01%/step]
2-016-01 Lubricant Apply Operation Coverage Threshold 4: ENG [0.00 to
0 High Temp. * 100.00 / 20.00
/ 0.01%/step]
2-016-011 Lubricant Apply Operation Application Time:1 ENG IM C300
* series: [0 to 99
/ 10 /
1sec/step]
IM C400
series: [0 to 99
/ 7 / 1sec/step]
2 * series: [0 to 99
/ 10 /
1sec/step]
IM C400
series: [0 to 99
/ 7 / 1sec/step]
/ 10 /
1sec/step]
IM C400
series: [0 to 99
/ 7 / 1sec/step]
/ 5 / 1sec/step]
IM C400
series: [0 to 99
/ 3 / 1sec/step]
2-016-03 Lubricant Apply Operation Image Area Threshold ENG [60.00 to
4 5: Low Temp. * 100.00 / 60.00
/ 0.01%/step]

SP2-XXX (Drum) -1

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
/ 3 / 1sec/step]
IM C400
series: [0 to 99
/ 2 / 1sec/step]
6 Threshold: Low 2 * 1deg/step]
2-101-00 Registration Adjustment Color Main Dot: Bk ENG [-512 to 511 / 0
1 * / 1dot/step]
2-101-00 Registration Correction Color Main Dot: Ma ENG [-512 to 511 / 0
2 * / 1dot/step]
2-101-00 Registration Correction Color Main Dot: Cy ENG [-512 to 511 / 0
3 * / 1dot/step]
2-101-00 Registration Correction Color Main Dot: Ye ENG [-512 to 511 / 0
4 * / 1dot/step]
2-101-00 Registration Correction Color Sub Line: Bk ENG [-16384 to
5 * 16383 / 0 /
1line/step]
2-101-00 Registration Correction Color Sub Line: Ma ENG [-16384 to
6 * 16383 / 0 /
1line/step]
2-101-00 Registration Correction Color Sub Line: Cy ENG [-16384 to
7 * 16383 / 0 /
1line/step]
2-101-00 Registration Correction Color Sub Line: Ye ENG [-16384 to
8 * 16383 / 0 /
1line/step]
2-102-00 Magnification Adjustment Main Mag.: Standard ENG [-1.000 to
1 Speed: Bk * 1.000 / 0.091 /
0.001%/step]
2 Speed2: Bk * 1.000 / 0.091 /
0.001%/step]
2-102-00 Magnification Adjustment Main Mag.: Low ENG [-1.000 to
3 Speed: Bk * 1.000 / 0.091 /

SP2-XXX (Drum) -1

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
0.001%/step]
4 Speed: Ma * 1.000 / 0.091 /
0.001%/step]
6 Speed: Ma * 1.000 / 0.091 /
0.001%/step]
7 Speed: Cy * 1.000 / 0.081 /
0.001%/step]
9 Speed: Cy * 1.000 / 0.081 /
0.001%/step]
0 Speed: Ye * 1.000 / 0.081 /
0.001%/step]
2 Speed: Ye * 1.000 / 0.081 /
0.001%/step]
2-102-01 Main Scan Beam Pitch Adj. Bk ENG [0.00 to
3 * 100.00 / 11.53
/ 0.01dot/step]
2-102-01 Main Scan Beam Pitch Adj. Ma ENG [0.00 to
5 * 100.00 / 11.53
/ 0.01dot/step]
2-102-01 Main Scan Beam Pitch Adj. Cy ENG [0.00 to
7 * 100.00 / 11.53
/ 0.01dot/step]
2-102-01 Main Scan Beam Pitch Adj. Ye ENG [0.00 to
9 * 100.00 / 11.53
/ 0.01dot/step]
2-102-02 Magnification Adjustment Color Main Mag.: ENG [-1.000 to
8 Standard Speed: Ma * 1.000 / 0.000 /
0.001%/step]
1 Standard Speed: Cy * 1.000 / 0.000 /

SP2-XXX (Drum) -1

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
0.001%/step]
4 Standard Speed: Ye * 1.000 / 0.000 /
0.001%/step]
2-103-00 Erase Margin Adjustment Leading Edge Width ENG [0.0 to 9.9 / 4.2
1 * / 0.1mm/step]
2-103-00 Erase Margin Adjustment Trailing Edge Width ENG [0.0 to 9.9 / 4.2
2 * / 0.1mm/step]
2-103-00 Erase Margin Adjustment Left ENG [0.0 to 9.9 / 2.0
3 * / 0.1mm/step]
2-103-00 Erase Margin Adjustment Right ENG [0.0 to 9.9 / 2.0
4 * / 0.1mm/step]
2-103-00 Erase Margin Adjustment Duplex: Trailing Edge ENG [0.0 to 9.9 / 0.0
5 * / 0.1mm/step]
2-103-00 Erase Margin Adjustment Duplex: Left Edge ENG [0.0 to 9.9 / 0.0
6 * / 0.1mm/step]
2-103-00 Erase Margin Adjustment Duplex: Right Edge ENG [0.0 to 9.9 / 0.0
7 * / 0.1mm/step]
2-106-00 Polygon Rotation Time Warming-Up Time Set ENG [0 to 60 / 10 /
1 * 1sec/step]
2-106-00 Polygon Rotation Time Post Rotating Time Set ENG [0 to 60 / 0 /
2 After Printing * 1sec/step]
2-107-00 Image Parameter Shading Correction ENG [0 to 1 / 1 /
2 Flag * 1/step]
2-109-00 Test Pattern Pattern Selection ENG [0 to 23 / 0 /
3 1/step]
1: Vertical Line
(1dot)
2: Vertical Line
(2dots)
3: Horizontal
Line (1dot)
4: Horizontal
Line (2dots)
5: Grid Vertical
Line

SP2-XXX (Drum) -1

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
6: Grid
Horizontal
Line
7: Grid Pattern
Small
8: Grid Pattern
Large
9: Argyle
Pattern Small
10: Argyle
Pattern Large
2-109-00 Test Pattern Color Selection ENG [1 to 4 / 1 /
5 1/step]
1: All Color
2: Ma
3: Ye
4: Cy
2-109-00 Test Pattern Density: Bk ENG [0 to 15 / 15 /
6 1/step]
2-109-00 Test Pattern Density: Ma ENG [0 to 15 / 15 /
7 1/step]
2-109-00 Test Pattern Density: Cy ENG [0 to 15 / 15 /
8 1/step]
2-109-00 Test Pattern Density: Ye ENG [0 to 15 / 15 /
9 1/step]
2-110-001 STOUT STOUT Selection ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
* 1/step]
2-110-002 LD Driver Error Bk ENG [0x0000 to
0xFFFF /
0x0000 /
1/step]
2-110-003 LD Driver Error Ma ENG [0x0000 to
0xFFFF /
0x0000 /
1/step]
2-110-004 LD Driver Error Cy ENG [0x0000 to

SP2-XXX (Drum) -1

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
0xFFFF /
0x0000 /
1/step]
2-110-005 LD Driver Error Ye ENG [0x0000 to
0xFFFF /
0x0000 /
1/step]
2-110-006 LD Driver Writing Unit Adj. ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
Transfer 1/step]
2-111-001 Forced Line Position Adj. Mode a ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
2-111-002 Forced Line Position Adj. Mode b ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
2-111-003 Forced Line Position Adj. Mode c ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
2-111-004 Forced Line Position Adj. Mode d ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
2-112-001 TM/ID Sensor Check Execute ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
2-112-010 TM/ID Sensor Check Display Result: ENG [0 to 999 / 0 /
Front-Center-Rear * 1/step]
2-112-020 TM/ID Sensor Check Threshold Setting ENG [0.00 to 5.50 /
* 1.90 /
0.01V/step]
2-117-001 Skew Adjustment Ma:Skew Adjustment ENG [-256 to 256 /
* 0 / 1click/step]
2-117-002 Skew Adjustment Cy:Skew Adjustment ENG [-256 to 256 /
* 0 / 1click/step]
2-117-003 Skew Adjustment Ye:Skew Adjustment ENG [-256 to 256 /
* 0 / 1click/step]
2-117-004 Skew Adjustment Bk:Skew Adjustment ENG [-256 to 256 /
* 0 / 1click/step]
2-140-00 TM/ID Sensor Check PWM: Front ENG [0 to 1024 / 0 /
5 * 1/step]
2-140-00 TM/ID Sensor Check PWM: Center ENG [0 to 1024 / 0 /
6 * 1/step]

SP2-XXX (Drum) -1

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
2-140-00 TM/ID Sensor Check PWM: Rear ENG [0 to 1024 / 0 /
7 * 1/step]
2-141-00 TM/ID Sensor Check Average: Front ENG [0.00 to 5.50 /
5 * 0.00 /
0.01V/step]
2-141-00 TM/ID Sensor Check Average: Center ENG [0.00 to 5.50 /
6 * 0.00 /
0.01V/step]
2-141-00 TM/ID Sensor Check Average: Rear ENG [0.00 to 5.50 /
7 * 0.00 /
0.01V/step]
2-142-00 TM/ID Sensor Check Maximum: Front ENG [0.00 to 5.50 /
5 * 0.00 /
0.01V/step]
2-142-00 TM/ID Sensor Check Maximum: Center ENG [0.00 to 5.50 /
6 * 0.00 /
0.01V/step]
2-142-00 TM/ID Sensor Check Maximum: Rear ENG [0.00 to 5.50 /
7 * 0.00 /
0.01V/step]
2-143-00 TM/ID Sensor Check Minimum: Front ENG [0.00 to 5.50 /
5 * 0.00 /
0.01V/step]
2-143-00 TM/ID Sensor Check Minimum: Center ENG [0.00 to 5.50 /
6 * 0.00 /
0.01V/step]
2-143-00 TM/ID Sensor Check Minimum: Rear ENG [0.00 to 5.50 /
7 * 0.00 /
0.01V/step]
2-146-00 TM-Sensor Check Result Number of Edge ENG [0 to 16 / 0 /
5 Detection:Front * 1/step]
6 Detection:Center * 1/step]
7 Detection:Rear * 1/step]
2-150-02 Area Mag. Correction Area 0: Bk ENG [-16.00 to

SP2-XXX (Drum) -1

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
7 * 16.00 / 0.00 /
0.01dot/step]
8 * 16.00 / 0.20 /
0.01dot/step]
9 * 16.00 / -0.45 /
0.01dot/step]
0 * 16.00 / -0.62 /
0.01dot/step]
1 * 16.00 / -0.40 /
0.01dot/step]
2 * 16.00 / 0.00 /
0.01dot/step]
3 * 16.00 / 0.39 /
0.01dot/step]
4 * 16.00 / 0.56 /
0.01dot/step]
5 * 16.00 / 0.31 /
0.01dot/step]
2-150-07 Area Mag. Correction Area 0: Ma ENG [-16.00 to
9 * 16.00 / 0.00 /
0.01dot/step]
0 * 16.00 / 0.20 /
0.01dot/step]
1 * 16.00 / -0.45 /
0.01dot/step]

SP2-XXX (Drum) -1

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
2 * 16.00 / -0.62 /
0.01dot/step]
3 * 16.00 / -0.40 /
0.01dot/step]
4 * 16.00 / 0.00 /
0.01dot/step]
5 * 16.00 / 0.39 /
0.01dot/step]
6 * 16.00 / 0.56 /
0.01dot/step]
7 * 16.00 / 0.31 /
0.01dot/step]
2-150-13 Area Mag. Correction Area 0: Cy ENG [-16.00 to
1 * 16.00 / 0.00 /
0.01dot/step]
2 * 16.00 / 0.18 /
0.01dot/step]
3 * 16.00 / 0.49 /
0.01dot/step]
4 * 16.00 / 0.42 /
0.01dot/step]
5 * 16.00 / 0.11 /
0.01dot/step]
6 * 16.00 / -0.26 /
0.01dot/step]

SP2-XXX (Drum) -1

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
7 * 16.00 / -0.50 /
0.01dot/step]
8 * 16.00 / -0.45 /
0.01dot/step]
9 * 16.00 / 0.02 /
0.01dot/step]
2-150-18 Area Mag. Correction Area 0: Ye ENG [-16.00 to
3 * 16.00 / 0.00 /
0.01dot/step]
4 * 16.00 / 0.18 /
0.01dot/step]
5 * 16.00 / 0.49 /
0.01dot/step]
6 * 16.00 / 0.42 /
0.01dot/step]
7 * 16.00 / 0.11 /
0.01dot/step]
8 * 16.00 / -0.26 /
0.01dot/step]
9 * 16.00 / -0.50 /
0.01dot/step]
0 * 16.00 / -0.45 /
0.01dot/step]
1 * 16.00 / 0.02 /
0.01dot/step]
2-152-00 Shad. Correct Setting Standard Speed: Bk ENG [50.0 to 120.0

SP2-XXX (Drum) -1

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1 * / 100.0 /
0.1%/step]
2-152-00 Shad. Correct Setting Standard Speed: Ma ENG [50.0 to 120.0
2 * / 100.0 /
0.1%/step]
2-152-00 Shad. Correct Setting Standard Speed: Cy ENG [50.0 to 120.0
3 * / 100.0 /
0.1%/step]
2-152-00 Shad. Correct Setting Standard Speed: Ye ENG [50.0 to 120.0
4 * / 100.0 /
0.1%/step]
2-152-00 Shad. Correct Setting Middle Speed: Bk ENG [50.0 to 120.0
5 * / 100.0 /
0.1%/step]
2-152-00 Shad. Correct Setting Middle Speed: Ma ENG [50.0 to 120.0
6 * / 100.0 /
0.1%/step]
2-152-00 Shad. Correct Setting Middle Speed: Cy ENG [50.0 to 120.0
7 * / 100.0 /
0.1%/step]
2-152-00 Shad. Correct Setting Middle Speed: Ye ENG [50.0 to 120.0
8 * / 100.0 /
0.1%/step]
2-152-00 Shad. Correct Setting Low Speed: Bk ENG [50.0 to 120.0
9 * / 100.0 /
0.1%/step]
2-152-01 Shad. Correct Setting Low Speed: Ma ENG [50.0 to 120.0
0 * / 100.0 /
0.1%/step]
2-152-011 Shad. Correct Setting Low Speed: Cy ENG [50.0 to 120.0
* / 100.0 /
0.1%/step]
2-152-01 Shad. Correct Setting Low Speed: Ye ENG [50.0 to 120.0
2 * / 100.0 /
0.1%/step]
2-152-01 Shad. Correct Setting Standard Speed 2: Bk ENG [50.0 to 120.0

SP2-XXX (Drum) -1

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
3 * / 100.0 /
0.1%/step]
2-154-00 Shad. Correct Setting Front End Area: Bk: ENG [50.0 to 150.0
2 LD1 * / 100.0 /
0.1%/step]
2-154-00 Shad. Correct Setting Front End Area: Bk: ENG [50.0 to 150.0
3 LD2 * / 100.0 /
0.1%/step]
2-154-00 Shad. Correct Setting Front End Area: Ma: ENG [50.0 to 150.0
5 LD1 * / 100.0 /
0.1%/step]
2-154-00 Shad. Correct Setting Front End Area: Ma: ENG [50.0 to 150.0
6 LD2 * / 100.0 /
0.1%/step]
2-154-00 Shad. Correct Setting Front End Area: Cy: ENG [50.0 to 150.0
7 LD1 * / 100.0 /
0.1%/step]
2-154-00 Shad. Correct Setting Front End Area: Cy: ENG [50.0 to 150.0
8 LD2 * / 100.0 /
0.1%/step]
2-154-00 Shad. Correct Setting Front End Area: Ye: ENG [50.0 to 150.0
9 LD1 * / 100.0 /
0.1%/step]
2-154-01 Shad. Correct Setting Front End Area: Ye: ENG [50.0 to 150.0
0 LD2 * / 100.0 /
0.1%/step]
2-160-00 Vertical Line Width 600dpi:Bk ENG [10 to 15 / 14 /
1 * 1/step]
2-160-00 Vertical Line Width 600dpi:Ma ENG [10 to 15 / 14 /
2 * 1/step]
2-160-00 Vertical Line Width 600dpi:Cy ENG [10 to 15 / 14 /
3 * 1/step]
2-160-00 Vertical Line Width 600dpi:Ye ENG [10 to 15 / 14 /
4 * 1/step]
2-160-00 Vertical Line Width 1200dpi:Bk ENG [10 to 15 / 15 /
5 * 1/step]

SP2-XXX (Drum) -1

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
2-160-00 Vertical Line Width 1200dpi:Ma ENG [10 to 15 / 15 /
6 * 1/step]
2-160-00 Vertical Line Width 1200dpi:Cy ENG [10 to 15 / 15 /
7 * 1/step]
2-160-00 Vertical Line Width 1200dpi:Ye ENG [10 to 15 / 15 /
8 * 1/step]
2-160-00 Vertical Line Width 600dpi:Independent ENG [10 to 15 / 15 /
9 Dot:Bk * 1/step]
2-160-01 Vertical Line Width 1200dpi:Independent ENG [10 to 15 / 15 /
0 Dot:Bk * 1/step]
2-180-00 Line Pos. Adj. Clear Color Registration ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1 1/step]
2-180-00 Line Pos. Adj. Clear Main Scan Length ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
2 Detection 1/step]
2-180-00 Line Pos. Adj. Clear MUSIC Result ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
3 1/step]
2-181-00 Line Position Adj. Result Skew: M ENG [-5000.000 to
3 * 5000.000 /
0.000 /
0.001um/step]
2-181-011 Line Position Adj. Result M. Cor.: Dot: M ENG [-512 to 511 / 0
* / 1dot/step]
2-181-01 Line Position Adj. Result M. Cor.: Subdot: M ENG [-1.00 to 1.00 /
2 * 0.00 /
0.01dot/step]
2-181-01 Line Position Adj. Result Left Mag.: Subdot: M ENG [-32.00 to
5 * 32.00 / 0.00 /
0.01dot/step]
2-181-01 Line Position Adj. Result Right Mag.: Subdot: M ENG [-32.00 to
6 * 32.00 / 0.00 /
0.01dot/step]
2-181-01 Line Position Adj. Result S. Cor.: 600 Line: M ENG [-16384 to
7 * 16383 / 0 /
1line/step]
2-181-01 Line Position Adj. Result S. Cor.: 600 Sub: M ENG [-1.000 to
8 * 1.000 / 0.000 /

SP2-XXX (Drum) -1

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
0.001line/step]
2-181-01 Line Position Adj. Result S. Cor.: 1200 Line: M ENG [-16384 to
9 * 16383 / 0 /
1line/step]
2-181-02 Line Position Adj. Result S. Cor.: 1200 Sub: M ENG [-1.000 to
0 * 1.000 / 0.000 /
0.001line/step]
2-181-02 Line Position Adj. Result Skew: C ENG [-5000.000 to
1 * 5000.000 /
0.000 /
0.001um/step]
2-181-02 Line Position Adj. Result M. Cor.: Dot: C ENG [-512 to 511 / 0
9 * / 1dot/step]
2-181-03 Line Position Adj. Result M. Cor.: Subdot: C ENG [-1.00 to 1.00 /
0 * 0.00 /
0.01dot/step]
2-181-03 Line Position Adj. Result Left Mag.: Subdot: C ENG [-32.00 to
3 * 32.00 / 0.00 /
0.01dot/step]
2-181-03 Line Position Adj. Result Right Mag.: Subdot: C ENG [-32.00 to
4 * 32.00 / 0.00 /
0.01dot/step]
2-181-03 Line Position Adj. Result S. Cor.: 600 Line: C ENG [-16384 to
5 * 16383 / 0 /
1line/step]
2-181-03 Line Position Adj. Result S. Cor.: 600 Sub: C ENG [-1.000 to
6 * 1.000 / 0.000 /
0.001line/step]
2-181-03 Line Position Adj. Result S. Cor.: 1200 Line: C ENG [-16384 to
7 * 16383 / 0 /
1line/step]
2-181-03 Line Position Adj. Result S. Cor.: 1200 Sub: C ENG [-1.000 to
8 * 1.000 / 0.000 /
0.001line/step]
2-181-03 Line Position Adj. Result Skew: Y ENG [-5000.000 to
9 * 5000.000 /

SP2-XXX (Drum) -1

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
0.000 /
0.001um/step]
2-181-04 Line Position Adj. Result M. Cor.: Dot: Y ENG [-512 to 511 / 0
7 * / 1dot/step]
2-181-04 Line Position Adj. Result M. Cor.: Subdot: Y ENG [-1.00 to 1.00 /
8 * 0.00 /
0.01dot/step]
2-181-05 Line Position Adj. Result Left Mag.: Subdot: Y ENG [-32.00 to
1 * 32.00 / 0.00 /
0.01dot/step]
2-181-05 Line Position Adj. Result Right Mag.: Subdot: Y ENG [-32.00 to
2 * 32.00 / 0.00 /
0.01dot/step]
2-181-05 Line Position Adj. Result S. Cor.: 600 Line: Y ENG [-16384 to
3 * 16383 / 0 /
1line/step]
2-181-05 Line Position Adj. Result S. Cor.: 600 Sub: Y ENG [-1.000 to
4 * 1.000 / 0.000 /
0.001line/step]
2-181-05 Line Position Adj. Result S. Cor.: 1200 Line: Y ENG [-16384 to
5 * 16383 / 0 /
1line/step]
2-181-05 Line Position Adj. Result S. Cor.: 1200 Sub: Y ENG [-1.000 to
6 * 1.000 / 0.000 /
0.001line/step]
2-181-05 Line Position Adj. Result S. Cor.: 600 Sub ENG [-1.000 to
7 * 1.000 / 0.000 /
0.001line/step]
2-181-05 Line Position Adj. Result S. Cor.: 1200 Sub ENG [-1.000 to
9 * 1.000 / 0.000 /
0.001line/step]
2-181-06 Line Position Adj. Result Skew: Bk ENG [-5000.000 to
1 * 5000.000 /
0.000 /
0.001um/step]
2-181-07 Line Position Adj. Result Line Shift: M ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /

SP2-XXX (Drum) -1

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
2 * 1line/step]
2-181-07 Line Position Adj. Result Line Shift: C ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
4 * 1line/step]
2-181-07 Line Position Adj. Result Line Shift: Y ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
6 * 1line/step]
2-182-00 Line Position Offset M. Scan: Standard: ENG [-512 to 511 / 0
4 Dot: M * / 1dot/step]
2-182-00 Line Position Offset M. Scan: Standard: ENG [-1.00 to 1.00 /
5 Subdot: M * 0.00 /
0.01dot/step]
2-182-00 Line Position Offset M. Scan: Middle: Dot: ENG [-512 to 511 / 0
6 M * / 1dot/step]
2-182-00 Line Position Offset M. Scan: Middle: ENG [-1.00 to 1.00 /
7 Subdot: M * 0.00 /
0.01dot/step]
2-182-00 Line Position Offset M. Scan: Low: Dot: M ENG [-512 to 511 / 0
8 * / 1dot/step]
2-182-00 Line Position Offset M. Scan: Low: Subdot: ENG [-1.00 to 1.00 /
9 M * 0.00 /
0.01dot/step]
0 Dot: C * / 1dot/step]
Subdot: C * 0.00 /
0.01dot/step]
2 C * / 1dot/step]
3 Subdot: C * 0.00 /
0.01dot/step]
2-182-01 Line Position Offset M. Scan: Low: Dot: C ENG [-512 to 511 / 0
4 * / 1dot/step]
5 C * 0.00 /
0.01dot/step]

SP2-XXX (Drum) -1

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
6 Dot: Y * / 1dot/step]
7 Subdot: Y * 0.00 /
0.01dot/step]
8 Y * / 1dot/step]
9 Subdot: Y * 0.00 /
0.01dot/step]
2-182-02 Line Position Offset M. Scan: Low: Dot: Y ENG [-512 to 511 / 0
0 * / 1dot/step]
1 Y * 0.00 /
0.01dot/step]
2-182-02 Line Position Offset S. Scan: Standard: ENG [-16384 to
2 Line: M * 16383 / 0 /
1line/step]
2-182-02 Line Position Offset S. Scan: Standard: ENG [-1.00 to 1.00 /
3 Subline: M * 0.00 /
0.01line/step]
2-182-02 Line Position Offset S. Scan: Middle: Line: ENG [-16384 to
4 M * 16383 / 0 /
1line/step]
2-182-02 Line Position Offset S. Scan: Middle: ENG [-1.00 to 1.00 /
5 Subline: M * 0.00 /
0.01line/step]
2-182-02 Line Position Offset S. Scan: Low: Line: M ENG [-16384 to
6 * 16383 / 0 /
1line/step]
2-182-02 Line Position Offset S. Scan: Low: Subline: ENG [-1.00 to 1.00 /
7 M * 0.00 /
0.01line/step]
8 Line: C * 16383 / 0 /
1line/step]

SP2-XXX (Drum) -1

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
9 Subline: C * 0.00 /
0.01line/step]
0 C * 16383 / 0 /
1line/step]
1 Subline: C * 0.00 /
0.01line/step]
2-182-03 Line Position Offset S. Scan: Low: Line: C ENG [-16384 to
2 * 16383 / 0 /
1line/step]
3 C * 0.00 /
0.01line/step]
4 Line: Y * 16383 / 0 /
1line/step]
5 Subline: Y * 0.00 /
0.01line/step]
6 Y * 16383 / 0 /
1line/step]
7 Subline: Y * 0.00 /
0.01line/step]
2-182-03 Line Position Offset S. Scan: Low: Line: Y ENG [-16384 to
8 * 16383 / 0 /
1line/step]
9 Y * 0.00 /
0.01line/step]
2-190-01 Line Position Adj. Select Detection Error Level: ENG [-3500 to 3500
2 um * / 0 / 1um/step]
2-193-00 MUSIC Condition Set Page: Job End: ENG [0 to 999 / 500
2 BW+FC * / 1page/step]

SP2-XXX (Drum) -1

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
2-193-00 MUSIC Condition Set Page: Job End: FC ENG [0 to 999 / 200
3 * / 1page/step]
2-193-00 MUSIC Condition Set Page: Interrupt: ENG [0 to 999 / 200
4 BW+FC * / 1page/step]
2-193-00 MUSIC Condition Set Page: Interrupt: FC ENG [0 to 999 / 200
5 * / 1page/step]
2-193-00 MUSIC Condition Set Page: Standby: BW ENG [0 to 999 / 100
6 * / 1page/step]
2-193-00 MUSIC Condition Set Page: Standby: FC ENG [0 to 999 / 100
7 * / 1page/step]
2-193-00 MUSIC Condition Set Temp. Change ENG [0 to 100 / 5 /
8 * 1deg/step]
2-193-011 MUSIC Condition Set Temp. Change 2 ENG [0 to 100 / 10 /
* 1deg/step]
2-193-01 MUSIC Condition Set Page: Power ENG [0 to 999 / 200
6 ON:BW+FC * / 1page/step]
2-194-00 MUSIC Execution Result Year ENG [0 to 99 / 0 /
1 * 1year/step]
2-194-00 MUSIC Execution Result Month ENG [1 to 12 / 1 /
2 * 1month/step]
2-194-00 MUSIC Execution Result Day ENG [1 to 31 / 1 /
3 * 1day/step]
2-194-00 MUSIC Execution Result Hour ENG [0 to 23 / 0 /
4 * 1hour/step]
2-194-00 MUSIC Execution Result Minute ENG [0 to 59 / 0 /
5 * 1minute/step]
2-194-00 MUSIC Execution Result Temperature ENG [0 to 100 / 0 /
6 * 1deg/step]
2-194-00 MUSIC Execution Result Execution Result ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
7 * 1/step]
2-194-00 MUSIC Execution Result Number of Execution ENG [0 to 999999 /
8 * 0/
1times/step]
2-194-00 MUSIC Execution Result Number of Failure ENG [0 to 999999 /
9 * 0/
1times/step]

SP2-XXX (Drum) -1

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
2-194-01 MUSIC Execution Result Error Result: C ENG [0 to 9 / 0 /
0 * 1/step]
2-194-011 MUSIC Execution Result Error Result: M ENG [0 to 9 / 0 /
* 1/step]
2-194-01 MUSIC Execution Result Error Result: Y ENG [0 to 9 / 0 /
2 * 1/step]
2-194-01 MUSIC Execution Result Error Result: Bk ENG [0 to 9 / 0 /
3 * 1/step]
2-221-00 LD Power: Fixed: Set Standard Speed: Bk ENG [0 to 255 / 100
1 * / 1%/step]
2-221-00 LD Power: Fixed: Set Standard Speed: C ENG [0 to 255 / 100
2 * / 1%/step]
2-221-00 LD Power: Fixed: Set Standard Speed: M ENG [0 to 255 / 100
3 * / 1%/step]
2-221-00 LD Power: Fixed: Set Standard Speed: Y ENG [0 to 255 / 100
4 * / 1%/step]
2-221-011 LD Power: Fixed: Set Low Speed: M ENG [0 to 200 / 100
* / 1%/step]
2-221-01 LD Power: Fixed: Set Low Speed: Y ENG [0 to 200 / 100
2 * / 1%/step]
2-229-00 Develop DC Bias: Fixed Standard Speed: Bk ENG [0 to 800 / 450
1 * / 1-V/step]
2-229-00 Develop DC Bias: Fixed Standard Speed: C ENG [0 to 800 / 450
2 * / 1-V/step]
2-229-00 Develop DC Bias: Fixed Standard Speed: M ENG [0 to 800 / 450
3 * / 1-V/step]
2-229-00 Develop DC Bias: Fixed Standard Speed: Y ENG [0 to 800 / 450
4 * / 1-V/step]
2-241-00 PCDU Temperature: Display Time Interval: Fan ENG [1 to 300 / 10 /
3 Extension Control * 1sec/step]
2-241-00 PCDU Temperature: Display PCDU Temperature ENG [0.0 to 70.0 /
4 0.0 /
0.1deg/step]
2-242-00 TS Operation Env. Log Distance: PCU: Bk: ENG [0 to
1 TS<=A-3 99999999 / 0 /
1mm/step]

SP2-XXX (Drum) -1

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
2 A-3<TS<=A 99999999 / 0 /
1mm/step]
3 A<TS<=A+3 99999999 / 0 /
1mm/step]
4 A+3<TS 99999999 / 0 /
1mm/step]
2-242-10 TS Operation Env. Log Log Clear ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
0 1/step]
2-251-00 Interval Cleaning Threshold Std Spd 2 : BW Mode ENG [0 to 1000000
1 * / 1000000 /
10msec/step]
2-251-00 Interval Cleaning Threshold Std Spd : BW Mode ENG [0 to 1000000
2 * / 1000000 /
10msec/step]
2-251-00 Interval Cleaning Threshold Std Spd : FC Mode ENG [0 to 1000000
3 * / 1000000 /
10msec/step]
2-251-00 Interval Cleaning Threshold Middle Spd : BW Mode ENG [0 to 1000000
4 * / 1000000 /
10msec/step]
2-251-00 Interval Cleaning Threshold Middle Spd : FC Mode ENG [0 to 1000000
5 * / 1000000 /
10msec/step]
2-251-00 Interval Cleaning Threshold Low Spd : BW Mode ENG [0 to 1000000
6 * / 1000000 /
10msec/step]
2-251-00 Interval Cleaning Threshold Low Spd : FC Mode ENG [0 to 1000000
7 * / 1000000 /
10msec/step]
2-302-00 Environmental Correction:Trans Current Environmental ENG [0 to 0 / 0 /
1 Display 0/step]
2-302-00 Environmental Correction:Trans Forced Setting ENG [0 to 6 / 0 /
2 * 1/step]

SP2-XXX (Drum) -1

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
2-302-00 Environmental Correction:Trans Absolute ENG [0.00 to
3 Humidity:Threshold 1 * 100.00 / 4.50 /
0.01g/m3/step
]
4 Humidity:Threshold 2 * 100.00 / 9.00 /
0.01g/m3/step
]
5 Humidity:Threshold 3 * 100.00 / 17.50
/
0.01g/m3/step
]
6 Humidity:Threshold 4 * 100.00 / 24.00
/
0.01g/m3/step
]
2-302-00 Environmental Correction:Trans Temperature:Threshol ENG [-5 to 30 / 10 /
7 d * 1deg/step]
2-303-00 Time-Lapse Correction Current Div Bk ENG [0 to 3 / 0 /
1 * 1/step]
2-303-00 Time-Lapse Correction Current Div C ENG [0 to 3 / 0 /
2 * 1/step]
2-303-00 Time-Lapse Correction Current Div M ENG [0 to 3 / 0 /
3 * 1/step]
2-303-00 Time-Lapse Correction Current Div Y ENG [0 to 3 / 0 /
4 * 1/step]
2-303-00 Time-Lapse Correction Correction Threshold ENG [0 to 600000 /
5 1_Bk * 5000 /
10page/step]
6 1_Color * 5000 /
10page/step]
7 2_Bk * 20000 /

SP2-XXX (Drum) -1

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
10page/step]
8 2_Color * 20000 /
10page/step]
9 3_Bk * 50000 /
10page/step]
0 3_Color * 50000 /
10page/step]
2-304-00 Time-Lapse Correction:Transfer Threshold 1 ENG [0 to
1 * 999999999 / 0
/ 1mm/step]
2 * 999999999 / 0
/ 1mm/step]
3 * 999999999 / 0
/ 1mm/step]
4 * 999999999 / 0
/ 1mm/step]
2-305-00 Vc Correction Threshold 1 ENG [0 to 2000 /
1 * 450 /
10-V/step]
2 * 600 /
10-V/step]
3 * 750 /
10-V/step]
4 * 900 /
10-V/step]
2-308-00 Paper Size Correction Threshold 1 ENG [0 to 250 / 194
1 * / 1mm/step]

SP2-XXX (Drum) -1

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
2 * / 1mm/step]
3 * / 1mm/step]
2-311-001 Non Image Area: Bias Image Transfer ENG [0 to 2000 /
* 100 /
10%/step]
2-311-003 Non Image Area: Bias Paper Transfer ENG [0 to 2100 /
* 500 /
10-V/step]
2-316-00 Power ON: Bias Image Transfer ENG [0 to 2100 /
1 * 1400 /
10V/step]
2-326-00 Transfer Roller CL: Bias Neg. Bias: Befor and ENG [0 to 2100 /
1 After JOB * 250 /
10-V/step]
2-326-00 Transfer Roller CL: Bias Pos. Bias Cor Coef: ENG [10 to 995 /
2 Befor and After JOB * 100 /
10%/step]
2-326-00 Transfer Roller CL: Bias Neg. Bias: After ENG [0 to 2100 /
3 ProControl * 1000 /
10-V/step]
2-326-00 Transfer Roller CL: Bias Pos. Bias Corr Coef: ENG [10 to 995 /
4 After ProCon * 100 /
10%/step]
2-326-00 Transfer Roller CL: Bias Neg. Bias: Dirt ENG [0 to 2100 /
5 Prevention * 500 /
10-V/step]
2-326-011 Transfer Roller CL: Envir Neg. Bias: Befor and ENG [1 to 100 / 9 /
After JOB * 1/step]
2-326-01 Transfer Roller CL: Envir Neg. Bias: After ENG [1 to 100 / 2 /
3 ProControl * 1/step]
2-326-01 Transfer Roller CL: Envir Neg. Bias: Dirt ENG [1 to 100 / 9 /
5 Prevention * 1/step]
2-327-00 PTR Cleaning After ProCon ON/OFF ENG [0 to 1 / 1 /
1 * 1/step]

SP2-XXX (Drum) -1

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
0: OFF
1: ON
2-351-00 Common: BW: Bias Image Transfer: ENG IM C300
1 Standard Speed * series: [0 to
2100 / 1300 /
10V/step]
IM C400
series: [0 to
2100 / 1500 /
10V/step]
2-351-00 Common: BW: Bias Image Transfer: Middle ENG [0 to 2100 /
2 Speed * 1300 /
10V/step]
2-351-00 Common: BW: Bias Image Transfer: Low ENG [0 to 2100 /
3 Speed * 1100 /
10V/step]
2-351-20 Common: BW: Bias Image Transfer: Std ENG [0 to 2100 /
1 Spd:2 * 1500 /
10V/step]
2-357-00 Common: FC: Bias Image Transfer: Std ENG IM C300
1 Spd: Bk * series: [0 to
2100 / 1300 /
10V/step]
IM C400
series: [0 to
2100 / 1500 /
10V/step]
2 Spd: C * series: [0 to
2100 / 1200 /
10V/step]
IM C400
series: [0 to
2100 / 1400 /
10V/step]

SP2-XXX (Drum) -1

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
3 Spd: M * series: [0 to
2100 / 1200 /
10V/step]
IM C400
series: [0 to
2100 / 1400 /
10V/step]
4 Spd: Y * series: [0 to
2100 / 1200 /
10V/step]
IM C400
series: [0 to
2100 / 1400 /
10V/step]
2-357-00 Common: FC: Bias Image Transfer: Middle ENG [0 to 2100 /
5 Spd: Bk * 1300 /
10V/step]
6 Spd: C * 1200 /
10V/step]
7 Spd: M * 1200 /
10V/step]
8 Spd: Y * 1200 /
10V/step]
2-357-00 Common: FC: Bias Image Transfer: Low ENG [0 to 2100 /
9 Spd: Bk * 1100 /
10V/step]
0 Spd: C * 1100 /
10V/step]
Spd: M * 1100 /
10V/step]

SP2-XXX (Drum) -1

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
2 Spd: Y * 1100 /
10V/step]
2-360-00 Common:BW:Env.CorrectionTabl Image Transfer: ENG [1 to 100 / 9 /
1 e Standard Spd * 1/step]
2-360-00 Common:BW:Env.CorrectionTabl Image Transfer: Middle ENG [1 to 100 / 9 /
2 e Spd * 1/step]
2-360-00 Common:BW:Env.CorrectionTabl Image Transfer: Low ENG [1 to 100 / 5 /
3 e Spd * 1/step]
2-360-00 Common:FC:Env.CorrectionTable ImageTransfer: Std ENG [1 to 100 / 9 /
4 Spd: Bk * 1/step]
5 Spd: C * 1/step]
6 Spd: M * 1/step]
7 Spd: Y * 1/step]
2-360-00 Common:FC:Env.CorrectionTable ImageTransfer: Middle ENG [1 to 100 / 9 /
8 Spd: Bk * 1/step]
9 Spd: C * 1/step]
0 Spd: M * 1/step]
Spd: Y * 1/step]
2-360-01 Common:FC:Env.CorrectionTable Image Transfer: Low ENG [1 to 100 / 5 /
2 Spd: Bk * 1/step]
3 Spd: C * 1/step]
4 Spd: M * 1/step]
5 Spd: Y * 1/step]
2-361-00 Time-Lapse Correction: Div 1 Standard Speed: Bk ENG [1 to 60 / 1 /
1 * 1/step]
2-361-00 Time-Lapse Correction: Div 1 Middle Speed: Bk ENG [1 to 60 / 1 /

SP2-XXX (Drum) -1

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
2 * 1/step]
2-361-00 Time-Lapse Correction: Div 1 Low Speed: Bk ENG [1 to 60 / 1 /
3 * 1/step]
2-361-00 Time-Lapse Correction: Div 1 Standard Speed: FC: ENG [1 to 60 / 1 /
4 Bk * 1/step]
2-361-00 Time-Lapse Correction: Div 1 Standard Speed: FC: C ENG [1 to 60 / 1 /
5 * 1/step]
6 M * 1/step]
2-361-00 Time-Lapse Correction: Div 1 Standard Speed: FC: Y ENG [1 to 60 / 1 /
7 * 1/step]
2-361-00 Time-Lapse Correction: Div 1 Middle Speed: FC: Bk ENG [1 to 60 / 1 /
8 * 1/step]
2-361-00 Time-Lapse Correction: Div 1 Middle Speed: FC: C ENG [1 to 60 / 1 /
9 * 1/step]
2-361-01 Time-Lapse Correction: Div 1 Middle Speed: FC: M ENG [1 to 60 / 1 /
0 * 1/step]
2-361-011 Time-Lapse Correction: Div 1 Middle Speed: FC: Y ENG [1 to 60 / 1 /
* 1/step]
2-361-01 Time-Lapse Correction: Div 1 Low Speed: FC: Bk ENG [1 to 60 / 1 /
2 * 1/step]
2-361-01 Time-Lapse Correction: Div 1 Low Speed: FC: C ENG [1 to 60 / 1 /
3 * 1/step]
2-361-01 Time-Lapse Correction: Div 1 Low Speed: FC: M ENG [1 to 60 / 1 /
4 * 1/step]
2-361-01 Time-Lapse Correction: Div 1 Low Speed: FC: Y ENG [1 to 60 / 1 /
5 * 1/step]
1 * 1/step]
2 * 1/step]
3 * 1/step]
4 Bk * 1/step]

SP2-XXX (Drum) -1

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
5 * 1/step]
6 M * 1/step]
7 * 1/step]
8 * 1/step]
9 * 1/step]
0 * 1/step]
* 1/step]
2 * 1/step]
3 * 1/step]
4 * 1/step]
5 * 1/step]
1 * 1/step]
2 * 1/step]
3 * 1/step]
4 Bk * 1/step]
5 * 1/step]
6 M * 1/step]
7 * 1/step]

SP2-XXX (Drum) -1

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
8 * 1/step]
9 * 1/step]
0 * 1/step]
* 1/step]
2 * 1/step]
3 * 1/step]
4 * 1/step]
5 * 1/step]
2-371-00 Time-Lapse Correction:Transfer Standard Speed: Div1 ENG [0 to 2000 / 0 /
1 * 10V/step]
2-371-00 Time-Lapse Correction:Transfer Middle Speed: Div1 ENG [0 to 2000 / 0 /
2 * 10V/step]
2-371-00 Time-Lapse Correction:Transfer Low Speed: Div1 ENG [0 to 2000 / 0 /
3 * 10V/step]
1 * 10V/step]
2 * 10V/step]
3 * 10V/step]
1 * 10V/step]
2 * 10V/step]
3 * 10V/step]
1 * 10V/step]

SP2-XXX (Drum) -1

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
2 * 10V/step]
3 * 10V/step]
2-381-00 Vc Correction Standard Speed: Div 1 ENG [0 to 2000 / 0 /
1 * 10-V/step]
2-381-00 Vc Correction Middle Speed: Div 1 ENG [0 to 2000 / 0 /
2 * 10-V/step]
2-381-00 Vc Correction Low Speed: Div 1 ENG [0 to 2000 / 0 /
3 * 10-V/step]
2-382-00 Vc Correction Standard Speed: Div2 ENG [0 to 2000 / 0 /
1 * 10-V/step]
2-382-00 Vc Correction Middle Speed: Div 2 ENG [0 to 2000 / 0 /
2 * 10-V/step]
2-382-00 Vc Correction Low Speed: Div2 ENG [0 to 2000 / 0 /
3 * 10-V/step]
1 * 10-V/step]
2-383-00 Vc Correction Middle Speed: Div3 ENG [0 to 2000 / 0 /
2 * 10-V/step]
3 * 10-V/step]
1 * 10-V/step]
2 * 10-V/step]
3 * 10-V/step]
1 * 10-V/step]
2 * 10-V/step]
3 * 10-V/step]

SP2-XXX (Drum) -2
3.4 SP2-XXX (DRUM) -2

2-401-001 T1 at low temp and Standard speed:K ENG* [0 to 2100 / 1300 /
tempolarity 10V/step]
2-401-002 T1 at low temp and Standard speed:C ENG* [0 to 2100 / 1300 /
2-401-003 T1 at low temp and Standard speed:M ENG* [0 to 2100 / 1300 /
2-401-004 T1 at low temp and Standard speed:Y ENG* [0 to 2100 / 1300 /
2-403-001 Plain 1: Bias: BW Paper Transfer: Std ENG* IM C300 series: [0
Spd: 1Side to 200 / 21 /
1uA/step]
IM C400 series: [0
to 200 / 30 /
1uA/step]
Spd: 2Side to 200 / 16 /
1uA/step]
IM C400 series: [0
to 200 / 22 /
1uA/step]
2-403-003 Plain 1: Bias: BW Paper Transfer: Low ENG* [0 to 200 / 14 /
Spd: 1Side 1uA/step]
2-403-201 Plain 1: Bias: BW Paper Transfer: Std ENG* [0 to 200 / 32 /
Spd 2: 1Side 1uA/step]
2-407-001 Plain 1: Bias: FC Paper Transfer: Std ENG* IM C300 series: [0
Spd: 1Side to 200 / 22 /
1uA/step]
IM C400 series: [0
to 200 / 30 /
1uA/step]

SP2-XXX (Drum) -2

SP Mode Tables
Appendices
Spd: 2Side to 200 / 18 /
1uA/step]
IM C400 series: [0
to 200 / 25 /
1uA/step]
2-407-003 Plain 1: Bias: FC Paper Transfer: Low ENG* [0 to 200 / 15 /
2-411-001 Plain 1: Size Correction:BW Paper Transfer: Std ENG* [100 to 995 / 100 /
Spd:1Sid:S1 5%/step]
Spd:2Sid:S1 5%/step]
2-411-003 Plain 1: Size Correction:BW Paper Transfer: Low ENG* [100 to 995 / 100 /
Spd: 1Side:S1 5%/step]
2-412-001 Plain 1: Size Correction:FC Paper Transfer: Std ENG* [100 to 995 / 100 /
2-412-003 Plain 1: Size Correction:FC Paper Transfer: Low ENG* [100 to 995 / 100 /

SP2-XXX (Drum) -2

2-413-001 Plain 1: Paper Transfer: Std ENG* [1 to 100 / 21 /
Size-Env.Correct:BW Spd: 1Side:S1 1/step]
2-413-003 Plain 1: Paper Transfer: Low ENG* [1 to 100 / 25 /
2-414-001 Plain 1: Size-Env.Correct:FC Paper Transfer: Std ENG* [1 to 100 / 23 /
Spd: 1Side:S1 1/step]

SP2-XXX (Drum) -2

2-414-003 Plain 1: Size-Env.Correct:FC Paper Transfer: Low ENG* [1 to 100 / 25 /
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
2-415-001 Plain 1: Leading Edge Paper Transfer: Std ENG* [0 to 995 / 100 /
Correct. Spd: 1Side 5%/step]
2-415-003 Plain 1: Leading Edge Paper Transfer: Low ENG* [0 to 995 / 100 /
2-415-005 Plain 1: Leading Edge Separation DC: Std ENG* [0 to 995 / 100 /
2-415-007 Plain 1: Leading Edge Separation DC: Low ENG* [0 to 995 / 100 /
2-416-001 Plain 1: SW Timing Lead Paper Transfer: Std ENG* [0 to 50 / 0 /
Edge Spd: 1Side 2mm/step]
2-416-003 Plain 1: SW Timing Lead Paper Transfer: Low ENG* [0 to 50 / 0 /

SP2-XXX (Drum) -2

2-416-005 Plain 1: SW Timing Lead Separation DC: Std ENG* [0 to 50 / 0 /
2-416-007 Plain 1: SW Timing Lead Separation DC: Low ENG* [0 to 50 / 0 /
2-417-001 Plain 1: Trail Edge Paper Transfer: Std ENG* [0 to 995 / 100 /
Correction Spd: 1Side 5%/step]
2-417-003 Plain 1: Trail Edge Paper Transfer: Low ENG* [0 to 995 / 100 /
2-417-005 Plain 1: Trail Edge Separation DC: Std ENG* [0 to 995 / 100 /
2-417-007 Plain 1: Trail Edge Separation DC: Low ENG* [0 to 995 / 100 /
2-418-001 Plain 1: SW Timing Trail Paper Transfer: Std ENG* [0 to 50 / 0 /
2-418-003 Plain 1: SW Timing Trail Paper Transfer: Low ENG* [0 to 50 / 0 /
2-418-005 Plain 1: SW Timing Trail Separation DC: Std ENG* [0 to 50 / 0 /

SP2-XXX (Drum) -2

SP Mode Tables
Appendices
2-418-007 Plain 1: SW Timing Trail Separation DC: Low ENG* [0 to 50 / 0 /
2-419-013 Plain 1: Envir Correct. Table Separation DC: Std ENG* [1 to 100 / 30 /
Spd: 1Side 1/step]
Spd: 2Side 1/step]
2-419-015 Plain 1: Envir Correct. Table Separation DC: Low ENG* [1 to 100 / 30 /
Spd: 1Side 1/step]
Spd: 2Side 1/step]
2-419-017 Plain 1: Edge Envir Correct. Separation DC: Std ENG* [1 to 100 / 50 /
Spd: 1Side 1/step]
Spd: 2Side 1/step]
2-419-019 Plain 1: Edge Envir Correct. Separation DC: Low ENG* [1 to 100 / 50 /
Spd: 1Side 1/step]
Spd: 2Side 1/step]
2-421-001 T1 at low temp and Middle speed:K ENG* [0 to 2100 / 1300 /
2-421-002 T1 at low temp and Middle speed:C ENG* [0 to 2100 / 1300 /
2-421-003 T1 at low temp and Middle speed:M ENG* [0 to 2100 / 1300 /
2-421-004 T1 at low temp and Middle speed:Y ENG* [0 to 2100 / 1300 /
Spd: 1Side to 200 / 23 /
1uA/step]
IM C400 series: [0
to 200 / 32 /
1uA/step]

SP2-XXX (Drum) -2

Spd: 2Side to 200 / 17 /
1uA/step]
IM C400 series: [0
to 200 / 24 /
1uA/step]
Spd: 1Side to 200 / 25 /
1uA/step]
IM C400 series: [0
to 200 / 36 /
1uA/step]
Spd: 2Side to 200 / 18 /
1uA/step]
IM C400 series: [0
to 200 / 25 /
1uA/step]

SP2-XXX (Drum) -2

SP Mode Tables
Appendices

SP2-XXX (Drum) -2


SP2-XXX (Drum) -2

SP Mode Tables
Appendices

SP2-XXX (Drum) -2

Spd: 1Side 1/step]
Spd: 2Side 1/step]
Spd: 1Side 1/step]
Spd: 2Side 1/step]
Spd: 1Side 1/step]
Spd: 2Side 1/step]

SP2-XXX (Drum) -2

SP Mode Tables
Appendices
Spd: 1Side 1/step]
Spd: 2Side 1/step]
2-441-001 T1 at low temp and Low speed:K ENG* [0 to 2100 / 1300 /
2-441-002 T1 at low temp and Low speed:C ENG* [0 to 2100 / 1300 /
2-441-003 T1 at low temp and Low speed:M ENG* [0 to 2100 / 1300 /
2-441-004 T1 at low temp and Low speed:Y ENG* [0 to 2100 / 1300 /
2-443-001 M-Thick: Bias: BW Paper Transfer: ENG* [0 to 200 / 20 /
Std/Mid Spd: 1Side 1uA/step]
2-443-002 M-Thick: Bias: BW Paper Transfer: ENG* [0 to 200 / 16 /
2-443-003 M-Thick: Bias: BW Paper Transfer: Low ENG* [0 to 200 / 14 /
2-443-004 M-Thick: Bias: BW Paper Transfer: Low ENG* [0 to 200 / 14 /
2-447-001 M-Thick: Bias: FC Paper Transfer: ENG* [0 to 200 / 22 /
2-447-002 M-Thick: Bias: FC Paper Transfer: ENG* [0 to 200 / 21 /
2-447-003 M-Thick: Bias: FC Paper Transfer: Low ENG* [0 to 200 / 15 /
2-447-004 M-Thick: Bias: FC Paper Transfer: Low ENG* [0 to 200 / 15 /
2-451-001 M-Thick: Size Paper Transfer: ENG* [100 to 995 / 100 /
Correction:BW Std/Mid Spd: 1Side:S1 5%/step]
2-451-002 M-Thick: Size Paper Transfer: ENG* [100 to 995 / 100 /
Correction:BW Std/Mid Spd: 2Side:S1 5%/step]
2-451-003 M-Thick: Size Paper Transfer: Low ENG* [100 to 995 / 100 /
Correction:BW Spd: 1Side:S1 5%/step]

SP2-XXX (Drum) -2

2-452-001 M-Thick: Size Correction:FC Paper Transfer: ENG* [100 to 995 / 100 /
Std/Mid Spd: 1Side:S1 5%/step]
2-452-002 M-Thick: Size Correction:FC Paper Transfer: ENG* [100 to 995 / 100 /
Std/Mid Spd: 2Side:S1 5%/step]
2-452-003 M-Thick: Size Correction:FC Paper Transfer: Low ENG* [100 to 995 / 100 /
2-453-001 M-Thick: Paper Transfer: ENG* [1 to 100 / 21 /
Size-Env.Correct:BW Std/Mid Spd: 1Side:S1 1/step]
2-453-003 M-Thick: Paper Transfer: Low ENG* [1 to 100 / 47 /

SP2-XXX (Drum) -2

SP Mode Tables
Appendices
Size-Env.Correct:FC Std/Mid Spd: 1Side:S1 1/step]
Size-Env.Correct:FC Spd: 1Side:S1 1/step]
2-455-001 M-Thick: Leading Edge Paper Transfer: ENG* [0 to 995 / 100 /
Correct. Std/Mid Spd: 1Side 5%/step]
2-455-002 M-Thick: Leading Edge Paper Transfer: ENG* [0 to 995 / 100 /

SP2-XXX (Drum) -2

Correct. Std/Mid Spd: 2Side 5%/step]
2-455-003 M-Thick: Leading Edge Paper Transfer: Low ENG* [0 to 995 / 100 /
2-455-004 M-Thick: Leading Edge Paper Transfer: Low ENG* [0 to 995 / 100 /
2-455-005 M-Thick: Leading Edge Separation DC: Std ENG* [0 to 995 / 100 /
2-455-006 M-Thick: Leading Edge Separation DC: Std ENG* [0 to 995 / 100 /
2-455-007 M-Thick: Leading Edge Separation DC: Low ENG* [0 to 995 / 100 /
2-455-008 M-Thick: Leading Edge Separation DC: Low ENG* [0 to 995 / 100 /
2-456-001 M-Thick: SW Timing Lead Paper Transfer: ENG* [0 to 50 / 0 /
Edge Std/Mid Spd: 1Side 2mm/step]
2-456-002 M-Thick: SW Timing Lead Paper Transfer: ENG* [0 to 50 / 0 /
2-456-003 M-Thick: SW Timing Lead Paper Transfer: Low ENG* [0 to 50 / 0 /
2-456-004 M-Thick: SW Timing Lead Paper Transfer: Low ENG* [0 to 50 / 0 /
2-456-005 M-Thick: SW Timing Lead Separation DC: Std ENG* [0 to 50 / 0 /
2-456-006 M-Thick: SW Timing Lead Separation DC: Std ENG* [0 to 50 / 0 /
2-456-007 M-Thick: SW Timing Lead Separation DC: Low ENG* [0 to 50 / 0 /
2-456-008 M-Thick: SW Timing Lead Separation DC: Low ENG* [0 to 50 / 0 /
2-457-001 M-Thick: Trail Edge Paper Transfer: ENG* [0 to 995 / 100 /
Correction Std/Mid Spd: 1Side 5%/step]
2-457-002 M-Thick: Trail Edge Paper Transfer: ENG* [0 to 995 / 100 /
Correction Std/Mid Spd: 2Side 5%/step]
2-457-003 M-Thick: Trail Edge Paper Transfer: Low ENG* [0 to 995 / 100 /
2-457-004 M-Thick: Trail Edge Paper Transfer: Low ENG* [0 to 995 / 100 /

SP2-XXX (Drum) -2

2-457-005 M-Thick: Trail Edge Separation DC: Std ENG* [0 to 995 / 100 /
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
2-457-006 M-Thick: Trail Edge Separation DC: Std ENG* [0 to 995 / 100 /
2-457-007 M-Thick: Trail Edge Separation DC: Low ENG* [0 to 995 / 100 /
2-457-008 M-Thick: Trail Edge Separation DC: Low ENG* [0 to 995 / 100 /
2-458-001 M-Thick: SW Timing Trail Paper Transfer: ENG* [0 to 50 / 0 /
2-458-002 M-Thick: SW Timing Trail Paper Transfer: ENG* [0 to 50 / 0 /
2-458-003 M-Thick: SW Timing Trail Paper Transfer: Low ENG* [0 to 50 / 0 /
2-458-004 M-Thick: SW Timing Trail Paper Transfer: Low ENG* [0 to 50 / 0 /
2-458-005 M-Thick: SW Timing Trail Separation DC: Std ENG* [0 to 50 / 0 /
2-458-006 M-Thick: SW Timing Trail Separation DC: Std ENG* [0 to 50 / 0 /
2-458-007 M-Thick: SW Timing Trail Separation DC: Low ENG* [0 to 50 / 0 /
2-458-008 M-Thick: SW Timing Trail Separation DC: Low ENG* [0 to 50 / 0 /
2-459-013 M-Thick: Envir Correct. Separation DC: Std ENG* [1 to 100 / 30 /
Table Spd: 1Side 1/step]
2-459-014 M-Thick: Envir Correct. Separation DC: Std ENG* [1 to 100 / 30 /
2-459-015 M-Thick: Envir Correct. Separation DC: Low ENG* [1 to 100 / 30 /
2-459-016 M-Thick: Envir Correct. Separation DC: Low ENG* [1 to 100 / 30 /
2-459-017 M-Thick: Edge Envir Separation DC: Std ENG* [1 to 100 / 50 /
Correction Spd: 1Side 1/step]
2-459-018 M-Thick: Edge Envir Separation DC: Std ENG* [1 to 100 / 50 /
2-459-019 M-Thick: Edge Envir Separation DC: Low ENG* [1 to 100 / 50 /

SP2-XXX (Drum) -2

2-459-020 M-Thick: Edge Envir Separation DC: Low ENG* [1 to 100 / 50 /
2-481-003 Thick 1: Bias Separation DC: 1Side ENG* [0 to 4000 / 0 /
10-V/step]
10-V/step]
2-483-003 Thick 1: Bias: BW Paper Transfer: 1Side ENG* [0 to 200 / 14 /
1uA/step]
1uA/step]
2-487-003 Thick 1: Bias: FC Paper Transfer: 1Side ENG* [0 to 200 / 15 /
1uA/step]
1uA/step]
2-491-003 Thick 1: Size Correction:BW Paper Transfer: ENG* [100 to 995 / 100 /
1Side:S1 5%/step]
2Side:S1 5%/step]
1Side:S2 5%/step]
2Side:S2 5%/step]
1Side:S3 5%/step]
2Side:S3 5%/step]
1Side:S4 5%/step]
2Side:S4 5%/step]
2-492-003 Thick 1: Size Correction:FC Paper Transfer: ENG* [100 to 995 / 100 /
1Side:S1 5%/step]
2Side:S1 5%/step]
1Side:S2 5%/step]

SP2-XXX (Drum) -2

SP Mode Tables
Appendices
2Side:S2 5%/step]
1Side:S3 5%/step]
2Side:S3 5%/step]
1Side:S4 5%/step]
2Side:S4 5%/step]
2-493-003 Thick 1: Paper Transfer: ENG* [1 to 100 / 59 /
Size-Env.Correct:BW 1Side:S1 1/step]
Size-Env.Correct:FC 1Side:S1 1/step]

SP2-XXX (Drum) -2

2-495-003 Thick 1: Leading Edge Paper Transfer: 1Side ENG* [0 to 995 / 100 /
Correct. 5%/step]
Correct. 5%/step]
2-495-007 Thick 1: Leading Edge Separation DC: 1Side ENG* [0 to 995 / 100 /
Correct. 5%/step]
Correct. 5%/step]
2-496-003 Thick 1: SW Timing Lead Paper Transfer: 1Side ENG* [0 to 50 / 0 /
Edge 2mm/step]
Edge 2mm/step]
2-496-007 Thick 1: SW Timing Lead Separation DC: 1Side ENG* [0 to 50 / 0 /
Edge 2mm/step]
Edge 2mm/step]
2-497-003 Thick 1: Trail Edge Paper Transfer: 1Side ENG* [0 to 995 / 100 /
Correction 5%/step]
Correction 5%/step]
2-497-007 Thick 1: Trail Edge Separation DC: 1Side ENG* [0 to 995 / 100 /
Correction 5%/step]
Correction 5%/step]
2-498-003 Thick 1: SW Timing Trail Paper Transfer: 1Side ENG* [0 to 50 / 0 /
Edge 2mm/step]
Edge 2mm/step]
2-498-007 Thick 1: SW Timing Trail Separation DC: 1Side ENG* [0 to 50 / 0 /
Edge 2mm/step]
Edge 2mm/step]

SP2-XXX (Drum) -2

2-499-015 Thick 1: Envir Correct. Table Separation DC: 1Side ENG* [1 to 100 / 30 /
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1/step]
1/step]
2-499-019 Thick 1: Edge Envir Correct. Separation DC: 1Side ENG* [1 to 100 / 30 /
1/step]
1/step]
10-V/step]
10-V/step]
1uA/step]
1uA/step]
1uA/step]
1uA/step]
1Side:S1 5%/step]
2Side:S1 5%/step]
1Side:S2 5%/step]
2Side:S2 5%/step]
1Side:S3 5%/step]
2Side:S3 5%/step]
1Side:S4 5%/step]
2Side:S4 5%/step]

SP2-XXX (Drum) -2

1Side:S1 5%/step]
2Side:S1 5%/step]
1Side:S2 5%/step]
2Side:S2 5%/step]
1Side:S3 5%/step]
2Side:S3 5%/step]
1Side:S4 5%/step]
2Side:S4 5%/step]

SP2-XXX (Drum) -2

SP Mode Tables
Appendices
Correct. 5%/step]
Correct. 5%/step]
Correct. 5%/step]
Correct. 5%/step]
Edge 2mm/step]
Edge 2mm/step]
Edge 2mm/step]
Edge 2mm/step]
Correction 5%/step]
Correction 5%/step]
Correction 5%/step]
Correction 5%/step]
Edge 2mm/step]

SP2-XXX (Drum) -2

Edge 2mm/step]
Edge 2mm/step]
Edge 2mm/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
10-V/step]
10-V/step]
1uA/step]
1uA/step]
1uA/step]
1uA/step]
1Side:S1 5%/step]
2Side:S1 5%/step]
1Side:S2 5%/step]
2Side:S2 5%/step]
1Side:S3 5%/step]
2Side:S3 5%/step]

SP2-XXX (Drum) -2

SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1Side:S4 5%/step]
2Side:S4 5%/step]
1Side:S1 5%/step]
2Side:S1 5%/step]
1Side:S2 5%/step]
2Side:S2 5%/step]
1Side:S3 5%/step]
2Side:S3 5%/step]
1Side:S4 5%/step]
2Side:S4 5%/step]

SP2-XXX (Drum) -2

Correct. 5%/step]
Correct. 5%/step]
Correct. 5%/step]
Correct. 5%/step]
Edge 2mm/step]
Edge 2mm/step]
Edge 2mm/step]
Edge 2mm/step]
Correction 5%/step]
Correction 5%/step]
Correction 5%/step]

SP2-XXX (Drum) -2

SP Mode Tables
Appendices
Correction 5%/step]
Edge 2mm/step]
Edge 2mm/step]
Edge 2mm/step]
Edge 2mm/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
2-541-003 OHP: Bias Separation DC ENG* [0 to 4000 / 0 /
10-V/step]
2-543-003 OHP: Bias: BW Paper Transfer ENG* [0 to 200 / 9 /
1uA/step]
2-547-003 OHP: Bias: FC Paper Transfer ENG* [0 to 200 / 10 /
1uA/step]
2-551-003 OHP: Size Correction:BW PaperTransfer:S1 ENG* [100 to 995 / 100 /
5%/step]
5%/step]
5%/step]
5%/step]
2-552-003 OHP: Size Correction:FC PaperTransfer:S1 ENG* [100 to 995 / 100 /
5%/step]
5%/step]

SP2-XXX (Drum) -2

5%/step]
5%/step]
2-553-003 OHP: Size-Env.Correct:BW PaperTransfer:S1 ENG* [1 to 100 / 83 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
2-554-003 OHP: Size-Env.Correct:FC PaperTransfer:S1 ENG* [1 to 100 / 83 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
2-555-003 OHP: Leading Edge Paper Transfer ENG* [0 to 995 / 100 /
Correction 5%/step]
2-555-007 OHP: Leading Edge Separation DC ENG* [0 to 995 / 100 /
Correction 5%/step]
2-556-003 OHP: Switch Timing Lead Paper Transfer ENG* [0 to 50 / 0 /
Edge 2mm/step]
2-556-007 OHP: Switch Timing Lead Separation DC ENG* [0 to 50 / 0 /
Edge 2mm/step]
2-557-003 OHP: Trail Edge Correction Paper Transfer ENG* [0 to 995 / 100 /
5%/step]
2-557-007 OHP: Trail Edge Correction Separation DC ENG* [0 to 995 / 100 /
5%/step]
2-558-003 OHP: Switch Timing Trail Paper Transfer ENG* [0 to 50 / 0 /
Edge 2mm/step]
2-558-007 OHP: Switch Timing Trail Separation DC ENG* [0 to 50 / 0 /
Edge 2mm/step]
2-559-015 OHP: Environment Correct Separation DC ENG* [1 to 100 / 30 /
Table 1/step]

SP2-XXX (Drum) -2

2-559-019 OHP: Edge Environment Separation DC ENG* [1 to 100 / 30 /
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
Correc. 1/step]
2-561-001 Special 1: Bias Separation DC: Std ENG* [0 to 4000 / 2000 /
Spd: 1Side 10-V/step]
2-561-003 Special 1: Bias Separation DC: Low ENG* [0 to 4000 / 2000 /
2-563-001 Special 1: Bias: BW Paper Transfer: ENG* IM C300 series: [0
Std/Mid Spd: 1Side to 200 / 21 /
1uA/step]
IM C400 series: [0
to 200 / 24 /
1uA/step]
1uA/step]
IM C400 series: [0
to 200 / 18 /
1uA/step]
2-563-003 Special 1: Bias: BW Paper Transfer: Low ENG* [0 to 200 / 10 /
2-563-201 Special 1: Bias: BW Paper Transfer: Std ENG* [0 to 200 / 30 /
2-567-001 Special 1: Bias: FC Paper Transfer: ENG* IM C300 series: [0
1uA/step]
IM C400 series: [0
to 200 / 25 /
1uA/step]

SP2-XXX (Drum) -2

1uA/step]
IM C400 series: [0
to 200 / 20 /
1uA/step]
2-567-003 Special 1: Bias: FC Paper Transfer: Low ENG* [0 to 200 / 11 /
2-571-001 Special 1: Paper Transfer: ENG* [100 to 995 / 100 /
SizeCorrection:BW Std/Mid Spd: 1Side:S1 5%/step]
2-571-003 Special 1: Paper Transfer: Low ENG* [100 to 995 / 100 /
SizeCorrection:BW Spd: 1Side:S1 5%/step]
SizeCorrection:FC Std/Mid Spd: 1Side:S1 5%/step]
SizeCorrection:FC Spd: 1Side:S1 5%/step]

SP2-XXX (Drum) -2

SP Mode Tables
Appendices

SP2-XXX (Drum) -2

LeadingEdgeCorrect. Std/Mid Spd: 1Side 5%/step]
LeadingEdgeCorrect. Spd: 1Side 5%/step]
2-575-005 Special 1: Separation DC: Std ENG* [0 to 995 / 100 /
2-575-007 Special 1: Separation DC: Low ENG* [0 to 995 / 100 /
2-576-001 Special 1: SW Timing Lead Paper Transfer: ENG* [0 to 50 / 0 /
2-576-003 Special 1: SW Timing Lead Paper Transfer: Low ENG* [0 to 50 / 0 /

SP2-XXX (Drum) -2

SP Mode Tables
Appendices
2-576-005 Special 1: SW Timing Lead Separation DC: Std ENG* [0 to 50 / 0 /
2-576-007 Special 1: SW Timing Lead Separation DC: Low ENG* [0 to 50 / 0 /
TrailEdgeCorrection Std/Mid Spd: 1Side 5%/step]
TrailEdgeCorrection Spd: 1Side 5%/step]
2-578-001 Special 1: SWTiming Trail Paper Transfer: ENG* [0 to 50 / 0 /
2-578-003 Special 1: SWTiming Trail Paper Transfer: Low ENG* [0 to 50 / 0 /
2-578-005 Special 1: SWTiming Trail Separation DC: Std ENG* [0 to 50 / 0 /

SP2-XXX (Drum) -2

Edge Spd: 2side 2mm/step]
2-578-007 Special 1: SWTiming Trail Separation DC: Low ENG* [0 to 50 / 0 /
EnvCorrectionTable Spd: 1Side 1/step]
EnvCorrectionTable Spd: 2side 1/step]
2-579-017 Special 1: Edge Envir Separation DC: Std ENG* [1 to 100 / 50 /
Correc. Spd: 1Side 1/step]
Correc. Spd: 2side 1/step]
2-579-019 Special 1: Edge Envir Separation DC: Low ENG* [1 to 100 / 50 /
1uA/step]
IM C400 series: [0
to 200 / 22 /
1uA/step]

SP2-XXX (Drum) -2

1uA/step]
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
IM C400 series: [0
to 200 / 18 /
1uA/step]
1uA/step]
IM C400 series: [0
to 200 / 25 /
1uA/step]
1uA/step]
IM C400 series: [0
to 200 / 20 /
1uA/step]

SP2-XXX (Drum) -2


SP2-XXX (Drum) -2

SP Mode Tables
Appendices

SP2-XXX (Drum) -2


SP2-XXX (Drum) -2

SP Mode Tables
Appendices

SP2-XXX (Drum) -2

2-603-001 Special 3: Bias: BW Paper Transfer: ENG* [0 to 200 / 20 /
2-603-002 Special 3: Bias: BW Paper Transfer: ENG* [0 to 200 / 16 /
2-607-001 Special 3: Bias: FC Paper Transfer: ENG* [0 to 200 / 22 /
2-607-002 Special 3: Bias: FC Paper Transfer: ENG* [0 to 200 / 18 /

SP2-XXX (Drum) -2

SP Mode Tables
Appendices

SP2-XXX (Drum) -2


SP2-XXX (Drum) -2

SP Mode Tables
Appendices

SP2-XXX (Drum) -2


SP2-XXX (Drum) -2

SP Mode Tables
Appendices
2-621-003 Special 4: Bias Separation DC: 1Side ENG* [0 to 4000 / 2000 /
10-V/step]
10-V/step]
2-623-003 Special 4: Bias: BW Paper Transfer: 1Side ENG* [0 to 200 / 14 /
1uA/step]
1uA/step]
2-627-003 Special 4: Bias: FC Paper Transfer: 1Side ENG* [0 to 200 / 15 /
1uA/step]
1uA/step]
2-631-003 Special 4: Paper Transfer: 1Side: ENG* [100 to 995 / 100 /
SizeCorrection:BW S1 5%/step]
SizeCorrection:FC S1 5%/step]

SP2-XXX (Drum) -2

Size-Env.Correct:BW S1 1/step]
Size-Env.Correct:FC S1 1/step]

SP2-XXX (Drum) -2

SP Mode Tables
Appendices
2-635-003 Special 4: Paper Transfer: 1Side ENG* [0 to 995 / 100 /
LeadingEdgeCorrect. 5%/step]
2-635-007 Special 4: Separation DC: 1Side ENG* [0 to 995 / 100 /
2-636-003 Special 4: SW Timing Lead Paper Transfer: 1Side ENG* [0 to 50 / 0 /
Edge 2mm/step]
Edge 2mm/step]
2-636-007 Special 4: SW Timing Lead Separation DC: 1Side ENG* [0 to 50 / 0 /
Edge 2mm/step]
Edge 2mm/step]
TrailEdgeCorrection 5%/step]
2-638-003 Special 4: SWTiming Trail Paper Transfer: 1Side ENG* [0 to 50 / 0 /
Edge 2mm/step]
Edge 2mm/step]
2-638-007 Special 4: SWTiming Trail Separation DC: 1Side ENG* [0 to 50 / 0 /

SP2-XXX (Drum) -2

Edge 2mm/step]
Edge 2mm/step]
EnvCorrectionTable 1/step]
2-639-019 Special 4: Edge Envir Separation DC: 1Side ENG* [1 to 100 / 30 /
Correc. 1/step]
Correc. 1/step]
10-V/step]
10-V/step]
1uA/step]
1uA/step]
1uA/step]
1uA/step]

SP2-XXX (Drum) -2

SP Mode Tables
Appendices

SP2-XXX (Drum) -2

Edge 2mm/step]
Edge 2mm/step]
Edge 2mm/step]
Edge 2mm/step]

SP2-XXX (Drum) -2

SP Mode Tables
Appendices
Edge 2mm/step]
Edge 2mm/step]
Edge 2mm/step]
Edge 2mm/step]
Correc. 1/step]
Correc. 1/step]
10-V/step]
10-V/step]
1uA/step]
1uA/step]
1uA/step]
1uA/step]

SP2-XXX (Drum) -2


SP2-XXX (Drum) -2

SP Mode Tables
Appendices
SWTimingLeadEdge 2mm/step]

SP2-XXX (Drum) -2

SWTimingTrailEdge 2mm/step]
Correc. 1/step]
Correc. 1/step]
2-690-001 ITB Contact Setting Thick 1 ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
2-690-014 ITB Contact Setting Special 4 ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
2-900-001 Job End: Drum Idling Time Standard Speed ENG* [0 to 30 / 0 /
1s/step]
2-900-002 Job End: Drum Idling Time Middle Speed ENG* [0 to 30 / 0 /
1s/step]
2-900-003 Job End: Drum Idling Time Low Speed ENG* [0 to 30 / 0 /
1s/step]
2-901-001 Fus. Coverage: 0-6% ENG* [-60 to 300 / 0 /
Reload:DrumIdleTimeOffset 1sec/step]
2-901-002 Fus. Coverage: 6-10% ENG* [-60 to 300 / -11 /

SP2-XXX (Drum) -2

SP Mode Tables
Appendices
2-901-005 Fus. Coverage: 40% over ENG* [-60 to 300 / -21 /
2-905-003 Dev Rvs Time Bk ENG* [0 to 200 / 80 /
10msec/step]
2-905-004 Dev Rvs Time Color ENG* [0 to 200 / 80 /
10msec/step]
2-905-005 Dev Rvs Threshold ALL ENG* [0 to 400000 /
18430 /
10mm/step]
2-905-006 Dev Rvs Counter Bk ENG* [0 to 999999999 / 0
/ 1mm/step]
2-905-007 Dev Rvs Counter Color ENG* [0 to 999999999 / 0
/ 1mm/step]
2-905-010 Dev pre-drive : ON/OFF ON/OFF ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0: OFF
1: ON
2-905-020 Last Dev drive speed Last Dev drive ENG* [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
speed:Bk
2-905-021 Last Dev drive speed Last Dev drive ENG* [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
speed:Col
2-905-030 Dev pre-drive : ON/OFF nomal-middle ENG [0 to 3 / 0 / 1/step]
2-905-031 Dev pre-drive : ON/OFF middle-low ENG [0 to 3 / 0 / 1/step]
2-905-032 Dev pre-drive : ON/OFF nomal-low ENG [0 to 3 / 0 / 1/step]
2-905-033 Dev pre-drive Threshould2 Absolute Humidity ENG [0.0 to 1000.0 /
Threshold 10.3 /
0.1g/m3/step]
2-905-040 Development pre-drive nomal speed pre-drive ENG IM C300 series: [0
Distance distance to 5800 / 300 /
1mm/step]
IM C400 series: [0
to 5800 / 600 /
1mm/step]
2-905-041 Development pre-drive low speed pre-drive ENG [0 to 5800 / 300 /

SP2-XXX (Drum) -2

Distance distance 1mm/step]
2-905-042 Development pre-drive mid speed pre-drive ENG [0 to 5800 / 300 /
Distance distance 1mm/step]
2-907-001 ACS Setting (FC) Continuous Bk Pages ENG* [0 to 10 / 0 /
1sheet/step]
2-915-001 Gain Set: Bk OPC Drum Standard Speed1 ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
1STEP/step]
2-915-002 Gain Set: Bk OPC Drum Low Speed ENG* [0 to 1 / 1 /
1STEP/step]
2-915-003 Gain Set: Bk OPC Drum Standard Speed2 ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
1STEP/step]
2-915-004 Gain Set: Bk OPC Drum Middle Speed ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
1STEP/step]
2-916-001 Gain Set: Color OPC Drum Standard Speed1 ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
1STEP/step]
2-916-002 Gain Set: Color OPC Drum Low Speed ENG* [0 to 1 / 1 /
1STEP/step]
2-916-003 Gain Set: Color OPC Drum Middle Speed ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
1STEP/step]
2-930-001 Paper Transfer: Bias Limiter Bias ENG* [0 to 7000 / 6000 /
10V/step]
2-960-001 Process Down Interval Additional Time ENG* [0 to 10 / 0 /
1sec/step]
2-990-001 Print Duty Control Duty Control Status ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
2-990-002 Print Duty Control Exec Interval: Duty ENG* [30 to 3600 / 30 /
Control 1sec/step]
2-990-004 Print Duty Control Forced Process Down ENG* [0 to 5000 / 0 /
Thresh: No Duty 1page/step]
Control
2-990-005 Print Duty Control Down-time BW: No ENG* [0 to 120 / 0 /
Duty Control 1sec/step]
2-990-006 Print Duty Control Down-time FC: No ENG* [0 to 120 / 0 /
Duty Control 1sec/step]
2-990-007 Print Duty Control Forced Process Down ENG* [0 to 5000 / 3 /
Thresh: Duty Control 1page/step]
2-990-008 Print Duty Control Down-time BW: Duty ENG* [0 to 120 / 0 /
Control 1sec/step]

SP2-XXX (Drum) -2

2-990-009 Print Duty Control Down-time FC: Duty ENG* [0 to 120 / 64 /
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
Control 1sec/step]
2-990-010 Print Duty Control Correction Coefficient ENG* [-1.0 to 1.0 / -0.5 /
0.1/step]
2-990-011 Print Duty Control Execution ENG* [20.0 to 70.0 / 42.0
Temperature / 0.1deg/step]
2-990-012 Print Duty Control Cancellation Temp. ENG* [0.0 to 20.0 / 1.0 /
2-990-013 Print Duty Control ON/OFF Setting ENG* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
2-990-014 Print Duty Control Duty Control: ENG* [0 to 120 / 0 /
Down-time_BW 1sec/step]
2-990-015 Print Duty Control Duty Control: ENG* [0 to 120 / 0 /
Down-time_FC 1sec/step]
2-990-016 Print Duty Control Execution Temp. ENG* [0.0 to 99.0 / 42.0 /
Upper Threshold 0.1deg/step]
2-990-017 Print Duty Control Execution Temp. ENG* [0.0 to 99.0 / 38.0 /
Lower Threshold 0.1deg/step]

SP3-XXX (Process)
3.5 SP3-XXX (PROCESS)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
3-011-00 Manual ProCon :Exe Normal ProCon ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1
3-011-00 Manual ProCon :Exe Toner Density Adjustment ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
2
3-011-00 Manual ProCon :Exe ACC RunTime ProCon ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
3
3-011-00 Manual ProCon :Exe Full MUSIC ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
4
3-011-00 Manual ProCon :Exe Normal MUSIC ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
5
3-011-01 Manual ProCon :Exe Normal ProCon BW ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1
3-012-00 ProCon Execute History: Last ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1 Result: Display * 1/step]
3-012-00 ProCon Execute History: Last 2 ENG [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
3-030-00 TD Sensor Initial Set: Execute: ALL ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]

SP3-XXX (Process)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1 Execute
3-030-00 TD Sensor Initial Set: Execute: Color ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
2 Execute
3-030-00 TD Sensor Initial Set: Execute: Bk ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
3 Execute
3-030-00 TD Sensor Initial Set: Execute: C ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
4 Execute
3-030-00 TD Sensor Initial Set: Execute: M ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
5 Execute
3-030-00 TD Sensor Initial Set: Execute: Y ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
6 Execute
3-031-00 TD Sen. Ini. Set: From Left:Y,M,C,Bk ENG [0 to 9999 / 0 /
1 Result: Disp * 1/step]
3-050-00 Forced Toner Supply: Execute: ALL ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1 Exe
3-050-00 Forced Toner Supply: Execute: Color ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
2 Exe
3-050-00 Forced Toner Supply: Execute: Bk ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
3 Exe
3-050-00 Forced Toner Supply: Execute: C ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
4 Exe
3-050-00 Forced Toner Supply: Execute: M ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
5 Exe
3-050-00 Forced Toner Supply: Execute: Y ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
6 Exe
3-050-02 Forced Toner Supply: Supply Quantity: Bk ENG [0.0 to 5.0 / 0.5 /
1 Exe * 0.1wt%/step]
3-050-02 Forced Toner Supply: Supply Quantity: C ENG [0.0 to 5.0 / 0.5 /
3-050-02 Forced Toner Supply: Supply Quantity: M ENG [0.0 to 5.0 / 0.5 /
3-050-02 Forced Toner Supply: Supply Quantity: Y ENG [0.0 to 5.0 / 0.5 /
3-050-03 Forced Toner Supply: Repeat Count ENG [0 to 255 / 8 /
3 Exe * 1times/step]
3-072-00 TD Sensor Check Exe All Colors ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]

SP3-XXX (Process)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
1
3-073-00 TD Sensor Check: mu Count:Bk ENG [0 to 65535 / 0 /
1 Display * 1/step]
3-073-00 TD Sensor Check: mu Count:C ENG [0 to 65535 / 0 /
2 Display * 1/step]
3-073-00 TD Sensor Check: mu Count:M ENG [0 to 65535 / 0 /
3 Display * 1/step]
3-073-00 TD Sensor Check: mu Count:Y ENG [0 to 65535 / 0 /
4 Display * 1/step]
3-074-00 ID Sensor Check: Exe All Sensors ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1
3-075-00 ID Sensor Check: Vsg reg(front) ENG [0.00 to 5.50 / 0.00 /
1 Display * 0.01V/step]
3-075-00 ID Sensor Check: Vsg reg(center) ENG [0.00 to 5.50 / 0.00 /
3-075-00 ID Sensor Check: Vsg reg(rear) ENG [0.00 to 5.50 / 0.00 /
3-075-01 ID Sensor Check: Voffset(front) ENG [0.00 to 5.50 / 0.00 /
3-075-01 ID Sensor Check: Voffset(center) ENG [0.00 to 5.50 / 0.00 /
3-075-01 ID Sensor Check: Voffset(rear) ENG [0.00 to 5.50 / 0.00 /
3-100-00 Toner End Detection: ON/OFF ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1 Set * 0: Detect
1: Not Detect
3-100-00 Toner End Detection: NE Detection Select ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
2 Set * 0: ALL
1: TE Sensor
3-101-00 Toner Status: Display Bk ENG [0 to 2 / 2 / 1/step]
1 *
3-101-00 Toner Status: Display C ENG [0 to 2 / 2 / 1/step]
2 *
3-101-00 Toner Status: Display M ENG [0 to 2 / 2 / 1/step]
3 *
3-101-00 Toner Status: Display Y ENG [0 to 2 / 2 / 1/step]

SP3-XXX (Process)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
4 *
3-102-00 Toner Remaining: Toner Supply Motor Drive ENG [0.000 to 500.000 /
1 Display Time: Bk * 0.000 / 0.001g/step]
2 Display Time: C * 0.000 / 0.001g/step]
3 Display Time: M * 0.000 / 0.001g/step]
4 Display Time: Y * 0.000 / 0.001g/step]
3-102-01 Toner Remaining: Pixel: Bk ENG [0.000 to 500.000 /
1 Display * 0.000 / 0.001g/step]
3-102-01 Toner Remaining: Pixel: C ENG [0.000 to 500.000 /
2 Display * 0.000 / 0.001g/step]
3-102-01 Toner Remaining: Pixel: M ENG [0.000 to 500.000 /
3 Display * 0.000 / 0.001g/step]
3-102-01 Toner Remaining: Pixel: Y ENG [0.000 to 500.000 /
4 Display * 0.000 / 0.001g/step]
3-102-02 Toner Remaining: Replenishment Amount: Bk ENG [0 to 500 / 0 /
1 Display * 1g/step]
3-102-02 Toner Remaining: Replenishment Amount: C ENG [0 to 500 / 0 /
3-102-02 Toner Remaining: Replenishment Amount: M ENG [0 to 500 / 0 /
3-102-02 Toner Remaining: Replenishment Amount: Y ENG [0 to 500 / 0 /
3-110-00 NE Detect: Toner Bk ENG [0 to 500 / 23 /
1 Remain Thresh * 1g/step]
3-110-00 NE Detect: Toner C ENG [0 to 500 / 10 /
3-110-00 NE Detect: Toner M ENG [0 to 500 / 10 /
3-110-00 NE Detect: Toner Y ENG [0 to 500 / 10 /
3-121-00 TE Counter: Display Bk ENG [0 to 99 / 0 /
1 * 1times/step]
3-121-00 TE Counter: Display C ENG [0 to 99 / 0 /

SP3-XXX (Process)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
2 * 1times/step]
3-121-00 TE Counter: Display M ENG [0 to 99 / 0 /
3 * 1times/step]
3-121-00 TE Counter: Display Y ENG [0 to 99 / 0 /
4 * 1times/step]
3-123-02 Toner End Sen Status: Latest Output: Bk ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1 Display
3-123-02 Toner End Sen Status: Latest Output: C ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
2 Display
3-123-02 Toner End Sen Status: Latest Output: M ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
3 Display
3-123-02 Toner End Sen Status: Latest Output: Y ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
4 Display
3-131-00 Vt TE Thresh Delta Vt Thresh ENG [0.00 to 5.00 / 0.50 /
1 * 0.01V/step]
3-131-00 Vt TE Thresh Delta Vt Sum Thresh ENG [0 to 99 / 10 /
2 * 1V/step]
3-131-01 Vt TE Thresh Delta Vt Thresh Before NE ENG [0.00 to 5.00 / 0.50 /
1 * 0.01V/step]
3-131-01 Vt TE Thresh Delta Vt Sum Thresh Before ENG [0 to 99 / 10 /
2 NE * 1V/step]
3-131-02 Vt TE Thresh High TC Delta Vt Thresh ENG [0.00 to 5.00 / 0.30 /
1 * 0.01V/step]
3-131-02 Vt TE Thresh High TC Delta Vt Sum ENG [0 to 99 / 3 / 1V/step]
2 Thresh *
3-131-02 Vt TE Thresh High TC Delta Vt Thresh ENG [0.00 to 5.00 / 0.70 /
3 Before NE * 0.01V/step]
3-131-02 Vt TE Thresh High TC Delta Vt Sum ENG [0 to 99 / 10 /
4 Thresh Before NE * 1V/step]
3-131-03 Vt TE Thresh Low TC Delta Vt Thresh ENG [0.00 to 5.00 / 0.30 /
1 * 0.01V/step]
3-131-03 Vt TE Thresh Low TC Delta Vt Sum Thresh ENG [0 to 99 / 3 / 1V/step]
2 *
3-131-03 Vt TE Thresh Low TC Delta Vt Thresh ENG [0.00 to 5.00 / 0.70 /
3 Before NE * 0.01V/step]
3-131-03 Vt TE Thresh Low TC Delta Vt Sum Thresh ENG [0 to 99 / 10 /

SP3-XXX (Process)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
4 Before NE * 1V/step]
3-131-04 Vt TE Thresh TC Thresh ENG [0.0 to 25.5 / 4.0 /
1 * 0.1wt%/step]
3-132-00 Delta Vt Sum: Display Bk ENG [0.00 to 99.00 / 0.00 /
1 * 0.01V/step]
3-132-00 Delta Vt Sum: Display C ENG [0.00 to 99.00 / 0.00 /
2 * 0.01V/step]
3-132-00 Delta Vt Sum: Display M ENG [0.00 to 99.00 / 0.00 /
3 * 0.01V/step]
3-132-00 Delta Vt Sum: Display Y ENG [0.00 to 99.00 / 0.00 /
4 * 0.01V/step]
3-200-00 Toner Density: Display Bk ENG [0.0 to 25.5 / 0.0 /
1 * 0.1wt%/step]
3-200-00 Toner Density: Display C ENG [0.0 to 25.5 / 0.0 /
2 * 0.1wt%/step]
3-200-00 Toner Density: Display M ENG [0.0 to 25.5 / 0.0 /
3 * 0.1wt%/step]
3-200-00 Toner Density: Display Y ENG [0.0 to 25.5 / 0.0 /
4 * 0.1wt%/step]
3-201-00 Toner Density Limits: Upper TC ENG [1.0 to 15.0 / 8.7 /
1 Set * 0.1wt%/step]
3-201-00 Toner Density Limits: Lower TC ENG [1.0 to 15.0 / 4.0 /
3-206-00 TD Sensor Bulk Corr.: Abs. Humidity Cnver. Coef.: ENG [0.0000 to 6.5535 /
1 Set Bk * 0.4340 /
0.0001g/cm3/g/m3/st
ep]
2 Set C * 0.6859 /
0.0001g/cm3/g/m3/st
ep]
3 Set M * 0.6859 /
0.0001g/cm3/g/m3/st
ep]

SP3-XXX (Process)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
4 Set Y * 0.6859 /
0.0001g/cm3/g/m3/st
ep]
3-206-01 TD Sensor Bulk Corr.: Color Conversion Coef.: Bk ENG [0 to 200 / 100 /
1 Set * 1%/step]
3-206-01 TD Sensor Bulk Corr.: Color Conversion Coef.: C ENG [0 to 200 / 100 /
2 Set * 1%/step]
3-206-01 TD Sensor Bulk Corr.: Color Conversion Coef.: M ENG [0 to 200 / 100 /
3 Set * 1%/step]
3-206-01 TD Sensor Bulk Corr.: Color Conversion Coef.: Y ENG [0 to 200 / 100 /
4 Set * 1%/step]
3-206-02 TD Sensor Bulk Corr.: Weight Coefficient ENG [0 to 200 / 100 /
1 Set * 1%/step]
3-206-03 TD Sensor Bulk Corr.: Offset: Bk ENG [-2.0000 to 2.0000 /
1 Set * 0.0000 /
0.0001g/cm3/step]
3-206-03 TD Sensor Bulk Corr.: Offset: C ENG [-2.0000 to 2.0000 /
2 Set * 0.0000 /
0.0001g/cm3/step]
3-206-03 TD Sensor Bulk Corr.: Offset: M ENG [-2.0000 to 2.0000 /
3 Set * 0.0000 /
0.0001g/cm3/step]
3-206-03 TD Sensor Bulk Corr.: Offset: Y ENG [-2.0000 to 2.0000 /
4 Set * 0.0000 /
0.0001g/cm3/step]
3-206-04 TD Sensor Bulk Corr.: Conversion Coeff. Beta: Bk ENG [-999.0 to 0.0 / -1.0 /
1 Set * 0.1count/g/cm3/step]
3-206-04 TD Sensor Bulk Corr.: Conversion Coeff. Beta: C ENG [-999.0 to 0.0 / -1.0 /
3-206-04 TD Sensor Bulk Corr.: Conversion Coeff. Beta: M ENG [-999.0 to 0.0 / -1.0 /
3-206-04 TD Sensor Bulk Corr.: Conversion Coeff. Beta: Y ENG [-999.0 to 0.0 / -1.0 /
3-210-00 TD Sensor: Vt: Display Current: Bk ENG [0.00 to 5.50 / 0.00 /
1 * 0.01V/step]
3-210-00 TD Sensor: Vt: Display Current: C ENG [0.00 to 5.50 / 0.00 /

SP3-XXX (Process)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
2 * 0.01V/step]
3-210-00 TD Sensor: Vt: Display Current: M ENG [0.00 to 5.50 / 0.00 /
3 * 0.01V/step]
3-210-00 TD Sensor: Vt: Display Current: Y ENG [0.00 to 5.50 / 0.00 /
4 * 0.01V/step]
3-212-10 Vt Shift: Set TC Cor.(ON/OFF) ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
1 * 0: OFF
1: ON
3-213-00 Vt Shift: Set TC Cor.(ON/OFF) ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
1 * 0: OFF
1: ON
3-213-02 Vt Shift: Set Low Speed TC Correction: ENG [-0.50 to 0.50 / 0.00 /
1 Bk * 0.01V/step]
3-213-02 Vt Shift: Set Low Speed TC Correction: C ENG [-0.50 to 0.50 / 0.00 /
2 * 0.01V/step]
3-213-02 Vt Shift: Set Low Speed TC Correction: M ENG [-0.50 to 0.50 / 0.00 /
3 * 0.01V/step]
3-213-02 Vt Shift: Set Low Speed: TC Correction: Y ENG [-0.50 to 0.50 / 0.00 /
4 * 0.01V/step]
3-213-03 Vt Shift: Set Std Speed 2 TC Correction: ENG [-0.50 to 0.50 / 0.00 /
1 Bk * 0.01V/step]
3-214-00 Vt Save: Set Dot Coverage Thresh ENG [0 to 100 / 20 /
1 * 1%/step]
3-230-00 Vtref: Display/Set Current: Bk ENG [0.00 to 5.00 / 2.00 /
1 * 0.01V/step]
3-230-00 Vtref: Display/Set Current: C ENG [0.00 to 5.00 / 2.00 /
2 * 0.01V/step]
3-230-00 Vtref: Display/Set Current: M ENG [0.00 to 5.00 / 2.00 /
3 * 0.01V/step]
3-230-00 Vtref: Display/Set Current: Y ENG [0.00 to 5.00 / 2.00 /
4 * 0.01V/step]
3-232-00 Vtref Correct: Pixel: ON/OFF ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
1 Set * 0: OFF
1: ON
3-232-01 Vtref Correct: Pixel: Low Coverage Coefficient: ENG [0.0 to 5.0 / 0.3 /
1 Set Bk * 0.1/step]

SP3-XXX (Process)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
3-232-01 Vtref Correct: Pixel: Low Coverage Coefficient: C ENG [0.0 to 5.0 / 0.3 /
2 Set * 0.1/step]
3-232-01 Vtref Correct: Pixel: Low Coverage Coefficient: M ENG [0.0 to 5.0 / 0.3 /
3 Set * 0.1/step]
3-232-01 Vtref Correct: Pixel: Low Coverage Coefficient: Y ENG [0.0 to 5.0 / 0.3 /
4 Set * 0.1/step]
3-232-02 Vtref Correct: Pixel: High Coverage Coefficient: ENG [0.0 to 5.0 / 0.4 /
1 Set Bk * 0.1/step]
3-232-02 Vtref Correct: Pixel: High Coverage Coefficient: C ENG [0.0 to 5.0 / 0.4 /
2 Set * 0.1/step]
3-232-02 Vtref Correct: Pixel: High Coverage Coefficient: M ENG [0.0 to 5.0 / 0.4 /
3 Set * 0.1/step]
3-232-02 Vtref Correct: Pixel: High Coverage Coefficient: Y ENG [0.0 to 5.0 / 0.4 /
4 Set * 0.1/step]
3-232-04 Vtref Correct: Pixel: Initial ProCon Interval ENG [0 to 255 / 6 /
0 Set * 1times/step]
3-232-04 Vtref Correct: Pixel: High Coverage Thresh ENG [0 to 100 / 60 /
1 Set * 1%/step]
3-232-05 Vtref Correct: Pixel: ProCon Interval ENG [0 to 255 / 14 /
3-232-06 Vtref Correct: Pixel: Low Coverage Thresh ENG [0.0 to 100.0 / 100.0 /
0 Set * 0.1%/step]
3-232-07 Vtref Correct: Pixel: TC Upper Limit: Display: Bk ENG [1.0 to 15.0 / 8.5 /
3-232-07 Vtref Correct: Pixel: TC Upper Limit: Display: C ENG [1.0 to 15.0 / 8.5 /
3-232-07 Vtref Correct: Pixel: TC Upper Limit: Display: M ENG [1.0 to 15.0 / 8.5 /
3-232-07 Vtref Correct: Pixel: TC Upper Limit: Display: Y ENG [1.0 to 15.0 / 8.5 /
3-232-08 Vtref Correct: Pixel: TC Upper Limit Correction:K ENG [0.0 to 5.0 / 0.0 /
3-232-08 Vtref Correct: Pixel: TC Upper Limit Correction:C ENG [0.0 to 5.0 / 0.5 /
3-232-08 Vtref Correct: Pixel: TC Upper Limit Correction:M ENG [0.0 to 5.0 / 0.5 /

SP3-XXX (Process)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
3-232-08 Vtref Correct: Pixel: TC Upper Limit Correction:Y ENG [0.0 to 5.0 / 0.5 /
3-234-00 Vtref Correction.: Set ON/OFF ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
1 * 0: OFF
1: ON
3-234-01 Vtref Correction.: Set Correction Amount (+): Bk ENG [0.00 to 1.00 / 0.05 /
1 * 0.01V/step]
3-234-01 Vtref Correction.: Set Correction Amount (+): C ENG [0.00 to 1.00 / 0.05 /
2 * 0.01V/step]
3-234-01 Vtref Correction.: Set Correction Amount (+): M ENG [0.00 to 1.00 / 0.05 /
3 * 0.01V/step]
3-234-01 Vtref Correction.: Set Correction Amount (+): Y ENG [0.00 to 1.00 / 0.05 /
4 * 0.01V/step]
3-234-02 Vtref Correction.: Set Correction Amount (-): Bk ENG [0.00 to 1.00 / 0.05 /
1 * 0.01V/step]
3-234-02 Vtref Correction.: Set Correction Amount (-): C ENG [0.00 to 1.00 / 0.05 /
2 * 0.01V/step]
3-234-02 Vtref Correction.: Set Correction Amount (-): M ENG [0.00 to 1.00 / 0.05 /
3 * 0.01V/step]
3-234-02 Vtref Correction.: Set Correction Amount (-): Y ENG [0.00 to 1.00 / 0.05 /
4 * 0.01V/step]
3-234-03 Vtref Correction.: Set P Rank 1 Threshold ENG [0.00 to 2.00 / 0.15 /
1 * 0.01/step]
3-234-03 Vtref Correction.: Set P Rank 2 Threshold ENG [0.00 to 2.00 / 0.05 /
2 * 0.01/step]
3-234-03 Vtref Correction.: Set P Rank 3 Threshold ENG [-2.00 to 0.00 / -0.05 /
3 * 0.01/step]
3-234-03 Vtref Correction.: Set P Rank 4 Threshold ENG [-2.00 to 0.00 / -0.10 /
4 * 0.01/step]
3-234-04 Vtref Correction.: Set T Rank 1 Threshold ENG [-1.00 to 0.00 / -0.20 /
1 * 0.01V/step]
3-234-04 Vtref Correction.: Set T Rank 2 Threshold ENG [0.00 to 1.00 / 0.20 /
2 * 0.01V/step]
3-234-05 Vtref Correction.: Set Correction Coefficient ENG [1.0 to 5.0 / 2.0 /
0 * 0.1/step]
3-250-00 Image Area: Display Latest: Bk ENG [0 to 9999 / 0 /

SP3-XXX (Process)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
1 * 1cm2/step]
3-250-00 Image Area: Display Latest: C ENG [0 to 9999 / 0 /
2 * 1cm2/step]
3-250-00 Image Area: Display Latest: M ENG [0 to 9999 / 0 /
3 * 1cm2/step]
3-250-00 Image Area: Display Latest: Y ENG [0 to 9999 / 0 /
4 * 1cm2/step]
3-251-00 Dot Coverage: Display Latest: Bk ENG [0.00 to 100.00 / 0.00
1 * / 0.01%/step]
3-251-00 Dot Coverage: Display Latest: C ENG [0.00 to 100.00 / 0.00
2 * / 0.01%/step]
3-251-00 Dot Coverage: Display Latest: M ENG [0.00 to 100.00 / 0.00
3 * / 0.01%/step]
3-251-00 Dot Coverage: Display Latest: Y ENG [0.00 to 100.00 / 0.00
4 * / 0.01%/step]
3-251-01 Dot Coverage: Display Accumulate: Average: S: Bk ENG [0.0000 to 100.0000 /
1 * 5.0000 /
0.0001%/step]
3-251-01 Dot Coverage: Display Accumulate: Average: S: C ENG [0.0000 to 100.0000 /
2 * 5.0000 /
0.0001%/step]
3-251-01 Dot Coverage: Display Accumulate: Average: S: M ENG [0.0000 to 100.0000 /
3 * 5.0000 /
0.0001%/step]
3-251-01 Dot Coverage: Display Accumulate: Average: S: Y ENG [0.0000 to 100.0000 /
4 * 5.0000 /
0.0001%/step]
3-251-02 Dot Coverage: Display Accumulate: Average: M: Bk ENG [0.0000 to 100.0000 /
1 * 5.0000 /
0.0001%/step]
3-251-02 Dot Coverage: Display Accumulate: Average: M: C ENG [0.0000 to 100.0000 /
2 * 5.0000 /
0.0001%/step]
3-251-02 Dot Coverage: Display Accumulate: Average: M: M ENG [0.0000 to 100.0000 /
3 * 5.0000 /
0.0001%/step]

SP3-XXX (Process)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
3-251-02 Dot Coverage: Display Accumulate: Average: M: Y ENG [0.0000 to 100.0000 /
4 * 5.0000 /
0.0001%/step]
3-251-03 Dot Coverage: Display Accumulate: Average: L: Bk ENG [0.0000 to 100.0000 /
1 * 5.0000 /
0.0001%/step]
3-251-03 Dot Coverage: Display Accumulate: Average: L: C ENG [0.0000 to 100.0000 /
2 * 5.0000 /
0.0001%/step]
3-251-03 Dot Coverage: Display Accumulate: Average: L: M ENG [0.0000 to 100.0000 /
3 * 5.0000 /
0.0001%/step]
3-251-03 Dot Coverage: Display Accumulate: Average: L: Y ENG [0.0000 to 100.0000 /
4 * 5.0000 /
0.0001%/step]
3-251-04 Dot Coverage: Display Accumulate Page: Set: S ENG [1 to 255 / 5 /
1 * 1sheets/step]
3-251-04 Dot Coverage: Display Accumulate Page: Set: M ENG [1 to 500 / 10 /
2 * 1sheets/step]
3-251-04 Dot Coverage: Display Accumulate Page: Set: L ENG [1 to 999 / 50 /
3 * 1sheets/step]
3-251-04 Dot Coverage: Display Accumulate Page: Set: A ENG [1 to 6000 / 2000 /
4 * 1sheets/step]
3-251-05 Dot Coverage: Display Accumulate Page: Set: S2 ENG [1 to 255 / 40 /
1 * 1sheets/step]
3-251-05 Dot Coverage: Display Accumulate Page: Set: M2 ENG [1 to 500 / 10 /
2 * 1sheets/step]
3-251-05 Dot Coverage: Display Accumulate Page: Set: L2 ENG [1 to 999 / 50 /
3 * 1sheets/step]
3-251-05 Dot Coverage: Display Accumulate Page: Set: A2 ENG [1 to 6000 / 2000 /
4 * 1sheets/step]
3-251-10 Dot Coverage: Display Accumulate: Average: A: Bk ENG [0.0000 to 100.0000 /
1 * 5.0000 /
0.0001%/step]
3-251-10 Dot Coverage: Display Accumulate: Average: A: C ENG [0.0000 to 100.0000 /
2 * 5.0000 /

SP3-XXX (Process)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
0.0001%/step]
3-251-10 Dot Coverage: Display Accumulate: Average: A: M ENG [0.0000 to 100.0000 /
3 * 5.0000 /
0.0001%/step]
3-251-10 Dot Coverage: Display Accumulate: Average: A: Y ENG [0.0000 to 100.0000 /
4 * 5.0000 /
0.0001%/step]
3-251-15 Dot Coverage: Display Accumulate: Average: Bk ENG [0.00 to 100.00 / 0.00
1 * / 0.01%/step]
3-251-15 Dot Coverage: Display Accumulate: Average: C ENG [0.00 to 100.00 / 0.00
2 * / 0.01%/step]
3-251-15 Dot Coverage: Display Accumulate: Average: M ENG [0.00 to 100.00 / 0.00
3 * / 0.01%/step]
3-251-15 Dot Coverage: Display Accumulate: Average: Y ENG [0.00 to 100.00 / 0.00
4 * / 0.01%/step]
3-252-00 Accumulate Image Latest: Bk ENG [0 to 65535 / 0 /
1 Area: Display * 1cm^2/step]
3-252-00 Accumulate Image Latest: C ENG [0 to 65535 / 0 /
3-252-00 Accumulate Image Latest: M ENG [0 to 65535 / 0 /
3-252-00 Accumulate Image Latest: Y ENG [0 to 65535 / 0 /
3-252-01 Accumulate Image Developer: Bk ENG [0 to 4294967295 / 0
1 Area: Display * / 1cm2/step]
3-252-01 Accumulate Image Developer: C ENG [0 to 4294967295 / 0
3-252-01 Accumulate Image Developer: M ENG [0 to 4294967295 / 0
3-252-01 Accumulate Image Developer: Y ENG [0 to 4294967295 / 0
3-260-00 Temperature/Humidity: Temperature: Display ENG [-5.0 to 45.0 / 0.0 /
1 Display 0.1deg/step]
3-260-00 Temperature/Humidity: Relative Humidity: Display ENG [0.0 to 100.0 / 0.0 /
2 Display 0.1%RH/step]
3-260-00 Temperature/Humidity: Absolute Humidity: Display ENG [0.00 to 100.00 / 0.00

SP3-XXX (Process)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
3 Display / 0.01g/m3/step]
3-310-00 ID.Sen. Detection: Voffset reg ENG [0.00 to 5.50 / 0.00 /
1 Voffset * 0.01V/step]
3-310-01 ID.Sen. Detection: Voffset dif ENG [0.00 to 5.50 / 0.00 /
3-310-02 ID.Sen. Detection: Voffset TM (Front) ENG [0.00 to 5.50 / 0.00 /
3-310-02 ID.Sen. Detection: Voffset TM (Center) ENG [0.00 to 5.50 / 0.00 /
3-310-02 ID.Sen. Detection: Voffset TM (Rear) ENG [0.00 to 5.50 / 0.00 /
3-311-00 ID.Sen. Vmin_K ENG [0.000 to 5.000 /
1 Detection :Vmin * 0.000 / 0.001V/step]
3-312-00 ID.Sen. Detection: Vct Vct_reg ENG [0.000 to 5.000 /
1 * 0.000 / 0.001V/step]
3-312-01 ID.Sen. Detection: Vct Vct_dif ENG [0.000 to 5.000 /
1 * 0.000 / 0.001V/step]
3-320-00 Vsg Adj.: Execute ID/TM Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1
3-321-00 Vsg Adj. Result: Vsg Vsg reg ENG [0.00 to 5.50 / 4.00 /
1 * 0.01V/step]
3-321-01 Vsg Adj. Result: Vsg Vsg dif ENG [0.00 to 5.50 / 0.00 /
1 * 0.01V/step]
3-321-02 Vsg Adj. Result: Vsg Vsg reg (BW) ENG [0.00 to 5.50 / 4.00 /
1 * 0.01V/step]
3-321-03 Vsg Adj. Result: Vsg Vsg dif (BW) ENG [0.00 to 5.50 / 0.00 /
1 * 0.01V/step]
3-321-04 Vsg Adj. Result: Vsg Vsg TM (Front) ENG [0.00 to 5.50 / 4.00 /
1 * 0.01V/step]
3-321-04 Vsg Adj. Result: Vsg Vsg TM (Center) ENG [0.00 to 5.50 / 4.00 /
2 * 0.01V/step]
3-321-04 Vsg Adj. Result: Vsg Vsg TM (Rear) ENG [0.00 to 5.50 / 4.00 /
3 * 0.01V/step]
3-322-00 Vsg Adj. Result: Ifsg Ifsg ENG [0.000 to 50.000 /
1 * 27.000 /
0.001mA/step]

SP3-XXX (Process)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
3-322-01 Vsg Adj. Result: Ifsg Ifsg (minimum) ENG [0.000 to 50.000 /
1 * 27.000 /
0.001mA/step]
3-322-02 Vsg Adj. Result: Ifsg Ifsg: TM (Front) ENG [0.000 to 50.000 /
1 * 27.000 /
0.001mA/step]
3-322-02 Vsg Adj. Result: Ifsg Ifsg: TM (Center) ENG [0.000 to 50.000 /
2 * 27.000 /
0.001mA/step]
3-322-02 Vsg Adj. Result: Ifsg Ifsg: TM (Rear) ENG [0.000 to 50.000 /
3 * 27.000 /
0.001mA/step]
3-323-00 Vsg Adj. Result: Latest ENG [0 to 999 / 0 / 1/step]
1 Display *
3-323-00 Vsg Adj. Result: Latest 1 ENG [0 to 999 / 0 / 1/step]
2 Display *
3 Display *
4 Display *
5 Display *
6 Display *
7 Display *
8 Display *
9 Display *
0 Display *
3-330-00 ID Sen. Sensitivity K2(Latest) ENG [0.0000 to 5.0000 /
1 Coef.: Set * 0.5280 / 0.0001/step]
3-330-01 ID Sen. Sensitivity K5(Latest) ENG [0.0000 to 10.0000 /
1 Coef.: Set * 2.0000 / 0.0001/step]

SP3-XXX (Process)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
3-331-02 ID Sen. Sensitivity K2: Check ENG [0.000 to 1.000 /
1 Coef.: Set * 0.528 / 0.001/step]
3-331-03 ID Sen. Sensitivity Diffuse Ratio Correction ENG [0.75 to 1.35 / 1.00 /
1 Coef.: Set Coef. * 0.01/step]
3-400-00 Toner Supply Type Bk ENG [0 to 4 / 4 / 1/step]
1 Select * 0: FIXED
2: PID
4: DANC
3-400-00 Toner Supply Type C ENG [0 to 4 / 4 / 1/step]
2 Select * 0: FIXED
2: PID
4: DANC
3-400-00 Toner Supply Type M ENG [0 to 4 / 4 / 1/step]
3 Select * 0: FIXED
2: PID
4: DANC
3-400-00 Toner Supply Type Y ENG [0 to 4 / 4 / 1/step]
4 Select * 0: FIXED
2: PID
4: DANC
3-411-00 Toner Supply Qty: Bk ENG [0.0 to 40000.0 / 0.0 /
1 Display 0.1mg/step]
3-411-00 Toner Supply Qty: C ENG [0.0 to 40000.0 / 0.0 /
3-411-00 Toner Supply Qty: M ENG [0.0 to 40000.0 / 0.0 /
3-411-00 Toner Supply Qty: Y ENG [0.0 to 40000.0 / 0.0 /
3-420-00 Developer Weight: Set Developer Weight: Bk ENG [50 to 2000 / 120 /
1 * 1g/step]
3-421-00 Toner Supply Ability: Bk ENG [0.001 to 2.000 /
1 Set * 0.700 /
0.001g/sec/step]
3-421-00 Toner Supply Ability: C ENG [0.001 to 2.000 /
2 Set * 0.700 /
0.001g/sec/step]

SP3-XXX (Process)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
3-421-00 Toner Supply Ability: M ENG [0.001 to 2.000 /
3 Set * 0.700 /
0.001g/sec/step]
3-421-00 Toner Supply Ability: Y ENG [0.001 to 2.000 /
4 Set * 0.700 /
0.001g/sec/step]
3-421-01 Toner Supply Ability: Coefficient 1 ENG [0.50 to 2.00 / 1.00 /
1 Set * 0.01/step]
2 Set * 0.01/step]
3 Set * 0.01/step]
4 Set * 0.01/step]
5 Set * 0.01/step]
6 Set * 0.01/step]
7 Set * 0.01/step]
8 Set * 0.01/step]
9 Set * 0.01/step]
0 Set * 0.01/step]
3-421-02 Toner Supply Ability: Unit Time ENG [0 to 60000 / 3000 /
1 Set * 1msec/step]
3-421-03 Toner Supply Ability: Environment Threshold: 1 ENG [0.0 to 65.0 / 17.0 /
1 Set * 0.1g/m3/step]
3-421-04 Toner Supply Ability: Environment Coefficient 1 ENG [0.50 to 2.00 / 1.04 /
1 Set * 0.01/step]

SP3-XXX (Process)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
2 Set * 0.01/step]
3 Set * 0.01/step]
4 Set * 0.01/step]
3-422-00 Toner Supply Limits: Max Supply Rate: Bk ENG [0 to 255 / 100 /
1 Set * 1%/step]
3-422-00 Toner Supply Limits: Max Supply Rate: C ENG [0 to 255 / 100 /
2 Set * 1%/step]
3-422-00 Toner Supply Limits: Max Supply Rate: M ENG [0 to 255 / 100 /
3 Set * 1%/step]
3-422-00 Toner Supply Limits: Max Supply Rate: Y ENG [0 to 255 / 100 /
4 Set * 1%/step]
3-422-01 Toner Supply Limits: Min Supply Time: Bk ENG [0 to 255 / 100 /
1 Set * 1msec/step]
3-422-01 Toner Supply Limits: Min Supply Time: C ENG [0 to 255 / 100 /
2 Set * 1msec/step]
3-422-01 Toner Supply Limits: Min Supply Time: M ENG [0 to 255 / 100 /
3 Set * 1msec/step]
3-422-01 Toner Supply Limits: Min Supply Time: Y ENG [0 to 255 / 100 /
4 Set * 1msec/step]
3-432-00 Supply Drive Time: Drive Time (Maximum) ENG [0 to 1500 / 800 /
1 Setting * 1msec/step]
3-440-00 Fixed Supply Mode Fixed Rate: Bk ENG [0 to 100 / 10 /
1 * 1%/step]
3-440-00 Fixed Supply Mode Fixed Rate: C ENG [0 to 100 / 10 /
2 * 1%/step]
3-440-00 Fixed Supply Mode Fixed Rate: M ENG [0 to 100 / 10 /
3 * 1%/step]
3-440-00 Fixed Supply Mode Fixed Rate: Y ENG [0 to 100 / 10 /
4 * 1%/step]
3-450-00 Toner Supply PID: Vt Proportion Coef.: Bk ENG [0 to 2550 / 40 /
1 Setting * 1/step]
3-450-00 Toner Supply PID: Vt Proportion Coef.: C ENG [0 to 2550 / 40 /
2 Setting * 1/step]

SP3-XXX (Process)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
3-450-00 Toner Supply PID: Vt Proportion Coef.: M ENG [0 to 2550 / 40 /
3 Setting * 1/step]
3-450-00 Toner Supply PID: Vt Proportion Coef.: Y ENG [0 to 2550 / 40 /
4 Setting * 1/step]
3-450-01 Toner Supply PID: Pixel Proportion Coef. 1: Bk ENG [0.00 to 2.55 / 0.60 /
1 Setting * 0.01/step]
3-450-01 Toner Supply PID: Pixel Proportion Coef. 1: C ENG [0.00 to 2.55 / 0.60 /
3-450-01 Toner Supply PID: Pixel Proportion Coef. 1: M ENG [0.00 to 2.55 / 0.60 /
3-450-01 Toner Supply PID: Pixel Proportion Coef. 1: Y ENG [0.00 to 2.55 / 0.60 /
3-450-03 Toner Supply PID: Correction Coefficient: 1 ENG [0.00 to 2.55 / 1.00 /

SP3-XXX (Process)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
3-450-05 Toner Supply PID: Correction Value 1 ENG [-0.10 to 0.00 / -0.01 /
3-450-05 Toner Supply PID: Correction Value 2 ENG [0.00 to 0.10 / 0.01 /
3-450-06 Toner Supply PID: Pixel Proportion Coef. Err ENG [0.00 to 1.00 / 0.35 /
3-450-07 Toner Supply PID: I_Vt_Coef: Bk ENG [0 to 2550 / 500 /
1 Setting * 1/step]
3-450-07 Toner Supply PID: I_Vt_Coef: C ENG [0 to 2550 / 500 /
2 Setting * 1/step]
3-450-07 Toner Supply PID: I_Vt_Coef: M ENG [0 to 2550 / 500 /
3 Setting * 1/step]
3-450-07 Toner Supply PID: I_Vt_Coef: Y ENG [0 to 2550 / 500 /
4 Setting * 1/step]
3-450-08 Toner Supply PID: Si:Bk ENG [-255.00 to 255.00 /
1 Setting * 0.00 / 0.01/step]
3-450-08 Toner Supply PID: Si:C ENG [-255.00 to 255.00 /
2 Setting * 0.00 / 0.01/step]
3-450-08 Toner Supply PID: Si:M ENG [-255.00 to 255.00 /
3 Setting * 0.00 / 0.01/step]
3-450-08 Toner Supply PID: Si:Y ENG [-255.00 to 255.00 /
4 Setting * 0.00 / 0.01/step]
3-450-09 Toner Supply PID: Vt Sum Times: Bk ENG [1 to 255 / 20 /
1 Setting * 1times/step]
3-450-09 Toner Supply PID: Vt Sum Times: C ENG [1 to 255 / 20 /
3-450-09 Toner Supply PID: Vt Sum Times: M ENG [1 to 255 / 20 /
3-450-09 Toner Supply PID: Vt Sum Times: Y ENG [1 to 255 / 20 /
3-460-01 Toner Supply Ctrl: Minimum Supply Time ENG [0 to 250 / 100 /
1 DANC: Set * 1msec/step]
3-460-01 Toner Supply Ctrl: Maximum Supply Time ENG [0 to 1000 / 200 /
2 DANC: Set * 1msec/step]

SP3-XXX (Process)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
3-460-02 Toner Supply Ctrl: SMITH: Supply Amount: Bk ENG [1 to 500 / 129 /
2 DANC: Set * 1mg/step]
3-460-11 Toner Supply Ctrl: Transfer Rate: Bk ENG [1.00 to 1.50 / 1.00 /
1 DANC: Set * 0.01/step]
3-460-11 Toner Supply Ctrl: Transfer Rate: C ENG [1.00 to 1.50 / 1.00 /
3-460-11 Toner Supply Ctrl: Transfer Rate: M ENG [1.00 to 1.50 / 1.00 /
3-460-11 Toner Supply Ctrl: Transfer Rate: Y ENG [1.00 to 1.50 / 1.00 /
3-461-00 Toner Supply Ctrl: PI Rate ENG [5 to 200 / 100 /
1 DANC: Set * 1%/step]
3-461-01 Toner Supply Ctrl: PI: P Gain: Bk ENG [0.0000 to 1.0000 /
1 DANC: Set * 0.0100 / 0.0001/step]
3-461-01 Toner Supply Ctrl: P Limits: Ratio: Up: Bk ENG [0.00 to 1.00 / 0.05 /
3-461-01 Toner Supply Ctrl: P Limits: Ratio: Low: Bk ENG [0.00 to 1.00 / 0.20 /
3-461-02 Toner Supply Ctrl: PI: I Gain: Bk ENG [0.0000 to 0.1000 /
1 DANC: Set * 0.0100 / 0.0001/step]
3-461-02 Toner Supply Ctrl: I Limits: Ratio: Up: Bk ENG [0.00 to 1.00 / 0.40 /
3-461-02 Toner Supply Ctrl: I Limits: Ratio: Low: Bk ENG [0.00 to 1.00 / 0.30 /
3-461-05 Toner Supply Ctrl: AW:AWIpni:Bk ENG [0 to 2000 / 100 /
2 DANC: Set * 1/step]
3-461-10 Toner Supply Ctrl: PI: Line Spd Corr.: StdSpd1: ENG IM C300 series: [0.05
2 DANC: Set Bk * to 1.00 / 1.00 /
0.01/step]
IM C400 series: [0.05
to 1.00 / 0.84 /
0.01/step]
3-461-10 Toner Supply Ctrl: PI: Line Spd Corr.: StdSpd2: ENG IM C300 series: [0.05
3 DANC: Set Bk * to 1.00 / 1.00 /
0.01/step]

SP3-XXX (Process)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
to 1.00 / 0.71 /
0.01/step]
3-461-10 Toner Supply Ctrl: PI: Line Spd Corr.: LowSpd: ENG IM C300 series: [0.05
4 DANC: Set Bk * to 1.00 / 0.50 /
0.01/step]
to 1.00 / 0.35 /
0.01/step]
3-461-12 Toner Supply Ctrl: SMITH: Gain: Bk ENG [0.00 to 2.00 / 1.00 /
3-461-12 Toner Supply Ctrl: SMITH: Ratio: Std Speed 1: ENG [0.00 to 1.00 / 1.00 /
2 DANC: Set Bk * 0.01/step]
3-461-12 Toner Supply Ctrl: SMITH: Ratio: Std Speed 2: ENG [0.00 to 1.00 / 1.00 /
3-461-12 Toner Supply Ctrl: SMITH: Ratio: Low Speed: ENG [0.00 to 1.00 / 1.00 /
3-462-00 Toner Supply Ctrl: ANC: Rate ENG [0 to 200 / 100 /
1 DANC: Set * 1%/step]
3-462-10 Toner Supply Ctrl: ANC: Gain: Bk ENG [0.00 to 2.00 / 1.00 /
3-462-10 Toner Supply Ctrl: ANC: Ratio: Std Speed 1: Bk ENG [0.05 to 1.00 / 1.00 /
3-462-10 Toner Supply Ctrl: ANC: Ratio: Std Speed 2: Bk ENG [0.05 to 1.00 / 1.00 /
3-462-10 Toner Supply Ctrl: ANC: Ratio: Low Speed: Bk ENG [0.05 to 1.00 / 1.00 /
3-463-10 Toner Supply Ctrl: Integral: I: Save: Bk ENG [-1000.0000 to
1 DANC: Set * 1000.0000 / 0.0000 /
0.0001/step]
3-463-10 Toner Supply Ctrl: Integral: I: Save: C ENG [-1000.0000 to
2 DANC: Set * 1000.0000 / 0.0000 /
0.0001/step]
3-463-10 Toner Supply Ctrl: Integral: I: Save: M ENG [-1000.0000 to
3 DANC: Set * 1000.0000 / 0.0000 /
0.0001/step]
3-463-10 Toner Supply Ctrl: Integral: I: Save: Y ENG [-1000.0000 to

SP3-XXX (Process)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
4 DANC: Set * 1000.0000 / 0.0000 /
0.0001/step]
3-463-11 Toner Supply Ctrl: ANC:Ref Save: Bk ENG [-1000.0000 to
1 DANC: Set * 1000.0000 / 0.0000 /
0.0001/step]
3-463-11 Toner Supply Ctrl: ANC:Ref Save: C ENG [-1000.0000 to
2 DANC: Set * 1000.0000 / 0.0000 /
0.0001/step]
3-463-11 Toner Supply Ctrl: ANC:Ref Save: M ENG [-1000.0000 to
3 DANC: Set * 1000.0000 / 0.0000 /
0.0001/step]
3-463-11 Toner Supply Ctrl: ANC:Ref Save: Y ENG [-1000.0000 to
4 DANC: Set * 1000.0000 / 0.0000 /
0.0001/step]
3-463-20 Toner Supply Ctrl: Save_DANC: Bk ENG [0 to 9999 / 0 /
1 DANC: Set * 1cm2/step]
3-463-20 Toner Supply Ctrl: Save_DANC: C ENG [0 to 9999 / 0 /
3-463-20 Toner Supply Ctrl: Save_DANC: M ENG [0 to 9999 / 0 /
3-463-20 Toner Supply Ctrl: Save_DANC: Y ENG [0 to 9999 / 0 /
3-500-00 Image Quality Adj.: ALL ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
1 ON/OFF * 0: OFF
1: ON
3-500-00 Image Quality Adj.: Process Control ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
2 ON/OFF * 0: OFF
1: ON
3-500-00 Image Quality Adj.: MUSIC ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
3 ON/OFF *
3-500-00 Image Quality Adj.: TD Sensor Initial Set ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
4 ON/OFF * 0: OFF
1: ON
3-501-00 Toner End Prohibition Process Control ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
1 Setting * 0: Permit
1: Forbid

SP3-XXX (Process)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
3-501-00 Toner End Prohibition MUSIC ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
1: Forbid
3-501-00 Toner End Prohibition TC Adjustment ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
1: Forbid
3-509-01 ImgQltyAdj :ModeSele FC/BW Mode Priority Setting ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1 ct * 0: FC Priority
1: BW Priority
3-510-02 Image Quality Adj.: MUSIC ENG [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
4 Exec Flag *
3-520-00 Image Quality Adj.: During Job ENG [0 to 100 / 5 /
1 Interval * 1pages/step]
3-520-00 Image Quality Adj.: During Stand-by ENG [0 to 100 / 10 /
2 Interval * 1minute/step]
3-521-00 Drum Stop: Time: Year ENG [0 to 99 / 0 /
1 Display * 1year/step]
3-521-00 Drum Stop: Time: Month ENG [1 to 12 / 1 /
2 Display * 1month/step]
3-521-00 Drum Stop: Time: Day ENG [1 to 31 / 1 /
3 Display * 1day/step]
3-521-00 Drum Stop: Time: Hour ENG [0 to 23 / 0 /
4 Display * 1hour/step]
3-521-00 Drum Stop: Time: Minute ENG [0 to 59 / 0 /
5 Display * 1minute/step]
3-521-01 Drum Stop Time :Disp Year:Col ENG [0 to 99 / 0 /
1 * 1year/step]
3-521-01 Drum Stop Time :Disp Month:Col ENG [1 to 12 / 1 /
2 * 1month/step]
3-521-01 Drum Stop Time :Disp Day:Col ENG [1 to 31 / 1 /
3 * 1day/step]
3-521-01 Drum Stop Time :Disp Hour:Col ENG [0 to 23 / 0 /
4 * 1hour/step]
3-521-01 Drum Stop Time :Disp Minute:Col ENG [0 to 59 / 0 /
5 * 1minute/step]
3-522-00 Drum Temperature ENG [-1280.0 to 1270.0 /

SP3-XXX (Process)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
1 Stop:Environment:Dis * 0.0 / 0.1deg/step]
play
3-522-00 Drum Relative Humidity ENG [0.0 to 1000.0 / 0.0 /
2 Stop:Environment:Dis * 0.1%RH/step]
play
3-522-00 Drum Absolute Humidity ENG [0.0 to 1000.0 / 0.0 /
3 Stop:Environment:Dis * 0.1g/m3/step]
play
3-522-01 Drum Stop Temperature:Col ENG [-1280.0 to 1270.0 /
1 Environ :Disp * 0.0 / 0.1deg/step]
3-522-01 Drum Stop Rel Humidity:Col ENG [0.0 to 1000.0 / 0.0 /
2 Environ :Disp * 0.1%RH/step]
3-522-01 Drum Stop Abs Humidity:Col ENG [0.0 to 1000.0 / 0.0 /
3 Environ :Disp * 0.1g/m3/step]
3-522-10 Rapi_timer Time Setting ENG [0 to 255 / 30 /
0 * 1sec/step]
3-529-00 ProCon Auto Exe Development Gamma ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
1 Interval: Set Correction * 0: OFF
1: ON
3-529-00 ProCon Auto Exe Environment Correction ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
2 Interval: Set * 0: OFF
1: ON
3-529-00 ProCon Auto Exe Absolute Humidity Threshold ENG [0.0 to 99.0 / 4.3 /
3 Interval: Set * 0.1g/m3/step]
3-529-00 ProCon Auto Exe Maximum Correction Times ENG [0 to 99 / 4 /
4 Interval: Set * 1counts/step]
3-529-00 ProCon Auto Exe Execution Counter ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
5 Interval: Set 1counts/step]
3-529-00 ProCon Auto Exe Page Counter: BW ENG [0 to 5000 / 0 /
6 Interval: Set * 1sheets/step]
3-529-00 ProCon Auto Exe Page Counter: FC ENG [0 to 5000 / 0 /
7 Interval: Set * 1sheets/step]
3-529-00 ProCon Auto Exe Absolute Humidity high ENG [0.0 to 100.0 / 17.0 /
8 Interval: Set Threshold * 0.1g/m3/step]
3-530-00 Power ON ProCon: Non-use Time Setting ENG [0 to 1440 / 360 /
1 Set * 1minute/step]

SP3-XXX (Process)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
3-530-00 Power ON ProCon: Temperature Range ENG [0 to 99 / 10 /
2 Set Threshold * 1deg/step]
3-530-00 Power ON ProCon: Relative Humidity Range ENG [0 to 99 / 50 /
3 Set Thresh * 1%RH/step]
3-530-00 Power ON ProCon: Absolute Humidity Range ENG [0 to 99 / 6 /
4 Set Thresh * 1g/m3/step]
3-530-00 Power ON ProCon: Interval: BW ENG [0 to 5000 / 250 /
5 Set * 1sheets/step]
3-530-00 Power ON ProCon: Interval: FC ENG [0 to 5000 / 100 /
3-530-00 Power ON ProCon: Page Counter: BW ENG [0 to 5000 / 0 /
3-530-00 Power ON ProCon: Page Counter: FC ENG [0 to 5000 / 0 /
3-530-00 Power ON ProCon: Non-use Time Setting (Long) ENG [0 to 65535 / 2880 /
9 Set * 1min/step]
3-531-00 Non-useTime Procon: Non-use Time Setting ENG [0 to 1440 / 360 /
1 Set * 1minute/step]
3-531-00 Non-useTime Procon: Temperature Range ENG [0 to 99 / 10 /
2 Set Threshold * 1deg/step]
3-531-00 Non-useTime Procon: Relative Humidity Range ENG [0 to 99 / 50 /
3 Set Thresh * 1%RH/step]
3-531-00 Non-useTime Procon: Absolute Humidity Range ENG [0 to 99 / 6 /
4 Set Thresh * 1g/m3/step]
3-531-00 Non-useTime Procon: Maximum Execution Times ENG [0 to 99 / 14 /
3-531-01 Density Adjustment Year:Col ENG [0 to 99 / 0 /
1 time :Disp * 1year/step]
3-531-01 Density Adjustment Month:Col ENG [1 to 12 / 1 /
2 time :Disp * 1month/step]
3-531-01 Density Adjustment Day:Col ENG [1 to 31 / 1 /
3 time :Disp * 1day/step]
3-531-01 Density Adjustment Year:Col ENG [0 to 99 / 0 /
4 time :Disp * 1year/step]
3-531-01 Density Adjustment Month:Col ENG [1 to 12 / 1 /
5 time :Disp * 1month/step]

SP3-XXX (Process)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
3-531-01 Density Adjustment Day:Col ENG [1 to 31 / 1 /
6 time :Disp * 1day/step]
3-533-00 Interrupt ProCon: Set Interval: Set: BW ENG [0 to 5000 / 500 /
1 * 1sheets/step]
3-533-00 Interrupt ProCon: Set Interval: Display: BW ENG [0 to 5000 / 500 /
2 * 1sheets/step]
3-533-00 Interrupt ProCon: Set Correction (Short): BW ENG [0.00 to 1.00 / 0.10 /
3 * 0.01/step]
3-533-00 Interrupt ProCon: Set Correction (Mid.): BW ENG [0.00 to 1.00 / 1.00 /
4 * 0.01/step]
3-533-00 Interrupt ProCon: Set Correction (Short2): BW ENG [0.00 to 1.00 / 1.00 /
5 * 0.01/step]
3-533-01 Interrupt ProCon: Set Interval: Set: FC ENG [0 to 5000 / 200 /
1 * 1sheets/step]
3-533-01 Interrupt ProCon: Set Interval: Display: FC ENG [0 to 5000 / 200 /
2 * 1sheets/step]
3-533-01 Interrupt ProCon: Set Correction (Short): FC ENG [0.00 to 1.00 / 0.25 /
3 * 0.01/step]
3-533-01 Interrupt ProCon: Set Correction (Mid.): FC ENG [0.00 to 1.00 / 1.00 /
4 * 0.01/step]
3-533-01 Interrupt ProCon: Set Correction (Short2): FC ENG [0.00 to 1.00 / 1.00 /
5 * 0.01/step]
3-534-00 JobEnd ProCon: Set Interval: Set: BW ENG [0 to 5000 / 250 /
1 * 1sheets/step]
3-534-00 JobEnd ProCon: Set Interval: Display: BW ENG [0 to 5000 / 250 /
2 * 1sheets/step]
3-534-00 JobEnd ProCon: Set Correction (Short): BW ENG [0.00 to 1.00 / 0.20 /
3 * 0.01/step]
3-534-00 JobEnd ProCon: Set Correction (Mid.): BW ENG [0.00 to 1.00 / 1.00 /
4 * 0.01/step]
3-534-00 Interrupt ProCon: Set Correction (Short2): BW ENG [0.00 to 1.00 / 0.08 /
5 * 0.01/step]
3-534-01 JobEnd ProCon: Set Interval: Set: FC ENG [0 to 1000 / 100 /
1 * 1sheets/step]
3-534-01 JobEnd ProCon: Set Interval: Display: FC ENG [0 to 5000 / 100 /
2 * 1sheets/step]

SP3-XXX (Process)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
3-534-01 JobEnd ProCon: Set Correction (Short): FC ENG [0.00 to 1.00 / 0.50 /
3 * 0.01/step]
3-534-01 JobEnd ProCon: Set Correction (Mid.): FC ENG [0.00 to 1.00 / 1.00 /
4 * 0.01/step]
3-534-01 Interrupt ProCon: Set Correction (Short2): FC ENG [0.00 to 1.00 / 0.20 /
5 * 0.01/step]
3-539-00 Dev Agitating Time: Agitating Time ENG [0 to 3000 / 10 /
1 Set * 1sec/step]
3-539-01 Dev Agitating Time: ON/OFF(Abs Humidity ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
0 Set Reference) * 0: OFF
1: ON
3-539-01 Dev Agitating Time: Absolute Humidity ENG [0 to 3000 / 0 /
1 Set Reference: 1 * 1sec/step]
3-539-02 Dev Agitating Time: Absolute Humidity ENG [0.0 to 65.0 / 4.0 /
1 Set Threshold: 1 * 0.1g/m3/step]
3-539-03 Dev Agitating Time: ON/OFF(Non-use Time ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
1: ON

SP3-XXX (Process)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
3-539-03 Dev Agitating Time: Non-use Time Reference: 1 ENG [0 to 3000 / 0 /
1 Set * 1sec/step]
2 Set * 1sec/step]
3 Set * 1sec/step]
4 Set * 1sec/step]
5 Set * 1sec/step]
6 Set * 1sec/step]
7 Set * 1sec/step]
8 Set * 1sec/step]
9 Set * 1sec/step]
0 Set * 1sec/step]
3-539-04 Dev Agitating Time: Non-use Time Threshold: 1 ENG [0 to 30000 / 15 /
1 Set * 1min/step]
2 Set * 1min/step]
3 Set * 1min/step]
4 Set * 1min/step]
5 Set * 1min/step]
6 Set * 1min/step]
7 Set * 1min/step]
8 Set * 1min/step]

SP3-XXX (Process)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
9 Set * 1min/step]
3-539-05 Dev Agitating Time: ON/OFF(Dot Coverage ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
1: ON
3-539-05 Dev Agitating Time: Dot Coverage Reference: 1 ENG [0 to 3000 / 0 /
1 Set * 1sec/step]
2 Set * 1sec/step]
3 Set * 1sec/step]
4 Set * 1sec/step]
5 Set * 1sec/step]
6 Set * 1sec/step]
3-539-06 Dev Agitating Time: Dot Coverage Threshold: 1 ENG [0 to 100 / 10 /
1 Set * 1%/step]
2 Set * 1%/step]
3 Set * 1%/step]
4 Set * 1%/step]
5 Set * 1%/step]
3-539-09 Dev Agitating Time: Upper Limit ENG [0 to 3600 / 30 /
9 Set * 1sec/step]
3-541-00 Music Interval :Set Page Counter: BW ENG [0 to 5000 / 0 /
1 * 1sheets/step]
3-541-00 Music Interval :Set Page Counter: FC ENG [0 to 5000 / 0 /
2 * 1sheets/step]
3-550-00 Refresh Mode Required Area: Bk ENG [0 to 65535 / 0 /
1 * 1cm^2/step]
3-550-00 Refresh Mode Required Area: C ENG [0 to 65535 / 0 /

SP3-XXX (Process)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
2 * 1cm^2/step]
3-550-00 Refresh Mode Required Area: M ENG [0 to 65535 / 0 /
3 * 1cm^2/step]
3-550-00 Refresh Mode Required Area: Y ENG [0 to 65535 / 0 /
4 * 1cm^2/step]
3-550-01 Refresh Mode Dev. Motor Rotation: Display: ENG [0.0 to 1000.0 / 0.0 /
1 Bk * 0.1m/step]
2 C * 0.1m/step]
3 M * 0.1m/step]
4 Y * 0.1m/step]
3-550-02 Refresh Mode Rotation Threshold ENG [0.0 to 1000.0 / 0.1 /
1 * 0.1m/step]
3-550-03 Refresh Mode Refresh Threshold: Bk ENG [0 to 255 / 25 /
1 * 1cm^2/m/step]
3-550-03 Refresh Mode Refresh Threshold: C ENG [0 to 255 / 25 /
2 * 1cm^2/m/step]
3-550-03 Refresh Mode Refresh Threshold: M ENG [0 to 255 / 25 /
3 * 1cm^2/m/step]
3-550-03 Refresh Mode Refresh Threshold: Y ENG [0 to 255 / 25 /
4 * 1cm^2/m/step]
3-550-04 Refresh Mode Job End Area Coefficient ENG [0.1 to 25.5 / 1.0 /
1 * 0.1/step]
3-550-04 Refresh Mode Job End Vb Coefficient ENG [0 to 100 / 34 /
2 * 1%/step]
3-550-04 Refresh Mode Job End Length ENG [0 to 99 / 77 /
3 * 1mm/step]
3-550-04 Refresh Mode Job End Supply ENG [0.000 to 1.000 /
4 * 0.450 /
0.001mg/cm2/step]
3-550-08 Refresh Mode Consumption Counts (Max) ENG [0 to 50 / 0 / 1/step]
1 *
3-550-09 Refresh Mode Total Refresh Amount: K ENG [0 to 4294967295 / 0
1 * / 1mg/step]

SP3-XXX (Process)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
3-550-09 Refresh Mode Total Refresh Amount: C ENG [0 to 4294967295 / 0
2 * / 1mg/step]
3-550-09 Refresh Mode Total Refresh Amount: M ENG [0 to 4294967295 / 0
3 * / 1mg/step]
3-550-09 Refresh Mode Total Refresh Amount: Y ENG [0 to 4294967295 / 0
4 * / 1mg/step]
3-550-12 Refresh Mode Refresh Page Threshold: Bk ENG [0 to 200 / 100 /
1 * 1page/step]
3-550-12 Refresh Mode Refresh Page Threshold: Col ENG [0 to 200 / 100 /
2 * 1page/step]
3-550-13 Refresh Mode Refresh Page Counter Bk ENG [0 to 999999 / 0 /
1 * 1page/step]
3-550-13 Refresh Mode Refresh Page Counter C ENG [0 to 999999 / 0 /
2 * 1page/step]
3-550-13 Refresh Mode Refresh Page Counter M ENG [0 to 999999 / 0 /
3 * 1page/step]
3-550-13 Refresh Mode Refresh Page Counter Y ENG [0 to 999999 / 0 /
4 * 1page/step]
3-553-00 Transfer Belt Cleaning Transfer Idle Time Temp.: H ENG [0.0 to 3.0 / 0.0 /
1 * 0.1revolutions/step]
3-553-00 Transfer Belt Cleaning Transfer Idle Time Temp.: M ENG [0.0 to 3.0 / 0.0 /
3-553-00 Transfer Belt Cleaning Transfer Idle Time Temp.: L ENG [0.0 to 3.0 / 0.0 /
3-553-00 Transfer Belt Cleaning Transfer Idle Time Temp.: L: ENG [0.0 to 3.0 / 0.0 /
4 ON * 0.1revolutions/step]
3-553-00 Transfer Belt Cleaning Temperature Threshold:T2 ENG [20 to 30 / 25 /
5 * 1deg/step]
6 * 1deg/step]
7 * 1deg/step]
3-555-00 Execution Interval: Set Charge AC Control Counter: ENG [0 to 2000 / 500 /
1 FC * 1page/step]
3-555-00 Execution Interval: Set Charge AC Control Counter: ENG [0 to 2000 / 500 /
2 Bk * 1page/step]

SP3-XXX (Process)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
3-600-00 Select ProCon Potential Control ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
1 * 0: FIXED
1: CONTROL
3-600-00 Select ProCon LD Control ENG [0 to 3 / 1 / 1/step]
2 * 0: OFF
1: ON
3-600-00 Select ProCon TC Adj. Mode ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1/step]
3 * 0: Do Not Execute
1: 1st Power On
2: 1st Power On &
Job End
3: Dev gamma
judgment
3-600-00 Select ProCon ACC Before ProCon ENG [0 to 3 / 2 / 1/step]
4 * 0: Not Execute
1: Process Control
2: TC Control
3-600-06 Select ProCon Vsg ITB Prev Pattern Corr. ENG [0 to 2 / 2 / 1/step]
0 * 0: OFF
1: All Time
2: Non-use Time
(Long)
3-610-00 Charging AC Control: Standard Speed: Bk ENG [0.00 to 3.00 / 2.10 /
1 Display * 0.01kV/step]
3-610-00 Charging AC Control: Standard Speed: C ENG [0.00 to 3.00 / 2.10 /
3-610-00 Charging AC Control: Standard Speed: M ENG [0.00 to 3.00 / 2.10 /
3-610-00 Charging AC Control: Standard Speed: Y ENG [0.00 to 3.00 / 2.10 /
3-611-00 Charging DC Control: Standard Speed: Bk ENG [300 to 1000 / 700 /
1 Display * 1-V/step]
3-611-00 Charging DC Control: Standard Speed: C ENG [300 to 1000 / 690 /
3-611-00 Charging DC Control: Standard Speed: M ENG [300 to 1000 / 690 /

SP3-XXX (Process)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
3-611-00 Charging DC Control: Standard Speed: Y ENG [300 to 1000 / 690 /
3-611-01 Charging DC Control: Mid Speed: Bk ENG [300 to 1000 / 700 /
3-611-01 Charging DC Control: Mid Speed: C ENG [300 to 1000 / 690 /
3-611-01 Charging DC Control: Mid Speed: M ENG [300 to 1000 / 690 /
3-611-01 Charging DC Control: Mid Speed: Y ENG [300 to 1000 / 690 /
3-611-02 Charging DC Control: Low Speed: Bk ENG [300 to 1000 / 700 /
3-611-02 Charging DC Control: Low Speed: C ENG [300 to 1000 / 690 /
3-611-02 Charging DC Control: Low Speed: M ENG [300 to 1000 / 690 /
3-611-02 Charging DC Control: Low Speed: Y ENG [300 to 1000 / 690 /
3-611-05 Charging DC Control: Std Speed: BW ENG [300 to 1000 / 700 /
3-611-06 Charging DC Control: Mid Speed: BW ENG [300 to 1000 / 700 /
3-611-07 Charging DC Control: Low Speed: BW ENG [300 to 1000 / 700 /
3-611-08 Charging DC Control: Std Speed2: BW ENG [300 to 1000 / 700 /
3-612-00 Dev DC Control: Std Speed: Bk ENG [200 to 800 / 550 /
3-612-00 Dev DC Control: Std Speed: C ENG [200 to 800 / 550 /
3-612-00 Dev DC Control: Std Speed: M ENG [200 to 800 / 550 /
3-612-00 Dev DC Control: Std Speed: Y ENG [200 to 800 / 550 /
3-612-01 Dev DC Control: Mid Speed: Bk ENG [200 to 800 / 550 /

SP3-XXX (Process)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
3-612-01 Dev DC Control: Mid Speed: C ENG [200 to 800 / 550 /
3-612-01 Dev DC Control: Mid Speed: M ENG [200 to 800 / 550 /
3-612-01 Dev DC Control: Mid Speed: Y ENG [200 to 800 / 550 /
3-612-02 Dev DC Control: Low Speed: Bk ENG [200 to 800 / 550 /
3-612-02 Dev DC Control: Low Speed: C ENG [200 to 800 / 550 /
3-612-02 Dev DC Control: Low Speed: M ENG [200 to 800 / 550 /
3-612-02 Dev DC Control: Low Speed: Y ENG [200 to 800 / 550 /
3-612-04 Dev DC Control: Vb Limit ENG [0 to 500 / 50 /
1 Display * 1V/step]
3-612-05 Dev DC Control: Std Speed: BW ENG [200 to 800 / 550 /
3-612-06 Dev DC Control: Mid Speed: BW ENG [200 to 800 / 550 /
3-612-07 Dev DC Control: Low Speed: BW ENG [200 to 800 / 550 /
3-612-08 Dev DC Control: Std Speed2: BW ENG [200 to 800 / 550 /
3-612-12 Dev DC Control: Set:PCU Distance Thresh:K ENG [0 to 999999999 /
4 Display * 23968496 /
1mm/step]
3-612-12 Dev DC Control: Set:PCU Distance ENG [0 to 999999999 /
5 Display Thresh:Col * 17451292 /
1mm/step]
3-612-12 Dev DC Control: Set:Temperature Thresh ENG [0 to 100 / 15 /
6 Display * 1deg/step]
3-612-13 Dev DC Control: Set:Upper Vb Current:K ENG [0 to 800 / 560 /
3-612-13 Dev DC Control: Set:Upper Vb Current:C ENG [0 to 800 / 560 /

SP3-XXX (Process)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
3-612-13 Dev DC Control: Set:Upper Vb Current:M ENG [0 to 800 / 560 /
3-612-13 Dev DC Control: Set:Upper Vb Current:Y ENG [0 to 800 / 560 /
3-613-00 LD Power Control: Std Speed: Bk ENG [0 to 200 / 100 /
1 Display * 1%/step]
3-613-00 LD Power Control: Std Speed: C ENG [0 to 200 / 100 /
3-613-00 LD Power Control: Std Speed: M ENG [0 to 200 / 100 /
3-613-00 LD Power Control: Std Speed: Y ENG [0 to 200 / 100 /
3-613-01 LD Power Control: Mid Speed: Bk ENG [0 to 200 / 100 /
3-613-01 LD Power Control: Mid Speed: C ENG [0 to 200 / 100 /
3-613-01 LD Power Control: Mid Speed: M ENG [0 to 200 / 100 /
3-613-01 LD Power Control: Mid Speed: Y ENG [0 to 200 / 100 /
3-613-02 LD Power Control: Low Speed: Bk ENG [0 to 200 / 100 /
3-613-02 LD Power Control: Low Speed: C ENG [0 to 200 / 100 /
3-613-02 LD Power Control: Low Speed: M ENG [0 to 200 / 100 /
3-613-02 LD Power Control: Low Speed: Y ENG [0 to 200 / 100 /
3-613-05 LD Power Control: Std Speed: BW ENG [0 to 200 / 100 /
3-613-06 LD Power Control: Mid Speed: BW ENG [0 to 200 / 100 /
3-613-07 LD Power Control: Low Speed: BW ENG [0 to 200 / 100 /
3-613-08 LD Power Control: Std Speed2: BW ENG [0 to 200 / 100 /

SP3-XXX (Process)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
3-613-10 LD Power Control: ProCon Corr: Bk ENG [0 to 200 / 160 /
3-613-10 LD Power Control: ProCon Corr: C ENG [0 to 200 / 160 /
3-613-10 LD Power Control: ProCon Corr: M ENG [0 to 200 / 160 /
3-613-10 LD Power Control: ProCon Corr: Y ENG [0 to 200 / 160 /
3-619-00 Img Bias: Line Spd Vb Coef: Std Speed: Bk ENG [0.00 to 2.55 / 0.57 /
1 Corr: Set * 0.01/step]
3-619-00 Img Bias: Line Spd Vb Coef: Std Speed: C ENG [0.00 to 2.55 / 0.87 /
3-619-00 Img Bias: Line Spd Vb Coef: Std Speed: M ENG [0.00 to 2.55 / 0.85 /
3-619-00 Img Bias: Line Spd Vb Coef: Std Speed: Y ENG [0.00 to 2.55 / 0.79 /
3-619-00 Img Bias: Line Spd Vb Coef: Low Speed: Bk ENG [0.00 to 2.55 / 0.57 /
3-619-00 Img Bias: Line Spd Vb Coef: Low Speed: C ENG [0.00 to 2.55 / 0.87 /
3-619-00 Img Bias: Line Spd Vb Coef: Low Speed: M ENG [0.00 to 2.55 / 0.85 /
3-619-00 Img Bias: Line Spd Vb Coef: Low Speed: Y ENG [0.00 to 2.55 / 0.79 /
3-619-01 Img Bias: Line Spd Vb Offset: Std Speed: Bk ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 264 /
1 Corr: Set * 1V/step]
3-619-01 Img Bias: Line Spd Vb Offset: Std Speed: C ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 159 /
3-619-01 Img Bias: Line Spd Vb Offset: Std Speed: M ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 141 /
3-619-01 Img Bias: Line Spd Vb Offset: Std Speed: Y ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 196 /
3-619-01 Img Bias: Line Spd Vb Offset: Low Speed: Bk ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 264 /
3-619-01 Img Bias: Line Spd Vb Offset: Low Speed: C ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 159 /

SP3-XXX (Process)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
3-619-01 Img Bias: Line Spd Vb Offset: Low Speed: M ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 141 /
3-619-01 Img Bias: Line Spd Vb Offset: Low Speed: Y ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 196 /
3-619-02 Img Bias: Line Spd Vb Coef: Standard Speed 2: ENG [0.00 to 2.55 / 0.57 /
1 Corr: Set Bk * 0.01/step]
3-619-02 Img Bias: Line Spd Vb Coef: Mid Speed: Std ENG [0.00 to 2.55 / 0.57 /
4 Corr: Set Speed 2 * 0.01/step]
3-619-02 Img Bias: Line Spd Vb Coef: Low Speed: Std ENG [0.00 to 2.55 / 0.57 /
3-619-02 Img Bias: Line Spd Vb Coef: Std Speed 2: Std ENG [0.00 to 2.55 / 0.57 /
3-619-03 Img Bias: Line Spd Vb Offset: Std Speed 2: Bk ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 264 /
3-619-03 Img Bias: Line Spd Vb Offset: Mid Speed: Std ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 264 /
4 Corr: Set Speed 2 * 1V/step]
3-619-03 Img Bias: Line Spd Vb Offset: Low Speed: Std ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 264 /
3-619-03 Img Bias: Line Spd Vb Offset: Std Speed 2: Std ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 264 /
3-619-04 Img Bias: Line Spd Vb Coef: Mid Speed: Bk ENG [0.00 to 2.55 / 0.57 /
3-619-04 Img Bias: Line Spd Vb Coef: Mid Speed: C ENG [0.00 to 2.55 / 0.87 /
3-619-04 Img Bias: Line Spd Vb Coef: Mid Speed: M ENG [0.00 to 2.55 / 0.85 /
3-619-04 Img Bias: Line Spd Vb Coef: Mid Speed: Y ENG [0.00 to 2.55 / 0.79 /
3-619-04 Img Bias: Line Spd Vb Offset: Mid Speed: Bk ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 264 /
3-619-04 Img Bias: Line Spd Vb Offset: Mid Speed: C ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 159 /
3-619-04 Img Bias: Line Spd Vb Offset: Mid Speed: M ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 141 /
3-619-04 Img Bias: Line Spd Vb Offset: Mid Speed: Y ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 196 /

SP3-XXX (Process)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
3-620-00 ProCon Target M/A Maximum M/A: Bk ENG [0.250 to 0.750 /
1 * 0.380 /
0.001mg/cm2/step]
3-620-00 ProCon Target M/A Maximum M/A: C ENG [0.250 to 0.750 /
2 * 0.370 /
0.001mg/cm2/step]
3-620-00 ProCon Target M/A Maximum M/A: M ENG [0.250 to 0.750 /
3 * 0.360 /
0.001mg/cm2/step]
3-620-00 ProCon Target M/A Maximum M/A: Y ENG [0.250 to 0.750 /
4 * 0.330 /
0.001mg/cm2/step]
3-620-05 ProCon Target M/A Maximum M/A: BW ENG [0.250 to 0.750 /
1 * 0.337 /
0.001mg/cm2/step]
3-622-00 Development Bk ENG [0 to 800 / 0 /
1 Potential: Display * 1V/step]
3-622-00 Development C ENG [0 to 800 / 0 /
3-622-00 Development M ENG [0 to 800 / 0 /
3-622-00 Development Y ENG [0 to 800 / 0 /
3-622-02 Development Bk: BW ENG [0 to 800 / 0 /
3-622-05 Development Upper Limit: Bk ENG [400 to 800 / 757 /
3-622-05 Development Upper Limit: C ENG [400 to 800 / 617 /
3-622-05 Development Upper Limit: M ENG [400 to 800 / 652 /
3-622-05 Development Upper Limit: Y ENG [400 to 800 / 632 /
3-622-06 Development Lower Limit: Bk ENG [0 to 400 / 250 /
3-622-06 Development Lower Limit: C ENG [0 to 400 / 250 /

SP3-XXX (Process)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
3-622-06 Development Lower Limit: M ENG [0 to 400 / 250 /
3-622-06 Development Lower Limit: Y ENG [0 to 400 / 250 /
3-623-00 LD Power: Set Standard Speed Slope: Bk ENG IM C300 series:
1 * [-1000 to 1000 / 186 /
1/step]
IM C400 series:
[-1000 to 1000 / 249 /
1/step]
3-623-00 LD Power: Set Standard Speed Slope: C ENG IM C300 series:
2 * [-1000 to 1000 / 186 /
1/step]
IM C400 series:
[-1000 to 1000 / 249 /
1/step]
3-623-00 LD Power: Set Standard Speed Slope: M ENG IM C300 series:
3 * [-1000 to 1000 / 186 /
1/step]
IM C400 series:
[-1000 to 1000 / 249 /
1/step]
3-623-00 LD Power: Set Standard Speed Slope: Y ENG IM C300 series:
4 * [-1000 to 1000 / 186 /
1/step]
IM C400 series:
[-1000 to 1000 / 249 /
1/step]
3-623-01 LD Power: Set Standard Speed Offset: Bk ENG IM C300 series:
1 * [-1000 to 1000 / 6 /
1/step]
IM C400 series:
[-1000 to 1000 / -22 /
1/step]
3-623-01 LD Power: Set Standard Speed Offset: C ENG IM C300 series:

SP3-XXX (Process)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
2 * [-1000 to 1000 / 8 /
1/step]
IM C400 series:
[-1000 to 1000 / -22 /
1/step]
3-623-01 LD Power: Set Standard Speed Offset: M ENG IM C300 series:
3 * [-1000 to 1000 / 8 /
1/step]
IM C400 series:
[-1000 to 1000 / -22 /
1/step]
3-623-01 LD Power: Set Standard Speed Offset: Y ENG IM C300 series:
4 * [-1000 to 1000 / 8 /
1/step]
IM C400 series:
[-1000 to 1000 / -22 /
1/step]
3-623-02 LD Power: Set Mid. Speed Slope: Bk ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 231 /
1 * 1/step]
3-623-02 LD Power: Set Mid. Speed Slope: C ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 231 /
2 * 1/step]
3-623-02 LD Power: Set Mid. Speed Slope: M ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 231 /
3 * 1/step]
3-623-02 LD Power: Set Mid. Speed Slope: Y ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 231 /
4 * 1/step]
3-623-03 LD Power: Set Mid. Speed Offset: Bk ENG [-1000 to 1000 / -14 /
1 * 1/step]
3-623-03 LD Power: Set Mid. Speed Offset: C ENG [-1000 to 1000 / -14 /
2 * 1/step]
3-623-03 LD Power: Set Mid. Speed Offset: M ENG [-1000 to 1000 / -14 /
3 * 1/step]
3-623-03 LD Power: Set Mid. Speed Offset: Y ENG [-1000 to 1000 / -14 /
4 * 1/step]
3-623-04 LD Power: Set Low Speed Slope: Bk ENG IM C300 series:
1 * [-1000 to 1000 / 144 /
1/step]

SP3-XXX (Process)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
IM C400 series:
[-1000 to 1000 / 154 /
1/step]
3-623-04 LD Power: Set Low Speed Slope: C ENG IM C300 series:
2 * [-1000 to 1000 / 144 /
1/step]
IM C400 series:
[-1000 to 1000 / 154 /
1/step]
3-623-04 LD Power: Set Low Speed Slope: M ENG IM C300 series:
3 * [-1000 to 1000 / 144 /
1/step]
IM C400 series:
[-1000 to 1000 / 154 /
1/step]
3-623-04 LD Power: Set Low Speed Slope: Y ENG IM C300 series:
4 * [-1000 to 1000 / 144 /
1/step]
IM C400 series:
[-1000 to 1000 / 154 /
1/step]
3-623-05 LD Power: Set Low Speed Offset: Bk ENG IM C300 series:
1 * [-1000 to 1000 / 26 /
1/step]
IM C400 series:
[-1000 to 1000 / 12 /
1/step]
3-623-05 LD Power: Set Low Speed Offset: C ENG IM C300 series:
2 * [-1000 to 1000 / 28 /
1/step]
IM C400 series:
[-1000 to 1000 / 12 /
1/step]
3-623-05 LD Power: Set Low Speed Offset: M ENG IM C300 series:
3 * [-1000 to 1000 / 28 /
1/step]

SP3-XXX (Process)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
IM C400 series:
[-1000 to 1000 / 12 /
1/step]
3-623-05 LD Power: Set Low Speed Offset: Y ENG IM C300 series:
4 * [-1000 to 1000 / 28 /
1/step]
IM C400 series:
[-1000 to 1000 / 12 /
1/step]
3-623-06 LD Power: Set Standard Speed 2 Slope: Bk ENG [-1000 to 1000 / 227 /
1 * 1/step]
3-623-07 LD Power: Set Standard Speed 2 Offset: Bk ENG [-1000 to 1000 / -3 /
1 * 1/step]
3-624-00 TC Adj. Mode: Set Target (Upper Limit) ENG [0.00 to 1.00 / 0.15 /
1 * 0.01mg/cm2/-kV/step
]
3-624-00 TC Adj. Mode: Set Target (Lower Limit) ENG [-1.00 to 0.00 / -0.10 /
]
3-624-00 TC Adj. Mode: Set Consume Counts (Upper ENG [0 to 16 / 16 /
7 Limit) * 1times/step]
3-624-02 TC Adj. Mode: Set Consump Pattern Duty:Bk ENG [0 to 15 / 15 / 1/step]
1 *
3-624-02 TC Adj. Mode: Set Consump Pattern Duty:C ENG [0 to 15 / 15 / 1/step]
2 *
3-624-02 TC Adj. Mode: Set Consump Pattern Duty:M ENG [0 to 15 / 15 / 1/step]
3 *
3-624-02 TC Adj. Mode: Set Consump Pattern Duty:Y ENG [0 to 15 / 15 / 1/step]
4 *
3-624-03 TC Adj. Mode: Set Max Adj. Counts:PowerON ENG [0 to 10 / 1 / 1/step]
1 *
3-624-03 TC Adj. Mode Max Counts:Job In ENG [0 to 10 / 0 / 1/step]
2 *
3-624-03 TC Adj. Mode Max Counts:Printing ENG [0 to 10 / 0 / 1/step]
3 *
3-624-03 TC Adj. Mode: Set Max Adj. Counts:Jobend ENG [0 to 10 / 0 / 1/step]

SP3-XXX (Process)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
4 *
3-624-03 TC Adj. Mode: Set Max Adj. Counts:ACC ENG [0 to 10 / 3 / 1/step]
5 *
3-624-03 TC Adj. Mode: Set Max Adj. Counts:Initialized ENG [0 to 10 / 3 / 1/step]
6 *
3-624-04 TC Adj. Mode: Set Max Adj. Counts:TE Check ENG [0 to 10 / 1 / 1/step]
0 *
3-624-05 TC Adj. Mode: Set Supply Gain(Bk) ENG [0.0 to 1.0 / 0.5 /
1 * 0.1/step]
3-624-05 TC Adj. Mode: Set Supply Gain(C) ENG [0.0 to 1.0 / 0.5 /
2 * 0.1/step]
3-624-05 TC Adj. Mode: Set Supply Gain(M) ENG [0.0 to 1.0 / 0.5 /
3 * 0.1/step]
3-624-05 TC Adj. Mode: Set Supply Gain(Y) ENG [0.0 to 1.0 / 0.5 /
4 * 0.1/step]
3-624-06 TC Adj. Mode: Set Consump Gain(Bk) ENG [0.0 to 1.0 / 0.5 /
1 * 0.1/step]
3-624-06 TC Adj. Mode: Set Consump Gain(C) ENG [0.0 to 1.0 / 0.5 /
2 * 0.1/step]
3-624-06 TC Adj. Mode: Set Consump Gain(M) ENG [0.0 to 1.0 / 0.5 /
3 * 0.1/step]
3-624-06 TC Adj. Mode: Set Consump Gain(Y) ENG [0.0 to 1.0 / 0.5 /
4 * 0.1/step]
3-627-00 ID Pattern Extraction: Edge Detection Threshold: ENG [0.0 to 5.0 / 2.5 /
1 Set Bk * 0.1V/step]
3-627-00 ID Pattern Extraction: Edge Detection Threshold: C ENG [0.0 to 5.0 / 2.5 /
2 Set * 0.1V/step]
3-627-00 ID Pattern Extraction: Edge Detection Threshold: M ENG [0.0 to 5.0 / 2.5 /
3 Set * 0.1V/step]
3-627-00 ID Pattern Extraction: Edge Detection Threshold: Y ENG [0.0 to 5.0 / 2.5 /
4 Set * 0.1V/step]
3-627-01 ID Pattern Extraction: Edge Upper Limit ENG IM C300 series: [0 to
1 Set * 255 / 34 /
1point/step]
255 / 24 /

SP3-XXX (Process)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
1point/step]
3-627-01 ID Pattern Extraction: Edge Upper Limit: Std Speed ENG [0 to 255 / 22 /
2 Set 2 * 1point/step]
3-627-02 ID Pattern Extraction: Edge Lower Limit ENG IM C300 series: [0 to
1 Set * 255 / 14 /
1point/step]
255 / 10 /
1point/step]
3-627-02 ID Pattern Extraction: Edge Lower Limit: Std Speed ENG [0 to 255 / 9 /
2 Set 2 * 1point/step]
3-627-03 ID Pattern Extraction: Vsg Upper Threshold ENG [0.000 to 5.000 /
1 Set * 4.800 / 0.001V/step]
3-627-04 ID Pattern Extraction: Vsg Lower Threshold ENG [0.000 to 5.000 /
1 Set * 3.000 / 0.001V/step]
3-628-00 ID Pattern Timing: Set Scan: YMCK ENG [-500.0 to 500.0 / 0.0
1 * / 0.1mm/step]
3-628-00 ID Pattern Timing: Set Detection Delay Time ENG [0 to 2500 / 0 /
2 * 1msec/step]
3-628-00 ID Pattern Timing: Set Delay Time ENG IM C300 series: [0 to
3 * 2500 / 701 /
1msec/step]
2500 / 592 /
1msec/step]
3-628-00 ID Pattern Timing: Set MUSIC Delay Time ENG [-2500 to 2500 / 150 /
4 * 1msec/step]
3-628-00 ID Pattern Timing: Set Delay Time: Std Speed 2 ENG [0 to 2500 / 569 /
5 * 1msec/step]
3-630-00 Dev gamma: Disp/Set Current:Bk ENG [0.10 to 6.00 / 0.80 /
]
3-630-00 Dev gamma: Disp/Set Current:C ENG [0.10 to 6.00 / 0.75 /
]
3-630-00 Dev gamma: Disp/Set Current:M ENG [0.10 to 6.00 / 0.75 /

SP3-XXX (Process)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
]
3-630-00 Dev gamma: Disp/Set Current:Y ENG [0.10 to 6.00 / 0.75 /
]
3-630-01 Dev gamma: Disp/Set Target:Bk ENG [0.50 to 2.55 / 0.80 /
]
3-630-01 Dev gamma: Disp/Set Target:C ENG [0.50 to 2.55 / 0.75 /
]
3-630-01 Dev gamma: Disp/Set Target:M ENG [0.50 to 2.55 / 0.75 /
]
3-630-01 Dev gamma: Disp/Set Target:Y ENG [0.50 to 2.55 / 0.75 /
]
3-630-06 Dev gamma: Disp/Set Toner Density: Bk ENG [0.0 to 25.5 / 0.0 /
1 * 0.1wt%/step]
3-630-06 Dev gamma: Disp/Set Toner Density: C ENG [0.0 to 25.5 / 0.0 /
2 * 0.1wt%/step]
3-630-06 Dev gamma: Disp/Set Toner Density: M ENG [0.0 to 25.5 / 0.0 /
3 * 0.1wt%/step]
3-630-06 Dev gamma: Disp/Set Toner Density: Y ENG [0.0 to 25.5 / 0.0 /
4 * 0.1wt%/step]
3-631-00 Development Start Bk ENG [-300 to 300 / 0 /
1 Vk :Display * 1-V/step]
3-631-00 Development Start C ENG [-300 to 300 / 0 /
3-631-00 Development Start M ENG [-300 to 300 / 0 /
3-631-00 Development Start Y ENG [-300 to 300 / 0 /
3-700-00 New Unit Detection ON/OFF Setting ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
1 *
3-701-00 Manual New Unit Set # PCU:Bk ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]

SP3-XXX (Process)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
2 *
3-701-00 Manual New Unit Set # Dev Unit:Bk ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
3 *
3-701-02 Manual New Unit Set # PCU:C ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
5 *
3-701-02 Manual New Unit Set # Dev Unit:C ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
6 *
3-701-04 Manual New Unit Set # PCU:M ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
8 *
3-701-04 Manual New Unit Set # Dev Unit:M ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
9 *
3-701-07 Manual New Unit Set # PCU:Y ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1 *
3-701-07 Manual New Unit Set # Dev Unit:Y ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
2 *
3-701-09 Manual New Unit Set # ITB Unit ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
3 *
3-701-10 Manual New Unit Set # ITB Cleaning Unit ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
2 *
3-701-10 Manual New Unit Set # PTR Unit ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
9 *
3-701-11 Manual New Unit Set # Fusing Unit ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
5 *
3-701-11 Manual New Unit Set Fusing Sleeve ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
6 *
3-701-11 Manual New Unit Set Pressure Roller ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
8 *
3-701-14 Manual New Unit Set #Waste Toner Bottle ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
2 *
3-701-14 Manual New Unit Set Tray1 Roller Assembly ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
5 *
3-701-14 Manual New Unit Set #IMC300:PaperFeedRoller:T ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
7 ray1 *
3-701-14 Manual New Unit Set #IMC300:FrictionPad:Tray1 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
8 *
3-701-14 Manual New Unit Set Tray 2 Roller Assembly ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]

SP3-XXX (Process)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
9 *
3-701-15 Manual New Unit Set #Paper Feed Roller:Tray 2 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0 *
3-701-15 Manual New Unit Set #Friction Pad:Bank 2 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1 *
2 *
3 *
4 *
5 *
6 *
7 *
3-701-15 Manual New Unit Set #IMC400:Pick-upRoller:Tray ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
8 1 *
3-701-15 Manual New Unit Set #IMC400:FeedingRoller:Tray ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
9 1 *
3-701-16 Manual New Unit Set #IMC400:SeparationRoller:Tr ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0 ay1 *
3-701-16 Manual New Unit Set #Feed Roller:Bypass ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
9 *
3-701-20 Manual New Unit Set DF Friction Pad ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
6 *
3-701-20 Manual New Unit Set DF Pickup Roller ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
7 *
3-701-20 Manual New Unit Set DF Feed Roller ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
8 *
3-701-22 Manual New Unit Set Toner Sub Hopper:Bk ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0 *
3-701-22 Manual New Unit Set Toner Sub Hopper:C ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1 *
3-701-22 Manual New Unit Set Toner Sub Hopper:M ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]

SP3-XXX (Process)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
2 *
3-701-22 Manual New Unit Set Toner Sub Hopper:Y ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
3 *
3-710-00 mu Concentration Control Method: Selection ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
1 Control: Set * 0: Not Use
1: Use
3-800-00 Waste Toner Full Condition ENG [0 to 4 / 0 / 1/step]
1 Detection *
3-800-00 Waste Toner Full Print Page After Near Full ENG [0 to 10000 / 0 /
2 Detection * 1sheets/step]
3-800-00 Waste Toner Full Volume Count 1 After Near ENG [0.0 to 100000.0 / 0.0
3 Detection Full * / 0.1/step]
3-800-00 Waste Toner Full Volume Count 2 After Near ENG [0.0 to 1000000.0 /
5 Detection Full * 0.0 / 0.1/step]
3-800-00 Waste Toner Full Volume Count After ENG [0.0 to 1000000.0 /
7 Detection Replacement * 0.0 / 0.1/step]
3-800-01 Waste Toner Full Remaining days Threshold ENG [0 to 255 / 15 /
2 Detection * 1/step]
3-800-02 Waste Toner Full Mechanical Full Detection ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0 Detection Date *
3-810-00 Paper Interval Ext.: Formula: Slope ENG [0 to 100 / 10 /
1 Low Spd * 1%/step]
3-810-00 Paper Interval Ext.: Formula: Intercept ENG [-2000 to 2000 / 0 /
3-810-00 Paper Interval Ext.: Formula: Upper Limit ENG [100 to 2000 / 100 /

SP4-XXX (Scanner)
3.6 SP4-XXX (SCANNER)
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to Max/Init./Step]
CTL
4-008-001 Sub Scan ENG* [-1.0 to 1.0 / 0.0 /
Magnification Adj. 0.1%/step]
4-010-001 Sub Scan ENG* [-1.0 to 1.0 / 0.0 /
Registration Adj. 0.1mm/step]
4-011-001 Main Scan ENG* [-2.0 to 2.0 / 0.0 /
Registration Adj. 0.1mm/step]
4-012-001 Scanner Erase Book: Sub Scan Leading ENG* [0.0 to 3.0 / 1.0 /
Margin: Scale Edge (Left) 0.1mm/step]
4-012-002 Scanner Erase Book: Sub Scan Trailing ENG* [0.0 to 3.0 / 1.0 /
Margin: Scale Edge (Right) 0.1mm/step]
4-012-003 Scanner Erase Book: Main Scan ENG* [0.0 to 3.0 / 1.0 /
Margin: Scale Leading Edge (Rear) 0.1mm/step]
4-012-004 Scanner Erase Book: Main Scan Trailing ENG* [0.0 to 3.0 / 1.0 /
Margin: Scale Edge (Front) 0.1mm/step]
4-013-001 Scanner Free Run Lamp OFF ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
4-013-002 Scanner Free Run Lamp ON ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
4-014-001 Scan HP Detection Enable ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
4-014-002 Scan HP Detection Disable ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
4-014-003 Scan HP Detec. On (FC ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
600dpi LG)
4-014-004 Scan HP Detec. On (BW ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
600dpi LG)
4-014-005 Scan HP Detec. On (FC ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1200dpi LG)
4-016-001 DF Scan FC 600 x 300dpi Duplex ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1STEP/step]
Mode
4-016-002 DF Scan Bk 600 x 300dpi Duplex ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1STEP/step]
Mode
4-016-003 DF Scan FC 600 x 600dpi Duplex ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1STEP/step]
Mode
Mode
Mode

SP4-XXX (Scanner)

CTL
4-016-006 DF Scan FC 600 x 300dpi Simplex ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1STEP/step]
Mode
4-016-007 DF Scan Bk 600 x 300dpi Simplex ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1STEP/step]
Mode
4-016-008 DF Scan FC 600 x 600dpi Simplex ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1STEP/step]
Mode
Mode
Mode
4-020-001 Dust Check Dust Detect:On/Off ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
4-020-002 Dust Check Dust Detect:Lvl ENG [0 to 8 / 4 / 1/step]
4-020-003 Dust Check Dust Reject:Lvl ENG [0 to 4 / 0 / 1/step]
4-020-011 DF Dust Check Dust Detect Level:Rear ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
4-020-012 DF Dust Check Correction Level:Rear ENG [0 to 8 / 4 / 1/step]
Margin Edge (Left) 0.1mm/step]
Margin Edge (Right) 0.1mm/step]
4-400-003 Scanner Erase Book: Main Scan ENG* [0.0 to 3.0 / 1.0 /
Margin Leading Edge (Rear) 0.1mm/step]
4-400-004 Scanner Erase Book: Main Scan Trailing ENG* [0.0 to 3.0 / 1.0 /
Margin Edge (Front) 0.1mm/step]
4-400-005 Original Erase ADF:Sub:L-Edge ENG* [0.0 to 3.0 / 1.6 /
Margin 0.1mm/step]
4-400-007 Original Erase ADF:Main:Edge ENG* [0.0 to 3.0 / 1.6 /
Margin 0.1mm/step]
4-400-008 Original Erase ADF:Main:T-Edge ENG* [0.0 to 3.0 / 1.6 /
Margin 0.1mm/step]
4-417-001 IPU Test Pattern Test Pattern ENG [0 to 11 / 0 / 1/step]
0: Scanned image
1: Gradation main scan
A
2: Patch 16C
3: Grid pattern A
4: Slant grid pattern B
5: Slant grid pattern C

SP4-XXX (Scanner)

CTL
6: Slant grid pattern D
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
7: Scanned+Slant Grid
C
D
B
10: 5C
Checkered1:A3/A4 LEF
C
11: 5C Checkered2:A4
SEF C
4-429-001 Select Copy Data Copying ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1/step]
Security
4-429-002 Select Copy Data Scanning ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1/step]
Security
4-429-003 Select Copy Data Fax Operation ENG [0 to 3 / 3 / 1/step]
Security
4-460-001 Digital AE Low Limit Value ENG [0 to 1023 / 364 / 1/step]
4-460-002 Digital AE Background level ENG [512 to 1535 / 932 /
1/step]
4-482-001 Scanner ACC: Read New Chart ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
Rear
4-482-002 Scanner ACC: Recall Prev Chart ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
Rear
4-482-003 Scanner ACC: Error code ENG [0 to 15 / 0 / 1/step]
Rear
4-483-001 Scanner ACC: Collect ON / OFF ENG* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
Rear: Setting
4-501-001 ACC Target Den Copy:K:Text ENG* [0 to 10 / 0 / 1/step]
4-501-002 ACC Target Den Copy:C:Text ENG* [0 to 10 / 0 / 1/step]
4-501-003 ACC Target Den Copy:M:Text ENG* [0 to 10 / 0 / 1/step]
4-501-004 ACC Target Den Copy:Y:Text ENG* [0 to 10 / 0 / 1/step]
4-501-005 ACC Target Den Copy:K:Photo ENG* [0 to 10 / 0 / 1/step]
4-501-006 ACC Target Den Copy:C:Photo ENG* [0 to 10 / 0 / 1/step]
4-501-007 ACC Target Den Copy:M:Photo ENG* [0 to 10 / 0 / 1/step]
4-501-008 ACC Target Den Copy:Y:Photo ENG* [0 to 10 / 0 / 1/step]

SP4-XXX (Scanner)

CTL
4-505-001 ACC Cor:Bright Master:K ENG [-128 to 127 / 0 / 1/step]
4-505-002 ACC Cor:Bright Master:C ENG [-128 to 127 / 0 / 1/step]
4-505-003 ACC Cor:Bright Master:M ENG [-128 to 127 / 0 / 1/step]
4-505-004 ACC Cor:Bright Master:Y ENG [-128 to 127 / 0 / 1/step]
4-505-005 ACC Cor:Bright Slave:K ENG [-128 to 127 / 0 / 1/step]
4-505-006 ACC Cor:Bright Slave:C ENG [-128 to 127 / 0 / 1/step]
4-505-007 ACC Cor:Bright Slave:M ENG [-128 to 127 / 0 / 1/step]
4-505-008 ACC Cor:Bright Slave:Y ENG [-128 to 127 / 0 / 1/step]
4-506-001 ACC Cor:Dark Master:K ENG [-128 to 127 / 0 / 1/step]
4-506-002 ACC Cor:Dark Master:C ENG [-128 to 127 / 0 / 1/step]
4-506-003 ACC Cor:Dark Master:M ENG [-128 to 127 / 0 / 1/step]
4-506-004 ACC Cor:Dark Master:Y ENG [-128 to 127 / 0 / 1/step]
4-506-005 ACC Cor:Dark Slave:K ENG [-128 to 127 / 0 / 1/step]
4-506-006 ACC Cor:Dark Slave:C ENG [-128 to 127 / 0 / 1/step]
4-506-007 ACC Cor:Dark Slave:M ENG [-128 to 127 / 0 / 1/step]
4-506-008 ACC Cor:Dark Slave:Y ENG [-128 to 127 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-001 Print Coverage RY Phase: Option ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-002 Print Coverage RY Phase: R ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-003 Print Coverage RY Phase: G ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-004 Print Coverage RY Phase: B ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-005 Print Coverage YR Phase: Option ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-006 Print Coverage YR Phase: R ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-007 Print Coverage YR Phase: G ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-008 Print Coverage YR Phase: B ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-009 Print Coverage YG Phase: Option ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-010 Print Coverage YG Phase: R ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-011 Print Coverage YG Phase: G ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-012 Print Coverage YG Phase: B ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-013 Print Coverage GY Phase: Option ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-014 Print Coverage GY Phase: R ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-015 Print Coverage GY Phase: G ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-016 Print Coverage GY Phase: B ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-017 Print Coverage GC Phase: Option ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-018 Print Coverage GC Phase: R ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-019 Print Coverage GC Phase: G ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-020 Print Coverage GC Phase: B ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]

SP4-XXX (Scanner)

CTL
4-540-021 Print Coverage CG Phase: Option ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
4-540-022 Print Coverage CG Phase: R ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-023 Print Coverage CG Phase: G ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-024 Print Coverage CG Phase: B ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-025 Print Coverage CB Phase: Option ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-026 Print Coverage CB Phase: R ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-027 Print Coverage CB Phase: G ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-028 Print Coverage CB Phase: B ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-029 Print Coverage BC Phase: Option ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-030 Print Coverage BC Phase: R ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-031 Print Coverage BC Phase: G ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-032 Print Coverage BC Phase: B ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-033 Print Coverage BM Phase: Option ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-034 Print Coverage BM Phase: R ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-035 Print Coverage BM Phase: G ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-036 Print Coverage BM Phase: B ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-037 Print Coverage MB Phase: Option ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-038 Print Coverage MB Phase: R ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-039 Print Coverage MB Phase: G ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-040 Print Coverage MB Phase: B ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-041 Print Coverage MR Phase: Option ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-042 Print Coverage MR Phase: R ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-043 Print Coverage MR Phase: G ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-044 Print Coverage MR Phase: B ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-045 Print Coverage RM Phase: Option ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-046 Print Coverage RM Phase: R ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-047 Print Coverage RM Phase: G ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-048 Print Coverage RM Phase: B ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-049 Print Coverage WHITE: Option ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-050 Print Coverage WHITE:R ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-051 Print Coverage WHITE:G ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-052 Print Coverage WHITE:B ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-053 Print Coverage BLACK: Option ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-054 Print Coverage BLACK:R ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-055 Print Coverage BLACK:G ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-540-056 Print Coverage BLACK:B ENG [-256 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]

SP4-XXX (Scanner)

CTL
4-541-001 Photo Correction Copied Photo ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
4-550-005 Scan Apli:Txt/Print MTF: 0(Off) 1-15 ENG [0 to 15 / 8 / 1/step]
(Weak-Strong)
4-550-006 Scan Apli:Txt/Print Smoothing: 0(x1) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7 / 4 / 1/step]
(Weak-Strong)
4-550-007 Scan Apli:Txt/Print Brightness: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]
4-550-008 Scan Apli:Txt/Print Contrast: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]
4-550-009 Scan Apli:Txt/Print Ind Dot Erase: 0(Off) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1/step]
(Weak-Strong)
4-551-005 Scan Apli:Txt MTF: 0(Off) 1-15 ENG [0 to 15 / 8 / 1/step]
(Weak-Strong)
4-551-006 Scan Apli:Txt Smoothing: 0(x1) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7 / 4 / 1/step]
(Weak-Strong)
4-551-007 Scan Apli:Txt Brightness: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]
4-551-008 Scan Apli:Txt Contrast: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]
4-551-009 Scan Apli:Txt Ind Dot Erase: 0(Off) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1/step]
(Weak-Strong)
4-552-005 Scan Apli:Txt MTF: 0(Off) 1-15 ENG [0 to 15 / 8 / 1/step]
Dropout (Weak-Strong)
4-552-006 Scan Apli:Txt Smoothing: 0(x1) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7 / 4 / 1/step]
4-552-007 Scan Apli:Txt Brightness: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]
Dropout
4-552-008 Scan Apli:Txt Contrast: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]
Dropout
4-552-009 Scan Apli:Txt Ind Dot Erase: 0(Off) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1/step]
4-553-005 Scan Apli:Txt/Photo MTF: 0(Off) 1-15 ENG [0 to 15 / 8 / 1/step]
(Weak-Strong)
4-553-006 Scan Apli:Txt/Photo Smoothing: 0(x1) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7 / 4 / 1/step]
(Weak-Strong)
4-553-007 Scan Apli:Txt/Photo Brightness: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]
4-553-008 Scan Apli:Txt/Photo Contrast: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]
4-553-009 Scan Apli:Txt/Photo Ind Dot Erase: 0(Off) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1/step]
(Weak-Strong)
4-554-005 Scan Apli:Photo MTF: 0(Off) 1-15 ENG [0 to 15 / 8 / 1/step]
(Weak-Strong)

SP4-XXX (Scanner)

CTL
4-554-006 Scan Apli:Photo Smoothing: 0(x1) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7 / 4 / 1/step]
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
(Weak-Strong)
4-554-007 Scan Apli:Photo Brightness: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]
4-554-008 Scan Apli:Photo Contrast: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]
4-554-009 Scan Apli:Photo Ind Dot Erase: 0(Off) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1/step]
(Weak-Strong)
4-565-005 Scan MTF: 0(Off) 1-15 ENG [0 to 15 / 8 / 1/step]
Apli:GrayScale (Weak-Strong)
4-565-006 Scan Smoothing: 0(x1) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7 / 4 / 1/step]
4-565-007 Scan Brightness: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]
Apli:GrayScale
4-565-008 Scan Contrast: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]
Apli:GrayScale
4-565-009 Scan Ind Dot Erase: 0(Off) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1/step]
4-570-005 Scan Apli:Col MTF: 0(Off) 1-15 ENG [0 to 15 / 8 / 1/step]
Txt/Photo (Weak-Strong)
4-570-006 Scan Apli:Col Smoothing: 0(x1) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7 / 4 / 1/step]
4-570-007 Scan Apli:Col Brightness: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]
Txt/Photo
4-570-008 Scan Apli:Col Contrast: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]
Txt/Photo
4-570-009 Scan Apli:Col Ind Dot Erase: 0(Off) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1/step]
4-571-005 Scan Apli:Col MTF: 0(Off) 1-15 ENG [0 to 15 / 8 / 1/step]
Gloss Photo (Weak-Strong)
4-571-006 Scan Apli:Col Smoothing: 0(x1) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7 / 4 / 1/step]
4-571-007 Scan Apli:Col Brightness: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]
Gloss Photo
4-571-008 Scan Apli:Col Contrast: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]
Gloss Photo
4-571-009 Scan Apli:Col Ind Dot Erase: 0(Off) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1/step]
4-572-005 Scan Apli:AutoCol MTF: 0(Off) 1-15 ENG [0 to 15 / 8 / 1/step]

SP4-XXX (Scanner)

CTL
(Weak-Strong)
4-572-006 Scan Apli:AutoCol Smoothing: 0(x1) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7 / 4 / 1/step]
(Weak-Strong)
4-572-007 Scan Apli:AutoCol Brightness: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]
4-572-008 Scan Apli:AutoCol Contrast: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]
4-572-009 Scan Apli:AutoCol Ind Dot Erase: 0(Off) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1/step]
(Weak-Strong)
4-573-005 Scan Apli:Shiny MTF: 0(Off) 1-15 ENG [0 to 15 / 8 / 1/step]
Materials (Weak-Strong)
4-573-006 Scan Apli:Shiny Smoothing: 0(x1) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7 / 4 / 1/step]
4-573-007 Scan Apli:Shiny Brightness: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]
Materials
4-573-008 Scan Apli:Shiny Contrast: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]
Materials
4-573-009 Scan Apli:Shiny Ind Dot Erase: 0(Off) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1/step]
4-580-005 Fax Apli:Txt/Chart MTF: 0(Off) 1-15 ENG [0 to 15 / 8 / 1/step]
(Weak-Strong)
4-580-006 Fax Apli:Txt/Chart Smoothing: 0(x1) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7 / 4 / 1/step]
(Weak-Strong)
4-580-007 Fax Apli:Txt/Chart Brightness: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]
4-580-008 Fax Apli:Txt/Chart Contrast: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]
4-580-009 Fax Apli:Txt/Chart Ind Dot Erase: 0(Off) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1/step]
(Weak-Strong)
4-580-010 Fax Apli:Txt/Chart Texture Erase: 0 ENG [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
4-581-005 Fax Apli:Txt MTF: 0(Off) 1-15 ENG [0 to 15 / 8 / 1/step]
(Weak-Strong)
4-581-006 Fax Apli:Txt Smoothing: 0(x1) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7 / 4 / 1/step]
(Weak-Strong)
4-581-007 Fax Apli:Txt Brightness: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]
4-581-008 Fax Apli:Txt Contrast: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]
4-581-009 Fax Apli:Txt Ind Dot Erase: 0(Off) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1/step]
(Weak-Strong)
4-582-005 Fax Apli:Txt/Photo MTF: 0(Off) 1-15 ENG [0 to 15 / 8 / 1/step]
(Weak-Strong)
4-582-006 Fax Apli:Txt/Photo Smoothing: 0(x1) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7 / 4 / 1/step]

SP4-XXX (Scanner)

CTL
(Weak-Strong)
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
4-582-007 Fax Apli:Txt/Photo Brightness: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]
4-582-008 Fax Apli:Txt/Photo Contrast: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]
4-582-009 Fax Apli:Txt/Photo Ind Dot Erase: 0(Off) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1/step]
(Weak-Strong)
4-582-010 Fax Apli:Txt/Photo Texture Erase: 0 ENG [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
4-583-005 Fax Apli:Photo MTF: 0(Off) 1-15 ENG [0 to 15 / 8 / 1/step]
(Weak-Strong)
4-583-006 Fax Apli:Photo Smoothing: 0(x1) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7 / 4 / 1/step]
(Weak-Strong)
4-583-007 Fax Apli:Photo Brightness: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]
4-583-008 Fax Apli:Photo Contrast: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]
4-583-009 Fax Apli:Photo Ind Dot Erase: 0(Off) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1/step]
(Weak-Strong)
4-583-010 Fax Apli:Photo Texture Erase: 0 ENG [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
4-584-005 Fax Apli:Original 1 MTF: 0(Off) 1-15 ENG [0 to 15 / 8 / 1/step]
(Weak-Strong)
4-584-006 Fax Apli:Original 1 Smoothing: 0(x1) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7 / 4 / 1/step]
(Weak-Strong)
4-584-007 Fax Apli:Original 1 Brightness: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]
4-584-008 Fax Apli:Original 1 Contrast: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]
4-584-009 Fax Apli:Original 1 Ind Dot Erase: 0(Off) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1/step]
(Weak-Strong)
4-585-005 Fax Apli:Original 2 MTF: 0(Off) 1-15 ENG [0 to 15 / 8 / 1/step]
(Weak-Strong)
4-585-006 Fax Apli:Original 2 Smoothing: 0(x1) 1-7 ENG [0 to 7 / 4 / 1/step]
(Weak-Strong)
4-585-007 Fax Apli:Original 2 Brightness: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]
4-585-008 Fax Apli:Original 2 Contrast: 1-255 ENG [1 to 255 / 128 / 1/step]
4-585-009 Fax Apli:Original 2 Independent Dot Erase ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1/step]
(0)/ 1-7 (Strong)
4-600-001 SCN Version SCN ID ENG [0x00 to 0xFF / 0 /
Display 1/step]
4-605-001 Abnormal Analysis HP Detection Enable ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
Operation
4-605-002 Abnormal Analysis HP Detection Disable ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
Operation

SP4-XXX (Scanner)

CTL
4-609-001 Gray Balance Set: Book Scan ENG* [-384 to 255 / -100 /
R 1digit/step]
4-609-002 Gray Balance Set: DF Scan ENG* [-384 to 255 / -100 /
R 1digit/step]
G 1digit/step]
G 1digit/step]
B 1digit/step]
B 1digit/step]
4-635-001 SSCG Correction Mode Selection ENG* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
Set
4-645-001 Abnormal Error Md ENG [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1/step]
Flag
4-645-002 Abnormal Error Power System ENG [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1/step]
Flag
4-645-003 Abnormal Error Image ENG [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1/step]
Flag
4-646-001 Scan Adjust Error White level ENG* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1/step]
4-646-002 Scan Adjust Error Black level ENG* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1/step]
4-646-003 Scan Adjust Error SSCG Correction ENG* [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1/step]
4-647-001 Scanner Hard Error ENG [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1/step]
4-648-001 Scannar Adjust Adjust Mode ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
Select
4-688-001 DF Density ARDF ENG* [80 to 120 / 100 /
Adjustment 1%/step]
4-688-002 DF Density 1-Pass ENG* [80 to 120 / 100 /
Adjustment 1%/step]
4-699-001 SBU Test Pattern ENG [0 to 3 / 0 / 1/step]
Change
4-703-001 Scan Mode Copying ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
Selection
4-703-002 Scan Mode Scanning ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
Selection
4-712-001 CIS GB Adj. Value: ENG* [-384 to 255 / -89 /

SP4-XXX (Scanner)

CTL
R 1digit/step]
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
G 1digit/step]
B 1digit/step]
4-723-001 OUTPUT Check Scanner Lamp: Color ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
4-745-001 CIS Scan Adjust White level ENG [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1/step]
Error
4-745-002 CIS Scan Adjust Black level ENG [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1/step]
Error
4-746-001 CIS GB Adj Error ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1/step]
Flag
4-747-001 CIS Scanner Hard Power-ON ENG [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1/step]
Error
4-785-001 CIS White Level Color ENG* [0 to 1024 / 707 /
Peak Target 1digit/step]
4-796-001 Low Density Color Front Side ENG* [0 to 3 / 0 / 1/step]
Correction 0: OFF
1: WEAK
2: MEDIUM
3: STRONG
4-796-002 Low Density Color Rear Side ENG* [0 to 3 / 0 / 1/step]
Correction 0: OFF
1: WEAK
2: MEDIUM
3: STRONG
4-797-001 Rear Side: Digital Low Limit Setting ENG [0 to 1023 / 364 / 1/step]
AE
4-797-002 Rear Side: Digital Background Erase Level ENG [512 to 1535 / 932 /
AE 1/step]
4-799-001 CIS Test Pattern ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
Change
4-802-001 DF Shading Lamp OFF ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
FreeRun
4-802-002 DF Shading Lamp ON ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
FreeRun
4-803-001 Home Position Adj. ENG* [-1.5 to 1.0 / 0.0 /

SP4-XXX (Scanner)

CTL
0.1mm/step]
4-804-001 Home Position ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
Operation
4-806-001 Carriage Retract ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
Operation
4-902-001 Disp ACC Data ditect patch(up)1 ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-902-021 Disp ACC Data K patch (text)1 ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-902-041 Disp ACC Data C patch (text)1 ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-902-061 Disp ACC Data M patch (text)1 ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]

SP4-XXX (Scanner)

CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
4-902-081 Disp ACC Data Y patch (text)1 ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-902-101 Disp ACC Data K patch (photo)1 ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-902-121 Disp ACC Data C patch (photo)1 ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-902-141 Disp ACC Data M patch (photo)1 ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-902-161 Disp ACC Data Y patch (photo)1 ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
4-902-181 Disp ACC Data ditectpatch down1 ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]

SP4-XXX (Scanner)

CTL
4-903-001 Filter Setting Ind Dot Erase: Text ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1/step]
4-903-002 Filter Setting Ind Dot Erase: ENG [0 to 7 / 0 / 1/step]
Generation Copy
4-905-001 Select Gradation ENG [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
Level
4-907-001 Gamma Correction Stamp Entry ENG [0 to 2 / 1 / 1/step]
4-918-009 Man Gamma Adj ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
4-930-001 Coverage Ctrl: Text Copy: Full Color 1 ENG [0 to 400 / 200 / 1/step]
4-930-002 Coverage Ctrl: Text Copy: Full Color 2 ENG [0 to 400 / 200 / 1/step]
4-930-003 Coverage Ctrl: Text Copy: Single Color ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 1/step]
4-930-004 Coverage Ctrl: Text Copy: Color Conversion ENG [0 to 400 / 180 / 1/step]
4-930-005 Coverage Ctrl: Text Coverage Ctrl OFF ENG [0 to 400 / 400 / 1/step]
4-931-001 Coverage Ctrl: Copy: Full Color 1 ENG [0 to 400 / 240 / 1/step]
Photo
4-931-002 Coverage Ctrl: Copy: Full Color 2 ENG [0 to 400 / 260 / 1/step]
Photo
4-931-003 Coverage Ctrl: Copy: Single Color ENG [0 to 400 / 100 / 1/step]
Photo
4-931-004 Coverage Ctrl: Copy: Color Conversion ENG [0 to 400 / 200 / 1/step]
Photo
4-931-005 Coverage Ctrl: Coverage Ctrl OFF ENG [0 to 400 / 400 / 1/step]
Photo
4-938-001 ACS:Edge Mask Copy:Sub LEdge ENG [0 to 31 / 15 / 1mm/step]
4-938-002 ACS:Edge Mask Copy:Sub TEdge ENG [0 to 31 / 10 / 1mm/step]
4-938-003 ACS:Edge Mask Copy:Main LEdge ENG [0 to 31 / 10 / 1mm/step]
4-938-004 ACS:Edge Mask Copy:Main TEdge ENG [0 to 31 / 10 / 1mm/step]
4-938-005 ACS:Edge Mask Scan:Sub LEdge ENG [0 to 31 / 15 / 1mm/step]
4-938-006 ACS:Edge Mask Scan:Sub TEdge ENG [0 to 31 / 15 / 1mm/step]
4-938-007 ACS:Edge Mask Scan:Main LEdge ENG [0 to 31 / 15 / 1mm/step]
4-938-008 ACS:Edge Mask Scan:Main TEdge ENG [0 to 31 / 15 / 1mm/step]
4-939-001 ACS:Color Range ENG [-2 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]

SP4-XXX (Scanner)

CTL
4-950-001 ACC Position Error ENG [0 to 65535 / 0 / 1/step]
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
Count
4-993-001 High Light Sensitivity Selection ENG [0 to 9 / 4 / 1/step]
Correction
4-993-002 High Light Range Selection ENG [0 to 9 / 4 / 1/step]
Correction
4-994-001 Adj Txt/Photo High Compression PDF ENG [0 to 2 / 1 / 1/step]
Recog Level
4-996-001 White Paper strength(fax) ENG [0 to 6 / 3 / 1/step]
Detection Level
4-997-001 White Paper count conditions 1 ENG [0 to 255 / 255 / 1/step]
conditions
conditions
conditions
4-997-004 White Paper count conditions 4 ENG [0 to 16777215 /
conditions 16777215 / 1/step]
4-998-001 White Paper Binary strength 0:up side ENG [0 to 255 / 26 / 1/step]
thresh
thresh
thresh
thresh
thresh
thresh
thresh
4-998-008 White Paper Binary strength 0:down side ENG [0 to 255 / 29 / 1/step]
thresh
thresh

SP4-XXX (Scanner)

CTL
thresh
thresh
thresh
thresh
thresh

SP5-XXX (Mode)
3.7 SP5-XXX (MODE)
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
5-009-20 Add display language 1-8 CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 /
1 1/step]
2 1/step]
3 1/step]
4 1/step]
5 1/step]
6 1/step]
7 1/step]
5-024-00 mm/inch Display Selection 0:mm 1:inch CTL* [0 to 1 / * / 1/step]
1 NA: 1
Other than NA: 0
5-045-00 Accounting counter Counter Method CTL* [0 to 7 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-047-00 Paper Display Backing Paper CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-051-00 TonerRefillDetectionDispla CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1 y
5-055-00 Display IP address CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-061-10 Toner Remaining Window CTL* [0 to 255 / 3 /
1 Display Change 1/step]
5-062-00 Part Replacement Alert #PCU:Bk CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
2 Display 0: No Display
1: Display
5-062-02 Part Replacement Alert #PCU:C CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1: Display

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
5-062-04 Part Replacement Alert #PCU:M CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1: Display
5-062-07 Part Replacement Alert #PCU:Y CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1: Display
5-062-09 Part Replacement Alert #Image Transfer Belt Unit CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1: Display
5-062-10 Part Replacement Alert #Paper Transfer Roller CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
9 Display Unit 0: No Display
1: Display
5-062-11 Part Replacement Alert #Fusing Unit CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1: Display
5-062-11 Part Replacement Alert Fusing Sleeve CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1: Display
5-062-11 Part Replacement Alert Pressure Roller CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1: Display
5-062-14 Part Replacement Alert #Wast Toner bottle CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1: Display
5-062-14 Part Replacement Alert #Paper Feed Roller:Tray1 CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1: Display
5-062-14 Part Replacement Alert #Friction Pad:Tray1 CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1: Display
5-062-15 Part Replacement Alert #Paper Feed Roller:Tray 2 CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1: Display
5-062-15 Part Replacement Alert #Friction Pad:Bank 2 CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1: Display

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1: Display
1: Display
1: Display
1: Display
5-062-15 Part Replacement Alert #Pick-up Roller:Tray1 CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1: Display
5-062-15 Part Replacement Alert #Feeding Roller:Tray1 CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1: Display
5-062-16 Part Replacement Alert #Separation Roller:Tray1 CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1: Display
5-062-16 Part Replacement Alert #Feed Roller:Bypass CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1: Display
5-066-00 PM Parts Display CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1 0: No Display
1: Display
5-067-00 Part Replacement #PCU:Bk CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
2 Operation Type 0: Service
1: User
5-067-02 Part Replacement #PCU:C CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1: User
5-067-04 Part Replacement #PCU:M CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1: User

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
5-067-07 Part Replacement #PCU:Y CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1: User
5-067-09 Part Replacement #Image Transfer Belt Unit CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1: User
5-067-10 Part Replacement #Paper Transfer Roller CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
9 Operation Type Unit 0: Service
1: User
5-067-11 Part Replacement #Fusing Unit CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1: User
5-067-11 Part Replacement Fusing Sleeve CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1: User
5-067-11 Part Replacement Pressure Roller CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1: User
5-067-14 Part Replacement #Wast Toner bottle CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1: User
5-067-14 Part Replacement #Paper Feed Roller:Tray1 CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1: User
5-067-14 Part Replacement #Friction Pad:Tray1 CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1: User
5-067-15 Part Replacement #Paper Feed Roller:Tray 2 CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1: User
5-067-15 Part Replacement #Friction Pad:Bank 2 CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1: User
1: User

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1: User
1: User
1: User
5-067-15 Part Replacement #Pick-up Roller:Tray1 CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1: User
5-067-15 Part Replacement #Feeding Roller:Tray1 CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1: User
5-067-16 Part Replacement #Separation Roller:Tray1 CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1: User
5-067-16 Part Replacement #Feed Roller:Bypass CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1: User
5-071-00 Set Bypass Paper Size CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1 Display
5-074-00 Home Key Customization Login Setting CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 /
2 1/step]
5-074-05 Home Key Customization Show Home Edit Menu CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
0
5-074-09 Home Key Customization Function Setting CTL* [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-074-09 Home Key Customization Product ID CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 /
2 1/step]
5-074-09 Home Key Customization Application Screen ID CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 /
3 1/step]
5-075-00 USB Keyboard Display setting CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
3
5-076-00 Copy:LT/LG Mixed Sizes 0:OFF 1:ON CTL* [0 to 1 / * / 1/step]

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
1 Setting NA: 1
Other than NA:0
5-081-00 ServiceSP Entry Code CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
1 Setting
5-083-00 LED Light Switch Setting Toner Near End CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-083-00 LED Light Switch Setting Waste Toner Near End CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
2
5-085-00 Keybord Setting CH/TW SoftKeybord CTL* [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
1 Setting
5-101-20 Copy Auto Clear Setting Auto Clear Timer Setting CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
2 (0:ON 1:OFF)
5-113-00 Optional Counter Type Default Optional Counter CTL* [0 to 8 / 0 / 1/step]
1 Type 0: None
1: Key
Card(RK3,4)
2: Key
Card(down)
3: PrepaidCard
5: MFKeyCard
4: Coin Rack
6: Coin
Rack(Recommen
d)
8: Key Counter +
Vendor
5-113-00 Optional Counter Type External Optional Counter CTL* [0 to 3 / 0 / 1/step]
2 Type 0: None
1: Expansion
Device 1
2: Expansion
Device 2
3: Expansion
Device 3
5-114-00 Optional Counter I/F MF Key Card Extension CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
5-118-00 Disable Copying CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-118-00 Secure Mode Set 0:Standard CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
2 Mode 1:Secure Mode
5-118-00 Copy mode setting DocumentServer:Printed CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
3 File Auto Delete
5-118-00 Copy mode setting Print Limit Warning CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
4 Display Setting
5-120-00 Mode Clear Opt. Counter 0:Yes 1:StandBy 2:No CTL* [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
1 Removal
5-121-00 Counter Up Timing 0:Feed 1:Exit CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-127-00 APS OFF Mode CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-128-00 Code Mode With Key/Card CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1 Option
5-131-00 Paper Size Type Selection ENG NA: [0 to 2 / 1 /
1 * 1/step]
TWN: [0 to 2 / 2 /
1/step]
KOR: [0 to 2 / 2 /
1/step]
EU: [0 to 2 / 2 /
1/step]
CHN: [0 to 2 / 2 /
1/step]
AS: [0 to 2 / 2 /
1/step]
0: JP
1: NA
2: EU/ASIA
5-144-00 Tray Lock Bypass CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
1
5-144-00 Tray Lock Tray 1 CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
2

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
3
4
5
5-167-00 Fax Printing Mode at CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1 Optional Counter Off
5-169-00 CE Login CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-186-00 RK4 Pulling ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
1 *
5-188-00 Copy Nv Version CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
1
5-191-00 Mode Set Power Str Set CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
1
5-195-00 Limitless SW CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-199-00 Paper Exit After Staple End Staple(1:Without 2:After CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 1/step]
1 0:Auto)
5-212-00 Page Numbering Duplex Printout Left/Right CTL* [-1000 to 1000 / 0 /
3 Position of Left/Right 0.01mm/step]
Facing
5-212-00 Page Numbering Duplex Printout CTL* [-1000 to 1000 / 0 /
4 Top/Bottom Position of 0.01mm/step]
Left/Right Facing
5-212-01 Page Numbering Duplex Printout Left/Right CTL* [-1000 to 1000 / 0 /
8 Position of Top/Bottom 0.01mm/step]
Facing
5-212-01 Page Numbering Duplex Printout CTL* [-1000 to 1000 / 0 /
9 Top/Bottom Position 0.01mm/step]
of Top/Bottom Facing
5-227-20 Page Numbering Allow Page No. Entry CTL* [2 to 9 / 9 / 1/step]
1
5-227-20 Page Numbering Zero Surplus Setting CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
2
5-302-00 Set Time Time Difference CTL* [-1440 to 1440 / * /

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
2 1/step]
NA:-300
EU: 60
AS: 480
CHN: 480
KOR: 480
TWN: 480
5-305-10 Auto Off Set Auto Off Limit Set CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
1
5-307-00 Daylight Saving Time Setting CTL* [0 to 1 / * / 1/step]
1 NA: 1
EU: 1
AS: 0
CHN: 0
KOR: 0
TWN: 0
5-307-00 Daylight Saving Time Rule Set(Start) CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / * /
3 1/step]
NA: 0x03200210
EU: 0x03500010
AS: 0x10500010
CHN: 0
KOR: 0
TWN: 0
5-307-00 Daylight Saving Time Rule Set(End) CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / * /
4 1/step]
NA: 0x11100200
EU: 0x10500100
AS: 0x03100000
CHN: 0
KOR: 0
TWN: 0
5-401-10 Access Control Default Document ACL CTL* [0 to 3 / 0 / 1/step]
3
5-401-10 Access Control Authentication Time CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 /
4 1sec/step]

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
5-401-16 Access Control Extend Certification Detail CTL* [0 to 0xff / 0 /
2 1/step]
5-401-20 Access Control SDK1 UniqueID CTL* [0 to 0xFFFFFFFF
0 / 0 / 1/step]
5-401-20 Access Control SDK1 Certification Method CTL* [0 to 0xFF / 0 /
1 1/step]
0 / 0 / 1/step]
1 1/step]
0 / 0 / 1/step]
1 1/step]
5-401-23 Access Control SDK Certification Device CTL* [0 to 0xff / 0 /
0 1/step]
5-401-24 Access Control Detail Option CTL* [0 to 0xff / 0 /
0 1/step]
5-402-10 Access Control SDKJ1 Limit Setting CTL* [0 to 0xFF / 0 /
1 1/step]
2 1/step]
3 1/step]
4 1/step]
5 1/step]
6 1/step]
7 1/step]
8 1/step]
9 1/step]

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
0 1/step]
1 1/step]
2 1/step]
3 1/step]
4 1/step]
5 1/step]
6 1/step]
7 1/step]
8 1/step]
9 1/step]
0 1/step]
1 1/step]
2 1/step]
3 1/step]
4 1/step]
5 1/step]
6 1/step]
7 1/step]

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
8 1/step]
9 1/step]
0 1/step]
5-402-14 Access Control SDKJ1 ProductID CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 /
1 1/step]
2 1/step]
3 1/step]
4 1/step]
5 1/step]
6 1/step]
7 1/step]
8 1/step]
9 1/step]
0 1/step]
1 1/step]
2 1/step]
3 1/step]
4 1/step]
5 1/step]

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
6 1/step]
7 1/step]
8 1/step]
9 1/step]
0 1/step]
1 1/step]
2 1/step]
3 1/step]
4 1/step]
5 1/step]
6 1/step]
7 1/step]
8 1/step]
9 1/step]
0 1/step]
5-404-00 User Code Count Clear User Code Count Clear CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
1
5-404-10 User Code Count Clear User Code Count Clear CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1 Permit Setting 0: Clear
1: No Clear
5-411-00 LDAP-Certification Simplified Authentication CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
4
5-411-00 LDAP-Certification Password Null Not Permit CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
5
5-411-00 LDAP-Certification Detail Option CTL* [0 to 0xff / 0 /
6 1/step]
5-412-10 Krb-Certification Encrypt Mode CTL* [0 to 0xFF / 0x1F /
0 1/step]
5-413-00 Lockout Setting Lockout On/Off CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-413-00 Lockout Setting Lockout Threshold CTL* [1 to 10 / 5 /
2 1/step]
5-413-00 Lockout Setting Cancelation On/Off CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
3
5-413-00 Lockout Setting Cancelation Time CTL* [1 to 9999 / 60 /
4 1min/step]
5-414-00 Access Mitigation Mitigation On/Off CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-414-00 Access Mitigation Mitigation Time CTL* [0 to 60 / 15 /
2 1min/step]
5-415-00 Password Attack Permissible Number CTL* [0 to 100 / 30 /
1 1/step]
5-415-00 Password Attack Detect Time CTL* [1 to 10 / 5 /
2 1/step]
5-416-00 Access Information Access User Max Num CTL* [50 to 200 / 200 /
1 1/step]
5-416-00 Access Information Access Password Max CTL* [50 to 200 / 200 /
2 Num 1/step]
5-416-00 Access Information Monitor Interval CTL* [1 to 10 / 3 /
3 1/step]
5-417-00 Access Attack Access Permissible CTL* [0 to 500 / 100 /
1 Number 1/step]
5-417-00 Access Attack Attack Detect Time CTL* [10 to 30 / 10 /
2 1sec/step]
5-417-00 Access Attack Productivity Fall Waite CTL* [0 to 9 / 3 /
3 1sec/step]
5-417-00 Access Attack Attack Max Num CTL* [50 to 200 / 200 /

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
4 1/step]
5-420-00 User Authentication Copy CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-420-00 User Authentication Color Security Setting CTL [0 to 255 / 0 /
2 1/step]
5-420-01 User Authentication DocumentServer CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-420-02 User Authentication Fax CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-420-03 User Authentication Scanner CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-420-04 User Authentication Printer CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-420-05 User Authentication SDK1 CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1
1
1
5-420-08 User Authentication Browser CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-430-00 Auth Dialog Message Message Change On/Off CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1 Change
5-430-00 Auth Dialog Message Message Text Download CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
2 Change
5-430-00 Auth Dialog Message Message Text ID CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
3 Change
5-431-01 External Auth User Preset Tag CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
0
5-431-01 External Auth User Preset Entry CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
1
5-431-01 External Auth User Preset Group CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
2
5-431-02 External Auth User Preset Mail CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
0
5-431-03 External Auth User Preset Fax CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
0
5-431-03 External Auth User Preset FaxSub CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
1
5-431-03 External Auth User Preset Folder CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
2
5-431-03 External Auth User Preset ProtectCode CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
3
5-431-03 External Auth User Preset SmtpAuth CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
4
5-431-03 External Auth User Preset LdapAuth CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
5
5-431-03 External Auth User Preset Smb Ftp Fldr Auth CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
6
5-431-03 External Auth User Preset AcntAcl CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
7
5-431-03 External Auth User Preset DocumentAcl CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
8
5-431-04 External Auth User Preset CertCrypt CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0
5-431-05 External Auth User Preset UserLimitCount CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
0
5-481-00 Authentication Error Code System Log Disp CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-481-00 Authentication Error Code Panel Disp CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
2
5-490-00 MF KeyCard Job Permit Setting CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-490-00 MF KeyCard Count Mode Setting CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
2
5-491-00 Optional Counter Detail Option CTL* [0 to 0xff / 0 /
1 1/step]
5-501-00 PM Alarm PM Alarm Level CTL* [0 to 9999 / 0 /
1 1/step]
5-504-00 Jam Alarm CTL* [0 to 3 / 3 / 1/step]
1
5-504-00 Jam Alarm Threshold CTL* [1 to 99 / 10 /

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
2 1/step]
5-505-00 Error Alarm CTL* IM C300 series: [0
1 to 255 / 10 /
1/step]
IM C400 series: [0
to 255 / 15 /
1/step]
5-505-00 Error Alarm Threshold CTL* [1 to 99 / 5 /
2 1/step]
5-507-00 Supply/CC Alarm Paper Supply Alarm CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-507-00 Supply/CC Alarm Staple Supply Alarm CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
2
5-507-00 Supply/CC Alarm Toner Supply Alarm CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
3
5-507-08 Supply/CC Alarm Toner Call Timing CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0 0: At replacement
1:
AtLessThanThres
h
5-507-08 Supply/CC Alarm Toner Call Threshold CTL* [10 to 90 / 10 /
1 10%/step]
5-507-12 Supply/CC Alarm Interval: Others CTL* [250 to 10000 /
8 1000 / 1/step]
5-507-13 Supply/CC Alarm Interval: A4 CTL* [250 to 10000 /
3 1000 / 1/step]
5-507-13 Supply/CC Alarm Interval: A5 CTL* [250 to 10000 /
4 1000 / 1/step]
5-507-14 Supply/CC Alarm Interval: B5 CTL* [250 to 10000 /
2 1000 / 1/step]
5-507-16 Supply/CC Alarm Interval: LG CTL* [250 to 10000 /
4 1000 / 1/step]
5-507-16 Supply/CC Alarm Interval: LT CTL* [250 to 10000 /
6 1000 / 1/step]
5-507-17 Supply/CC Alarm Interval: HLT CTL* [250 to 10000 /
2 1000 / 1/step]

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
5-508-00 CC Call Jam Remains CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
1
5-508-00 CC Call Continuous Jams CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
2
5-508-00 CC Call Continuous Door Open CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
3
5-508-01 CC Call Jam Detection: Time CTL* [3 to 30 / 10 /
1 Length 1/step]
5-508-01 CC Call Jam Detection: CTL* [2 to 10 / 5 /
2 Continuous Count 1/step]
5-508-01 CC Call Door Open: Time Length CTL* [3 to 30 / 10 /
3 1/step]
5-513-00 PartsAlermlevelCount Normal CTL* [1 to 9999 / 300 /
1 1/step]
5-513-00 PartsAlermlevelCount Df CTL* [1 to 9999 / 300 /
2 1/step]
5-514-00 PartsAlermlev Normal CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
1
5-514-00 PartsAlermlev Df CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
2
5-515-00 SC/Alarm Setting SC Call CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
1
5-515-00 SC/Alarm Setting Service Parts Near End CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
2 Call
5-515-00 SC/Alarm Setting Service Parts End Call CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
3
5-515-00 SC/Alarm Setting User Call CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
4
5-515-00 SC/Alarm Setting Communication Test Call CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
6
5-515-00 SC/Alarm Setting Machine Information CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
7 Notice
5-515-00 SC/Alarm Setting Alarm Notice CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
8
5-515-00 SC/Alarm Setting Non Genuine Tonner CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
9 Ararm

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
5-515-01 SC/Alarm Setting Supply Automatic CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
0 Ordering Call
5-515-01 SC/Alarm Setting Supply Management CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
1 Report Call
5-515-01 SC/Alarm Setting Jam/Door Open Call CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
2
5-515-05 SC/Alarm Setting Timeout:Manual Call CTL* [1 to 255 / 5 /
0 1min/step]
5-515-05 SC/Alarm Setting Timeout:Other Call CTL* [1 to 255 / 10 /
1 1min/step]
5-517-06 Get Machine Information AutoDiscovery Execution CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1 Setting
2 Interval
3 Weekday
5-517-06 Get Machine Information AutoDiscovery Execution CTL [0 to 23 / 0 /
4 Hour 1/step]
5-517-06 Get Machine Information AutoDiscovery Execution CTL [0 to 59 / 0 /
5 Minute 1/step]
5-517-06 Get Machine Information AutoDiscovery SNMP CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
6 Community Name
5-517-10 Get Machine Information GetLog:NotificationSetting CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0
5-610-00 Base Gamma Ctrl Get Factory Default ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
4 Pt:Execute
5-610-00 Base Gamma Ctrl Set Factory Default ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
5 Pt:Execute
5-610-00 Base Gamma Ctrl Restore Orginal Value ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
6 Pt:Execute
5-611-00 Toner Color in 2C B-C ENG [0 to 128 / 100 /
1 1/step]
5-611-00 Toner Color in 2C B-M ENG [0 to 128 / 100 /
2 1/step]
5-611-00 Toner Color in 2C G-C ENG [0 to 128 / 100 /
3 1/step]

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
5-611-00 Toner Color in 2C G-Y ENG [0 to 128 / 100 /
4 1/step]
5-611-00 Toner Color in 2C R-M ENG [0 to 128 / 100 /
5 1/step]
5-611-00 Toner Color in 2C R-Y ENG [0 to 128 / 100 /
6 1/step]
5-618-00 Color Mode Display CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
1 Selection
5-728-00 Network Setting NAT Machine Port1 CTL* [1 to 65535 /
1 49101 / 1/step]
5-728-00 Network Setting NAT UI Port1 CTL* [1 to 65535 /
2 55101 / 1/step]
3 49102 / 1/step]
4 55102 / 1/step]
5 49103 / 1/step]
6 55103 / 1/step]
7 49104 / 1/step]
8 55104 / 1/step]
9 49105 / 1/step]
0 55105 / 1/step]
1 49106 / 1/step]
2 55106 / 1/step]
3 49107 / 1/step]
4 55107 / 1/step]

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
5 49108 / 1/step]
6 55108 / 1/step]
7 49109 / 1/step]
8 55109 / 1/step]
9 49110 / 1/step]
0 55110 / 1/step]
5-728-10 Network Setting PacketCapture CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-728-10 Network Setting PacketCapture:mode CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
2
5-728-10 Network Setting PacketCapture:interface CTL [0 to 3 / 0 / 1/step]
3
5-728-10 Network Setting PacketCapture:length CTL [54 to 65535 / 128
4 / 1/step]
5-728-10 Network Setting PacketCapture:broadcast CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
5
5-728-10 Network Setting PacketCapture:specify CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
6 port
5-728-10 Network Setting PacketCapture:portnumbe CTL [0 to 65535 / 0 /
7 r 1/step]
5-728-10 Network Setting PacketCapture:time CTL [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 /
8 1/step]
5-729-01 Print Server Active IPv6 Link Local CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
3 Address
5-729-01 Print Server IPv6 Stateless Auto CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
4 Setting
5-729-01 Print Server Active IPv6 Stateless CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
5 Address 1
5-729-01 Print Server Active IPv6 Stateless CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
6 Address 2

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
5-729-01 Print Server IPv6 Manual Address CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
9
5-729-02 Print Server IPv6 Gateway Address CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
0
5-730-01 Extended Function Setting Expiration Prior Alarm Set CTL* [0 to 999 / 20 /
0 1days/step]
5-731-00 Counter Effect Change Mk1 CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1 Cnt(Paper->Combine)
5-734-00 PDF Setting PDF/A Fixed CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-741-00 Node Authentication CTL* [1 to 255 / 60 /
1 Timuout 1sec/step]
5-745-21 DeemedPowerConsumptio Controller Standby CTL* [0 to 9999 / 0 /
1 n 1/step]
5-745-21 DeemedPowerConsumptio STR CTL* [0 to 9999 / 0 /
2 n 1/step]
5-745-21 DeemedPowerConsumptio Main Power Off CTL* [0 to 9999 / 0 /
3 n 1/step]
5-745-21 DeemedPowerConsumptio Scanning and Printing CTL* [0 to 9999 / 0 /
4 n 1/step]
5-745-21 DeemedPowerConsumptio Printing CTL* [0 to 9999 / 0 /
5 n 1/step]
5-745-21 DeemedPowerConsumptio Scanning CTL* [0 to 9999 / 0 /
6 n 1/step]
5-745-21 DeemedPowerConsumptio Engine Standby CTL* [0 to 9999 / 0 /
7 n 1/step]
5-745-21 DeemedPowerConsumptio Low Power Consumption CTL* [0 to 9999 / 0 /
8 n 1/step]
5-745-21 DeemedPowerConsumptio Silent condition CTL* [0 to 9999 / 0 /
9 n 1/step]
5-745-22 DeemedPowerConsumptio Heater Off CTL* [0 to 9999 / 0 /
0 n 1/step]
5-748-10 OpePanel Setting Op Type Action Setting CTL [0 to 255 / 0 /
1 1/step]
5-748-20 OpePanel Setting Cheetah Panel Connect CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1 Setting

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
5-749-00 Import/Export Export CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
1
5-749-10 Import/Export Import CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
1
5-752-00 Copy:WebAPI Setting Copy:FlairAPI Setting CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 /
1 1/step]
5-755-00 Display Setting Disp Administrator CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
1 Password Change Scrn
5-755-00 Display Setting Hide Administrator CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
2 Password Change Scrn
5-758-00 RemoteUI Setting Authentication CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-759-00 Machine Limit Count Machine Limit Count CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1 Setting
5-759-06 Machine Limit Count Full Color Limit Count CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0
1 / 1/step]
5-759-06 Machine Limit Count Mono Color Limit Count CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0
2 / 1/step]
5-760-00 PaaS Status CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-760-00 PaaS Enter PaaS Mode CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
2
5-760-00 PaaS Contract ID CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
3
5-760-00 PaaS Authentication Key CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
4
5-760-00 PaaS Server Name CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
5
5-760-00 PaaS Server URL Path CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
6
5-760-00 PaaS Server Port Number CTL* [1 to 65535 / 443 /
7 1/step]
5-760-00 PaaS Contract Status CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
8
5-760-00 PaaS Registration CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
9

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
5-760-01 PaaS Unregistration CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0
5-760-01 PaaS Overwrite Registration on CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1 Server
5-760-01 PaaS Execution Return Code CTL [0 to 255 / 0 /
2 1/step]
5-760-01 PaaS Error Code CTL [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 /
3 1/step]
5-760-01 PaaS 3G Signal Error CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
4
5-760-01 PaaS Use Proxy CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
5
5-760-01 PaaS Proxy Server CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
6
5-760-01 PaaS Proxy Port Number CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0 /
7 1/step]
5-760-01 PaaS Proxy User Name CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
8
5-760-01 PaaS Proxy User Password CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
9
5-760-02 PaaS Retry Interval CTL* [0 to 65535 / 5 /
0 1sec/step]
5-760-02 PaaS Retry Count CTL* [0 to 255 / 3 /
1 1/step]
5-760-02 PaaS Device Information Call CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
2
5-760-02 PaaS Next Update Time CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 1/step]
3
5-760-02 PaaS Enter Normal Mode CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
4
5-760-02 PaaS Prescribed Print Sheet CTL [0 to 99999999 / 0
5 No/Page / 1/step]
5-760-02 PaaS Permit Setting CTL* [0 to 3 / 0 / 1/step]
7
5-760-02 PaaS Selection Country CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
8 0: China

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1: India
5-760-02 PaaS Connect Type CTL* [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
9
5-761-00 SmartOperationPanel Restore the default Home CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 /
1 Setting screen 1/step]
5-761-00 SmartOperationPanel Introduction Setting Boot CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 /
7 Setting Mode 1/step]
5-761-00 SmartOperationPanel SmartOperationPanel CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 /
9 Setting Font Setting 1/step]
5-764-00 NFC Setting GuestNetwork CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-764-00 NFC Setting Encrypted Communication CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
2 Permission
5-764-00 NFC Setting Access Port1 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 8081
3 / 1/step]
5-764-00 NFC Setting Access Port2 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 8080
4 / 1/step]
5-764-00 NFC Setting Access Port3 CTL* [0 to 65535 / 80 /
5 1/step]
5-767-00 Screen USB host port Port1 CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-767-00 Screen USB host port Port2 CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
2
5-767-10 Screen USB host port Screen USB memory CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-768-00 Remaining toner detection MIB Output ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1 type 0: 0%-100% (10%
increments)
1: 0%-100% (1%
increments)
5-780-00 ACT Version Current Version Display CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-780-00 ACT Version Max Version Display in CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 1/step]
2 ROM
5-780-00 ACT Version HDD Version Display CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 1/step]
3

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
5-780-00 ACT Version Panel Version Display CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 1/step]
4
5-780-05 ACT Version Lump Activate Execution CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 1/step]
0
5-780-10 ACT Version Auto Activate Setting CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0
5-780-20 ACT Version Restore from NV CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 1/step]
0
5-780-20 ACT Version Restore from HDD CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-780-20 ACT Version Restore from Operation CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 1/step]
2 Panel
5-785-00 SmartSDK Version Setting CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
1
5-801-00 Memory Clear All Clear CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
1
5-801-00 Memory Clear Engine ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
2
5-801-00 Memory Clear SCS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
3
5-801-00 Memory Clear IMH Memory Clr CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
4
5-801-00 Memory Clear MCS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
5
5-801-00 Memory Clear Copier application CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
6
5-801-00 Memory Clear Fax Application CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
7
5-801-00 Memory Clear Printer Application CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
8
5-801-00 Memory Clear Scanner Application CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
9
5-801-01 Memory Clear Web Service CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
0
5-801-01 Memory Clear NCS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
1

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
5-801-01 Memory Clear R-FAX CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
2
5-801-01 Memory Clear Clear DCS Setting CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
4
5-801-01 Memory Clear Clear UCS Setting CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
5
5-801-01 Memory Clear MIRS Setting CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
6
5-801-01 Memory Clear CCS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
7
5-801-01 Memory Clear SRM Memory Clr CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
8
5-801-01 Memory Clear LCS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
9
5-801-02 Cleae Memory Web Uapli CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
0
5-801-02 Memory Clear ECS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
1
5-801-02 Memory Clear AICS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
3
5-801-02 Cleae Memory websys CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
5
5-801-02 Memory Clear SAS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
7
5-801-02 Memory Clear Rest WebService CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
8
5-803-00 INPUT Check Registration Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-803-00 INPUT Check Tray Paper End Detection ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
2 Sensor
5-803-00 INPUT Check Bypass Paper End ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
3 Detection Sensor
5-803-00 INPUT Check Bypass Paper Width ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
4 Detection Sensor
5-803-00 INPUT Check Duplex Exit Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
6

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
5-803-00 INPUT Check Exit Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
7
5-803-00 INPUT Check Duplex Entrance Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
8
5-803-01 INPUT Check By-pass Lift Position ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0 Sensor
5-803-01 INPUT Check Tray Exit Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-803-01 INPUT Check Interlock Release ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
2 Detection 1
5-803-01 INPUT Check Interlock Release ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
3 Detection 2
5-803-01 INPUT Check Right Cover Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
4
5-803-01 INPUT Check Image Transfer Contact ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
6 HP Sensor
5-803-01 INPUT Check Toner Collection Full ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
9 Sensor
5-803-02 INPUT Check Toner Collection Bottle Set ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0 Detection
5-803-02 INPUT Check Toner End Sensor: Y ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
2
5-803-02 INPUT Check Toner End Sensor: M ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
3
5-803-02 INPUT Check Toner End Sensor: C ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
4
5-803-02 INPUT Check Fusing Entrance Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
6
5-803-02 INPUT Check Fusing Exit Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
7
5-803-02 INPUT Check Set and Destination ENG [0 to 3 / 0 / 1/step]
8 Detection
5-803-02 INPUT Check Fusing New Unit ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
9 Detection
5-803-03 INPUT Check Fusing High Temp ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0 Detection

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
5-803-03 INPUT Check Fusing Fan: Lock ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
2
5-803-03 INPUT Check Laser Unit Fan: Lock ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
3
5-803-03 INPUT Check PSU Fan: Lock ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
4
5-803-03 INPUT Check PCDU Cooling Fan: Lock ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
5
5-803-03 INPUT Check Bk Drum Motor: Lock ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
8
5-803-03 INPUT Check FC Dev Motor: Lock ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
9
5-803-04 INPUT Check FC Drum Motor: Lock ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0
5-803-04 INPUT Check Fusing Motor: Lock ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-803-04 INPUT Check Transport Motor: Lock ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
2
5-803-04 INPUT Check PP:CB:SC Detection ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
4
5-803-04 INPUT Check PP:T1T2:SC Detection ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
5
5-803-04 INPUT Check Key Counter 1: Set ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
7 Detection
5-803-04 INPUT Check Key Counter 2: Set ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
8 Detection
5-803-04 INPUT Check Keycard: Set Detection ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
9
5-803-05 INPUT Check 1-Bin:Exit Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0
5-803-05 INPUT Check 1-Bin:Paper Remaining ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1 Sensor
5-803-05 INPUT Check 1-Bin: Set Detection ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
2
5-803-05 INPUT Check Tray Lift Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
3

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
5-803-05 INPUT Check Tray Set Detection ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
4
5-803-05 INPUT Check BiCU Version Detection ENG [0 to 15 / 0 /
6 1/step]
5-803-06 INPUT Check PFU Vertical Transport ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0 Sen. 1
1 Sen. 2
5-803-06 INPUT Check PFU Door Sensor 1 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
2
3
5-803-06 INPUT Check Tray UL Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
6
5-803-06 INPUT Check Feed Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
7
8 Sen. 3
9
5-803-07 INPUT Check Exit Exhaust Fan: Lock ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0
5-803-09 INPUT Check LD Off Check ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
4
5-803-20 INPUT Check Scanner HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0
5-803-20 INPUT Check Platen Cover Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-804-00 OUTPUT Check Registration Clutch ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-804-00 OUTPUT Check Paper Feed Clutch ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
2
5-804-00 OUTPUT Check Duplex Clutch ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
3
5-804-00 OUTPUT Check Bypass Feed Clutch ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
4

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
5-804-00 OUTPUT Check Bypass Lift Clutch ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
5
5-804-00 OUTPUT Check Tray Lift Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
7
5-804-00 OUTPUT Check Paper Exit Rotary ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
8 Solenoid
5-804-00 OUTPUT Check Fusing Fan: High Speed ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
9
5-804-01 OUTPUT Check Fusing Fan: Low Speed ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0
5-804-01 OUTPUT Check Laser Unit Fan: High ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1 Speed
5-804-01 OUTPUT Check Laser Unit Fan: Low ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
2 Speed
5-804-01 OUTPUT Check PSU Fan: High Speed ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
3
5-804-01 OUTPUT Check PSU Fan: Low Speed ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
4
5-804-01 OUTPUT Check PCDU Cooling Fan: High ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
5 Speed
5-804-01 OUTPUT Check PCDU Cooling Fan: Low ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
6 Speed
5-804-02 OUTPUT Check TM Sensor Shutter ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1 Solenoid
5-804-02 OUTPUT Check Bk Drum Motor: Std Speed ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
2 1
5-804-02 OUTPUT Check Bk Drum Motor: Low ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
3 Speed
5-804-02 OUTPUT Check FC Dev Motor: Std Speed ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
4 1
5-804-02 OUTPUT Check FC Dev Motor: Low Speed ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
5
5-804-02 OUTPUT Check Development Clutch: Bk ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
6
5-804-02 OUTPUT Check FC Drum Motor: Std ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
7 Speed 1

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
5-804-02 OUTPUT Check FC Drum Motor: Low ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
8 Speed
5-804-02 OUTPUT Check Fusing Motor: Standard ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
9 Speed 1
5-804-03 OUTPUT Check Fusing Motor: Low Speed ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0
5-804-03 OUTPUT Check Transport Motor: Std ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1 Speed 1
5-804-03 OUTPUT Check Transport Motor: Low ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
2 Speed
5-804-03 OUTPUT Check Image Transfer Contact ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
3 Motor
5-804-03 OUTPUT Check Toner Supply Motor: Y ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
5
5-804-03 OUTPUT Check Toner Supply Motor: M ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
6
5-804-03 OUTPUT Check Toner Supply Motor: C ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
7
5-804-03 OUTPUT Check Toner Supply Motor: Bk ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
8
5-804-03 OUTPUT Check Toner End Sensor Power ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
9
5-804-04 OUTPUT Check ID Tag: Power Supply ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
2 Control
5-804-04 OUTPUT Check Toner Sensor Power ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
3
5-804-04 OUTPUT Check PP:Charge DC:Y ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
4
5-804-04 OUTPUT Check PP:Charge DC:M ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
5
5-804-04 OUTPUT Check PP:Charge DC:C ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
6
5-804-04 OUTPUT Check PP:Charge DC:Bk ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
7
5-804-04 OUTPUT Check PP:Development: Y ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
8

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
5-804-04 OUTPUT Check PP:Development: M ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
9
5-804-05 OUTPUT Check PP:Development: C ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0
5-804-05 OUTPUT Check PP:Development: Bk ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-804-05 OUTPUT Check PP: Image Transfer: YMC ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
3
5-804-05 OUTPUT Check PP: Image Transfer: Bk ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
6
5-804-05 OUTPUT Check PP: Paper Transfer: + ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
7
5-804-05 OUTPUT Check PP: Paper Transfer: - ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
8
5-804-05 OUTPUT Check PP:Charge AC:Y ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
9
5-804-06 OUTPUT Check PP:Charge AC:M ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-804-06 OUTPUT Check PP:Charge AC:C ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
3
5-804-06 OUTPUT Check PP:Charge AC:Bk ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
5
5-804-07 OUTPUT Check TM/ID Sensor: Front ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-804-07 OUTPUT Check TM/ID Sensor: Center ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
2
5-804-07 OUTPUT Check TM/ID Sensor: Rear ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
3
5-804-08 OUTPUT Check PFU Transport Motor 1: ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0 High
1 Low
2 High
3 Low

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
5-804-08 OUTPUT Check PFU Paper Feed CL1 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
4
5
5-804-08 OUTPUT Check PFU Vertical Transport ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
6 CL1
7 CL2
5-804-08 OUTPUT Check Exit Clutch ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
8
5-804-08 OUTPUT Check Reverse Clutch ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
9
5-804-09 OUTPUT Check Bk Drum Motor: Standard ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0 Speed 2
5-804-09 OUTPUT Check Fusing Motor: Standard ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1 Speed 2
5-804-09 OUTPUT Check Transport Motor: Standard ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
2 Speed 2
5-804-09 OUTPUT Check Bk Drum Motor: Middle ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
3 Speed
5-804-09 OUTPUT Check FC Dev Motor: Middle ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
4 Speed
5-804-09 OUTPUT Check FC Drum Motor: Middle ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
5 Speed
5-804-09 OUTPUT Check Fusing Motor: Middle ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
6 Speed
5-804-09 OUTPUT Check Transport Motor: Middle ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
7 Speed
5-804-10 OUTPUT Check Polygon Motor1: ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
3 Standard2
5-804-10 OUTPUT Check Polygon Motor1: Standard ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
4
5-804-10 OUTPUT Check Polygon Motor1: Low ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
5
5-804-10 OUTPUT Check Polygon Motor2: ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
7 Standard2

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
5-804-10 OUTPUT Check Polygon Motor2: Standard ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
8
5-804-10 OUTPUT Check Polygon Motor2: Low ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
9
5-804-11 OUTPUT Check Polygon Motor1,2: ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1 Standard2
5-804-11 OUTPUT Check Polygon Motor1,2: ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
2 Standard
5-804-11 OUTPUT Check Polygon Motor1,2: Low ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
3
5-804-11 OUTPUT Check V Transport Clutch ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
4
5 High
6 Low
7
8 CL3
5-804-12 OUTPUT Check Exit Exhaust Fan: High ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0 Speed
5-804-12 OUTPUT Check Exit Exhaust Fan: Low ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1 Speed
5-804-20 OUTPUT Check Scanner Lamp ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
2
5-804-20 OUTPUT Check Scanner Lamp: Color ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
3 1200
5-804-20 OUTPUT Check Scanner Lamp: Bk ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
4
5-805-00 Noise Detection Power(24V) ENG [0 to 1023 / 0 /
1 * 1/step]
5-805-01 Noise Detection Power(5VKC) ENG [0 to 1023 / 0 /
1 * 1/step]
5-805-02 Noise Detection Power(5VMY) ENG [0 to 1023 / 0 /
1 * 1/step]

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
5-805-03 LOCK Detection 1(TOTAL) ENG [0 to 4294967295 /
1 * 0 / 1/step]
2 * 0 / 1/step]
3 * 0 / 1/step]
5-805-04 LOCK Detection 1 ENG [0 to 65535 / 0 /
1 * 1/step]
2 * 1/step]
3 * 1/step]
5-805-05 Upper Limit Flag 1(TOTAL) ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1 *
2 *
3 *
5-805-06 Upper Limit Flag 1 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1 *
2 *
3 *
5-807-00 Area Selection ENG [1 to 7 / 2 / 1/step]
1 * 1: Japan
2: NA
3: EU
4: Taiwan
5: Asia
6: China
7: Korea
5-810-00 Fusing SC Reset Fusing SC Reset ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-810-00 Fusing SC Reset Hard High Temp. ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
2 Detection

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
5-811-00 Machine Serial Display ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
2 * 1/step]
5-812-00 Service Tel. No. Setting Service CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
1
5-812-00 Service Tel. No. Setting Facsimile CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
2
5-812-00 Service Tel. No. Setting Supply CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
3
5-812-00 Service Tel. No. Setting Operation CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
4
5-816-00 Remote Service I/F Setting CTL* [0 to 2 / 2 / 1/step]
1
5-816-00 Remote Service CE Call CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
2
5-816-00 Remote Service Function Flag CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
3
5-816-00 Remote Service SSL Disable CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
7
5-816-00 Remote Service RCG Connect Timeout CTL* [1 to 90 / 30 /
8 1sec/step]
5-816-00 Remote Service RCG Write Timeout CTL* [0 to 100 / 60 /
9 1sec/step]
5-816-01 Remote Service RCG Read Timeout CTL* [0 to 100 / 60 /
0 1sec/step]
5-816-01 Remote Service Port 80 Enable CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-816-01 Remote Service RFU Timing CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
3
5-816-01 Remote Service RCG Error Cause CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
4
5-816-02 Remote Service RCG-C Registed CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-816-02 Remote Service Connect Type(N/M/3G) CTL* [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
3
5-816-06 Remote Service Cert Expire Timing CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 1/step]
1

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
5-816-06 Remote Service Use Proxy CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
2
5-816-06 Remote Service Proxy Host CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
3
5-816-06 Remote Service Proxy PortNumber CTL* [0 to 0xffff / 0 /
4 1/step]
5-816-06 Remote Service Proxy User Name CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
5
5-816-06 Remote Service Proxy Password CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
6
5-816-06 Remote Service CERT:Up State CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 /
7 1/step]
5-816-06 Remote Service CERT:Error CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 /
8 1/step]
5-816-06 Remote Service CERT:Up ID CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
9
5-816-08 Remote Service Firm Up Status CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
3
5-816-08 Remote Service Firm Up User Check CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
5
5-816-08 Remote Service Firmware Size CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 /
6 1/step]
5-816-08 Remote Service CERT:Macro Ver. CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
7
5-816-08 Remote Service CERT:PAC Ver. CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
8
5-816-08 Remote Service CERT:ID2Code CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
9
5-816-09 Remote Service CERT:Subject CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
0
5-816-09 Remote Service CERT:SerialNo. CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
1
5-816-09 Remote Service CERT:Issuer CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
2
5-816-09 Remote Service CERT:Valid Start CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
3

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
5-816-09 Remote Service CERT:Valid End CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
4
5-816-10 Remote Service CERT:Encrypt Level CTL* [1 to 2 / 1 / 1/step]
2
5-816-10 Remote Service Client Communication CTL* [0 to 3 / 0 / 1/step]
3 Method
5-816-10 Remote Service Client Communication CTL* [1 to 7 / 7 / 1/step]
4 Limit
5-816-11 Remote Service Network Information CTL* [5 to 255 / 5 /
5 Waiting timer 1sec/step]
5-816-15 Remote Service Selection Country CTL* [0 to 10 / 0 /
0 1/step]
0: Japan
1: USA
2: Canada
3: UK
4: Germany
5: France
6: Italy
7: Netherlands
8: Belgium
9: Luxembourg
10: Spain
5-816-15 Remote Service Line Type Automatic CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1 Judgement
5-816-15 Remote Service Line Type Judgement CTL [0 to 255 / 0 /
2 Result 0/step]
5-816-15 Remote Service Selection Dial / Push CTL* [0 to 2 / 0 / 0/step]
3 0: Tone dialing
phone
1: Pulse dialing
phone
2: 20PPS
5-816-15 Remote Service Outside Line Outgoing CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
4 Number
5-816-15 Remote Service Dial Up User Name CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
6
5-816-15 Remote Service Dial Up Password CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
7
5-816-16 Remote Service Local Phone Number CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
1
5-816-16 Remote Service Connection Timing CTL* [0 to 24 / 1 /
2 Adjustment Incoming 1/step]
5-816-16 Remote Service Access Point CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
3
5-816-16 Remote Service Line Connecting CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
4 0: Sharing FAX
1: No Sharing FAX
5-816-17 Remote Service Modem Serial No. CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
3
5-816-17 Remote Service Retransmission Limit CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
4
5-816-18 Remote Service FAX TX Priority CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
7 0: OFF
1: ON
5-816-19 Remote Service 3G DongleID CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
0
5-816-19 Remote Service ppp Connect Timer CTL* [15 to 30 / 15 /
9 1min/step]
5-816-20 Remote Service Manual Polling CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0
5-816-20 Remote Service Regist Status CTL [0 to 255 / 0 /
1 1/step]
5-816-20 Remote Service Letter Number CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
2
5-816-20 Remote Service Confirm Execute CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
3
5-816-20 Remote Service Confirm Result CTL [0 to 255 / 0 /
4 1/step]
5-816-20 Remote Service Confirm Place CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
5
5-816-20 Remote Service Register Execute CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
6
5-816-20 Remote Service Register Result CTL [0 to 255 / 0 /
7 1/step]
5-816-20 Remote Service Error Code CTL [-2147483647 to
8 2147483647 / 0 /
0/step]
5-816-20 Remote Service Instl Clear CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
9
5-816-24 Remote Service CommErrorTime CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 1/step]
0
5-816-24 Remote Service CommErrorCode 1 CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff /
1 0x00000000 /
1/step]
2 0x00000000 /
1/step]
3 0x00000000 /
1/step]
5-816-24 Remote Service CommErrorState 1 CTL* [0 to 0xffff /
4 0x0000 / 1/step]
5 0x0000 / 1/step]
6 0x0000 / 1/step]
5-816-24 Remote Service SSL Error Count CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 /
7 1/step]
5-816-24 Remote Service Other Err Count CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 /
8 1/step]
5-816-25 Remote Service CommLog Print CTL [0 to 255 / 0 /
0 0/step]
5-821-00 Remote Service RCG RCG IPv4 Address CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0 /
2 Setting 1/step]
5-821-00 Remote Service RCG RCG Port CTL* [0 to 65535 / 443 /
3 Setting 1/step]
5-821-00 Remote Service RCG RCG IPv4 URL Path CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
4 Setting
5-821-00 Remote Service RCG RCG IPv6 Address CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
5 Setting
5-821-00 Remote Service RCG RCG IPv6 URL Path CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
6 Setting
5-821-00 Remote Service RCG RCG Host Name CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
7 Setting
5-821-00 Remote Service RCG RCG Host URL Path CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
8 Setting
5-824-00 NV-RAM Data Upload CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
1
5-825-00 NV-RAM Data Download CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
1
5-828-03 Network Setting User Class CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
9
5-828-04 Network Setting Class Id CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
0
5-828-05 Network Setting 1284 Compatiblity CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
0 (Centro)
5-828-05 Network Setting ECP (Centro) CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
2
5-828-06 Network Setting Job Spooling CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
5
5-828-06 Network Setting Job Spooling Clear: Start CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
6 Time 0: ON
1: OFF
5-828-06 Network Setting Job Spooling (Protocol) CTL* [0x00 to 0xff / 0x7f
9 / 0/step]
5-828-08 Network Setting Protocol usage CTL* [0x00000000 to
7 0xffffffff /
0x00000000 /
1/step]
5-828-09 Network Setting TELNET(0:OFF 1:ON) CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
0
5-828-09 Network Setting Web(0:OFF 1:ON) CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
1

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
5-828-14 Network Setting Active IPv6 Link Local CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
5 Address
5-828-14 Network Setting Active IPv6 Stateless CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
7 Address 1
9 Address 2
1 Address 3
3 Address 4
5 Address 5
5-828-15 Network Setting IPv6 Manual Address CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
6
5-828-15 Network Setting IPv6 Gateway Address CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
8
5-828-16 Network Setting IPv6 Stateless Auto CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
1 Setting
5-828-21 Network Setting IPsec Aggressive Mode CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
9 Setting
5-828-23 Network Setting Web Item visible CTL* [0x0000 to 0xffff /
6 0xffff / 1/step]
5-828-23 Network Setting Web shopping link visible CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
7
5-828-23 Network Setting Web Supplies Link visible CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
8
5-828-23 Network Setting Web Link1 Name CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
9
5-828-24 Network Setting Web Link1 URL CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
0
5-828-24 Network Setting Web Link1 visible CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
1
5-828-24 Network Setting Web Link2 Name CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
2
5-828-24 Network Setting Web Link2 URL CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
3

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
5-828-24 Network Setting Web Link2 visible CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
4
5-828-24 Network Setting DHCPv6 DUID CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
9
5-832-00 HDD HDD Formatting (ALL) CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
1
5-832-00 HDD HDD Formatting (IMH) CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
2
5-832-00 HDD HDD Formatting CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
3 (Thumbnail/OCR)
5-832-00 HDD HDD Formatting (Job Log) CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
4
5-832-00 HDD HDD Formatting (Printer CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
5 Fonts)
5-832-00 HDD HDD Formatting (User CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
6 Info)
5-832-00 HDD Mail RX Data CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
7
5-832-00 HDD Mail TX Data CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
8
5-832-00 HDD HDD Formatting (Data for CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
9 a Design)
5-832-01 HDD HDD Formatting (Log) CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
0
5-832-01 HDD HDD Formatting (Ridoc CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
1 I/F)
5-832-01 HDD HDD Formatting CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
2 (Thumbnail)
5-836-00 Capture Setting Capture Function (0:Off CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1 1:On)
5-836-01 Capture Setting Capture Setting: Copy CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-836-01 Capture Setting Capture Setting: Doc. Svr. CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
2
5-836-01 Capture Setting Capture Setting: Fax RX CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
3 Printer

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
5-836-01 Capture Setting Capture Setting: Fax TX CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
4
5-836-01 Capture Setting Capture Setting: Printer CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
5
5-836-01 Capture Setting Capture Setting: Scanner CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
6
5-836-01 Capture Setting Capture Setting: SDK CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
7
5-836-06 Capture Setting Captured File Resend CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
1 (0:Off 1:On)
5-836-07 Capture Setting Reduction for Copy Color CTL* [0 to 3 / 2 / 1/step]
1
5-836-07 Capture Setting Reduction for Copy B&W CTL* [0 to 6 / 0 / 1/step]
2 Text 0: 1
1: 1/2
2: 1/3
3: 1/4
6: 2/3
5-836-07 Capture Setting Reduction for Copy B&W CTL* [0 to 6 / 0 / 1/step]
3 Other 0: 1
1: 1/2
2: 1/3
3: 1/4
6: 2/3
5-836-07 Capture Setting Reduction for Printer CTL* [0 to 3 / 2 / 1/step]
4 Color
5-836-07 Capture Setting Reduction for Printer B&W CTL* [0 to 6 / 0 / 1/step]
5 0: 1
1: 1/2
2: 1/3
3: 1/4
6: 2/3
5-836-07 Capture Setting Reduction for Printer CTL* [1 to 5 / 4 / 1/step]
7 Color 1200dpi 1: 1/2
3: 1/4
4: 1/6

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
5: 1/8
5-836-07 Capture Setting Reduction for Printer B&W CTL* [1 to 5 / 1 / 1/step]
8 1200dpi 1: 1/2
3: 1/4
4: 1/6
5: 1/8
5-836-08 Capture Setting Format for Copy Color CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-836-08 Capture Setting Format for Copy B&W CTL* [0 to 3 / 1 / 1/step]
2 Text
5-836-08 Capture Setting Format for Copy B&W CTL* [0 to 3 / 1 / 1/step]
3 Other
5-836-08 Capture Setting Format for Printer Color CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 1/step]
4
5-836-08 Capture Setting Format for Printer B&W CTL* [0 to 3 / 1 / 1/step]
5
5-836-09 Capture Setting Default for JPEG CTL* [5 to 95 / 50 /
1 1/step]
5-836-10 Capture Setting Primary srv IP address CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0x00
1 / 0/step]
5-836-10 Capture Setting Primary srv scheme CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
2
5-836-10 Capture Setting Primary srv port number CTL* [1 to 65535 / 80 /
3 1/step]
5-836-10 Capture Setting Primary srv URL path CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
4
5-836-11 Capture Setting Secondary srv IP address CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0x00
1 / 0/step]
5-836-11 Capture Setting Secondary srv scheme CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
2
5-836-11 Capture Setting Secondary srv port CTL* [1 to 65535 / 80 /
3 number 1/step]
5-836-11 Capture Setting Secondary srv URL path CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
4
5-836-12 Capture Setting Default Reso Rate Switch CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
5-836-12 Capture Setting Reso: Copy(Color) CTL* [0 to 255 / 2 /
1 1/step]
5-836-12 Capture Setting Reso: Copy(Mono) CTL* [0 to 255 / 3 /
2 1/step]
5-836-12 Capture Setting Reso: Print(Color) CTL* [0 to 255 / 2 /
3 1/step]
5-836-12 Capture Setting Reso: Print(Mono) CTL* [0 to 255 / 3 /
4 1/step]
5-836-12 Capture Setting Reso: Fax(Color) CTL* [0 to 255 / 4 /
5 1/step]
5-836-12 Capture Setting Reso: Fax(Mono) CTL* [0 to 255 / 3 /
6 1/step]
5-836-12 Capture Setting Reso: Scan(Color) CTL* [0 to 255 / 4 /
7 1/step]
5-836-12 Capture Setting Reso: Scan(Mono) CTL* [0 to 255 / 3 /
8 1/step]
5-836-12 Capture Setting Reso: SDK(Color) CTL* [0 to 255 / 4 /
9 1/step]
5-836-13 Capture Setting Reso: SDK(Mono) CTL* [0 to 255 / 3 /
0 1/step]
5-836-14 Capture Setting All Addr Info Switch CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
1
5-836-14 Capture Setting Stand-by Doc Max CTL* [10 to 10000 /
2 Number 2000 / 1/step]
5-836-14 Capture Setting ClearLightPDF Switch CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
3
5-840-00 IEEE 802.11 Channel MAX CTL* [1 to 14 / 14 /
6 1/step]
5-840-00 IEEE 802.11 Channel MIN CTL* [1 to 14 / 1 /
7 1/step]
5-840-01 IEEE 802.11 WEP Key Select CTL* [0x00 to 0x11 /
1 0x00 / 0/step]
5-840-04 IEEE 802.11 WPA Debug Lvl CTL* [1 to 3 / 3 / 1/step]
5
5-840-04 IEEE 802.11 11w CTL* [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
6

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
5-840-04 IEEE 802.11 PSK Set Type CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
7
5-841-00 Supply Name Setting Toner Name Setting: CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
1 Black
5-841-00 Supply Name Setting Toner Name Setting: Cyan CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
2
3 Yellow
4 Magenta
5-841-01 Supply Name Setting StapleStd1 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
1
5-842-00 GWWS Analysis Setting 1 CTL* [0x00 to 0xFF / 0 /
1 1/step]
5-842-00 GWWS Analysis Setting 2 CTL* [0x00 to 0xFF / 0 /
2 1/step]
5-844-00 USB Transfer Rate CTL* [1 to 4 / 4 / 0/step]
1 1: Full Speed
4: Auto Change
5-844-00 USB Vendor ID CTL* [0x0000 to 0xffff /
2 0x05ca / 0/step]
5-844-00 USB Product ID CTL* [0x0000 to 0xffff /
3 0x0403 / 0/step]
5-844-00 USB Device Release Number CTL* [0 to 9999 / 100 /
4 1/step]
5-844-00 USB Fixed USB Port CTL* [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
5 0: OFF
1: Level1
2: Level2
5-844-00 USB PnP Model Name CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
6
5-844-00 USB PnP Serial Number CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
7
5-844-00 USB Mac Supply Level CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
8 0: OFF
1: ON

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
5-844-00 USB USB Toggle Clear Mode CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
9
5-844-10 USB Notify Unsupport CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
0
5-845-00 Delivery Server Setting FTP Port No. CTL* [1 to 65535 / 3670
1 / 1/step]
5-845-00 Delivery Server Setting IP Address (Primary) CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0x00
2 / /step]
5-845-00 Delivery Server Setting Delivery Error Display CTL* [0 to 999 / 300 /
6 Time 1sec/step]
5-845-00 Delivery Server Setting IP Address (Secondary) CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0x00
8 / /step]
5-845-00 Delivery Server Setting Delivery Server Model CTL* [0 to 4 / 0 / 1/step]
9
5-845-01 Delivery Server Setting Delivery Svr. Capability CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 /
0 1/step]
5-845-01 Delivery Server Setting Delivery Svr. Capability CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 /
1 (Ext) 1/step]
5-845-01 Delivery Server Setting Server Scheme(Primary) CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
3
5-845-01 Delivery Server Setting Server Port CTL* [1 to 65535 / 80 /
4 Number(Primary) 1/step]
5-845-01 Delivery Server Setting Server URL Path(Primary) CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
5
5-845-01 Delivery Server Setting Server CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
6 Scheme(Secondary)
5-845-01 Delivery Server Setting Server Port CTL* [1 to 65535 / 80 /
7 Number(Secondary) 1/step]
5-845-01 Delivery Server Setting Server URL CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
8 Path(Secondary)
5-845-02 Delivery Server Setting Rapid Sending Control CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
2
5-846-00 UCS Setting Machine ID (for Delivery CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
1 Server)
5-846-00 UCS Setting Machine ID Clear (for CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
2 Delivery Server)

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
5-846-00 UCS Setting Maximum Entries CTL* [2000 to 20000 /
3 2000 / 1/step]
5-846-00 UCS Setting Delivery Server Retry CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 /
6 Timer 1/step]
5-846-00 UCS Setting Delivery Server Retry CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 /
7 Times 1/step]
5-846-00 UCS Setting Delivery Server Maximum CTL* [2000 to 20000 /
8 Entries 2000 / 1/step]
5-846-01 UCS Setting LDAP Search Timeout CTL* [1 to 255 / 60 /
0 1/step]
5-846-02 UCS Setting WSD Maximum Entries CTL* [50 to 250 / 250 /
0 1/step]
5-846-02 UCS Setting Folder Auth Change CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1 0: Login User
1: Destination
5-846-04 UCS Setting Addr Book CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
0 Migration(USB->HDD)
5-846-04 UCS Setting Fill Addr Acl Info CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
1
5-846-04 UCS Setting Addr Book Media CTL* [0 to 30 / 0 /
3 1/step]
5-846-04 UCS Setting Initialize Local Addr Book CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
7
5-846-04 UCS Setting Initialize Delivery Addr CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
8 Book
5-846-04 UCS Setting Initialize LDAP Addr Book CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
9
5-846-05 UCS Setting Initialize All Addr Book CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
0
5-846-05 UCS Setting Backup All Addr Book CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
1
5-846-05 UCS Setting Restore All Addr Book CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
2
5-846-05 UCS Setting Clear Backup Info CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
3
5-846-06 UCS Setting Search option CTL* [0x00 to 0xff / 0x0f

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
0 / 1/step]
5-846-06 UCS Setting Complexity option 1 CTL* [0 to 32 / 0 /
2 1/step]
3 1/step]
4 1/step]
5 1/step]
5-846-09 UCS Setting FTP Auth Port Setting CTL* [0 to 65535 / 3671
1 / 1/step]
5-846-09 UCS Setting Encryption Stat CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 /
4 0/step]
5-846-10 UCS Setting Initialize Suprvisor CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
0
5-847-00 Rep Resolution Reduction Rate for Copy Color CTL* [0 to 5 / 2 / 1/step]
1
5-847-00 Rep Resolution Reduction Rate for Copy B&W Text CTL* [0 to 6 / 0 / 1/step]
2
5-847-00 Rep Resolution Reduction Rate for Copy B&W Other CTL* [0 to 6 / 0 / 1/step]
3
5-847-00 Rep Resolution Reduction Rate for Printer Color CTL* [0 to 5 / 2 / 1/step]
4
5-847-00 Rep Resolution Reduction Rate for Printer B&W CTL* [0 to 6 / 0 / 1/step]
5
5-847-00 Rep Resolution Reduction Rate for Printer Color CTL* [0 to 5 / 4 / 1/step]
6 1200dpi
5-847-00 Rep Resolution Reduction Rate for Printer B&W CTL* [0 to 6 / 1 / 1/step]
7 1200dpi
5-847-02 Rep Resolution Reduction Network Quality Default CTL* [5 to 95 / 50 /
1 for JPEG 1/step]
5-848-00 Web Service Access Ctrl: CTL* [0x00 to 0xFF /
2 Repository(onlyLower4bit 0x02 / 0/step]
s)
5-848-00 Web Service Access Ctrl: Doc.Svr.Print CTL* [0x00 to 0xFF /
3 (Lower 4bits) 0x00 / 0/step]

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
5-848-00 Web Service Access Ctrl: udirectory CTL* [0x00 to 0xFF /
5-848-00 Web Service Access Ctrl: Comm. Log CTL* [0x00 to 0xFF /
7 Fax(Lower 4bits) 0x00 / 0/step]
5-848-00 Web Service Access Ctrl: Job Ctrl CTL* [0x00 to 0xFF /
1 Devicemanagement(Lowe 0x00 / 0/step]
r 4bits)
5-848-02 Web Service Access Ctrl: Delivery CTL* [0x00 to 0xFF /
2 uadministration (Lower 0x00 / 0/step]
4bits)
5-848-02 Web Service Access Ctrl: Log Service CTL* [0x00 to 0xFF /
5-848-02 Web Service Access Ctrl: Rest CTL* [0x00 to 0xFF /
5 WebService (Lower 4bits) 0x00 / 0/step]
5-848-04 Web Service Reverse Proxy Server CTL* [0x00 to 0xFF / 0 /
5 Setting(ESA Port) 1/step]
5-848-04 Web Service 8080/51443 Port Open CTL* [0 to 300 / 60 /
6 Time 1/step]
5-848-09 Web Service Repository: Download CTL* [0x00 to 0xFF /
9 Image Setting 0x00 / 1/step]
5-848-10 Web Service Repository: Download CTL* [1 to 2048 / 2048 /
0 Image Max. Size 1/step]
5-848-15 Web Service Log Operation Mode CTL* [0 to 9 / 0 / 1/step]
0
5-848-16 Log Robustness Log Robustness Setting CTL* [0 to 9 / 0 / 1/step]
0
5-848-21 LogTrans Setting: Timing CTL* [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
7
5-848-21 SysLogTrans Setting: Timing CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
8
5-848-22 SysLogTrans Primary srv port number CTL [1 to 65535 / 80 /
0 1/step]

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
5-848-22 SysLogTrans Check Cert CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-849-00 Installation Date Display CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
1
5-849-00 Installation Date Switch to Print CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
2 0: OFF
1: ON
5-849-00 Installation Date Total Counter CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0
3 / 1/step]
5-850-00 Address Book Function Replacement of Circuit CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
3 Classifications
5-851-00 Bluetooth Mode CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1 0: Public
1: Private
5-853-00 Stamp Data Download CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
1
5-856-00 Remote ROM Update Local Port CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
2
5-858-00 Collect Machine Info 0:OFF 1:ON CTL [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
1
5-858-00 Collect Machine Info Save To (0:HDD 1:SD) CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
2
5-858-00 Collect Machine Info Make Log Trace Dir CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 0/step]
3
5-858-10 Collect Machine Info Failure Occuring Date CTL [0 to 20371212 / 0
1 / 1/step]
5-858-10 Collect Machine Info Tracing Days CTL [1 to 180 / 2 /
2 1day/step]
5-858-10 Collect Machine Info Acquire Fax CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
3 Address(0:OFF 1:ON)
5-858-11 Collect Machine Info Acquire All Info & Logs CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 0/step]
1
5-858-12 Collect Machine Info Acquire Configuration CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 0/step]
1 Page
5-858-12 Collect Machine Info Acquire Font Page CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 0/step]
2

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
5-858-12 Collect Machine Info Acquire Print Setting List CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 0/step]
3
5-858-12 Collect Machine Info Acquire Error Log CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 0/step]
4
5-858-13 Collect Machine Info Acquire Fax Info CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 0/step]
1
5-858-14 Collect Machine Info Acquire All Debug Logs CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 0/step]
1
5-858-14 Collect Machine Info Acquire Controller Debug CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 0/step]
2 Logs Only
5-858-14 Collect Machine Info Acquire Engine Debug CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 0/step]
3 Logs Only
5-858-14 Collect Machine Info Acquire Opepanel Debug CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 0/step]
4 Logs Only
5-858-14 Collect Machine Info Acquire FCU Debug Logs CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 0/step]
5 Only
5-858-14 Collect Machine Info Acquire Only Network CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 0/step]
6 Packets
5-860-02 SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 Partial Mail Receive CTL* [1 to 168 / 72 /
0 Timeout 1hour/step]
5-860-02 SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 MDN Response RFC2298 CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
1 Compliance 0: No
1: Yes
5-860-02 SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 SMTP Auth. From Field CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
2 Replacement 0: No
1: Yes
5-860-02 SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 SMTP Auth. Direct Setting CTL* [0 to 0xff / 0x0 /
5 1/step]
5-860-02 SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 S/MIME:MIME Header CTL* [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
6 Setting
5-860-02 SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 S/MIME: Authentication CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
8 Check
5-860-02 SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 SMTP Server 3G Line IP CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0x00
9 Address / /step]
5-861-20 Account Setting Send Domain1 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
1

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
2
3
5-866-00 E-Mail Report Report Validity CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-866-00 E-Mail Report Add Date Field CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
5
5-866-10 E-Mail Report CounterE-Mail:3G Line CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
9 Validity
5-866-11 E-Mail Report CounterE-Mail:Validity CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0
5-866-11 E-Mail Report CounterE-Mail:Destination CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
1 Registration
5-866-11 E-Mail Report CounterE-Mail:Send Test CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
2
5-866-11 E-Mail Report CounterE-Mail:Next Send CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
3 Date
5-866-11 E-Mail Report CounterE-Mail:Send Date CTL* [0 to 31 / 0 /
4 Setting 1/step]
5-866-11 E-Mail Report CounterE-Mail:Send Time CTL* [0 to 2359 / 0 /
5 Setting 1/step]
1 1
2 2
3 3
5-870-00 Common KeyInfo Writing Writing CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-870-00 Common KeyInfo Writing Initialize CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
3
5-870-00 Common Key Info Writing Writing: 2048bit CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
4
5-873-00 SDCardAppliMove MoveExec CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 1/step]
1

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
5-873-00 SDCardAppliMove UndoExec CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 1/step]
2
5-875-00 SC Auto Reboot Reboot Setting CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-875-00 SC Auto Reboot Reboot Type CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
2
5-878-00 Option Setup Data Overwrite Security CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
1
5-878-00 Option Setup OCR Dictionary CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
4
5-881-00 Fixed Phrase Block CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
1 Erasing
5-885-02 Set WIM Function DocSvr Acc Ctrl CTL [0x00 to 0xFF /
0 0x00 / 0/step]
5-885-05 Set WIM Function DocSvr Format CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
0
5-885-05 Set WIM Function DocSvr Trans CTL* [5 to 20 / 10 /
1 1/step]
5-885-10 Set WIM Function Set Signature CTL* [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
0
5-885-10 Set WIM Function Set Encrypsion CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-885-20 Set WIM Function Detect Mem Leak CTL* [0x00 to 0xFF /
0 0x00 / 0/step]
5-885-20 Set WIM Function MonitorDisable CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
5
5-886-10 Farm Update Setting Skip Version Check CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
0
5-886-10 Farm Update Setting Skip LR Check CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-886-11 Farm Update Setting Auto Update Setting CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-886-11 Farm Update Setting Auto Update Prohibit Term CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
2 Setting
5-886-11 Farm Update Setting Auto Update Prohibit Start CTL* [0 to 23 / 9 /
3 hour 1hour/step]

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
5-886-11 Farm Update Setting Auto Update Prohibit End CTL* [0 to 23 / 17 /
4 hour 1hour/step]
5-886-11 Farm Update Setting SFU Auto Download CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
5 Setting
5-886-11 Farm Update Setting Auto Update Next Date CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
6
5-886-11 Farm Update Setting Auto Update Retry Interval CTL* [1 to 24 / 1 /
7 Hour 1hour/step]
5-886-12 Farm Update Setting Auto Update Prohibit Day CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 /
0 of Week Setting 1/step]
5-886-20 Farm Update Setting Restore Date CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
1
5-886-20 Farm Update Setting Save Old Version List CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
2
5-887-00 SD GetCounter CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
1
5-888-00 Personal Information CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1 Protect
5-893-00 SDK Application Counter SDK-1 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
0
1
2
5-894-00 External Counter Option Counter Mode Switch ENG [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
1 Set Setting *
5-895-00 Application invalidation Printer CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 0/step]
1
5-895-00 Application invalidation Scanner CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 0/step]
2
5-900-00 Engine Log Upload Pattern ENG [0 to 4 / 0 / 1/step]
1 *
5-900-00 Engine Log Upload Trigger ENG [0 to 3 / 0 / 1/step]
2 *
5-900-00 Engine Log Upload Execute ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
3
5-907-00 Plug & Play Maker/Model CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 /
1 Name 1/step]
5-913-00 Switchover Permission Print Application Timer CTL* [0 to 30 / 3 /
2 Time 1/step]
5-967-00 Copy Server : Set Function (0:ON 1:OFF) CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-973-10 User Stamp Registration Frame deletion setting CTL* [0 to 3 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-985-00 Device Setting On Board NIC CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
1
5-985-00 Device Setting On Board USB CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
2
5-987-00 Mech. Counter Protection 0:OFF / 1:ON ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
1 *
5-990-00 SP Print Mode All (Data List) CTL [0 to 255 / 0 /
1 0/step]
5-990-00 SP Print Mode SP (Mode Data List) CTL [0 to 255 / 0 /
2 0/step]

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
5-990-00 SP Print Mode User Program CTL [0 to 255 / 0 /
3 0/step]
5-990-00 SP Print Mode Logging Data CTL [0 to 255 / 0 /
4 0/step]
5-990-00 SP Print Mode Diagnostic Report CTL [0 to 255 / 0 /
5 0/step]
5-990-00 SP Print Mode Non-Default CTL [0 to 255 / 0 /
6 0/step]
5-990-00 SP Print Mode NIB Summary CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
7
5-990-00 SP Print Mode Capture Log CTL [0 to 255 / 0 /
8 1/step]
5-990-02 SMC Print Copier User Program CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
1
5-990-02 SP Print Mode Scanner SP CTL [0 to 255 / 0 /
2 0/step]
5-990-02 SP Print Mode Scanner User Program CTL [0 to 255 / 0 /
3 0/step]
5-990-02 SP Print Mode SDK/J Summary CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
4
5-990-02 SP Print Mode SDK/J Application Info CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
5
5-990-02 SP Print Mode Printer SP CTL [0 to 255 / 0 /
6 0/step]
5-990-02 SP Print Mode SmartOperationPanel SP CTL [0 to 255 / 0 /
7 0/step]
5-990-02 SP Print Mode SmartOperationPanel UP CTL [0 to 255 / 0 /
8 0/step]
5-992-00 SP Text Mode All (Data List) CTL [0 to 255 / 0 /
1 0/step]
5-992-00 SP Text Mode SP (Mode Data List) CTL [0 to 255 / 0 /
2 0/step]
5-992-00 SP Text Mode User Program CTL [0 to 255 / 0 /
3 0/step]
5-992-00 SP Text Mode Logging Data CTL [0 to 255 / 0 /
4 0/step]

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
5-992-00 SP Text Mode Diagnostic Report CTL [0 to 255 / 0 /
5 0/step]
5-992-00 SP Text Mode Non-Default CTL [0 to 255 / 0 /
6 0/step]
5-992-00 SP Text Mode NIB Summary CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
7
5-992-00 SP Text Mode Capture Log CTL [0 to 255 / 0 /
8 1/step]
5-992-02 SP Text Mode Copier User Program CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
1
5-992-02 SP Text Mode Scanner SP CTL [0 to 255 / 0 /
2 0/step]
5-992-02 SP Text Mode Scanner User Program CTL [0 to 255 / 0 /
3 0/step]
5-992-02 SP Text Mode SDK/J Summary CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
4
5-992-02 SP Text Mode SDK/J Application Info CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
5
5-992-02 SP Text Mode Printer SP CTL [0 to 255 / 0 /
6 0/step]
5-992-02 SP Text Mode SmartOperationPanel SP CTL [0 to 255 / 0 /
7 0/step]
5-992-02 SP Text Mode SmartOperationPanel UP CTL [0 to 255 / 0 /
8 0/step]
5-993-00 SP Text Mode(Privacy) All (Data List) CTL [0 to 255 / 0 /
1 0/step]
5-993-00 SP Text Mode(Privacy) SP (Mode Data List) CTL [0 to 255 / 0 /
2 0/step]
5-993-00 SP Text Mode(Privacy) User Program CTL [0 to 255 / 0 /
3 0/step]
5-993-00 SP Text Mode(Privacy) Logging Data CTL [0 to 255 / 0 /
4 0/step]
5-993-00 SP Text Mode(Privacy) Diagnostic Report CTL [0 to 255 / 0 /
5 0/step]
5-993-00 SP Text Mode(Privacy) Non-Default CTL [0 to 255 / 0 /
6 0/step]

SP5-XXX (Mode)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
5-993-00 SP Text Mode(Privacy) NIB Summary CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
7
5-993-00 SP Text Mode(Privacy) Capture Log CTL [0 to 255 / 0 /
8 1/step]
5-993-02 SP Text Mode(Privacy) Copier User Program CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
1
5-993-02 SP Text Mode(Privacy) Scanner SP CTL [0 to 255 / 0 /
2 0/step]
5-993-02 SP Text Mode(Privacy) Scanner User Program CTL [0 to 255 / 0 /
3 0/step]
5-993-02 SP Text Mode(Privacy) SDK/J Summary CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
4
5-993-02 SP Text Mode(Privacy) SDK/J Application Info CTL [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
5
5-993-02 SP Text Mode(Privacy) Printer SP CTL [0 to 255 / 0 /
6 0/step]
5-993-02 SP Text Mode(Privacy) SmartOperationPanel SP CTL [0 to 255 / 0 /
7 0/step]
5-993-02 SP Text Mode(Privacy) SmartOperationPanel UP CTL [0 to 255 / 0 /
8 0/step]
5-998-00 Fusing Precedence Warm On/Off ENG [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
1 Up * 0: OFF
1: ON

SP6-XXX (Peripherals)
3.8 SP6-XXX (PERIPHERALS)

CTL
6-006-001 ADF Adjustment Side-to-Side Regist:Face ENG* [-3.0 to 3.0 / 0.0 /
0.1mm/step]
6-006-002 ADF Adjustment Side-to-Side Regist ENG* [-2.0 to 2.0 / 0.0 /
(1-Pass):Back 0.1mm/step]
6-006-003 ADF Adjustment L-Edge Regist ENG* [-5.0 to 5.0 / 0.0 /
(ARDF):Face 0.1mm/step]
(ARDF):Back 0.1mm/step]
6-006-005 ADF Adjustment Side-to-Side Regist ENG* [-3.0 to 3.0 / 0.0 /
(ARDF):Back 0.1mm/step]
6-006-007 ADF Adjustment T-Edge Erase (ARDF) ENG* [-5.0 to 5.0 / -1.6 /
0.1mm/step]
(1-Pass):Face 0.1mm/step]
6-006-014 ADF Adjustment T-Edge Erase Width ENG* [-5.0 to 5.0 / -1.6 /
(1-Pass):Face 0.1mm/step]
6-006-015 ADF Adjustment T-Edge Erase Width ENG* [-5.0 to 5.0 / -1.6 /
6-007-009 ADF INPUT Check Original Detection ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
Sensor 1STEP/step]
6-007-013 ADF INPUT Check Registration Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1STEP/step]
6-007-015 ADF INPUT Check Feed Cover Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1STEP/step]
6-008-003 ADF OUTPUT Transport Motor:Forword ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
Check 1STEP/step]
6-008-004 ADF OUTPUT Transport Motor:Reverse ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
Check 1STEP/step]
6-008-009 ADF OUTPUT ADF:Feed Solenoid ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
Check 1STEP/step]
6-008-011 ADF OUTPUT ADF:Revers Solenoid ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
Check 1STEP/step]


CTL
6-009-001 ADF Free Run Simplex Mode ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1STEP/step]
6-009-002 ADF Free Run Duplex Mode ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1STEP/step]
6-011-009 1-Pass ADF INPUT Original Detection ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
Check 1STEP/step]
6-011-010 1-Pass ADF INPUT DF Feed Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
Check 1STEP/step]
6-011-013 1-Pass ADF INPUT Registration Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
Check 1STEP/step]
6-011-015 1-Pass ADF INPUT Feed Cover Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
Check 1STEP/step]
6-011-024 1-Pass ADF INPUT Page Keeper Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
Check
6-012-003 1-Pass ADF Motor Forward ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
OUTPUT Check 1STEP/step]
6-012-004 1-Pass ADF Motor Reverse ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
6-012-014 1-Pass ADF Feed Clutch ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
6-017-001 ADF Adjustment ENG* [-5.0 to 5.0 / 0.0 /
L-Edge Mag 0.1%/step]
6-018-001 1-Pass ADF Back shading ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
6-021-001 ARDF Motor Gain Selection ENG* [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
6-030-001 DF Hinge Hinge Open Counter ENG* [0 to 999999 / 0 /
1/step]
6-030-002 DF Hinge Hinge Open State ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
6-030-003 DF Hinge Hinge Open Counter ENG [0 to 0 / 0 / 0/step]
Clear
6-040-001 Page Keeper Mount Select ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
6-040-005 Page Keeper Clear Select ENG* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
6-132-003 Jogger Fence Fine A4 SEF ENG* [-1.0 to 1.0 / 0.0 /
Adj. 0.1mm/step]
6-132-005 Jogger Fence Fine B5 SEF ENG* [-1.0 to 1.0 / 0.0 /
Adj. 0.1mm/step]
6-132-008 Jogger Fence Fine LG SEF ENG* [-1.0 to 1.0 / 0.0 /


CTL
Adj. 0.1mm/step]
6-132-009 Jogger Fence Fine LT SEF ENG* [-1.0 to 1.0 / 0.0 /
Adj. 0.1mm/step]
6-132-012 Jogger Fence Fine Other ENG* [-1.0 to 1.0 / 0.0 /
Adj. 0.1mm/step]
6-137-001 Finisher Free Run Free Run1 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
6-145-001 FIN Input Check Entrance Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
6-145-002 FIN Input Check Paper Exit Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
6-145-003 FIN Input Check Jogger HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
6-145-004 FIN Input Check Shift Roller HP SN ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
6-145-005 FIN Input Check Positioning Roller HP SN ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
6-145-006 FIN Input Check Ext Guide Plate HP SN ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
6-145-007 FIN Input Check Staple Tray Paper SN ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
6-145-008 FIN Input Check Tray Paper Height SN ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
6-145-009 FIN Input Check Tray Overflow SN ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
6-145-010 FIN Input Check Staple HP Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
6-145-011 FIN Input Check Staple Near End SN ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
6-145-012 FIN Input Check Self Priming Sensor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
6-145-013 FIN Input Check Front Door SW ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
6-146-001 FIN Output Check Transport Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
6-146-002 FIN Output Check Paper Ext Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
6-146-003 FIN Output Check Jogger Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
6-146-004 FIN Output Check Shift Roller Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
6-146-005 FIN Output Check Positioning Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
6-146-006 FIN Output Check Ext Guide Plate Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
6-146-007 FIN Output Check Tray Lift Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
6-146-008 FIN Output Check Stapler Motor ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
6-146-009 FIN Output Check Paper Height SOL ENG [0 to 1 / 0 / 1/step]
6-830-001 Extra Staples 0 to 50 (Initial:0) CTL* [0 to 50 / 0 / 1/step]

SP7-XXX (Data Log)
3.9 SP7-XXX (DATA LOG)
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
7-334-001 Function Use Count Original Orientation CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0
/ 0/step]
7-334-002 Function Use Count Reverse Orientation CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0
/ 0/step]
7-334-003 Function Use Count All Job Stop CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0
/ 0/step]
7-334-004 Function Use Count Copy Quality CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0
/ 0/step]
7-334-005 Function Use Count Mag. FixRatio CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0
/ 0/step]
7-334-006 Function Use Count Mag. Ratio CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0
/ 0/step]
7-334-007 Function Use Count Size Mag. CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0
/ 0/step]
7-334-008 Function Use Count Direct. Mag. CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0
/ 0/step]
7-334-009 Function Use Count Dir. Size Mag. CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0
/ 0/step]
7-334-010 Function Use Count Auto Reduce/Enlarge CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0
/ 0/step]
7-334-011 Function Use Count Create Margin CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0
/ 0/step]
7-334-012 Function Use Count OneSideDpx CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0
/ 0/step]
7-334-013 Function Use Count Cover CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0
/ 0/step]
7-334-014 Function Use Count Chapter CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0
/ 0/step]
7-334-015 Function Use Count SlipSheet CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0
/ 0/step]
7-334-016 Function Use Count EraseCenter CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0
/ 0/step]
7-334-017 Function Use Count EraseFrame CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
/ 0/step]
7-334-018 Function Use Count MarginAdj CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0
/ 0/step]
7-334-019 Function Use Count Centering CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0
/ 0/step]
7-334-021 Function Use Count Repeat CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0
/ 0/step]
7-334-024 Function Use Count NumBeringStmp CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0
/ 0/step]
7-334-025 Function Use Count Stmp CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0
/ 0/step]
7-334-026 Function Use Count UserStmp CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0
/ 0/step]
7-334-027 Function Use Count DateStmp CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0
/ 0/step]
7-334-028 Function Use Count PageStmp CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0
/ 0/step]
7-334-029 Function Use Count CharStmp CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0
/ 0/step]
7-334-030 Function Use Count CharNumStmp CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0
/ 0/step]
7-334-031 Function Use Count JimonStmp CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0
/ 0/step]
7-334-032 Function Use Count ReserveCopy CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0
/ 0/step]
7-334-033 Function Use Count IntCopy CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0
/ 0/step]
7-334-034 Function Use Count ProgrameCopy CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0
/ 0/step]
7-334-035 Function Use Count CheckCopy CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0
/ 0/step]
7-334-036 Function Use Count BackNum CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0
/ 0/step]
7-334-037 Function Use Count FullColor CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0
/ 0/step]
7-334-038 Function Use Count TwoColor CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
/ 0/step]
7-334-039 Function Use Count SingleColor CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0
/ 0/step]
7-334-040 Function Use Count MonoColor CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0
/ 0/step]
7-334-041 Function Use Count Acs CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0
/ 0/step]
7-334-042 Function Use Count Accessibility CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0
/ 0/step]
7-334-044 Function Use Count Jewelry CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0
/ 0/step]
7-335-001 Total Job Count LegacyCopy CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0
/ 0/step]
7-335-002 Total Job Count SmartCopy CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0
/ 0/step]
7-335-003 Total Job Count SmartCopy FullHouse CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0
/ 0/step]
7-335-004 Total Job Count SimpleCopy CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0
/ 0/step]
7-335-005 Total Job Count OtherCopy CTL* [0 to 0xffffffff / 0
/ 0/step]
7-401-001 Total SC SC Counter CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-401-002 Total SC Total SC Counter CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-403-001 SC History Latest CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-403-002 SC History Latest 1 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
0/step]
0/step]
0/step]

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
0/step]
0/step]
0/step]
0/step]
0/step]
7-404-001 Software Error History Latest CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-404-002 Software Error History Latest 1 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
0/step]
0/step]
0/step]
0/step]
0/step]
0/step]
0/step]
0/step]
7-502-001 Total Paper Jam Jam Counter CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-502-002 Total Paper Jam Total Jam Counter CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-503-001 Total Original Jam Original Jam Counter CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-503-002 Total Original Jam Total Original Jam Counter CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
/ 0/step]
7-504-001 Paper Jam Location At Power On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-504-003 Paper Jam Location Tray1: On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
/ 0/step]
/ 0/step]
/ 0/step]
7-504-008 Paper Jam Location Regist Sn: On(Bypass) CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-504-009 Paper Jam Location Regist Sn: On(Dup) CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-504-010 Paper Jam Location Regist:NoPaperBuckle(Dup) CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-504-011 Paper Jam Location Regist Sn: On (Tray) CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-504-012 Paper Jam Location Bank Transport Sn 1: On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-504-013 Paper Jam Location Bank Transport Sn 2: On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-504-014 Paper Jam Location Regist Sn: On(Bank) CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-504-015 Paper Jam Location Regist:NoPaperBuckle(Bypass) CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-504-016 Paper Jam Location Regist:NoPaperBuckle(Bank) CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-504-017 Paper Jam Location Regist:NoPaperBuckle(Tray) CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-504-018 Paper Jam Location Fusing Entrance: On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-504-019 Paper Jam Location Fusing Exit: On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-504-020 Paper Jam Location Paper Exit: On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
/ 0/step]
7-504-021 Paper Jam Location 1bin: Exit Sensor: On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-504-025 Paper Jam Location Duplex Exit : On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-504-026 Paper Jam Location Duplex Entrance: On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-504-050 Paper Jam Location Regist Sn: Off(Dup) CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-504-052 Paper Jam Location Bank Transport Sn 1: Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
/ 0/step]
/ 0/step]
7-504-055 Paper Jam Location Regist Sn: Off(Bypass) CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-504-056 Paper Jam Location Regist Sn: Off(Bank) CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-504-057 Paper Jam Location Regist Sn: Off(Tray) CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-504-060 Paper Jam Location Paper Exit: Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-504-061 Paper Jam Location 1bin: Exit Sensor: Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-504-065 Paper Jam Location Duplex Exit : Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-504-066 Paper Jam Location Duplex Entrance: Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-504-230 Paper Jam Location NoFinsherResp CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-504-240 Paper Jam Location EntSns:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-504-241 Paper Jam Location EntSns:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-504-242 Paper Jam Location Paper Exit CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
/ 0/step]
7-504-243 Paper Jam Location Jogger Mtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-504-244 Paper Jam Location ShiftRollerMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-504-245 Paper Jam Location PosRollerMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-504-246 Paper Jam Location ExGuidePlateMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-504-247 Paper Jam Location Tray Lift Mtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-504-248 Paper Jam Location Stapler Mtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-504-249 Paper Jam Location PaperStopperMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-504-250 Paper Jam Location Invalid Data CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-505-001 Original Jam Detection At Power On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-505-004 Original Jam Detection Regist Sn: On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-505-013 Original Jam Detection DF Feed Sn:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-505-054 Original Jam Detection Regist Sn: Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-505-063 Original Jam Detection DF Feed Sn:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-505-097 Original Jam Detection Timing Error CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-505-098 Original Jam Detection Narrow Interval CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-505-099 Original Jam Detection Double Feed CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-505-100 Original Jam Detection Motor Error CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-506-006 Jam Count by Paper A5 LEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
Size / 0/step]
7-506-044 Jam Count by Paper HLT LEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Size / 0/step]
7-506-133 Jam Count by Paper A4 SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Size / 0/step]
7-506-134 Jam Count by Paper A5 SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Size / 0/step]
7-506-142 Jam Count by Paper B5 SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Size / 0/step]
7-506-164 Jam Count by Paper LG SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Size / 0/step]
7-506-166 Jam Count by Paper LT SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Size / 0/step]
7-506-172 Jam Count by Paper HLT SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Size / 0/step]
7-506-255 Jam Count by Paper Others CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Size / 0/step]
7-507-001 Plotter Jam History Latest CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-507-002 Plotter Jam History Latest 1 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
0/step]
0/step]
0/step]
0/step]
0/step]
0/step]
0/step]

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
0/step]
7-508-001 Original Jam History Latest CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-508-002 Original Jam History Latest 1 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
0/step]
0/step]
0/step]
0/step]
0/step]
0/step]
0/step]
0/step]
7-514-001 Paper Jam Count by At Power On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0/step]
7-514-003 Paper Jam Count by Tray1: On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0/step]
Location / 0/step]
Location / 0/step]
Location / 0/step]
7-514-008 Paper Jam Count by Regist Sn: On(Bypass) CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0/step]
7-514-009 Paper Jam Count by Regist Sn: On(Dup) CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0/step]
7-514-010 Paper Jam Count by Regist:NoPaperBuckle(Dup) CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
Location / 0/step]
7-514-011 Paper Jam Count by Regist Sn: On (Tray) CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0/step]
7-514-012 Paper Jam Count by Bank Transport Sn 1: On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0/step]
7-514-013 Paper Jam Count by Bank Transport Sn 2: On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0/step]
7-514-014 Paper Jam Count by Regist Sn: On(Bank) CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0/step]
7-514-015 Paper Jam Count by Regist:NoPaperBuckle(Bypass) CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0/step]
7-514-016 Paper Jam Count by Regist:NoPaperBuckle(Bank) CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0/step]
7-514-017 Paper Jam Count by Regist:NoPaperBuckle(Tray) CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0/step]
7-514-018 Paper Jam Count by Fusing Entrance: On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0/step]
7-514-019 Paper Jam Count by Fusing Exit: On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0/step]
7-514-020 Paper Jam Count by Paper Exit: On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0/step]
7-514-021 Paper Jam Count by 1bin: Exit Sensor: On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0/step]
7-514-025 Paper Jam Count by Duplex Exit : On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0/step]
7-514-026 Paper Jam Count by Duplex Entrance: On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0/step]
7-514-050 Paper Jam Count by Regist Sn: Off(Dup) CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0/step]
7-514-052 Paper Jam Count by Bank Transport Sn 1: Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0/step]
Location / 0/step]
Location / 0/step]
7-514-055 Paper Jam Count by Regist Sn: Off(Bypass) CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
Location / 0/step]
7-514-056 Paper Jam Count by Regist Sn: Off(Bank) CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0/step]
7-514-057 Paper Jam Count by Regist Sn: Off(Tray) CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0/step]
7-514-060 Paper Jam Count by Paper Exit: Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0/step]
7-514-061 Paper Jam Count by 1bin: Exit Sensor: Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0/step]
7-514-065 Paper Jam Count by Duplex Exit : Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0/step]
7-514-066 Paper Jam Count by Duplex Entrance: Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0/step]
7-514-230 Paper Jam Count by NoFinsherResp CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0/step]
7-514-240 Paper Jam Count by EntSns:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0/step]
7-514-241 Paper Jam Count by EntSns:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0/step]
7-514-242 Paper Jam Count by Paper Exit CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0/step]
7-514-243 Paper Jam Count by Jogger Mtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0/step]
7-514-244 Paper Jam Count by ShiftRollerMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0/step]
7-514-245 Paper Jam Count by PosRollerMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0/step]
7-514-246 Paper Jam Count by ExGuidePlateMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0/step]
7-514-247 Paper Jam Count by Tray Lift Mtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0/step]
7-514-248 Paper Jam Count by Stapler Mtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0/step]
7-514-249 Paper Jam Count by PaperStopperMtr CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Location / 0/step]
7-514-250 Paper Jam Count by Invalid Data CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
Location / 0/step]
7-515-001 Original Jam Count by At Power On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Detection / 0/step]
7-515-004 Original Jam Count by Regist Sn: On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Detection / 0/step]
7-515-013 Original Jam Count by DF Feed Sn:On CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Detection / 0/step]
7-515-054 Original Jam Count by Regist Sn: Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Detection / 0/step]
7-515-063 Original Jam Count by DF Feed Sn:Off CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Detection / 0/step]
7-515-097 Original Jam Count by Timing Error CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Detection / 0/step]
7-515-098 Original Jam Count by Narrow Interval CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Detection / 0/step]
7-515-099 Original Jam Count by Double Feed CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Detection / 0/step]
7-515-100 Original Jam Count by Motor Error CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
Detection / 0/step]
7-516-006 Paper Size Jam Count A5 LEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-516-044 Paper Size Jam Count HLT LEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-516-133 Paper Size Jam Count A4 SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-516-134 Paper Size Jam Count A5 SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-516-142 Paper Size Jam Count B5 SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-516-164 Paper Size Jam Count LG SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-516-166 Paper Size Jam Count LT SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-516-172 Paper Size Jam Count HLT SEF CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 0/step]
7-516-255 Paper Size Jam Count Others CTL* [0 to 65535 / 0

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
/ 0/step]
7-520-001 Update Log ErrorRecord1 CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
7-520-011 Update Log Auto:StartDate1 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
0/step]
0/step]
0/step]
0/step]
7-520-021 Update Log Auto:EndDate1 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
0/step]

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
0/step]
0/step]
0/step]
7-520-031 Update Log Auto:Piecemark1 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
0/step]
0/step]
0/step]
0/step]
7-520-041 Update Log Auto:Version1 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
0/step]
0/step]
0/step]
0/step]
7-520-051 Update Log Auto:Result1 CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
7-617-001 PM Parts Counter Normal CTL* [0 to 9999999 /
Display 0 / 0/step]
7-617-002 PM Parts Counter Df CTL* [0 to 9999999 /
Display 0 / 0/step]
7-618-001 PM Parts Counter Normal CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
Reset 0/step]
7-618-002 PM Parts Counter Df CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
Reset 0/step]
7-621-002 PM Counter Display: # PCU:Bk ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-621-003 PM Counter Display: # Dev Unit:Bk ENG* [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-621-025 PM Counter Display: # PCU:C ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-621-026 PM Counter Display: # Dev Unit:C ENG* [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-621-048 PM Counter Display: # PCU:M ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-621-049 PM Counter Display: # Dev Unit:M ENG* [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-621-071 PM Counter Display: # PCU:Y ENG [0 to 99999999

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-621-072 PM Counter Display: # Dev Unit:Y ENG* [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-621-093 PM Counter Display: # ITB Unit ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-621-102 PM Counter Display: # ITB Cleaning Unit ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-621-109 PM Counter Display: # PTR Unit ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-621-115 PM Counter Display: # Fusing Unit ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-621-116 PM Counter Display: Fusing Sleeve ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-621-118 PM Counter Display: Pressure Roller ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-621-142 PM Counter Display: #Waste Toner bottle ENG [0 to
Pages 999999999 / 0
/ 1mg/step]
7-621-145 PM Counter Display: Tray1 Roller Assembly ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-621-147 PM Counter Display: #IMC300:PaperFeedRoller:Tray1 ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-621-148 PM Counter Display: #IMC300:FrictionPad:Tray1 ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-621-149 PM Counter Display: Tray 2 Roller Assembly ENG [0 to 99999999

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-621-150 PM Counter Display: #Paper Feed Roller:Tray 2 ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-621-151 PM Counter Display: #Friction Pad:Bank 2 ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
Pages /0/
1page/step]
Pages /0/
1page/step]
Pages /0/
1page/step]
Pages /0/
1page/step]
Pages /0/
1page/step]
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-621-158 PM Counter Display: #IMC400:Pick-upRoller:Tray1 ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-621-159 PM Counter Display: #IMC400:FeedingRoller:Tray1 ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-621-160 PM Counter Display: #IMC400:SeparationRoller:Tray1 ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-621-169 PM Counter Display: #Feed Roller:Bypass ENG [0 to 99999999

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-621-206 PM Counter Display: DF Friction Pad ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-621-207 PM Counter Display: DF Pickup Roller ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-621-208 PM Counter Display: DF Feed Roller ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-622-002 PM Counter Clear # PCU:Bk ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-622-003 PM Counter Clear # Dev Unit:Bk ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-622-025 PM Counter Clear # PCU:C ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-622-026 PM Counter Clear # Dev Unit:C ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-622-048 PM Counter Clear # PCU:M ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-622-049 PM Counter Clear # Dev Unit:M ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-622-071 PM Counter Clear # PCU:Y ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-622-072 PM Counter Clear # Dev Unit:Y ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-622-093 PM Counter Clear # ITB Unit ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-622-102 PM Counter Clear # ITB Cleaning Unit ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-622-109 PM Counter Clear # PTR Unit ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-622-115 PM Counter Clear # Fusing Unit ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-622-116 PM Counter Clear Fusing Sleeve ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1/step]
7-622-118 PM Counter Clear Pressure Roller ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-622-145 PM Counter Clear Tray1 Roller Assembly ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-622-147 PM Counter Clear #IMC300:PaperFeedRoller:Tray1 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-622-148 PM Counter Clear #IMC300:FrictionPad:Tray1 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-622-149 PM Counter Clear Tray 2 Roller Assembly ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-622-150 PM Counter Clear #Paper Feed Roller:Tray 2 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-622-151 PM Counter Clear #Friction Pad:Bank 2 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
7-622-158 PM Counter Clear #IMC400:Pick-upRoller:Tray1 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-622-159 PM Counter Clear #IMC400:FeedingRoller:Tray1 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-622-160 PM Counter Clear #IMC400:SeparationRoller:Tray1 ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-622-169 PM Counter Clear #Feed Roller:Bypass ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-622-206 PM Counter Clear DF Friction Pad ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
1/step]
7-622-207 PM Counter Clear DF Pickup Roller ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-622-208 PM Counter Clear DF Feed Roller ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-622-220 PM Counter Clear Toner Sub Hopper:Bk ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-622-221 PM Counter Clear Toner Sub Hopper:C ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-622-222 PM Counter Clear Toner Sub Hopper:M ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-622-223 PM Counter Clear Toner Sub Hopper:Y ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-622-245 PM Counter Clear PCU:All Colors ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-622-246 PM Counter Clear Development Unit:All Colors ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-622-249 PM Counter Clear Toner Sub Hopper:All Colors ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-622-250 PM Counter Clear All Clear ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-623-002 PM Value Setting: Life # PCU:Bk ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-623-003 PM Value Setting: Life # Dev Unit:Bk ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-623-025 PM Value Setting: Life # PCU:C ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-623-026 PM Value Setting: Life # Dev Unit:C ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-623-048 PM Value Setting: Life # PCU:M ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
7-623-049 PM Value Setting: Life # Dev Unit:M ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-623-071 PM Value Setting: Life # PCU:Y ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-623-072 PM Value Setting: Life # Dev Unit:Y ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-623-093 PM Value Setting: Life # ITB Unit ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages / 120000 /
1page/step]
7-623-102 PM Value Setting: Life # ITB Cleaning Unit ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages / 120000 /
1page/step]
7-623-109 PM Value Setting: Life # PTR Unit ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages / 120000 /
1page/step]
7-623-115 PM Value Setting: Life # Fusing Unit ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages / 120000 /
1page/step]
7-623-116 PM Value Setting: Life Fusing Sleeve ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages / 120000 /
1page/step]
7-623-118 PM Value Setting: Life Pressure Roller ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages / 120000 /
1page/step]
7-623-142 PM Value Setting: Life #Waste Toner bottle ENG [0 to
Pages 999999999 /
800000 /
1mg/step]
7-623-145 PM Value Setting Life Tray1 Roller Assembly ENG IM C300
Pages series: [0 to
99999999 /
120000 /
1page/step]

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
IM C400
series: [0 to
99999999 /
300000 /
1page/step]
7-623-147 PM Value Setting Life #IMC300:PaperFeedRoller:Tray1 ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages / 120000 /
1page/step]
7-623-148 PM Value Setting Life #IMC300:FrictionPad:Tray1 ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages / 120000 /
1page/step]
7-623-149 PM Value Setting Life Tray 2 Roller Assembly ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages / 120000 /
1page/step]
7-623-150 PM Value Setting Life #Paper Feed Roller:Tray 2 ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages / 120000 /
1page/step]
7-623-151 PM Value Setting Life #Friction Pad:Bank 2 ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages / 120000 /
1page/step]
Pages / 120000 /
1page/step]
Pages / 120000 /
1page/step]
Pages / 120000 /
1page/step]
Pages / 120000 /
1page/step]
Pages / 120000 /
1page/step]

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
Pages / 120000 /
1page/step]
7-623-158 PM Value Setting Life #IMC400:Pick-upRoller:Tray1 ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages / 300000 /
1page/step]
7-623-159 PM Value Setting Life #IMC400:FeedingRoller:Tray1 ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages / 300000 /
1page/step]
7-623-160 PM Value Setting Life #IMC400:SeparationRoller:Tray1 ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages / 300000 /
1page/step]
7-623-169 PM Value Setting Life #Feed Roller:Bypass ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages / 120000 /
1page/step]
7-624-002 Part Replacement #PCU:Bk CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 /
Operation ON/OFF 1/step]
0: No
1: Yes
7-624-025 Part Replacement #PCU:C CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 /
0: No
1: Yes
7-624-048 Part Replacement #PCU:M CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 /
0: No
1: Yes
7-624-071 Part Replacement #PCU:Y CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 /
0: No
1: Yes
7-624-093 Part Replacement #Image Transfer Belt Unit CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 /
0: No
1: Yes
7-624-109 Part Replacement #Paper Transfer Roller Unit CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 /

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
0: No
1: Yes
7-624-115 Part Replacement #Fusing Unit CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 /
0: No
1: Yes
7-624-116 Part Replacement Fusing Sleeve CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 /
0: No
1: Yes
7-624-118 Part Replacement Pressure Roller CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 /
0: No
1: Yes
7-624-142 Part Replacement #Wast Toner bottle CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 /
0: No
1: Yes
7-624-147 Part Replacement #Paper Feed Roller:Tray1 CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 /
0: No
1: Yes
7-624-148 Part Replacement #Friction Pad:Tray1 CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 /
0: No
1: Yes
7-624-150 Part Replacement #Paper Feed Roller:Tray 2 CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 /
0: No
1: Yes
7-624-151 Part Replacement #Friction Pad:Bank 2 CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 /
0: No
1: Yes

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
0: No
1: Yes
0: No
1: Yes
0: No
1: Yes
0: No
1: Yes
7-624-158 Part Replacement #Pick-up Roller:Tray1 CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 /
0: No
1: Yes
7-624-159 Part Replacement #Feeding Roller:Tray1 CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 /
0: No
1: Yes
7-624-160 Part Replacement #Separation Roller:Tray1 CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 /
0: No
1: Yes
7-624-169 Part Replacement #Feed Roller:Bypass CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 /
0: No
1: Yes
7-625-002 Previous Unit Counter: # PCU:Bk ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-625-003 Previous Unit Counter: # Dev Unit:Bk ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
7-625-025 Previous Unit Counter: # PCU:C ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-625-026 Previous Unit Counter: # Dev Unit:C ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-625-048 Previous Unit Counter: # PCU:M ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-625-049 Previous Unit Counter: # Dev Unit:M ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-625-071 Previous Unit Counter: # PCU:Y ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-625-072 Previous Unit Counter: # Dev Unit:Y ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-625-093 Previous Unit Counter: # ITB Unit ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-625-102 Previous Unit Counter: # ITB Cleaning Unit ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-625-109 Previous Unit Counter: # PTR Unit ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-625-115 Previous Unit Counter: # Fusing Unit ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-625-116 Previous Unit Counter: Fusing Sleeve ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-625-118 Previous Unit Counter: Pressure Roller ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
7-625-142 Previous Unit Counter: #Waste Toner bottle ENG [0 to
Pages 999999999 / 0
/ 1mg/step]
7-625-145 Previous Unit Counter: Tray1 Roller Assembly ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-625-147 Previous Unit Counter: #IMC300:PaperFeedRoller:Tray1 ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-625-148 Previous Unit Counter: #IMC300:FrictionPad:Tray1 ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-625-149 Previous Unit Counter: Tray 2 Roller Assembly ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-625-150 Previous Unit Counter: #Paper Feed Roller:Tray 2 ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-625-151 Previous Unit Counter: #Friction Pad:Bank 2 ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
Pages /0/
1page/step]
Pages /0/
1page/step]
Pages /0/
1page/step]
Pages /0/
1page/step]
Pages /0/
1page/step]

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-625-158 Previous Unit Counter: #IMC400:Pick-upRoller:Tray1 ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-625-159 Previous Unit Counter: #IMC400:FeedingRoller:Tray1 ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-625-160 Previous Unit Counter: #IMC400:SeparationRoller:Tray1 ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-625-169 Previous Unit Counter: #Feed Roller:Bypass ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-625-206 Previous Unit Counter: DF Friction Pad ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-625-207 Previous Unit Counter: DF Pickup Roller ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-625-208 Previous Unit Counter: DF Feed Roller ENG [0 to 99999999
Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-626-002 Previous Unit # PCU:Bk ENG [0 to 99999999
Counter2: Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-626-003 Previous Unit # Dev Unit:Bk ENG [0 to 99999999
Counter2: Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-626-025 Previous Unit # PCU:C ENG [0 to 99999999
Counter2: Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-626-026 Previous Unit # Dev Unit:C ENG [0 to 99999999
Counter2: Pages /0/
1page/step]

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
7-626-048 Previous Unit # PCU:M ENG [0 to 99999999
Counter2: Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-626-049 Previous Unit # Dev Unit:M ENG [0 to 99999999
Counter2: Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-626-071 Previous Unit # PCU:Y ENG [0 to 99999999
Counter2: Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-626-072 Previous Unit # Dev Unit:Y ENG [0 to 99999999
Counter2: Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-626-093 Previous Unit # ITB Unit ENG [0 to 99999999
Counter2: Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-626-102 Previous Unit # ITB Cleaning Unit ENG [0 to 99999999
Counter2: Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-626-109 Previous Unit # PTR Unit ENG [0 to 99999999
Counter2: Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-626-115 Previous Unit # Fusing Unit ENG [0 to 99999999
Counter2: Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-626-116 Previous Unit Fusing Sleeve ENG [0 to 99999999
Counter2: Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-626-118 Previous Unit Pressure Roller ENG [0 to 99999999
Counter2: Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-626-142 Previous Unit #Waste Toner bottle ENG [0 to
Counter2: Pages 999999999 / 0
/ 1mg/step]
7-626-145 Previous Unit Tray1 Roller Assembly ENG [0 to 99999999
Counter2: Pages /0/
1page/step]

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
7-626-147 Previous Unit #IMC300:PaperFeedRoller:Tray1 ENG [0 to 99999999
Counter2: Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-626-148 Previous Unit #IMC300:FrictionPad:Tray1 ENG [0 to 99999999
Counter2: Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-626-149 Previous Unit Tray 2 Roller Assembly ENG [0 to 99999999
Counter2: Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-626-150 Previous Unit #Paper Feed Roller:Tray 2 ENG [0 to 99999999
Counter2: Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-626-151 Previous Unit #Friction Pad:Bank 2 ENG [0 to 99999999
Counter2: Pages /0/
1page/step]
Counter2: Pages /0/
1page/step]
Counter2: Pages /0/
1page/step]
Counter2: Pages /0/
1page/step]
Counter2: Pages /0/
1page/step]
Counter2: Pages /0/
1page/step]
Counter2: Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-626-158 Previous Unit #IMC400:Pick-upRoller:Tray1 ENG [0 to 99999999
Counter2: Pages /0/
1page/step]

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
7-626-159 Previous Unit #IMC400:FeedingRoller:Tray1 ENG [0 to 99999999
Counter2: Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-626-160 Previous Unit #IMC400:SeparationRoller:Tray1 ENG [0 to 99999999
Counter2: Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-626-169 Previous Unit #Feed Roller:Bypass ENG [0 to 99999999
Counter2: Pages /0/
1page/step]
7-628-002 PM Counter Clear All Clear ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-700-001 Accum Cvrg 1 img Bk ENG* [0.0 to
Process.:Disp 400000000.0 /
0.0 /
0.1%/step]
7-700-002 Accum Cvrg 1 img C ENG* [0.0 to
0.0 /
0.1%/step]
7-700-003 Accum Cvrg 1 img M ENG* [0.0 to
0.0 /
0.1%/step]
7-700-004 Accum Cvrg 1 img Y ENG* [0.0 to
0.0 /
0.1%/step]
7-701-001 Accum Cvrg 2 img Bk ENG* [0.0 to
0.0 /
0.1%/step]
7-701-002 Accum Cvrg 2 img C ENG* [0.0 to
0.0 /
0.1%/step]
7-701-003 Accum Cvrg 2 img M ENG* [0.0 to

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
0.0 /
0.1%/step]
7-701-004 Accum Cvrg 2 img Y ENG* [0.0 to
0.0 /
0.1%/step]
7-710-001 Print Pages: Display Bk ENG* [0 to 99999999
/0/
1page/step]
7-710-002 Print Pages: Display C ENG* [0 to 99999999
/0/
1page/step]
7-710-003 Print Pages: Display M ENG* [0 to 99999999
/0/
1page/step]
7-710-004 Print Pages: Display Y ENG* [0 to 99999999
/0/
1page/step]
7-720-001 Avg. Cvrg for img.: Bk ENG* [0.00 to 100.00
Display / 0.00 /
0.01%/step]
7-720-002 Avg. Cvrg for img.: C ENG* [0.00 to 100.00
Display / 0.00 /
0.01%/step]
7-720-003 Avg. Cvrg for img.: M ENG* [0.00 to 100.00
Display / 0.00 /
0.01%/step]
7-720-004 Avg. Cvrg for img.: Y ENG* [0.00 to 100.00
Display / 0.00 /
0.01%/step]
7-801-002 ROM No. Engine ENG [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-801-007 ROM No. Finisher ENG [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-801-009 ROM No. PFU ENG [0 to 0 / 0 /

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
0/step]
7-801-019 ROM No. PFU2 ENG [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-801-040 ROM No. PFU3 ENG [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-801-102 Firmware Version Engine ENG [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-801-107 Firmware Version Finisher ENG [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-801-109 Firmware Version PFU ENG [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-801-119 Firmware Version PFU2 ENG [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-801-140 Firmware Version PFU3 ENG [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-801-255 ROM No./ Firmware CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
Version 0/step]
7-803-001 PM Counter Display Paper CTL* [0 to 9999999 /
0 / 0/step]
7-804-001 PM Counter Reset Paper CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-807-001 SC/Jam Counter Reset CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-826-001 MF Error Counter Error Total CTL* [0 to 9999999 /
0 / 0/step]
7-826-002 MF Error Counter Error Staple CTL* [0 to 9999999 /
0 / 0/step]
7-827-001 MF Error Counter CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
Clear 0/step]
7-832-001 Self-Diagnose Result CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
Display 0/step]
7-835-001 ACC Counter Copy ACC CTL* [0 to 9999999 /
0 / 0/step]
7-835-002 ACC Counter Printer ACC CTL* [0 to 9999999 /
0 / 0/step]
7-836-001 Total Memory Size CTL [0 to 0xffffffff / 0

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
/ 0MB/step]
7-840-001 ServiceSP Entry Code Change Time :Latest CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 /
Chg Hist 0/step]
7-840-002 ServiceSP Entry Code Change Time :Last1 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 /
Chg Hist 0/step]
7-840-101 ServiceSP Entry Code Initialize Time :Latest CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 /
Chg Hist 0/step]
7-840-102 ServiceSP Entry Code Initialize Time :Last1 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 /
Chg Hist 0/step]
7-841-001 HddSmartInfoNrs 1-9 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
0/step]
0/step]
7-841-004 HddSmartInfoNrs 28 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-841-051 HddSmartInfoSc 1-9 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
0/step]
0/step]
7-841-054 HddSmartInfoSc 28 CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-852-001 DF Glass Dust Check Dust Detection Counter ENG* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 1/step]
7-852-002 DF Glass Dust Check Dust Detection Clear Counter ENG* [0 to 65535 / 0
/ 1/step]
7-852-003 DF Glass Dust Check (1-Pass) Dust Detection Counter: ENG* [0 to 65535 / 0
Back / 1/step]
7-853-002 Replace Counter # PCU:Bk ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
1/step]
7-853-003 Replace Counter # Dev Unit:Bk ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
1/step]
7-853-025 Replace Counter # PCU:C ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1/step]
7-853-026 Replace Counter # Dev Unit:C ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
1/step]
7-853-048 Replace Counter # PCU:M ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
1/step]
7-853-049 Replace Counter # Dev Unit:M ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
1/step]
7-853-071 Replace Counter # PCU:Y ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
1/step]
7-853-072 Replace Counter # Dev Unit:Y ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
1/step]
7-853-093 Replace Counter # ITB Unit ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
1/step]
7-853-102 Replace Counter # ITB Cleaning Unit ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
1/step]
7-853-109 Replace Counter # PTR Unit ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
1/step]
7-853-115 Replace Counter # Fusing Unit ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
1/step]
7-853-116 Replace Counter Fusing Sleeve ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
1/step]
7-853-118 Replace Counter Pressure Roller ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
1/step]
7-853-142 Replace Counter #Waste Toner bottle ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
1/step]
7-855-001 Coverage Range Coverage Range 1 CTL* [1 to 200 / 5 /
1%/step]
7-855-002 Coverage Range Coverage Range 2 CTL* [1 to 200 / 20 /
1%/step]
7-901-001 Assert Info. File Name CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-901-002 Assert Info. Number of Lines CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-901-003 Assert Info. Location CTL* [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-906-002 Previous Unit # PCU:Bk ENG [0 to

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
Counter:Distance 4294967295 /
0 / 1mm/step]
7-906-003 Previous Unit # Dev Unit:Bk ENG [0 to
0 / 1mm/step]
7-906-025 Previous Unit # PCU:C ENG [0 to
0 / 1mm/step]
7-906-026 Previous Unit # Dev Unit:C ENG [0 to
0 / 1mm/step]
7-906-048 Previous Unit # PCU:M ENG [0 to
0 / 1mm/step]
7-906-049 Previous Unit # Dev Unit:M ENG [0 to
0 / 1mm/step]
7-906-071 Previous Unit # PCU:Y ENG [0 to
0 / 1mm/step]
7-906-072 Previous Unit # Dev Unit:Y ENG [0 to
0 / 1mm/step]
7-906-093 Previous Unit # ITB Unit ENG [0 to
0 / 1mm/step]
7-906-102 Previous Unit # ITB Cleaning Unit ENG [0 to
0 / 1mm/step]
7-906-109 Previous Unit # PTR Unit ENG [0 to
0 / 1mm/step]
7-906-115 Previous Unit # Fusing Unit ENG [0 to
0 / 1mm/step]
7-906-116 Previous Unit Fusing Sleeve ENG [0 to

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
0 / 1mm/step]
7-906-118 Previous Unit Pressure Roller ENG [0 to
0 / 1mm/step]
7-906-220 Previous Unit Toner Sub Hopper:Bk ENG [0 to
Counter:Distance 999999999 / 0
/ 1/step]
7-906-221 Previous Unit Toner Sub Hopper:C ENG [0 to
/ 1/step]
7-906-222 Previous Unit Toner Sub Hopper:M ENG [0 to
/ 1/step]
7-906-223 Previous Unit Toner Sub Hopper:Y ENG [0 to
/ 1/step]
7-906-230 Previous Unit Low Speed: # PCU:Bk ENG [0 to
0 / 1mm/step]
7-906-231 Previous Unit Low Speed: # PCU:C ENG [0 to
0 / 1mm/step]
7-906-232 Previous Unit Low Speed: # PCU:M ENG [0 to
0 / 1mm/step]
7-906-233 Previous Unit Low Speed: # PCU:Y ENG [0 to
0 / 1mm/step]
7-906-234 Previous Unit Middle Speed: # PCU:Bk ENG [0 to
0 / 1mm/step]
7-906-235 Previous Unit Middle Speed: # PCU:C ENG [0 to
0 / 1mm/step]
7-906-236 Previous Unit Middle Speed: # PCU:M ENG [0 to

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
0 / 1mm/step]
7-906-237 Previous Unit Middle Speed: # PCU:Y ENG [0 to
0 / 1mm/step]
7-906-238 Previous Unit Standard Speed2: # PCU:Bk ENG [0 to
0 / 1mm/step]
7-907-002 Previous Unit # PCU:Bk ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
Cntr:Distance(%) 1%/step]
7-907-003 Previous Unit # Dev Unit:Bk ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
7-907-025 Previous Unit # PCU:C ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
7-907-026 Previous Unit # Dev Unit:C ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
7-907-048 Previous Unit # PCU:M ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
7-907-049 Previous Unit # Dev Unit:M ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
7-907-071 Previous Unit # PCU:Y ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
7-907-072 Previous Unit # Dev Unit:Y ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
7-907-093 Previous Unit # ITB Unit ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
7-907-102 Previous Unit # ITB Cleaning Unit ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
7-907-109 Previous Unit # PTR Unit ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
7-907-115 Previous Unit # Fusing Unit ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
7-907-116 Previous Unit Fusing Sleeve ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
7-907-118 Previous Unit Pressure Roller ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
7-908-002 Previous Unit # PCU:Bk ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
Counter:Pages(%) 1%/step]
7-908-003 Previous Unit # Dev Unit:Bk ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
7-908-025 Previous Unit # PCU:C ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
7-908-026 Previous Unit # Dev Unit:C ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
7-908-048 Previous Unit # PCU:M ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
7-908-049 Previous Unit # Dev Unit:M ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
7-908-071 Previous Unit # PCU:Y ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
7-908-072 Previous Unit # Dev Unit:Y ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
7-908-093 Previous Unit # ITB Unit ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
7-908-102 Previous Unit # ITB Cleaning Unit ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
7-908-109 Previous Unit # PTR Unit ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
7-908-115 Previous Unit # Fusing Unit ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
7-908-116 Previous Unit Fusing Sleeve ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
7-908-118 Previous Unit Pressure Roller ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
7-908-142 Previous Unit #Waste Toner bottle ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
7-908-145 Previous Unit Tray1 Roller Assembly ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
7-908-147 Previous Unit #IMC300:PaperFeedRoller:Tray1 ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
7-908-148 Previous Unit #IMC300:FrictionPad:Tray1 ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
7-908-149 Previous Unit Tray 2 Roller Assembly ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
7-908-150 Previous Unit #Paper Feed Roller:Tray 2 ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
7-908-151 Previous Unit #Friction Pad:Bank 2 ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
7-908-158 Previous Unit #IMC400:Pick-upRoller:Tray1 ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
7-908-159 Previous Unit #IMC400:FeedingRoller:Tray1 ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
7-908-160 Previous Unit #IMC400:SeparationRoller:Tray1 ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
7-908-169 Previous Unit #Feed Roller:Bypass ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
7-910-001 ROM No System/Copy CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-910-002 ROM No Engine CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-910-003 ROM No Lcdc CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-910-007 ROM No Finisher1 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-910-009 ROM No Bank CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
7-910-012 ROM No FCU CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-910-018 ROM No NetworkSupport CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-910-019 ROM No Bank2 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-910-022 ROM No BIOS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-910-023 ROM No HDD Format Option CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-910-040 ROM No Bank3 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-910-150 ROM No RPCS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-910-151 ROM No PS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-910-152 ROM No RPDL CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-910-153 ROM No R98 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-910-154 ROM No R16 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-910-156 ROM No R55 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-910-157 ROM No RTIFF CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-910-158 ROM No PCL CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-910-159 ROM No PCLXL CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-910-160 ROM No MSIS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-910-162 ROM No PDF CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-910-164 ROM No PictBridge CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
7-910-165 ROM No PJL CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-910-167 ROM No MediaPrint:JPEG CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-910-168 ROM No MediaPrint:TIFF CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-910-169 ROM No XPS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-910-180 ROM No FONT CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-910-181 ROM No FONT1 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-910-182 ROM No FONT2 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-910-183 ROM No FONT3 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-910-184 ROM No FONT4 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-910-185 ROM No FONT5 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-910-186 ROM No FONT6 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-910-187 ROM No FONT7 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-910-200 ROM No Factory CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-910-201 ROM No Copy CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-910-202 ROM No NetworkDocBox CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-910-203 ROM No Fax CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-910-204 ROM No Printer CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-910-205 ROM No Scanner CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
7-910-206 ROM No RFax CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-910-210 ROM No MIB CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-910-211 ROM No Websupport CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-910-212 ROM No WebUapl CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-910-213 ROM No SDK1 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-910-214 ROM No SDK2 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-910-215 ROM No SDK3 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-910-250 ROM No Package CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-911-001 Firmware Version System/Copy CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-911-002 Firmware Version Engine CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-911-003 Firmware Version Lcdc CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-911-007 Firmware Version Finisher1 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-911-009 Firmware Version Bank CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-911-012 Firmware Version FCU CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-911-018 Firmware Version NetworkSupport CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-911-019 Firmware Version Bank2 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-911-022 Firmware Version BIOS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-911-023 Firmware Version HDD Format Option CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
7-911-040 Firmware Version Bank3 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-911-150 Firmware Version RPCS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-911-151 Firmware Version PS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-911-152 Firmware Version RPDL CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-911-153 Firmware Version R98 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
0/step]
0/step]
7-911-157 Firmware Version RTIFF CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-911-158 Firmware Version PCL CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-911-159 Firmware Version PCLXL CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-911-160 Firmware Version MSIS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-911-162 Firmware Version PDF CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-911-164 Firmware Version PictBridge CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-911-165 Firmware Version PJL CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-911-167 Firmware Version MediaPrint:JPEG CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-911-168 Firmware Version MediaPrint:TIFF CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-911-169 Firmware Version XPS CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-911-180 Firmware Version FONT CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
7-911-181 Firmware Version FONT1 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
0/step]
0/step]
0/step]
0/step]
0/step]
0/step]
7-911-200 Firmware Version Factory CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-911-201 Firmware Version Copy CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-911-202 Firmware Version NetworkDocBox CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-911-203 Firmware Version Fax CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-911-204 Firmware Version Printer CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-911-205 Firmware Version Scanner CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-911-206 Firmware Version RFax CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-911-210 Firmware Version MIB CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-911-211 Firmware Version Websupport CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-911-212 Firmware Version WebUapl CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-911-213 Firmware Version SDK1 CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
0/step]
0/step]
7-911-250 Firmware Version Package CTL [0 to 0 / 0 /
0/step]
7-912-002 PCB Parts Number BICU ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
Display 1/step]
7-913-002 PCB Serial Number BICU ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
Display 1/step]
7-931-001 Toner Bottle Bk Machine Serial ID ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 /
1/step]
7-931-002 Toner Bottle Bk Cartridge Ver ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 /
1/step]
7-931-003 Toner Bottle Bk Brand ID ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 /
1/step]
7-931-004 Toner Bottle Bk Area ID ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 /
1/step]
7-931-005 Toner Bottle Bk Product ID ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 /
1/step]
7-931-006 Toner Bottle Bk Color ID ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 /
1/step]
7-931-007 Toner Bottle Bk Maintenance ID ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 /
1/step]
7-931-008 Toner Bottle Bk New Product Information ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 /
1/step]
7-931-009 Toner Bottle Bk Recycle Counter ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 /
1/step]
7-931-010 Toner Bottle Bk Date ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-931-011 Toner Bottle Bk SerialNo. ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-931-012 Toner Bottle Bk Toner Remaining ENG* [0 to 100 / 100
/ 1%/step]
7-931-013 Toner Bottle Bk EDP Code ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
7-931-014 Toner Bottle Bk End History ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-931-015 Toner Bottle Bk Refill Information ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-931-016 Toner Bottle Bk Attachment: Total Counter ENG* [0 to 99999999
/ 0 / 1/step]
7-931-017 Toner Bottle Bk Attachment: Color Counter ENG* [0 to 99999999
/ 0 / 1/step]
7-931-018 Toner Bottle Bk End: Total Counter ENG* [0 to 99999999
/ 0 / 1/step]
7-931-019 Toner Bottle Bk End: Color Counter ENG* [0 to 99999999
/ 0 / 1/step]
7-931-020 Toner Bottle Bk Attachment Date ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-931-021 Toner Bottle Bk End Date ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-932-001 Toner Bottle M Machine Serial ID ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 /
1/step]
7-932-002 Toner Bottle M Cartridge Ver ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 /
1/step]
7-932-003 Toner Bottle M Brand ID ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 /
1/step]
7-932-004 Toner Bottle M Area ID ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 /
1/step]
7-932-005 Toner Bottle M Product ID ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 /
1/step]
7-932-006 Toner Bottle M Color ID ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 /
1/step]
7-932-007 Toner Bottle M Maintenance ID ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 /
1/step]
7-932-008 Toner Bottle M New Product Information ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 /
1/step]
7-932-009 Toner Bottle M Recycle Counter ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 /
1/step]
7-932-010 Toner Bottle M Date ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
7-932-011 Toner Bottle M SerialNo. ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-932-012 Toner Bottle M Toner Remaining ENG* [0 to 100 / 100
/ 1%/step]
7-932-013 Toner Bottle M EDP Code ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-932-014 Toner Bottle M End History ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-932-015 Toner Bottle M Refill Information ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-932-016 Toner Bottle M Attachment: Total Counter ENG* [0 to 99999999
/ 0 / 1/step]
7-932-017 Toner Bottle M Attachment: Color Counter ENG* [0 to 99999999
/ 0 / 1/step]
7-932-018 Toner Bottle M End: Total Counter ENG* [0 to 99999999
/ 0 / 1/step]
7-932-019 Toner Bottle M End: Color Counter ENG* [0 to 99999999
/ 0 / 1/step]
7-932-020 Toner Bottle M Attachment Date ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-932-021 Toner Bottle M End Date ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-933-001 Toner Bottle C Machine Serial ID ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 /
1/step]
7-933-002 Toner Bottle C Cartridge Ver ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 /
1/step]
7-933-003 Toner Bottle C Brand ID ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 /
1/step]
7-933-004 Toner Bottle C Area ID ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 /
1/step]
7-933-005 Toner Bottle C Product ID ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 /
1/step]
7-933-006 Toner Bottle C Color ID ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 /
1/step]
7-933-007 Toner Bottle C Maintenance ID ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 /
1/step]

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
7-933-008 Toner Bottle C New Product Information ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 /
1/step]
7-933-009 Toner Bottle C Recycle Counter ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 /
1/step]
7-933-010 Toner Bottle C Date ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-933-011 Toner Bottle C SerialNo. ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-933-012 Toner Bottle C Toner Remaining ENG* [0 to 100 / 100
/ 1%/step]
7-933-013 Toner Bottle C EDP Code ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-933-014 Toner Bottle C End History ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-933-015 Toner Bottle C Refill Information ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-933-016 Toner Bottle C Attachment: Total Counter ENG* [0 to 99999999
/ 0 / 1/step]
7-933-017 Toner Bottle C Attachment: Color Counter ENG* [0 to 99999999
/ 0 / 1/step]
7-933-018 Toner Bottle C End: Total Counter ENG* [0 to 99999999
/ 0 / 1/step]
7-933-019 Toner Bottle C End: Color Counter ENG* [0 to 99999999
/ 0 / 1/step]
7-933-020 Toner Bottle C Attachment Date ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-933-021 Toner Bottle C End Date ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-934-001 Toner Bottle Y Machine Serial ID ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 /
1/step]
7-934-002 Toner Bottle Y Cartridge Ver ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 /
1/step]
7-934-003 Toner Bottle Y Brand ID ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 /
1/step]
7-934-004 Toner Bottle Y Area ID ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 /
1/step]

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
7-934-005 Toner Bottle Y Product ID ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 /
1/step]
7-934-006 Toner Bottle Y Color ID ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 /
1/step]
7-934-007 Toner Bottle Y Maintenance ID ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 /
1/step]
7-934-008 Toner Bottle Y New Product Information ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 /
1/step]
7-934-009 Toner Bottle Y Recycle Counter ENG* [0 to 255 / 0 /
1/step]
7-934-010 Toner Bottle Y Date ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-934-011 Toner Bottle Y SerialNo. ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-934-012 Toner Bottle Y Toner Remaining ENG* [0 to 100 / 100
/ 1%/step]
7-934-013 Toner Bottle Y EDP Code ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-934-014 Toner Bottle Y End History ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-934-015 Toner Bottle Y Refill Information ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-934-016 Toner Bottle Y Attachment: Total Counter ENG* [0 to 99999999
/ 0 / 1/step]
7-934-017 Toner Bottle Y Attachment: Color Counter ENG* [0 to 99999999
/ 0 / 1/step]
7-934-018 Toner Bottle Y End: Total Counter ENG* [0 to 99999999
/ 0 / 1/step]
7-934-019 Toner Bottle Y End: Color Counter ENG* [0 to 99999999
/ 0 / 1/step]
7-934-020 Toner Bottle Y Attachment Date ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-934-021 Toner Bottle Y End Date ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-935-001 Toner Bottle Log 1: Bk SerialNo. ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
7-935-002 Toner Bottle Log 1: Bk Attachment Date ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-935-003 Toner Bottle Log 1: Bk Attachment: Total Counter ENG [0 to 99999999
/ 0 / 1/step]
7-935-004 Toner Bottle Log 1: Bk Refill Information ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
/ 0 / 1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
/ 0 / 1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
/ 0 / 1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
/ 0 / 1/step]

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
1/step]
7-936-001 Toner Bottle Log 1: M SerialNo. ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-936-002 Toner Bottle Log 1: M Attachment Date ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-936-003 Toner Bottle Log 1: M Attachment: Total Counter ENG [0 to 99999999
/ 0 / 1/step]
7-936-004 Toner Bottle Log 1: M Refill Information ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
/ 0 / 1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
/ 0 / 1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
/ 0 / 1/step]
1/step]
1/step]

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1/step]
/ 0 / 1/step]
1/step]
7-937-001 Toner Bottle Log 1: C SerialNo. ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-937-002 Toner Bottle Log 1: C Attachment Date ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-937-003 Toner Bottle Log 1: C Attachment: Total Counter ENG [0 to 99999999
/ 0 / 1/step]
7-937-004 Toner Bottle Log 1: C Refill Information ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
/ 0 / 1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
/ 0 / 1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
/ 0 / 1/step]

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
/ 0 / 1/step]
1/step]
7-938-001 Toner Bottle Log 1: Y SerialNo. ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-938-002 Toner Bottle Log 1: Y Attachment Date ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-938-003 Toner Bottle Log 1: Y Attachment: Total Counter ENG [0 to 99999999
/ 0 / 1/step]
7-938-004 Toner Bottle Log 1: Y Refill Information ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
/ 0 / 1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
/ 0 / 1/step]
1/step]
1/step]

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1/step]
/ 0 / 1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
/ 0 / 1/step]
1/step]
7-940-002 PM Value Setting:Life # PCU:Bk ENG [0 to
Distance 999999999 / 0
/ 1mm/step]
7-940-003 PM Value Setting:Life # Dev Unit:Bk ENG [0 to
Distance 999999999 / 0
/ 1mm/step]
7-940-025 PM Value Setting:Life # PCU:C ENG [0 to
Distance 999999999 / 0
/ 1mm/step]
7-940-026 PM Value Setting:Life # Dev Unit:C ENG [0 to
Distance 999999999 / 0
/ 1mm/step]
7-940-048 PM Value Setting:Life # PCU:M ENG [0 to
Distance 999999999 / 0
/ 1mm/step]
7-940-049 PM Value Setting:Life # Dev Unit:M ENG [0 to
Distance 999999999 / 0
/ 1mm/step]
7-940-071 PM Value Setting:Life # PCU:Y ENG [0 to
Distance 999999999 / 0
/ 1mm/step]
7-940-072 PM Value Setting:Life # Dev Unit:Y ENG [0 to

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
Distance 999999999 / 0
/ 1mm/step]
7-940-093 PM Value Setting:Life # ITB Unit ENG [0 to
Distance 999999999 /
99454501 /
1mm/step]
7-940-102 PM Value Setting:Life # ITB Cleaning Unit ENG [0 to
99454501 /
1mm/step]
7-940-109 PM Value Setting:Life # PTR Unit ENG [0 to
99454501 /
1mm/step]
7-940-115 PM Value Setting:Life # Fusing Unit ENG [0 to
168978600 /
1mm/step]
7-940-116 PM Value Setting:Life Fusing Sleeve ENG [0 to
168978600 /
1mm/step]
7-940-118 PM Value Setting:Life Pressure Roller ENG [0 to
168978600 /
1mm/step]
7-942-002 PM Counter # PCU:Bk ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
Display:Distance(%) 1%/step]
7-942-003 PM Counter # Dev Unit:Bk ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
7-942-025 PM Counter # PCU:C ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
7-942-026 PM Counter # Dev Unit:C ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
7-942-048 PM Counter # PCU:M ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
7-942-049 PM Counter # Dev Unit:M ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
7-942-071 PM Counter # PCU:Y ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
7-942-072 PM Counter # Dev Unit:Y ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
7-942-093 PM Counter # ITB Unit ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
7-942-102 PM Counter # ITB Cleaning Unit ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
7-942-109 PM Counter # PTR Unit ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
7-942-115 PM Counter # Fusing Unit ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
7-942-116 PM Counter Fusing Sleeve ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
7-942-118 PM Counter Pressure Roller ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
7-944-002 PM Counter Display: # PCU:Bk ENG* [0 to
Distance 4294967295 /
0 / 1mm/step]
7-944-003 PM Counter Display: # Dev Unit:Bk ENG* [0 to
Distance 4294967295 /
0 / 1mm/step]
7-944-025 PM Counter Display: # PCU:C ENG* [0 to
Distance 4294967295 /
0 / 1mm/step]
7-944-026 PM Counter Display: # Dev Unit:C ENG* [0 to
Distance 4294967295 /
0 / 1mm/step]
7-944-048 PM Counter Display: # PCU:M ENG* [0 to
Distance 4294967295 /
0 / 1mm/step]
7-944-049 PM Counter Display: # Dev Unit:M ENG* [0 to
Distance 4294967295 /
0 / 1mm/step]

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
7-944-071 PM Counter Display: # PCU:Y ENG* [0 to
Distance 4294967295 /
0 / 1mm/step]
7-944-072 PM Counter Display: # Dev Unit:Y ENG* [0 to
Distance 4294967295 /
0 / 1mm/step]
7-944-093 PM Counter Display: # ITB Unit ENG* [0 to
Distance 4294967295 /
0 / 1mm/step]
7-944-102 PM Counter Display: # ITB Cleaning Unit ENG [0 to
Distance 4294967295 /
0 / 1mm/step]
7-944-109 PM Counter Display: # PTR Unit ENG [0 to
Distance 4294967295 /
0 / 1mm/step]
7-944-115 PM Counter Display: # Fusing Unit ENG [0 to
Distance 4294967295 /
0 / 1mm/step]
7-944-116 PM Counter Display: Fusing Sleeve ENG [0 to
Distance 4294967295 /
0 / 1mm/step]
7-944-118 PM Counter Display: Pressure Roller ENG [0 to
Distance 4294967295 /
0 / 1mm/step]
7-944-220 PM Counter Display: Toner Sub Hopper:Bk ENG [0 to
Distance 999999999 / 0
/ 1/step]
7-944-221 PM Counter Display: Toner Sub Hopper:C ENG [0 to
Distance 999999999 / 0
/ 1/step]
7-944-222 PM Counter Display: Toner Sub Hopper:M ENG [0 to
Distance 999999999 / 0
/ 1/step]
7-944-223 PM Counter Display: Toner Sub Hopper:Y ENG [0 to
Distance 999999999 / 0
/ 1/step]

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
7-944-230 PM Counter Display: Low Speed: # PCU:Bk ENG [0 to
Distance 4294967295 /
0 / 1mm/step]
7-944-231 PM Counter Display: Low Speed: # PCU:C ENG [0 to
Distance 4294967295 /
0 / 1mm/step]
7-944-232 PM Counter Display: Low Speed: # PCU:M ENG [0 to
Distance 4294967295 /
0 / 1mm/step]
7-944-233 PM Counter Display: Low Speed: # PCU:Y ENG [0 to
Distance 4294967295 /
0 / 1mm/step]
7-944-234 PM Counter Display: Middle Speed: # PCU:Bk ENG [0 to
Distance 4294967295 /
0 / 1mm/step]
7-944-235 PM Counter Display: Middle Speed: # PCU:C ENG [0 to
Distance 4294967295 /
0 / 1mm/step]
7-944-236 PM Counter Display: Middle Speed: # PCU:M ENG [0 to
Distance 4294967295 /
0 / 1mm/step]
7-944-237 PM Counter Display: Middle Speed: # PCU:Y ENG [0 to
Distance 4294967295 /
0 / 1mm/step]
7-944-238 PM Counter Display: Standard Speed2: # PCU:Bk ENG [0 to
Distance 4294967295 /
0 / 1mm/step]
7-944-240 PM Counter Display: ITB Unit:FC ENG* [0 to
Distance 4294967295 /
0 / 1mm/step]
7-950-002 Unit Replacement # PCU:Bk ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
Date 1/step]
7-950-003 Unit Replacement # Dev Unit:Bk ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
Date 1/step]
7-950-025 Unit Replacement # PCU:C ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
Date 1/step]

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
7-950-026 Unit Replacement # Dev Unit:C ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
Date 1/step]
7-950-048 Unit Replacement # PCU:M ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
Date 1/step]
7-950-049 Unit Replacement # Dev Unit:M ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
Date 1/step]
7-950-071 Unit Replacement # PCU:Y ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
Date 1/step]
7-950-072 Unit Replacement # Dev Unit:Y ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
Date 1/step]
7-950-093 Unit Replacement # ITB Unit ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
Date 1/step]
7-950-102 Unit Replacement # ITB Cleaning Unit ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
Date 1/step]
7-950-109 Unit Replacement # PTR Unit ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
Date 1/step]
7-950-115 Unit Replacement # Fusing Unit ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
Date 1/step]
7-950-116 Unit Replacement Fusing Sleeve ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
Date 1/step]
7-950-118 Unit Replacement Pressure Roller ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
Date 1/step]
7-950-142 Unit Replacement #Waste Toner bottle ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
Date 1/step]
7-950-145 Unit Replacement Tray1 Roller Assembly ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
Date 1/step]
7-950-147 Unit Replacement #IMC300:PaperFeedRoller:Tray1 ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
Date 1/step]
7-950-148 Unit Replacement #IMC300:FrictionPad:Tray1 ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
Date 1/step]
7-950-149 Unit Replacement Tray 2 Roller Assembly ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
Date 1/step]
7-950-150 Unit Replacement #Paper Feed Roller:Tray 2 ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
Date 1/step]
7-950-151 Unit Replacement #Friction Pad:Bank 2 ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
Date 1/step]

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
Date 1/step]
Date 1/step]
Date 1/step]
Date 1/step]
Date 1/step]
Date 1/step]
7-950-158 Unit Replacement #IMC400:Pick-upRoller:Tray1 ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
Date 1/step]
7-950-159 Unit Replacement #IMC400:FeedingRoller:Tray1 ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
Date 1/step]
7-950-160 Unit Replacement #IMC400:SeparationRoller:Tray1 ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
Date 1/step]
7-950-169 Unit Replacement #Feed Roller:Bypass ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
Date 1/step]
7-951-002 Remain Day Counter: # PCU:Bk ENG [0 to 255 / 255
Pages / 1days/step]
7-951-003 Remain Day Counter: # Dev Unit:Bk ENG [0 to 255 / 255
Pages / 1days/step]
7-951-025 Remain Day Counter: # PCU:C ENG [0 to 255 / 255
Pages / 1days/step]
7-951-026 Remain Day Counter: # Dev Unit:C ENG [0 to 255 / 255
Pages / 1days/step]
7-951-048 Remain Day Counter: # PCU:M ENG [0 to 255 / 255
Pages / 1days/step]
7-951-049 Remain Day Counter: # Dev Unit:M ENG [0 to 255 / 255
Pages / 1days/step]
7-951-071 Remain Day Counter: # PCU:Y ENG [0 to 255 / 255
Pages / 1days/step]
7-951-072 Remain Day Counter: # Dev Unit:Y ENG [0 to 255 / 255
Pages / 1days/step]

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
7-951-093 Remain Day Counter: # ITB Unit ENG [0 to 255 / 255
Pages / 1days/step]
7-951-102 Remain Day Counter: # ITB Cleaning Unit ENG [0 to 255 / 255
Pages / 1days/step]
7-951-109 Remain Day Counter: # PTR Unit ENG [0 to 255 / 255
Pages / 1days/step]
7-951-115 Remain Day Counter: # Fusing Unit ENG [0 to 255 / 255
Pages / 1days/step]
7-951-116 Remain Day Counter: Fusing Sleeve ENG [0 to 255 / 255
Pages / 1days/step]
7-951-118 Remain Day Counter: Pressure Roller ENG [0 to 255 / 255
Pages / 1days/step]
7-951-142 Remain Day Counter: #Waste Toner bottle ENG [0 to 255 / 255
Pages / 1days/step]
7-951-145 Remain Day Counter: Tray1 Roller Assembly ENG [0 to 255 / 255
Pages / 1days/step]
7-951-147 Remain Day Counter: #IMC300:PaperFeedRoller:Tray1 ENG [0 to 255 / 255
Pages / 1days/step]
7-951-148 Remain Day Counter: #IMC300:FrictionPad:Tray1 ENG [0 to 255 / 255
Pages / 1days/step]
7-951-149 Remain Day Counter: Tray 2 Roller Assembly ENG [0 to 255 / 255
Pages / 1days/step]
7-951-150 Remain Day Counter: #Paper Feed Roller:Tray 2 ENG [0 to 255 / 255
Pages / 1days/step]
7-951-151 Remain Day Counter: #Friction Pad:Bank 2 ENG [0 to 255 / 255
Pages / 1days/step]
Pages / 1days/step]
Pages / 1days/step]
Pages / 1days/step]
Pages / 1days/step]
Pages / 1days/step]

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
Pages / 1days/step]
7-951-158 Remain Day Counter: #IMC400:Pick-upRoller:Tray1 ENG [0 to 255 / 255
Pages / 1days/step]
7-951-159 Remain Day Counter: #IMC400:FeedingRoller:Tray1 ENG [0 to 255 / 255
Pages / 1days/step]
7-951-160 Remain Day Counter: #IMC400:SeparationRoller:Tray1 ENG [0 to 255 / 255
Pages / 1days/step]
7-951-169 Remain Day Counter: #Feed Roller:Bypass ENG [0 to 255 / 255
Pages / 1days/step]
7-952-002 Remain Day Counter: # PCU:Bk ENG [0 to 255 / 255
Distance / 1days/step]
7-952-003 Remain Day Counter: # Dev Unit:Bk ENG [0 to 255 / 255
7-952-025 Remain Day Counter: # PCU:C ENG [0 to 255 / 255
7-952-026 Remain Day Counter: # Dev Unit:C ENG [0 to 255 / 255
7-952-048 Remain Day Counter: # PCU:M ENG [0 to 255 / 255
7-952-049 Remain Day Counter: # Dev Unit:M ENG [0 to 255 / 255
7-952-071 Remain Day Counter: # PCU:Y ENG [0 to 255 / 255
7-952-072 Remain Day Counter: # Dev Unit:Y ENG [0 to 255 / 255
7-952-093 Remain Day Counter: # ITB Unit ENG [0 to 255 / 255
7-952-102 Remain Day Counter: # ITB Cleaning Unit ENG [0 to 255 / 255
7-952-109 Remain Day Counter: # PTR Unit ENG [0 to 255 / 255
7-952-115 Remain Day Counter: # Fusing Unit ENG [0 to 255 / 255
7-952-116 Remain Day Counter: Fusing Sleeve ENG [0 to 255 / 255

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
7-952-118 Remain Day Counter: Pressure Roller ENG [0 to 255 / 255
7-953-001 Operation Env. Log: T<=0 ENG [0 to 99999999
PCU: Bk / 0 / 1mm/step]
7-953-002 Operation Env. Log: 0<T<=5:0<=H<30 ENG [0 to 99999999
7-953-003 Operation Env. Log: 0<T<=5:30<=H<70 ENG [0 to 99999999
7-953-004 Operation Env. Log: 0<T<=5:70<=H<=100 ENG [0 to 99999999
7-953-005 Operation Env. Log: 5<T<15:0<=H<30 ENG [0 to 99999999
7-953-008 Operation Env. Log: 5<T<15:80<=H<=100 ENG [0 to 99999999
7-953-009 Operation Env. Log: 15<=T<25:0<=H<30 ENG [0 to 99999999
7-953-012 Operation Env. Log: 15<=T<25:80<=H<=100 ENG [0 to 99999999

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
7-953-021 Operation Env. Log: 35<=T ENG [0 to 99999999
7-953-100 Operation Env. Log ENG [0 to 1 / 0 /
Clear 1/step]
7-954-002 PM Counter Display: # PCU:Bk ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
Pages (%) 1%/step]
7-954-003 PM Counter Display: # Dev Unit:Bk ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
Pages (%) 1%/step]
7-954-025 PM Counter Display: # PCU:C ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
Pages (%) 1%/step]
7-954-026 PM Counter Display: # Dev Unit:C ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
Pages (%) 1%/step]
7-954-048 PM Counter Display: # PCU:M ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
Pages (%) 1%/step]
7-954-049 PM Counter Display: # Dev Unit:M ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
Pages (%) 1%/step]
7-954-071 PM Counter Display: # PCU:Y ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
Pages (%) 1%/step]
7-954-072 PM Counter Display: # Dev Unit:Y ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
Pages (%) 1%/step]
7-954-093 PM Counter Display: # ITB Unit ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
Pages (%) 1%/step]
7-954-102 PM Counter Display: # ITB Cleaning Unit ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
Pages (%) 1%/step]
7-954-109 PM Counter Display: # PTR Unit ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
Pages (%) 1%/step]
7-954-115 PM Counter Display: # Fusing Unit ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
Pages (%) 1%/step]
7-954-116 PM Counter Display: Fusing Sleeve ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
Pages (%) 1%/step]

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
7-954-118 PM Counter Display: Pressure Roller ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
Pages (%) 1%/step]
7-954-142 PM Counter Display: #Waste Toner bottle ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
Pages (%) 1%/step]
7-954-145 PM Counter Display: Tray1 Roller Assembly ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
Pages (%) 1%/step]
7-954-147 PM Counter Display: #IMC300:PaperFeedRoller:Tray1 ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
Pages (%) 1%/step]
7-954-148 PM Counter Display: #IMC300:FrictionPad:Tray1 ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
Pages (%) 1%/step]
7-954-149 PM Counter Display: Tray 2 Roller Assembly ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
Pages (%) 1%/step]
7-954-150 PM Counter Display: #Paper Feed Roller:Tray 2 ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
Pages (%) 1%/step]
7-954-151 PM Counter Display: #Friction Pad:Bank 2 ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
Pages (%) 1%/step]
Pages (%) 1%/step]
Pages (%) 1%/step]
Pages (%) 1%/step]
Pages (%) 1%/step]
Pages (%) 1%/step]
Pages (%) 1%/step]
7-954-158 PM Counter Display: #IMC400:Pick-upRoller:Tray1 ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
Pages (%) 1%/step]
7-954-159 PM Counter Display: #IMC400:FeedingRoller:Tray1 ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
Pages (%) 1%/step]
7-954-160 PM Counter Display: #IMC400:SeparationRoller:Tray1 ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
Pages (%) 1%/step]
7-954-169 PM Counter Display: #Feed Roller:Bypass ENG [0 to 255 / 0 /
Pages (%) 1%/step]

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
7-958-002 PM Value # PCU:Bk ENG [1 to 30 / 15 /
Setting:DaysThreshold 1days/step]
7-958-003 PM Value # Dev Unit:Bk ENG [1 to 30 / 15 /
7-958-025 PM Value # PCU:C ENG [1 to 30 / 15 /
7-958-026 PM Value # Dev Unit:C ENG [1 to 30 / 15 /
7-958-048 PM Value # PCU:M ENG [1 to 30 / 15 /
7-958-049 PM Value # Dev Unit:M ENG [1 to 30 / 15 /
7-958-071 PM Value # PCU:Y ENG [1 to 30 / 15 /
7-958-072 PM Value # Dev Unit:Y ENG [1 to 30 / 15 /
7-958-093 PM Value # ITB Unit ENG [1 to 30 / 15 /
7-958-102 PM Value # ITB Cleaning Unit ENG [1 to 30 / 15 /
7-958-109 PM Value # PTR Unit ENG [1 to 30 / 15 /
7-958-115 PM Value # Fusing Unit ENG [1 to 30 / 15 /
7-958-116 PM Value Fusing Sleeve ENG [1 to 30 / 15 /
7-958-118 PM Value Pressure Roller ENG [1 to 30 / 15 /
7-958-142 PM Value #Waste Toner bottle ENG [1 to 30 / 15 /
7-958-145 PM Value Tray1 Roller Assembly ENG [1 to 30 / 15 /
7-958-147 PM Value #IMC300:PaperFeedRoller:Tray1 ENG [1 to 30 / 15 /
7-958-148 PM Value #IMC300:FrictionPad:Tray1 ENG [1 to 30 / 15 /

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
7-958-149 PM Value Tray 2 Roller Assembly ENG [1 to 30 / 15 /
7-958-150 PM Value #Paper Feed Roller:Tray 2 ENG [1 to 30 / 15 /
7-958-151 PM Value #Friction Pad:Bank 2 ENG [1 to 30 / 15 /
7-958-158 PM Value #IMC400:Pick-upRoller:Tray1 ENG [1 to 30 / 15 /
7-958-159 PM Value #IMC400:FeedingRoller:Tray1 ENG [1 to 30 / 15 /
7-958-160 PM Value #IMC400:SeparationRoller:Tray1 ENG [1 to 30 / 15 /
7-958-169 PM Value #Feed Roller:Bypass ENG [1 to 30 / 15 /
7-978-001 SC670-01 Log First Occurred ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-978-002 SC670-01 Log First Data1 ENG* [0x00000000
to
0xFFFFFFFF /
0x00000000 /
1/step]
to
0xFFFFFFFF /

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
0x00000000 /
1/step]
to
0xFFFFFFFF /
0x00000000 /
1/step]
to
0xFFFFFFFF /
0x00000000 /
1/step]
to
0xFFFFFFFF /
0x00000000 /
1/step]
7-978-011 SC670-01 Log Latest Occurred ENG* [0 to 1 / 0 /
1/step]
7-978-012 SC670-01 Log Latest Data1 ENG* [0x00000000
to
0xFFFFFFFF /
0x00000000 /
1/step]
to
0xFFFFFFFF /
0x00000000 /
1/step]
to
0xFFFFFFFF /
0x00000000 /
1/step]
to

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
0xFFFFFFFF /
0x00000000 /
1/step]
to
0xFFFFFFFF /
0x00000000 /
1/step]
7-979-001 CPU Reset Log Data1 ENG* [0x00 to 0xFF /
0x00 / 1/step]
7-979-002 CPU Reset Log Data2 ENG* [0x0000 to
0xFFFF /
0x0000 /
1/step]
0xFFFF /
0x0000 /
1/step]
0xFFFF /
0x0000 /
1/step]
0xFFFF /
0x0000 /
1/step]
0xFFFF /
0x0000 /
1/step]
0xFFFF /
0x0000 /
1/step]
0xFFFF /

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
0x0000 /
1/step]
0xFFFF /
0x0000 /
1/step]
0xFFFF /
0x0000 /
1/step]
0xFFFF /
0x0000 /
1/step]
0xFFFF /
0x0000 /
1/step]
0xFFFF /
0x0000 /
1/step]
0xFFFF /
0x0000 /
1/step]
0xFFFF /
0x0000 /
1/step]
0xFFFF /
0x0000 /
1/step]
0xFFFF /

SP7-XXX (Data Log)

or Max/Init./Step]
CTL
0x0000 /
1/step]
0xFFFF /
0x0000 /
1/step]
0xFFFF /
0x0000 /
1/step]
0xFFFF /
0x0000 /
1/step]
0xFFFF /
0x0000 /
1/step]

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)
3.10 SP8-XXX (DATA LOG2)
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
3.10.1 OVERVIEW
Many of these counters are provided for features that are currently not available, such as
sending color faxes, and so on. However, here are some Group 8 codes that when used in
combination with others, can provide useful information.
SP Numbers What They Do
SP8-211 to SP8-216 The number of pages scanned to the document server.
SP8-401 to SP8-406 The number of pages printed from the document server.
SP8-691 to SP8-696 The number of pages sent from the document server.
Specifically, the following questions can be answered:
• How is the document server actually being used?
• What application is using the document server most frequently?
• What data in the document server is being reused?
Most of the SPs in this group are prefixed with a letter that indicates the mode of operation (the
mode of operation is referred to as an "application"). Before reading the Group 8 Service Table,
make sure that you understand what these prefixes mean.
Prefixes What it means
T: Total: (Grand Total). Grand total of the items counted for all applications (C, F, P,
etc.).
C: Copy application. Totals (pages, jobs, etc.) executed for each application when the
F: Fax application. job was not stored on the document server.
P: Print application.
S: Scan application.
L: Local storage Totals (jobs, pages, etc.) for the document server. The L:
(document server) counters work differently case by case. Sometimes, they count
jobs/pages stored on the document server; this can be in
document server mode (from the document server window), or
from another mode, such as from a printer driver or by pressing
the Store File button in the Copy mode window. Sometimes,
they include occasions when the user uses a file that is already
on the document server. Each counter will be discussed case by
case.
O: Other applications Refers to network applications such as Web Image Monitor.
(external network Utilities developed with the SDK (Software Development Kit) will
applications, for also be counted with this group in the future.
example)
The Group 8 SP codes are limited to 17 characters, forced by the necessity of displaying them
SP8-XXX (Data Log2)
on the small LCDs of printers and faxes that also use these SPs. Read over the list of
abbreviations below and refer to it again if you see the name of an SP that you do not
understand.
Key for Abbreviations
Abbreviation What it means

/ "By", e.g. "T:Jobs/Apl" = Total Jobs "by" Application
> More (2> "2 or more", 4> "4 or more"
AddBook Address Book
Apl Application
B/W Black & White
Bk Black
C Cyan
ColCr Color Create
ColMode Color Mode
Comb Combine
Comp Compression
Deliv Delivery
DesApl Designated Application. The application (Copy, Fax, Scan, Print) used to store the
job on the document server, for example.
Dev Counter Development Count, no. of pages developed.
Dup, Duplex Duplex, printing on both sides
Emul Emulation
FC Full Color
FIN Post-print processing, i.e. finishing (punching, stapling, etc.)
Full Bleed No Margins
GenCopy Generation Copy Mode
GPC Get Print Counter. For jobs 10 pages or less, this counter does not count up. For
jobs larger than 10 pages, this counter counts up by the number that is in excess
of 10 (e.g., for an 11-page job, the counter counts up 11-10 =1)
IFax Internet Fax
ImgEdt Image Edit performed on the original with the copier GUI, e.g. border removal,
adding stamps, page numbers, etc.
K Black (YMCK)
LS Local Storage. Refers to the document server.
LSize Large (paper) Size
Mag Magnification
MC One color (monochrome)
NRS New Remote Service, which allows a service center to monitor machines remotely.

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)
Abbreviation What it means

"NRS" is used overseas, "CSS" is used in Japan.
Org Original for scanning
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
OrgJam Original Jam
Palm 2 Print Job Manager/Desk Top Editor: A pair of utilities that allows print jobs to be
distributed evenly among the printers on the network, and allows files to moved
around, combined, and converted to different formats.
PC Personal Computer
PGS Pages. A page is the total scanned surface of the original. Duplex pages count as
two pages, and A3 simplex count as two pages if the A3/DLT counter SP is
switched ON.
PJob Print Jobs
Ppr Paper
PrtJam Printer (plotter) Jam
PrtPGS Print Pages
R Red (Toner Remaining). Applies to the wide format model A2 only. This machine is
under development and currently not available.
Rez Resolution
SC Service Code (Error SC code displayed)
Scn Scan
Sim, Simplex, printing on 1 side.
Simplex
S-to-Email Scan-to-E-mail
SMC SMC report printed with SP5-990. All of the Group 8 counters are recorded in the
SMC report.
Svr Server
TonEnd Toner End
TonSave Toner Save
TXJob Send, Transmission
YMC Yellow, Magenta, Cyan
YMCK Yellow, Magenta, Cyan, Black
• All of the Group 8 SPs are reset with SP5-801-001 (Memory All Clear).
3.10.2 SP8-XXX (DATA LOG2) -1

CTL
8-001-001 T:Total Jobs CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
1/step]
8-002-001 C:Total Jobs CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-003-001 F:Total Jobs CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-004-001 P:Total Jobs CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-005-001 S:Total Jobs CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-006-001 L:Total Jobs CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-011-001 T:Jobs/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-012-001 C:Jobs/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-013-001 F:Jobs/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-014-001 P:Jobs/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-015-001 S:Jobs/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-016-001 L:Jobs/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-017-001 O:Jobs/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-021-001 T:Pjob/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-022-001 C:Pjob/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-023-001 F:Pjob/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-024-001 P:Pjob/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-025-001 S:Pjob/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-026-001 L:Pjob/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
8-027-001 O:Pjob/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1/step]
8-031-001 T:Pjob/DesApl CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-032-001 C:Pjob/DesApl CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-033-001 F:Pjob/DesApl CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-034-001 P:Pjob/DesApl CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-035-001 S:Pjob/DesApl CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-036-001 L:Pjob/DesApl CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-037-001 O:Pjob/DesApl CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-041-001 T:TX Jobs/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-042-001 C:TX Jobs/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-043-001 F:TX Jobs/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-044-001 P:TX Jobs/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-045-001 S:TX Jobs/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-046-001 L:TX Jobs/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-047-001 O:TX Jobs/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-051-001 T:TX Jobs/DesApl CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-052-001 C:TX Jobs/DesApl CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-053-001 F:TX Jobs/DesApl CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-054-001 P:TX Jobs/DesApl CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
1/step]
8-055-001 S:TX Jobs/DesApl CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-056-001 L:TX Jobs/DesApl CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-057-001 O:TX Jobs/DesApl CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-061-001 T:FIN Jobs Sort CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-061-002 T:FIN Jobs Stack CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-061-003 T:FIN Jobs Staple CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-061-004 T:FIN Jobs Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-061-005 T:FIN Jobs Z-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-061-006 T:FIN Jobs Punch CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-061-007 T:FIN Jobs Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-061-008 T:FIN Jobs Inside-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-061-009 T:FIN Jobs Three-IN-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-061-010 T:FIN Jobs Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-061-011 T:FIN Jobs Four-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-061-012 T:FIN Jobs KANNON-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-061-013 T:FIN Jobs Perfect-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-061-014 T:FIN Jobs Ring-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-061-015 T:FIN Jobs 3rd Vendor CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
8-061-016 T:FIN Jobs TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1/step]
8-062-001 C:FIN Jobs Sort CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-062-002 C:FIN Jobs Stack CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-062-003 C:FIN Jobs Staple CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-062-004 C:FIN Jobs Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-062-005 C:FIN Jobs Z-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-062-006 C:FIN Jobs Punch CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-062-007 C:FIN Jobs Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-062-008 C:FIN Jobs Inside-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-062-009 C:FIN Jobs Three-IN-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-062-010 C:FIN Jobs Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-062-011 C:FIN Jobs Four-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-062-012 C:FIN Jobs KANNON-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-062-013 C:FIN Jobs Perfect-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-062-014 C:FIN Jobs Ring-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-062-015 C:FIN Jobs 3rd Vendor CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-062-016 C:FIN Jobs TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-063-001 F:FIN Jobs Sort CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-063-002 F:FIN Jobs Stack CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
1/step]
8-063-003 F:FIN Jobs Staple CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-063-004 F:FIN Jobs Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-063-005 F:FIN Jobs Z-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-063-006 F:FIN Jobs Punch CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-063-007 F:FIN Jobs Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-063-008 F:FIN Jobs Inside-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-063-009 F:FIN Jobs Three-IN-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-063-010 F:FIN Jobs Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-063-011 F:FIN Jobs Four-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-063-012 F:FIN Jobs KANNON-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-063-013 F:FIN Jobs Perfect-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-063-014 F:FIN Jobs Ring-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-063-015 F:FIN Jobs 3rd Vendor CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-063-016 F:FIN Jobs TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-064-001 P:FIN Jobs Sort CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-064-002 P:FIN Jobs Stack CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-064-003 P:FIN Jobs Staple CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-064-004 P:FIN Jobs Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
8-064-005 P:FIN Jobs Z-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1/step]
8-064-006 P:FIN Jobs Punch CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-064-007 P:FIN Jobs Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-064-008 P:FIN Jobs Inside-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-064-009 P:FIN Jobs Three-IN-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-064-010 P:FIN Jobs Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-064-011 P:FIN Jobs Four-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-064-012 P:FIN Jobs KANNON-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-064-013 P:FIN Jobs Perfect-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-064-014 P:FIN Jobs Ring-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-064-015 P:FIN Jobs 3rd Vendor CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-064-016 P:FIN Jobs TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-065-001 S:FIN Jobs Sort CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-065-002 S:FIN Jobs Stack CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-065-003 S:FIN Jobs Staple CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-065-004 S:FIN Jobs Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-065-005 S:FIN Jobs Z-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-065-006 S:FIN Jobs Punch CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-065-007 S:FIN Jobs Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
1/step]
8-065-008 S:FIN Jobs Inside-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-065-009 S:FIN Jobs Three-IN-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-065-010 S:FIN Jobs Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-065-011 S:FIN Jobs Four-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-065-012 S:FIN Jobs KANNON-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-065-013 S:FIN Jobs Perfect-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-065-014 S:FIN Jobs Ring-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-065-015 S:FIN Jobs 3rd Vendor CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-065-016 S:FIN Jobs TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-066-001 L:FIN Jobs Sort CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-066-002 L:FIN Jobs Stack CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-066-003 L:FIN Jobs Staple CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-066-004 L:FIN Jobs Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-066-005 L:FIN Jobs Z-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-066-006 L:FIN Jobs Punch CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-066-007 L:FIN Jobs Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-066-008 L:FIN Jobs Inside-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-066-009 L:FIN Jobs Three-IN-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
8-066-010 L:FIN Jobs Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1/step]
8-066-011 L:FIN Jobs Four-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-066-012 L:FIN Jobs KANNON-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-066-013 L:FIN Jobs Perfect-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-066-014 L:FIN Jobs Ring-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-066-015 L:FIN Jobs 3rd Vendor CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-066-016 L:FIN Jobs TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-067-001 O:FIN Jobs Sort CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-067-002 O:FIN Jobs Stack CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-067-003 O:FIN Jobs Staple CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-067-004 O:FIN Jobs Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-067-005 O:FIN Jobs Z-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-067-006 O:FIN Jobs Punch CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-067-007 O:FIN Jobs Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-067-008 O:FIN Jobs Inside-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-067-009 O:FIN Jobs Three-IN-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-067-010 O:FIN Jobs Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-067-011 O:FIN Jobs Four-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-067-012 O:FIN Jobs KANNON-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
1/step]
8-067-013 O:FIN Jobs Perfect-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-067-014 O:FIN Jobs Ring-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-067-015 O:FIN Jobs 3rd Vendor CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-067-016 O:FIN Jobs TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-071-001 T:Jobs/PGS 1 Page CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-071-002 T:Jobs/PGS 2 Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
8-071-006 T:Jobs/PGS 6~10 Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
8-071-014 T:Jobs/PGS 1001~ Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
8-072-001 C:Jobs/PGS 1 Page CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1/step]
8-072-002 C:Jobs/PGS 2 Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
8-072-006 C:Jobs/PGS 6~10 Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
8-072-014 C:Jobs/PGS 1001~ Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-073-001 F:Jobs/PGS 1 Page CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-073-002 F:Jobs/PGS 2 Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
1/step]
8-073-006 F:Jobs/PGS 6~10 Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
8-073-014 F:Jobs/PGS 1001~ Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-074-001 P:Jobs/PGS 1 Page CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-074-002 P:Jobs/PGS 2 Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
8-074-006 P:Jobs/PGS 6~10 Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
8-074-014 P:Jobs/PGS 1001~ Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-075-001 S:Jobs/PGS 1 Page CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-075-002 S:Jobs/PGS 2 Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
8-075-006 S:Jobs/PGS 6~10 Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
8-075-014 S:Jobs/PGS 1001~ Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
1/step]
8-076-001 L:Jobs/PGS 1 Page CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-076-002 L:Jobs/PGS 2 Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
8-076-006 L:Jobs/PGS 6~10 Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
8-076-014 L:Jobs/PGS 1001~ Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-077-001 O:Jobs/PGS 1 Page CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-077-002 O:Jobs/PGS 2 Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1/step]
8-077-006 O:Jobs/PGS 6~10 Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
8-077-014 O:Jobs/PGS 1001~ Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-081-001 T:Smart Device Smart Device CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-082-001 C:Smart Device Smart Device CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-083-001 F:Smart Device Smart Device CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-084-001 P:Smart Device Smart Device CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-085-001 S:Smart Device Smart Device CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-091-001 T:Jobs/Driv V3 RPCS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-091-002 T:Jobs/Driv V3 RPCS Basic CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-091-003 T:Jobs/Driv V4 RPCS Inbox CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-091-004 T:Jobs/Driv V4 RPCS Generic CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
1/step]
8-091-005 T:Jobs/Driv V4 RPCS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-091-006 T:Jobs/Driv V3 XPS(RPCS) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-091-007 T:Jobs/Driv V3 PS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-091-008 T:Jobs/Driv V3 PS UD CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-091-009 T:Jobs/Driv V3 PS UD Generic CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-091-010 T:Jobs/Driv V4 PS UD CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-091-011 T:Jobs/Driv V4 PS UD Generic CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-091-012 T:Jobs/Driv V3 GL/GL2 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-091-013 T:Jobs/Driv V3 GL/GL2 Generic CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-091-014 T:Jobs/Driv V4 GL/GL2 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-091-015 T:Jobs/Driv PDF Direct CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-091-016 T:Jobs/Driv V3 PCL5e/5c CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-091-017 T:Jobs/Driv V3 PCL5e/5c Generic CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-091-018 T:Jobs/Driv V3 PCL XL CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-091-019 T:Jobs/Driv V3 PCL XL UD CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-091-020 T:Jobs/Driv V3 PCL XL UD Generic CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-091-021 T:Jobs/Driv V4 PCL XL UD CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-091-022 T:Jobs/Driv V4 PCL XL UD Generic CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
8-091-023 T:Jobs/Driv XPS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1/step]
8-091-024 T:Jobs/Driv V3 PC-Fax CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-091-025 T:Jobs/Driv V4 PC-Fax CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-091-026 T:Jobs/Driv Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-094-001 P:Jobs/Driv V3 RPCS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-094-002 P:Jobs/Driv V3 RPCS Basic CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-094-003 P:Jobs/Driv V4 RPCS Inbox CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-094-004 P:Jobs/Driv V4 RPCS Generic CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-094-005 P:Jobs/Driv V4 RPCS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-094-006 P:Jobs/Driv V3 XPS(RPCS) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-094-007 P:Jobs/Driv V3 PS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-094-008 P:Jobs/Driv V3 PS UD CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-094-009 P:Jobs/Driv V3 PS UD Generic CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-094-010 P:Jobs/Driv V4 PS UD CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-094-011 P:Jobs/Driv V4 PS UD Generic CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-094-012 P:Jobs/Driv V3 GL/GL2 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-094-013 P:Jobs/Driv V3 GL/GL2 Generic CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-094-014 P:Jobs/Driv V4 GL/GL2 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-094-015 P:Jobs/Driv PDF Direct CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
1/step]
8-094-016 P:Jobs/Driv V3 PCL5e/5c CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-094-017 P:Jobs/Driv V3 PCL5e/5c Generic CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-094-018 P:Jobs/Driv V3 PCL XL CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-094-019 P:Jobs/Driv V3 PCL XL UD CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-094-020 P:Jobs/Driv V3 PCL XL UD Generic CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-094-021 P:Jobs/Driv V4 PCL XL UD CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-094-022 P:Jobs/Driv V4 PCL XL UD Generic CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-094-023 P:Jobs/Driv XPS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-094-024 P:Jobs/Driv V3 PC-Fax CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-094-025 P:Jobs/Driv V4 PC-Fax CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-094-026 P:Jobs/Driv Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-111-001 T:FAX TX Jobs B/W(Tel) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-111-002 T:FAX TX Jobs Color(Tel) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-111-101 T:FAX TX Jobs B/W(Cloud) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-111-102 T:FAX TX Jobs Color(Cloud) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-113-001 F:FAX TX Jobs B/W(Tel) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-113-002 F:FAX TX Jobs Color(Tel) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-113-101 F:FAX TX Jobs B/W(Cloud) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
8-113-102 F:FAX TX Jobs Color(Cloud) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1/step]
8-121-001 T:IFAX TX Jobs B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-121-002 T:IFAX TX Jobs Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-123-001 F:IFAX TX Jobs B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-123-002 F:IFAX TX Jobs Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-131-001 T:S-to-Email Jobs B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-131-002 T:S-to-Email Jobs Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-131-003 T:S-to-Email Jobs ACS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-135-001 S:S-to-Email Jobs B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-135-002 S:S-to-Email Jobs Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-135-003 S:S-to-Email Jobs ACS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-141-001 T:Deliv Jobs/Svr B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-141-002 T:Deliv Jobs/Svr Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-141-003 T:Deliv Jobs/Svr ACS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-145-001 S:Deliv Jobs/Svr B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-145-002 S:Deliv Jobs/Svr Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-145-003 S:Deliv Jobs/Svr ACS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-151-001 T:Deliv Jobs/PC B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-151-002 T:Deliv Jobs/PC Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
1/step]
8-151-003 T:Deliv Jobs/PC ACS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-155-001 S:Deliv Jobs/PC B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-155-002 S:Deliv Jobs/PC Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-155-003 S:Deliv Jobs/PC ACS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-161-001 T:PCFAX TX Jobs CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-163-001 F:PCFAX TX Jobs CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-171-001 T:Deliv B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Jobs/WSD/DSM 1/step]
8-171-002 T:Deliv Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
8-171-003 T:Deliv ACS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
8-175-001 S:Deliv B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
8-175-002 S:Deliv Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
8-175-003 S:Deliv ACS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
8-181-001 T:Scan to Media Jobs B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-181-002 T:Scan to Media Jobs Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-181-003 T:Scan to Media Jobs ACS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-185-001 S:Scan to Media Jobs B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-185-002 S:Scan to Media Jobs Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-185-003 S:Scan to Media Jobs ACS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
8-191-001 T:Total Scan PGS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1/step]
8-192-001 C:Total Scan PGS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-193-001 F:Total Scan PGS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-195-001 S:Total Scan PGS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-196-001 L:Total Scan PGS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-201-001 T:LSize Scan PGS A3/DLT, Larger CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-203-001 F:LSize Scan PGS A3/DLT, Larger CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-205-001 S:LSize Scan PGS A3/DLT, Larger CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-211-001 T:Scan PGS/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-212-001 C:Scan PGS/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-213-001 F:Scan PGS/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-215-001 S:Scan PGS/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-216-001 L:Scan PGS/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-221-001 ADF Org Feeds Front CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-221-002 ADF Org Feeds Back CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-231-001 Scan PGS/Mode Large Volume CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-231-002 Scan PGS/Mode SADF CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-231-003 Scan PGS/Mode Mixed Size CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-231-004 Scan PGS/Mode Custom Size CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
1/step]
8-231-005 Scan PGS/Mode Platen CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-231-006 Scan PGS/Mode Mixed 1side/2side CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-231-007 Scan PGS/Mode ID card Feeder CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-241-001 T:Scan PGS/Org Text CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-241-002 T:Scan PGS/Org Text/Photo CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-241-003 T:Scan PGS/Org Photo CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-241-004 T:Scan PGS/Org GenCopy, Pale CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-241-005 T:Scan PGS/Org Map CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-241-006 T:Scan PGS/Org Normal/Detail CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-241-007 T:Scan PGS/Org Fine/Super Fine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-241-008 T:Scan PGS/Org Binary CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-241-009 T:Scan PGS/Org Grayscale CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-241-010 T:Scan PGS/Org Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-241-011 T:Scan PGS/Org Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-242-001 C:Scan PGS/Org Text CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-242-002 C:Scan PGS/Org Text/Photo CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-242-003 C:Scan PGS/Org Photo CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-242-004 C:Scan PGS/Org GenCopy, Pale CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
8-242-005 C:Scan PGS/Org Map CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1/step]
8-242-011 C:Scan PGS/Org Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-243-001 F:Scan PGS/Org Text CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-243-002 F:Scan PGS/Org Text/Photo CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-243-003 F:Scan PGS/Org Photo CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-243-006 F:Scan PGS/Org Normal/Detail CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-243-007 F:Scan PGS/Org Fine/Super Fine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-243-011 F:Scan PGS/Org Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-245-001 S:Scan PGS/Org Text CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-245-002 S:Scan PGS/Org Text/Photo CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-245-003 S:Scan PGS/Org Photo CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-245-004 S:Scan PGS/Org GenCopy, Pale CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-245-008 S:Scan PGS/Org Binary CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-245-009 S:Scan PGS/Org Grayscale CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-245-010 S:Scan PGS/Org Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-245-011 S:Scan PGS/Org Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-246-001 L:Scan PGS/Org Text CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-246-002 L:Scan PGS/Org Text/Photo CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-246-003 L:Scan PGS/Org Photo CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
1/step]
8-246-004 L:Scan PGS/Org GenCopy, Pale CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-246-005 L:Scan PGS/Org Map CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-246-011 L:Scan PGS/Org Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-251-001 T:Scan PGS/ImgEdt CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-252-001 C:Scan PGS/ImgEdt CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-255-001 S:Scan PGS/ImgEdt CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-256-001 L:Scan PGS/ImgEdt CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-257-001 O:Scan PGS/ImgEdt CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-261-001 T:Scn PGS/ColCr Color Conversion CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-261-002 T:Scn PGS/ColCr Color Erase CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-261-003 T:Scn PGS/ColCr Background CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-261-004 T:Scn PGS/ColCr Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-262-001 C:Scn PGS/ColCr Color Conversion CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-262-002 C:Scn PGS/ColCr Color Erase CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-262-003 C:Scn PGS/ColCr Background CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-262-004 C:Scn PGS/ColCr Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-265-001 S:Scn PGS/ColCr Color Conversion CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-265-002 S:Scn PGS/ColCr Color Erase CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
8-265-003 S:Scn PGS/ColCr Background CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1/step]
8-265-004 S:Scn PGS/ColCr Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-266-001 L:Scn PGS/ColCr Color Conversion CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-266-002 L:Scn PGS/ColCr Color Erase CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-266-003 L:Scn PGS/ColCr Background CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-266-004 L:Scn PGS/ColCr Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-281-001 T:Scan PGS/TWAIN CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-285-001 S:Scan PGS/TWAIN CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-291-001 T:Scan PGS/Stamp CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-293-001 F:Scan PGS/Stamp CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-295-001 S:Scan PGS/Stamp CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-301-001 T:Scan PGS/Size A3 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
8-301-004 T:Scan PGS/Size B4 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-301-005 T:Scan PGS/Size B5 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-301-006 T:Scan PGS/Size DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-301-007 T:Scan PGS/Size LG CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-301-008 T:Scan PGS/Size LT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
1/step]
8-301-009 T:Scan PGS/Size HLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-301-010 T:Scan PGS/Size Full Bleed CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-301-254 T:Scan PGS/Size Other (Standard) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-301-255 T:Scan PGS/Size Other (Custom) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-302-001 C:Scan PGS/Size A3 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
8-302-004 C:Scan PGS/Size B4 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-302-005 C:Scan PGS/Size B5 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-302-006 C:Scan PGS/Size DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-302-007 C:Scan PGS/Size LG CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-302-008 C:Scan PGS/Size LT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-302-009 C:Scan PGS/Size HLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-302-010 C:Scan PGS/Size Full Bleed CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-302-254 C:Scan PGS/Size Other (Standard) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-302-255 C:Scan PGS/Size Other (Custom) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-303-001 F:Scan PGS/Size A3 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1/step]
8-303-004 F:Scan PGS/Size B4 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-303-005 F:Scan PGS/Size B5 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-303-006 F:Scan PGS/Size DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-303-007 F:Scan PGS/Size LG CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-303-008 F:Scan PGS/Size LT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-303-009 F:Scan PGS/Size HLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-303-010 F:Scan PGS/Size Full Bleed CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-303-254 F:Scan PGS/Size Other (Standard) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-303-255 F:Scan PGS/Size Other (Custom) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-305-001 S:Scan PGS/Size A3 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
8-305-004 S:Scan PGS/Size B4 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-305-005 S:Scan PGS/Size B5 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-305-006 S:Scan PGS/Size DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-305-007 S:Scan PGS/Size LG CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-305-008 S:Scan PGS/Size LT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-305-009 S:Scan PGS/Size HLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
1/step]
8-305-010 S:Scan PGS/Size Full Bleed CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-305-254 S:Scan PGS/Size Other (Standard) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-305-255 S:Scan PGS/Size Other (Custom) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-306-001 L:Scan PGS/Size A3 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
8-306-004 L:Scan PGS/Size B4 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-306-005 L:Scan PGS/Size B5 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-306-006 L:Scan PGS/Size DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-306-007 L:Scan PGS/Size LG CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-306-008 L:Scan PGS/Size LT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-306-009 L:Scan PGS/Size HLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-306-010 L:Scan PGS/Size Full Bleed CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-306-254 L:Scan PGS/Size Other (Standard) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-306-255 L:Scan PGS/Size Other (Custom) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-311-001 T:Scan PGS/Rez 1200dpi ~ CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-311-002 T:Scan PGS/Rez 600dpi~1199dpi CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1/step]
8-311-005 T:Scan PGS/Rez ~199dpi CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-315-001 S:Scan PGS/Rez 1200dpi ~ CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-315-002 S:Scan PGS/Rez 600dpi~1199dpi CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
8-315-005 S:Scan PGS/Rez ~199dpi CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-321-001 T:Sacn Poster 2 Sheet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
8-322-001 C:Sacn Poster 2 Sheet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
8-326-001 L:Sacn Poster 2 Sheet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
8-381-001 T:Total PrtPGS Field Number CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-381-101 T:Total PrtPGS DFE:Field Number CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-382-001 C:Total PrtPGS Field Number CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
1/step]
8-383-001 F:Total PrtPGS Field Number CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-384-001 P:Total PrtPGS Field Number CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-384-101 P:Total PrtPGS DFE:Field Number CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-385-001 S:Total PrtPGS Field Number CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-386-001 L:Total PrtPGS Field Number CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-387-001 O:Total PrtPGS Field Number CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-391-001 LSize PrtPGS A3/DLT, Larger CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-391-003 LSize PrtPGS BannerPaper CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-401-001 T:PrtPGS/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-402-001 C:PrtPGS/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-403-001 F:PrtPGS/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-404-001 P:PrtPGS/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-405-001 S:PrtPGS/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-406-001 L:PrtPGS/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-411-001 Prints/Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-421-001 T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex> Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-421-002 T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Duplex> Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-421-003 T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Book> Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
8-421-004 T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex Combine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1/step]
8-421-005 T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Duplex Combine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-421-006 T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
8-421-012 T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-421-013 T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Magazine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-421-014 T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
8-421-019 T:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Magazine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
8-422-001 C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex> Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-422-002 C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Duplex> Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-422-003 C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Book> Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-422-004 C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex Combine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-422-005 C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Duplex Combine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-422-006 C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
8-422-012 C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-422-013 C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Magazine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-422-014 C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
8-422-019 C:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Magazine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
8-423-001 F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex> Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1/step]
8-423-004 F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex Combine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-423-005 F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Duplex Combine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-423-006 F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
8-423-012 F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-423-013 F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Magazine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-423-014 F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
8-423-019 F:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Magazine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
8-424-001 P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex> Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-424-004 P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex Combine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-424-005 P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Duplex Combine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
1/step]
8-424-006 P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
8-424-012 P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-424-013 P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Magazine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-424-014 P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
8-424-019 P:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Magazine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1/step]
8-425-001 S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex> Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-425-004 S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex Combine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-425-005 S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Duplex Combine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-425-006 S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
8-425-012 S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-425-013 S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Magazine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-425-014 S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
8-425-019 S:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Magazine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
1/step]
1/step]
8-426-001 L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex> Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-426-004 L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex Combine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-426-005 L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Duplex Combine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-426-006 L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
8-426-012 L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-426-013 L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Magazine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-426-014 L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
8-426-019 L:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Magazine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
8-427-001 O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex> Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
8-427-002 O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Duplex> Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1/step]
8-427-003 O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Book> Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-427-004 O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Simplex Combine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-427-005 O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Duplex Combine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-427-006 O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
8-427-012 O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-427-013 O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb Magazine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-427-014 O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
8-427-019 O:PrtPGS/Dup Comb 2in1 + Magazine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
8-431-001 T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt Cover/Slip Sheet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-431-002 T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt Series/Book CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-431-003 T:PrtPGS/ImgEdt User Stamp CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-432-001 C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt Cover/Slip Sheet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-432-002 C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt Series/Book CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-432-003 C:PrtPGS/ImgEdt User Stamp CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-434-001 P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt Cover/Slip Sheet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-434-002 P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt Series/Book CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-434-003 P:PrtPGS/ImgEdt User Stamp CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-436-001 L:PrtPGS/ImgEdt Cover/Slip Sheet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-436-002 L:PrtPGS/ImgEdt Series/Book CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-436-003 L:PrtPGS/ImgEdt User Stamp CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-437-001 O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt Cover/Slip Sheet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-437-002 O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt Series/Book CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
8-437-003 O:PrtPGS/ImgEdt User Stamp CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1/step]
8-441-001 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size A3 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
8-441-004 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B4 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-441-005 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B5 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-441-006 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-441-007 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LG CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-441-008 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-441-009 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size HLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-441-010 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Full Bleed CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-441-254 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Standard) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-441-255 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Custom) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-442-001 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size A3 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
8-442-004 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B4 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-442-005 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B5 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-442-006 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
1/step]
8-442-007 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LG CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-442-008 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-442-009 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size HLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-442-010 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Full Bleed CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-442-254 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Standard) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-442-255 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Custom) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-443-001 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size A3 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
8-443-004 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B4 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-443-005 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B5 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-443-006 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-443-007 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LG CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-443-008 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-443-009 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size HLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-443-010 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Full Bleed CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-443-254 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Standard) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-443-255 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Custom) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
8-444-001 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size A3 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
8-444-004 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B4 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-444-005 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B5 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-444-006 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-444-007 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LG CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-444-008 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-444-009 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size HLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-444-010 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Full Bleed CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-444-254 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Standard) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-444-255 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Custom) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-445-001 S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size A3 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
8-445-004 S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B4 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-445-005 S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B5 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-445-006 S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-445-007 S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LG CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
1/step]
8-445-008 S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-445-009 S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size HLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-445-010 S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Full Bleed CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-445-254 S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Standard) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-445-255 S:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Custom) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-446-001 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size A3 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
8-446-004 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B4 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-446-005 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B5 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-446-006 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-446-007 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LG CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-446-008 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-446-009 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size HLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-446-010 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Full Bleed CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-446-254 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Standard) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-446-255 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Custom) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-447-001 O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size A3 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1/step]
1/step]
8-447-004 O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B4 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-447-005 O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size B5 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-447-006 O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-447-007 O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LG CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-447-008 O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size LT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-447-009 O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size HLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-447-010 O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Full Bleed CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-447-254 O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Standard) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-447-255 O:PrtPGS/Ppr Size Other (Custom) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-451-001 PrtPGS/Ppr Tray Bypass Tray CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-451-002 PrtPGS/Ppr Tray Tray 1 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
8-451-101 PrtPGS/Ppr Tray LC Inserter CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-451-102 PrtPGS/Ppr Tray 3rd Vendor CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-461-001 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Normal CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-461-002 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Recycled CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-461-003 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Special CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-461-004 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Thick CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-461-005 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Normal (Back) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-461-006 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Thick (Back) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-461-007 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type OHP CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-461-008 T:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
8-462-001 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Normal CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1/step]
8-462-002 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Recycled CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-462-003 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Special CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-462-004 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Thick CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-462-005 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Normal (Back) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-462-006 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Thick (Back) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-462-007 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type OHP CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-462-008 C:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-463-001 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Normal CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-463-002 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Recycled CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-463-003 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Special CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-463-004 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Thick CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-463-005 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Normal (Back) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-463-006 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Thick (Back) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-463-007 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type OHP CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-463-008 F:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-464-001 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Normal CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-464-002 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Recycled CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-464-003 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Special CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
1/step]
8-464-004 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Thick CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-464-005 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Normal (Back) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-464-006 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Thick (Back) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-464-007 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type OHP CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-464-008 P:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-466-001 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Normal CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-466-002 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Recycled CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-466-003 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Special CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-466-004 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Thick CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-466-005 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Normal (Back) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-466-006 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Thick (Back) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-466-007 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type OHP CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-466-008 L:PrtPGS/Ppr Type Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-471-001 PrtPGS/Mag ~49% CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-471-002 PrtPGS/Mag 50%~99% CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-471-003 PrtPGS/Mag 100% CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-471-004 PrtPGS/Mag 101%~200% CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-471-005 PrtPGS/Mag 201% ~ CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
8-481-001 T:PrtPGS/TonSave CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1/step]
8-484-001 P:PrtPGS/TonSave CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-491-001 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-491-002 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode Single Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-491-003 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode Two Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-491-004 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode Full Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-491-051 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode B/W(Banner) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-491-052 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode Single Color(Banner) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-491-053 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode Two Color(Banner) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-491-054 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode Full Color(Banner) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-492-001 C:PrtPGS/Col Mode B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-492-002 C:PrtPGS/Col Mode Single Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-492-003 C:PrtPGS/Col Mode Two Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-492-004 C:PrtPGS/Col Mode Full Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-492-051 C:PrtPGS/Col Mode B/W(Banner) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-492-052 C:PrtPGS/Col Mode Single Color(Banner) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-492-053 C:PrtPGS/Col Mode Two Color(Banner) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-492-054 C:PrtPGS/Col Mode Full Color(Banner) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-493-001 F:PrtPGS/Col Mode B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
1/step]
8-493-002 F:PrtPGS/Col Mode Single Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-493-003 F:PrtPGS/Col Mode Two Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-493-004 F:PrtPGS/Col Mode Full Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-493-051 F:PrtPGS/Col Mode B/W(Banner) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-493-052 F:PrtPGS/Col Mode Single Color(Banner) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-493-053 F:PrtPGS/Col Mode Two Color(Banner) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-493-054 F:PrtPGS/Col Mode Full Color(Banner) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-496-001 L:PrtPGS/Col Mode B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-496-002 L:PrtPGS/Col Mode Single Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-496-003 L:PrtPGS/Col Mode Two Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-496-004 L:PrtPGS/Col Mode Full Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-496-051 L:PrtPGS/Col Mode B/W(Banner) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-496-052 L:PrtPGS/Col Mode Single Color(Banner) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-496-053 L:PrtPGS/Col Mode Two Color(Banner) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-496-054 L:PrtPGS/Col Mode Full Color(Banner) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-497-001 O:PrtPGS/Col Mode B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-497-002 O:PrtPGS/Col Mode Single Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-497-003 O:PrtPGS/Col Mode Two Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
8-497-004 O:PrtPGS/Col Mode Full Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1/step]
8-497-051 O:PrtPGS/Col Mode B/W(Banner) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-497-052 O:PrtPGS/Col Mode Single Color(Banner) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-497-053 O:PrtPGS/Col Mode Two Color(Banner) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-497-054 O:PrtPGS/Col Mode Full Color(Banner) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-501-001 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-501-002 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode Mono Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-501-003 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode Full Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-501-004 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode Single Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-501-005 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode Two Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-501-051 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode B/W(Banner) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-501-052 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode Full Color(Banner) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-501-053 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode Single Color(Banner) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-501-054 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode Two Color(Banner) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-501-101 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode DFE:B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-501-102 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode DFE:Mono Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-501-103 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode DFE:Full Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-501-104 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode DFE:Single Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-501-105 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode DFE:Two Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
1/step]
8-501-151 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode DFE:B/W(Banner) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-501-152 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode DFE:Full CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Color(Banner) 1/step]
8-501-153 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode DFE:Single CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
8-501-154 T:PrtPGS/Col Mode DFE:Two CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
8-504-001 P:PrtPGS/Col Mode B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-504-002 P:PrtPGS/Col Mode Mono Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-504-003 P:PrtPGS/Col Mode Full Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-504-004 P:PrtPGS/Col Mode Single Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-504-005 P:PrtPGS/Col Mode Two Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-504-051 P:PrtPGS/Col Mode B/W(Banner) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-504-052 P:PrtPGS/Col Mode Full Color(Banner) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-504-053 P:PrtPGS/Col Mode Single Color(Banner) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-504-054 P:PrtPGS/Col Mode Two Color(Banner) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-504-101 P:PrtPGS/Col Mode DFE:B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-504-102 P:PrtPGS/Col Mode DFE:Mono Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-504-103 P:PrtPGS/Col Mode DFE:Full Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-504-104 P:PrtPGS/Col Mode DFE:Single Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-504-105 P:PrtPGS/Col Mode DFE:Two Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
8-504-151 P:PrtPGS/Col Mode DFE:B/W(Banner) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1/step]
8-504-152 P:PrtPGS/Col Mode DFE:Full CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
8-504-153 P:PrtPGS/Col Mode DFE:Single CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
8-504-154 P:PrtPGS/Col Mode DFE:Two CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
8-507-001 O:PrtPGS/Col Mode B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-507-002 O:PrtPGS/Col Mode Mono Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-507-003 O:PrtPGS/Col Mode Full Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-507-004 O:PrtPGS/Col Mode Single Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-507-005 O:PrtPGS/Col Mode Two Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-507-051 O:PrtPGS/Col Mode B/W(Banner) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-507-052 O:PrtPGS/Col Mode Full Color(Banner) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-507-053 O:PrtPGS/Col Mode Single Color(Banner) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-507-054 O:PrtPGS/Col Mode Two Color(Banner) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-511-001 T:PrtPGS/Emul RPCS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-511-002 T:PrtPGS/Emul RPDL CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-511-003 T:PrtPGS/Emul PS3 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-511-004 T:PrtPGS/Emul R98 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
8-511-006 T:PrtPGS/Emul GL/GL2 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
1/step]
1/step]
8-511-008 T:PrtPGS/Emul RTIFF CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-511-009 T:PrtPGS/Emul PDF CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-511-010 T:PrtPGS/Emul PCL5e/5c CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-511-011 T:PrtPGS/Emul PCL XL CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-511-012 T:PrtPGS/Emul IPDL-C CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-511-013 T:PrtPGS/Emul BM-Links CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-511-014 T:PrtPGS/Emul Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-511-015 T:PrtPGS/Emul IPDS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-511-016 T:PrtPGS/Emul XPS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-511-017 T:PrtPGS/Emul IRIPS PS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-511-018 T:PrtPGS/Emul IRIPS PDF CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-511-019 T:PrtPGS/Emul PictBridge CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-511-020 T:PrtPGS/Emul MediaPrintTIFF CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-511-021 T:PrtPGS/Emul MediaPrintJPEG CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-511-022 T:PrtPGS/Emul GG PDF CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-511-023 T:PrtPGS/Emul GG PCL CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-514-001 P:PrtPGS/Emul RPCS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
8-514-002 P:PrtPGS/Emul RPDL CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1/step]
8-514-003 P:PrtPGS/Emul PS3 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-514-004 P:PrtPGS/Emul R98 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
8-514-006 P:PrtPGS/Emul GL/GL2 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
8-514-008 P:PrtPGS/Emul RTIFF CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-514-009 P:PrtPGS/Emul PDF CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-514-010 P:PrtPGS/Emul PCL5e/5c CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-514-011 P:PrtPGS/Emul PCL XL CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-514-012 P:PrtPGS/Emul IPDL-C CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-514-013 P:PrtPGS/Emul BM-Links CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-514-014 P:PrtPGS/Emul Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-514-015 P:PrtPGS/Emul IPDS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-514-016 P:PrtPGS/Emul XPS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-514-017 P:PrtPGS/Emul IRIPS PS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-514-018 P:PrtPGS/Emul IRIPS PDF CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-514-019 P:PrtPGS/Emul PictBridge CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-514-020 P:PrtPGS/Emul MediaPrintTIFF CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
1/step]
8-514-021 P:PrtPGS/Emul MediaPrintJPEG CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-514-022 P:PrtPGS/Emul GG PDF CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-514-023 P:PrtPGS/Emul GG PCL CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-521-001 T:PrtPGS/FIN Sort CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-521-002 T:PrtPGS/FIN Stack CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-521-003 T:PrtPGS/FIN Staple CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-521-004 T:PrtPGS/FIN Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-521-005 T:PrtPGS/FIN Z-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-521-006 T:PrtPGS/FIN Punch CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-521-007 T:PrtPGS/FIN Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-521-008 T:PrtPGS/FIN Inside-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-521-009 T:PrtPGS/FIN Three-IN-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-521-010 T:PrtPGS/FIN Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-521-011 T:PrtPGS/FIN Four-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-521-012 T:PrtPGS/FIN KANNON-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-521-013 T:PrtPGS/FIN Perfect-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-521-014 T:PrtPGS/FIN Ring-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-521-015 T:PrtPGS/FIN 3rd Vendor CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
8-521-016 T:PrtPGS/FIN TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1/step]
8-522-001 C:PrtPGS/FIN Sort CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-522-002 C:PrtPGS/FIN Stack CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-522-003 C:PrtPGS/FIN Staple CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-522-004 C:PrtPGS/FIN Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-522-005 C:PrtPGS/FIN Z-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-522-006 C:PrtPGS/FIN Punch CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-522-007 C:PrtPGS/FIN Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-522-008 C:PrtPGS/FIN Inside-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-522-009 C:PrtPGS/FIN Three-IN-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-522-010 C:PrtPGS/FIN Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-522-011 C:PrtPGS/FIN Four-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-522-012 C:PrtPGS/FIN KANNON-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-522-013 C:PrtPGS/FIN Perfect-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-522-014 C:PrtPGS/FIN Ring-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-522-015 C:PrtPGS/FIN 3rd Vendor CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-522-016 C:PrtPGS/FIN TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-523-001 F:PrtPGS/FIN Sort CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-523-002 F:PrtPGS/FIN Stack CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
1/step]
8-523-003 F:PrtPGS/FIN Staple CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-523-004 F:PrtPGS/FIN Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-523-005 F:PrtPGS/FIN Z-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-523-006 F:PrtPGS/FIN Punch CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-523-007 F:PrtPGS/FIN Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-523-008 F:PrtPGS/FIN Inside-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-523-009 F:PrtPGS/FIN Three-IN-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-523-010 F:PrtPGS/FIN Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-523-011 F:PrtPGS/FIN Four-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-523-012 F:PrtPGS/FIN KANNON-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-523-013 F:PrtPGS/FIN Perfect-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-523-014 F:PrtPGS/FIN Ring-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-523-015 F:PrtPGS/FIN 3rd Vendor CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-523-016 F:PrtPGS/FIN TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-524-001 P:PrtPGS/FIN Sort CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-524-002 P:PrtPGS/FIN Stack CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-524-003 P:PrtPGS/FIN Staple CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-524-004 P:PrtPGS/FIN Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
8-524-005 P:PrtPGS/FIN Z-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1/step]
8-524-006 P:PrtPGS/FIN Punch CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-524-007 P:PrtPGS/FIN Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-524-008 P:PrtPGS/FIN Inside-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-524-009 P:PrtPGS/FIN Three-IN-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-524-010 P:PrtPGS/FIN Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-524-011 P:PrtPGS/FIN Four-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-524-012 P:PrtPGS/FIN KANNON-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-524-013 P:PrtPGS/FIN Perfect-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-524-014 P:PrtPGS/FIN Ring-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-524-015 P:PrtPGS/FIN 3rd Vendor CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-524-016 P:PrtPGS/FIN TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-525-001 S:PrtPGS/FIN Sort CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-525-002 S:PrtPGS/FIN Stack CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-525-003 S:PrtPGS/FIN Staple CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-525-004 S:PrtPGS/FIN Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-525-005 S:PrtPGS/FIN Z-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-525-006 S:PrtPGS/FIN Punch CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-525-007 S:PrtPGS/FIN Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
1/step]
8-525-008 S:PrtPGS/FIN Inside-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-525-009 S:PrtPGS/FIN Three-IN-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-525-010 S:PrtPGS/FIN Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-525-011 S:PrtPGS/FIN Four-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-525-012 S:PrtPGS/FIN KANNON-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-525-013 S:PrtPGS/FIN Perfect-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-525-014 S:PrtPGS/FIN Ring-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-525-015 S:PrtPGS/FIN 3rd Vendor CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-525-016 S:PrtPGS/FIN TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-526-001 L:PrtPGS/FIN Sort CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-526-002 L:PrtPGS/FIN Stack CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-526-003 L:PrtPGS/FIN Staple CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-526-004 L:PrtPGS/FIN Booklet CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-526-005 L:PrtPGS/FIN Z-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-526-006 L:PrtPGS/FIN Punch CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-526-007 L:PrtPGS/FIN Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-526-008 L:PrtPGS/FIN Inside-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-526-009 L:PrtPGS/FIN Three-IN-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
8-526-010 L:PrtPGS/FIN Three-OUT-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1/step]
8-526-011 L:PrtPGS/FIN Four-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-526-012 L:PrtPGS/FIN KANNON-Fold CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-526-013 L:PrtPGS/FIN Perfect-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-526-014 L:PrtPGS/FIN Ring-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-526-015 L:PrtPGS/FIN 3rd Vendor CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-526-016 L:PrtPGS/FIN TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-531-001 Staple Staples CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-531-002 Staple Stapless CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-551-001 T:PrtBooks/FIN Perfect-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-551-002 T:PrtBooks/FIN Ring-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-551-003 T:PrtBooks/FIN TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-552-001 C:PrtBooks/FIN Perfect-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-552-002 C:PrtBooks/FIN Ring-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-552-003 C:PrtBooks/FIN TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-554-001 P:PrtBooks/FIN Perfect-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-554-002 P:PrtBooks/FIN Ring-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-554-003 P:PrtBooks/FIN TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-556-001 L:PrtBooks/FIN Perfect-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
1/step]
8-556-002 L:PrtBooks/FIN Ring-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-556-003 L:PrtBooks/FIN TwinLoop-Bind CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-561-001 T:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-561-002 T:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-561-003 T:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-561-004 T:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-562-001 C:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-562-002 C:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-562-003 C:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-562-004 C:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-563-001 F:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-563-002 F:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-563-003 F:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-563-004 F:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-564-001 P:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-564-002 P:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-564-003 P:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-564-004 P:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL
8-566-001 L:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1/step]
8-566-002 L:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-566-003 L:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-566-004 L:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-567-001 O:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-567-002 O:A Sheet Of Paper Total: Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-567-003 O:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-567-004 O:A Sheet Of Paper Duplex: Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
3.10.3 SP8-XXX (DATA LOG2) -2

SP No. Large Category Small Category ENG or [Min to
CTL Max/Init./Step]
8-581-001 T:Counter Total CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-581-002 T:Counter Total: Full Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-581-003 T:Counter B&W/Single Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-581-004 T:Counter Development: CMY CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-581-005 T:Counter Development: K CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-581-006 T:Counter Copy: Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-581-007 T:Counter Copy: B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-581-008 T:Counter Print: Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-581-009 T:Counter Print: B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL Max/Init./Step]
1/step]
8-581-010 T:Counter Total: Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-581-011 T:Counter Total: B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-581-012 T:Counter Full Color: A3 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-581-013 T:Counter Full Color: B4 JIS or Smaller CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-581-014 T:Counter Full Color Print CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-581-015 T:Counter Mono Color Print CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-581-016 T:Counter Full Color GPC CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-581-017 T:Counter Twin Color Mode Print CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-581-018 T:Counter Full Color Print(Twin) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-581-019 T:Counter Mono Color Print(Twin) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-581-020 T:Counter Full Color Total(CV) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-581-021 T:Counter Mono Color Total(CV) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-581-022 T:Counter Full Color Print(CV) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-581-028 T:Counter Development: CMY(A3) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-581-029 T:Counter Development: K(A3) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-581-030 T:Counter Total: Color(A3) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-581-031 T:Counter Total: B/W(A3) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-582-001 C:Counter B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL Max/Init./Step]
8-582-002 C:Counter Single Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1/step]
8-582-003 C:Counter Two Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-582-004 C:Counter Full Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-582-011 C:Counter B/W:Simplex:Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-582-012 C:Counter B/W:Simplex:Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-582-013 C:Counter B/W:Duplex:Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-582-014 C:Counter B/W:Duplex:Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-582-015 C:Counter Single Color:Simplex:Over CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-582-016 C:Counter Single Color:Simplex:Under CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-582-017 C:Counter Single Color:Duplex:Over CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-582-018 C:Counter Single Color:Duplex:Under CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-582-019 C:Counter Two Color:Simplex:Over CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-582-020 C:Counter Two Color:Simplex:Under CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-582-021 C:Counter Two Color:Duplex:Over CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-582-022 C:Counter Two Color:Duplex:Under CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-582-023 C:Counter Full Color:Simplex:Over CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-582-024 C:Counter Full Color:Simplex:Under CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-582-025 C:Counter Full Color:Duplex:Over CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-582-026 C:Counter Full Color:Duplex:Under CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL Max/Init./Step]
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-583-001 F:Counter B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-583-002 F:Counter Single Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-583-011 F:Counter B/W:Simplex:Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-583-012 F:Counter B/W:Simplex:Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-583-013 F:Counter B/W:Duplex:Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-583-014 F:Counter B/W:Duplex:Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-583-015 F:Counter Single Color:Simplex:Over CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-583-016 F:Counter Single Color:Simplex:Under CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-583-017 F:Counter Single Color:Duplex:Over CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-583-018 F:Counter Single Color:Duplex:Under CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-584-001 P:Counter B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-584-002 P:Counter Mono Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-584-003 P:Counter Full Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-584-004 P:Counter Single Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-584-005 P:Counter Two Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-584-011 P:Counter B/W:Simplex:Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-584-012 P:Counter B/W:Simplex:Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-584-013 P:Counter B/W:Duplex:Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL Max/Init./Step]
8-584-014 P:Counter B/W:Duplex:Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1/step]
8-584-015 P:Counter Single Color:Simplex:Over CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-584-016 P:Counter Single Color:Simplex:Under CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-584-017 P:Counter Single Color:Duplex:Over CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-584-018 P:Counter Single Color:Duplex:Under CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-584-019 P:Counter Two Color:Simplex:Over CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-584-020 P:Counter Two Color:Simplex:Under CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-584-021 P:Counter Two Color:Duplex:Over CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-584-022 P:Counter Two Color:Duplex:Under CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-584-023 P:Counter Full Color:Simplex:Over CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-584-024 P:Counter Full Color:Simplex:Under CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-584-025 P:Counter Full Color:Duplex:Over CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-584-026 P:Counter Full Color:Duplex:Under CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-585-001 S:Counter Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-585-002 S:Counter Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-586-001 L:Counter B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-586-002 L:Counter Single Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-586-003 L:Counter Two Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-586-004 L:Counter Full Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL Max/Init./Step]
1/step]
8-586-011 L:Counter B/W:Simplex:Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-586-012 L:Counter B/W:Simplex:Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-586-013 L:Counter B/W:Duplex:Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-586-014 L:Counter B/W:Duplex:Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-586-015 L:Counter Single Color:Simplex:Over CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-586-016 L:Counter Single Color:Simplex:Under CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-586-017 L:Counter Single Color:Duplex:Over CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-586-018 L:Counter Single Color:Duplex:Under CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-586-019 L:Counter Two Color:Simplex:Over CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-586-020 L:Counter Two Color:Simplex:Under CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-586-021 L:Counter Two Color:Duplex:Over CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-586-022 L:Counter Two Color:Duplex:Under CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-586-023 L:Counter Full Color:Simplex:Over CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-586-024 L:Counter Full Color:Simplex:Under CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-586-025 L:Counter Full Color:Duplex:Over CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-586-026 L:Counter Full Color:Duplex:Under CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-587-011 O:Counter B/W:Simplex:Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-587-012 O:Counter B/W:Simplex:Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL Max/Init./Step]
8-587-013 O:Counter B/W:Duplex:Over A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1/step]
8-587-014 O:Counter B/W:Duplex:Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-587-015 O:Counter Single Color:Simplex:Over CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-587-016 O:Counter Single Color:Simplex:Under CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-587-017 O:Counter Single Color:Duplex:Over CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-587-018 O:Counter Single Color:Duplex:Under CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-587-019 O:Counter Two Color:Simplex:Over CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-587-020 O:Counter Two Color:Simplex:Under CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-587-021 O:Counter Two Color:Duplex:Over CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-587-022 O:Counter Two Color:Duplex:Under CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-587-023 O:Counter Full Color:Simplex:Over CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-587-024 O:Counter Full Color:Simplex:Under CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-587-025 O:Counter Full Color:Duplex:Over CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-587-026 O:Counter Full Color:Duplex:Under CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-591-001 O:Counter A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-591-002 O:Counter Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-591-005 O:Counter Banner CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-601-001 T:Coverage Counter B/W CTL* [0 to 2147483647 /
0 / 1%/step]
8-601-002 T:Coverage Counter Color CTL* [0 to 2147483647 /

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL Max/Init./Step]
0 / 1%/step]
8-601-011 T:Coverage Counter B/W Printing Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-601-012 T:Coverage Counter Color Printing Pages CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-601-021 T:Coverage Counter Coverage Counter 1 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
8-601-031 Coverage Counter Coverage Counter 1 (YMC) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
8-602-001 C:Coverage B/W CTL* [0 to 2147483647 /
Counter 0 / 1%/step]
8-602-002 C:Coverage Single Color CTL* [0 to 2147483647 /
8-602-003 C:Coverage Two Color CTL* [0 to 2147483647 /
8-602-004 C:Coverage Full Color CTL* [0 to 2147483647 /
8-603-001 F:Coverage Counter B/W CTL* [0 to 2147483647 /
0 / 1%/step]
8-603-002 F:Coverage Counter Single Color CTL* [0 to 2147483647 /
0 / 1%/step]
8-604-001 P:Coverage Counter B/W CTL* [0 to 2147483647 /
0 / 1%/step]
8-604-002 P:Coverage Counter Single Color CTL* [0 to 2147483647 /
0 / 1%/step]
8-604-003 P:Coverage Counter Two Color CTL* [0 to 2147483647 /
0 / 1%/step]
8-604-004 P:Coverage Counter Full Color CTL* [0 to 2147483647 /
0 / 1%/step]

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL Max/Init./Step]
8-606-001 L:Coverage Counter B/W CTL* [0 to 2147483647 /
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
0 / 1%/step]
8-606-002 L:Coverage Counter Single Color CTL* [0 to 2147483647 /
0 / 1%/step]
8-606-003 L:Coverage Counter Two Color CTL* [0 to 2147483647 /
0 / 1%/step]
8-606-004 L:Coverage Counter Full Color CTL* [0 to 2147483647 /
0 / 1%/step]
8-617-001 SDK Apli Counter SDK-1 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
8-621-001 Func Use Counter Function-001 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL Max/Init./Step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL Max/Init./Step]
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL Max/Init./Step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL Max/Init./Step]
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
8-631-001 T:FAX TX PGS B/W(Tel) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-631-002 T:FAX TX PGS Color(Tel) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-631-101 T:FAX TX PGS B/W(Cloud) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-631-102 T:FAX TX PGS Color(Cloud) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-633-001 F:FAX TX PGS B/W(Tel) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-633-002 F:FAX TX PGS Color(Tel) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-633-101 F:FAX TX PGS B/W(Cloud) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-633-102 F:FAX TX PGS Color(Cloud) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-641-001 T:IFAX TX PGS B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-641-002 T:IFAX TX PGS Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-643-001 F:IFAX TX PGS B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-643-002 F:IFAX TX PGS Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-651-001 T:S-to-Email PGS B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL Max/Init./Step]
1/step]
8-651-002 T:S-to-Email PGS Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-655-001 S:S-to-Email PGS B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-655-002 S:S-to-Email PGS Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-661-001 T:Deliv PGS/Svr B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-661-002 T:Deliv PGS/Svr Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-665-001 S:Deliv PGS/Svr B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-665-002 S:Deliv PGS/Svr Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-671-001 T:Deliv PGS/PC B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-671-002 T:Deliv PGS/PC Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-675-001 S:Deliv PGS/PC B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-675-002 S:Deliv PGS/PC Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-681-001 T:PCFAX TXPGS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-683-001 F:PCFAX TXPGS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-691-001 T:TX PGS/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-692-001 C:TX PGS/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-693-001 F:TX PGS/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-694-001 P:TX PGS/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-695-001 S:TX PGS/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL Max/Init./Step]
8-696-001 L:TX PGS/LS CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1/step]
8-701-001 TX PGS/Port PSTN-1 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
8-701-004 TX PGS/Port ISDN(G3,G4) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-701-005 TX PGS/Port Network CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-711-001 T:Scan PGS/Comp JPEG/JPEG2000 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-711-002 T:Scan PGS/Comp TIFF(Multi/Single) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-711-003 T:Scan PGS/Comp PDF CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-711-004 T:Scan PGS/Comp Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-711-005 T:Scan PGS/Comp PDF/Comp CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-711-006 T:Scan PGS/Comp PDF/A CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-711-007 T:Scan PGS/Comp PDF(OCR) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-711-008 T:Scan PGS/Comp PDF/Comp(OCR) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-711-009 T:Scan PGS/Comp PDF/A(OCR) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-715-001 S:Scan PGS/Comp JPEG/JPEG2000 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-715-002 S:Scan PGS/Comp TIFF(Multi/Single) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-715-003 S:Scan PGS/Comp PDF CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-715-004 S:Scan PGS/Comp Other CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL Max/Init./Step]
1/step]
8-715-005 S:Scan PGS/Comp PDF/Comp CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-715-006 S:Scan PGS/Comp PDF/A CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-715-007 S:Scan PGS/Comp PDF(OCR) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-715-008 S:Scan PGS/Comp PDF/Comp(OCR) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-715-009 S:Scan PGS/Comp PDF/A(OCR) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-721-001 T:Deliv B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
PGS/WSD/DSM 1/step]
8-721-002 T:Deliv Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
PGS/WSD/DSM 1/step]
8-725-001 S:Deliv B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
PGS/WSD/DSM 1/step]
8-725-002 S:Deliv Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
PGS/WSD/DSM 1/step]
8-731-001 T:Scan PGS/Media B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-731-002 T:Scan PGS/Media Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-735-001 S:Scan PGS/Media B/W CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-735-002 S:Scan PGS/Media Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-741-001 RX PGS/Port PSTN-1 CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
1/step]
1/step]
8-741-004 RX PGS/Port ISDN(G3,G4) CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-741-005 RX PGS/Port Network CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL Max/Init./Step]
8-771-001 Dev Counter Total CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1/step]
8-771-002 Dev Counter K CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-771-003 Dev Counter Y CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-771-004 Dev Counter M CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-771-005 Dev Counter C CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-781-001 Toner_Botol_Info. BK CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-781-002 Toner_Botol_Info. Y CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-781-003 Toner_Botol_Info. M CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-781-004 Toner_Botol_Info. C CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-791-001 LS Memory Remain CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 /
1%/step]
8-801-001 Toner Remain K CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 /
1%/step]
8-801-002 Toner Remain Y CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 /
1%/step]
8-801-003 Toner Remain M CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 /
1%/step]
8-801-004 Toner Remain C CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 /
1%/step]
8-811-001 Eco Counter Eco Total CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-811-002 Eco Counter Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-811-003 Eco Counter Full Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-811-004 Eco Counter Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-811-005 Eco Counter Combine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL Max/Init./Step]
1/step]
8-811-006 Eco Counter Color(%) CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 /
1%/step]
8-811-007 Eco Counter Full Color(%) CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 /
1%/step]
8-811-008 Eco Counter Duplex(%) CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 /
1%/step]
8-811-009 Eco Counter Combine(%) CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 /
1%/step]
8-811-010 Eco Counter Paper Cut(%) CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 /
1%/step]
8-811-051 Eco Counter Sync Eco Total CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-811-052 Eco Counter Sync Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-811-053 Eco Counter Sync Full Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-811-054 Eco Counter Sync Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-811-055 Eco Counter Sync Combine CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-811-056 Eco Counter Sync Color(%) CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 /
1%/step]
8-811-057 Eco Counter Sync Full Color(%) CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 /
1%/step]
8-811-058 Eco Counter Sync Duplex(%) CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 /
1%/step]
8-811-059 Eco Counter Sync Combine(%) CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 /
1%/step]
8-811-060 Eco Counter Sync Paper Cut(%) CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 /
1%/step]
8-811-101 Eco Counter Eco Totalr:Last CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-811-102 Eco Counter Color:Last CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-811-103 Eco Counter Full Color:Last CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL Max/Init./Step]
8-811-104 Eco Counter Duplex:Last CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1/step]
8-811-105 Eco Counter Combine:Last CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-811-106 Eco Counter Color(%):Last CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 /
1%/step]
8-811-107 Eco Counter Full Color(%):Last CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 /
1%/step]
8-811-108 Eco Counter Duplex(%):Last CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 /
1%/step]
8-811-109 Eco Counter Combine(%):Last CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 /
1%/step]
8-811-110 Eco Counter Paper Cut(%):Last CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 /
1%/step]
8-811-151 Eco Counter Sync Eco Totalr:Last CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-811-152 Eco Counter Sync Color:Last CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-811-153 Eco Counter Sync Full Color:Last CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-811-154 Eco Counter Sync Duplex:Last CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-811-155 Eco Counter Sync Combine:Last CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-811-156 Eco Counter Sync Color(%):Last CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 /
1%/step]
8-811-157 Eco Counter Sync Full Color(%):Last CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 /
1%/step]
8-811-158 Eco Counter Sync Duplex(%):Last CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 /
1%/step]
8-811-159 Eco Counter Sync Combine(%):Last CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 /
1%/step]
8-811-160 Eco Counter Sync Paper Cut(%):Last CTL* [0 to 100 / 0 /
1%/step]
8-851-011 Cvr Cnt:0-10% 0~2%:BK CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-851-012 Cvr Cnt:0-10% 0~2%:Y CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL Max/Init./Step]
1/step]
8-851-013 Cvr Cnt:0-10% 0~2%:M CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-851-014 Cvr Cnt:0-10% 0~2%:C CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-851-021 Cvr Cnt:0-10% 3~4%:BK CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-851-022 Cvr Cnt:0-10% 3~4%:Y CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-851-023 Cvr Cnt:0-10% 3~4%:M CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-851-024 Cvr Cnt:0-10% 3~4%:C CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-851-031 Cvr Cnt:0-10% 5~7%:BK CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-851-032 Cvr Cnt:0-10% 5~7%:Y CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-851-033 Cvr Cnt:0-10% 5~7%:M CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-851-034 Cvr Cnt:0-10% 5~7%:C CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-851-041 Cvr Cnt:0-10% 8~10%:BK CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-851-042 Cvr Cnt:0-10% 8~10%:Y CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-851-043 Cvr Cnt:0-10% 8~10%:M CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-851-044 Cvr Cnt:0-10% 8~10%:C CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-861-001 Cvr Cnt:11-20% BK CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-861-002 Cvr Cnt:11-20% Y CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-861-003 Cvr Cnt:11-20% M CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-861-004 Cvr Cnt:11-20% C CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL Max/Init./Step]
8-871-001 Cvr Cnt:21-30% BK CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1/step]
8-871-002 Cvr Cnt:21-30% Y CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-871-003 Cvr Cnt:21-30% M CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-871-004 Cvr Cnt:21-30% C CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-881-001 Cvr Cnt:31%- BK CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-881-002 Cvr Cnt:31%- Y CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-881-003 Cvr Cnt:31%- M CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-881-004 Cvr Cnt:31%- C CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-891-001 Page/Toner Bottle BK CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-891-002 Page/Toner Bottle Y CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-891-003 Page/Toner Bottle M CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-891-004 Page/Toner Bottle C CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-901-001 Page/Toner_Prev1 BK CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-901-002 Page/Toner_Prev1 Y CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-901-003 Page/Toner_Prev1 M CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-901-004 Page/Toner_Prev1 C CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-911-001 Page/Toner_Prev2 BK CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-911-002 Page/Toner_Prev2 Y CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-911-003 Page/Toner_Prev2 M CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL Max/Init./Step]
1/step]
8-911-004 Page/Toner_Prev2 C CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-921-001 Cvr Cnt/Total Coverage(%):BK CTL* [0 to 2147483647 /
0 / 1%/step]
8-921-002 Cvr Cnt/Total Coverage(%):Y CTL* [0 to 2147483647 /
0 / 1%/step]
8-921-003 Cvr Cnt/Total Coverage(%):M CTL* [0 to 2147483647 /
0 / 1%/step]
8-921-004 Cvr Cnt/Total Coverage(%):C CTL* [0 to 2147483647 /
0 / 1%/step]
8-921-011 Cvr Cnt/Total Coverage/P:BK CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-921-012 Cvr Cnt/Total Coverage/P:Y CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-921-013 Cvr Cnt/Total Coverage/P:M CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-921-014 Cvr Cnt/Total Coverage/P:C CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-941-001 Machine Status Operation Time CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-941-002 Machine Status Standby Time CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-941-003 Machine Status Energy Save Time CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-941-004 Machine Status Low Power Time CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-941-005 Machine Status Off Mode Time CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-941-006 Machine Status SC CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-941-007 Machine Status PrtJam CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-941-008 Machine Status OrgJam CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-941-009 Machine Status Supply PM Unit End CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL Max/Init./Step]
8-951-001 AddBook Register User Code /User ID CTL* [0 to 99999 / 0 /
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1/step]
8-951-002 AddBook Register Mail Address CTL* [0 to 99999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-951-003 AddBook Register Fax Destination CTL* [0 to 99999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-951-004 AddBook Register Group CTL* [0 to 99999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-951-005 AddBook Register Transfer Request CTL* [0 to 99999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-951-006 AddBook Register F-Code CTL* [0 to 99999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-951-007 AddBook Register Copy Program CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
8-951-008 AddBook Register Fax Program CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
8-951-009 AddBook Register Printer Program CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
8-951-010 AddBook Register Scanner Program CTL* [0 to 255 / 0 / 1/step]
8-961-001 Electricity Status Ctrl Standby Time CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-961-002 Electricity Status STR Time CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-961-003 Electricity Status Main Power Off Time CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-961-004 Electricity Status Reading and Printing Time CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-961-005 Electricity Status Printing Time CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-961-006 Electricity Status Reading Time CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-961-007 Electricity Status Eng Waiting Time CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-961-008 Electricity Status Low Pawer State Time CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-961-009 Electricity Status Silent State Time CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-961-010 Electricity Status Heater Off State Time CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-961-011 Electricity Status LCD on Time CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL Max/Init./Step]
1/step]
8-961-101 Electricity Status Silent Print CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-971-001 Unit Control Engine Off Recovery Count CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-971-002 Unit Control Power Off Count CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-971-003 Unit Control Force Power Off Count CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-999-001 Admin. Counter List Total CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-999-002 Admin. Counter List Copy: Full Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-999-003 Admin. Counter List Copy: BW CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-999-004 Admin. Counter List Copy: Single Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-999-005 Admin. Counter List Copy: Two Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-999-006 Admin. Counter List Printer: Full Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-999-007 Admin. Counter List Printer: BW CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-999-008 Admin. Counter List Printer: Single Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-999-009 Admin. Counter List Printer: Two Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-999-010 Admin. Counter List Fax Print: BW CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-999-011 Admin. Counter List Fax Print: Single Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-999-013 Admin. Counter List Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-999-022 Admin. Counter List Copy: Full Color(%) CTL* [0 to 2147483647 /
0 / 1/step]
8-999-023 Admin. Counter List Copy: BW(%) CTL* [0 to 2147483647 /
0 / 1/step]

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL Max/Init./Step]
8-999-024 Admin. Counter List Copy: Single Color(%) CTL* [0 to 2147483647 /
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
0 / 1/step]
8-999-025 Admin. Counter List Copy: Two Color(%) CTL* [0 to 2147483647 /
0 / 1/step]
8-999-026 Admin. Counter List Printer: Full Color(%) CTL* [0 to 2147483647 /
0 / 1/step]
8-999-027 Admin. Counter List Printer: BW(%) CTL* [0 to 2147483647 /
0 / 1/step]
8-999-028 Admin. Counter List Printer: Single Color(%) CTL* [0 to 2147483647 /
0 / 1/step]
8-999-029 Admin. Counter List Printer: Two Color(%) CTL* [0 to 2147483647 /
0 / 1/step]
8-999-030 Admin. Counter List Fax Print: BW(%) CTL* [0 to 2147483647 /
0 / 1/step]
8-999-031 Admin. Counter List Fax Print: Single Color(%) CTL* [0 to 2147483647 /
0 / 1/step]
8-999-101 Admin. Counter List Transmission Total: Color CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-999-102 Admin. Counter List Transmission Total: BW CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-999-103 Admin. Counter List FAX Transmission CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-999-104 Admin. Counter List Scanner Transmission: CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Color 1/step]
8-999-105 Admin. Counter List Scanner Transmission: BW CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]
8-999-112 Admin. Counter List Total: Full Color Simplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
Under A3/DLT 1/step]
8-999-114 Admin. Counter List Total: Full Color Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
8-999-116 Admin. Counter List Total: BW Simplex Under CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-999-118 Admin. Counter List Total: BW Duplex Under CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-999-120 Admin. Counter List Total: Single Color Simplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
8-999-122 Admin. Counter List Total: Single Color Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL Max/Init./Step]
8-999-124 Admin. Counter List Total: Two Color Simplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
8-999-126 Admin. Counter List Total: Two Color Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
8-999-132 Admin. Counter List Copy: Full Color Simplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
8-999-134 Admin. Counter List Copy: Full Color Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
8-999-136 Admin. Counter List Copy: BW Simplex Under CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-999-138 Admin. Counter List Copy: BW Duplex Under CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-999-140 Admin. Counter List Copy: Single Color Simplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
8-999-142 Admin. Counter List Copy: Single Color Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
8-999-144 Admin. Counter List Copy: Two Color Simplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
8-999-146 Admin. Counter List Copy: Two Color Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
8-999-152 Admin. Counter List Printer: Full Color Simplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
8-999-154 Admin. Counter List Printer: Full Color Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
8-999-156 Admin. Counter List Printer: BW Simplex Under CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-999-158 Admin. Counter List Printer: BW Duplex Under CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-999-160 Admin. Counter List Printer: Single Color Simplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
8-999-162 Admin. Counter List Printer: Single Color Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
8-999-164 Admin. Counter List Printer: Two Color Simplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
8-999-166 Admin. Counter List Printer: Two Color Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /

SP8-XXX (Data Log2)

CTL Max/Init./Step]
8-999-172 Admin. Counter List Fax: BW Simplex Under CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-999-174 Admin. Counter List Fax: BW Duplex Under CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
A3/DLT 1/step]
8-999-176 Admin. Counter List Fax: One Color Simplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
8-999-178 Admin. Counter List Fax: One Color Duplex CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
8-999-192 Admin. Counter List Scan: Under A3/DLT CTL* [0 to 99999999 / 0 /
1/step]

Printer Service Mode
3.11 PRINTER SERVICE MODE
1001 Bit Switch

001 Bit Switch 1 0 1
bit DFU - -
0
bit sysName Value Model name (PnP name) Hostname
1 This BitSw can switch the value of the sysName of the standard MIB.
0 (default):Model name (PnP name)
1: Host name
bit DFU - -
2
bit I/O Timeout Disabled Enabled
3 Enables/Disables MFP I/O Timeouts. If disabled, the MFP I/O Timeout setting will not
be in effect. I/O Timeouts will never occur.
bit SD Card Save Mode Disabled Enabled
4 This BitSw enables the SD card save mode setting menu to be displayed.
After enabling this BitSw, the Card Save settings will appear under:
"User Tools > Machine Features >Printer Features > List/Test print"
bit Paper Size Error Margin ±5pt ±10pt
5 When a PS job is printed on a custom paper size, the job might not print because of
a paper size mismatch caused by a calculation error. This BitSw can set the
allowable margin of error value.Note:This is available for PS, PDF only
bit Color Balance Switching 1 Disabled Enabled
6 This BitSw can be used to restore the color balance to match that of Fuji-Xerox
devices. Note: If both BitSw #2-0, BitSw #2-4 and BitSw #1-6 are configured to "1",
the configuration of #2-0 will be given priority and the color balance of 09S and earlier
models will be used.
bit DFU - -
7
1001 Bit Switch

bit Color Balance Standard Color Color balance of 09S and earlier
0 Switching 2 Balance models.
This BitSw can be used to restore the color balance to match 09S and earlier model
deveices. Note: If both BitSw #2-0 and BitSw #2-4 are configured to "1", the
configuration of #2-0 will be given priority and the color balance of 09S and earlier

1001 Bit Switch

bit DFU - -
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1
bit Collation Type Shift Collation Normal Collation
2 The type of collation will be applied to a job when the job does not explicitly define a
collation type. Note: If #5-0 is enabled, this BitSw has no effect.
bit PDL Auto Switching Enable Disable
3 Enables/Disables the MFPs ability to switch the PDL processor when receiving a job
which contains both PS and PCL5e/c.
bit Color Balance Standard Color Color balance of 09A and
4 Switching 3 Balance extended 09A models.
This BitSw can be used to restore the color balance to match 09A and extended 09A
model devices. Note: If both BitSw #2-0 and BitSw #2-4 are configured to "1", the
configuration of #2-0 will be given priority and the color balance of 09S and earlier
bit DFU - -
5
bit Switch dither Use normal dither Use alternative dither
6 *Please refer to RTB#RD014018
bit DFU - -
7
1001 Bit Switch

bit DFU - -
0
bit DFU - -
1
bit Legacy HP Compatibility Disabled Enabled
2 Uses the same left margin as older HP models such as HP4000/HP8000.This
setting enables the starting position of the graphics in the job to be changed.If this
BitSw is enabled, the left margin command of "<ESC>*r0A" will be conducted as
"<ESC>*r1A".
PCL command are bellow:
- <Esc> *r0A ->Start Graphics at X coordinate of Zero
- <Esc> *r1A ->Start Graphics at Current Cursor
Note:This is available for PCL5e/c only.
bit DFU - -

1001 Bit Switch

3 to
7
1001 Bit Switch

bit 0 DFU - -
to5
bit 6 Bypass Tray Paper Direction LEF SEF
Changes the paper direction used with "Machine Setting(s): Any Type" in the
bypass tray. This setting enables the direction of the paper in the bypass tray to
specified
bit 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch

bit Display Finishing Settings Hide settings Display settings
0 If enabled, users will be able to configure the Collate Settings, Staple Settings, and
Punch Settings from the operation panel. The available Settings will depend on the
device and configured options.
After enabling this BitSw, the settings will appear under:

"User Tools > Machine Features >Printer Features > System"
bit Number of Copies with Paper Print Single Copy Print All Copies
1 Mismatch
If a paper size or type mismatch occurs during the printing of multiple copies, only a
single copy is output by default. Using this bit switch, the device can be configured to
print all copies even if a paper mismatch occurs.
bit GPS Filter Enabled Disabled
2 If the GPS Filter is disabled, SDK applications will not be able to alter the print data
standard printer applications receive. Note: The main purpose of this BitSw is for
troubleshooting the effects of SDK applications on data.
bit PS Trigger for PDL Switching Standard pattern Pattern1
3 Specifying the auto detection algorithm for PS while switching the print language.
If the Pattern1 is selected, "%%" is used as a printer system PS trigger.
bit Increase max. number of stored Disabled (100) Enabled (750)
4 jobs.
Changes the maximum number of jobs that can be stored on the HDD. The default
(disabled) is 100. If this is enabled, the max. will be raised to 750 or 1000 depending

1001 Bit Switch

on the model.
bit Direction of Output Face-down Face-up
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
5 This setting enables you to specify the whether the paper is output face-down or
face-up onto the output tray.
bit Change Imposition Standard specification Old model
6 Specification specification
This setting enables the specification for imposition such as page alignment and
image rotation to be changed to the specification of old models when job orientation
and paper size are mixed.
The old models are below:
- PCL: 04A and earlier models
- PS/PDF/RPCS: 05S and earlier models
- BMLinkS: 05A and earlier models
IRIPS PS/PDF:
- 09A and earlier models: Operation under current model specification is not
supported (Operation with older specification is recommended)
- 15S and later models: Operation under current model specification is supported.
bit Paper Path for Letterhead Simplex paper path Duplex paper path
7 Simplex Job
This setting enables the simplex job to be routed through the duplex unit. Only affects
jobs specified as letterhead.
1001 Bit Switch

bit 0 Forced printing Disabled Enabled
If enabled, the image will be printed regardless of whether the specified roller is of
the correct size paper or not. This is similar to "Form Feed" on a standard printer.
The default is disabled.
Include bypass in auto tray select Disable Enable
If enabled, the Bypass tray will be included in auto
tray selection.
bit 1 DFU - -
to 7
1001 Bit Switch

bit 0 to 7 DFU - -

1001 Bit Switch

bit 0 DFU - -
to 2
bit 3 BW Printing without the PJL Color Command Disabled Enabled
"DATAMODE"
This setting enables a job to be printed in BW without the PJL color command
"DATAMODE".
Note: Color jobs will not be printed without the PJL color command "DATAMODE".
Note:This is available for PCL, PS only.
bit 4 DFU - -
to 5
bit 6 Orientation Auto Detect Function (PS) Enabled Disabled
Automatically chooses page orientation of PostScript jobs (Landscape or Portrait)
based on the content.
PJL/PDL Color Command Priority PJL Priority PDL Priority
This setting enables the priority of a PDL color command to be changed when a
PJL color command is "@PJL RENDERMODE = GRAYSCALE" in a job.
Note:This is available for PCL,RPCS,PS.
bit 7 [PDF]: Orientation Auto Detect Function Enabled Disabled
Automatically chooses page orientations of PDF jobs (Landscape or Portrait)

based on the content.
1001 Bit Switch

bit PDL Auto Detection timeout of jobs submitted Disabled Enabled
0 via USB or Parallel Port (IEEE 1284). (Immediately) (10 seconds)
To be used if PDL auto-detection fails. A failure of PDL autodetection does not
necessarily mean that the job can not be printed. This bit switch tells the device
whether to time-out immediately (default) upon failure or to wait 10 seconds.
bit DFU - -
1
bit Job Cancel after Jam Not cancelled Cancelled
2 This setting enables it to be specifed whether jobs will be cancelled after a jam
occurs.
Note: If this BitSw is enabled, printing under the following conditions might result in
problems:
- Job submission via USB or Parallel Port

1001 Bit Switch

- Spool printing (WIM >Configuration > Device Settings > System)
- Printing a large number of jobs continuously (The status of the job are not acquired
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
when jobs exceeding the number guaranteed by the job monitor are continuously
printed.)
bit DFU - -
3
bit Timing of the PJL Status ReadBack (JOB END) Mode 0 Mode 1
4 when printing multiple collated copies.
This BitSw determines the timing of the PJL STATUS JOB END sent when multiple
collated copies are being printed.
Mode 0: JOB END is sent by the device to the client after the first copy has
completed printing. This causes the page counter to be incremented after the first
copy and then again at the end of the job.
Mode 1: JOB END is sent by the device to the client after the last copy has finished
printing. This causes the page counter to be incremented at the end of each job.
bit UTF-8 Mode Enabled Disabled
5 Enabled (=0):
Text composed of UTF-8 characters can be displayed in the operation panel.
Disabled (=1):
UTF-8 characters cannot be displayed in the operation panel.
For example, job names are sometimes stored in the MIB using UTF-8 encoded
characters. When these are displayed on the operation panel, they will be garbled
unless this BitSw is enabled (=0).
bit Print Option Configuration (rsh, rcp, ftp) Enabled Disable
6 This BitSw enables the specification of the configuration of the print option using
rcp/rsh/ftp.
bit Enable/Disable Print from USB/SD's Preview Enabled Disabled
7 function
Determines whether the Print from USB/SD function will have the Preview function.
Enabled (=0): Print from USB/SD will have the Preview function.
Disabled (=1): Print from USB/SD will not have the Preview function.
1001 Bit Switch

010 Bit Switch A 0 1
bit 0 DFU - -
to 3
bit 4 Not Used - -
bit 5 Store and Skip Errored Job locks the queue Queue is not Queue locked

1001 Bit Switch

locked after after SSEJ
SSEJ
If this is 1, then after a job is stored using Store and Skip Errored Job (SSEJ), new
jobs cannot be added to the queue until the stored job has been completely printed.
bit 6 Allow use of Store and Skip error Job if Does not allow Allows SSEJ
connected to an external charge device. SSEJ with ECD with ECD
If this is 0, Store and Skip Errored Job (SSEJ) will be automatically disabled if an
external charge device is connected.
Note: We do not officially support enabling this bit switch (1). Use it at your own
risk.
bit 7 Job cancels remaining pages when the Job does not Job cancels
paid-for pages have been printed on an cancel
external charge device
When setting 1 is enabled, after printing the paid-for pages on an external charge
device, the job that includes any remaining pages will be canceled.
This setting will prevent the next user from printing the unnecessary pages from the
previous user's print job.
1001 Bit Switch

011 Bit Switch B 0 1
bit Show Menu List Hide Menu List Show Menu
0 List
If this is 0, the Menu List button will be removed from Printer Features.
bit Print job interruption Does not allow Allow
1 interruption interruption
0 (Default): Print jobs are not interrupted. If a job is promoted to the top of the print
queue, it will wait for the currently printing job to finish.
1: If a job is promoted to the top of the queue, it will interrupt the currently printing job
and start printing immediately.
bit Limitless Paper Feeding for the Bypass Enable Disable
2 Tray
When the Bypass Tray is the target of the "Auto Tray Select", and "Machine
Setting(s): Any Type" is configured for the "Tray Setting Priority" of the Bypass Tray,
this BitSw can switch the behavior whether or not Limitless Paper Feeding is applied
to the Bypass Tray.
Enabled (=0: Default):
Limitless Paper Feeding is applied to the Bypass Tray.
If a tray other than the Bypass Tray matches the job's paper size and type but has run

1001 Bit Switch

out of paper, printing will occur from the Bypass Tray.
Disabled (=1):
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
Limitless Paper Feeding is not applied to the Bypass Tray.
If a tray other than the Bypass Tray matches the job's paper size and type but has run
out of paper, printing will stop and an alert will appear on the LCD screen, stating that
the tray has run out of paper. This prevents unexpected use of the Bypass Tray.
Limitations when this BitSw is set to "1":
- Jobs that contain more than one paper size cannot be printed.
- The "Paper Tray Priority: Printer" setting must be configured to a tray other than the
Bypass Tray.
bit DFU - -
3
bit "Apply Auto Paper Select" to Disabled Enabled
4 Override Paper Size or Paper Type of the
Device
If this BitSw is enabled, the "Apply Auto Paper Select" setting will decide if the paper
size or paper type that is specified in the device settings should be overridden by the
job's commands when "Tray Setting Priority" is set to "Driver/Command" or "Machine
Setting(s): Any Type".
- Apply Auto Paper Select = OFF: Overridden (priority is given to the job’s
commands)
- Apply Auto Paper Select = ON: NOT overridden (priority is given to the device
settings)
bit Not Used - -
5
bit Tray Selection when a Paper Mismatch Disabled Enabled
6 Occurs.
This BitSw enables the inactive auto paper select tray to be unselectable when a
paper size/type mismatch occurs.
bit Not Used
7
1001 Bit Switch

012 Bit Switch C 0 1
bit 0 DFU - -
to 2
bit 3 Switching paper discharge operation when the one by one Upper limit
limit number of sheets stapled is exceeded number

1001 Bit Switch

Switching paper discharge operation when the limit number of sheets stapled is
exceeded
bit 4 DFU - -
bit 5 Change the user ID type displayed on the Login User User ID
operation panel Name
If this BitSw is enabled, the user ID type on the operation panel can change to the
user ID behavior exhibited in 14A and earlier models.
bit 6 AirPrint Enabled Disabled
For 15S and later models that support AirPrint, AirPrint can be disabled by
changing this Bit Switch from 0 (default) to 1.
bit 7 AirPrint PDF Enabled Disabled
-
1001 Bit Switch

013 Bit Switch (2) 1 0 1
bit 0 Paper Size Mismatch Display Enabled Disabled
Display warning screen (40909) of paper size mismatch
bit 1 Paper set guide Enabled Disabled
Display the manual feed tray paper set guide screen when auto tray is selected
bit 2 Profile switching Low toner color reproduction Yield improvement
Profile switching (low toner color reproduction / yield improvement)
bit 3 Switch dither Alternative dither Alternative dither
Switch dither
bit 4 Input tray mask Enabled Disabled
Enable / disable input tray mask
bit 5 DFU - -
bit 6 DFU - -
bit 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch

014 Bit Switch (2) 2 0 1
bit 0 to 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch

015 Bit Switch (2) 3 0 1
bit 0 to 7 DFU - -

1001 Bit Switch

016 Bit Switch (2) 4 0 1
bit 0 to 7 DFU - -
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1001 Bit Switch
017 Bit Switch (2) 5 0 1
bit 0 PDF speeding printing operation Enabled Disabled
PDF speeding printing operation
bit 1 to 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch

017 Bit Switch (2) 6 0 1
bit 0 to 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch

018 Bit Switch (2) 7 0 1
bit 0 to 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch

019 Bit Switch (2) 8 0 1
bit 0 to 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch

020 Bit Switch (2) 9 0 1
bit 0 to 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch

021 Bit Switch (2) A 0 1
bit 0 to 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch

022 Bit Switch (2) B 0 1
bit 0 to 7 DFU - -
1001 Bit Switch

023 Bit Switch (2) C 0 1
bit 0 to 7 DFU - -

1003 [Clear Setting]

001 Initialize System CTL* Initializes settings in the System menu of the user mode.
003 Delete Program CTL* DFU
1004 [Print Summary]

001 Service CTL Prints the service summary sheet (a summary of all the
Summary controller settings).
1005 [Display Version]

002 Printer Version CTL Displays the version of the controller firmware.
1101 [ToneCtlSet]
Recalls a set of gamma settings. This can be either a) the factory setting, b) the previous
setting, or c) the current setting.
001 Factory CTL [-/-/-]
002 Previous CTL [Execute]
003 Current CTL
004 ACC CTL
1102 [Resolution Settings]

Sets the printing mode (resolution) for the printer gamma adjustment. The asterisk (*)
shows which mode is set.
• 00: *1200x1200Photo
• 01: 600x600Text
• 02: 1200x1200Text
• 03: 1200x600Text
• 04: 600x600Photo
• 05: 1200x600Photo
• 06: 600x600Text
• 07: 600x600Text
1102-001 Tone Control Mode Selection CTL [0 to 99 / 0 / 1/step]
1103 [PrnColorSheet]
1103-001 ToneCtlSheet CTL Prints the test page to check the color balance before and after
1103-002 ColorChart CTL the gamma adjustment.
1104 [ToneCtlValue]
Adjusts the printer gamma for the mode selected in the Mode Selection menu.

1104-001 Black: Highlight CTL [0 to 30 / 15 / 1/step]

1104-021 Cyan: Highlight CTL
1104-041 Magenta: Highlight CTL
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1104-061 Yellow: Highlight CTL
1104-002 Black: Shadow CTL [0 to 30 / 15 / 1/step]
1104-022 Cyan: Shadow CTL
1104-042 Magenta: Shadow CTL
1104-062 Yellow: Shadow CTL
1104-003 Black: Middle CTL [0 to 30 / 15 / 1/step]
1104-023 Cyan: Middle CTL
1104-043 Magenta: Middle CTL
1104-063 Yellow: Middle CTL
1104-004 Black: IDmax CTL [0 to 30 / 15 / 1/step]
1104-024 Cyan: IDmax CTL
1104-044 Magenta: IDmax CTL
1104-064 Yellow: IDmax CTL
1105 [Save Tone Cntrol Value]

Saves the print gamma (adjusted with the Gamma Adj.) as the new Current Setting.
Before the machine stores the new "current settingR", it moves the data stored as the
"current setting" to the "previous setting" memory-storage location.
1105-001 Save Tone Cntrol Value CTL* [EXECUTE]
1106 [Toner Limit]

Adjusts the maximum toner amount for image development.
1106-001 Toner Limit Value CTL* [100 to 400 / 0 / 1/step]
1110 [Media Print Device Setting]

Enable or disable the media print support function.
0: Disable, 1:Enable
1110-002 0: Disable 1:Enable CTL* [0 to 1 / 1 / 1/step]
1111 [All Job Delete Mode]

-
0: Exclusive New Job, 1:Including New Job
1110-002 0: Exclusive New Job 1: Including New Job CTL* [0 or 1 / 1 / 1/step]
1500 [-]

Retrieve the type of PS that is running.

1110-002 0: No Boot CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / 1/step]
1: Start Adobe PS
2: IRIPS PS Startup
7910 [-]
Reports the machine code string.
7-910-xxx 150:RPCS CTL [- / - / -]
151:PS
152:RPDL
153:R98
154:R16
155:RPGL
156:R55
157:RTIFF
158:PCL
159:PCLXL
160:MSIS
161:MSIS(OPT)
162:PDF
163:BMLinkS
164:PICTBRIDGE
165:PJL
166:IPDS
167:MediaPrint:JPEG
168:MediaPrint:TIFF
169:XPS
180:FONT
181:FONT1
182:FONT2
183:FONT3
184:FONT4
185:FONT5
186:FONT6
187:FONT7
7911 [-]
Reports the version character string.
7-910-xxx 150:RPCS CTL [- / - / -]

151:PS
152:RPDL
153:R98
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
154:R16
155:RPGL
156:R55
157:RTIFF
158:PCL
159:PCLXL
160:MSIS
161:MSIS(OPT)
162:PDF
163:BMLinkS
164:PICTBRIDGE
165:PJL
166:IPDS
167:MediaPrint:JPEG
168:MediaPrint:TIFF
169:XPS
180:FONT
181:FONT1
182:FONT2
183:FONT3
184:FONT4
185:FONT5
186:FONT6
187:FONT7
aper Size Error Mar

Scanner Service Mode
3.12 SCANNER SERVICE MODE
3.12.1 SP1-XXX (SYSTEM AND OTHERS)

1001 [Scan Nv Version]
1-001-005 - *CTL -
Operates automatic initialization to ensure that scanner NV is initialized if necessary.
To do this SP, specify the version of scanner NV within 9 characters.
“Function name”_”Machine code”_”Serial number”
- Function name: Enter “3”.
- Machine code: Enter the machine code with three characters.
- Serial number: Enter the number (default: 001).
1005 [Erase margin(Remote scan)]

1-005-001 Range from 0 to 5 mm *CTL [0 to 5 / 0 / 1 mm/step]
Creates an erase margin for all edges of the scanned image.
If the machine has scanned the edge of the original, create a margin. This SP is
activated only when the machine uses TWAIN scanning.
1009 [Remote scan disable]

1-009-001 0:enable 1:disable *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
Enable or disable remote scan.
1010 [Non Display ClearLight PDF]

1-010-001 0:Display 1:Nondisplay *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
Display or nondisplay ClearLight PDF function.
1011 [Org Count Disp]

1-011-001 0:ON 1:OFF *CTL [0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
Display or nondisplay original counter.
0: Displays remaining memory.
1: Displays original counter.
1012 [UserInfo Release]

1-012-001 0:No 1:Yes *CTL [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
Set if the following user information is released or not.
- Destination of the mail, folder, CS
- Sender

- Message
- Subject
- Fail name
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1013 [Scan to Media Device Setting]
1-013-002 0:OFF 1:ON *CTL [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step]
Enable or disable ScanTo media device.
1014 [Scan to Folder Pass Input Set]

1-014-001 0:OFF 1:ON *CTL [ 0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
Sets enable or disable the password setting when make a Scan to Folder job.
1016 [Scan To Email Sender Address]

1-016-001 0: Login user address *CTL [ 0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
1: POP before SMTP address
Specify the Scan To Email sender address.
1040 [Scan: LT/LG Mixed Sized Sizes Setting]

1-040-001 0:OFF 1:ON *CTL [0 or 1 / 1 / 1 /step] (NA)
[0 or 1 / 0 / 1 /step] (Other)
Enables or disables mixing LT/LG size documents for scanner.
0: Disable, 1: Enable
Default
For North America: 1
Others: 0
1041 [Scan:FlairAPI Setting]

1-041-001 0x00 – 0xff *CTL * see BitSwitch below:
Sets Scanner FlairAPI Function enable / disable.
This SP is set by BitSwitch and needs to reboot the machine after making changes.
bit Setting meanings Description
0 1
bit 0 Start of FlairAPI Off On Sets whether to start exclusive
Server (Do not (Start) FlairAPI http server. If it is 0, scanning
Start) FlairAPI function and simple UI
function will be disabled.
bit 1 Access Disabled Enabled If it is “0”, accessing is limited from the
permission of machine only, such as operating panel,
FlairAPI from SDK/J, MFP browsers etc… If it is “1”,

outside of the accessing is allowed from outside of

machine FlairAPI such as PC, Remote UI,
IT-Box etc…
bit 2 IPv6 (Exclusive) IPv6 IPv4 If this bit is “0”, only IPv6 accessing is
/ IPv4 (Priority) (Exclusive) (Priority) permitted.
Switching If this bit is “1” and IPv4 is enabled, the
machine uses IPv4 accessing. If this
bit is “1” and IPv4 is disabled, the
machine uses IPv6 accessing. In this
case, it is unable to access through
Smart Operation Panel if IPv4 address
is enabled.
bit 3 Remote UI Not Used Use Sets use of Remote UI for scanner
Function function.
bit 4 Reserved - - -
1042 [Scan To Email Sender Address]

1-042-001 0: Pursuant to the language setting (Default) *CTL [0 to 3 / 0 / 1 /step]
1: MM/DD/YYYY
2: DD/MM/YYYY
3: YYYY/MM/DD
Specify the format to display the date when sending files by Scan To Email.
1043 [Result Screen Doc Name Display]

1-043-001 0: NoDisplay *CTL [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 /step]
1: Display
Specify whether or not to display the document name (for security purposes) on the
screen
displaying the Scan To Email transmission result.
3.12.2 SP2-XXX (SCANNING-IMAGE QUALITY)

2021 [Compression Level(Grayscale)]
Selects the compression ratio for grayscale processing mode (JPEG) for the five
settings that can be selected at the operation panel.
2-021-001 Comp1:5-95 *CTL [5 to 95 / 20 / 1 /step ]
2-021-002 Comp2:5-95 *CTL [5 to 95 / 40 / 1 /step ]

2-021-003 Comp3:5-95 *CTL [5 to 95 / 65 / 1 /step ]

2-021-004 Comp4:5-95 *CTL [5 to 95 / 80 / 1 /step ]
2-021-005 Comp5:5-95 *CTL [5 to 95 / 95 / 1 /step ]
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
2024 [Compression ratio of ClearLightPDF]
Selects the compression ratio for clearlight PDF for the two settings that can be
selected at the operation panel.
2-024-001 Compression Ratio(Normal) *CTL [5 to 95 / 25 / 1 /step ]
2-024-002 Compression Ratio(High) *CTL [5 to 95 / 15 / 1 /step ]
2025 [Compression ratio of ClearLightPDF JPEG2000]

Selects the compression ratio for clearlight PDF for the two settings that can be
selected at the operation panel.
2-025-001 Compression Ratio(Normal) JPEG2000 *CTL [5 to 95 / 25 / 1 /step ]
2-025-002 Compression Ratio(High) JPEG2000 *CTL [5 to 95 / 15 / 1 /step ]
2030 [OCR PDF DetectSens]

2-030-001 White Lumi Value: 0 - 255 *CTL [0 to 255 / 250 / 1 / step]
2-030-002 White Pix Ratio: 0 - 100 *CTL [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 / step]
2-030-003 White Tile Ratio: 0 -100 *CTL [0 to 100 / 80 / 1 / step]
2031 [Vertical Judgment Setting]

001 Function Setting: 0 - 1 *CTL [0 to 1/ 0 / 1 / step]
0:Enable
1:Disable
When the image does not become upright state due to the vertical judgment error, set this
SP to "0: Disable". After changing the setting, turn OFF/ON the main power.
002 Algorithm Setting: 0 - 2 *CTL [0 to 2 / 0 / 1 / step]
0: Normal Algorithm
1: Simple Algorithm
2: Composite Algorithm
Set the identification algorithm when SP2-031-001 is "1: Enable". Change the setting
when the vertical judgment error occur frequently. After changing the setting, turn OFF/ON
the main power.
3.12.3 SP3-XXX
3044 -
3-044-001 - CTL* [0 to1 / 1 / 1 / -]

Specify the compression ratio of scanned image data when using clear light PDF.
0: High (The value in SP2-024-02 is applied.)
1: Normal (The value in SP2-024-01 is applied.)
3045 -
3-045-001 - CTL* [0 to 5 / 5 / 1 / -]
Specify which location (server) to search first when searching for the mail address.
0: LDAP Server 1
1: LDAP Server 2
2: LDAP Server 3
3: LDAP Server 4
4: LDAP Server 5
5: Machine Address Book
3053 -
3-053-001 - CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 / -]
Specify the compression ratio of scanned image data when using clear light PDF.
0: JPEG (The value in SP2-025-02 is applied.)
0: JPEG2000 (The value in SP2-025-01 is applied.)
3-053-002 - CTL* [0 to 1 / 0 / 1 / -]
Specify the compression ratio of a scanned text image when using clear light PDF.
0: MMR
1: JBIG2
3066 [High ComprerssionPDF PrioritySetting]

3-066-001 - CTL* [0to1 / 1 / 1 / -]
Specify the clear light PDF generation mode.

0: Generate PDF
1: Handling Speed
3067 [flate Compression Setting]

3-067-001 - CTL* [0to1 / 1 / 1 / -]
Specify whether to enable or disable clear light PDF compression.
0: Disable
1: Enable
3070 [Scan Limit Warning Display Setting]

3-070-001 - CTL* [0to1 / 1 / 1 / -]

Specify whether or not to display the warning when the number of scans reaches the
upper limit.
0: Not Display
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
1: Display
3071 [Function Use Count]

3-071-001 WSD CTL* [0 to 4294967295 / 0 / 1 / -]
Counts the number of jobs sent via Scan to PC of the WSD function.
3-071-002 DSM CTL* [0 to 4294967295 / 0/ 1 / -]
Counts the number of jobs sent via Scan to PC of the DSM function.
3-071-003 SmallSizeTray CTL* [0 to 4294967295 / 0 / 1 / -]
Counts the number of originals fed from the small paper feeding unit.
*This machine does not count because it does not come with this optional unit.
3-071-004 BlankDetect Ocr CTL* [0 to 4294967295 / 0 / 1 / -]
Counts the number of jobs to which the blank paper elimination function (with OCR)
is applied.
3-071-005 BlankDetect CTL* [0 to 4294967295 / 0 / 1 / -]
Counts the number of jobs to which the blank paper elimination function (without
OCR) is applied.
3-071-006 AirPrint/Mopria CTL* [0 to 4294967295 / 0 / 1 / -]
Counts the number of pages scanned with AirPrint/Mopria.

3-071-007 ScanToURL CTL* [0 to 4294967295 / 0 / 1 / -]
Counts the number of pages sent with ScanToURL.
3072 [Total Job Count]

3-072-001 LegacyScan CTL* [0 to 4294967295 / 0 / 1 / -]
Counts the number of times a job is executed using “Scanner (Classic)”.

3-072-002 SmartScan CTL* [0 to 4294967295 / 0 / 1 / -]
Counts the number of times a job is executed using “Scanner”.

3-072-003 SimpleScan CTL* [0 to 4294967295 / 0 / 1 / -]

Counts the number of times a job is executed using “Simple Scanner”.

3-072-004 MediaScan CTL* [0 to 4294967295 / 0 / 1 / -]
Counts the number of times a job is executed using the Media Scanner function.
3-072-005 OtherScan CTL* [0 to 4294967295 / 0 / 1 / -]
Counts the number of times a job is executed using any other scanner function.

Input and Output Check
3.13 INPUT AND OUTPUT CHECK
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
3.13.1 ADF UNIT
Input Check
No. Part Name SP Name SP No. Reading

0 1
2 Original feed sensor DF Feed 6-011-010 Paper detected Paper not
(S25) Sensor detected
3 Registration sensor Registration 6-011-013 Paper detected Paper not
(S24) Sensor detected
6 ADF top cover sensor Feed Cover 6-011-015 Close Open
(S23) Sensor
7 Original set sensor Original 6-011-009 Not set Set
(S22) Detection
8 Double-feed sensor Page Keeper 6-011-024 Double feed not Double feed
(PCB14) (PCB15) Sensor detected detected
Output check
No. Part Name SP Name SP No. Remark

1 Original feed clutch (CL4) Feed Clutch 6-012-014
4 CIS (S21) unit: scanner lamp Scanner Lamp: Color 4-723-001
5 ADF motor (M8) Motor Forward 6-012-003
Motor Reverse 6-012-004
3.13.2 SCANNER UNIT/ LASER UNIT

IM C300series

IM C400series
Input Check

0 1
2 Scanner HP Scanner HP Sensor 5-803-200 Not HP HP


0 1
sensor (S20)
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
4 ADF position sensor Platen Cover Sensor 5-803-201 Close Open
(S19)
6 Interlock switch 1 Interlock Release 5-803-012 Door Door
Detection 1 open close
7 Interlock switch 2 Interlock Release 5-803-013 Door Door
Detection 1 open close
- - LD Off Check 5-803-094 - -
Output check

1 Scanner lamp Scanner Lamp 5-804-202
Scanner Lamp: Color 5-804-203 Not
1200 available
Scanner Lamp: Bk 5-804-204 Not
available
3 Polygon mirror motor (B/C) (M5) Polygon Motor1: 5-804-103
Standard2
Polygon Motor1: 5-804-104
Standard
Polygon Motor1: Low 5-804-105
5 polygon mirror motor (M/Y) (M6) Polygon Motor2: 5-804-107
Standard2
Polygon Motor2: 5-804-108
Standard
Polygon Motor2: Low 5-804-109
3, 5 Polygon mirror motor (B/C) (M5), Polygon Motor1,2: 5-804-111
(M/Y) (M6) Standard2
Polygon Motor1,2: 5-804-112
Standard
Polygon Motor1,2: Low 5-804-113

3.13.3 INTERNAL FINISHER (IM C400SRF ONLY)
paper exit sensor INPUT Check

0 1
1 Entrance sensor (S45) Entrance Sensor 6-145-001 Closed Open
2 Paper exit sensor (S43) Paper Exit Sensor 6-145-002 Paper not Paper
detected detected
3 Jogger fence HP sensor Jogger HP Sensor 6-145-003 Paper not Paper
(S41) detected detected
4 Shift roller HP sensor Shift Roller HP SN 6-145-004 Paper not Paper
(S37) detected detected
5 Gathering roller HP Positioning Roller 6-145-005 Paper not Paper
sensor (S38) HP SN detected detected
6 Exit guide plate HP Ext Guide Plate HP 6-145-006 Paper not Paper
sensor (S44) SN detected detected
7 Staple tray paper Staple Tray Paper 6-145-007 Paper not Paper
8 Remaining paper Tray Paper Height 6-145-008 Paper not Paper


0 1
9 Tray Lower Limit Tray Overflow SN 6-145-009 Paper not Paper
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
Sensor (S39) detected detected
10 - Staple HP 6-145-010 - -
Sensor*1
11 - Staple Near End 6-145-011 - -
SN*1
12 - Self Priming 6-145-012 - -
Sensor*1
13 Interlock switch Front Door SW 6-145-013 Front door Front door
closed open
*1 These SPs are not used in this machine.
OUTPUT Check
No. Part Name SP Name SP No. Remarks
14 Paper transport motor (M16) Transport Motor 6-146-001
15 Paper exit motor (M17) Paper Ext Motor 6-146-002
16 Jogger motor (M20) Jogger Motor 6-146-003
17 Shift roller motor (M19) Shift Roller Motor 6-146-004
18 Gathering roller motor (M18) Positioning Motor 6-146-005
19 Exit guide plate motor (M21) Ext Guide Plate Motor 6-146-006
20 Tray lift motor (M22) Tray Lift Motor 6-146-007
21 Staple motor (M23) Stapler Motor 6-146-008
22 Stopper Solenoid (SOL3) Paper Height SOL 6-146-009
3.13.4 PAPER FEED

IM C300 series

IM C400 series
Input Check

0 1
6 Tray set sensor (S34) Tray Set Detection 5-803-054 Set Not set


0 1
7 Paper end sensor Bypass Paper End 5-803-003 Paper Paper not
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
(bypass) (S6) Detection Sensor detected detected
8 Registration Registration Sensor 5-803-001 Paper Paper not
sensor (S24) detected detected
9 Bypass paper width Bypass Paper Width 5-803-004 Paper Paper not
sensor (S5) Detection Sensor detected detected
10 Paper feed Tray Exit Sensor 5-803-011 Paper Paper not
sensor (S31)*1 detected detected
10 Paper feed Feed Sensor 5-803-067 Paper Paper not
*2
11 Bypass tray lift sensor By-pass Lift Position 5-803-010 Down Up
(S4) Sensor
12 Tray paper end sensor Tray Paper End 5-803-002 Paper Paper not
(main unit) (S30) Detection Sensor detected detected
13 Tray lift sensor (S35) Tray Lift Sensor 5-803-053 Down Up
*1 IM C300 series
*2 IM C400 series
Output Check

1 Tray lift Tray Lift 5-804-007 Do not execute this SP when the paper
motor (M15) Motor feed tray is set.
If keeps the tray lift motor (M15) switched
ON, the bottom plate can lift up too much
because the tray lift sensor (S35) does not
work. This will cause the sensor to damage.
2 Paper feed Paper Feed 5-804-002
clutch (CL9) Clutch
3 Registration Registration 5-804-001
clutch (CL8) Clutch
4 Bypass feed Bypass Feed 5-804-004
clutch (CL7) Clutch
5 Bypass lift Bypass Lift 5-804-005
clutch (CL1) Clutch
14 vertical Transport 5-804-114
transport clutch Clutch
(CL10)*1

*1 IM C400series only
3.13.5 PAPER EXIT/ DUPLEX, WASTE TONER BOTTLE

IM C300series
IM C400series
Input Check


0 1
3 Duplex entrance Duplex Entrance 5-803-008 Paper Paper not
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
sensor (S1) Sensor detected detected
4 Right cover sensor Right Cover Sensor 5-803-014 Door close Door open
(SW2)
6 Paper exit sensor (S7) Exit Sensor 5-803-007 Paper Paper not
detected detected
7 Duplex exit sensor (S2) Duplex Exit Sensor 5-803-006 Paper Paper not
detected detected
8 Waste toner full Toner Collection Full 5-803-019 Not full Full
sensor (S36) Sensor
10 Waste toner bottle set Toner Collection Bottle 5-803-020 Set Not set
sensor (S26) Set Detection
Output Check

1 Reverse clutch (CL2) Reverse Clutch 5-804-089
2 Paper exit clutch (CL3) Exit Clutch 5-804-088
5 Duplex clutch (CL6) Duplex Clutch 5-804-003
9 Junction gate solenoid (SOL1) Paper Exit Rotary Solenoid 5-804-008
3.13.6 FUSING
IM C300series

IM C400series
Input Check

0 1
1 Fusing exit Fusing Exit Sensor 5-803-027 Paper Paper not
2 Fusing entrance Fusing Entrance 5-803-026 Paper Paper not
sensor (S3) Sensor detected detected
- - Set and Destination 5-803-028 - -
Detection
- - Fusing New Unit 5-803-029 New Not new
Detection
- - Fusing High Temp 5-803-030 Detected Not detected
Detection
3.13.7 TONER SUPPLY/ TRANSFER

IM C300series

SP Mode Tables
Appendices
IM C400series
Input Check

0 1
2 Toner end sensor (C) Toner End Sensor: C 5-803-024 Not end End
(S11)
4 Toner end sensor Toner End Sensor: M 5-803-023 Not end End
(M) (S12)
6 Toner end sensor Toner End Sensor: Y 5-803-022 Not end End
(Y) (S13)
8 ITB lift HP sensor (S33) Image Transfer Contact HP 5-803-016 Contact Not
Sensor contact
Output Check

1 Toner supply Toner Supply 5-804-038 Operation : Run the toner supply motor for 1.5
motor Motor: Bk sec..
(K) (M1) Notes :
3 Toner supply Toner Supply 5-804-037 • If you want to run again, do it after
motor Motor: C executing SP3-011-001 (Normal ProCon)
(C) (M2) or printing 1 or more sheet(s) in full color
5 Toner supply Toner Supply 5-804-036 mode.
motor Motor: M • If you run without obeying the
(M) (M3) above-mentioned operations, following
7 Toner supply Toner Supply 5-804-035 failures may occur.
motor Motor: Y • The toner supply unit and PCDU are
(Y) (M4) damaged, and units replacing is
required.
• Toner can scatter inside and outside
the machine from the supply unit.
9 ITB lift motor Image 5-804-033 If you execute this SP, the ITB roller halts at a
(M14) Transfer position which is not at the home position
Contact (separated from the ITB).
Motor If you remove or install the PCDU or the ITB
unit immediately after the motor is switched
ON/OFF with this SP, the drums and ITB may
be damaged.
Before you remove/install the PCDU or the
ITB unit, initialize the machine with turning the
main power OFF/ON or opening/closing the
front door.
10 ID sensor TM/ID 5-804-071


(front) (S27) Sensor:
Front
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
ID sensor TM/ID 5-804-072
(center) (S28) Sensor:
Center
ID sensor TM/ID 5-804-073
(rear) (S29) Sensor: Rear
11 ID Sensor TM Sensor 5-804-021 After the motor is turned ON with this SP, it is
Shutter Shutter turned OFF automatically in about 30
Solenoid Solenoid seconds.
(SOL2) If you repeat turning OFF and ON
continuously, the temperature of the solenoid
rises. It can wrinkle the ITB near the solenoid.
- - Toner End 5-804-039
Sensor
Power
- - ID Tag: 5-804-042
Power
Supply
Control
- - Toner 5-804-043
Sensor
Power
3.13.8 DRIVE UNIT

IM C300series

IM C400series
Input Check

0 1
1 Fusing motor (M13) Fusing Motor: Lock 5-803-041 Lock Normal
2 Paper transport motor (M12) Transport Motor: Lock 5-803-042 Lock Normal
3 Development motor (CMY) (M9) FC Dev Motor: Lock 5-803-039 Lock Normal


0 1
4 Drum motor (CMY) (M10) FC Drum Motor: Lock 5-803-040 Lock Normal
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
5 Drum motor (M11) Bk Drum Motor: Lock 5-803-038 Lock Normal
Output Check

1 Fusing Fusing Motor: 5-804-029 Do not use these SPs, but use following
motor (M13) Standard SPs instead.
Speed 1 • SP1-158-001 (Abnormal Noise
Fusing Motor: 5-804-030 Confirmation: Unit: Execute)
Low Speed • SP1-158-002 (Abnormal Noise
Fusing Motor: 5-804-091 Confirmation: No Unit: Execute)
Standard A simple heater control is performed in
Speed 2 these SPs, and temperature rises
Fusing Motor: 5-804-096 excessively. It can cause the fusing sleeve
Middle Speed damaged.
2 Paper Transport 5-804-031
transport Motor: Std
motor (M12) Speed 1
Transport 5-804-032
Motor: Low
Speed
Transport 5-804-092
Motor:
Standard
Speed 2
Transport 5-804-097
Motor: Middle
Speed
3 Development FC Dev Motor: 5-804-024
motor Std Speed 1
(CMY) (M9) FC Dev Motor: 5-804-025
Low Speed
FC Dev Motor: 5-804-094
Middle Speed
4 Drum motor FC Drum 5-804-027 When you turn ON the motor with these
(CMY) (M10) Motor: Std SPs, make sure to separate the color drums
Speed 1 and ITB.


FC Drum 5-804-028 Before the restoration operation of the
Motor: Low machine after abnormal stop, for example
Speed JAM, if the drum motor (CMY) (M10) is
FC Drum 5-804-095 turned ON with these SPs, only the color
Motor: Middle drums drive. At this time, the ITB has
Speed stopped but the ITB is in contact with the
color drums. Therefore the color drums and
the ITB may be damaged.
5 Drum motor Bk Drum 5-804-022 When you turn ON the motor with these
(M11) Motor: Std SPs, make sure to separate the color drums
Speed 1 and ITB.
Bk Drum 5-804-023 Before the restoration operation of the
Motor: Low machine after abnormal stop, for example
Speed JAM, if the drum motor (K) (M11) is turned
Bk Drum 5-804-090 ON with these SPs, the K drum and ITB
Motor: drive. At this time, the color drums have
Standard stopped but the color drums are in contact
Speed 2 with the ITB. Therefore the color drums and
Bk Drum 5-804-093 the ITB may be damaged.
Motor: Middle In addition, if turn ON for a long time, the
Speed cleaning blade can be distorted. When you
keeps ON with the ITB unit installed, make
sure to do it within 10 seconds.
6 Development Development 5-804-026
Clutch Clutch: Bk
(K) (CL5)
3.13.9 FAN/ BOARD

IM C300series

SP Mode Tables
Appendices
IM C400series
Input Check

0 1
1 Fusing unit cooling fan Fusing Fan: Lock 5-803-032 Lock Normal
(FAN1)


0 1
2 LD unit cooling fan (FAN2) Laser Unit Fan: Lock 5-803-033 Lock Normal
3 PCDU cooling fan (FAN3) PCDU Cooling Fan: Lock 5-803-035 Lock Normal
4 PSU Exhaust Fan (FAN4) PSU Fan: Lock 5-803-034 Lock Normal
5 Paper exit/exhaust fan Exit Exhaust Fan: Lock 5-803-070 Lock Normal
(FAN5)*1
- - PP:T1T2:SC Detection 5-803-045 SC No SC
detected
- - PP:CB:SC Detection 5-803-044 SC No SC
detected
- - BiCU Version Detection 5-803-056 - -
- - Key Counter 1: Set 5-803-047 Set Not set
Detection
- - Key Counter 2: Set 5-803-048 Not set Set
Detection
- - Keycard: Set Detection 5-803-049 Set Not set
*1 IM C400SRF only
Output Check

1 Fusing unit Fusing Fan: High 5-804-009
cooling fan Speed
(FAN1) Fusing Fan: Low 5-804-010
Speed
2 LD unit Laser Unit Fan: 5-804-011
cooling fan High Speed
(FAN2) Laser Unit Fan: 5-804-012
Low Speed
3 PCDU cooling PCDU Cooling 5-804-015
fan (FAN3) Fan: High Speed
PCDU Cooling 5-804-016
Fan: Low Speed
4 PSU Exhaust PSU Fan: High 5-804-013
Fan (FAN4) Speed
PSU Fan: Low 5-804-014
Speed
5 Paper Exit Exhaust Fan: 5-804-120
exit/exhaust High Speed


fan (FAN5)*1 Exit Exhaust Fan: 5-804-121
Low Speed
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
- - PP:Charge DC:Y 5-804-044 Do not turn ON these SPs with the
- - PP:Charge DC:M 5-804-045 PCDU installed.
- - PP:Charge DC:C 5-804-046 If you turn ON with the PCDU installed,
- - PP:Charge DC:Bk 5-804-047 an electric current continues to flow in a
- - PP:Development: 5-804-048 particular place of the drum. Therefore
Y the drum may be damaged
- - PP:Development: 5-804-049 electrostatically.
M Note:
- - PP:Development: 5-804-050 If you turn ON these SPs multiple at the
C same time, and turn OFF one of the
- - PP:Development: 5-804-051 SPs, all of the output will be stopped.
Bk When you want to stop the outputs, turn

OFF all of the SPs turned ON.
- - PP: Image 5-804-053 Do not turn ON these SPs with the
Transfer: YMC PCDU installed.
- - PP: Image 5-804-056 If you turn ON with the PCDU installed,
Transfer: Bk an electric current continues to flow in a
particular place of the drum. Therefore
the drum may be damaged
electrostatically.
- - PP: Paper 5-804-057 • Do not turn on with the ITB unit
Transfer: + installed.
- - PP: Paper 5-804-058 If the transfer is turned on without
Transfer: - turning the transfer belt, a high
voltage is continuously applied at
the same position, which may
cause a problem such as damage
to the belt.
• Do not apply "PP: Paper Transfer:
-" and "PP: Paper Transfer: +" at
the same time.
- - PP:Charge AC:Y 5-804-059 Do not use these SPs, otherwise
- - PP:Charge AC:M 5-804-061 SC312 will occur.
- - PP:Charge AC:C 5-804-063
- - PP:Charge AC:Bk 5-804-065
*1 IM C400SRF only

3.13.10 PAPER FEED UNIT (OPTIONAL)
Input Check

0 1
2 Cover sensor 1 PFU Door Sensor 1 5-803-062 Close Open
(SW1)
Cover sensor 2 PFU Door Sensor 2 5-803-063 Close Open
(SW1)
Cover sensor 3 PFU Door Sensor 3 5-803-069 Close Open
(SW1)
3 Paper transport PFU Vertical 5-803-060 Paper not Paper
sensor 1 (S1) Transport Sen. 1 detected detected
Paper transport PFU Vertical 5-803-061 Paper not Paper
Paper transport PFU Vertical 5-803-068 Paper not Paper
Output check

1 Paper transport clutch 1 (CL1) PFU Vertical Transport CL1 5-804-086 Tray 1
Paper transport clutch 2 (CL1) PFU Vertical Transport CL2 5-804-087 Tray 2
Paper transport clutch 3 (CL1) PFU Vertical Transport CL3 5-804-118 Tray 3


4 PFU transport motor 1 (M1) PFU Transport Motor 1: High 5-804-080 Tray 1
PFU Transport Motor 1: Low 5-804-081 Tray 1
SP Mode Tables
Appendices
PFU transport motor 2 (M1) PFU Transport Motor 2: High 5-804-082 Tray 2
PFU transport motor 3 (M1) PFU Transport Motor 3: High 5-804-115 Tray 3
5 PFU paper feed clutch 1 (CL2) PFU Paper Feed CL1 5-804-084 Tray 1
PFU paper feed clutch 2 (CL2) PFU Paper Feed CL2 5-804-085 Tray 2
PFU paper feed clutch 3 (CL2) PFU Paper Feed CL3 5-804-117 Tray 3
3.13.11 1 BIN TRAY UNIT (BASIC MODEL)
Input Check

0 1
1 1-bin tray exit sensor 1-Bin:Exit Sensor 5-803-050 Paper Paper not
detected detected
2 1-bin tray paper 1-Bin:Paper 5-803-051 Paper Paper not
remaining sensor Remaining Sensor detected detected
- - 1-Bin: Set Detection 5-803-052 Set Not set

APPENDICES:
SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION
Management Features
4. APPENDICES: SOFTWARE CONFIGURATION
Configuration
Appendices
4.1 MANAGEMENT FEATURES
Software
4.1.1 HOW TO DISABLE THE DOCUMENT SERVER FUNCTION
1. Enter 'Copy' SP mode.
2. Change SP5-967-001 to 1. (0:ON 1:OFF)
3. Reboot the machine.
• When the above SP mode (SP5-967-001) is OFF (=1), both the Document Server
and Locked Print functions will be disabled.

Printing Features
4.2 PRINTING FEATURES
4.2.1 BEHAVIOR OF USB PRINTER DETECTION

An MFP connected via USB sends its product name and unique serial number. With the data,
the machine determines whether requires a printer driver for the USB device to be installed.
SP5-844-005 allows you to change how to determine the MFP requires a printer driver
installation:
• OFF
If SP5-844-005 is set to OFF, the unique serial number of the device is sent to the computer.
As a result, if the device is swapped out for a device of the same product, pop-up
messages will appear, because the serial numbers between the two are different.
• Level 1
If SP5-844-005 is set to Level 1, a common serial number for the product such as "MP
305+" series is sent to the computer. As a result, if the device is swapped out for a device
of the same product, pop-up messages will not appear because the devices are recognized
as having the same serial number.
• Level 2
If SP5-844-005 is set to Level 2, a common serial number for all GW/GW+ models is sent
to the computer. As a result, if a GW/GW+ device is swapped out for a different GW/GW+
device, pop-up messages will not appear because the devices are both recognized as
being based on GW/GW+.
4.2.2 AUTO PDL DETECTION FUNCTION
Overview
The Auto PDL Detection function gives the MFP the ability to determine the PDL of a job or of
specific parts of a job. This can be especially useful in cases where the PDL is not specified or if
the job contains multiple PDLs. This is only possible if the job was not created using a driver.
Conditions for detection of the PDL

The MFP will only attempt to detect a job's PDL if all of the following conditions are met.
• No @PJL ENTER LANGUAGE command is contained in the job
• No submission protocol options (lpr, ftp, rcp, or rsh options) have been used to specify the
PDL
• User Tools > Printer > System > Printer Language = Auto
• The printer is unable to detect PCL6 or RPCS. However these are almost always
created using a driver and therefore contain the PJL command specifying the PDL.

Printing Features
PDL detection by the printer system, PCL interpreter and PS interpreter

There are 3 components in the printer which can perform Auto PDL Detection:
1. Printer system:
Configuration
Appendices
Software
Uses a set of triggers unique to PCL5, PS or PDF. Up to 2KB from the start of the job can
be searched for triggers.
2. PCL interpreter:
It can detect PS triggers in PCL data. If a PS trigger is detected, the PCL interpreter will
abort processing and return the unprocessed part of the job back to the printer system. Up
to 256 bytes from the start of each page can be searched for triggers.
3. PS interpreter:
It can detect PCL5 triggers in PS data. If a PCL trigger is detected, the PS interpreter will
abort processing and return the unprocessed part of the job back to the printer system. The
entire page (regardless of the number of bytes) is searched for triggers.
• 2. and 3. can be disabled using Printer Bit Switch 2-3=1.

• If the "Printer Language" is configured to anything other than Auto, all detection will be
disabled.
• An interpreter submits a job page by page to the rasterizer. Therefore, when an
interpreter detects a trigger mid-job, the previous pages will have already been
submitted and will be output using the previously detected PDL.
• If the PDL cannot be detected by the printer system, then the PDL defaults to the one
configured in "Configuration > Printer Basic Settings > Default Printer Language".
The Printer Language setting and Default Printer Language setting in WIM:
PDL selection and switching

3 types of PDL selection/switching are performed:

Printing Features
1. PDL selection (PCL5 or PS (including PDF)) at the beginning of the job: performed by the
printer system
2. PDL switching from PCL5 to PS: performed by the PCL interpreter and the printer system
3. PDL switching from PS to PCL5: performed by the PS interpreter and the printer system
Triggers
Printer system
PCL5 triggers [ESC]E

[FF]
PS triggers %!PS-Adobe-3.1
%!

Printing Features
dict begin
bind def
findfont
Configuration
Appendices
showpage
Software
/statusdict
0 startjob
[EOT]
} + space character + "def"
userdict (*)
PDF triggers %PDF-
%!PS-Adobe-M.nPDF- (*M, n=numeric)
* "userdict" is excluded by configuring Printer Bit Switch 5-3=1.
• Up to 2KB from the start of the job can be searched for triggers.
• "%%" can be added to the PS triggers by configuring Printer Bit Switch 5-3=1
• If a job is identified as PDF, it will be sent to the PS interpreter to be processed as a
regular PS job.
PS interpreter
PCL5 trigger [ESC]E and 2 or more continuous PCL commands
• Up to 256 bytes from the start of each page can be searched for triggers.
Some possible problems

Garbled output:
If a string of characters (or binary data) is mistaken as a trigger and an incorrect PDL is applied,
the output will be garbled.
Incorrect printer settings:
Printer settings, for example the paper size, is incorrectly applied. This can happen when the
printer settings at the beginning of the job are initialized before a PDL switch occurred and no
settings were configured for the rest of the job.
Printer Bit Switch description

Bit Switch 2-3
This controls Auto PDL Detection by the PCL interpreter and PS interpreter.
BitSW 2-3=0 (default):
If PDL switching is applied to the job, all of the printer system, PCL interpreter and PS
interpreter will search for switching criteria (triggers).
BitSW 2-3=1:
Printing Features
Only the printer system will search for switching criteria (triggers). PCL/PS interpreters will not.
Bit Switch 5-3
This affects the PDL switching criteria (triggers) used by the printer system.
"%%" is not used as a printer system PS trigger. "%%" will not call the PS interpreter.
BitSW 5-3=1:
"%%" is used as a printer system PS trigger.
The reason that "%%" is not included as a trigger by default, is that a string of text in the body of
the job such as the below, could result in a false positive. This would trigger a switch and result
garbled output.
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
However some customers prefer that "%%" be included as a switching criteria. BitSW5-3=1
should be used in such a case.
• A side effect of BitSW5-3=1 is that "userdict" will no longer be used as a PS trigger.

Bit Switch 9-0
These determine whether Auto PDL Detection for print jobs transmitted via USB/parallel will
wait 10 seconds to make sure the first 2KB of the job has been sent.
The Printer system portion of the Auto PDL Detection function is only performed on the first 2KB
of a job and can wait up to 10 seconds for that first 2KB to arrive. As the printer is unable to
detect the end of jobs submitted over a USB/Parallel connection, it might be preferable to not
wait 10 seconds if jobs of less than 2KB are going to be printed. Enabling/disabling this waiting
time is the purpose of BitSw 9-0.
BitSw 9-0=0 (default):
The printer system will not wait 10 seconds for the first 2KB of data to arrive.
BitSw 9-0=1:
The printer system will wait up to 10 seconds for the first 2KB of data to arrive.
4.2.3 PRINT IMAGES ROTATION

Bit Switch 5-6
This changes the way an MFP/LP rotates PCL, PS, PDF, or RPCS print images.
A uniform binding edge (short or long edge) will be applied to every page of every job. Pages
will always be rotated as if they were to be bound on that edge.
BitSW 5-6=1:
A uniform binding edge (short or long edge) will only be applied if the job is stapled, punched, or
Z-folded. Otherwise, the bound edge might differ from page to page.
Example:

Printing Features
A 3-page job. Page 1 has the PCL simplex command. Page 2 and 3 have the PCL duplex
long-edge bind commands.
No finishing options (staple, punch, z-fold) are used.
Configuration
Appendices
Software
Bit Switch #5-6=0:
Bit Switch #5-6=1:
• Used in conjunction with Bit Switch #5-6, Orientation Auto Detect for PS/PDF jobs
might cause unexpected results.
4.2.4 PJL USTATUS

Bit Switch 9-4
These control the way PJL USTATUS returns page count totals in cases where multiple copies
of a job are being printed.
BitSw 9-4=0 (default):
This change the way an MFP/LP rotates PCL, PS, PDF, or RPCS print images.
1. The page count for a single copy is returned after the first copy is printed.
2. The page count for the rest of the copies, excluding the first copy, is returned after all
copies have been printed.

Printing Features
3. This emulates an older HP PCL firmware spec. It is only needed for compatibility with
legacy software.
BitSw 9-4=1:
The page count for all copies is output after all copies have been printed.
This emulates more recent HP PCL firmware specs.
For example, consider 3 copies of a 3 page job:
9-4 = 0
@PJL USTATUS JOB
START
NAME="TEST_page1-3"
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
1
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
2
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
3
@PJL USTATUS JOB
END
NAME="TEST_page1-3"
PAGES=3
<comment> The page count of the first copy is returned.</comment>
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
1
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
2
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
3
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
4
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
5
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
6
<comment> The page count of the remaining two copies is returned.</comment>
9-4 = 1
@PJL USTATUS JOB
START
NAME="Microsoft Word - TEST_page1-3"
@PJL USTATUS PAGE

Printing Features
1
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
2
Configuration
Appendices
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
Software
3
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
4
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
5
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
6@PJL USTATUS PAGE
7
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
8
@PJL USTATUS PAGE
9
@PJL USTATUS JOB
END
NAME="Microsoft Word - TEST_page1-3"
PAGES=9
<comment> The page count of all three copies is returned.</comment>

Scanner Features
4.3 SCANNER FEATURES
4.3.1 DISPLAY SETTINGS OF RECENTLY USED SCAN

DESTINATION
Configuring the scanner interface so that the most recently used scan destination is cleared.
Whether the MFP clears the most recently used scan destination, can be configured using
Scanner SP 1-012-001.
By default, this is cleared to avoid subsequent users scanning to it by mistake.
Scanner SP 1-012-001
1 (default): Clear
0: Do not clear
This will cause all of the following to be cleared after the scanning is complete:
• Destination
• Sender
• Email subject
• Email message
• File name
The information in the list above will be cleared after scanning is finished.
Exceptions:
• User Auth.:
If SP 1-012-001 = 0 and if User Auth. (excluding User Code authentication) is enabled, the
most recently used scan destination will only be retained until the user logs out.
• Scanner Auto Reset timer:
Even if SP 1-012-001 = 0 the most recently used scan destination can still be cleared by
the Scanner Auto Reset timer. If the Scanner Auto Reset timer is shorter than the System
Auto Reset timer, then the most recently used scan destination will be cleared when the
Scanner Auto Reset timer elapses.
4.3.2 THE SETTING OF SMTP AUTHENTICATION IN SCAN TO

EMAIL
Scan to Email fails with the error message "Transmission has failed ". The SMTP username and
password are correct. How can I make Scan to Email pass?
Change SP 5-860-022 "SMTP Auth. From Field Replacement" to On. By doing this, Scan to
Email will pass the SMTP authentication.
• Using this option to solve the above problem, the device SMTP email address will
appear in the email's "From" field. The email address of the user who sent the email or
the admnistrator will appear in the "Reply-to" field.

Scanner Features
Explanation
This is an SMTP authentication issue that aborts transmission of an already started Scan to
Email. Currently this has only been reproduced using MS-Exchange server.
Configuration
Appendices
MS-Exchange requires that all of the following match:
Software
1. The sender's address in the "MAIL FROM" field. This is also known as the "envelope
sender" or "MIME sender". It is an SMTP command sent at the beginning of the email
transmission process.
2. The sender's address in the mail header "From:" field. This appears as "From" in email
clients. It is a part of the email itself.
3. The email address corresponding to the SMTP username used to login into the SMTP
server.
When the MFP logins into the SMTP server, the email address of the username 3) will be
compared to 1) and 2). If these comparisons fail, authentication will also fail. Exchange server
will stop the transmission procedure, and the "Transmission has failed" message will be
returned to the sender.
Typical example
NG case:
SP5-860-022 is Off:
1. The "MAIL FROM" field = device
2. The mail header "From:" field = use
3. The SMTP username = device
When the SMTP server compares 2) and 3) the Exchange Server will stop the transmission
procedure.
OK case:
SP5-860 can be used to make the values in the above example, match.
In this example, if SP5-860-022 is On, the user's email address in the mail header '2)' will be
replaced by the Administrator's email address.
To solve the problem, the Administrator's address must be the same as the device's address.
If this is done:
1. The "Mail From: field = device
2. The mail header "From:" field = administrator
3. The SMTP username = device
1,2 and 3 must match and the authentication should be successful.
• The user's email address will still be inserted into the reply-to field.
The device SMTP user name, password, and email address are configurable in [User Tools] >
[Machine Features] > [System Settings] > [File Transfer] > [SMTP Authentication].
User email addresses are configurable in the user configuration of the Address Book.

Scanner Features
The administrator email address is configurable in [User Tools] > [Machine Features] > [System
Settings] > [File Transfer] > [Administrator's Email Address].
4.3.3 THE QUALIFICATION SWITCHING OF SCAN TO FOLDER

Determining which account Scan to Folder uses to access a scan destination and the effects of
System SP 5-846-021.
This method depends on how the destination is accessed, whether authentication is being used,
and SP 5-846-021.
Cases:
Case Destination User auth. Account used to access the folder
selection
A Manual entry Either enabled or The user's account *
disabled
B Destination list disabled The recipient's account
(as configured in the Address Book's Folder
Authentication setting)
C enabled If SP 5-846-021 =
0 (default): The authenticated user's account
1: The recipient's account
(as configured in the Address Book's Folder
Authentication setting)
* The "user's account" will be either the one entered during scanning (see the Manual Entry
screen capture) or if User Auth. is enabled, the account configured in the user's Folder
Authentication setting will be used.
The destination's access logs:
Case A or Case C with SP=0: The access logs can be used to determine which user sent the
scan.
Case B or Case C with SP=1: All access will be logged as the same user.

Scanner Features
Configuration
Appendices
Software

Security Features
4.4 SECURITY FEATURES
4.4.1 HOW TO RESTRICT ACCESS TO THE WIM JOB MENU

1. Enter 'Printer' SP mode.
2. Set SP5-888-001
0: (default): "Job" menu is enabled.
1: "Job" menu is disabled.
• This setting takes effect only if user authentication (other than User Code auth.) is
disabled.
4.4.2 HOW TO RESTRICT WEB IMAGE MONITOR ACCESS TO THE

DOCUMENT SERVER
System (Copier) SP 5-885-020 bit 0, 1 and 7 restrict Web Image Monitor access to the DS. It
disables the following WIM settings:
• The entire Document Server menu (shown in blue in fig1)
• Job > Document Server (shown in red in fig1)
See the following for details:
Bit 0:
Bit 0 = 0 (default): Allows anyone (guests, users, admins) access to the DS via WIM.
Bit 0 = 1: Prevents everyone from accessing the DS via WIM.
Bit 1:
Bit 1 = 1: Only administrators can access the DS via WIM.
• Without admin privileges, even authenticated users will be unable to access the DS via
WIM.
Bit 7:
Bit 7 = 1: Only administrators and authenticated users can access the DS via WIM.

Security Features
The most restrictive result of combining these three configurations will take priority. So for
example:
Bit 0 = 0
Configuration
Appendices
Bit 1 = 1
Software
Bit 7 = 1
As Bit 1 = 1 is the most restrictive of the three, it will take presedence over the other two and
only administrators will be able to access the DS via WIM.
• In order for SP5-885-020 to have any effect, the Document Server must be enabled
(SP5-967-001=0). For information about SP5-967-001, refer to Disabling the
Document Server using System SP5-967-001.
• Access to the entire "Job" menu can be restricted using SP 5-888-001. For details,
refer to Use of SP 5-888-001 to restrict access to the "Job" menu on WIM.
4.4.3 USER AUTHENTICATION FOR SPECIFIC MFP

APPLICATIONS
The SP5-420 settings enable/disable User Authentication for specific MFP applications.
SP 5-420 User Authentication Value (Default: 0)
SP 5-420 User Authentication Value (Default: 0)
SP5-420-001 Copy 0 (ON) 1 (OFF)
SP5-420-011 Document Server
SP5-420-021 Fax
SP5-420-031 Scanner
SP5-420-041 Printer
1. Enable User Authentication for the device as a whole:
User Tools > System Settings > Administrator Tools > User Authentication Management
2. Use the SP5-420 settings to specify the applications to which User authentication is to
apply.

FAX Option Type M41
D0CK
SERVICE MANUAL
Ver. 1.0
Latest Release: Nov., 2019

Initial Release: Nov., 2019
Copyright (c) 2019 Ricoh Co.,Ltd.
Rev. 10/14/2020
This manual uses several symbols and abbreviations. The meaning of those symbols and abbreviations
are as follows:
Clip ring
Screw
Connector
Clamp
E-ring
Flat Flexible Cable
Timing Belt
SEF Short Edge Feed
LEF Long Edge Feed
K Black
C Cyan
M Magenta
Y Yellow
FC Full color

Table of Contents
1. INSTALLATION ...............................................................................3
1.1 FAX OPTION TYPE M41 (D0CK02) .................................................................................3
1.1.1 ACCESSORY CHECK ............................................................................................3
1.1.2 INSTALLATION PROCEDURE...............................................................................3
1.2 FAX UNIT OPTIONS .........................................................................................................9
1.2.1 FAX CONNECTION UNIT TYPE M41 (D0CK00)...................................................9
2. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ..........................................15

2.1 FCU (PCB2) ....................................................................................................................15
2.1.1 SRAM DATA TRANSFER PROCEDURE .............................................................15
3. TROUBLESHOOTING ..................................................................20
3.1 ERROR CODES ..............................................................................................................20
3.2 FAX CONNECTION UNIT ERROR CODES ...................................................................38
3.2.1 ERROR CODE - 01 ..............................................................................................38
3.2.2 ERROR CODE - 02 ..............................................................................................38
3.2.3 ERROR CODE - 03 ..............................................................................................38
3.2.4 ERROR CODE - 04 ..............................................................................................39
3.2.5 ERROR CODE - 05 ..............................................................................................39
3.2.6 ERROR CODE - 06 ..............................................................................................39
3.2.7 ERROR CODE - 07 ..............................................................................................39
3.2.8 ERROR CODE - 08 ..............................................................................................39
3.2.9 ERROR CODE - 09 ..............................................................................................40
3.3 IFAX TROUBLESHOOTING ...........................................................................................41
3.4 IP-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING........................................................................................43
3.4.1 IP-FAX TRANSMISSION ......................................................................................43
3.4.2 IP-FAX RECEPTION ............................................................................................45
4. SERVICE TABLES ........................................................................48

4.1 BEFOREHAND................................................................................................................48
4.2 SERVICE TABLES ..........................................................................................................49
4.2.1 SP1-XXX (BIT SWITCHES)..................................................................................49
4.2.2 SP2-XXX (RAM) ...................................................................................................49
4.2.3 SP3-XXX (MACHINE SET) ..................................................................................50
4.2.4 SP4-XXX (ROM VERSION) .................................................................................50
4.2.5 SP5-XXX (RAM CLEAR) ......................................................................................50
4.2.6 SP6-XXX (REPORT) ............................................................................................51
SM 1 D0CK
4.2.7 SP7-XXX (TESTS)................................................................................................52
4.3 BIT SWITCHES – 1 .........................................................................................................53
4.3.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES ...........................................................................................53
4.4 BIT SWITCHES – 2 .........................................................................................................64
4.4.1 I-FAX SWITCHES .................................................................................................64
4.4.2 PRINTER SWITCHES ..........................................................................................70
4.5 BIT SWITCHES – 3 .........................................................................................................75
4.5.1 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES...........................................................................75
4.6 BIT SWITCHES – 4 .........................................................................................................84
4.6.1 G3 SWITCHES .....................................................................................................84
4.7 BIT SWITCHES – 5 .........................................................................................................92
4.7.1 IP FAX SWITCHES ...............................................................................................92
4.8 NCU PARAMETERS .......................................................................................................99
4.9 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES ......................................................................................102
4.10 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS ..................................................... 113
4.10.1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE........................................................................ 113
4.10.2 PARAMETERS ................................................................................................... 113
5. SPECIFICATIONS .......................................................................120
5.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................................................120
5.1.1 FCU (PCB2) ........................................................................................................120
5.1.2 CAPABILITIES OF PROGRAMMABLE ITEMS..................................................120
5.2 IFAX SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................................................122
5.3 IP-FAX SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................123
5.4 FAX UNIT CONFIGURATION .......................................................................................124
D0CK 2 SM
Fax Option Type M41 (D0CK02)
1. INSTALLATION
1.1 FAX OPTION TYPE M41 (D0CK02)
This option is not available for North America, because fax is built in.

Check the quantity and condition of the components against the following list.

1 FCU (PCB2) 1
2 Speaker Bracket 1
3 Ferrite Core 1
- EMC Address Decal (EU only) 1
- Serial Number Decal 1
• Before doing this procedure, print out all data in the printer buffer.
• Push the operation switch to put the machine in standby mode. Make sure the power LED is
off, turn the main switch off, and then disconnect the power cord and the network cable.
• The mainframe equipped with the fax unit must be connected to a properly grounded socket
outlet
SM 3 D0CK
2. Remove the left upper cover [A]. ( x 1)
3. Remove the paper feed tray, and then open the front cover.
D0CK 4 SM
5. Remove the controller cover [A] with the HDD [B].
6. Attach the speaker bracket [B] while sliding the tabs into the cutouts [A] in the controller box. (hook
x 2)
7. Switch the FCU battery jumper switch [A] to the "ON" position.
SM 5 D0CK
If the battery jumper switch is not at the correct position, registering the fax unit will fail.
8. Slide the FCU (PCB2) [B] into the slot along the guide rails [A].
9. Attach the controller cover with the HDD removed in step 5.

10. Connect the harness to the FCU (PCB2) [A].
11. Open the line and telephone connector covers [A] with a flat-head screw driver.
12. Attach the left cover, upper left cover and rear cover.
D0CK 6 SM
13. Attach the serial number decal on the rear cover.
14. make a loop as shown in the illustration at a point 3 cm (1.2 inches) (A) from the end of the
modular cable on the connection side of the machine, and attach the ferrite core to the loop.
15. Connect the modular cable with the ferrite core to the "LINE" jack.
16. Attach the EMC Address Decal [A] on the rear cover (EU only).
SM 7 D0CK
17. Plug in the machine and turn the main power ON.
• After you turn the machine on, if you see a message that tells you that the SRAM has
been formatted due to a problem with SRAM, turn the machine off and on again to clear
the message.
18. Set date and time.
"Settings" icon > [System settings] > [Date/Time/Timer]
19. Do SP3-102-000 in the fax SP mode and enter the serial number for the fax unit.
20. Enter the correct country code with SP2-103-001 (NCU Country/ Area Code Setting).
21. Exit the SP mode, and cycle the main power off and on.
D0CK 8 SM
Fax Unit Options
1.2 FAX UNIT OPTIONS
1.2.1 FAX CONNECTION UNIT TYPE M41 (D0CK00)
Overview of Fax Connection Unit

This unit allows a machine without the fax unit installed (“Client-side Machine”) to send and receive
faxes via a machine with the fax unit installed (“Remote Machine”).
Requirements:
• Up to six machines can be registered as the Client-side Machines.
• Machines that have the fax unit installed cannot be used as the Client-side Machine.
• Only one machine can be registered as the Remote Machine.
• Firmware for this unit: “aics” (software number: D3A7759)
• Remote Fax transmissions are possible on a G3 line.
• The remote fax function does not support User Code Authentication. Disable the User Code
Authentication on the Remote machine.
• Use this function to check the contents of a file that is stored in memory and not yet sent. Also, use
this function to cancel a transmission from the Client-side Machine.
Order of Fax Connection Unit installation procedure:
1. Install the Fax Connection Unit in the Remote Machine (fax unit installed).
2. Install the Fax Connection Unit in the Client-side Machine (no fax unit installed).
3. Register the Client-side Machine in the Remote Machine.
• Do not register the Remote Machine before the Client-side Machine is registered in the
Remote Machine. Otherwise, registering the Remote Machine fails.
4. Register the Remote Machine in the Client-side Machine.
Installing the Fax Connection Unit in the Client-side and Remote Machines
1. Remove the SD card slot cover [A] from the SD card slots.
SM 9 D0CK
Fax Unit Options
2. Insert the SD card (Fax Connection Unit Type M41) in SD slot 1 (upper) with its label face towards
the front of the machine if SD slot 1 is vacant. If slot 1 is not vacant, follow “Moving a Fax
Communication application into an SD card in SD slot 1” described below.
3. Plug in, and then turn ON the main power.
4. Press [Firmware Version] in the [Machine/Control Panel Information].
"Settings" icon > [System Settings] > [Machine/Control Panel Information]
5. Check whether the aics version is displayed.
Moving a Fax Communication application into an SD card in SD slot 1

1. Insert the SD card (Fax Connection Unit Type M41) SD slot 2 (lower) with its label face towards the
front of the machine. Then push it slowly into SD slot 2 (lower) until you hear a click.
2. Plug in, and then turn ON the main power.
3. Move the Fax Connection Unit application from the SD card in SD slot 2 (lower) to the SD card in
SD slot 1 (upper) with SP5-873-001.
5. Remove the SD card from SD slot 2 (lower), and then keep it in a safe place (see “SD Card Appli
Move” in the field service manual for the mainframe).
6. Attach the SD card slot cover, and then turn on the machine ( x 1).
8. Press [Firmware Version] in the [Machine/Control Panel Information].
"Settings" icon > [System Settings] > [Machine/Control Panel Information]
9. Check whether the aics version is displayed.
D0CK 10 SM
Fax Unit Options
Registering the Client Machine(s)
• Do not register the Remote Machine in the Client-side machine before the Client-side Machine
is registered in the Remote Machine. Otherwise, registering the Remote Machine fails.
On the Remote Machine:
2. Press [System Settings] on the Settings screen.
3. Press [Machine] [Others] [Register/Change/Delete Remote Machine].

4. Press [*Not Registered], and then press [Register/Change].
5. Enter the IP address or hostname of the sub-machine in [IP Address/Host Name] and press
[Connection Test].
6. Press [OK].
7. Press [Home] after specifying the settings.
Registering the Remote Machine
• First register the Client-side Machine in the Remote Machine before doing this procedure.
Otherwise, registering the Remote Machine fails.
• Only one machine can be registered as the Remote Machine.

On the Client-side Machine(s):
SM 11 D0CK
Fax Unit Options
2. Press [System Settings] on the Settings screen.
3. Press [Machine] [Others] [Register/Change/Delete Remote Machine].

4. Press [*Not Registered], and then press [Register/Change].
When a machine is registered already as the main machine, you cannot select other items that are
displayed as [*Not Registered].
5. Enter the IP address or hostname of the main machine in [IP Address/Host Name] and press
[Connection Test].
6. Press [OK].
Configuring the Remote Reception Settings

Do the following procedure to enable the Client-side Machine(s) to receive faxes via the Remote
Machine. You can forward or route received documents per line or special sender.
• By performing procedures described above (Installing the application in the Remote Machine
and Client-side Machine, Registering the Client-side Machine(s), Registering the Remote
Machine), the Client-side Machines can send faxes via the Remote Machine. The procedures
shown below are necessary to enable the Client-side Machines to receive faxes.
D0CK 12 SM
Fax Unit Options
On the Remote Machine:

1) If you use "Remote Reception per Sender"

2. Press [Fax Settings] on the Settings screen.
3. Press [Reception Settings] [Register Special Sender] [Register/Change/Delete] to display the

screen for programming Special Senders.
4. Press [Register].
5. Enter the sender name or fax number of the sender to register and specify the matching condition
for the text string.
• Full Agreement: The machine applies the reception function settings of the Special Sender when
the information received from the sender matches the registered information completely.
• Partial Agreement: The machine applies the reception function settings of the Special Sender
when the information received from the sender matches the registered information partially.
6. Select [On] in [Remote Reception Setting per Sender], and then press [Remote Machine].
7. Select the sub-machine to specify as the forwarding destination. [OK].
8. Press [OK].
SM 13 D0CK
Fax Unit Options
2) If you use "Remote Reception Setting per Line"

2. Press [Fax Settings] on the Settings screen.
3. Press [Reception Settings] [Remote Reception Setting per Line] to display the screen for selecting
the receiving line.
4. Select the receiving line to forward received faxes to a sub-machine.
5. Select the sub-machine to specify as the forwarding destination and press [OK].
D0CK 14 SM
FCU (PCB2)
2.1 FCU (PCB2)
When you replace the FCU (PCB2) board, transfer the SRAM data from the old FCU (PCB2) board to
the new FCU (PCB2) board. Do the following procedure to back up the SRAM data.
The following data can be transferred: TTI, RTI, CSI, Fax bit switch settings, RAM address settings,
NCU parameter settings.
2.1.1 SRAM DATA TRANSFER PROCEDURE
Unplug the power cord before starting the following procedure.
3. Remove the paper feed tray, and then open the front cover.
SM 15 D0CK
FCU (PCB2)
5. Remove the controller cover [A] with the HDD [B].
6. Remove the FCU (PCB2) [A].
D0CK 16 SM
FCU (PCB2)
7. Switch the battery jumper switch [A] of the new FCU (PCB2) to the "ON" position before installing.
If the battery jumper switch is not at the correct position, registering the fax unit will fail.
8. Attach the new FCU (PCB2) board [A].
9. Connect one end of the FFC to CN603 of the new fax unit [A].
• This FFC is provided with the new FCU (PCB2) board.
• When inserting the FFC, lift the lever to release the lock and then push the lever to lock.
• Make sure that the blue tapes of the FFC face down and it is not slanted.
SM 17 D0CK
FCU (PCB2)
10. Attach the battery jumper switch [A] on the removed FCU (PCB2) board to switch to the Restore
mode.
This jumper switch is provided with the new FCU (PCB2) board.
11. Connect the other end of the FFC to CN603 of the removed FCU (PCB2) board.
• When inserting the FFC, lift the lever to release the lock and then push the lever to lock.
• Make sure that the blue tapes of the FFC face left and it is not slanted.
13. SRAM data transmission starts. When the transmission is completed, you will hear a beeper
sound.
• The beeper sound is the same volume as the speaker sound.

• The beeper sounds even if the speaker sound is turned off.
• If the beeper does not sound, cycle the main power on and off repeatedly and do the
transmission procedure 2 or 3 times.
D0CK 18 SM
FCU (PCB2)
• If the beeper does not sound after turning the main switch on and off 3 times, you need to
input the settings stored in SRAM memory manually.
14. When “Ready” appears on the operation panel display, turn OFF the main power, and then
disconnect the FFC from the old FCU (PCB2) board.
15. Disconnect the FFC from the new FCU (PCB2) board.
17. Turn ON the main power. Execute SP6-101 to print the system parameter list.
18. Check the system parameter list to make sure that the data is transferred correctly.
19. Set the correct date and time with the System settings.
"Settings" icon > [System settings] > [Date/Time/Timer].
SM 19 D0CK
Error Codes
3. TROUBLESHOOTING
3.1 ERROR CODES
If an error code occurs, retry the communication. If the same problem occurs, try to fix the problem as
suggested below. Note that some error codes appear only in the error code display and on the service
report
Code Meaning Suggested Cause/Action
0-00 DIS/NSF not detected within 40 s of • Check the line connection.
Start being pressed • The machine at the other end may be
incompatible.
• Replace the FCU (PCB2).
• Check for DIS/NSF with an oscilloscope.
• If the RX signal is weak, there may be a bad
line.
0-01 DCN received unexpectedly • The other party is out of paper or has a jammed
printer.
• The other party pressed Stop during
communication.
0-03 Incompatible modem at the other end The other terminal is incompatible.
0-04 CFR or FTT not received after modem • Check the line connection.
training • Try changing the TX level and/or cable
equalizer settings.
• The other terminal may be faulty; try sending to
another machine.
• If the RX signal is weak or defective, there may
be a bad line.
Cross reference
• TX level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN)
• Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
• Dedicated TX parameters in Service Program
Mode
0-05 Modem training fails even G3 shifts • Check the line connection.
down to 2400 bps. • Try adjusting the TX level and/or cable
equalizer.
• Check for line problems.
D0CK 20 SM
Error Codes

Cross reference
• See error code 0-04.
0-06 The other terminal did not reply to • Check the line connection.
DCS • Try adjusting the TX level and/or cable
equalizer settings.
• The other end may be defective or
incompatible; try sending to another machine.
Cross reference
0-07 No post-message response from the • Check the line connection.
other end after a page was sent • Replace the FCU (PCB2).
• The other end may have jammed or run out of
paper.
• The other end user may have disconnected the
call.
• Check for a bad line.
• The other end may be defective; try sending to
another machine.
0-08 The other end sent RTN or PIN after • Check the line connection.
receiving a page, because there were • Replace the FCU (PCB2).
too many errors • The other end may have jammed, or run out of
paper or memory space.
• Try adjusting the TX level and/or cable
equalizer settings.
• The other end may have a defective
modem/FCU (PCB2); try sending to another
machine.
• Check for line problems and noise.
Cross reference
• TX level - NCU Parameter 01 (PSTN)
• Cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
• Dedicated TX parameters in Service Program
Mode
0-14 Non-standard post message response • Incompatible or defective remote terminal; try
code received sending to another machine.
SM 21 D0CK
Error Codes

• Noisy line: resend.
• Try adjusting the TX level and/or cable
equalizer settings.
Cross reference
0-15 The other terminal is not capable of The other terminal is not capable of accepting the
specific functions. following functions, or the other terminal’s memory
is full.
• Confidential RX
• Transfer function
• SEP/SUB/PWD/SID
0-16 CFR or FTT not detected after modem • Check the line connection.
training in confidential or transfer • Replace the FCU (PCB2).
mode • Try adjusting the TX level and/or cable
equalizer settings.
• The other end may have disconnected, or it
may be defective; try calling another machine.
• If the RX signal level is too low, there may be a
line problem.
Cross reference
0-17 Communication was interrupted by • If the Stop key was not pressed and this error
pressing the stop key keeps occurring, replace the operation panel or
the operation panel drive board.
0-20 Facsimile data not received within 6 s • Check the line connection.
of retraining • Replace the FCU (PCB2).
• Try calling another fax machine.
• Try adjusting the reconstruction time for the first
line and/or RX cable equalizer setting.
Cross reference
• Reconstruction time - G3 Switch 0A, bit 6
• RX cable equalizer - G3 Switch 07 (PSTN)
0-21 EOL signal (end-of-line) from the • Check the connections between the FCU
other end not received within 5 s of (PCB2) and line.
the previous EOL signal • Check for line noise or other line problems.
D0CK 22 SM
Error Codes

• The remote machine may be defective or may
have disconnected.
Cross reference
• Maximum interval between EOLs and between
ECM frames - G3 Bit Switch 0A, bit 4
0-22 The signal from the other end was • Check the line connection.
interrupted for more than the • Replace the FCU (PCB2).
acceptable modem carrier drop time • Defective remote terminal.
(default: 200 ms) • Check for line noise or other line problems.
• Try adjusting the acceptable modem carrier
drop time.
Cross reference
• Acceptable modem carrier drop time - G3
Switch 0A, bits 0 and 1
0-23 Too many errors during reception • Check the line connection.
• Defective remote terminal
• Check for line noise or other line problems.
• Try asking the other end to adjust their TX level.
• Try adjusting the RX cable equalizer setting
and/or RX error criteria.
Cross reference
• RX error criteria - Communication Switch 02,
bits 0 and 1
0-30 The other terminal did not reply to • Check the line connection.
NSS(A) in AI short protocol mode • Try adjusting the TX level and/or cable
equalizer settings.
• The other terminal may not be compatible.
Cross reference
• Dedicated TX parameters - Section 4
0-32 The other terminal sent a DCS, which • Check the protocol dump list.
contained functions that the receiving • Ask the other party to contact the manufacturer.
machine cannot handle.
0-33 The data reception (not ECM) is not • Check the line connection.
completed within 10 minutes. • The other terminal may have a defective
modem/FCU (PCB2).
SM 23 D0CK
Error Codes

0-52 Polarity changed during • Check the line connection.
communication Retry communication.
0-55 FCU (PCB2) does not detect the SG3. • FCU (PCB2) firmware or board defective.
• SG3 firmware or board defective.
0-56 The stored message data exceeds • SG3 firmware or board defective.
the capacity of the mailbox in the
SG3.
0-70 The communication mode specified in • The other terminal did not have a compatible
CM/JM was not available communication mode (e.g., the other terminal
(V.8 calling and called terminal) was a V.34 data modem and not a fax modem.)
• A polling TX file was not ready at the other
terminal when polling RX was initiated from the
calling terminal.
0-74 The calling terminal fell back to T.30 • The calling terminal could not detect ANSam
mode, because it could not detect due to noise, etc.
ANSam after sending CI. • ANSam was too short to detect.
• Check the line connection and condition.
• Try making a call to another V.8/V.34 fax.
0-75 The called terminal fell back to T.30 • The terminal could not detect ANSam.
mode, because it could not detect a • Check the line connection and condition.
CM in response to ANSam (ANSam • Try receiving a call from another V.8/V.34 fax.
timeout).
0-76 The calling terminal fell back to T.30 • The called terminal could not detect a CM due
mode, because it could not detect a to noise, etc.
JM in response to CM • Check the line connection and condition.
(CM timeout). • Try making a call to another V.8/V.34 fax.
0-77 The called terminal fell back to T.30 • The calling terminal could not detect a JM due
mode, because it could not detect a to noise, etc.
CJ in response to JM • A network that has narrow bandwidth cannot
(JM timeout). pass JM to the other end.
• Check the line connection and condition.
• Try receiving a call from another V.8/V.34 fax.
0-79 The called terminal detected CI while • Check for line noise or other line problems.
waiting for a V.21 signal. • If this error occurs, the called terminal falls back
to T.30 mode.
0-80 The line was disconnected due to a • The guard timer expired while starting these
timeout in V.34 phase 2 – line probing. phases. Serious noise, narrow bandwidth, or
0-81 The line was disconnected due to a low signal level can cause these errors.
D0CK 24 SM
Error Codes

timeout in V.34 phase 3 – equalizer If these errors happen at the transmitting terminal:
training. • Try making a call at a later time.
0-82 The line was disconnected due to a • Try using V.17 or a slower modem using
timeout in the V.34 phase 4 – control dedicated TX parameters.
channel start-up. • Try increasing the TX level.
0-83 The line was disconnected due to a • Try adjusting the TX cable equalizer setting.
timeout in the V.34 control channel If these errors happen at the receiving terminal:
restart sequence. • Try adjusting the RX cable equalizer setting.
• Try increasing the TX level.
• Try using V.17 or a slower modem if the same
error is frequent when receiving from multiple
senders.
0-84 The line was disconnected due to • The signal did not stop within 10 s.
abnormal signaling in V.34 phase 4 – • Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
control channel start-up. • If the same error is frequent, replace the FCU
(PCB2).
0-85 The line was disconnected due to • The signal did not stop within 10 s.
abnormal signaling in V.34 control • Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
channel restart. • If the same error is frequent, replace the FCU
(PCB2).
0-86 The line was disconnected because • The other terminal was incompatible.
the other terminal requested a data • Ask the other party to contact the manufacturer.
rate using MPh that was not available
in the currently selected symbol rate.
0-87 The control channel started after an • The receiving terminal restarted the control
unsuccessful primary channel. channel because data reception in the primary
channel was not successful.
• This does not result in an error communication.
0-88 The line was disconnected because • Try using a lower data rate at the start.
PPR was transmitted/received 9 • Try adjusting the cable equalizer setting.
(default) times within the same ECM
frame.
2-11 Only one V.21 connection flag was • Replace the FCU (PCB2).
received
2-12 Modem clock irregularity • Replace the FCU (PCB2).
2-13 Modem initialization error • Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
• Update the modem ROM.
SM 25 D0CK
Error Codes

2-22 Counter overflow error of JBIG chip • If this error occurs frequently, change the
settings for resolution, paper size and
compression type.
2-23 JBIG compression or reconstruction • Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
error
2-24 JBIG ASIC error • Turn off the machine, then turn it back on.
2-25 JBIG data reconstruction error (BIH • JBIG data error
error) • Check the sender’s JBIG function.
2-26 JBIG data reconstruction error (Float • Update the MBU ROM.
marker error)
2-27 JBIG data reconstruction error (End
marker error)
2-28 JBIG data reconstruction error
(Timeout)
2-29 JBIG trailing edge maker error • FCU (PCB2) defective
• Check the destination device.
2-50 The machine resets itself for a fatal • If this is frequent, update the ROM, or replace
FCU (PCB2) system error the FCU (PCB2).
2-51 The machine resets itself because of • If this is frequent, update the ROM, or replace
a fatal communication error the FCU (PCB2).
2-53 Snd msg() in the manual task is an • The user did the same operation many times,
error because the mailbox for the and this gave too much load to the machine.
operation task is full.
4-01 Line current was cut • Check the line connector.
4-10 Communication failed because of an • Get the ID Codes the same and/or the CSI's
ID Code mismatch (Closed Network) programmed correctly, then resend.
or Tel. No./CSI mismatch (Protection • The machine at the other end may be defective.
against Wrong Connections)
5-00 Data reconstruction not possible • Replace the FCU (PCB2)
5-10 DCR timer expired • Replace the FCU (PCB2).
5-20 Storage impossible because of a lack • Temporary memory shortage.
of memory • Test the SAF memory.
5-21 Memory overflow
5-23 Print data error when printing a • Test the SAF memory.
D0CK 26 SM
Error Codes

substitute RX or confidential RX • Ask the other end to resend the message.
message
5-25 SAF file access error • Replace an SD card or HDD.
6-00 G3 ECM - T1 time out during • Try adjusting the RX cable equalizer.
reception of facsimile data • Replace the FCU (PCB2).
6-01 G3 ECM - no V.21 signal was
received
6-02 G3 ECM - EOR was received
6-04 G3 ECM - RTC not detected • Check the line connection.
• Check for a bad line or defective remote
terminal.
6-05 G3 ECM - facsimile data frame not • Check the line connection.
received within 18s of CFR, but there • Check for a bad line or defective remote
was no line fail terminal.
• Try adjusting the RX cable equalizer
Cross reference
6-06 G3 ECM - coding/decoding error • Defective FCU (PCB2).
• The other terminal may be defective.
6-08 G3 ECM - PIP/PIN received in reply to • The other end pressed Stop during
PPS.NULL communication.
• The other terminal may be defective.
6-09 G3 ECM - ERR received • Check for a noisy line.
• Adjust the TX levels of the communicating
machines.
• See code 6-05.
6-10 G3 ECM - error frames still received • Check for line noise.
at the other end after all • Adjust the TX level (use NCU parameter 01 or
communication attempts at 2400 bps the dedicated TX parameter for that address).
• Check the line connection.
• Defective remote terminal.
6-21 V.21 flag detected during high speed • The other terminal may be defective or
modem communication incompatible.
6-22 The machine resets the sequence • Check for line noise.
SM 27 D0CK
Error Codes

because of an abnormal handshake in • If the same error occurs frequently, replace the
the V.34 control channel FCU (PCB2).
• Defective remote terminal.
6-99 V.21 signal not stopped within 6 s • Replace the FCU (PCB2).
9-30 HDD write error • Check the connection of the HDD.
9-31 HDD control error • If the problem persists, replace the HDD and/or
9-32 HDD read error harness.
9-33 HDD fatal error
13- SIP user name registration error • Double registration of the SIP user name.
17 • Capacity for user-name registration in the SIP
server is not sufficient.
13- SIP server access error • Incorrect initial setting for the SIP server.
18 • Defective SIP server.
13- SIP authentication error • Registered password in the device does not
24 match the password in the SIP server.
13- Network I/F setting error • IPV4 is not active in the active protocol setting.
25 • IP address of the device is not registered.
13- Network I/F setting error at power on • Active protocol setting does not match the I/F
26 setting for SIP server.
• IP address of the device is not registered.
13- IP address setting error • IP address of the device is not registered.
27
14- SMTP Send Error • Error occurred during sending to the SMTP
00 server. Occurs for any error other than 14-01 to
16. For example, the mail address of the
system administrator is not registered.
14- SMTP Connection Failed • Failed to connect to the SMTP server (timeout)
01 because the server could not be found.
• The PC is not ready to transfer files.
• SMTP server not functioning correctly.
• The DNS IP address is not registered.
• Network not operating correctly.
• Destination folder selection not correct.
14- No Service by SMTP Service (421) • SMTP server operating incorrectly, or the
02 destination for direct SMTP sending is not
correct.
• Contact the system administrator and check
D0CK 28 SM
Error Codes

that the SMTP server has the correct settings
and operates correctly.
• Contact the system administrator for direct
SMTP sending and check the sending
destination.
14- Access to SMTP Server Denied (450) • Failed to access the SMTP server because the
03 access is denied.
• SMTP server operating incorrectly. Contact the
system administrator to determine if there is a
problem with the SMTP server and to check
that the SMTP server settings are correct.
• Folder send destination is incorrect. Contact the
system administrator to determine that the
SMTP server settings and path to the server
are correct.
• Device settings incorrect. Confirm that the user
name and password settings are correct.
• Direct SMTP destination incorrect. Contact the
system administrator to determine if there is a
problem at the destination at that the settings at
the destination are correct.
14- Access to SMTP Server Denied (550) • SMTP server operating incorrectly
04 • Direct SMTP sending not operating correctly
14- SMTP Server HDD Full (452) • Failed to access the SMTP server because the
05 HDD on the server is full.
• Insufficient free space on the HDD of the SMTP
server. Contact the system administrator and
check the amount of space remaining on the
SMTP server HDD.
• Insufficient free space on the HDD where the
destination folder is located. Contact the system
administrator and check the amount of space
remaining on the HDD where the target folder is
located.
• Insufficient free space on the HDD at the target
destination for SMTP direct sending. Contact
the system administrator and check the amount
SM 29 D0CK
Error Codes

of space remaining on the target HDD.
14- User Not Found on SMTP Server • The designated user does not exist.
06 (551) • The designated user does not exist on the
SMTP server.
• The designated address is not for use with
direct SMTP sending.
14- Data Send to SMTP Server Failed • Failed to access the SMTP server because the
07 (4XX) transmission failed.
• PC not operating correctly.
• SMTP server operating incorrectly
• Destination folder setting incorrect.
• Direct SMTP sending not operating correctly.
14- Data Send to SMTP Server Failed • Failed to access the SMTP server because the
08 (5XX) transmission failed.
• SMTP server operating incorrectly
• Destination folder setting incorrect.
• Direct SMTP sending not operating correctly.
• Software application error.
14- Authorization Failed for Sending to • POP-Before-SMTP or SMTP authorization
09 SMTP Server failed.
• Incorrect setting for file transfer
14- Addresses Exceeded • Number of broadcast addresses exceeded the
10 limit for the SMTP server.
14-11 Buffer Full • The send buffer is full so the transmission could
not be completed. Buffer is full due to using
Scan-to-Email while the buffer is being used to
send mail at the same time.
14- Data Size Too Large • Transmission was cancelled because the
12 detected size of the file was too large.
14- Send Cancelled • Processing is interrupted because the user
13 pressed Stop.
14- Security Locked File Error • Update the software because of the defective
14 software.
14- Mail Data Error • The transmitting e-mail is interrupted via DCS
15 due to the incorrect data.
• Update the software because of the defective
software.
D0CK 30 SM
Error Codes

14- Maximum Division Number Error • When a mail is divided for the mail transmission
16 and the division number of e-mail are more than
the specified number, the mail transmission is
interrupted.
software.
14- Incorrect Ticket • Update the software because of the defective
17 software.
14- Access to MCS File Error • The access to MCS file is denied due to the no
18 permission of access.
software.
14- SMTP Authentication Error • Make sure that the administrator’s e-mail
20 address is the same as the SMTP
authentication address or POP before SMTP
address.
14- Transmission error of S/MIME • Register the correct user certificate and device
21 certificate.
14- MCS File Creation Failed Failed to create the MCS file because:
30 • The number of files created with other
applications on the Document Server has
exceeded the limit.
• HDD is full or not operating correctly.
• Software error.
14- UFS File Creation Failed UFS file could not be created:
31 • Not enough space in UFS area to handle both
Scan-to-Email and IFAX transmission.
• HDD full or not operating correctly.
• Software error.
14- Cancelled the Mail Due to Error • Error detected with NFAX and send was
32 Detected by NFAX cancelled due to a software error.
14- No Mail Address For the Machine • Neither the mail address of the machine nor the
33 mail address of the network administrator is
registered.
14- Address designated in the domain for • Operational error in normal mail sending or
34 SMTP sending does not exist direct SMTP sending.
• Check the address selected in the address
SM 31 D0CK
Error Codes

book for SMTP sending.
• Check the domain selection.
14- Mail Job Task Error Due to an FCU (PCB2) mail job task error, the send
50 was cancelled:
• Address book was being edited during creation
of the notification mail.
• Software error.
14- UCS Destination Download Error Not even one return notification can be downloaded:
51 • The address book was being edited.
• The number for the specified destination does
not exist (it was deleted or edited after the job
was created).
14- Send Cancel Failed • The cancel operation by the user failed to
60 cancel the send operation.
14- Notification Mail Send Failed for All • All addresses for return notification mail failed.
61 Destinations
14- Transmission Error due to the • When the 0 line page exists in received pages
62 existence of zero line page with G3 communication, the transmission is
interrupted.
14- Fax Communication Unit: Check the followings.
63 Transmission Error • Name of SMTP server
• Port number of SMTP
• DNS setting
• Server name (FTP)
• Path name (computer name and shared folder
name at SMTP/ NCP)
• Active protocol setting (Netware/ NCP)
• NW flame type (NCP)
• Log-on mode (NDS tree/ bindery)
Check the SMTP server.
• Check if the SMTP server works normally and
is connected to the network.
• Check if the settings of the SMTP are correct.
Check the DNS server.
• Check if the DNS server works normally and is
connected to the network.
• Check if the settings of the DNS server are
correct.
D0CK 32 SM
Error Codes

Check the network.
• Check if the LAN works normally.
• Check if the no firewall exists.
Check the destination folder for the data transfer.
• Check if the destination folder works normally.
• Check if the settings of the destination folder
are correct.
Ask an administrator of the direct SMTP server in
which the data is supposed to be transferred.
• Check if the destination SMTP server works
normally.
• Check if the settings of the destination SMTP
server are correct.
15- POP3/IMAP4 Server Not Registered • At startup, the system detected that the IP
01 address of the POP3/IMAP4 server has not
been registered in the machine.
15- POP3/IMAP4 Mail Account • The POP3/IMAP4 mail account has not been
02 Information Not Registered registered.
15- Mail Address Not Registered • The mail address has not been registered.
03
15- DCS Mail Receive Error • Error other than 15-11 to 15-18.
10
15-11 Connection Error The DNS or POP3/IMAP4 server could not be
found:
• The IP address for DNS or POP3/IMAP4 server
is not stored in the machine.
• The DNS IP address is not registered.
15- Authorization Error POP3/IMAP4 send authorization failed:
12 • Incorrect IFAX user name or password.
• Access was attempted by another device, such
as the PC.
• POP3/IMAP4 settings incorrect.
15- Receive Buffer Full • Occurs only during manual reception.
13 Transmission cannot be received due to
insufficient buffer space. The buffer is being
used for mail send or Scan-to-Email.
SM 33 D0CK
Error Codes

15- Mail Header Format Error • The mail header is not standard format. For
14 example, the Date line description is incorrect.
15- Mail Divide Error • The e-mail is not in standard format. There is
15 no boundary between parts of the e-mail,
including the header.
15- Mail Size Receive Error • The mail cannot be received because it is too
16 large.
15- Receive Timeout • May occur during manual receiving only
17 because the network is not operating correctly.
15- Incomplete Mail Received • Only one portion of the mail was received.
18
15- Final Destination for Transfer Request • The format of the final destination for the
31 Reception Format Error transfer request was incorrect.
15- Send/Delivery Destination Error The transmission cannot be delivered to the final
39 destination:
• Destination file format is incorrect.
• Could not create the destination for the file
transmission.
15- SMTP Receive Error • Reception rejected because the transaction
41 exceeded the limit for the “Auth. E-mail RX”
setting.
15- Off Ramp Gateway Error • The delivery destination address was specified
42 with Off Ramp Gateway OFF.
15- Address Format Error • Format error in the address of the Off Ramp
43 Gateway.
15- Addresses Over • The number of addresses for the Off Ramp
44 Gateway exceeded the limit of 30.
15- Attachment File Format Error • The attached file is not TIFF format.
61
15- TIFF File Compatibility Error Could not receive transmission due to:
62 • Resolution error
• Image of resolution greater than 200 dpi without
extended memory.
• Resolution is not supported.
• Page size error
• The page size was larger than A3.
• Compression error
• File was compressed with other than MH, MR,
D0CK 34 SM
Error Codes

or MMR.
15- TIFF Parameter Error The TIFF file sent as the attachment could not be
63 received because the TIFF header is incorrect:
• The TIFF file attachment is a type not
supported.
• The TIFF file attachment is corrupted.
• Software error.
15- TIFF Decompression Error The file received as an attachment caused the TIFF
64 decompression error:
• The TIFF format of the attachment is corrupted.
• Software error.
15- Not Binary Image Data • The file could not be received because the
71 attachment was not binary image data.
15- MDN Status Error • Could not find the Disposition line in the header
73 of the Return Receipt, or there is a problem with
the firmware.
15- MDN Message ID Error • Could not find the Original Message ID line in
74 the header of the Return Receipt, or there is a
problem with the firmware.
15- Mail Job Task Read Error • Could not receive the transmission because the
80 destination buffer is full and the destination
could not be created (this error may occur when
receiving a transfer request or a request for
notification of reception).
15- Repeated Destination Registration • Could not repeat receive the transmission
81 Error because the destination buffer is full and the
destination could not be created (this error may
occur when receiving a transfer request or a
request for notification of reception).
15- Send Registration Error Could not receive the file for transfer to the final
91 destination:
• The format of the final destination or the
transfer destination is incorrect.
• Destinations are full so the final and transfer
destinations could not be created.
15- Memory Overflow • Transmission could not be received because
92 memory overflowed during the transaction.
SM 35 D0CK
Error Codes

15- Memory Access Error • Transaction could not complete due to a
93 malfunction of SAF memory.
15- Incorrect ID Code • The machine rejected an incoming e-mail for
94 transfer request, because the ID code in the
incoming e-mail did not match the ID code
registered in the machine.
15- Transfer Station Function • The machine rejected an incoming e-mail for
95 transfer because the transfer function was
unavailable.
16- No IP address registered • The machine does not get an IP address
00 because the DNS server has not been
registered for the remote machine or IP address
of the remote machine has not been registered.
• Register the DNS server for the remote
machine or configure an IP address of the
remote machine.
22- Original length exceeded the • Divide the original into more than one page.
00 maximum scan length • Check the resolution used for scanning. Lower
the scan resolution if possible.
• Add optional page memory.
22- Memory overflow while receiving • Wait for the files in the queue to be sent.
01 • Delete unnecessary files from memory.
• Transfer the substitute reception files to an
another fax machine, if the machine’s printer is
busy or out of order.
• Add an optional SAF memory card or hard disk.
22- TX or RX job stalled due to line • The job started normally but did not finish
02 disconnection at the other end normally; data may or may not have been
received fully.
• Restart the machine.
22- The machine cannot store received • Update the ROM
04 data in the SAF • Replace the FCU (PCB2).
22- No G3 parameter confirmation answer • Defective FCU (PCB2) board or firmware.
05
22- The fax number / e-mail address • Software error.
06 entered or selected by the user does Install lateset FCU (PCB2) firmware.
not match that of the destination. (This • FCU (PCB2) board defective
may occur because of a bug.) Replace the FCU (PCB2).
D0CK 36 SM
Error Codes

22- File to send missing during IP-Fax /
07 Internet Fax / Scan to Email / Scan to
Folder transmission.
22- File missing when printing the
08 configuration page.
22- File missing when receiving fax.
09
22- File missing is when storing a
10 received fax file.
22- Job Log registration failed • Replace the Controler board
20
23- Data read timeout during construction • Restart the machine.
00 • Replace the FCU (PCB2).
25- The machine software resets itself • Update the ROM
00 after a fatal transmission error • Replace the FCU (PCB2).
occurred
F0-xx V.34 modem error • Replace the FCU (PCB2).
F6-xx SG3 modem error • Update the SG3 modem ROM.
• Replace the SG3 board.
• Check for line noise or other line problems.
• Try communicating another V.8/V.34 fax.
SM 37 D0CK
Fax Connection Unit Error Codes
3.2 FAX CONNECTION UNIT ERROR CODES
3.2.1 ERROR CODE - 01

Error Suggested Cause Action
Code
01(1) IPv4/IPv6 not enabled Enable IPv4 and IPv6
01(3) “Cancel” is pressed by user. -
01(4) A false connection ID is being used. Check that the network is
01(5) Network disconnected because of no response within established.
a specified time.
01(14) • The machine either of destination or of local is • Exit SP or initial setting.
entering SP or Initial setting. • Wait until the connection
• An established connection exists. has finished.

Code
02(5) • Wrong IP address/hostname is used • Enter the correct IP address/Host
• The machine at destination power name
off • Turn on the main power.
• LAN cable is disconnected • Connect the LAN cable
• Network is rebooting. • Wait until the rebooting has finished.

Code
03 • No user authentication applies for fax Configure the user authentication
application (i.e. setting for client-side and Remote
Basic/Windows/LDAP/Custom Auth.) Machine as the following table.
• Settings other than user authentication are Client-side Remote Machine
applied to the fax application. Machine
OFF OFF
ON OFF
ON ON
D0CK 38 SM

Code
04 Although the same user registered to the Remote • Register the same user to
Machine and Client-side Machine, the user name and both the Remote Machine and
password for login are unmatched between the two Client-side Machine.
locations. • Be sure to match the
username and password for
login between the two
locations.

Code
05 An unauthorized user connects to the fax Authorize the user to use fax
connection. connection.

Code
06 Timeout error on the node Adjust the value of SP5-741-001 to prolong the timeout
authentication for node authentication.

Code
07 Multiple destinations are set in the In the Client-side Machine, execute SP5-801-
Client-side Machine. 021 to clear AICS memory

Code
08(1) • A Client-side Machine connects to other • Connect to the Remote Machine.
Client-side Machine. • Register the Client-side Machine to
• The Client-side Machine not registered in the Remote Machine as a destination.
the Remote Machine as destinations.
08(2) • A Remote Machine connects to other • Connect to the Client-side Machine.
SM 39 D0CK

Code
Remote Machine. • Check what Remote Machine
• Wrong Remote Machine registered in the registered in the Client-side Machine.
Client-side Machine.

Code
09 Capacity of the HDD of the Remote Increase the remaining capacity of the HDD of
Machine is full. the Remote Machine.
D0CK 40 SM
IFAX Troubleshooting
3.3 IFAX TROUBLESHOOTING
Use the following procedures to determine whether the machine or another part of the network is
causing the problem.
Communication Item Action [Remarks]
Route
General LAN 1. Connection with the • Check that the LAN cable is connected to the
LAN machine.
• Check that the LEDs on the hub are lit.
2. LAN activity Check that other devices connected to the LAN
can communicate through the LAN.
Between IFAX and 1. Network settings on • Check the network settings on the PC.
PC the PC [Is the IP address registered in the TCP/IP
properties in the network setup correct?
Check the IP address with the administrator of the
network.]
2. Check that PC can • Use the "ping" command on the PC to contact
connect with the the machine.
machine [At the MS-DOS prompt, type ping then the IP
address of the machine, then press Enter.]
3. LAN settings in the • Check the LAN parameters
machine • Check if there is an IP address conflict with
other PCs.
[Use the "Network" function in the User Tools.
If there is an IP address conflict, inform the
administrator.]
Between machine 1. LAN settings in the • Check the LAN parameters
and e-mail server machine • Check if there is an IP address conflict with
other PCs.
[Use the "Network" function in the User Tools.
If there is an IP address conflict, inform the
administrator.]
2. E-mail account on • Make sure that the machine can log into the e-
the server mail server.
• Check that the account and password stored
in the server are the same as in the machine.
[Ask the administrator to check.]
SM 41 D0CK
IFAX Troubleshooting
Communication Item Action [Remarks]

Route
3. E-mail server • Make sure that the client devices which have
an account in the server can send/receive e-
mail.
[Ask the administrator to check.
Send a test e-mail with the machine’s own number
as the destination. The machine receives the
returned e-mail if the communication is performed
successfully.]
Between e-mail 1. E-mail account on • Make sure that the PC can log into the e-mail
server and internet the Server server.
• Check that the account and password stored
in the server are the same as in the machine.
[Ask the administrator to check.]
2. E-mail server • Make sure that the client devices which have
an account in the server can send/receive e-
mail.
[Ask the administrator to check.
Send a test e-mail with the machine’s own number
as the destination. The machine receives the
returned e-mail if the communication is performed
successfully.]
3. Destination e-mail • Make sure that the e-mail address is actually
address used.
• Check that the e-mail address contains no
incorrect characters such as spaces.
4. Router settings • Use the "ping" command to contact the router.
• Check that other devices connected to the
router can sent data over the router.
[Ask the administrator of the server to check.]
5. Error message by e- • Check whether e-mail can be sent to another
mail from the network address on the same network, using the
of the destination. application e-mail software.
• Check the error e-mail message.
[Inform the administrator of the LAN.]
D0CK 42 SM
IP-Fax Troubleshooting
3.4 IP-FAX TROUBLESHOOTING
3.4.1 IP-FAX TRANSMISSION
Cannot send by IP Address/Host Name

Check Point Action
1 LAN cable connected? Check the LAN cable connection.
2 Specified IP address/host name correct? Check the IP address/host name.
3 Firewall/NAT is installed? Cannot breach the firewall. Send by
using another method (Fax, Internet Fax)
4 Transmission sent manually? Manual sending not supported.
5 IP address of local machine registered? Register the IP address.
6 Remote terminal port number setting other than Send by specifying the port number.
1720 (When using H.323) or 5060 (when using
SIP)?
7 Specified port number correct? Confirm the port number of the remote
fax.
8 DNS server registered when host name specified? Contact the network administrator.
9 Remote fax a T.38 terminal? Check whether the remote fax is a T38
terminal.
10 Remote fax switched off or busy? Check that the remote fax is switched on.
11 Network bandwidth too narrow? Request the network administrator to
increase the bandwidth.
Raise the delay level.
IPFAX SW 01 Bit 0 to 3
IP-Fax bandwidth is the same as the
DCS speed. Set IP-Fax SW00 Bit 6 to 1.
12 Remote fax cancelled transmission? Check whether the remote fax cancelled
the transmission.
Cannot Send via VoIP Gateway.

Check Point Action
2 VoIP Gateway T.38 standard? Contact the network administrator.
3 VoIP Gateway installed correctly? Contact the network administrator.
4 VoIP Gateway power switched on? Contact the network administrator.
5 Is the IP address/host name of the Check the IP address/host name.
SM 43 D0CK
specified Gateway correct?

6 Number of the specified fax correct? Check the remote fax number.
7 Firewall/NAT is installed? Cannot breach the firewall. Send by using another
method (Fax, Internet Fax)
9 IP address of local fax registered? Register the IP address.
10 DNS registered when host name Contact the network administrator.
specified?
11 Remote fax a G3 fax? Check that the remote fax is a G3 fax.
12 G3 fax is connected to VoIP gateway? Check that G3 fax is connected.
13 Remote G3 fax turned on? Check that G3 fax is switched on.
14 Network bandwidth too narrow? Request the network administrator to increase the
bandwidth.
Raise the network delay level.
IP-Fax bandwidth is the same as the DCS speed.
Set IP-Fax SW00 Bit 6 to 1.
Cannot Send by Alias Fax Number.

Check Point Action
2 Number of specified Alias fax correct? Confirm the Alias of the remote fax.
Error Code: 13-14
3 Firewall/NAT installed? Cannot breach the firewall. Send by using
another method (Fax, Internet Fax)
5 Gatekeeper/SIP server installed correctly? Contact the network administrator.
6 Gatekeeper/SIP server power switched on? Contact the network administrator.
7 IP address/host name of Gatekeeper/SIP Check the IP address/host name.
server correct?
8 DNS server registered when Contact the network administrator.
Gatekeeper/SIP host name specified?
9 Enable H.323 SW is set to on? Check the settings.
See User Parameter SW 34 Bit 0 and 1.
10 IP address of local fax registered? Register the IP address of the local fax.
11 Alias number of local fax registered? Register the Alias number of the local fax.
12 Remote fax registered in Gatekeeper? Contact the network administrator.
13 Remote fax a T.38 terminal? Check whether the remote fax is a T38 terminal.
D0CK 44 SM
14 Remote fax switched off or busy? Contact the network administrator.

15 Network bandwidth too narrow? Request the system administrator to increase the
bandwidth.
Raise the delay level.
Lower the modem transmission baud rate.
IPFAX SW 05
16 Remote fax cancelled transmission? Check whether the remote fax cancelled the
transmission.
3.4.2 IP-FAX RECEPTION
Cannot Receive via IP Address/Host Name.

Check Point Action
2 Firewall/NAT is installed? Cannot breach the firewall. Send by using another
method (Fax, Internet Fax)
3 IP address of local fax registered? Register the IP address.
4 Port number specified at remote sender Request the sender to specify the port number.
fax (if required)?
5 Specified port number correct (if Request the sender to check the port number.
required)?
6 DNS server registered when host name Contact the network administrator.
specified on sender side?
• The sender machine displays this error code
if the sender fax is a Ricoh model.
bandwidth.
Lower the start modem reception baud rate on the
receiving side.
IPFAX SW06
transmission.
Cannot Receive by VoIP Gateway.

Check Point Action
2 Firewall/NAT is installed? Cannot breach the firewall. Request the remote fax to
SM 45 D0CK
send by using another method (Fax, Internet Fax)

3 VoIP Gateway installed correctly? Contact the network administrator.
4 VoIP Gateway power switched on? Contact the network administrator.
5 IP address/host name of specified VoIP Request the remote fax to check the IP address/host
Gateway correct on sender’s side? name.
6 DNS server registered when host name Contact the network administrator.
specified on sender side?
7 Network bandwidth too narrow? Request the network administrator to increase the
bandwidth.
8 G3 fax connected? Check that G3 fax is connected.
9 G3 fax power switched on? Check that G3 fax is switched on.
Cannot Receive by Alias Fax Number.

Check Point Action
2 Firewall/NAT is installed? Cannot breach the firewall. Request the remote fax
to send by using another method (Fax, Internet Fax)
3 Gatekeeper installed correctly? Contact the network administrator.
• The sender machine displays this error

code when the sender fax is a Ricoh
model.
4 Power to Gatekeeper switched on? Contact the network administrator.

model.
5 IP address/host name of Gatekeeper Request the sender to check the IP address/host
correct on the sender’s side? name.

model.
6 DNS server registered when Gatekeeper Contact the network administrator.
host name specified on sender’s side?
model.
D0CK 46 SM
7 Enable H.323 SW is set to on? Request the sender to check the settings.
User Parameter SW 34 BIT 0 and 1
• Only if the remote sender fax is a Ricoh

fax.
8 Local fax IP address registered? Register the IP address.
9 Local fax Alias number registered? Register the Alias number.
bandwidth.
Lower the start modem reception baud rate on the
receiving side.
IPFAX SW06
transmission.
12 Local fax registered in Gatekeeper/SIP Contact the network administrator.
server ?
model.
SM 47 D0CK
Beforehand
4. SERVICE TABLES
4.1 BEFOREHAND
• Never turn off the main power switch (SW1) when the power LED is lit or flashing. To avoid
damaging the hard disk or memory, press the operation power switch to switch the power off,
wait for the power LED to go off, and then switch the main power switch (SW1) OFF.
• The main power LED lights or flashes while the ADF is open, while the main machine is
communicating with a facsimile or the network server, or while the machine is accessing the
hard disk or memory for reading or writing data.
D0CK 48 SM
Service Tables
4.2 SERVICE TABLES
4.2.1 SP1-XXX (BIT SWITCHES)

Bit Switches
1 Mode No. Function
101 System Switch
001 – 00 – Change the bit switches for system settings for the fax option
032 1F See "Bit Switches – 1"
102 Ifax Switch
001 – 00 – Change the bit switches for internet fax settings for the fax option
103 Printer Switch
001 – 00 – Change the bit switches for printer settings for the fax option
104 Communication Switch
001 – 00 – Change the bit switches for communication settings for the fax option
105 G3-1 Switch
001 – 00 – Change the bit switches for the protocol settings of the standard G3
016 0F board
See "Bit Switches – 4"
111 IP fax Switch
001 – 00 – Change the bit switches for optional IP fax parameters
4.2.2 SP2-XXX (RAM)

2 Mode No. Function
101 RAM Read/Write
001 Change RAM data for the fax board directly. See "Service
RAM Addresses"
102 Memory Dump
001 G3-1 Memory Print out RAM data for the fax board.
Dump See "Service RAM Addresses"
103 G3-1 NCU Parameters
001 – CC, 01 – 22 NCU parameter settings for the standard G3 board. See "NCU
023 Parameters"
SM 49 D0CK
Service Tables
4.2.3 SP3-XXX (MACHINE SET)

3 Mode No. Function
101 Service Station
001 Fax Number Enter the fax number of the service station.
102 Serial Number
000 Enter the fax unit’s serial number.
103 PSTN-1 Port Settings
001 Select Line Select the line type setting for the G3-1 line. If the machine is
installed on a PABX line, select “PABX”, “PABX(GND)” or
“PABX(FLASH)”.
002 PSTN Access Enter the PSTN access number for the
Number G3-1 line.
003 Memory Lock Not used
Disabled
107 IPFAX Port Settings
001 H323 Port Sets the H323 port number.
002 SIP Port Sets the SIP port number.
003 RAS Port Sets the RAS port number.
004 Gatekeeper port Sets the Gatekeeper port number.
005 T.38 Port Sets the T.38 port number.
006 SIP Server Port Sets the SIP port number.
007 IPFAX Protocol Select "H323" or "SIP".
Priority
201 FAX SW
001 – 00 – 1F
032
301 Fax:FlairAPI Setting
101 -
4.2.4 SP4-XXX (ROM VERSION)

4 Mode No. Function
101 001 FCU ROM Version Displays the FCU ROM version.
102 001 Error Codes Displays the latest 64 fax error codes.
103 001 G3-1 ROM Version Displays the G3-1 modem version.
4.2.5 SP5-XXX (RAM CLEAR)

5 Mode Function
D0CK 50 SM
Service Tables
No.
101 Initialize SRAM (except Secure)
000 Initializes the bit switches and user parameters, user data in the SRAM, files in the
SAF memory, and clock.
102 Erase All Files
000 Erases all files stored in the SAF memory.
103 Reset Bit Switches (except Secure)
000 Resets the bit switches and user parameters.
104 Factory setting
000 Resets the bit switches and user parameters, user data in the SRAM and files in the
SAF memory.
105 Reset All Bit Switches
000 Initializes all the current bit switch settings.
106 Reset Secure Bit Switches
000 Initializes only the security bit switches. If you select automatic output/display for the
user parameter switches, the security settings are initialized.
4.2.6 SP6-XXX (REPORT)

6 Mode No. Function
101 System Parameter List
000 - Touch the “ON” button to print the system parameter list.
102 Service Monitor Report
000 - Touch the “ON” button to print the service monitor report.
103 G3 Protocol Dump List
002 G3-1 (All Prints the protocol dump list of all communications for the G3-1
Communications) line.
003 G3-1 Prints the protocol dump list of the last communication for the G3-
(1 Communication) 1 line.
105 All Files Print out
000 - Prints out all the user files in the SAF memory, including
confidential messages.
• Do not use this function, unless the customer is having

trouble printing confidential messages or recovering files
stored using the memory lock feature.
106 Journal Print out
001 All Journals The machine prints all the communication records on the report.
SM 51 D0CK
Service Tables
002 Specified Date The machine prints all communication records after the specified
date.
107 Log List Print out
001 All log files These log print out functions are for designer use only.
002 Printer
003 SC/TRAP Stored
004 Decompression
005 Scanner
006 JOB/SAF
007 Reconstruction
008 JBIG
009 Fax Driver
010 G3CCU
011 Fax Job
012 CCU
013 Scanner Condition
108 IP Protocol Dump List
001 All Communications Prints the protocol dump list of all communications for the IP fax
line.
002 1 Communication Prints the protocol dump list of the last communication for the IP
fax line.
4.2.7 SP7-XXX (TESTS)

These are the test modes for PTT approval.
7 Function
101 G3-1 Modem Tests
102 G3-1 DTMF Tests
103 Ringer Test
104 G3-1 V34 (S2400baud)
105 G3-1 V34 (S2800baud)
106 G3-1 V34 (S3000baud)
107 G3-1 V34 (S3200baud)
108 G3-1 V34 (S3429baud)
109 Recorded Message Test
D0CK 52 SM
Bit Switches – 1
4.3 BIT SWITCHES – 1
• Do not adjust a bit switch or use a setting that is described as "Not used", as this may cause
the machine to malfunction or to operate in a manner that is not accepted by local regulations.
Such bits are for use only in other areas, such as Japan.
Default settings for bit switches are not listed in this manual. Refer to the System Parameter List printed
by the machine.
4.3.1 SYSTEM SWITCHES

System Switch 00 (SP No. 1-101-001)
No Function Comments
0 Dedicated transmission Set this bit to 1 before changing any dedicated transmission
parameter programming parameters.
0: Disabled This setting is automatically reset to "0" after turning off and on.
1: Enabled
1 Not used Do not change this setting.
2 Technical data printout on 1: Instead of the personal name, the following data are listed on
the Journal the Journal for each G3 communication.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Example:
(1): EQM value (Line quality data). A larger number means more errors.
(2): Symbol rate (V.34 only)
(3): Final modem type used
(4): Starting data rate (for example, 288 means 28.8 kbps)
(5): Final data rate
(6): Rx revel (see below for how to read the rx level)
(7): Total number of error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception.
(8): Total number of burst error lines that occurred during non-ECM reception.
• EQM and rx level are fixed at "FFFF" in tx mode.

• The seventh and eighth numbers are fixed at "00" for transmission records and ECM
reception records.
Rx level calculation
SM 53 D0CK
Bit Switches – 1
Example:
The four-digit hexadecimal value (N) after "L" indicates the rx level.
The high byte is given first, followed by the low byte. Divide the decimal value of N by -16 to
get the rx level.
In the above example, the decimal value of N (= 0100 [H]) is 256.
So, the actual rx level is 256/-16 = -16 dB
4 Line error mark print When "1" is selected, a line error mark is printed on the printout if
0: OFF, 1: ON (print) a line error occurs during reception. This shows error locations
when ECM is turned off.
5 G3 communication This is a fault-finding aid. The LCD shows the key parameters
parameter display (see "G3 Communication Parameters" below this table). This is
0: Disabled normally disabled because it cancels the CSI display for the user.
1: Enabled Be sure to reset this bit to "0" after testing.
6 Protocol dump list output This is only used for communication troubleshooting. It shows the
after each communication content of the transmitted facsimile protocol signals. Always reset
0: Off this bit to 0 after finishing testing.
1: On If system switch 09 bit 6 is at "1", the list is only printed if there
was an error during the communication.
7 Not used Do not change the setting.
G3 Communication Parameters
Modem rate 336: 33600 bps 168: 16800 bps
312: 31200 bps 144: 14400 bps
288: 28800 bps 120: 12000 bps
264: 26400 bps 96: 9600 bps
240: 24000 bps 72: 7200 bps
216: 21600 bps 48: 4800 bps
192: 19200 bps 24: 2400 bps
Resolution S: Standard (8 x 3.85 dots/mm)
D: Detail (8 x 7.7 dots/mm)
F: Fine (8 x 15.4 dots/mm)
SF: Superfine (16 x 15.4 dots/mm)
21: Standard (200 x 100 dpi)
22: Detail (200 x 200 dpi)
44: Superfine (400 x 400 dpi)
Compression mode MMR: MMR compression
MR: MR compression
D0CK 54 SM
Bit Switches – 1
MH: MH compression
JBO: JBIG compression (Optional mode)
JBB: JBIG compression (Basic mode)
Communication ECM: With ECM
mode NML: With no ECM
Width and reduction A4: A4 (8.3"), no reduction
B4: B4 (10.1"), no reduction
A3: A3 (11.7"), no reduction
I/O rate 0: 0 ms/line
5: 5 ms/line
10: 10 ms/line
20: 20 ms/line
25: 2.5 ms/line
40: 40 ms/line
• "40" is displayed while receiving a fax message using AI short

protocol.
System Switch 01 - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)

0- Not used Do not change these settings.
1
2 Forced reset after With this setting on, the machine resets itself automatically if a
transmission stalls transmission stalls and fails to complete the job.
0: Off
1: On
3 Not used Do not change these settings.
4 File retention time 1: A file that had a communication error will not be erased unless
0: Depends on User the communication is successful.
Parameter 24 [18(H)]
1: No limit
5- Not used Do not change this setting
7
SM 55 D0CK
Bit Switches – 1

2
3 Printing dedicated tx 1: Each Quick/Speed dial number on the list is printed with the
parameters on Quick/Speed dedicated tx parameters (10 bytes each).
Dial Lists The first 10 bytes of data are the programmed dedicated tx
0: Disabled parameters; 34 bytes of data are printed (the other 24 bytes
1: Enabled have no use for service technicians).
7

0 Addition of image data from If this feature is enabled, the top half of the first page of
confidential transmissions on the confidential messages will be printed on transmission
transmission result report result reports.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled
1 Print timing of communication 0: The Journal is printed only when image data is sent.
reports on the Journal when no 1: The Journal is printed when any data is sent.
image data was exchanged.
0: After DCS/NSS communication
(default),
1: After polling
2 Automatic error report printout 0: Error reports will not be printed.
0: Disabled 1: Enabled 1: Error reports will be printed automatically after failed
communications.
3 Printing of the error code on the 1: Error codes are printed on the error reports.
error report This can be used for detecting an error which occurs
0: No 1: Yes rarely.
5 Power failure report 1: A power failure report will be automatically printed after
0: Disabled the power is switched on if a fax message disappeared
D0CK 56 SM
Bit Switches – 1
1: Enabled (default) from the memory when the power was turned off last.
NOTE: If "0" is selected, no reports are printed and no
one may recognize that fax data is gone due to a power
failure.
6 Conditions for printing the protocol This switch becomes effective only when system switch
dump list 00 bit 6 is set to 1.
0: Print for all communications 1: Set this bit to 1 when you wish to print a protocol dump
1: Print only when there is a list only for communications with errors.
communication error NOTE: The memory size is limited. Use this bit switch
only when some log reports are necessary.
System Switch 0A (SP No. 1-101-011)

3
4 Dialing on the ten-key 0: Prevents dialing from the ten-key pad while the external
pad when the external telephone is off-hook. Use this setting when the external telephone
telephone is off-hook is not by the machine, or if a wireless telephone is connected as an
0: Disabled 1: Enabled external telephone.
1: The user can dial on the machine's ten-key pad when the
handset is off-hook.
5 On hook dial 0: On hook dial is disabled.
6- Not used Do not change these settings
7
System Switch 0B - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0C - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0D - Not used (Do not change the factory settings.)
System Switch 0E (SP No. 1-101-015)

0- Not used Do not change the settings.
1
2 Enable/disable for direct Direct sending cannot operate when the capture function is on
sending selection during sending. Setting this switch to "1" enables direct sending
0: Direct sending off without capture.
SM 57 D0CK
Bit Switches – 1
1: Direct sending on Setting this switch to "0" masks the direct sending function on the
operation panel so direct sending with ScanRouter cannot be
selected.
3 Action when the external 0: Manual tx is possible while the external handset is off-hook.
handset goes off-hook However, manual tx during handset off-hook may not be sent to a
0: Manual tx and rx correct direction. Manual tx is not possible.
operation 1: The display stays in standby mode even when the external
1: Memory tx and rx handset is used, so that other people can use the machine for
operation (the display memory tx operation. Note that manual tx and rx are not possible
remains the same) with this setting.
7
System Switch 0F (SP No. 1-101-016)

0 Country/area code for This country/area code determines the factory settings of bit
to functional settings (Hex) switches and RAM addresses. However, it has no effect on the
7 00: France 12: Asia NCU parameter settings and communication parameter RAM
01: 13: Japan addresses.
Germany Cross reference
02: UK 14: Hong NCU country code:
Kong SP No. 2-103-001 for G3-1
03: Italy 15: South SP No. 2-104-001 for G3-2
Africa SP No. 2-105-001 for G3-3
04: Austria 16: Australia
05: Belgium 17: New
Zealand
06: 18: Singapore
Denmark
07: Finland 19: Malaysia
08: Ireland 1A: China
09: Norway 1B: Taiwan
0A: 1C: Korea
Sweden
0B: Switz. 1D: Brazil
0C: 20: Turkey
Portugal
0D: Holland 21: Greece
D0CK 58 SM
Bit Switches – 1
0E: Spain 22: Hungary

0F: Israel 23: Czech
10: --- 24: Poland
11: USA

0-7 Threshold memory level for parallel memory transmission Threshold = N x 128 KB + 256 KB
N can be between 00 - FF(H)
Default setting: 02(H) = 512 KB

0 TTI printing position Change this bit to 1 if the TTI overprints information that the
0: Superimposed on the page customer considers to be important (G3 transmissions).
data NOTE: If "1" is selected, it is possible that sent data is
1: Printed before the data printed on two sheets of paper.
leading edge
2
3 TTI used for broadcasting 1: The TTI (TTI_1 or TTI_2) which is selected for all
0: The TTIs selected for each destinations during broadcasting.
Quick/Speed dial are used
1: The same TTI is used for all
destinations
7

0- TTI printing TTI: 08 to 92 (BCD) mm
7 position in the Input even numbers only.
main scan This setting determines the print start position for the TTI from the left edge
direction of the paper. If the TTI is moved too far to the right, it may overwrite the file
number which is on the top right of the page. On an A4 page, if the TTI is
moved over by more than 50 mm, it may overwrite the page number.
SM 59 D0CK
Bit Switches – 1
System Switch 13 - Not used (do not change these settings)


0 Not used Do not change the settings.
1 Going into the Energy Saver mode 1: The machine will restart from the Energy Saver mode
automatically quickly, because the +5V power supply is active even in
0: Enabled the Energy Saver mode. The LED of the operation switch
1: Disabled is flashing instead of entering Energy Saver mode.
Use this setting if an external telephone has to be used
when the machine is in the Energy Saver mode.
3
4- Interval for preventing the machine If there is a file waiting for transmission, the machine
5 from entering Energy Saver mode if does not go to Energy Saver mode during the selected
there is a pending transmission file. period.
Bit 5 Bit 4 Setting After transmitting the file, if there is no file waiting for
0 0 1 min transmission, the machine goes to the Energy Saver
0 1 30 min mode.
1 0 1 hour
1 1 24 hours
7

0 Parallel 1: The machine sends messages simultaneously using all available ports
Broadcasting during broadcasting.
0: Disabled NOTE: If a customer wants to keep a line available for fax reception or
1: Enabled other reasons, select "0" (Disable).
7

D0CK 60 SM
Bit Switches – 1

5
6 Extended scanner 0: After installing the memory expansion option, the scanner page
page memory after memory is extended to 4 MB from 2 MB.
memory option is 1: If this bit is set to 1 after installing the memory expansion option,
installed the scanner page memory is extended to 12 MB. But the SAF
0: Disabled memory decreases to 18 MB.
1: Enabled
7* Special Original mode 1: If the customer frequently wishes to transmit a form or letterhead
0: Disabled which has a colored or printed background, change this bit to "1".
1: Enabled "Original 1" and "Original 2" can be selected in addition to the "Text",
"Text/Photo" and "Photo" modes.
* This setting can be used for the client machine which has no FCU.
System Switch 1A (SP No. 1-101-027)
0 LS RX memory capacity Sets the value to x4KB. When the amount of available memory drops
to threshold setting below this setting, RX documents are printed to conserve memory.
7 00-FF (0-1020 Kbyte: Initial setting 0x80 (512 KB)
Hex) NOTE: If a customer wants available memory size to be larger,
decrease this threshold
System Switch 1B - Not used (do not change these settings)

System Switch 1C - Not used (do not change these settings)
System Switch 1D (SP No. 1-101-030)

0 RTI/CSI/CPS code 0: RTI, CSI, CPS codes are displayed on the top line of the LCD panel
display during communication.
0: Enable 1: Codes are switched off (no display)
1: Disable
7
SM 61 D0CK
Bit Switches – 1
System Switch 1E (SP No. 1-101-031)

0 Communication after the 0: When this switch is on and the journal history becomes full,
Journal data storage area has the next report prints. If the journal history is not deleted, the
become full next transmission cannot be received. This prevents
0: Impossible overwriting communication records before the machine can
1: Possible print them.
1: If the buffer memory of the communication records for the
Journal is full, fax communications are still possible. But the
machine will overwrite the oldest communication records.
• This setting is effective only when Automatic Journal

printout is enabled but the machine cannot print the
report (e.g., no paper).
1* Action when the SAF memory 0: If the SAF memory becomes full during scanning for a
has become full during memory transmission, the successfully scanned pages are
scanning transmitted.
0: The current page is erased. 1: If the SAF memory becomes full during scanning for a
1: The entire file is erased. memory transmission, the file is erased and no pages are
transmitted.
• This setting is effective only when Automatic Journal

printout is enabled but the machine cannot print the
report (e.g., no paper).
2 RTI/CSI display priority This bit determines which identifier, RTI or CSI, is displayed on
0: RTI 1: CSI the LCD while the machine is communicating in G3 non-
standard mode.
3 File No. printing 1: File numbers are not printed on any reports.
0: Enabled NOTE: The file numbers may not be printed in the sequential
1: Disabled order. If a customer does not like this numbering, select "0".
4 Action when authorized 0: If the user has stored no acceptable sender RTIs or CSIs,
reception is enabled but the user can select “ON” in the authorized reception setting
authorized RTIs/CSIs are not but the setting becomes invalid (“OFF”). The machine will not
yet programmed be able to receive any fax messages.
0: All fax reception is disabled If the customer wishes to receive messages from any sender
1: Faxes can be received if the that includes an RTI or CSI, and to block messages from
sender has an RTI or CSI senders that do not include an RTI or CSI, change this bit to
"0", then enable Authorized Reception.
D0CK 62 SM
Bit Switches – 1
Otherwise, keep this bit at "1 (default setting)".

5- Not used Do not change the settings
7
* This setting can be used for the client machine which has no FCU.
System Switch 1F (SP No. 1-101-032)
0 Trace log function 0: Enable
1: Disable
1 Report printout after an original jam 0: When an original jams, or the SAF memory
during SAF storage or if the SAF overflows during scanning, a report will be printed.
memory fills up Change this bit to "1" if the customer does not want to
0: Enabled have a report in these cases.
1: Disabled Memory tx – Memory storage report
Parallel memory tx – Transmission result report
3 Received fax print start timing 0: The machine prints each page immediately after the
(G3 reception) machine receives it.
0: After receiving each page 1: The machine prints the complete message after the
1: After receiving all pages machine receives all the pages in the memory.
4- Not used Do not change the factory settings.
6
7 Action when a fax SC has occurred 0: When the fax unit detects a fax SC code other than
0: Automatic reset SC1201 and SC1207, the fax unit automatically resets
1: Fax unit stops itself.
1: When the fax unit detects any fax SC code, the fax
unit stops.
Cross Reference
Fax SC codes - See "Troubleshooting"
SM 63 D0CK
Bit Switches – 2
by the machine.
4.4.1 I-FAX SWITCHES

I-fax Switch 00 (SP No. 1-102-001)
Original Width of TX This setting sets the maximum size of the original that the destination
Attachment File can receive. (Bits 3 to 6 are reserved for future use or not used.)
0 A4 -
1 B4
2 A3
3-6 Reserved
7 Not used
0: Off (not selected), 1: On (selected)
If more than one of these three bits is set to "1", the larger size has priority. For example, if
both Bit 2 and Bit 1 are set to "1" then the maximum size is "A3" (Bit 2).
When mail is sent, there is no negotiation with the receiving machine at the destination, so the
sending machine cannot make a selection for the receiving capabilities (original width setting)
of the receiving machine. The original width selected with this switch is used as the RX
machine's original width setting, and the original is reduced to this size before sending. The
default is A4.
If the width selected with this switch is higher than the receiving machine can accept, the
machine detects this and this causes an error.

Original Line Resolution These settings set the maximum resolution of the original that the
of TX Attachment File destination can receive.
0 200x100 Standard 0: Not selected
1 200x200 Detail 1: Selected
2 200x400 Fine If more than one of these three bits is set to "1", the higher resolution
3 300 x 300 Reserve has priority. For example, if both Bit 0 and Bit 2 are set to "1" Then The
D0CK 64 SM
Bit Switches – 2
4 400 x 400 Super Resolution is set for "Bit 2 200 x 400.

Fine
5 600 x 600 Reserve
6 Reserve
7 mm/inch
This setting selects mm/inch conversion for mail transmission.
0: Off (No conversion), 1: On (Conversion)
When on (set to "1"), the machine converts millimeters to inches for sending mail. There is no
switch for converting inches to millimeters.
Unlike G3 fax transmissions which can negotiate between sender and receiver to determine
the setting, mail cannot negotiate between terminals; the mm/inch selection is determined by
the sender fax.
When this switch is Off (0):
• Images scanned in inches are sent in inches.
• Images scanned in mm are sent in mm.
• Images received in inches are transmitted in inches.
• Images received in mm are transmitted in mm.
When this switch is On (1):
• Images scanned in inches are sent in inches.
• Images scanned in mm are converted to inches.
• Images received in inches are transmitted in inches.
• Images received in mm are converted to inches.

0 RX Text Mail Header Processing
This setting determines whether the header information is printed with text e-mails when they
are received.
0: Prints only text mail.
1: Prints mail header information attached to text mail.
When a text mail is received with this switch On (1), the "From" address and "Subject" address
are printed as header information.
When a mail with only binary data is received (a TIFF-F file, for example), this setting is ignored
and no header is printed.
1 Output from Attached Document at E-mail TX Error
This setting determines whether only the first page or all pages of an e-mail attachment are
printed at the sending station when a transmission error occurs. This allows the customer to
see which documents have not reached their intended destinations if sent to the wrong e-mail
SM 65 D0CK
Bit Switches – 2
addresses, for example.

0: Prints 1st page only.
1: Prints all pages.
2-3 Text String for Return Receipt
This setting determines the text string output for the Return Receipt that confirms the
transmission was received normally at the destination.
00: "Dispatched"
Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt. Receives the Return Receipt with
"dispatched" in the 2nd part:
Disposition: Automatic-action/MDN-send automatically; dispatched
The "dispatched" string is included in the Subject string.
01: "Displayed"
Sends from PC mail a request for a Return Receipt. Receives the Return Receipt with
"displayed" in the 2nd part:
Disposition: Automatic-action/MDN-send automatically; displayed
The "displayed" string is included in the Subject string.
10: Reserved
11: Reserved
A mail requesting a Return Receipt sent from an IFAX with this switch set to "00" (for
"dispatched") received by Microsoft Outlook 2000 may cause an error. If any setting other than
"displayed" (01) causes a problem, change the setting to "01" to enable normal sending of the
Return Receipt.
4 Media accept feature
This setting adds or does not add the media accept feature to the answer mail to confirm a
reception.
0: Does not add the media accept feature to the answer mail
1: Adds the media accept feature to the answer mail.
Use this bit switch if a problem occurs when the machine receives an answer mail, which
contains the media accept feature field.
5-6 Not Used (do not change these settings)
7 Image Resolution of RX Text Mail
This setting determines the image resolution of the received mail.
0: 200 x 200
1: 400 x 400
The "1" setting requires installation of the Memory Unit in order to have enough SAF (Store and
Forward) memory to receive images at 400 x 400 resolution.
I-fax Switch 03 - Not used (do not change these settings)
D0CK 66 SM
Bit Switches – 2

0 Subject for Delivery TX/Memory Transfer
This setting determines whether the RTI/CSI registered on this machine or the RTI/CSI of the
originator is used in the subject lines of transferred documents.
0: Puts the RTI/CSI of the originator in the Subject line. If this is used, either the RTI or CSI is
used. Only one of these can be received for use in the subject line.
1: Puts the RTI/CSI registered on this machine in the Subject line.
When this switch is used to transfer and deliver mail to a PC, the information in the Subject line
that indicates where the transmission originated can be used to determine automatically the
destination folder for each e-mail.
1 Subject corresponding to mail post database
0: Standard subject
1: Mail post database subject
The standard subject is replaced by the mail post database subject in the following three cases:
1) When the service technician sets the service (software) switch.
2) When memory sending or delivery specified by F code is applied by the SMTP server
3) With relay broadcasting (1st stage without the Schmidt 4 function).
• This switch does not apply for condition 3) when the RX system is set up for memory
sending, delivery by F-code, sending with SMTP RX and when operators are using
FOL (to prevent problems when receiving transmissions).

0 Mail Addresses of SMTP Broadcast Recipients
Determines whether the e-mail addresses of the destinations that receive transmissions
broadcasted using SMTP protocol are recorded in the Journal.
For example:
"1st destination + Total number of destinations: 9" in the Journal indicates a broadcast to 9
destinations.
0: Not recorded
1: Recorded
1 IFAXTX Retries
Determines whether the machine retries sending IFAX when connection and transmission fails
due to errors.
0: Disabled
SM 67 D0CK
Bit Switches – 2
1: Enabled
2 When sending Tiff files to the mail/folder destinations, selects the resizing function in the main
scan direction.
Controls ON/OFF of the function, that fit the Tiff files sent from the fax application, within the
standard size.
0: Disabled (not resizing)
1: Enabled (resizing)
I-fax Switch 06 - Not used (do not change the settings)

I-fax Switch 07 - Not used (do not change the settings)

0-7 Memory Threshold for POP Mail Reception
This setting determines the amount of SAF (Store and Forward) memory. (SAF stores fax
messages to send later for transmission to more than one location, and also holds incoming
messages if they cannot be printed.) When the amount of SAF memory available falls below
this setting, mail can no longer be received; received mail is then stored on the mail server.
00-FF (0 to 1024 KB: HEX)
The hexadecimal number you enter is multiplied by 4 KB to determine the amount of memory.

3
4- Restrict TX This setting determines the number of retries when connection and
7 Retries transmission fails due to errors.
01-F (1-15 Hex)
I-fax Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings)

I-fax Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings)
I-fax Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings)
I-fax Switch 0D (SP No. 1-102-014)

0- Not used Do not change the
1 settings
D0CK 68 SM
Bit Switches – 2
2- Select the signature when sending mail notification of the send In response to
3 results IEEE2600.1.
Bit 2 Bit 3 Setting
0 0 No sign
0 1 No setting
1 0 Individual setting
1 1 Always sign
4- Select the signature when sending mail. In response to
5 IEEE2600.1.
Bit 5 Bit 4 Setting
0 0 No sign
0 1 No setting
1 0 Individual setting
1 1 Always sign
6- Not used Do not change the
7 settings.
I-fax Switch 0E - Not used (do not change the settings)
I-fax Switch 0F (SP No. 1-102-016)

0 Delivery Method for SMTP RX Files
This setting determines whether files received with SMTP protocol are delivered or output
immediately.
0: Off. Files received via SMTP are output immediately without delivery.
1: On. Files received via SMTP are delivered immediately to their destinations.
1 Set to select the signature when receiving SMTP mail.
0: No sign
1: Always sign
2 Set to encrypt the data when receiving SMTP mail.
0: No encryption
1: Encryption
3-7 Not used
SM 69 D0CK
Bit Switches – 2
4.4.2 PRINTER SWITCHES

Printer Switch 00 (SP No. 1-103-001)
0 Select page separation 0: If a 2 page RX transmission is split, [*] is printed in the bottom
marks right corner of the 1st page and only a [2] is printed in the upper
0: Off right corner of the 2nd page.
1: On 1: If a 2 page RX transmission is split into two pages, for example,
[*] [2] is printed in the bottom right corner of the 1st page and only
a [2] is printed in the upper right corner of the 2nd page.
• This helps the user to identify pages that have been split
because the size of the paper is smaller than the size of
the document received. (When A5 is used to print an A4
size document, for example.)
1 Repetition of data when 1: Default. 10 mm of the trailing edge of the previous page are
the received page is repeated at the top of the next page.
longer than the printer 0: The next page continues from where the previous page stopped
paper without any repeated text.
0: Off
1: On
2 Prints the date and time This switch is only effective when user parameter 02 - bit 2
on received fax messages (printing the received date and time on received fax messages) is
0: Disabled enabled.
1: Enabled 1: The machine prints the received and printed date and time at
the bottom of each received page.
7
Printer Switch 01 (SP No. 1-103-002) - Not used (do not change the settings)

0* 1st paper feed 0: The paper feed station can be used to print fax messages and
station usage for fax reports.
printing 1: The specified paper feed station will not be used for printing fax
0: Enabled messages and reports.
1: Disabled
1* 2nd paper feed • Do not disable usage for a paper feed station which has been
D0CK 70 SM
Bit Switches – 2
station usage for fax specified by User Parameter Switch 0F (15), or which is used
printing for the Specified Cassette Selection feature.
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
2* 3rd paper feed
station usage for fax
printing
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
3* 4th paper feed
station usage for fax
printing
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
4* LCT usage for fax
printing
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
7
* This setting can be used for the client-side machine which has no FCU.
0* Length reduction of received data 0: Incoming pages are printed without length reduction.
0: Disabled (Page separation threshold: Printer Switch 03, bits 4 to
1: Enabled 7)
1: Incoming page length is reduced when printing.
(Maximum reducible length: Printer Switches 04, bits 0
to 4)
3
4 Page separation setting when sub Page separation threshold (with reduction disabled with
to scan compression is forbidden switch 03-0 above).
7 00-0F (0-15 mm: Hex) For example, if this setting is set to "10", and A4 is the
Default: 6 mm selected paper size:
If the received document is 10 mm or less longer than
A4, then the 10 mm are cut and only 1 page prints.
If the received document is 10 mm longer than A4, then
SM 71 D0CK
Bit Switches – 2
the document is split into 2 pages.

0 Maximum reducible length when length reduction is enabled with switch 03-0 above.
to [Maximum reducible length] = [Paper length] + (N x 5mm)
4 "N" is the decimal value of the binary setting of bits 0 to 4.
Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting
0 0 0 0 0 0 mm
0 0 0 0 1 5 mm
0 0 1 0 0 20 mm
1 1 1 1 1 155 mm
For A5 sideways and B5 sideways paper
[Maximum reducible length] = [Paper length] + 0.75 x (N x 5mm)
5 Length of the duplicated image on the next page, when page separation has taken place.
6 Bit 6 Bit 5 Setting
0 0 4 mm
0 1 10 mm
1 0 15 mm
1 1 Not used
7 Not used. Do not change the setting.
Printer Switch 05 - Not used (do not change the settings)

0* Printing while a paper cassette is pulled out, when the Just Size Cross reference
Printing feature is enabled. Just size printing on/off –
0: Printing will not start User switch 05, bit 5
1: Printing will start if another cassette has a suitable size of
paper, based on the paper size selection priority tables.
1- Not used. Do not change the settings.
7
D0CK 72 SM
Bit Switches – 2

0 Not used. Do not change the settings.
1 Selects the 95% reduced 0:OFF Not reduced printing
printing function for letter 1:ON Only when printing letter size, performs 95% reduced printing
size. of the entire image (in both of main and sub directions) Report
printing and printing from the bypass tray are excluded.
3
4 Receiver name printed on Selects the printing target on the transmission result report.
the transmission result 0: All receivers
report 1: Printing only receivers which have received fax transmission.
7

Printer Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings)
Printer Switch 0E (SP No. 1-103-015)

0* Paper size selection priority 0: A paper size that has the same width as the received data is
0: Width selected first.
1: Length 1: A paper size which has enough length to print all the
received lines without reduction is selected first.
1* Paper size selected for This switch determines which paper size is selected for
printing A4 width fax data printing A4 width fax data, when the machine has both A4 and
0: 8.5" x 11" size 8.5" x 11" size paper.
1: A4 size
2 Page separation 1: If all paper sizes in the machine require page separation to
0: Enabled print a received fax message, the machine does not print the
1: Disabled message (Substitute Reception is used).
After a larger size of paper is set in a cassette, the machine
automatically prints the fax message.
3- Printing the sample image on "Same size" means the sample image is printed at 100%,
SM 73 D0CK
Bit Switches – 2
4 reports even if page separation occurs.

Bit Bit Setting User Parameter Switch 19 (13H) bit 4 must be set to "0" to
4 3 enable this switch.
0 0 The upper half Refer to Detailed Section Descriptions for more on this
only feature.
0 1 50% reduction
(sub-scan only)
1 0 Same size
1 1 Not used
6
7 Equalizing the reduction ratio 0: When page separation has taken place, all the pages are
among separated pages reduced with the same reduction ratio.
(Page Separation) 1: Only the last page is reduced to fit the selected paper size
0: Enabled when page separation has taken place. Other pages are
1: Disabled printed without reduction.
Printer Switch 0F (SP No. 1-103-016)
0- Smoothing feature (0, 0) (0, 1): Disable smoothing if the machine receives halftone
1* Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting images from other manufacturers fax machines frequently.
0 0 Disabled
0 1 Disabled
1 0 Enabled
1 1 Not used
2* Duplex printing 1: The machine always prints received fax messages in duplex
0: Disabled printing mode:
1: Enabled
3 Binding direction for 0: Sets the binding for the left edge of the stack.
Duplex printing 1: Sets the binding for the top of the stack.
0: Left binding
1: Top binding
4-7 Not used Do not change the settings.
D0CK 74 SM
Bit Switches – 3
by the machine.
4.5.1 COMMUNICATION SWITCHES

Communication Switch 00 (SP No. 1-104-001)
0- Compression modes available in These bits determine the compression capabilities to be
1 receive mode declared in phase B (handshaking) of the T.30 protocol.
Bit Bit Modes
1 0
0 0 MH only
0 1 MH/MR
1 0 MH/MR/MMR
1 1 MH/MR/MMR/JBIG
2- Compression modes available in These bits determine the compression capabilities to be
3 transmit mode used in the transmission and to be declared in phase B
Bit Bit Modes (handshaking) of the T.30 protocol.
3 2
0 0 MH only
0 1 MH/MR
1 0 MH/MR/MMR
1 1 MH/MR/MMR/JBIG
5 JBIG compression method: Change the setting when communication problems occur
Reception using JBIG compression.
0: Only basic supported
1: Basic and optional both
supported
6 JBIG compression method: Change the setting when communication problems occur
Transmission using JBIG compression.
0: Basic mode priority
SM 75 D0CK
Bit Switches – 3
1: Optional mode priority

7 Closed network (reception) 1: Reception will not go ahead if the polling ID code of the
0: Disabled remote terminal does not match the polling ID code of the
1: Enabled local terminal. This function is only available in NSF/NSS
mode.

0 ECM If this bit is set to 0, ECM is switched off for all communications.
0: Off 1: On In addition, V.8 protocol and JBIG compression are switched off
automatically.
2- Wrong connection (0,1): The machine will disconnect the line without sending a fax
3 prevention method message, if the last 8 digits of the received CSI do not match the last
Bit Bit Setting 8 digits of the dialed telephone number. This does not work when
3 2 manually dialed.
0 0 None (1,0): The same as above, except that only the last 4 digits are
0 1 8 digit CSI compared.
1 0 4 digit CSI (1,1): The machine will disconnect the line without sending a fax
1 1 CSI/RTI message, if the other end does not identify itself with an RTI or CSI.
(0,0): Nothing is checked; transmission will always go ahead.
• This function does not work when dialing is done from the
external telephone.
4- Not used Do not change the setting.
5
6- Maximum printable The setting determined by these bits is informed to the transmitting
7 page length available terminal in the pre-message protocol exchange (in the DIS/NSF
Bit Bit Setting frames).
7 6
0 0 No limit
0 1 B4 (364
mm)
1 0 A4 (297
mm)
1 1 Not used
D0CK 76 SM
Bit Switches – 3
SM 77 D0CK
Bit Switches – 3

0 G3 Burst error threshold If there are more consecutive error lines in the received
0: Low 1: High page than the threshold, the machine will send a negative
response. The Low and High threshold values depend on
the sub-scan resolution, and are as follows.
100 dpi 6(L) 12(H)
200 dpi 12(L) 24(H)
300 dpi 18(L) 36(H)
400 dpi 24(L) 48(H)
1 Acceptable total error line ratio If the error line ratio for a page exceeds the acceptable ratio,
0: 5% 1: 10% RTN will be sent to the other end.
2 Treatment of pages received 0: Pages received with errors are not printed.
with errors during G3 reception
0: Deleted from memory without
printing
1: Printed
3 Hang-up decision when a 0: The next page will be sent even if RTN or PIN is received.
negative code (RTN or PIN) is 1: The machine will send DCN and hang up if it receives
received during G3 immediate RTN or PIN.
transmission This bit is ignored for memory transmissions or if ECM is
0: No hang-up, 1: Hang-up being used.
7

0- Maximum number of page retransmissions in a G3 00 - FF (Hex) times.
7 memory transmission This setting is not used if ECM is
switched on.
Default setting - 03(H)

0 Remote mode switch Set this bit to ON when you wish to switch TEL mode to FAX mode
(TEL mode) remotely.
0: Disable
D0CK 78 SM
Bit Switches – 3
1: Enable (Active)
1 Remote mode switch Set this bit to ON when you wish to turn on the remote mode switch
(FAX mode) after automatic reception with FAX mode.
0: Disable
1: Enable (Active)
2 Remote mode switch Set this bit to ON when you wish to turn on the remote mode switch
(AUTO mode) after automatic reception with AUTO mode.
0: Disable
1: Enable (Active)
7

0- Remote mode switch Enter the number to switch between TEL/FAX modes using the
3 number external phone.
00-09 (0-9:HEX)
7
Communication Switch 06 - Not used (do not change the settings)


0- Minimum interval between This value is the minimum time that the machine waits
7 automatic dialing attempts before it dials the next destination.
Communication Switch 0A (SP No. 1-104-011)

0 Point of resumption of memory 0: The transmission begins from the page where
transmission upon redialing transmission failed the previous time.
0: From the error page 1: Transmission begins from the first page, using
1: From page 1 normal memory transmission.
7
SM 79 D0CK
Bit Switches – 3
Communication Switch 0B (SP No. 1-104-012)

2
3 Conditions required for 0: Always transmitted
Transfer Result Report 1: Only transmitted if there was an error
transmission
4 Printout of the message When the machine is acting as a Transfer Station, this bit
when acting as a Transfer determines whether the machine prints the fax message
Station coming in from the Requesting Terminal.
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
7
Communication Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 0D (SP No. 1-104-014)

0- The available memory threshold, 00 to FF (Hex), unit = 4 kbytes
7 below which ringing detection (and (e.g., 06(H) = 24 kbytes)
therefore reception into memory) is One page is about 24 kbytes.
disabled The machine refers to this setting before each fax
reception. If the amount of remaining memory is below
this threshold, the machine cannot receive any fax
messages.
If this setting is kept at 0, the machine will detect ringing
signals and go into receive mode even if there is no
memory available. This will result in communication
failure.
Communication Switch 0E (SP No. 1-104-015)

0- Minimum interval between 06 to FF (Hex), unit = 2 s
7 automatic dialing attempts (e.g., 06(H) = 12 s)
This value is the minimum time that the machine waits
before it dials the next destination.
Communication Switch 0F – Not used (do not change the settings.)
D0CK 80 SM
Bit Switches – 3

0- Memory transmission: Maximum number of dialing attempts to the same 01 – FE (Hex)
7 destination times
Communication Switch 11 – Not used (do not change the settings.)

0- Memory transmission: Interval between dialing attempts to the same 01 – FF (Hex)
7 destination minutes
Communication Switch 13 – Not used (do not change the settings.)

0 Inch-to-mm conversion during 0: In immediate transmission, data scanned in inch format are
transmission transmitted without conversion.
0: Disabled, 1: Enabled In memory transmission, data stored in the SAF memory in
mm format are transmitted without conversion.
Note: When storing the scanned data into SAF memory, the
fax unit always converts the data into mm format.
1: The machine converts the scanned data or stored data in
the SAF memory to the format which was specified in the set-
up protocol (DIS/NSF) before transmission.
1- Not used Do not change the factory settings.
5
6- Available unit of resolution in For the best performance, do not change the factory settings.
7 which fax messages are The setting determined by these bits is informed to the
received transmitting terminal in the pre-message protocol exchange (in
Bit 7 Bit 6 Unit the DIS/NSF frames).
0 0 mm
0 1 inch
1 0 mm and inch
1 1 Not used
Communication Switch 15 – Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 16 – Not used (do not change the settings)
SM 81 D0CK
Bit Switches – 3

0 SEP reception 0: Polling transmission to another maker's machine using
0: Disabled the SEP (Selective Polling) signal is disabled.
1: Enabled
1 SUB reception 0: Confidential reception to another maker's machine using
0: Disabled the SUB (Sub-address) signal is disabled.
1: Enabled
2 PWD reception 0: Disables features that require PWD (Password) signal
0: Disabled reception.
1: Enabled
4
5 PSTN dial-in routing setting 1: The machine sets multiple PSTN dial-in numbers in the
0: OFF PSTN dial-in line and transfers received data from each
1: ON PSTN dial-in number to each address.
7 Action when there is no box with Change this setting when the customer requires.
an F-code that matches the
received SUB code
0: Disconnect the line
1: Receive the message
(using normal reception mode)

5 IP-Fax dial-in routing selection 1: Transfers received data to each IP-Fax dial-in number.
0: Off IP-Fax dial-in number is a 4-digit number.
1: On

Communication Switch 1A - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1B (SP No. 1-104-028)

D0CK 82 SM
Bit Switches – 3
0- Extension access code If the PABX does not support V.8/V.34 protocol procedure, set this bit
7 (0 to 7) to turn V.8 to "1" to disable V.8.
protocol On/Off Example: If "0" is the PSTN access code, set bit 0 to 1. When the
0: On machine detects "0" as the first dialed number, it automatically
1: Off disables V.8 protocol. (Alternatively, if "3" is the PSTN access code,
set bit 3 to 1.)
Communication Switch 1C (SP No. 1-104-029)

0- Extension access code Refer to communication switch 1B.
1 (8 and 9) to turn V.8 Example: If "8" is the PSTN access code, set bit 0 to 1. When the
protocol On/Off machine detects "8" as the first dialed number, it automatically
0: On disables V.8 protocol. (If "9" is the PSTN access code, use bit 1.)
1: Off
7
Communication Switch 1D - Not used (do not change the settings)

Communication Switch 1E - Not used (do not change the settings)
Communication Switch 1F - Not used (do not change the settings)
SM 83 D0CK
Bit Switches – 4
by the machine.
4.6.1 G3 SWITCHES
G3 Switch 00 (SP No. 1-105-001)
0 Monitor speaker during (0, 0): The monitor speaker is disabled all through the
1 communication (TX and RX) communication.
Bit 1 Bit 0 Setting (0, 1): The monitor speaker is on up to phase B in the T.30
0 0 Disabled protocol.
0 1 Up to Phase B (1, 0): Used for testing. The monitor speaker is on all through
1 0 All the time the communication. Make sure that you reset these bits after
1 1 Not used testing.
2 Monitor speaker during memory 1: The monitor speaker is enabled during memory
transmission transmission.
5
6 Dedicated G3 line mode Set this bit to 1 when you wish to dedicate a line for G3.
selection
0: Off 1: On (Dedicated)
G3 Switch 01 (SP No. 1-105-002)

3
4 DIS frame length 1: The bytes in the DIS frame after the 4th byte will not be transmitted (set
0: 10 bytes 1: 4 to 1 if there are communication problems with PC-based faxes which
bytes cannot receive the extended DIS frames).
D0CK 84 SM
Bit Switches – 4
6 Forbid Do not change this setting (Default: 0: Off), unless communication problem
CED/ANsam is caused by a CED or ANSam transmission.
output
0: Off
1: On (Forbid
output)
G3 Switch 02 (SP No. 1-105-003)

0 G3 protocol mode Change this bit to 1 only when the other end can only communicate with
used machines that send T.30-standard frames only.
0: Standard and 1: Disables NSF/NSS signals (these are used in non-standard mode
non-standard communication)
1: Standard only
6
7 Short preamble Refer to Appendix B in the Group 3 Facsimile Manual for details about
0: Disabled 1: Short Preamble.
Enabled
G3 Switch 03 (SP No. 1-105-004)

0 DIS detection number 0: The machine will hang up if it receives the same DIS frame
(Echo countermeasure) twice.
0: 1 1: Before sending DCS, the machine will wait for the second
1: 2 DIS which is caused by echo on the line.
1- Not Used Do not change the settings.
2
3 ECM frame size Keep this bit at "0" in most cases.
0: 256 bytes
1: 64 bytes
4 CTC transmission conditions 0: When using ECM in non-standard (NSF/NSS) mode, the
0: After one PPR signal machine sends a CTC to drop back the modem rate after
received receiving a PPR, if the following condition is met in
1: After four PPR signals communications at 14.4, 12.0, 9.6, and 7.2 kbps.
received (ITU-T standard)
SM 85 D0CK
Bit Switches – 4
NTransmit- Number of transmitted frames

NResend- Number of frames to be retransmitted
1: When using ECM, the machine sends a CTC to drop back
the modem rate after receiving four PPRs.
PPR, CTC: These are ECM protocol signals.
This bit is not effective in V.34 communications.
5 Modem rate used for the next 1: The machine's TX modem rate will fall back before sending
page after receiving a the next page if a negative code is received. This bit is ignored
negative code (RTN or PIN) if ECM is being used.
0: No change 1: Fallback
6 Not used Do not change the settings
7 Select detection of reverse This switch is used to prevent reverse polarity in ringing on the
polarity in ringing phone line (applied to PSTN-G3 ringing). Do not change this
0: Off setting
1: On 0: No detection
1: Detection (Japan and Korea only)
G3 Switch 04 (SP No. 1-105-005)

0- Training error 0 - F (Hex); 0 - 15 bits
3 detection threshold If the number of error bits in the received TCF is below this threshold,
the machine informs the sender that training has succeeded.
7
G3 Switch 05 (SP No. 1-105-006)

0- Initial TX modem rate (kbps) These bits set the initial starting modem rate for
3 Bit 3 Bit Bit Bit 0 kbps transmission.
2 1 Use the dedicated transmission parameters if you need to
0 0 0 1 2.4 change this for specific receivers.
0 0 1 0 4.8 If a modem rate 14.4 kbps or slower is selected, V.8
0 0 1 1 7.2 protocol should be disabled manually.
0 1 0 0 9.6 Cross reference
0 1 0 1 12.0 V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit 2
0 1 1 0 14.4
0 1 1 1 16.8
1 0 0 0 19.2
D0CK 86 SM
Bit Switches – 4
1 0 0 1 21.6
1 0 1 0 24.0
1 0 1 1 26.4
1 1 0 0 28.8
1 1 0 1 31.2
1 1 1 0 33.6
Other settings - Not used
4- Initial modem type for 9.6 k or 7.2 These bits set the initial modem type for 9.6 and 7.2 kbps, if
5 kbps. the initial modem rate is set at these speeds.
Bit 5 Bit Setting
4
0 0 V.29
0 1 V.17
1 0 V.34
1 1 Not used
7
G3 Switch 06 (SP No. 1-105-007)

0- Initial Rx modem rate(kbps) These bits set the initial starting modem rate for
3 Bit 3 Bit Bit Bit kbps reception.
2 1 0 Use a lower setting if high speeds pose problems
0 0 0 1 2.4 during reception.
0 0 1 0 4.8 If a modem rate 14.4 kbps or slower is selected,
0 0 1 1 7.2 V.8 protocol should be disabled manually.
0 1 0 0 9.6 Cross reference
0 1 0 1 12.0 V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit2
0 1 1 0 14.4
0 1 1 1 16.8
1 0 0 0 19.2
1 0 0 1 21.6
1 0 1 0 24.0
1 0 1 1 26.4
1 1 0 0 28.8
1 1 0 1 31.2
1 1 1 0 33.6
SM 87 D0CK
Bit Switches – 4

4- Modem types available for reception
7 The setting of these bits is used to inform the transmitting terminal of the available modem type
for the machine in receive mode.
If V.34 is not selected, V.8 protocol must be disabled manually.
Cross reference
V.8 protocol on/off - G3 switch 03, bit 2
Bit 7 Bit Bit Bit Types
6 5 4
0 0 0 1 V.27ter
0 0 1 0 V.27ter, V.29
0 0 1 1 V.27ter, V.29, V.33
0 1 0 0 V.27ter, V.29, V.17
0 1 0 1 V.27ter, V.29, V.17, V.34
G3 Switch 07 (SP No. 1-105-008)

0- PSTN cable equalizer Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher frequencies
1 (TX mode: Internal) because of the length of wire between the modem and the telephone
Bit Bit Setting exchange.
1 0 Use the dedicated transmission parameters for specific receivers.
0 0 None Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of the following
0 1 Low symptoms occurs.
1 0 Medium Communication error
1 1 High Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.
• This setting is not effective in V.34 communications.

2- PSTN cable equalizer Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher frequencies
3 (rx mode: Internal) because of the length of wire between the modem and the telephone
Bit Bit Setting exchange.
3 2 Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of the following
0 0 None symptoms occurs.
0 1 Low Communication error with error codes such as 0-20, 0-23, etc.
1 0 Medium Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.
1 1 High
• This setting is not effective in V.34 communications.
4 PSTN cable equalizer Keep this bit at "1".
D0CK 88 SM
Bit Switches – 4
(V.8/V.17 rx mode:
External)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
6 Parameter selection 0: This uses the fixed table in the ROM for dial tone detection.
for dial tone 1: This uses the specific parameter adjusted with SRAM (69ECBEH -
detection 69ECDEH). Select this if the dial tone cannot be detected when the
0: Normal parameter "Normal parameter: 0" is selected.
1: Specific parameter
G3 Switch 08 - Not used (do not change the settings)

G3 Switch 09 - Not used (do not change the settings)
G3 Switch 0A (SP No. 1-105-011)

0- Maximum allowable These bits set the acceptable modem carrier drop time.
1 carrier drop during image Try a longer setting if error code 0-22 is frequent.
data reception
Bit 1 Bit 0 Value
(ms)
0 0 200
0 1 400
1 0 800
1 1 Not used
2 Select cancellation of This switch setting determines if high-speed receiving ends if the
high-speed RX if carrier carrier signal is lost when receiving during non-ECM mode
signal lost while receiving
0: Off
1: On
3 Not used Do not change the settings
4 Maximum allowable This bit set the maximum interval between EOL (end-of-line) signals
frame interval during and the maximum interval between ECM frames from the other
image data reception. end.
0: 5s 1: 13s Try using a longer setting if error code 0-21 is frequent.
SM 89 D0CK
Bit Switches – 4
6 Reconstruction time for When the sending terminal is controlled by a computer, there may
the first line in receive be a delay in receiving page data after the local machine accepts
mode set-up data and sends CFR. This is outside the T.30
0: 6s 1: 12s recommendation. But, if this delay occurs, set this bit to 1 to give
the sending machine more time to send data.
Refer to error code 0-20.
ITU-T T.30 recommendation: The first line should come within 5 s of
CFR.
G3 Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings).
G3 Switch 0C (SP No. 1-105-013)

3
4- Select detection of DTMF/DP detection This setting determines how to detect the signals
5 when using remote switch. from the handset when remote switch is active.
00: DTMF+PSTN (Simultaneous
detection)
01: DTMF
10: DP (10 PPPS)
11: DP (20 PPS)
7
G3 Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings).
G3 Switch 0E (SP No. 1-105-015)

0- Set CNG send time interval
7 Some machines on the receiving side may not be able to automatically switch the 3-second
CNG interval.
High order bit 3000-2250ms: 3000-50xNms
3000 – 50 x Nms 0F (3000 ms) <= N <= FF (2250 ms)
Low order bit 00-0E(3000-3700ms: 3000+50xNms
3000 – 50 x Nms 0F (3000 ms) <= N <= 0F (3700 ms)
D0CK 90 SM
Bit Switches – 4
G3 Switch 0F (SP No. 1-105-016)

0 Alarm when an error occurred in If the customer wants to hear an alarm after each error
Phase C or later communication, change this bit to "1".
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
1 Alarm when the handset is off-hook If the customer wants to hear an alarm if the handset is
at the end of communication off-hook at the end of fax communication, change this bit
0: Disabled to "1".
1: Enabled
3
4 Sidaa manual calibration setting 1: manually calibrates for communication with a line
0: Off whose current change occurs such as an optical fiber line.
1: On
7
SM 91 D0CK
Bit Switches – 5
by the machine.
4.7.1 IP FAX SWITCHES

IP Fax Switch 00 (SP No. 1-111-001)
No. Function Comments
1 IP Fax Transport Selects TCP or UDP protocol for IP-Fax
0: TCP, 1: UDP
2 IP Fax single port Selects single data port.
selection
0: OFF, 1: ON
(enable)
3 IP Fax double ports Selects whether IP-Fax uses a double port.
(single data port)
selection
0: OFF, 1: ON
(enable)
4 IP Fax Gatekeeper Enables/disables the gatekeeper for IP-Fax.
0: OFF, 1: ON
(enable)
5 IP Fax T30 bit signal Reverses the T30 bit signal.
reverse
0: LSB first, 1: MSB
first
6 IP Fax max bit rate When "0" is selected, the max bit rate does not affect the value of the
setting DIS/DCS.
0: Not affected, 1: When "1" is selected, the max bit rate affects the value of the
Affected DIS/DCS.
7 IP Fax received When "0" is selected, fax data is received without checking the
telephone number telephone number.
confirmation When "1" is selected, fax data is received only when confirming that
D0CK 92 SM
Bit Switches – 5
0: No confirmation, 1: the telephone number from the sender matches the registered
Confirmation telephone number in this machine. If this confirmation fails, the line is
disconnected.

0-3 IP Fax delay level setting
Selects the acceptable delay level.
Level 0 is the highest quality
Default is "0000" (level 0).
Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
0 0 0 0 Level 0
0 0 0 1 Level 1
0 0 1 0 Level 2
0 0 1 1 Level 3
4-7 IP Fax preamble wait time setting Selects the preamble wait time.
[00 to 0f]
There are 16 values in this 4-bit binary switch combination.
Waiting time: set value level x 100 ms
Max: 0f (1500 ms) Min: 00 (No wait time)
The default is "0000" (00H).

0 IP Fax bit signal reverse setting When "0" is selected, the bit signal reverse method is
0: Maker code setting decided by the maker code.
1: Internal bit switch setting When "1" is selected, the bit signal reverse method is
decided by the internal bit switch.
When communicating between IP Fax devices, LSB first is
selected.)
1 IP Fax transmission speed Selects the transmit speed for IP Fax communication.
setting
0: Modem speed
1: No limitation
2 SIP transport setting This bit switch sets the transport that has priority for
0: TCP receiving IP Fax data.
1: UDP This function is activated only when the sender has both
TCP and UDP.
SM 93 D0CK
Bit Switches – 5
3 CCM connection When "1" is selected, only the connection call message with
0: No CCM connection H.323 or no tunneled H.245 is transmitted via CCM.
1: CCM connection
4 Message reception selection 0: This answers the INVITE message from the SIP server
from non-registered SIP server not registered for the machine.
0: Answer 1: This does not receive the INVITE message from the SIP
1: Not answer server not registered for the machine and send a refusal
message.
5 ECM communication setting 0: This does not limit the type of the image compression
0: No limit for image with ECM communication.
compression 1: When the other end machine is Cisco, this permits the
1: Limit for image compression image compression other than JBIG or MMR with ECM
communication.
6-7 Not used Do not change these settings.

0 Effective field limitation for G3 Limits the effective field for standard G3 function
standard function information information.
0: OFF, 1: 4byte (DIS)
1 Switching between G3 standard and Enables/disables switching between G3 standard and
G3 nonstandard G3 non-standard.
0: Enable switching
1: G3 standard only
3 ECM frame size selection at Selects the ECM frame size for sending.
transmitting
0: 256byte, 1: 64byte
4 DIS detection times for echo Sets the number of times for DIS to detect echoes.
prevention
0: 1 time, 1: 2 times
5 CTC transmission selection When "0" is selected, the transmission condition is
0: PPRx1 decided by error frame numbers.
1: PPRx4 When "1" is selected, the transmission condition is
based on the ITU-T method.
6 Shift down setting at receiving Selects whether to shift down when negative codes
negative code are received.
0: OFF, 1: ON
D0CK 94 SM
Bit Switches – 5

0-3 TCF error threshold Sets the TCF error threshold level. [00 to 0f]
The default is "1111" (0fH).

0-3 Modem bit rate setting for transmission Sets the modem bit rate for transmission. The
(kbps) default is "0110" (14.4K bps).
Bit 3 Bit Bit 1 Bit kbps
2 0
0 0 0 1 2.4
0 0 1 1 4.8
0 0 1 1 7.2
0 1 0 0 9.6
0 1 0 1 12.0
0 1 1 0 14.4
4-5 Modem setting for transmission Sets the modem type for transmission.
Bit 5 Bit 4 Types The default is "00" (V29).
0 0 V29
0 1 V17
1 0 Not used
1 1 Not used

0-3 Modem bit rate setting for reception
Sets the modem bit rate for reception. The default is "0110" (14.4K bps).
4-7 Modem setting for reception
Sets the modem type for reception. The default is "0100" (V27ter, V29, V17).
Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Types
0 0 0 1 V.27ter
0 0 1 0 V.27ter, V.29
SM 95 D0CK
Bit Switches – 5
0 0 1 1 V.27ter, V.29, V.33

0 1 0 0 V.27ter, V.29, V.17/V.33

0 TSI information Adds or does not add TSI information to NSS(S).
0: Not added, 1: Added
1 DCN transmission setting at T1 timeout Transmits or does not transmit DCN at T1 timeout.
0: Not transmitted
1: Transmitted
3 Hang up setting at DIS reception disabled Sets whether the machine disconnects after DIS
0: No hang up reception.
1: Hang up after transmitting DCN
4 Number of times for training Selects the number of times training is done at the
0: 1 time, 1: 2 times same bit rate.
5 Space CSI transmission setting at no CSI When "0" is selected, frame data is enabled.
registration When "1" is selected, the transmitted data is all
0: Not transmitted spaces.
1: Transmitted

0-1 T1 timer adjustment Adjusts the T1 timer.
Bit 1 Bit 0 The default is "00" (35 seconds).
0 0 35s
0 1 40s
1 0 50s
1 1 60s
2-3 T4 timer adjustment Adjust the T4 timer.
Bit 3 Bit 2 The default is "00" (3 seconds).
0 0 3s
0 1 3.5s
1 0 4s
1 1 5s
4-5 T0 timer adjustment Adjusts the fail-safe timer. This timer sets the interval between "setup"
D0CK 96 SM
Bit Switches – 5
Bit 5 Bit 4 data transmission and T.38 phase decision. If your destination return is
0 0 75s late on the network or G3 fax return is late, adjust the longer interval
0 1 120s timer.
1 0 180s The default is "00" (75 seconds).
1 1 240s

0 Network I/F setting for SIP Selects the connection type (IPV4 or IPV6) to connect to the
connection SIP server.
0: IPv4
1: IPv6.
1 Network I/F setting for Fax 0: The I/F setting for fax communication follows the setting
communication for SIP server connection.
0: Same setting as SIP server 1: The negotiation between the SIP server and the device
connection decides whether IPv4 or IPv6 is used for the I/F setting for
1: Automatic setting fax communication.
2 Record-route setting 0: Disables the record-route function of the SIP server.
0: Disable 1: Enables the record-route function of the SIP server.
1: Enable
3-4 re-INVITE transmission delay This changes the interval for transmit re-INVITE after
timer setting receiving the ACK message transmitted by T.38 device.
Bit 4 Bit 3
0 0 No delay
0 1 1 sec
1 0 2 sec
1 1 3 sec
5 SIP-IPFAX: Adding vender 0: Use this setting normally.
information selection 1: This setting is used only when a customer wants to
0: Declare connect the machine with SIP server + VOIP-GW provided
T38VendorInfo=RICOH by AVAYA Inc.
1: Not declare
T38VendorInfo=RICOH
6-7 Not used. Do not change these settings.
IP Fax Switch 0A - Not used (do not change the settings)

IP Fax Switch 0B - Not used (do not change the settings)
SM 97 D0CK
Bit Switches – 5
IP Fax Switch 0C - Not used (do not change the settings)

IP Fax Switch 0D - Not used (do not change the settings)
IP Fax Switch 0E (SP No. 1-111-013)

0-1 SIP: IP-FAX port mode Switch the port mode for IP-FAX (T38 transport: UDP) at SIP call
(UDP) control.
00: 3 port mode
01: 2 port mode
10: 1 port mode
2-3 SIP: IP-FAX port mode Switch the port mode for IP-FAX (T38 transport: TCP) at SIP call
(TCP) control.
00: 3 port mode
01: 2 port mode
10: 1 port mode
4-7 Not used. Do not change these settings.
D0CK 98 SM
NCU Parameters
4.8 NCU PARAMETERS
The following tables give the RAM addresses and the parameter calculation units that the machine
uses for ringing signal detection and automatic dialing. The factory settings for each country are also
given. Most of these must be changed by RAM read/write (SP2-102), but some can be changed using
NCU Parameter programming (SP2-103, 104 and 105); if SP2-103, 104 and 105 can be used, this will
be indicated in the Remarks column. The RAM is programmed in hex code unless (BCD) is included in
the Unit column.
• The following addresses describe settings for the standard NCU.

# RAM Function Remarks
Addr.
CC 680500 Country/Area code for Use the Hex value to program the country/area code
NCU parameters directly into this address, or use the decimal value to
program it using SP2-103-001
Country Code List
Country/Area Decimal Hex Country/Area Decimal Hex

France 00 00 Asia 18 12
Germany 01 01 Japan 19 13
UK 02 02 Hong Kong 20 14
Italy 03 03 South Africa 21 15
Austria 04 04 Australia 22 16
Belgium 05 05 New Zealand 26 17
Denmark 06 06 Singapore 24 18
Finland 07 07 Malaysia 25 19
Ireland 08 08 China 26 1A
Norway 09 09 Taiwan 27 1B
Sweden 10 0A Korea 28 1C
Switzerland 11 0B Brazil 29 1D
# RAM Function Unit Remarks

Addr.
01 6805B4 PSTN: TX level from the modem -N – 3 SP2-103-002
dBm
02 680572 Acceptable ringing signal frequency: 1000/ N SP2-103-003
range 1, upper limit (Hz).
SM 99 D0CK
NCU Parameters
03 680573 Acceptable ringing signal frequency: SP2-103-004

range 1, lower limit
range 2, upper limit
range 2, lower limit
06 680576 Number of rings until a call is 1 SP2-103-007
detected The setting must not be zero.
07 680577 Minimum required length of the first 20 ms See Note B.
ring SP2-103-008
08 680578 Minimum required length of the 20 ms SP2-103-009
second and subsequent rings
09 680579 Ringing signal detection reset time 20 ms SP2-103-010
(LOW)
10 68057A Ringing signal detection reset time SP2-103-011
(HIGH)
11 68054A Time between opening or closing the 1 ms See Notes A, D and E. SP2-103-
DO relay and opening the OHDI relay 012
12 68054B Break time for pulse dialing 1 ms See Note A.
SP2-103-013
13 68054C Make time for pulse dialing 1 ms See Note A.
SP2-103-014
14 68054D Time between final OHDI relay 1 ms EU only.
closure and DO relay opening or SP2-103-015
closing See Notes A, D and E.
15 68054E Minimum pause between dialed digits 20 ms See Note A and E. SP2-103-016
(pulse dial mode)
16 68054F Time waited when a pause is entered SP2-103-017
at the operation panel See Note A.
17 680550 DTMF tone on time 1 ms SP2-103-018
18 680551 DTMF tone off time SP2-103-019
19 680552 Tone attenuation level of DTMF -N x 0.5 SP2-103-020
signals while dialing –3.5 See Note C.
dBm
20 680553 Tone attenuation value difference -dBm x SP2-103-021
between high frequency tone and low 0.5 The setting must be less than –
frequency tone in DTMF signals 5dBm, and should not exceed
the setting at 680552h above.
D0CK 100 SM
NCU Parameters
See Note C.
21 680554 PSTN: DTMF tone attenuation level -N x 0.5 SP2-103-022
after dialling –3.5 See Note C.
dBm
22 680555 ISDN: DTMF tone attenuation level -dBm x SP2-103-023
after dialling 0.5 See Note C.
• A: Pulse dial parameters (addresses 68054A to 68054F) are the values for 10 pps. If 20 pps is
used, the machine automatically compensates.
• B: The first ring may not be detected until 1 to 2.5 wavelengths after the time specified by this
parameter.
• C: The calculated level must be between 0 and 10.
The attenuation levels calculated from RAM data are:
High frequency tone:
– 0.5 x N680552/680554–3.5 dBm
– 0.5 x N680555 dBm
Low frequency tone:
– 0.5 x (N680552/680554 + N680553) –3.5 dBm
– 0.5 x (N680555 + N680553) dBm
*Note: N680552, for example, means the value stored in address 680552(H)
• D: 68054A: Europe - Between Ds opening and Di opening, France - Between Ds closing and
Di opening
68054D: Europe - Between Ds closing and Di closing, France - Between Ds opening and Di
closing
• E: 68054A, 68054D, 68054E: The actual inter-digit pause (pulse dial mode) is the sum of the
period specified by the RAM addresses 68054A, 68054D, and 68054E.
SM 101 D0CK
Service RAM Addresses
4.9 SERVICE RAM ADDRESSES
• Do not change the settings that are marked as “Not used” or “Read only.”
680001 to 680004(H) - ROM version (Read only)
680001(H) - Revision number (BCD)
680002(H) - Year (BCD)
680003(H) - Month (BCD)
680004(H) - Day (BCD)
680006 to 680015(H) - Machine’s serial number (16 digits - ASCII)
680016(H) - Language code
0: Japanese, 1: UK English, 2: US English, 3: French, 4: German, 5: Spanish, 6: Italian, 7: Dutch, 8:
Swedish, 9: Norwegian, 10: Danish, 11: Finnish, 12: Czech, 13: Hungarian, 14: Polish, 15: Portuguese,
16: Russian, 17: Traditional Chinese, 18: Simplified Chinese, 19: Korean
680018(H) - Total program checksum (low)
680019(H) - Total program checksum (high)
680020 to 68003F(H) - System bit switches
680050 to 68005F(H) - Printer bit switches
680060 to 68007F(H) - Communication bit switches
680080 to 68008F(H) - G3 bit switches
680090 to 68009F(H) - G3-2 bit switches: Not used
6800A0 to 6800AF(H) - G3-3 bit switches: Not used
6800D0(H) - User parameter switch 00 (SWUER_00): Not used
6800D1(H) - User parameter switch 01 (SWUSR_01): Not used
6800D2(H) - User parameter switch 02 (SWUSR_02)
Bit 0: Forwarding mark printing on forwarded messages 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 1: Center mark printing on received copies
(This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.)
Bit 2: Reception time printing
Bit 3: TSI print on received messages 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 4: Checkered mark printing
Bit 5: Not used
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7: Not used
D0CK 102 SM
6800D3(H) - User parameter switch 03 (SWUSR_03: Automatic report printout)

Bit 0: Transmission result report (memory transmissions) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: Not used
Bit 2: Memory storage report 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 3: Polling reserve report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 4: Polling result report (polling reception) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 5: Transmission result report (immediate transmissions) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7: Journal 0: Off, 1: On
6800D4(H) - User parameter switch 04 (SWUSR_04: Automatic report printout)
Bit 0: Not used
Bit 1: Automatic communication failure report and transfer result report output 0: Off, 1: On
Bits 2 to 3: Not used
Bit 4: Indicates the parties 0: Not indicated, 1: Indicated
Bit 5: Include sender’s name on reports 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7: Inclusion of a sample image on reports 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 0: Substitute reception when the base copier is in an SC condition
0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
Bits 1 and 2: Condition for substitute RX when the machine cannot print messages (Paper end, toner
end, jam, and during night mode)
Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 0 = The machine receives all the fax messages.
Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 1 = The machine receives the fax messages with RTI or CSI.
Bit 2: 1, Bit 1: 0 = The machine receives the fax messages with the same ID code.
Bit 2: 1, Bit 1: 1 = The machine does not receive anything.
Bit 3: Not used
Bit 4: Not used
Bit 5: Just size printing 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Not used
Bit 7: Add paper display when a cassette is empty 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 0:
Bit 1: V8 protocol (G3-1: Super G3) 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 0 Ringing 0: Off, 1: On
SM 103 D0CK
Bit1: Automatic answering message 0: Off, 1: On

Bit 2: Parallel memory transmission 0: Off, 1: On
Bits 3 and 4: Not used
Bit 5: Remote control 0: Off, 1: On
Bits 0 and 1: Not used.
Bit 2: Authorized reception
0: Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are specified for this feature are accepted.
1: Only faxes from senders whose RTIs/CSIs are not specified for this feature are accepted.
Bits 3 to 7: Not used.
6800D9(H) - User parameter switch 09 (SWUSR_09): Not used
6800DA(H) - User parameter switch 10 (SWUSR_0A)
Bit 3: Page reduction 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 6: Use both e-mail notification and printed reports to confirm the transmission results 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 7: Not used
6800DB(H) - User parameter switch 11 (SWUSR_0B)
Bit 2: White original detection 0: Off, 1: On (alarm and alert message on the LCD)
Bit 3: Receive rejection for 1300 Hz transmission 0: Off (receive), 1: On (not receive)
Bit 5: Not used
Bit 6: Printout of messages received while acting as a forwarding station 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 7: Not used
6800DC(H) - User parameter switch 12 (SWUSR_0C): Not used
6800DD(H) - User parameter switch 13 (SWUSR_0D): Not used
6800DE(H) - User parameter switch 14 (SWUSR_0E)
Bit 0: Message printout while the machine is in Night Printing mode 0: On, 1: Off
Bit 1: Maximum document length detection 0: Double letter, 1: Longer than double-letter (well log) – up
to 1,200 mm
Bit 2: Not used
Bit 3: Fax mode settings, such as resolution, before a mode key (Copy/Fax/Printer/Scanner) is pressed
0: Not cleared, 1: Cleared
Bit 7: Not used
6800DF(H) - User parameter switch 15 (SWUSR_0F)
Bits 0, 1 and 2: Cassette for fax printout
D0CK 104 SM
Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = 1st paper feed station

Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 0 = 2nd paper feed station
Bit 2: 0, Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 1 = 3rd paper feed station
Bit 2: 1, Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 = 4th paper feed station
Bit 2: 1, Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = LCT
Other settings Not used
Bit 5: Using the cassette specified by bits 0, 1 and 2 above only 0: On, 1: Off
6800E0(H) – User parameter switch 16 (SWUSR_10)
Bit 2: Paper size selection priority for an A4 size fax message when A4/LT size paper is not available. 0:
A3 has priority, 1: B4 has priority
6800E1(H) – User parameter switch 17 (SWUSR_11)
Bit 0: Not used
Bit 1: Not used
Bit 2: Inclusion of the “Add” button when a sequence of Quick/Speed dials is selected for broadcasting
0: Not needed, 1: Needed
Bit 7: Press “Start” key without an original when using the on hook dial or the external telephone,
0: displays “Cannot detect original size”. 1: Receives fax messages.
6800E2(H) - User parameter switch 18 (SWUSR_12)
Bit 0: TTI date 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: TTI sender 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 2: TTI file number 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 3: TTI page number 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 7: Japan only
Bit 0: Not used
Bit 1: Journal format
0: The Journal is separated into transmissions and receptions
1: The Journal is separated into G3-1, G3-2, and G3-3 communications
Bit 2: Not used
Bit 3: 90° image rotation during B5 portrait TX (This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.) 0:
Off, 1: On
SM 105 D0CK
Bit 4: Reduction of sample images on reports to 50% in the main scan and sub-scan directions. (This
switch is not printed on the user parameter list.) 0: Technician adjustment (printer switch 0E bits 3 and
4), 1: 50% reduction
Bit 5: Use of A5 size paper for reports (This switch is not printed on the user parameter list.) 0: Off, 1:
On
Bit 0: Automatic printing of the LAN fax result report 0: Off, 1: On
Bit 1: Not used.
Bits 2 to 5: Store documents in memory, which could not be printed from PC fax (LAN fax) driver
Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Setting
0 0 0 0 0 min.
0 0 0 1 1 min.
1 1 1 0 14 min.
1 1 1 1 15 min.
Bits 6 and 7: Not used.
Bit 0: Print results of sending reception notice request message 0: Disabled (print only when error
occurs), 1: Enabled
Bit 1: Respond to e-mail reception acknowledgment request 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 2: Not used
Bit 3: File format for forwarded folders 0: TIFF, 1: PDF
Bit 4: Transmit Journal by E-mail 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 5: Not used
Bit 6: Network error display 0: Displayed, 1: Not displayed
Bit 7: Transmit error mail notification 0: Enabled, 1: Disabled
Bit 0: Dial tone detection (PSTN 1) 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
6800E7(H) – User parameter switch 23 (SWUSR_17): Not used
6800E8(H) - User parameter switch 24 (SWUSR_18): Not used
Bit 0: Not used
Bit 1: Reception mode switch timer 0: Off, 1: On (switching Fax or Fax/Tel)
Bit 2: Mode priority switch 0: Fax first, 1: Tel first
Bit 3: Dial in function (Japan Only)
Bit 4: Do not Change this Bit.
D0CK 106 SM

6800EA(H) and 6800EB(H) - User parameter switches 26 and 27 (SWUSR_1A and 1B): Not used
6800EC(H) - User parameter switch 28(SWUSR_1C): Not used
6800ED(H) - User parameter switch 29(SWUSR_1D): Not used
6800EE(H) and 6800EF(H) - User parameter switches 30 and 31 (SWUSR_1E and 1F): Not used
6800F0(H) - User parameter switch 32 (SWUSR_20)
Bit 0: Quotation priority for a destination when there is no destination of the specified type
0: Paper output priority = Priority order: 1. IP-fax destination, 2. Fax Number, 3. E-mail address, 4.
Folder
1: Electric output order = Priority order: 1. E-mail address, 2. Folder, 3. IP-fax destination, 4. Fax
number
6800F1(H) - User parameter switch 33 (SWUSR_21): Not used
Bit 0: Gatekeeper server used with IP-Fax 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 1: SIP server used with IP-Fax 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Redial interval when sending a backup file
Maximum number of redials when sending a backup file
Bit 0: Whether to stop sending a backup file if the destination folder becomes full while the machine is
sending or waiting to send a fax or the backup file. 0: No, • 1: Yes
Bit 2 and 3: Backup file is printed along with the TX communication failure report when a backup file
transmission failure occurs. 00: Do not print, 01: Print first page only, 10: Print whole file
Bit 4: Display the sender's information in the file name of documents that are forwarded to folder
destinations. 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 5: Limit the file names of documents that are forwarded to folder destinations to plain characters
only. 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 6: When using the remote fax function, the sub-machine beeps to let you know when it has printed a
received document (If you specify "On", the machine will beep according to the setting of [Panel Key
Sound] under [System Settings].) 0: On, 1: Off
Bit 7: Not used
Maximum number of transmissions the machine attempts before determining that a fax cannot be
forwarded from a sender (including special senders) to a folder destination
SM 107 D0CK
Interval (in minutes) between resend attempts after failing to forward a fax from a sender (including
special senders) to a folder destination
Bit 0: When memory space is insufficient, the machine prints and then deletes the oldest faxes, creating
memory space for storage of new faxes. 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
Bit 1 to 7: Not used
6800FD(H) - User parameter switch 45 (SWUSR_2D)
Bit 0 and 1:
Bit 2: File format for files transmitted to e-mail addresses and folders registered as forwarding,
destinations of backup file transmission, receivers for Personal Box, or end receivers for Transfer Box.
0: PDF 1: PDF/A
Bit 3:
Bit 4 to 7: Not used
680100 to 68010F(H) - G4 Parameter Switches – Not used
680110 to 68012F(H) - G4 Internal Switches – Not used
680130 to 68016F(H) - Service Switches
680170 to 68017F(H) - IFAX Switches
680180 to 68018F(H) - IP-FAX Switches
680190 to 6801A3(H) - PSTN-1 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII) - See the following note.
6801A4 to 6801B7(H) - PSTN-2 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII)
6801B8 to 6801CB(H) - PSTN-3 RTI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII)
6801CF to 68020E(H) - TTI 1 (Max. 64 characters - ASCII) - See the following note.
68020F to 68024E(H) - TTI 2
68024F to 68028E(H) - TTI 3
68028F to 6802CE(H) - TTI 4
6802CF to 68030E(H) - TTI 5
68030F to 68034E(H) - TTI 6
68034F to 68038E(H) - TTI 7
68038F to 6803CE(H) - TTI 8
6803CF to 68040E(H) - TTI 9
68040F to 68044E(H) - TTI 10
• If the number of characters is less than the maximum (20 for RTI, 32 for TTI), add a stop code
(00[H]) after the last character.
68044F(H)
Printing format for TTI 1
0: DOM (Japan), 1:EXP (Export)
680450(H)
D0CK 108 SM
0: DOM, 1: EXP
680451(H)
0: DOM, 1:EXP
680452(H)
0: DOM, 1:EXP
680453(H)
0: DOM, 1:EXP
680454(H)
0: DOM, 1:EXP
680455(H)
0: DOM, 1:EXP
680456(H)
0: DOM, 1:EXP
680457(H)
0: DOM, 1:EXP
680458(H)
0: DOM, 1: EXP
680459 to 68046C(H) - PSTN-1 CSI (Max. 20 characters - ASCII)
68046D to 680480(H) - PSTN-2 CSI (Max.20 characters - ASCII)
680481 to 680494(H) - PSTN-3 CSI (Max.20 characters - ASCII)
680495(H) - Number of PSTN-1 CSI characters (Hex)
6804C6(H) - Memory Lock ID (BCD)
6804D2 to 6804D9(H) - Last power off time (Read only)
6804D2(H) - 01(H) - 24-hour clock, 00(H) - 12-hour clock (AM), 02(H) - 12-hour clock (PM)
6804D3(H) - Year (BCD)
6804D4(H) - Month (BCD)
6804D5(H) - Day (BCD)
6804D6 (H) – Hour
SM 109 D0CK
6804D7 (H) – Minute

6804D8(H) – Second
6804D8 (H) - 00: Monday, 01: Tuesday, 02: Wednesday, ///, 06: Sunday
6804E6(H) - Optional equipment (Read only – Do not change the settings)
Bit 0: Page Memory 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 1: SAF Memory (4M) 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 2: SAF Memory 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bits 3 to 7; Not used
6804E7(H) - Optional equipment (Read only – Do not change the settings)
Bit 4: G3-2 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 5: G3-3 0: Not installed, 1: Installed
Bit 6 and 7: Not used
6804EE(H) - Machine code (Check ram 3)
680500(H) - Start address of G3 table for G3-1
680800 to 68081F(H) - Service station’s fax number (SP3-101)
680820 to 680829(H) - Own fax PABX extension number – Not used
68082A to 680833(H) - Own fax number (PSTN) – Not used
680834 to 680847(H) - Own fax number (ISDN G4) – Not used
680848 to 680853(H) - The first subscriber number (ISDN G3) – Not used
680854 to 68085F(H) - The second subscriber number (ISDN G3) – Not used
680860 to 68086B(H) - The first subscriber number (ISDN G4) – Not used
68086C to 680877(H) - The second subscriber number (ISDN G4) – Not used
6808A0 to 6808B7(H) - G4 TID registered information (Max.24 characters - ASCII)
6808B8 to 6808CB(H) - ISDN CSI (Max.20 characters - ASCII)
6808CC(H) - Number of ISDN CSI characters (Hex)
6808D1 to 6808D4(H) - ISDN G3 sub address registered information
6808D5 to 6808D8(H) - G4 sub address registered information
6808DE to 6808E2 – Option G3 board (G3-2) ROM information (Read only)
6808DE(H) - Suffix (BCD)
6808DF(H) - Version (BCD)
6808E0(H) - Year (BCD)
6808E1(H) - Month (BCD)
6808E2(H) - Day (BCD)
6808E3 to 6808E7 – Option G3 board (G3-3) ROM information (Read only)
6808E3(H) - Suffix (BCD)
6808E4(H) - Version (BCD)
D0CK 110 SM
6808E5(H) - Year (BCD)

6808E6(H) - Month (BCD)
6808E7(H) - Day (BCD)
6808E8(H) - G3-1 Modem ROM version (Read only)
6808EA(H) - G3-2 Modem ROM version (Read only)
6808EC(H) - G3-3 Modem ROM version (Read only)
6808F8(H) - Number of multiple sets print (Read only)
68094E(H) - Time for economy transmission (Not used)
68094F(H) - Time for economy transmission (Not used)
68096A(H) - Transmission monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
68096B(H) - Reception monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
68096C(H) - On-hook monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
68096D(H) - Dialing monitor volume 00 - 07(H)
68096E(H) - Buzzer volume 00 - 07(H)
68096F(H) - Beeper volume 00 - 07(H)
680980(H) - Machine code (Check ram 4)
680982(H) - Machine serial number (ASCII)
687178 to 68717B(H) - Transmission counter (Max.24 characters - ASCII)
68717C to 68717F(H) - Reception counter (Max.24 characters - ASCII)
6871E8 to 6871EB(H) - Mail transmission counter (Max.24 characters - ASCII)
6871EC to 6871EF(H) - Mail reception counter (Max.24 characters - ASCII)
6A6DEE(H) to 6A70ED(H) - SIP server address (Read only)
6A6DEE(H) - Proxy server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
6A6E6E(H) - Proxy server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
6A6EEE(H) - Redirect server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
6A6F6E(H) - Redirect server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
6A6FEE(H) - Registrar server - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
6A706E(H) - Registrar server - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
6A70EE(H) - Gatekeeper server address - Main (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
6A716E(H) - Gatekeeper server address - Sub (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
6A71EE(H) - Alias Number (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
6A726E(H) - SIP user name (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
6A72EE(H) - SIP digest authentication password (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
6A736E(H) - Gateway address information (Max. 7100 characters - ASCII)
6A8F2A(H) - NGN initial setting method 0: Simple, 1: Manual
6A8F2B(H) - SIP digest authentication user name (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
6A8FAB(H) - NGN-SIP domain name (Max. 64 characters - ASCII)
6A8FEB(H) - NGN-home gateway address (Max. 128 characters - ASCII)
SM 111 D0CK
6A906C(H) - Stand-by port number for H.323 connection

6A906E(H) - Stand-by port number for SIP connection
6A9070(H) - RAS port number
6A9072(H) - Gatekeeper port number
6A9074(H) - Port number of data waiting for T.38
6A9076(H) - Port number of SIP server
6A9078(H) - Priority for SIP and H.323 0: H.323, 1: SIP
6A9079(H) - SIP function 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
6A907A(H) - H.323 function 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
6A907B(H) - SIP digest authentication function 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled
6B3AE4(H) - 6B3B04 (H) - Dial tone detection parameter (Max. 11 x 3 lines)
This initializes following order. [0x04, 0x40, 0x03, 0x60, 0x64, 0xf4, 0x01,0x64, 0x04, 0xc8, 0x00]
6B3AE4(H) – Dial tone detection frequency – Upper limit (High)
Defaults: NA: 06, EU: 06, ASIA: 06
6B3AE5(H) – Dial tone detection frequency – Upper Limit (Low)
6B3AE6(H) – Dial tone detection frequency – Lower Limit (High)
6B3AE7(H) – Dial tone detection frequency – Lower Limit (Low)
6B3AE8(H) –Dial tone detection waiting time (20 ms)
Defaults: NA: 64, EU 64, ASIA: 64
6B3AE9 to 6B3AEA – Dial tone detection monitoring time (20 ms)
Defaults
Area 6B35A9 6B35AA
NA F4 01
EU F4 01
ASIA F4 01
6B3AEB(H) – Dial tone detect judge time (20 ms)
Defaults: NA: 64, EU: 1B, ASIA: 32
6B3AEC(H) – Dial tone disconnect permission time (20 ms)
Defaults: NA: 11, EU: 0F, ASIA: 11
D0CK 112 SM
Dedicated Transmission Parameters
4.10 DEDICATED TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS
There are two sets of transmission parameters: Fax and E-mail

Each Quick Dial Key and Speed Dial Code has eight bytes of programmable parameters allocated to it.
If transmissions to a particular machine often experience problems, store that terminal’s fax number as
a Quick Dial or Speed Dial, and adjust the parameters allocated to that number.
The programming procedure will be explained first. Then, the eight bytes will be described.
4.10.1 PROGRAMMING PROCEDURE

1. Set the bit 0 of System Bit Switch 00 to 1.
2. Enter Address Book Management mode ([User Tools] > [Machine Features] > [System Settings] >
[Key Operator] > [Address Book Management]).
3. Select the address book that you want to program.
4. For the fax parameter, select "Fax Dest.", for the E-mail parameter, select "E-mail", then press
"Start". Make sure that the LED of the Start button lights green.
5. The settings for the switch 00 are now displayed. Press the bit number that you wish to change.
6. To scroll through the parameter switches, either:
7. Select the next switch: press "Next" or Select the previous switch: "Prev." until the correct switch is
displayed. Then go back to step 6.
8. After the setting is changed, press "OK".
9. After finishing, reset bit 0 of System Bit Switch 00 to 0.
4.10.2 PARAMETERS
Fax Parameters
The initial settings of the following fax parameters are all FF(H) - all the parameters are disabled.
Switch 00
FUNCTION AND COMMENTS
ITU-T T1 time (for PSTN G3 mode)
If the connection time to a particular terminal is longer than the NCU parameter setting, adjust this
byte. The T1 time is the value stored in this byte (in hex code), multiplied by 1 second.
Range:
0 to 120 s (00h to 78h)
FFh - The local NCU parameter factory setting is used.
Do not program a value between 79h and FEh.
Switch 01
No FUNCTION COMMENTS
SM 113 D0CK
0- Tx level If communication with a particular remote terminal

4 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 often contains errors, the signal level may be
0 0 0 0 0 0 inappropriate. Adjust the Tx level for communications
0 0 0 0 1 –1 with that terminal until the results are better.
0 0 0 1 0 –2 If the setting is "Disabled", the NCU parameter 01
0 0 0 1 1 –3 setting is used.
0 0 1 0 0 –4
• Do not use settings other than listed on the
0 1 1 1 1 –15 left.
1 1 1 1 1 Disabled
5- Cable equalizer Use a higher setting if there is signal loss at higher
7 Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 0 = None frequencies because of the length of wire between
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0, Bit 5: 1 = Low the modem and the telephone exchange when calling
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 0 = Medium the number stored in this Quick/Speed Dial.
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 1 = High Also, try using the cable equalizer if one or more of
Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 1, Bit 5: 1 = Disabled the following symptoms occurs.
Communication error with error codes such as 0-20,
0-23, etc.
Modem rate fallback occurs frequently.
• Do not use settings other than listed on the

left.
If the setting is "Disabled", the bit switch setting is
used.
Switch 02
0- Initial Tx modem rate If training with a particular remote terminal always takes too
3 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0 bps long, the initial modem rate may be too high. Reduce the
0 0 0 0 Not initial Tx modem rate using these bits.
used For the settings 14.4 or kbps slower, Switch 04 bit 4 must
0 0 0 1 2400 be changed to 0.
0 0 1 0 4800
0 0 1 1 7200 • Do not use settings other than listed on the left. If
0 1 0 0 9600 the setting is "Disabled", the bit switch setting is
0 1 0 1 12000 used.
0 1 1 0 14400
0 1 1 1 16800
D0CK 114 SM
1 0 0 0 19200
1 0 0 1 21600
1 0 1 0 24000
1 0 1 1 26400
1 1 0 0 28800
1 1 0 1 31200
1 1 1 0 33600
1 1 1 1 Disabled

7
Switch 03
0- Inch-mm conversion If "inch only" is selected on the machine uses inch-based resolutions
1 before tx for scanning, the printed copy may be slightly distorted at the other
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 0 end if that machine uses mm-based resolutions.
= Inch-mm conversion If the setting is "Inch-mm conversion available ", Inch-mm conversion
available become effective to the special senders.
Bit 1: 0, Bit 0: 1 = Inch If the setting is "Disabled", the bit switch setting is used.
only
Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 0 = Not
used
Bit 1: 1, Bit 0: 1 =
Disabled
2- DIS/NSF detection (0, 1): Use this setting if echoes on the line are interfering with the set-
3 method up protocol at the start of transmission. The machine will then wait for
Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 0 the second DIS or NSF before sending DCS or NSS.
= First DIS or NSF If the setting is "Disabled", the bit switch setting is used.
Bit 3: 0, Bit 2: 1
= Second DIS or NSF
Bit 3: 1, Bit 2: 0 = Not
used
Bit 3: 1, Bit 2: 1 =
Disabled
4 V.8 protocol If transmissions to a specific destination always end at a lower modem
0: Off rate (14,400 bps or lower), disable V.8 protocol so as not to use V.34
1: Disabled protocol.
SM 115 D0CK
0: V.34 communication will not be possible.

If the setting is "Disabled", the bit switch setting is used.
5 Compression modes This bit determines the capabilities that are informed to the other
available in transmit terminal during transmission.
mode If the setting is "Disabled", the bit switch setting is used.
0: MH only
1: Disabled
6- ECM during For example, if ECM is switched on but is not wanted when sending to
7 transmission a particular terminal, use the (0, 0) setting.
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 0 = Off
Bit 7: 0, Bit 6: 1 = On • V.8/V.34 protocol and JBIG compression are automatically
Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 0 = Not disabled if ECM is disabled.
used • If the setting is "Disabled", the bit switch setting is used.
Bit 7: 1, Bit 6: 1 =
Disabled
Switch 04 - Not used (do not change the settings)

E-mail Parameters
The initial settings of the following e-mail parameters are all "0" (all parameters disabled).
Switch 00
0 MH Compression mode for e-mail Switches MH compression on and off for files attached
attachments to e-mails for sending.
0: Off
1: On
1 MR Compression mode for e-mail Switches MR compression on and off for files attached
0: Off
1: On
2 MMR Compression mode for e-mail Switches MMR compression on and off for files attached
0: Off
D0CK 116 SM
1: On
6
7 Designates the bits to reference for The "0" selection (default) references the settings for
compression method of e-mail Bits 00, 01, 02 above. The "1" selection ignores the
attachments selections of Bits 00, 01, 02.
0: Registered (Bit 0 to 6)
1: No registration.
Switch 01
0 Original width of e-mail Sets the original width of the e-mail attachment as A4.
attachment: A4
0: Off
1: On
1 Original width of e-mail Sets the original width of the e-mail attachment as B4.
attachment: B4
0: Off
1: On
2 Original width of e-mail Sets the original width of the e-mail attachment as A3.
attachment: A3
0: Off
1: On
6
7 Designates the bits to reference The "0" selection (default) references the settings for Bits
for original size of e-mail 00, 01, 02 above. The "1" selection ignores the selections
attachments of Bits 00, 01, 02.
1: No registration.
Switch 02
0 Line resolution of e-mail Sets the line resolution of the e-mail attachment as 200
attachment: 200 x 100 x100.
0: Off
1: On
1 Line resolution of e-mail Sets the line resolution of the e-mail attachment as 200 x
SM 117 D0CK
attachment: 200 x 200 200.

0: Off
1: On
0: Off
1: On
3 Not used Do not change these settings.
0: Off
1: On
6
7 Designates the bits to reference The "0" selection (default) references the settings for Bits
for original size of e-mail 00, 01, 02, 04 above. The "1" selection ignores the
attachments selections of Bits 00, 01, 02, 04.
1: No registration.
Switch 04
0 Full mode address If the other ends have the addresses, which have the full mode function
selection flag ("0"), this machine determines them as full mode standard machines.
0: Full mode • This machine attaches the "demand of reception confirmation" to a
address message when transmitting.
1: No full mode • This machine updates the reception capability to the address book
(simple mode) when receiving.
7
Switch 05
0 Direct transmission selection to SMTP Allows or does not allow the direct transmission to
server SMTP server.
0: ON
D0CK 118 SM
1: OFF
7

SM 119 D0CK
General Specifications
5. SPECIFICATIONS
5.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
5.1.1 FCU (PCB2)

Standard: Group 3
Resolution: 8 x 3.85 lines/mm, 200 x 100 dpi (Standard character)
8 x 7.7 lines/mm, 200 x 200 dpi (Detail character)
Transmissi 3 seconds at 28,800 bps, Standard resolution (JBIG transmission: 2 seconds)
on Time:
Data MH, MR, MMR, JBIG
Compressio
n:
Maximum Standard: A4 (SEF) or 8.5” x 14” (SEF)
Original Custom: 216 mm x 600 mm (8.5” x 23.6”)
Size:
Maximum 216 mm x 600 mm (8.5” x 23.6”)
Scanning
Size:
Print LED alley and electro-photographic printing
Process:
Transmissi 33,600/31,200/28,800/26,400/24,000/21,600/19,200/16,800/14,400/12,000/9,600/7,2
on speed: 00/4,800/2,400 bps (Auto shift down system)
Memory 4MB
Capacity:
5.1.2 CAPABILITIES OF PROGRAMMABLE ITEMS

The following table shows the capabilities of each programmable items.
Item Standard
Quick Dial 2000
Groups 100
Destination per Group 500
Programs 100
Communication records for Journal stored in the memory 200
Specific Senders 250
Memory Transmission file 800
D0CK 120 SM
General Specifications
Item Standard
Memory capacity for memory transmission (Note) 320
• Measured using an ITU-T #1 test document (Slerexe letter) at the standard resolution, the auto
image density mode and the Text mode.
SM 121 D0CK
IFAX Specifications
5.2 IFAX SPECIFICATIONS
Network: Standard: Ethernet interface (1000 Base-T/100 Base-TX/10 Base-T)

Optional: IEEE802.11a/b/g/n (Wireless LAN interface)
Transmit function: E-mail
Scan line density: • 200 × 100 dpi (Standard character)
• 200 × 200 dpi (Detail character)
Original Size (Scanning A4
width):
Communication Transmission: SMTP, TCP/IP
Protocol: Reception: POP3, SMTP, IMAP4, TCP/IP
E-mail Format: Single/Multi-part, MIME Conversion
Attached file forms: TIFF-F (MH, MR*1, MMR*1 compression)
Authentication method: SMTP-AUTH, POP before SMTP, A-POP
Internet communication: Send and receive e-mail with a computer that has an e-mail address
Encryption method: S/MIME
Internet Fax send Automatic conversion of sent documents to e-mail format and e-mail
functions: transmission. Memory transmission only.
Internet Fax receive Automatic detection and printing of appended TIFF-F (MH) files and
functions: ASCII text. Memory reception only.
*1 :Full mode
D0CK 122 SM
IP-FAX Specifications
5.3 IP-FAX SPECIFICATIONS
Network: Standard: Ethernet interface (1000 Base-T/100 Base-TX/10 Base-T)

Optional: IEEE802.11a/b/g/n wireless LAN interface
Scan line density: 8 x 3.85 lines/mm, 200 x 100 dpi (Standard character)
8 x 7.7 lines/mm, 200 x 200 dpi (Detail character)
Maximum Original size: Standard: A4 (SEF) or 8.5" x 14" (SEF)
Custom: 216 mm x 600 mm (8.5” x 23.6”)
Maximum scanning 216 mm x 600 mm (8.5” x 23.6”)
size:
Transmission protocol: Recommended: T.38, TCP, UDP/IP communication, SIP (RFC 3261
compliant), H.323 v2
Compatible machines: IP-Fax compatible machines
IP-Fax transmission Specify an IP address and send faxes to an IP-Fax compatible fax
function: through a network.
Also capable of sending faxes to a G3 fax connected to a telephone line
via a VoIP gateway.
IP-Fax reception Receive faxes sent from an IP-Fax compatible fax through a network.
function: Also capable of receiving faxes from a G3 fax connected to a telephone
line via a VoIP gateway.
SM 123 D0CK
Fax Unit Configuration
5.4 FAX UNIT CONFIGURATION
Component Code Callout Remarks

FCU (PCB2) 1 Included with the fax unit
Speaker D0CK02 2
Fax Connection Unit Type M41 D0CK - Optional
This is used to set up the remote fax function.
D0CK 124 SM
Paper Feed Unit PB1170
D3GQ
SERVICE MANUAL
Ver. 1.0

Rev. 10/14/2020
Symbols, Abbreviations and Trademarks
are as follows:
Clip ring
Screw
Connector
Clamp
Spring
SEF Short Edge Feed
LEF Long Edge Feed
K Black
C Cyan
M Magenta
Y Yellow
FC Full color

Trademarks
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any
use of such marks by Ricoh Company, Ltd. is under license.
Google, Android, and Chrome are trademarks of Google Inc.
Macintosh, OS X, Bonjour, Safari, and TrueType are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S.
and other countries.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, Windows Vista, Internet Explorer, and Outlook are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corp. in the United States and/or other countries.
countries.
This product includes RSA BSAFE® Cryptographic software of EMC Corporation. RSA and BSAFE are
registered trademarks or trademarks of EMC Corporation in the United States and other countries.
The proper names of Internet Explorer 11 is as follows:

Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Enterprise Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
Table of Contents
1. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ...........................................................2

1.1 OVERVIEW .......................................................................................................................2
1.2 PAPER TRANSPORT DRIVE ...........................................................................................5
1.3 SENSORS AND FRICTION PAD ......................................................................................6
1.4 TRAY LIFTING UP MECHANISM .....................................................................................7
2. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................8

2.1 BEFOREHAND..................................................................................................................8
2.2 REAR COVER ...................................................................................................................9
2.3 UPPER COVER ..............................................................................................................10
2.4 CONTROLLER BOARD (PCB1) ..................................................................................... 11
2.4.1 CONTROLLER BOARD (PCB1) WITH THE BRACKET...................................... 11
2.5 PAPER FEED ROLLER ..................................................................................................13
2.6 FRICTION PAD ...............................................................................................................14
2.7 VERTICAL TRANSPORT ROLLERS ..............................................................................15
2.7.1 VERTICAL TRANSPORT ROLLER (DRIVEN SIDE) ...........................................15
2.7.2 VERTICAL TRANSPORT ROLLER (DRIVING SIDE)..........................................15
2.8 PAPER END SENSOR (S2) / REMAINING PAPER SENSOR (S3)............................... 18
2.9 PAPER TRANSPORT SENSOR (S1) .............................................................................20
2.10 TRAY BOTTOM PLATE LIFT SENSOR AND HP SENSOR .................................... 21
2.10.1 TRAY BOTTOM PLATE LIFT SENSOR (S5) .......................................................21
2.10.2 TRAY BOTTOM PLATE HP SENSOR (S4)..........................................................21
2.11TRAY SET SENSOR (SW2) ............................................................................................23
2.12 COVER SENSOR (SW1) .........................................................................................24
2.13 TRAY LIFT MOTOR (M2) .........................................................................................25
2.14 PAPER TRANSPORT MOTOR (M1) ........................................................................26
2.15 PAPER TRANSPORT CLUTCH (CL1) AND PAPER FEED CLUTCH (CL2)........... 27
SM 1 D3GQ
Overview
1.1 OVERVIEW

[A] Side Fence [I] Paper Transport Sensor (S1)
[B] End Fence [J] Cover Sensor (SW1)
[C] Tray Bottom Plate Lift Sensor (S5) [K] Friction Pad
[D] Tray Bottom Plate HP Sensor (S4) [L] Tray Set Sensor (SW2)
[E] Paper End Sensor (S2) [M] Bottom Plate Lift lever
[F] Remaining Paper Sensor (S3) [N] Tray Bottom Plate
[G] Paper Feed Roller [O] Anti-condensation Heater (Option)
[H] Vertical Transport Roller [P] Paper Tray
D3GQ 2 SM
Overview

[A] Anti-condensation Heater (Option) [D] Paper Feed Clutch (CL2)
[B] Controller Board (PCB1) [E] Tray Lift Motor (M2)
[C] Paper transport Motor (M1) - -

[A] Tray Bottom Plate Lift Sensor (S5) [E] Tray Set Sensor (SW2)
[B] Tray Bottom Plate HP Sensor (S4) [F] Paper End Sensor (S2)
SM 3 D3GQ
Overview

[C] Paper Transport Clutch (CL1) [G] Remaining Paper Sensor (S3)
[D] Cover Sensor (SW1) [H] Paper Transport Sensor (S1)
D3GQ 4 SM
Paper Transport Drive
1.2 PAPER TRANSPORT DRIVE
The paper transport motor (M1) [A] drives the paper feed clutch (CL2) [C] and the paper transport
clutch (CL1) [B] through gears. The operation timing of each clutch is as follows.
1. The paper feed clutch (CL2) [C] is turned on until the paper transport clutch (CL1) [B] starts to rotate.
2. The paper transport clutch (CL1) [B] is turned on until the paper reaches the mainframe. The paper
transport sensor (S1) detects whether or not the paper reaches the mainframe.

[A] Paper transport Motor (M1) [D] Vertical Transport Roller
[B] Paper Transport Clutch (CL1) [E] Paper Feed Roller
[C] Paper Feed Clutch (CL2) - -
SM 5 D3GQ
Sensors and Friction Pad
1.3 SENSORS AND FRICTION PAD
Only one actuator is used for detecting paper end and remaining paper.
The front side of the actuator is for the paper end sensor (S2) [A], and the rear side of the actuator is for
the remaining paper sensor (S3) [B].
The paper transport sensor (S1) [E] acts as a paper feed sensor.
This machine uses the friction pad method (same as the mainframe).

[A] Paper End Sensor (S2) [D] Vertical Transport Roller
[B] Remaining Paper Sensor (S3) [E] Paper Transport Sensor (S1)
[C] Paper Feed Roller [F] Friction Pad
D3GQ 6 SM
Tray Lifting up Mechanism
1.4 TRAY LIFTING UP MECHANISM
The pressure of the tray bottom plate [F] can be adjusted depending on the amount of paper remaining.
The drive of the tray lift motor raises the tray bottom plate [F] via the tray bottom plate pressure lever
[A], the pressing spring, and the tray bottom plate lift lever [E].
The pulses from the lift lever encoder [C] are detected by the tray bottom plate lift sensor (S5) [B]. The
tray lift motor is controlled based on the pulses from the encoder.

[A] Tray Bottom Plate Pressure Lever [D] Tray Bottom Plate HP Sensor (S4)
[B] Tray Bottom Plate Lift Sensor (S5) [E] Tray Bottom Plate Lift Lever
[C] Lift Lever Encoder [F] Tray Bottom Plate
SM 7 D3GQ
Beforehand
2.1 BEFOREHAND

If there is a fax unit in the machine, print out all messages stored in the memory, the lists of
user-programmed items, and the system parameter list.
Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord, the telephone line, and the network
cable.
• Do not lift the machine together with one or more paper feed unit(s):
If there is already a machine with one or more optional paper feed unit(s), be sure to
moving/transporting. Otherwise, the handle of the paper feed unit breaks which can cause an
injury, because the handle cannot hold the mainframe’s weight.
• Always touch a grounded surface to discharge static electricity from your hands before you
handle SD cards, printed circuit boards, or memory boards.
D3GQ 8 SM
Rear Cover
2.2 REAR COVER
SM 9 D3GQ
Upper Cover
2.3 UPPER COVER
1. Remove the machine from the optional tray.

2. Remove the upper cover [A].
D3GQ 10 SM
Controller Board (PCB1)
2.4 CONTROLLER BOARD (PCB1)
1. Remove the rear cover (Rear Cover)

2. Remove the rear stay [A].
3. Remove the controller board (PCB1) [A].
2.4.1 CONTROLLER BOARD (PCB1) WITH THE BRACKET

SM 11 D3GQ
Controller Board (PCB1)
3. Remove the controller board (PCB1) with the bracket [A].
D3GQ 12 SM
Paper Feed Roller
2.5 PAPER FEED ROLLER
Before Replacing the Paper Feed Roller
Before replacing the paper feed roller, reset the PM counter.

2. Reset the PM counter. (Refer to Chapter 3 "Replacement Procedure of the PM/Yield Parts" of
Field Service Manual)
Replacing the Paper Feed Roller

• Remove all clips on the shaft and move the roller [A] to the right side [1]. ( × 6, Bushing × 1)
• Move the shaft to the right, and pull out the shaft from the bushing at the left side.
• Lift up the shaft [2] and remove the shaft from the bushing at the right side.
• Remove the roller [B].
• Remove the paper feed roller [C]
SM 13 D3GQ
Friction Pad
2.6 FRICTION PAD
Before Replacing the Friction Pad
Before replacing the friction pad, reset the PM counter.

2. Reset the PM counter. (Refer to Chapter 3 "Replacement Procedure of the PM/Yield Parts" of
Field Service Manual)
Replacing the Friction Pad
1. Remove the paper feed roller. (Paper Feed Roller)

2. Remove the friction pad [A]. (Hooks × 2, × 1)
When reinstalling the friction pad:
• To prevent the friction pad from catching on the sheet [A], place the friction pad while
bending the sheet slightly outward.
D3GQ 14 SM
Vertical Transport Rollers
2.7 VERTICAL TRANSPORT ROLLERS
2.7.1 VERTICAL TRANSPORT ROLLER (DRIVEN SIDE)

1. Open the vertical transport cover [A].
2. Remove the vertical transport roller [A]. (Hooks × 2)
2.7.2 VERTICAL TRANSPORT ROLLER (DRIVING SIDE)

1. Remove the upper cover. (Upper Cover)
2. Remove the paper transport motor. (Paper Transport Motor (M1))
SM 15 D3GQ
3. Remove the stay [A]
4. Remove the sensor bracket [A] and grounding plate [B], and then loosen the discharge plate [C].
5. Remove the two bearings [A] and shaft [B] with the vertical transport roller.
D3GQ 16 SM
6. Remove the vertical transport roller (Driving side) [A]. (Bearing × 1)
SM 17 D3GQ
Paper End Sensor (S2) / Remaining Paper Sensor (S3)
2.8 PAPER END SENSOR (S2) / REMAINING PAPER SENSOR
(S3)

2. Remove the paper end sensor assembly [A].
3. Remove the feeler [A]. (Snap points × 2)
D3GQ 18 SM
Paper End Sensor (S2) / Remaining Paper Sensor (S3)
4. Remove the paper end sensor (S2) [A] and remaining paper sensor (S3) [B]. (hooks × 3 each)
SM 19 D3GQ
Paper Transport Sensor (S1)
2.9 PAPER TRANSPORT SENSOR (S1)
1. Remove the grounding plate and cover sensor bracket. (Cover Sensor (SW1))
2. Remove the paper transport sensor with bracket [A].
3. Remove the paper transport sensor (S1) [A]. (Hooks × 3)
4. Remove the antistatic cover [A] form the paper transport sensor (S1).
D3GQ 20 SM
Tray Bottom Plate Lift Sensor and HP Sensor
2.10 TRAY BOTTOM PLATE LIFT SENSOR AND HP SENSOR
2.10.1 TRAY BOTTOM PLATE LIFT SENSOR (S5)

1. Remove the tray lift motor (M2) (Tray Lift Motor (M2))
2. Remove the tray bottom plate lift sensor with the bracket [A]. ( × 1, × 2)
3. Remove the tray bottom plate lift sensor (S5) [A] (Hooks × 3)
2.10.2 TRAY BOTTOM PLATE HP SENSOR (S4)

1. Remove the paper feed gear assembly (Paper Transport Clutch (CL1) and Paper Feed Clutch
(CL2))
SM 21 D3GQ
Tray Bottom Plate Lift Sensor and HP Sensor
2. Remove the tray bottom plate HP sensor (S4) with the bracket [A] ( × 1, × 2)
3. Remove the tray bottom plate HP sensor (S4) [A]. (Hooks × 3)
D3GQ 22 SM
Tray Set Sensor (SW2)
2.11 TRAY SET SENSOR (SW2)

2. Pull out the tray set sensor (SW2) [A] from the front while releasing the hooks (Hooks × 2).
SM 23 D3GQ
Cover Sensor (SW1)
2.12 COVER SENSOR (SW1)

3. Remove the stay [A], the sensor bracket [B] and grounding plate [C].
4. Remove the cover sensor (SW1) [A]. (Hooks × 2)
D3GQ 24 SM
Tray Lift Motor (M2)
2.13 TRAY LIFT MOTOR (M2)
1. Remove the rear cover (Rear Cover)

3. Remove the controller board (PCB1) with bracket. (Controller Board (PCB1) with the Bracket)
4. Remove the tray lift motor (M2) [A].
SM 25 D3GQ
Paper Transport Motor (M1)
2.14 PAPER TRANSPORT MOTOR (M1)

3. Remove the paper transport motor (M1) [A].
D3GQ 26 SM
Paper Transport Clutch (CL1) and Paper Feed Clutch (CL2)
2.15 PAPER TRANSPORT CLUTCH (CL1) AND PAPER FEED
CLUTCH (CL2)
1. Remove the paper transport motor. (Paper Transport Motor (M1))

2. Remove the paper feed gear assembly [A].
3. Remove all screws, clips, clamps, e-rings and bearings.

4. Pull out the wedges [A].
1: Front
2: Rear
SM 27 D3GQ
Paper Transport Clutch (CL1) and Paper Feed Clutch (CL2)
5. Remove the heat dissipation plate [A].
6. Pull out the Paper transport clutch (CL1) [A] and paper feed clutch (CL2) [B] from the bracket.
• Refer to the above photo when reassembling the paper feed gear assembly.
D3GQ 28 SM
1 Bin Tray BN1040
D574
SERVICE MANUAL
Ver. 1.0

Rev. 10/14/2020
Symbols, Abbreviations and Trademarks
Trademarks
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any
use of such marks by Ricoh Company, Ltd. is under license.
Google, Android, and Chrome are trademarks of Google Inc.
Macintosh, OS X, Bonjour, Safari, and TrueType are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S.
and other countries.
Microsoft, Windows, Windows Server, Windows Vista, Internet Explorer, and Outlook are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corp. in the United States and/or other countries.
countries.
This product includes RSA BSAFE® Cryptographic software of EMC Corporation. RSA and BSAFE are
registered trademarks or trademarks of EMC Corporation in the United States and other countries.
The proper names of Internet Explorer 11 is as follows:

Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 Enterprise Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Standard Edition
Microsoft® Windows Server® 2003 R2 Enterprise Edition
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might be trademarks of their
respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to those marks.
are as follows:
Screw
Connector
Clamp
SEF Short Edge Feed
LEF Long Edge Feed
K Black
C Cyan
M Magenta
Y Yellow
FC Full color

Table of Contents
1. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ...........................................................2

OVERVIEW ..............................................................................................................................2
ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS ................................................................................................3
PAPER EXIT FROM 1-BIN TRAY UNIT...................................................................................4
2. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ............................................5

BEFOREHAND ........................................................................................................................5
1-BIN TRAY PAPER REMAINING SENSOR ...........................................................................6
1-BIN TRAY EXIT SENSOR.....................................................................................................7
1-BIN LED BOARD ..................................................................................................................8
SM 1 D574
Overview
1.1 OVERVIEW

[A] Paper Exit Tray [D] Paper Exit Roller
[B] 1-Bin Tray Paper Remaining Sensor [E] 1-Bin Tray Exit Sensor
[C] 1-Bin LED Board - -
D574 2 SM
1.2 ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

[A] 1-Bin Tray Paper Remaining Sensor [C] 1-Bin LED Board
[B] 1-Bin Tray Exit Sensor - -
SM 3 D574
Paper Exit from 1-Bin Tray Unit
1.3 PAPER EXIT FROM 1-BIN TRAY UNIT
The paper from the paper exit section is transported to the 1-bin unit.
This uses the same transport path as usual even if duplex is used.
The1-bin tray paper remaining sensor [A] detects the fed out paper, and the LED [B] blinks to inform
users that there is paper on the 1-bin tray after the end of the job.
The 1-bin tray exit sensor [C] detects paper jams in the 1-bin tray.

[A] 1-Bin Tray Paper Remaining Sensor [C] 1-Bin Tray Exit Sensor
[B] 1-Bin LED Board - -
D574 4 SM
Beforehand
2.1 BEFOREHAND

If there is a fax unit in the machine, print out all messages stored in the memory, the lists of
user-programmed items, and the system parameter list.
Turn off the main switch and disconnect the power cord, the telephone line, and the network
cable.
• Always touch a grounded surface to discharge static electricity from your hands before you
handle SD cards, printed circuit boards, or memory boards.
SM 5 D574
1-Bin Tray Paper Remaining Sensor
2.2 1-BIN TRAY PAPER REMAINING SENSOR
1. Remove the 1-bin tray unit. (See “1 Bin Tray BN1040” in the mainframe service manual)
2. Remove the 1-bin tray upper cover [A].
3. Remove the 1-bin tray paper remaining sensor bracket [A].
4. Remove the 1-bin tray paper remaining sensor [A].
5. Remove the antistatic cover from the the 1-bin tray paper remaining sensor.
D574 6 SM
1-Bin Tray Exit Sensor
2.3 1-BIN TRAY EXIT SENSOR
1. Remove the 1-bin tray unit. (See “1 Bin Tray BN1040” in the mainframe service manual)
2. Remove the 1-bin tray upper cover. (1-Bin Tray Paper Remaining Sensor)
3. Remove the 1-bin tray exit sensor bracket [A]. ( × 2)
4. Remove the 1-bin tray exit sensor [A]. ( × 1, hooks)
5. Remove the antistatic cover form the 1-bin tray exit sensor [A].
SM 7 D574
1-Bin LED Board
2.4 1-BIN LED BOARD
1. Remove the 1-Bin tray unit. (See “1-Bin Tray BN1040” in the mainframe service manual)
2. Remove the 1-bin LED board cover [A].
3. Remove the 1-bin LED board [A].
D574 8 SM

Service Manual: D0CA/D0C9/ D0C8/D0CB

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual: D0CA/D0C9/ D0C8/D0CB

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Service Manual: D0CA/D0C9/ D0C8/D0CB

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

D0CA/D0C9/

NO PART OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE REPRODUCED IN ANY

All product names, domain names or product illustrations, including

 2021 RICOH USA, Inc. All rights reserved.

Ricoh USA, Inc.

1. PRODUCT INFORMATION ......................................................... 1-1

2. INSTALLATION ........................................................................... 2-1

3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE ................................................... 3-1

4. REPLACEMENT AND ADJUSTMENT ........................................ 4-1

5. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE ........................................................... 5-1

6. TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................ 6-1

7. DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ....................................................... 7-1

8. SMART OPERATION PANEL ..................................................... 8-1

Symbols and Abbreviations

[A] Short Edge Feed (SEF)

The proper names of Internet Explorer 9, 10, and 11 are as follows:

1.1 DIFFERENCES BETWEEN IM C300/C400 AND MP

Items IM C300 /C400 series MP C307/C407

1.2 MACHINE CODES AND PERIPHERALS

1.2.2 MACHINE CONFIGURATION

Item Machine Code Remarks New Option?

Item Machine Code Remarks New Option?

NA = North America, EU = Europe, AA = Asia-Pacific, CHN = China, TWN = Taiwan, KOR =

Item Machine Code Remarks New

See "Appendices" for the following information:

2.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

1. Temperature Range: 10°C to 32°C (50°F to 89.6°F)

2.1.2 MACHINE LEVEL

2.1.3 MACHINE SPACE REQUIREMENTS

A IM C300 series / IM C400F: Over 7 cm (2.75")

2.1.4 MACHINE DIMENSIONS

Main unit only

When the 1-bin tray is installed

When the operation panel is upright: 825 x 561 mm

Callout mm (inch) Callout mm (inch)

Callout mm (inch) Callout mm (inch)

Callout mm (inch) Callout mm (inch)

Callout mm (inch) Note

2.1.5 POWER REQUIREMENTS

• Insert the plug firmly into the outlet.

2.2 MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION: IMPORTANT

NOTICE ON SECURITY ISSUES

2.2.2 PASSWORD SETTING PROCEDURE

3. Input the password, and then press [OK].

5. Change the administrator 1 login password.

2.3 MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION: ACCESSORY

2.3.1 FOR IM C300/C300F

Description Remark Q’ty

2.3.2 FOR IM C400F/C400SRF

2.4 MAIN MACHINE INSTALLATION: INSTALLATION

2.4.1 INSTALLATION FLOWCHART

IM C300 series/IM C400F

5. Open the front cover [A].

• Do not remove the packaging tape [A] at this time.

7. Do the following procedure to remove the waste toner bottle.

9. Set the lever [A] to the upright position.

10. Attach the waste toner bottle.

12. Shake each toner bottle five or six times.

13. Install each toner bottle [A] in the machine.